New Holland Tractor TC40 Serv Manual

SECTION 00 - GENERAL INFORMATION
BOOK 1
Chapter 1 - General Information
CONTENTS
Section Description Page

00 000 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-2
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-3
Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-4
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-5
Safety Decals - TC35, 40, 45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-8
Instruction Decals - TC35, 40, 45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-9
Safety Decals - TC35D, 40D, 45D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-12
Instruction Decals - TC35D, 40D, 45D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-13
International Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-17
Specifications - TC35, 40, 45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-18
General Dimensions - TC35, 40, 45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-25
Specifications - TC35D, 40D, 45D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-31
General Dimensions - TC35D, 40D, 45D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-37
Minimum Hardware Tightening Torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-41
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-43
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-44
00 400 Recommended Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-44
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-45
Tire Inflation Pressure - Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-45
00 100 Pre-Season and Pre-Delivery Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-46
SECTION 10 - ENGINE
BOOK 1
Chapter 1 - Engine
CONTENTS

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Metric Bolt Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Description of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
10 101 Cylinder Head Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
10 106 Timing Gears and Camshaft Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
10 102 Oil Sump Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
10 110 Balancer Assembly-Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
10 105 Connecting Rods, Bearings, and Pistons, Rings Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
10 103 Flywheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Disassembly, Inspection, Fits, Clearances, and
Assembly of Component Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
10 101 Cylinder Head Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
10 105 Pistons, Piston Rings, and Connecting Rods Disassembly and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
10 103 Crankshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
10 106 Timing Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
10 103 Flywheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
10 102 Timing Gear Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Engine Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
10 103 Crankshaft and Bearing Holder Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
10 105 Pistons and Connecting Rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
10 110 Balancer Assembly-Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
10 106 Timing Gear Cover, TIming Gears, and Camshaft Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82
10 106 Idler Gear, Oil Pump, and Injection Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
10 101 Head Gasket Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
10 106 Valve Clearance Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87
10 218 Fuel Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
Engine Lubrication System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91
10 304 Engine Lubrication System - Description of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91
10 218 Fuel Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91
10 206 Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95
10 304 Oil Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99
10 400 Cooling System - Description of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99
10 402 Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-102
10 402 Water Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-102
10 414 Cooling Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-102
Cooling System Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-103
10 406 Radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-103
10 402 Water Pump Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-105
10 402 Thermostat Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-108
SECTION 10 -- ENGINE
BOOK 1
Chapter 2 -- Fuel Systems
CONTENT

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-112
Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-113
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-113
10 242 Description of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-114
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-116
10 244 Fuel Variation Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-121
10 244 CTD (Compact Timing Device) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-122
10 236 Pumping Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-124
10 214 Delivery Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-126
10 242 Injection Pump Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-128
10 230 Timing and Governor Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-131
Spill-Timing Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-132
Auto Bleed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-137
Bleeding to Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-138
Fuel Scre/High Idle Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-138
10 230 Governor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-139
10 218 Injectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-145
SECTION 18 - CLUTCH
BOOK 1
Chapter 1 -- Clutch
CONTENTS

18 000 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
Bolt Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
Description of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-6
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7
18 110 Clutch Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-13
18 110 Clutch Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-14
18 110 Clutch Related Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-21
Clutch Linkage Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-24
18 100 Clutch Cross Shaft Bushings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-24
Clutch Pedal Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-27
Clutch Pedal Maximum Travel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-27
SECTION 21 -- TRANSMISSION
BOOK 1
Chapter 1 -- 12 x 12 Synchronized Shuttle Shift

Gear Transmission
CONTENT

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2
Metric Bolt Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-4
21 000 Description of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-5
Powerflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-8
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-13
21 110 10 Overhaul - Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-13
21 114 Separating at the Clutch Housing/Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-13
Clutch Housing Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-19
21 148 63 Retainer Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-23
21 148 63 Main Shift Rails and Shift Forks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-24
21 148 63 Main Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-27
21 148 63 Range Shift Rail and Shift Fork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-30
21 148 63 Range Gear Countershaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-31
21 148 63 Input Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-32
21 148 63 Reverse Idler Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-33
21 148 63 Shuttle Shift Rail and Fork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-35
21 148 63 Main Countershaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-36
21 148 63 Synchronizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-38
21 148 63 Input Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-45
21 148 63 Main Countershaft End Float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-46
21 148 63 Range Shift Rail and Fork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-47
21 148 63 Main Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-48
21 148 63 Main Shaft End Float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-51
21 110 10 Clutch Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-56
21 130 Transmission Shift Levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-67
SECTION 23 - DRIVELINE
BOOK 1
Chapter 1 -- Driveline
CONTENTS

23 000 Bolt Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-3
Front Wheel Drive Take Off Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-4
Sensitrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-5
Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-9
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-10
Front Wheel Drive Take Off Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-10
23 260 Sensitrack Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-14
23 260 Sensitrack Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-31
SECTION 25 - 4WD FRONT AXLE, SUPERSTEERt
AND SENSITRACKt
BOOK 2
Chapter 1 - 4WD Front Axle, Supersteert and Sensitrackt

CONTENTS

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-3
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-6
4WD Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-7
Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-10
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-11
25 108 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-12
25 102 Front Axle and Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-15
Drive Pinion Diassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-16
Drive Pinion Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-17
Drive Pinion Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-18
Differential Gear Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-18
Axle and Differential Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-19
Differential Case Bearing Preload Check and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-20
Ring Gear-to-Pinion Backlash Check and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-20
25 108 Gear Reduction Box Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-23
Bevel Gear-to-Pinion Backlash Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-26
25 100 Supersteert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-27
Supersteert Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-30
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-33
25 100 Supersteert Axle Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-35
Gear Reduction-Drop Box Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-40
25 102 Front Axle and Differential Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-42
Drive Pinion Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-43
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-44
25 102 Axle and Differential Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-46
Supersteert Axle Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-53
SECTION 27 - DIFFERENTIAL, REAR AXLE

BOOK 2
Chapter 1 -- Differential, Rear Axle
CONTENTS

27 000 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-3
27 110 Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-5
27 110 Differential Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-5
27 126 Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-6
27 106 Differential Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-7
27 126 Rear Axle Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-16
27 126 Final Pinion Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-25
SECTION 29 -- HYDROSTATIC TRANSMISSION
BOOK 2
Chapter 1 -- Hydrostatic Transmission
CONTENT

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-2
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-4
29 212 Variable Displacement Pump Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-11
29 212 Two Position Displacement Motor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-12
29 134 Hi/Lo Speed Control/Control Pod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-13
29 200 Foot Control Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-13
Pressure Testing and Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-19
Separating the Tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-23
TC35D, TC40D, and TC45D w/HST Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-23
29 202 Hydrostatic Transmission Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-44
29 130 Port Block Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-47
29 218 Cylinder Block Assembly for Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-50
29 218 Cylinder Block Assembly for Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-51
29 130 Port Block Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-52
29 204 Check Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-54
29 300 Hydrostatic Transmission Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-55
Gearbox Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-56
29 214 Hi/Lo Solenoid Valve Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-68
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-76
Electromagnet Air Gap Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-77
29 200 HST Foot Control Pedals Neutral Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-78
SECTION 31 -- POWER TAKE-OFF (PTO) SYSTEMS
BOOK 2
Chapter 1 -- Power Take-Off (PTO) Systems
CONTENT

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-2
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-4
31 110 Rear PTO-Power Flow Diagram -- 12x12 Synchronized Shuttle Shift Transmission . . . 31-6
31 110 Rear PTO-Power Flow Diagram -- Hydrostatic Transmission (HST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-7
31 120 Mid PTO-Power Flow Diagram -- Tractors Equipped with a Mid PTO Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-8
31 104 Hydraulic Fluid Flow to the PTO Clutch Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-9
Pressure Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-13
31 104 82 Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-15
31 104 82 PTO Clutch Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-18
31 114 62 PTO Clutch Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-23
31 114 68 PTO Clutch Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-26
31 114 62 PTO Clutch Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-34
31 114 42 PTO System Overhaul -- 12x12 Synchronized Shuttle Shift Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 31-38
31 114 46 PTO Countershaft and Rear PTO Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-40
31 114 46 Countershaft Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-42
31 114 00 PTO System Overhaul -- Hydrostatic Transmission (HST) -- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-47
31 114 42 PTO Input Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-47
31 114 42 PTO Countershaft and Rear PTO Shaft -- Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-53
31 114 19 PTO Countershaft and Rear PTO Shaft -- Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-57
31 120 00 Mid PTO Countershaft and Drop Box Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-60
SECTION 33 - BRAKES
BOOK 2
Chapter 1 -- Brakes
CONTENTS

33 000 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-2
33 120 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-4
31 120 Brake Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-5
33 110 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-6
33 120 Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-7
Brake Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-12
SECTION 35 -- HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
BOOK 2
Chapter 1 -- Hydraulic System

CONTENT

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-2
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-4
35 180 Combination System Relief - Diverter Valve Manifold Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-8
35 200 Control Valve Assembly (HPL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-9
35 210 Neutral Position - Fluid Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-10
35 210 Raising Position - Fluid Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-11
35 210 Lowering Position - Fluid Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-12
35 200 Bypass Spool - Fluid Flow - Closed Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-13
35 200 Bypass Spool - Fluid Flow - Open Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-13
35 183 Flow Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-14
35 108 Linkage Operation - Single Lever - Position Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-14
35 108 Position Control Operation - Neutral Position to Raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-15
35 112 Linkage Operation - Dual Lever Position Control (Draft Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-16
35 124 Linkage Operation - Combining Position and Draft Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-18
35 110 Hydraulic System Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-23
35 200 Hydraulic Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-34
35 180 Combination System Relief and Diverter Valve Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-38
35 182 PTO System Diverter Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-41
35 124 Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-44
35 304 Hydraulic Pump and Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-45
35 304 Hydraulic Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-46
35 300 Sump Tube and Screen Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-52
35 204 Remote Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-55
35 184 Front (Double-Spool) Remote Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-61
35 184 Fluid Flow - Bucket Control - Dumping and Lift Control - Neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-62
35 184 Fluid Flow - Bucket Control - Dumping Regen and Lift Control - Neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-63
35 184 Fluid Flow - Bucket Control - Roll Back and Lift Control - Neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-64
35 184 Fluid Flow - Bucket Control - Neutral and Lift Control - Raising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-65
35 184 Fluid Flow - Bucket Control - Neutral and Lift Control - Lowering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-66
35 184 Fluid Flow - Bucket Control - Neutral and Lift Control - Float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-67
35 204 Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-68
35 184 Front (Double Spool) Remote Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-70
SECTION 41 - STEERING
BOOK 3
Chapter 1 -- Steering
CONTENTS

41 000 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-2
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-4
Description of Operation - Supersteer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-5
Description of Operation - Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-7
41 204 Power Steering Control Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-9
41 206 Power Steering Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-10
41 216 Steering Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-10
41 216 Power Steering Cylinders - 2WD and Standard 4WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-11
41 206 Power Steering Operation - Supersteer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-12
41 200 Fluid Flow - Left Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-13
41 200 Fluid Flow - Right Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-14
41 200 Manual Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-15
41 200 Power Steering Operation - 2WD and Standard 4WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-16
Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-24
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-25
41 204 Steering Control Motor Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-25
41 204 Steering Control Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-41
41 216 Steering Cylinder Removal - 4WD and Supersteer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-42
41 216 Steering Cylinder Removal - 2WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-43
41 216 Steering Cylinder Installation - 4WD and Supersteer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-52
41 216 Steering Cylinder Installation - 2WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-54
41 206 Power Steering Pump and Reservoir Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-56
41 206 Pump Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-58
Steering Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-59
SECTION 44 - 2WD FRONT AXLE
BOOK 3
Chapter 1 - 2WD Front Axle
CONTENTS

44 000 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44-2
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44-5
44 103 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44-12
SECTION 55 - ELECTRICAL
BOOK 3
Chapter 1 -- Electrical
CONTENTS

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-4
55 100 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-4
Component Location and Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-4
55 100 Wire Harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-6
Electrical System Components -- Description and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-7
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-7
Main Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-9
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-10
Key Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-11
Light Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-13
55 404 Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-18
55 404 Taillight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-19
Rear Work Light (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-19
Hazard Light Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-20
Hazard Light Switch Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-21
55 408 Transmission Range Safety Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-23
Transmission Range Safety Switch Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-24
55 408 Rear (Main) PTO Safety Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-25
Rear (Main) PTO Safety Switch Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-25
55 408 Mid PTO Safety Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-26
55 408 Seat Safety Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-27
55 408 Parking Brake Safety Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-29
Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-30
Headlight and Neutral Start Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-33
Diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-36
Operator Safety Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-38
Glow Plug Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-40
55 201 Engine Glow Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-41
NASO Hazard/Directional Signal Converter and Flasher Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-44
55 410 Fuel Level Sending Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-47
Fuel Shutoff Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-50
55 414 Engine Oil Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-52
Engine Coolant Temperature Switch (Economy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-53
Engine Coolant Temperature Sending Unit (Deluxe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-53
Hi/Low Transmission Range Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-55
Hi/Low Transmission Range Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-58
Electric Cruise Control Switch (Deluxe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-61
Cruise Control Magnet (Deluxe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-63
Cruise Control Brake Release Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-65
Instrument Panel -- Component Operation and Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-67
Instrument Panel (Economy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-68
Instrument Panel (Deluxe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-69
Instrument Panel Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-70
Instrument Panel Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-70
Fuel Gauge Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-70
Fuel Gauge Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-70
Temperature Gauge Removal (Deluxe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-72
Temperature Gauge Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-72
Tachometer Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-73
Tachometer Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-74
PTO Speed Indicator Adjustment (Deluxe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-74
Instrument Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-75
Circuit Diagrams and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-77
Alternator Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-170
Alternator Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-171
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-173
55 301 Description of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-173
Preliminary Alternator Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-176
Alternator Component Testing and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-182
Starter Motor Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-192
Starter Motor Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-193
55 201 Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-195
Description of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-195
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-195
Electrical Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-205
SECTION 90 - PLATFORM
BOOK 3
Chapter 1 - Platform
CONTENTS

90 105 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-2
90 100 Rear Hood Side Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-4
90 110 Dash Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-6
90 120 Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-11
90 114 ROPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-30
Fuel Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-34
90 116 Fenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-36
90 115 Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-40
Chapter 1 - General Information
CONTENTS

00 000 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-2
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-3
Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-4
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-5
Safety Decals - TC35, 40, 45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-8
Instruction Decals - TC35, 40, 45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-9
Safety Decals - TC35D, 40D, 45D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-12
Instruction Decals - TC35D, 40D, 45D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-13
International Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-17
Specifications - TC35, 40, 45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-18
General Dimensions - TC35, 40, 45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-25
Specifications - TC35D, 40D, 45D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-31
General Dimensions - TC35D, 40D, 45D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-37
Minimum Hardware Tightening Torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-41
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-43
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-44
00 400 Recommended Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-44
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-45
Tire Inflation Pressure - Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-45
00 100 Pre-Season and Pre-Delivery Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-46
00-1
INTRODUCTION
This repair manual provides the technical informa- On New Holland equipment, left and right are
tion needed to properly service the New Holland determined by standing behind the unit, looking in
TC35, TC35D, TC40, TC40D, TC45 and TC45D the direction of travel.
tractors. Use this manual in conjunction with the
operator’s manual for complete operation, adjust-
ment, and maintenance information.
00-2
PRECAUTIONARY STATEMENTS
PERSONAL SAFETY
Throughout this manual and on machine decals, you will find precautionary statements (“CAUTION”,
“WARNING”, and “DANGER”) followed by specific instructions. These precautions are intended for the personal
safety of you and those working with you. Please take the time to read them.
CAUTION
The word “CAUTION” is used where a safe behavioral practice according to operating and maintenance
instructions and common safety practices will protect the operator and others from accident
involvement.
DANGER
The word “DANGER” denotes a forbidden practice in connection with a serious hazard.
WARNING
The word “WARNING” denotes a potential or hidden hazard which has a potential for serious injury. It
is used to warn operators and others to exercise every appropriate means to avoid a surprise
involvement with machinery.
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE “CAUTION”, “WARNING”, AND “DANGER” INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
SERIOUS BODILY INJURY OR DEATH.
MACHINE SAFETY
The precautionary statement (“IMPORTANT”) is followed by specific instructions. This statement is intended for
machine safety.
IMPORTANT: The word “IMPORTANT” is used to inform the reader of something he needs to know to prevent
minor machine damage if a certain procedure is not followed.
00-3
TECHNICAL INFORMATION
HARDWARE
GENERAL Approximately 90% of the torque applied during
The TC35, TC35D, TC40, TC40D, TC45 and TC45D assembly goes to overcoming friction between the
tractors have been built using metric hardware. parts. The other 10% is used to tension (stretch) the
bolt. After assembly, the frictional forces disappear,
NOTE: Be sure to use the hardware specified when which is the basis for the saying “If it does not fail
using tapped holes, as trying to install a metric bolt in during assembly, it will not fail in service.” The bolt
an inch thread, or an inch bolt in a metric thread, will may later fail due to other factors, but not from being
damage the thread. over tightened.
Certain hardware must be tightened to specific

torque specifications. If specific torque specifications LOCKNUTS
are not noted, tighten the hardware to the standard Most locknuts are coated with a special lubricant that
torque chart specification listed in this manual. is dry to the touch. Anytime a locknut is used, a lower
than normal torque is required. Refer to the torque
charts in this manual for specific values.
PLATING
Hardware used on New Holland balers is plated with
zinc chromate (gold color). Gold colored hardware JAM NUTS
has different torquing requirements from unplated or When using a jam nut to lock a regular nut, the jam
zinc plated (silver color) hardware because of the nut should be installed first and tightened to one half
difference in the coefficient of friction of the plating the recommended torque, then held in place while
material. The torque charts in this manual list the installing a regular nut to the recommended torque.
correct specifications for gold, silver, and unplated
bolts.
THREAD LUBRICATION
The addition of antiseize compound, Molykote, oil,
NUT TIGHTENING graphite, or any other lubricant to a bolt decreases
Whenever possible, the nut should be tightened, not the friction between it and a nut. This makes it
the head of the bolt. When tightening using the bolt necessary to reduce the recommended torque to
head, the clamp load can be lost because some of prevent over tensioning of the bolt. When using the
the torque applied twists the bolt instead of torque charts in this manual, decrease the value by
tensioning (stretching) it. The tension on the bolt is 20% whenever a lubricant is used.
what holds the joint together.
00-4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
A careful operator is the best operator. Most satisfactory condition to ensure your safety and
accidents can be avoided by observing certain comply with legal requirements.
precautions. To help prevent accidents, read and
4. Keep open flame or cold weather starting aids
take the following precautions before operating this
away from the battery to prevent fires or
tractor. Equipment should be operated only by those
explosions. Use jumper cables according to
who are responsible and instructed to do so.
instructions to prevent sparks which could cause
explosion.
THE TRACTOR
5. Stop the engine before performing any service
1. Read the Operator’s Manual carefully before on the tractor.
using the tractor. Lack of operating knowledge
6. Escaping hydraulic/diesel fluid under pressure
can lead to accidents.
can penetrate the skin causing serious injury. If
2. Use an approved roll bar and seat belt for safe fluid is injected into the skin, obtain medical
operation. Overturning a tractor without a roll bar attention immediately or gangrene may result.
can result in death or injury. If your tractor is not
• DO NOT use your hand to check for leaks.
equipped with a roll bar and seat belt, see your
Use a piece of cardboard or paper to search
New Holland Dealer.
for leaks.
3. Always use the seat belt. The only instance when • Stop the engine and relieve pressure before
the seat belt should not be used is if the roll bar connecting or disconnecting lines.
has been removed from the tractor or folding
• Tighten all connections before starting the
ROPS is in down position.
engine or pressurizing lines.
4. If a front end loader is to be installed, always use 7. Do not modify or permit anyone else to modify or
a FOPS (Falling Object Protective Structure) alter this tractor or any of its components or
canopy to avoid injury from falling objects. functions without first consulting a New Holland
5. Use the handholds and step plates when getting Dealer.
on and off the tractor to prevent falls. Keep steps 8. The fuel oil in the injection system is under high
and platform cleared of mud and debris. pressure and can penetrate the skin. Unqualified
6. Do not permit anyone but the operator to ride on persons should not remove or attempt to adjust
the tractor. There is no safe place for extra riders. a pump, injector, nozzle, or any other part of the
fuel injection system. Failure to follow these
7. Keep all safety decals clean of dirt and grime, instructions can result in serious injury.
and replace all missing, illegible, or damaged
safety decals. See the list of decals in the Decal 9. Continuous long-term contact with used engine
section of this manual. oil may cause skin cancer. Avoid prolonged
contact with used engine oil. Wash skin promptly
SERVICING THE TRACTOR with soap and water.
1. The cooling system operates under pressure 10. Some components of your tractor, such as
which is controlled by the radiator cap. It is gaskets and friction surfaces (brake linings,
dangerous to remove the cap while the system is clutch linings, etc.) may contain asbestos.
hot. Always turn the cap slowly to the first stop Breathing asbestos dust is dangerous to your
and allow pressure to escape before removing health. You are advised to have any mainte-
the cap entirely. nance or repair on such components carried out
by an authorized New Holland Dealer. However,
2. Keep any type of open flame away from the
if service operations are to be undertaken on
tractor and do not smoke while refueling. Wait for
parts that contain asbestos, the essential
the engine to cool before refueling.
precautions listed below must be observed:
3. Keep the tractor and equipment, particularly
brakes and steering, maintained in a reliable and
00-5
• Work out of doors or in a well ventilated area. 11. Always set the hydraulic selector lever in position
• Dust found on the tractor or produced during control when attaching or transporting equip-
work on the tractor should be removed by ment. Ensure hydraulic couplers are properly
extraction, not by blowing. mounted and will disconnect safely in case of
accidental detachment of implement.
• Dust waste should be dampened, placed in
a sealed container, and marked to ensure 12. Do not leave equipment in the raised position.
safe disposal.
13. Use the flasher/turn signal lights and SMV signs
• If any cutting, drilling, etc. is attempted on when traveling on public roads both day and
materials containing asbestos, the item night (unless prohibited by law).
should be dampened and only hand tools or
low speed power tools used. 14. When operating at night, adjust lights to prevent
blinding oncoming drivers.
OPERATING THE TRACTOR
DRIVING THE TRACTOR
1. Before starting the tractor, apply the parking
brake, place the PTO lever in the “OFF” position, 1. Watch where you are going, especially at row
the lift control lever in the down position, the ends, on roads, around trees and low hanging
remote control valve levers in the neutral obstacles.
position, and the transmission in neutral.
2. To avoid upsets, drive the tractor with care and at
2. Always sit in the tractor seat when starting the a safe speed. Use extra caution when operating
engine or operating controls. Do not start the over rough ground, when crossing ditches or
engine or operate controls while standing beside slopes, and when turning corners.
the tractor.
3. To provide two-wheel braking, lock tractor brake
3. Do not bypass the neutral start switches. Consult pedals together when transporting on roads.
your New Holland Dealer if your neutral start
4. Do not coast or free wheel down hills. Use the
controls malfunction. Use jumper cables only in
same gear when going downhill as is used when
the recommended manner. Improper use can
going uphill.
result in tractor runaway.
5. Any towed vehicle with a total weight exceeding
4. Avoid accidental contact with the gear shift lever
that of the towing tractor should be equipped with
while the engine is running, as this can cause
brakes for safe operation.
unexpected tractor movement.
6. If the tractor becomes stuck or the tires become
5. Before getting off the tractor, disengage the PTO,
frozen to the ground, back up the tractor to
turn the engine off, and apply the parking brake.
prevent upset.
Never get off the tractor while it is in motion.
7. Always check overhead clearance, especially
6. Do not park the tractor on a steep incline.
when transporting the tractor.
7. Do not operate the tractor engine in an enclosed
8. When operating at night, adjust lights to prevent
building without adequate ventilation. Exhaust
blinding oncoming drivers.
fumes can cause death or illness.
8. If the power steering or engine ceases operating, OPERATING THE PTO
stop the tractor immediately. 1. When operating PTO driven equipment, shut off
9. Pull only from the drawbar or the lower link the engine and wait until the PTO stops before
drawbar in the down position. Use only a drawbar getting off the tractor and disconnecting the
pin that locks in place. Pulling from the tractor equipment.
rear axle or any point above the axle may cause 2. Do not wear loose clothing when operating the
the tractor to upset. power take-off or when near rotating equipment.
10. 1If the front end of the tractor tends to rise when 3. When operating stationary PTO driven equip-
heavy implements are attached to the three- ment, always place all gear shift levers in neutral
point hitch, install front end or front wheel position.
weights. Do not operate the tractor with a light
front end. Apply the tractor parking brake, and block the
rear wheels front and back.
00-6
4. To avoid injury, do not clean, adjust, unclog, or 9. Keep equipment clean and properly maintained.
service PTO driven equipment when the tractor
10. Do not drive equipment near open fires.
engine is running.
5. Ensure the PTO master shield is installed at 11. Never use fuel for cleaning purposes.
all times. Always replace the PTO shield cap 12. Arrange fuel purchases so that winter grade fuels
when the PTO is not in use. are not held over and used in the spring.
DIESEL FUEL SAFETY FRAME (ROPS)

Your New Holland tractor is equipped with a safety
1. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES should gaso-
frame. It must be maintained in a serviceable
line, alcohol, or blended fuels be added to diesel
condition. Be careful when driving through doorways
fuel. These combinations can create an
or working in confined spaces with low headroom.
increased fire or explosive hazard. Such blends
are more explosive than pure gasoline in a UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES should you:
closed container such as a fuel tank. DO NOT
USE THESE BLENDS.
• modify, drill, or alter the safety frame in any way.
2. Never remove the fuel cap or refuel with the Doing so may render you liable to legal prosecu-
engine running or hot. tion.
3. Do not smoke while refueling or when standing • attempt to straighten or weld any part of the main
near fuel. frame or retaining brackets which have suffered
damage. Doing so may weaken the structure and
4. Maintain control of the fuel filler pipe nozzle when endanger your safety.
filling the tank.
• secure any parts on the main frame or attach
5. Do not fill the fuel tank to capacity. Allow room for your safety frame with anything other than the
expansion. special high tensile bolts and nuts specified.
6. Wipe up spilled fuel immediately. • attach chains or ropes to the main frame for pull-
ing purposes.
7. Always tighten the fuel tank cap securely.
• take unnecessary risks even though your safety
8. If the original fuel tank cap is lost, replace it with frame affords you the maximum protection pos-
a New Holland approved cap. A non-approved, sible.
proprietary cap may not be safe.
WHEN YOU SEE THIS SYMBOL

IT MEANS:
ATTENTION!
BECOME ALERT!
YOUR SAFETY IS INVOLVED!
00-7
DECALS - TC35, TC40, TC45

If safety or instruction decals become damaged or illegible, new decals should be obtained from your New Hol-
land Dealer and placed at their original positions.
SAFETY DECALS
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING: Pull Only From Drawbar

PART NO: 86532904
LOCATION: PTO Shield
WARNING
WARNING: Rotating Fan

and Belts
PART NO: 86532907
LOCATION: Both Sides
of Radiator
WARNING: Start Engine

WARNING
Only From
Operator’s Seat
PART NO: 86532906
LOCATION: On the Starter Motor
WARNING
WARNING: To Jump Start

PART NO: 86532905
LOCATION: Front of Coolant
Overflow Tank
DANGER: ROPS WARNING: Before Starting

PART NO: 86543805 and Operating
LOCATION: Top under side of ROPS PART NO: 86401125
LOCATION: Left Console Panel
00-8
INSTRUCTION DECALS - TC35, TC40, TC45
Front-Wheel Drive
Control Lever
PART NO: 86400177
Operating Remote Control
LOCATION: Left Fender
Valve-Single Spool
PART NO: 86567895
LOCATION: Right-Hand
Fender
Position Control Lever

PART NO: 86567896
LOCATION: Right-Hand
Quadrant
PTO Engagement
PART NO: 86567890
LOCATION: Left-Hand
Seat Pan
Range Selector Lever

(Manual)
PART NO: 86567891
LOCATION: Left fender
00-9
Hyd. Manifold Operation

(See Operator’s Manual) Engine Oil
PART NO: 86532914 Starter Switch PART NO: 86532916
LOCATION: Right-Hand Side PART NO: 86400175 LOCATION: Engine Oil
of Hyd. Manifold/Air Filter Cap LOCATION: Starter Switch, Filler Cap
Right Side of Instrument Panel
Coupler--Extending Coupler--Retracting
PART NO: 86532920 PART NO: 86532919
Main Shift Lever
PART NO: 86567892
LOCATION: Top right of dash
Forward-Reverse Shuttle
PART NO: 86532921 PART NO: 86532922
PART NO: 86567887
LOCATION: Top Left
of Dash
Power Steering Fluid

PART NO: 86532903
LOCATION: Top of P.S.
Reservoir
Operating Remote
Control Valve--
Double Spool Lubrication and
PART NO: 86532911 Maintenance Intervals
LOCATION: Cover of PART NO: 86400357
2-Spool Remote Valve LOCATION: Inside of Hood
00-10
Flow Control Valve

PART NO: 86400295
Parking Brake
LOCATION: Differential Lock
PART NO: 86521672
Top of Flow Control Knob PART NO: 86532901
LOCATION: Right Front
LOCATION: Right Rear
Deck Platform
Deck Platform
Air Cleaner Maintenance New Holland Leaf

PART NO: 86400356 PART NO: 86516991
LOCATION: Air Cleaner Canister LOCATION: Head Light Bezel
Turn Signal Red Reflective Tape

PART NO: 86400176 PART NO: 86400366
LOCATION: Top Left Dash LOCATION: Back Rear Fender
Throttle ROPS Certification

PART NO: FONN9N848BA PART NO: 86401027
LOCATION: Top Right Dash LOCATION: Inner Right Upright
00-11
DECALS - TC35D, TC40D, TC45D

If safety or instruction decals become damaged or illegible, new decals should be obtained from your New Hol-
land Dealer and placed at their original positions.
SAFETY DECALS
WARNING WARNING
WARNING
WARNING: Pull Only From Drawbar

PART NO: 86532904
LOCATION: PTO Shield
WARNING
WARNING: Rotating Fan

WARNING: To Jump Start and Belts
PART NO: 86532905 PART NO: 86532907
LOCATION: Coolant overflow tank LOCATION: Both sides of
Radiator Shroud
WARNING: Before Starting

and Operating
PART NO: 86532909
LOCATION: Inside Left-Hand Fender
WARNING: Front-Wheel Drive Usage

(Super Steer only)
PART NO: 86532902 DANGER: ROPS
LOCATION: Left Pod Top PART NO: 86543805
LOCATION: Top under side of ROPS
WARNING
WARNING: Start Engine Only

From
Operator’s Seat
PART NO: 86579295
LOCATION: On Starter Motor
WARNING: Lock Park Brake
PART NO: 86576391
LOCATION: Right Side Dash
Left of handle throttle
00-12
INSTRUCTION DECALS - TC35D, TC40D, TC45D

Range Selector Position Control Operating Remote
Lever Lever Control
(Hydrostatic)
PART NO: PART NO: Valve-Single
86567894 86567896 Spool
LOCATION: LOCATION: PART NO:
Left-Hand POD Top Right-Hand POD Top 86567895
LOCATION:
Right-Hand POD Top
PTO Engagement
PART NO: 86567890
LOCATION: Left-Hand
Pod Top
Front-Wheel Front-Wheel PTO Control PTO Control

Drive Control Drive Control Lever (Rear) Lever (Mid)
Lever Lever PART NO: PART NO:
PART NO: PART NO: 86400314 86400315
86532913 86400177 LOCATION: LOCATION:
LOCATION: LOCATION: Left-Hand POD Top Left-Hand POD Top
Left-Hand POD Top Left-Hand POD Top
(Super Steert Only)
00-13
Differential Lock Starter Switch Flow Control Valve Engine Oil

PART NO: PART NO: PART NO: PART NO:
86532901 86400175 86400295 86532916
LOCATION:Above LOCATION: LOCATION: LOCATION:
Pedal Left Side of Starter Switch, Top of Flow Control Engine Oil Filler Cap
Operator’s Platform Right Side of Knob
Instrument Panel
PART NO:86532920 PART NO:86532919
Hyd. Manifold Operation
(See Operator’s Manual)
PART NO:
86532914
LOCATION:
Right-Hand Side of Hyd.
Manifold/Air Filter Cap Coupler--Extending Coupler--Retracting
PART NO:86532921 PART NO:86532922
Power Steering Fluid

PART NO:
86532903
LOCATION:
Operating Remote Top of P.S. Reservoir
Control Valve--
Double Spool
PART NO:
86532911
LOCATION:
Cover of 2-Spool Lubrication and
Remote Valve Maintenance Intervals
PART NO:
86532908
LOCATION:
Inside of Hood
00-14
Parking Brake
PART NO: 86521672
LOCATION: Left Side New Holland Leaf
Seat Platform PART NO: 86516991
LOCATION: Head Light Bezel
Air Cleaner Maintenance

PART NO: 86400356
LOCATION: Air Cleaner Canister
Turn Signal Red Reflective Tape

PART NO: 86400176 PART NO: 86400366
LOCATION: Top Left Dash LOCATION: Back Rear Fender
Throttle ROPS Certification

PART NO: FONN9N848BA PART NO: 86401027
LOCATION: Top Right Dash LOCATION: Inner Right Upright
00-15
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY: New Holland North America, Inc. is continually

For a complete list of the pre-delivery service checks striving to improve its products. We reserve the right
performed by your dealer, refer to the to change prices, specification, or equipment at any
PRE-DELIVERY SERVICE checklist found at the time without notice.
back of this section.
All data given in this book is subject to production
A PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION PLATE is located on variations. Dimensions and weights are approximate
the left-hand side of the transmission housing. The only, and the illustrations do not necessarily depict
numbers on the plate are important in the event your tractors in standard condition. For exact information
tractor should require future service. For your about any particular tractor, please consult your New
convenience, have your dealer record these Holland dealer.
numbers in the appropriate spaces below.
00-16
INTERNATIONAL SYMBOLS
As a guide to the operation of your tractor, various international symbols have been used on instruments and
controls. These symbols are depicted and described below.
Engine Speed Low Range Battery
Hours Recorded Neutral Power Take-off

(ON)
Engine Water Diesel Fuel Power Take-off

Temperature (OFF)
Air Filter Glow “Tortoise” - SLOW

or Minimum Setting
Engine Oil
Engine Stop
Pressure “Hare” - FAST
or Maximum Setting
Engine Oil
Hazard Warning Warning
Parking Brake
Axle Connect
Control Lever
Operating Direction
Lights
Axle Disconnect
(Upper Beam)
Lift Arms
(Raised)
Lights
Continuously (Lower Beam)
Variable Lift Arms
(Lowered)
Lock
Increase Remote Cylinder
(Float)
Release Lock Remote Cylinder

Decrease
(Retracted)
Up Remote Cylinder
(Extended)
Fuel Level
Down
Forward
High Range Differential Lock Warning!

Contains Asbestos
Read Operator’s
Middle Range Manual
00-17
SPECIFICATIONS - TC35, 40, 45
Model TC35 Model TC240 Model TC45

ENGINE
Type/Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diesel/N843L Diesel/N844 Diesel/N844L
Engine Gross Horsepower . . 26.1 kw (35.0) 29.8 kw (40.0) 33.6 kw (45)
Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 4 4
Bore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 mm (3.31″) 84 mm (3.31″) 84 mm (3.31″)
Stroke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 mm (3.94″) 90 mm (3.54″) 100 mm (3.94″)
Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.65 L 2.0 L 2.2 L
(101.1 cu. in.) (121.7 cu. in.) (135.2 cu. in.)
Compression Ratio . . . . . . . . 22.5:1 22.5:1 22.5:1
Firing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2-3 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2
Low Idle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . 1025 ±50 RPM 1025 ±50 RPM 1025 ±50 RPM
Maximum Speed:
High Idle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2855 RPM 2855 RPM 2855 RPM
Rated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2600 RPM 2600 RPM 2600 RPM
CAPACITIES
Fuel Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54.5 liters/ 54.5 liters/ 54.5 liters/
13 U.S. gals. 13 U.S. gals. 13 U.S. gals.
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 liters/ 7.9 liters/ 8.0 liters/

7.8 U.S. qts. 8.3 U.S. qts. 8.4 U.S. qts.
Engine Crankcase:
With Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8 liters/ 6.0 liters/ 6.0 liters/
Rear Axle & Transmission

(Includes Hydraulics) . . . . . . . 36 liters/ 36 liters/ 36 liters/
9.2 U.S. gals. 9.2 U.S. gals. 9.2 U.S. gals.
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 liters/ 1.4 liters/ 1.4 liters/

Front Axle Final Reduction . . . 5.3 liters/ 5.3 liters/ 5.3 liters/
/Differential Gear Case 5.6 U.S. qts. 5.6 U.S. qts. 5.6 U.S. qts.
00-18
Model TC35— Model TC40— Model TC45—

COOLING SYSTEM
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressurized Liquid with Pressurized Liquid with Pressurized Liquid with
Recirculating Bypass Recirculating Bypass Recirculating Bypass
Water Pump:
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Centrifugal Centrifugal Centrifugal
Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V-Belt V-Belt V-Belt
Belt
Deflection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 mm-15 mm 10 mm-15 mm 10 mm-15 mm
(7/16″-9/16″) when (7/16″-9/16″) when (7/16″-9/16″) when
9-11 kg (20-25 lbs.) 9-11 kg (20-25 lbs.) 9-11 kg (20-25 lbs.)
thumb pressure is ap- thumb pressure is ap- thumb pressure is ap-
plied midway plied midway plied midway
between belt pulleys between belt pulleys between belt pulleys
Fan Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 mm (16.1″) 410 mm (16.1″) 410 mm (16.1″)
Number of Fan Blades . . . . 6 6 6
Thermostat:
Start to Open . . . . . . . . . . . . 71°C (160°F) 71°C (160°F) 71°C (160°F)
Fully Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85°C (185°F) 85°C (185°F) 85°C (185°F)
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.9 bar 0.9 bar 0.9 bar
(13 PSI) (13 PSI) (13 PSI)
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Main System Protection . . . . 40 amp Maxifuse 40 amp Maxifuse 40 amp Maxifuse
Number Fuses for Circuit
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 7 7
Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-volt, Heavy Duty, 12-volt, Heavy Duty, 12-volt, Heavy Duty,
40 amps 40 amps 40 amps
Battery Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-volt, w/ negative 12-volt, w/ negative 12-volt, w/ negative
ground, 600 cca ground, 600 cca ground, 600 cca
Starter HP (KW) Rating . . . . . 2.7 (2.0) 2.7 (2.0) 2.7 (2.0)
Battery Rating Amp Hrs. . . . . 64-69 64-69 64-69
Starting Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solenoid Solenoid Solenoid
Pre-Engaged Pre-Engaged Pre-Engaged
Reduction Reduction Reduction
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diesel Diesel Diesel
Type of Fuel to Use if
Above 40°F . . . . . . . . . . . . . No. 2-Diesel, No. 2-Diesel, No. 2-Diesel,
Cetane Rating: Cetane Rating: Cetane Rating:
Minimum 40 Minimum 40 Minimum 40
Below 40°F . . . . . . . . . . . . . No. 1-Diesel, No. 1-Diesel, No. 1-Diesel,
Injection Pump:
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In-Line In-Line In-Line
Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18° BTDC 20° BTDC 18° BTDC
00-19

CLUTCH
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 mm (9.45″) 240 mm (9.45″) 260 mm (10.24″)
Dry Disc, Organic Dry Disc, Organic Dry Disc, Organic
Face Face Face
Pedal Free-Travel . . . . . . . . . 19 mm-30 mm 19 mm-30 mm 19 mm-30 mm
(3/4″-1-3/16″) (3/4″-1-3/16″) (3/4″-1-3/16″)
BRAKES
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wet Disc Wet Disc Wet Disc
Disc (3 per side) . . . . . . . . . . . Out x In Out x In Out x In
175 mm x 143 mm Dia. 175 mm x 143 mm Dia. 175 mm x 143 mm Dia.
(6.9″ x 5.6″) (6.9″ x 5.6″) (6.9″ x 5.6″)
STEERING
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Power Power
Pump Flow @ Rated RPM . . 5.13 gpm (19.4Lpm) 5.13 gpm (19.4Lpm) 5.13 gpm (19.4Lpm)
Pump Pressure Bar (PSI) . . . 97.9 (1419) 97.9 (1419) 97.9 (1419)
Turns Lock-to-Lock:
2WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1/3.8 3.1/3.8 3.1/3.8
FWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1/3.8 3.1/3.8 3.1/3.8
Front Wheel Toe-In . . . . . . . . 0 mm-5 mm 0 mm-5 mm 0 mm-5 mm
(0″-13/64″) (0″-13/64″) (0″-13/64″)
Turning Radius w/o Brakes:
2WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2819 mm (111″) 2819 mm (111″) 2819 mm (111″)
FWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3099 mm (122″) 3099 mm (122″) 3099 mm (122″)
Max. Turn Angle:
2WD 59° 59° 59°
4WD 54° 54° 54°
Front to rear axle ratio . . . . . . 1.660 to 1 1.660 to 1 1.660 to 1
POWER TAKE-OFF
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Independent Independent Independent
Type Actuation . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual lever to Manual lever to Manual lever to
hydraulic valve hydraulic valve hydraulic valve
Shaft:
Rear PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 mm (1-3/8″) 35 mm (1-3/8″) 35 mm (1-3/8″)
Engine Speed for 540 RPM
Rear PTO Operation . 2400 RPM 2400 RPM 2400 RPM
Horsepower PTO Observed . 22.0 kw (29.6 HP) 26.1 kw (35.0 HP) 29.5 kw (39.6 HP)
HYDRAULIC LIFT SYSTEM

Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open Center Open Center Open Center
Pump Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gear Gear Gear
Pump Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8. lpm 9.8 lpm 9.8 lpm
(37.1 U.S. gpm) (37.1 U.S. gpm) (37.1 U.S. gpm)
System Relief Valve Setting . 160 bar (2275 PSI) 170 bar (2500 PSI) 170 bar (2500 PSI)
Number of Rear Remotes . . . 2 (optional) 2 (optional) 2 (optional)
Number of Front Remotes . . 2 (optional) 2 (optional) 2 (optional)
00-20
TRANSMISSION
Transmission Type . . . . . . . . 12 x 12 gear 12 x 12 gear 12 x 12 gear
Shuttle Shift Type . . . . . . . . . . Synchronized Synchronized Synchronized
Traction Clutch Type . . . . . . . Dry disc Dry disc Dry disc
Number of Plates & Lining

Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 (organic) 1 (organic) 1 (organic)
Clutch Diameter mm (in.) . . . 240 (9.45) 240 (9.45) 260 (10.24)
Transmission Speeds - Forward
(2,600 RPM Engine (2,600 RPM Engine (2,600 RPM Engine

Main Range Speed with 13.6 x 24 Speed with 13.6 x 24 Speed with 13.6 x 24
Gear Gear Rear Tires) Rear Tires) Rear Tires)
1st Low . . . . . . . . . . 1.53 KPH 1.53 KPH 1.53 KPH

(0.95 MPH) (0.95 MPH) (0.95 MPH)
2nd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.94 KPH 1.94 KPH 1.94 KPH

(1.21 MPH) (1.21 MPH) (1.21 MPH)
3rd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.43 KPH 2.43 KPH 2.43 KPH

(1.51 MPH) (1.51 MPH) (1.51 MPH)
4th . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21 KPH 3.21 KPH 3.21 KPH

(1.99 MPH) (1.99 MPH) (1.99 MPH)
1st Medium . . . . . . . 4.14 KPH 4.14 KPH 4.14 KPH

(2.57 MPH) (2.57 MPH) (2.57 MPH)
2nd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.28 KPH 5.28 KPH 5.28 KPH

(3.28 MPH) (3.28 MPH) (3.28 MPH)
3rd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.59 KPH 6.59 KPH 6.59 KPH

(4.10 MPH) (4.10 MPH) (4.10 MPH)
4th . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.71 KPH 8.71 KPH 8.71 KPH

(5.41 MPH) (5.41 MPH) (5.41 MPH)
1st High . . . . . . . . . . 10.80 KPH 10.80 KPH 10.80 KPH

(6.69 MPH) (6.69 MPH) (6.69 MPH)
2nd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.72 KPH 13.72 KPH 13.72 KPH

(8.52 MPH) (8.52 MPH) (8.52 MPH)
3rd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.14 KPH 17.14 KPH 17.14 KPH

(10.65 MPH) (10.65 MPH) (10.65 MPH)
4th . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.64 KPH 22.64 KPH 22.64 KPH

(14.07 MPH) (14.07 MPH) (14.07 MPH)
00-21
Transmission Speeds - Reverse
(2,600 RPM Engine (2,600 RPM Engine (2,600 RPM Engine

Main Range Speed with 13.6 x 24 Speed with 13.6 x 24 Speed with 13.6 x 24
Gear Gear Rear Tires) Rear Tires) Rear Tires)
1st Low . . . . . . . . . . 1.71 KPH 1.71 KPH 1.71 KPH

(1.06 MPH) 1.06 MPH) 1.06 MPH)
2nd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18 KPH 2.18 KPH 2.18 KPH

(1.35 MPH) (1.35 MPH) (1.35 MPH)
3rd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.72 KPH 2.72 KPH 2.72 KPH

(1.69 MPH) (1.69 MPH) (1.69 MPH)
4th . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.60 KPH 3.60 KPH 3.60 KPH

(2.23 MPH) (2.23 MPH) (2.23 MPH)
1st Medium . . . . . . . 4.64 KPH 4.64 KPH 4.64 KPH

(2.88 MPH) (2.88 MPH) (2.88 MPH)
2nd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.91 KPH 5.91 KPH 5.91 KPH

(3.68 MPH) (3.68 MPH) (3.68 MPH)
3rd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.39 KPH 7.39 KPH 7.39 KPH

(4.59 MPH) (4.59 MPH) (4.59 MPH)
4th . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.76 KPH 9.76 KPH 9.76 KPH

(6.06 MPH) (6.06 MPH) (6.06 MPH)
1st High . . . . . . . . . . 12.10 KPH 12.10 KPH 12.10 KPH

(7.50 MPH) (7.50 MPH) (7.50 MPH)
2nd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.40 KPH 15.40 KPH 15.40 KPH

(9.56 MPH) (9.56 MPH) (9.56 MPH)
3rd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.21 KPH 19.21 KPH 19.21 KPH

(11.94 MPH) (11.94 MPH) (11.94 MPH)
4th . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.38 KPH 25.38 KPH 25.38 KPH

(15.77 MPH) (15.77 MPH) (15.77 MPH)
00-22
CAST IRON WEIGHTS

Front End:
Ag, R-4 & Turf Tires with
FWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) weights @ 29.7 kg (2) weights @ 29.7 kg (2) weights @ 29.7 kg
(66 lbs.) each (66 lbs.) each (66 lbs.) each
Optional (2) weights @ Optional (2) weights @ Optional (2) weights @

45 kg (100 lbs.) each 45 kg (100 lbs.) each 45 kg (100 lbs.) each
Rear Wheel:
R-4 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4) weights (2) per (4) weights (2) per (4) weights (2) per
wheel @ 48 kg (105 wheel @ 48 kg (105 wheel @ 48 kg (105
lbs.) each lbs.) each lbs.) each
Turf Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . --- --- ---
Ag. Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4) weights (2) per (4) weights (2) per (4) weights (2) per
wheel @ 48 kg wheel @ 48 kg wheel @ 48 kg
DRAWBARS
Swinging/
Extendible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Standard Standard
3 POINT HITCH
Category Type . . . . . . . . . . . . I I I
Position Control Type . . . . . . Hydraulic Hydraulic Hydraulic
Draft Control Type . . . . . . . . . Top Link Sensing (DIA) Top Link Sensing (DIA) Top Link Sensing (DIA)
Drop Rate Control . . . . . . . . . Standard Standard Standard
Lift Capacity @ 24″
Behind Kg (lbs.) . . . . . . . . . . . 920 (2025) 1059 (2330) 1059 (2330)
TIRES
FRONT:
Agricultural:
2WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.50 X 16, 4PR, F2 5.50 X 16, 4PR, F2 5.50 X 16, 4PR, F2
7.50 X 15, 6PR, F2 7.50 X 15, 6PR, F2 7.50 X 15, 6PR, F2
FWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 X 16, 6PR, R1 7 X 16, 6PR, R1 7 X 16, 6PR, R1

8 X 16, 6 PR, R1 8 X 16, 6 PR, R1 8 X 16, 6 PR, R1
Turf:
2WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 X 8.50-14, 4PR, R3 25 X 8.50-14, 4PR, R3 25 X 8.50-14, 4PR, R3
FWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 X 8.50-15, 4PR, R3 27 X 8.50-15, 4PR, R3 27 X 8.50-15, 4PR, R3
Industrial:
FWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 X 16.50, 6PR, R4 10 X 16.50, 6PR, R4 10 X 16.50, 6PR, R4
REAR:
Agricultural . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6 X 24, 4PR, R1 13.6 X 24, 4PR, R1 13.6 X 24, 4PR, R1
14.9 X 24, 4PR, R1 14.9 X 24, 4PR, R1 14.9 X 24, 4PR, R1
Turf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 X 18-20, 4PR, R3 44 X 18-20, 4PR, R3 44 X 18-20, 4PR, R3
Industrial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5 X 24, 8PR, R4 17.5 X 24, 8PR, R4 17.5 X 24, 8PR, R4
00-23

WHEEL BOLT TORQUES
Front Wheel—
Disc-to-Hub:
2WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 N⋅m 169 N⋅m 169 N⋅m
(125 ft. lbs.) (125 ft. lbs.) (125 ft. lbs.)
FWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 N⋅m 169 N⋅m 169 N⋅m
Rear Wheel & Disc-to Axle . . 169 N⋅m 169 N⋅m 169 N⋅m
Disc-to Rim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 N⋅m 244 N⋅m 244 N⋅m

ROPS ATTACHING BOLT TORQUES

ROPS to Rear
Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 N⋅m 74 N⋅m 74 N⋅m
Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47.4 N⋅m 47.4 N⋅m 47.4 N⋅m
00-24
GENERAL DIMENSIONS

(1)—LENGTH Overall (Less 3 pt hitch) -- in (mm)
2WD
sm AG Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116.3 (2955) 116.3 (2955) 116.3 (2955)
lg AG Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 (2971) 117 (2971) 117 (2971)
R4 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A N/A N/A
TURF Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113.9 (2892) 113.9 (2892) 113.9 (2892)
STD 4WD
sm AG Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116.3 (2955) 116.3 (2955) 116.3 (2955)
lg AG Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 (2971) 117 (2971) 117 (2971)
R4 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116.5 (2960) 116.5 (2960) 116.5 (2960)
TURF Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113.9 (2892) 113.9 (2892) 113.9 (2892)
SUPERSTEER
sm AG Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A N/A N/A
lg AG Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121.2 (3080) 121.2 (3080) 121.2 (3080)
R4 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A N/A N/A
TURF Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A N/A N/A
(1)—LENGTH Overall (3 pt hitch horizontal position) -- in (mm)

2WD
sm AG Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125.2 (3180) 125.2 (3180) 125.2 (3180)
lg AG Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125.2 (3180) 125.2 (3180) 125.2 (3180)
R4 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A N/A N/A
TURF Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125.2 (3180) 125.2 (3180) 125.2 (3180)
STD 4WD
sm AG Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125.2 (3180) 125.2 (3180) 125.2 (3180)
lg AG Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125.2 (3180) 125.2 (3180) 125.2 (3180)
R4 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125.2 (3180) 125.2 (3180) 125.2 (3180)
TURF Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125.2 (3180) 125.2 (3180) 125.2 (3180)
SUPERSTEER
sm AG Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A N/A N/A
lg AG Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A N/A N/A
R4 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A N/A N/A
TURF Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A N/A N/A
00-25
HEIGHTS -- in (mm):
(3)—
ROPS Height - Rigid
sm AG Tires 94 (2388) 94 (2388) 94 (2388)
lg AG Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94.5 (2400) 94.5 (2400) 94.5 (2400)
R4 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94.5 (2400) 94.5 (2400) 94.5 (2400)
TURF Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91.5 (2324) 91.5 (2324) 91.5 (2324)
(4)—
ROPS Height - FOLDING
sm AG Tires - Up . . . . . . . . 94.5 (2400) 94.5 (2400) 94.5 (2400)
sm AG Tires - Down . . . . . . 77 (1956) 77 (1956) 77 (1956)
lg AG Tires - Up . . . . . . . . . 95 (2413) 95 (2413) 95 (2413)
lg AG Tires - Down . . . . . . . 77.5 (1969) 77.5 (1969) 77.5 (1969)
R4 Tires - Up . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 (2413) 95 (2413) 95 (2413)
R4 Tires - Down . . . . . . . . . 77.5 (1969) 77.5 (1969) 77.5 (1969)
TURF Tires - Up . . . . . . . . . 92 (2337) 92 (2337) 92 (2337)
TURF Tires - Down . . . . . . . 74.5 (1892) 74.5 (1892) 74.5 (1892)
(5) --
Hood Height
(top inst. cluster)
sm AG T4WD . . . . . . . . . . . 59 (1499) 59 (1499) 59 (1499)
lg AG 4WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59.5 (1511) 59.5 (1511) 59.5 (1511)
R4 4WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 (1524) 60 (1524) 60 (1524)
TURF 4WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 (1473) 58 (1473) 58 (1473)
(6) --
Steering Wheel Height
sm AG T4WD . . . . . . . . . . . 63 (1600) 63 (1600) 63 (1600)
lg AG 4WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63.5 (1613) 63.5 (1613) 63.5 (1613)
R4 4WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 (1626) 64 (1626) 64 (1626)
TURF 4WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 (1575) 62 (1575) 62 (1575)
00-26
TC35 TC40 TC45

(7)—WIDTH:
Rear Axle—
Outside to Outside:
Turf Tires—
Dished In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1825 mm (71.8″) 1825 mm (71.8″) 1825 mm (71.8″)
Dished Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1846 mm (72.7″) 1846 mm (72.7″) 1846 mm (72.7″)
Ag. Tires— (Large)
Dished In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1693 mm (66.6″) 1693 mm (66.6″) 1693 mm (66.6″)
R4 Tires—
Dished In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1736 mm (68.3″) 1736 mm (68.3″) 1736 mm (68.3″)
(8)—MINIMUM GROUND CLEARANCE:

sm AG TIRES
(D.) - Minimum Centerline 13 (330) 13 (330) 13 (330)
Clearance
(E.) - Frt Axle Crop Clear. - 15.5 (394) 15.5 (394) 15.5 (394)
15″ from CL
(F.) - Rr Axle Crop Clear. - 17.5 (445) 17.5 (445) 17.5 (445)
15″ from CL
lg AG TIRES
Clearance
15″ from CL
(F.) - Rr Axle Crop Clear. - 18 (457) 18 (457) 18 (457)
15″ from CL
R4 TIRES
Clearance
15″ from CL
(F.) - Rr Axle Crop Clear. - 17.5 (444) 17.5 (444) 17.5 (444)
15″ from CL
TURF TIRES
(D.) - Minimum Centerline 11.5 (292) 11.5 (292) 11.5 (292)
Clearance
(E.) - Frt Axle Crop Clear. - 13 (330) 13 (330) 13 (330)
15″ from CL
(F.) - Rr Axle Crop Clear. - 15 (381) 15 (381) 15 (381)
15″ from CL
CL -- Center Line of Tractor
00-27
3
5
19984662
19984663
00-28

WHEEL TREAD SETTINGS:
FRONT AXLE:
Agricultural:
2WD 5.5 X 16
Position 1 . . . 1094 - 1208 mm 1094 - 1208 mm 1094 - 1208 mm
(43.1″ - 47.5″) (43.1″ - 47.5″) (43.1″ - 47.5″)
Position 2 . . . 1194 - 1308 mm 1194 - 1308 mm 1194 - 1308 mm
(47.0″ - 51.5″) (47.0″ - 51.5″) (47.0″ - 51.5″)
Position 3 . . . 1294 - 1408 mm 1294 - 1408 mm 1294 - 1408 mm
(51.0″ - 55.4″) (51.0″ - 55.4″) (51.0″ - 55.4″)
Position 4 . . . 1394 - 1508 mm 1394 - 1508 mm 1394 - 1508 mm
(54.9″ - 59.4″) (54.9″ - 59.4″) (54.9″ - 59.4″)
Position 5 . . . 1494 - 1608 mm 1494 - 1608 mm 1494 - 1608 mm
(58.8″ - 69.3″) (58.8″ - 69.3″) (58.8″ - 69.3″)
7.5 X 16
Position 1 . . . 1125 - 1172 mm 1125 - 1172 mm 1125 - 1172 mm
(44.3″ - 46.1″) (44.3″ - 46.1″) (44.3″ - 46.1″)
Position 2 . . . 1225 - 1272 mm 1225 - 1272 mm 1225 - 1272 mm
(48.2″ - 50.1″) (48.2″ - 50.1″) (48.2″ - 50.1″)
Position 3 . . . 1325 - 1372 mm 1325 - 1372 mm 1325 - 1372 mm
(52.2″ - 54.0″) (52.2″ - 54.0″) (52.2″ - 54.0″)
Position 4 . . . 1425 - 1472 mm 1425 - 1472 mm 1425 - 1472 mm
(56.1″ - 57.9″) (56.1″ - 57.9″) (56.1″ - 57.9″)
Position 5 . . . 1525 - 1572 mm 1525 - 1572 mm 1525 - 1572 mm
(60.1″ - 61.9″) (60.1″ - 61.9″) (60.1″ - 61.9″)
4WD 7 X 16 . . . . . 1183.6 mm 1183.6 mm 1183.6 mm

(46.4″) (46.4″) (46.4″)
8 X 16 . . . . . . 1183.6 mm 1183.6 mm 1183.6 mm
(46.4″) (46.4″) (46.4″)
Turf:
2WD 25 X 8.5-14
Position 1 . . . 1144 -1164 mm 1144 -1164 mm 1144 -1164 mm
(45.1″ - 45.8″) (45.1″ - 45.8″) (45.1″ - 45.8″)
Position 2 . . . 1244 - 1264 mm 1244 - 1264 mm 1244 - 1264 mm
(49.0″ - 49.7″) (49.0″ - 49.7″) (49.0″ - 49.7″)
Position 3 . . . 1344 - 1364 mm 1344 - 1364 mm 1344 - 1364 mm
(52.9″ - 53.7″) (52.9″ - 53.7″) (52.9″ - 53.7″)
Position 4 . . . 1444 - 1464 mm 1444 - 1464 mm 1444 - 1464 mm
(56.9″ - 57.6″) (56.9″ - 57.6″) (56.9″ - 57.6″)
Position 5 . . . 1544 - 1564 mm 1544 - 1564 mm 1544 - 1564 mm
(60.8″ - 61.6″) (60.8″ - 61.6″) (60.8″ - 61.6″)
4WD 27 X 8.5-15 . . . . . . . . 1264.9 mm (49.8″) 1264.9 mm (49.8″) 1264.9 mm (49.8″)
Industrial:
4WD 10 X 16.5 . . . 1252.2 mm (49.3″) 1252.2 mm (49.3″) 1252.2 mm (49.3″)
00-29
REAR AXLE:
Agricultural:
2WD & FWD 13.6 X 24 . . . 1196.3 - 1712.0 mm 1196.3 - 1712.0 mm 1196.3 - 1712.0 mm
(47.1 - 67.4″) (47.1 - 67.4″) (47.1 - 67.4″)
14.9 X 24 . . . 1206.5 - 1712.0 mm 1206.5 - 1712.0 mm 1206.5 - 1712.0 mm
(47.5 - 67.4″) (47.5 - 67.4″) (47.5 - 67.4″)
Turf:
2WD & FWD 44 X 18-20 . . 1346.2 - 1369.1 mm 1346.2 - 1369.1 mm 1346.2 - 1369.1 mm
(53 - 53.9″) (53 - 53.9″) (53 - 53.9″)
Industrial:
4WD 17.5 X 24 . . . 1300.5 - 1712.0 mm 1300.5 - 1712.0 mm 1300.5 - 1712.0 mm
(51.2 - 67.4″) (51.2 - 67.4″) (51.2 - 67.4″)
WEIGHT (Bare Tractor):

With ROPS:
2WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1142 kg 1165 kg 1257 kg
(2513 lbs.) (2564 lbs.) (2766 lbs.)
FWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1195 kg 1218 kg 1309 kg
(2628 lbs.) (2679 lbs.) (2881 lbs.)
00-30
SPECIFICATIONS - TC35D, 40D, 45D
Model TC35D— Model TC40D— Model TC45D—

Hydrostatic Hydrostatic Hydrostatic
ENGINE
Type/Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diesel/N843L Diesel/N844 Diesel/N844L
Engine Gross Horsepower . . 26.1 kw (35.0) 29.8 kw (40.0) 33.6 kw (45)
Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 4 4
Bore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 mm (3.31″) 84 mm (3.31″) 84 mm (3.31″)
Stroke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 mm (3.94″) 90 mm (3.54″) 100 mm (3.94″)
Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.65 L 2.0 L 2.2 L
(101.1 cu. in.) (121.7 cu. in.) (135.2 cu. in.)
Compression Ratio . . . . . . . . 22.5:1 22.5:1 22.5:1
Firing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2-3 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2
Low Idle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . 1025 RPM 1025 RPM 1025 RPM
Maximum Speed:
High Idle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2855 RPM 2855 RPM 2855 RPM
Rated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2600 RPM 2600 RPM 2600 RPM
CAPACITIES
Fuel Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54.5 liters/ 54.5 liters/ 54.5 liters/
13 U.S. gals. 13 U.S. gals. 13 U.S. gals.
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 liters/ 7.9 liters/ 8.0 liters/

Engine Crankcase:
With Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8 liters/ 6.0 liters/ 6.0 liters/
Rear Axle & Transmission

(Includes Hydraulics) . . . . . . . 36 liters/ 36 liters/ 36 liters/
9.6 U.S. gals. 9.6 U.S. gals. 9.6 U.S. gals.
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 liters/ 1.4 liters/ 1.4 liters/

Front Axle Final Reduction . . . 5.3 liters/ 5.3 liters/ 5.3 liters/
/Differential Gear Case 5.6 U.S. qts. 5.6 U.S. qts. 5.6 U.S. qts.
00-31

COOLING SYSTEM
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressurized Liquid with Pressurized Liquid with Pressurized Liquid with
Recirculating Bypass Recirculating Bypass Recirculating Bypass
Water Pump:
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Centrifugal Centrifugal Centrifugal
Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V-Belt V-Belt V-Belt
Belt
Deflection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 mm-15 mm 10 mm-15 mm 10 mm-15 mm
(7/16″-9/16″) when (7/16″-9/16″) when (7/16″-9/16″) when
9-11 kg (20-25 lbs.) 9-11 kg (20-25 lbs.) 9-11 kg (20-25 lbs.)
thumb pressure is ap- thumb pressure is ap- thumb pressure is ap-
plied midway plied midway plied midway
between belt pulleys between belt pulleys between belt pulleys
Fan Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 mm (16.1″) 410 mm (16.1″) 410 mm (16.1″)
Number of Fan Blades . . . . 6 6 6
Thermostat:
Start to Open . . . . . . . . . . . . 71°C (160°F) 71°C (160°F) 71°C (160°F)
Fully Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85°C (185°F) 85°C (185°F) 85°C (185°F)
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.9 bar 0.9 bar 0.9 bar
(13 PSI) (13 PSI) (13 PSI)
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Main System Protection . . . . 40 amp Maxifuse 40 amp Maxifuse 40 amp Maxifuse
Number Fuses for Circuit
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 7 7
Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-volt, Heavy Duty, 12-volt, Heavy Duty, 12-volt, Heavy Duty,
40 amps 40 amps 40 amps
Battery Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-volt, w/ negative 12-volt, w/ negative 12-volt, w/ negative
ground, 600 cca ground, 600 cca ground, 600 cca
Starter HP (KW) Rating . . . . . 2.7 (2.0) 2.7 (2.0) 2.7 (2.0)
Battery Rating Amp Hrs. . . . . 64-69 64-69 64-69
Starting Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solenoid Solenoid Solenoid
Pre-Engaged Pre-Engaged Pre-Engaged
Reduction Reduction Reduction
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diesel Diesel Diesel
Above 40°F . . . . . . . . . . . . . No. 2-Diesel, No. 2-Diesel, No. 2-Diesel,
Below 40°F . . . . . . . . . . . . . No. 1-Diesel, No. 1-Diesel, No. 1-Diesel,
Injection Pump:
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In-Line In-Line In-Line
Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18° BTDC 20° BTDC 18° BTDC
00-32
Model TC35D— Model 40D— Model TC45D—

BRAKES
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wet Disc Wet Disc Wet Disc
3 Disc Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . 175 mm x 143 mm 175 mm x 143 mm 175 mm x 143 mm
(6.9″ x 5.6″) (6.9″ x 5.6″) (6.9″ x 5.6″)
STEERING
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Power Power
Pump Flow @ Rated RPM . . 5.13 gpm 5.13 gpm 5.13 gpm
(19.4Lpm) (19.4Lpm) (19.4Lpm)
Turns Lock-to-Lock:
FWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1/3.8 3.1/3.8 3.1/3.8
Super Steert . . . . . . . . . . . NA NA NA
Front Wheel
Toe-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 mm-5 mm 0 mm-5 mm 0 mm-5 mm
(0″-13/64″) (0″-13/64″) (0″-13/64″)
Turning Radius w/o Brakes:
FWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3238.5 mm (127.5″) 3238.5 mm (127.5″) 3238.5 mm (127.5″)
Super Steert . . . . . . . . . . . 2870.2 (113″) 2870.2 (113″) 2870.2 (113″)
Max. Turn Angle:

4WD 54° 54° 54°
4WDSS 75° 75° 75°
Front to rear axle ratio . . . . . . 1.660 to 1 1.660 to 1 1.660 to 1
POWER TAKE-OFF
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Independent Independent Independent
Shaft:
Rear PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 mm (1-3/8″) 35 mm (1-3/8″) 35 mm (1-3/8″)
Mid PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.4 mm (1″) 25.4 mm (1″) N/A
Rear PTO Operation . . . . . . . 2400 RPM 2400 RPM 2400 RPM
Horsepower PTO Observed . 20.7 kw (27.7 HP) 24.3 kw (32.6 HP) 27.4 kw (36.7 HP)
Mid PTO Operation . . . . . . . . 2420 RPM 2420 RPM N/A
HYDRAULIC LIFT SYSTEM

Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open Center Open Center Open Center
Pump Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gear Gear Gear
Pump Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . 37.1 lpm 37.1 lpm 37.1 lpm
(9.8 U.S. gpm) (9.8 U.S. gpm) (9.8 U.S. gpm)
System Relief Valve Setting . 160 bar 170 bar 170 bar
(2275 PSI) (2500 PSI) (2500 PSI)
Number of Rear Remotes
Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 (optional) 3 (optional) 3 (optional)
Number of Mid Remotes
Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 (optional) 2 (optional) 2 (optional)
00-33

TRANSMISSION
Transmission Type . . . . . . . . (HST (Hydrostatic) (HST (Hydrostatic) (HST (Hydrostatic)
Pump Displacement . . . . . . . 0.03 L (1.71 cu. in.) 0.03 L (1.71 cu. in.) 0.03 L (1.71 cu. in.)
Number of Motor Speeds . . . 2 2 2
Number of Transmission
Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 2
Motor Displacement -- High . 0.02 L (1.34 cu.in.) 0.02 L (1.34 cu.in.) 0.02 L (1.34 cu.in.)
Low . . 0.04 L (2.27 cu. in.) 0.04 L (2.27 cu. in.) 0.04 L (2.27 cu. in.)
Motor Hi/Lo Speed Shift Electric Switch Electric Switch Electric Switch
TRANSMISSION SPEEDS
Ag 13.6x24 rear @ Ag 13.6x24 rear @ Ag 13.6x24 rear @

2600 Rated RPM 2600 Rated RPM 2600 Rated RPM
Range I (Low), Motor LOW . . 0-5.61 KPH Turtle 0-5.61 KPH Turtle 0-5.61 KPH Turtle
(0-3.49 MPH) (0-3.49 MPH) (0-3.49 MPH)
Range I (High), Motor HI . . . . 0-9.49 KPH Rabbit 0-9.49 KPH Rabbit 0-9.49 KPH Rabbit
(0-5.90 MPH) (0-5.90 MPH) (0-5.90 MPH)
Range II (Low), Motor LOW . . 0-12.95 KPH Turtle 0-12.95 KPH Turtle 0-12.95 KPH Turtle
(0-8.05 MPH) (0-8.05 MPH) (0-8.05 MPH)
Range II (High), Motor HI . . . . 0-21.89 KPH Rabbit 0-21.89 KPH Rabbit 0-21.89 KPH Rabbit
(0-13.60 MPH) (0-13.60 MPH) (0-13.60 MPH)
00-34

CAST IRON WEIGHTS
Front End:
Ag, R-4 & Turf
Tires with
FWD, &
Super Steert . . . . . . . . . . . (2) weights @ 29.7 kg (2) weights @ 29.7 kg (2) weights @ 29.7 kg
Optional (2) weights @ Optional (2) weights @ Optional (2) weights @

45 kg (100 lbs.) each 45 kg (100 lbs.) each 45 kg (100 lbs.) each
Standard FWD Axle:
(with extension bracket) . . . . (5) weights @ 26 kg (5) weights @ 26 kg (5) weights @ 26 kg
Total 26 kg (300 lbs.) Total 26 kg (300 lbs.) Total 26 kg (300 lbs.)
Or Or Or
(5) weights @ 45 kg (5) weights @ 45 kg (5) weights @ 45 kg

Total 225 kg (500 lbs.) Total 225 kg (500 lbs.) Total 225 kg (500 lbs.)
Super Steer Axle:
(with extension bracket (2) weights @ 26 kg (2) weights @ 26 kg (2) weights @ 26 kg
and adapter bracket) . . . . . . . (60 lbs.) (60 lbs.) (60 lbs.)
(3) weights @ 45 kg (3) weights @ 45 kg (3) weights @ 45 kg

(100 lbs.) (100 lbs.) (100 lbs.)
Total 420 lbs. Total 420 lbs. Total 420 lbs.
Rear Wheel:
R-4 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4) weights (2) per (4) weights (2) per (4) weights (2) per
wheel @ 34 kg (75 wheel @ 34 kg (75 wheel @ 34 kg (75
lbs.) each lbs.) each lbs.) each
Turf Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . --- --- ---
Ag. Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4) weights (2) per (4) weights (2) per (4) weights (2) per
wheel @ 48 kg wheel @ 48 kg wheel @ 48 kg
DRAWBARS
Swinging/
Extendible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Standard Standard
3 POINT HITCH
Category Type . . . . . . . . . . . . I I I
Position Control Type . . . . . . Hydraulic Hydraulic Hydraulic
Draft Control Type . . . . . . . . . Top Link Sensing (DIA) Top Link Sensing (DIA) Top Link Sensing (DIA)
Drop Rate Control . . . . . . . . . Standard Standard Standard
Lift Capacity @ 24″
Behind Kg (lbs.) . . . . . . . . . . . 920 (2025) 1059 (2330) 1059 (2330)
00-35

TIRES
FRONT:
Agricultural:
FWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7x16, 6PR, R1 7x16, 6PR, R1 7x16, 6PR, R1
8x16, 6PR, R1 8x16, 6PR, R1 8x16, 6PR, R11
Turf:
FWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27x8.5-15, 4PR, R3 27x8.5-15, 4PR, R3 27x8.5-15, 4PR, R3
Industrial:
FWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10x16.5, 6PR, R4 10x16.5, 6PR, R4 10x16.5, 6PR, R4
REAR:
Agricultural . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6x24, 4PR, R1 13.6x24, 4PR, R1 13.6x24, 4PR, R1
Turf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44x18-20, 4 PR, R3 44x18-20, 4 PR, R3 44x18-20, 4 PR, R3
Industrial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5x24, 8PR, R4 17.5x24, 8PR, R4 17.5x24, 8PR, R4
WHEEL BOLT TORQUES

Front Wheel—
Disc-to-Hub:
FWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 N⋅m 169 N⋅m 169 N⋅m
Rear Wheel—
Rear Wheel & Disc-to Axle . . 169 N⋅m 169 N⋅m 169 N⋅m
Disc-to Rim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 N⋅m 244 N⋅m 244 N⋅m

ROPS ATTACHING BOLT TORQUES

ROPS to Rear Axle 74 N⋅m 74 N⋅m 74 N⋅m
Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47.4 N⋅m 47.4 N⋅m 47.4 N⋅m
00-36
GENERAL DIMENSIONS
Model TC35D Model TC40D Model TC45D
(1)—LENGTH Overall (Less 3 pt hitch) -- in (mm)

2WD
sm AG Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A N/A N/A
lg AG Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A N/A N/A
R4 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A N/A N/A
TURF Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A N/A N/A
STD 4WD
sm AG Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116.3 (2955) 116.3 (2955) 116.3 (2955)
lg AG Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 (2971) 117 (2971) 117 (2971)
R4 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116.5 (2960) 116.5 (2960) 116.5 (2960)
TURF Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113.9 (2892) 113.9 (2892) 113.9 (2892)
SUPERSTEER
sm AG Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120.2 (3053) 120.2 (3053) 120.2 (3053)
lg AG Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121.2 (3080) 121.2 (3080) 121.2 (3080)
R4 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120.9 (3071) 120.9 (3071) 120.9 (3071)
TURF Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116.1 (2950) 116.1 (2950) 123 (2950)
(1)—LENGTH Overall (3 pt hitch horizontal position) -- in (mm)

2WD
sm AG Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A N/A N/A
lg AG Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A N/A N/A
R4 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A N/A N/A
TURF Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A N/A N/A
STD 4WD
sm AG Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125.2 (3180) 125.2 (3180) 125.2 (3180)
lg AG Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125.2 (3180) 125.2 (3180) 125.2 (3180)
R4 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125.2 (3180) 125.2 (3180) 125.2 (3180)
TURF Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125.2 (3180) 125.2 (3180) 125.2 (3180)
SUPERSTEER
sm AG Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129.1 (3279) 129.1 (3279) 129.1 (3279)
lg AG Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129.5 (3289) 129.5 (3289) 129.5 (3289)
R4 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129.6 (3292) 129.6 (3292) 129.6 (3292)
TURF Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127.5 (3239) 127.5 (3239) 127.5 (3239)
00-37
(2)—WHEEL BASE:
FWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1866.9 mm (73.5″) 1866.9 mm (73.5″) 1866.9 mm (73.5″)
lg AG Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2057.4 mm (81.0″) 2057.4 mm (81.0″) 2057.4 mm (81.0″)
HEIGHTS -- in (mm):
(3)—
Steering Wheel Height
sm AG 4WD Variable Variable Variable
lg AG 4WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable Variable Variable
R4 4WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable Variable Variable
TURF 4WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable Variable Variable
(4)—
ROPS Height - RIGID
sm AG Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 (2388) 94 (2388) 94 (2388)
lg AG Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94.5 (2400) 94.5 (2400) 94.5 (2400)
R4 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94.5 (2400) 94.5 (2400) 94.5 (2400)
TURF Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91.5 (2324) 91.5 (2324) 91.5 (2324)
ROPS Height - FOLDING

sm AG Tires - Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94.5 (2400) 94.5 (2400) 94.5 (2400)
sm AG Tires - Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 (1956) 77 (1956) 77 (1956)
lg AG Tires - Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 (2413) 95 (2413) 95 (2413)
lg AG Tires - Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77.5 (1969) 77.5 (1969) 77.5 (1969)
R4 Tires - Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 (2413) 95 (2413) 95 (2413)
R4 Tires - Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77.5 (1969) 77.5 (1969) 77.5 (1969)
TURF Tires - Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 (2337) 92 (2337) 92 (2337)
TURF Tires - Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74.5 (1892) 74.5 (1892) 74.5 (1892)
(5) --
Hood Height
(top inst. cluster)
sm AG 4WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 (1499) 59 (1499) 59 (1499)
lg AG 4WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59.5 (1511) 59.5 (1511) 59.5 (1511)
R4 4WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 (1524) 60 (1524) 60 (1524)
TURF 4WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 (1473) 58 (1473) 58 (1473)
(6) -- WIDTH:
Rear Axle—
Outside to Outside:
Turf Tires—
Dished In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1823.7 mm (71.8″) 1823.7 mm (71.8″) 1823.7 mm (71.8″)
Dished Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1846.6 mm (72.7″) 1846.6 mm (72.7″) 1846.6 mm (72.7″)
Ag. Tires— (Large)
Dished In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1691.6 mm (66.6″) 1691.6 mm (66.6″) 1691.6 mm (66.6″)
R4 Tires—
Dished In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2146.3 mm (84.5″) 2146.3 mm (84.5″) 2146.3 mm (84.5″)
00-38

(7)—GROUND CLEARANCE:
sm AG TIRES
(D.) - Minimum Centerline Clearance 13 (330) 13 (330) 13 (330)
- Location (Super Steer Clutch) 11 (279) 11 (279) 11 (279)
(E.) - Frt Axle Crop Clear. - 15″ from CL 15.5 (394) 15.5 (394) 15.5 (394)
(F.) - Rr Axle Crop Clear. - 15″ from CL 17.5 (445) 17.5 (445) 17.5 (445)
lg AG TIRES
(F.) - Rr Axle Crop Clear. - 15″ from CL 18 (457) 18 (457) 18 (457)
R4 TIRES
- Location (Super Steer Clutch) 11.5 (292) 11.5 (292) 11.5 (292)
(F.) - Rr Axle Crop Clear. - 15″ from CL 17.5 (444) 17.5 (444) 17.5 (444)
TURF TIRES
(D.) - Minimum Centerline Clearance 11.5 (292) 11.5 (292) 11.5 (292)
(E.) - Frt Axle Crop Clear. - 15″ from CL 13 (330) 13 (330) 13 (330)
(F.) - Rr Axle Crop Clear. - 15″ from CL 15 (381) 15 (381) 15 (381)
CL -- Center Line of Tractor
4
3 5
00-39

WHEEL TREAD SETTINGS:
FRONT AXLE:
Agricultural:
FWD 7 X 16 . . . . . 1179.0 mm (46.4″) 1179.0 mm (46.4″) 1179.0 mm (46.4″)
8 X 16 . . . . . . 1179.0 mm (46.4″) 1179.0 mm (46.4″) 1179.0 mm (46.4″)
Turf:
FWD 25 X 8.5-14 1264.9 mm (49.8″) 1264.9 mm (49.8″) 1264.9 mm (49.8″)
Industrial:
4WD 10 X 16.5 . . . 1253 mm (49.3″) 1253 mm (49.3″) 1253 mm (49.3″)
REAR AXLE:
. - sm AG Tires 13.6 x 24
- MIN (Dished In) 47.1 (1197) 47.1 (1197) 47.1 (1197)
- MAX (DIshed Out) 67.4 (1712) 67.4 (1712) 67.4 (1712)
- No. of available positions 6 6 6
- Adj. per person 4 (102) 4 (102) 4 (102)
. - lg AG Tires 14.9 x 24
- MIN (Dished In) 47.5 47.5 47.5
- MAX (DIshed Out) 67.4 (1712) 67.4 (1712) 67.4 (1712)
- Adj. per person 4 (102) 4 (102) 4 (102)
. - R4 Tires 17.5 x 24
- MIN (Dished In) 51.2 (1301) 51.2 (1301) 51.2 (1301)
- MAX (DIshed Out) 67.4 (1712) 67.4 (1712) 67.4 (1712)
- Adj. per person 4 (102) 4 (102) 4 (102)
. - TURF Tires 44 x 18 - 20
- MIN (Dished In) 53 (1347) 53 (1347) 53 (1347)
- MAX (DIshed Out) 53.9 (1368) 53.9 (1368) 53.9 (1368)
- Only 2 available positions
WEIGHT (Bare Tractor):

With ROPS:
FWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1265 kg 1300 kg 1340 kg
(2784 lbs.) (2860 lbs.) (2949 lbs.)
SuperSteer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1342 kg 1377 kg 1417 kg
(2953 lbs.) (3029 lbs.) (3118 lbs.)
00-40
MINIMUM HARDWARE TIGHTENING TORQUES

IN FOOT POUNDS (NEWTON-METERS) FOR NORMAL ASSEMBLY APPLICATIONS
INCH HARDWARE AND LOCKNUTS

SAE GRADE 2 SAE GRADE 5 SAE GRADE 8 LOCKNUTS
NOMINAL UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED GR.B GR.C NOMINAL
SIZE or W/ZnCr or W/ZnCr or W/ZnCr w/GR5 w/GR8 SIZE
PLATED PLATED PLATED BOLT BOLT
SILVER GOLD SILVER GOLD SILVER GOLD
1/4 55* (6.2) 72* (8.1) 86* (9.7) 112* (13) 121* (14) 157* (18) 61* (6.9) 86* (9.8) 1/4
5/16 115* (13) 149* (17) 178* (20) 229* (26) 250* (28) 324* (37) 125* (14) 176* (20) 5/16
3/8 17 (23) 22 (30) 26 (35) 34 (46) 37 (50) 48 (65) 19 (26) 26 (35) 3/8
7/16 27 (37) 35 (47) 42 (57) 54 (73) 59 (80) 77 (104) 30 (41) 42 (57) 7/16
1/2 42 (57) 54 (73) 64 (87) 83 (113) 91 (123) 117 (159) 45 (61) 64 (88) 1/2
9/16 60 (81) 77 (104) 92 (125) 120 (163) 130 (176) 169 (229) 65 (88) 92 (125) 9/16
5/8 83 (112) 107 (145) 128 (174) 165 (224) 180 (244) 233 (316) 90 (122) 127 (172) 5/8
3/4 146 (198) 189 (256) 226 (306) 293 (397) 319 (432) 413 (560) 160 (217) 226 (306) 3/4
7/8 142 (193) 183 (248) 365 (495) 473 (641) 515 (698) 667 (904) 258 (350) 364 (494) 7/8
1 213 (289) 275 (373) 547 (742) 708 (960) 773 (1048) 1000 (1356) 386 (523) 545 (739) 1
NOTE: Torque values shown with * are inch pounds.

IDENTIFICATION
CAP SCREWS AND CARRIAGE BOLTS
SAE GRADE 2 SAE GRADE 5 SAE GRADE 8
REGULAR NUTS SAE GRADE 5 SAE GRADE 8

HEX NUTS HEX NUTS
LOCKNUTS
GRADE IDENTIFICATION GRADE IDENTIFICATION

GRADE A NO NOTCHES GRADE A NO MARKS
GRADE B ONE CIRCUMFERENTIAL NOTCH GRADE B THREE MARKS
GRADE C TWO CIRCUMFERENTIAL NOTCHES GRADE C SIX MARKS

MARKS NEED NOT BE LOCATED
AT CORNERS
GRADE A NO MARK
GRADE B LETTER B
GRADE C LETTER C
GRADE IDENTIFICATION
00-41
MINIMUM HARDWARE TIGHTENING TORQUES

IN FOOT POUNDS (NEWTON-METERS) FOR NORMAL ASSEMBLY APPLICATIONS
METRIC HARDWARE AND LOCKNUTS

CLASS 5.8 CLASS 8.8 CLASS 10.9 LOCKNUT
NOMINAL CL.8
SIZE UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED W/CL8.8
W/ZnCr W/ZnCr W/ZnCr BOLT
M4 15* (1.7) 19* (2.2) 23* (2.6) 30* (3.4) 33* (3.7) 42* (4.8) 16* (1.8)
M6 51* (5.8) 67* (7.6) 79* (8.9) 102* (12) 115* (13) 150* (17) 56* (6.3)
M8 124* (14) 159* (18) 195* (22) 248* (28) 274* (31) 354* (40) 133* (15)
M10 21 (28) 27 (36) 32 (43) 41 (56) 45 (61) 58 (79) 22 (30)
M12 36 (49) 46 (63) 55 (75) 72 (97) 79 (107) 102 (138) 39 (53)
M16 89 (121) 117 (158) 137 (186) 177 (240) 196 (266) 254 (344) 97 (131)
M20 175 (237) 226 (307) 277 (375) 358 (485) 383 (519) 495 (671) 195 (265)
M24 303 (411) 392 (531) 478 (648) 619 (839) 662 (897) 855 (1160) 338 (458)
NOTE: Torque values shown with * are inch pounds.

IDENTIFICATION
HEX CAP SCREW AND CARRIAGE BOLTS
CLASSES 5.6 AND UP
MANUFACTURER’S IDENTIFICATION
PROPERTY CLASS
HEX NUTS AND LOCKNUTS

CLASSES 05 AND UP
MANUFACTURER’S IDENTIFICATION
PROPERTY CLASS CLOCK MARKING
00-42
SPECIAL TOOLS
Gauge-(0-3000 PSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OEM 1462

Gauge-(6000 PSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OEM 1464
Gauge-(300 PSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OEM 1457
Hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procure Locally
Tee Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CNH299061
Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FNH00227
Male Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Included with CNH299061
Female Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Included with CNH299061
Variseal Installation Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293955
Detent Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FNH00081
Seal Driver Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FNH00293
Injector Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FNH01721
Injector Adapter Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FNH01728
Injector Cleaning Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FNH01720
Clutch Alignment Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FNH299006
Engine Compression Test Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FNH00120
Engine Compression Test Gauge Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OEM1074
Oil Pump Port Block Remover Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FNH11097
Oil Pump Port Block Installer Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FNH00117
Oil Pump Port Block Remover Sleeve (Pair) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FNH11099
Oil Pump Port Block Installer Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FNH11044
Micrometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-1 in. (0-25mm)
Micrometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 in. (25-51mm)
Micrometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 in. (51-76mm)
Small Hole Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/4-1 in. (19-25mm)
Cylinder Bore Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 in. (51-76mm)
Cylinder Bore Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 in. (25-51mm)
HST High Pressure Test Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CNH299007
Engine Oil Pressure Test Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FNH00011
PTO Clutch Pack Pressure Test Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CNH299008
PTO Clutch Pack Press Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CNH299009
00-43
LUBRICANTS
Op. 00 400
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS
LUBRICANT TYPE NEW HOLLAND NO. AMOUNT
Grease High Viscosity Lithium 9613310 Tube

Base-NLGI#2 9613379 (Canada)
Oil (Engine)— 10W-30 9613313 1 quart
API Service SG-CE
9613314 2.5 gallons
9673508DS 5 gallons
9613358 (Canada) 1 liter
9613360 (Canada) 20 liters
15W-40 9613290 1 quart
9613303 2.5 gallons
9613350 (Canada) 1 liter
SAE 30 9613292 5 gallons
9613286 1 quart
9613289 2.5 gallons
5W-30 9613366 (Canada) 4 liters
9673589DS 1 quart
Oil (Hydraulic NH 134D 9624655DS 1 quart
System)—Transmission,
Rear Axle, Front FWD Axle,
Power Steering
9624656DS 1 gallon
9624450 2.5 gallons
9624451 5 gallons
NH F200 (OPTIONAL) 86523625DS 1 gallon
Multi-Seasonal Use,
Recommended for Low
Temperature Conditions
86523626DS 5 gallons
00-44
ADJUSTMENTS
FRONT TIRE INFLATION PRESSURES
Tire Type Tire Size Inflation Pressure
Agricultural:
2WD 5.50 x 16, 4PR, F2 0.6-1.4 bar (8-20 PSI)
7.5 x 15, 6 PR
FWD 7 x 16, 6PR, R1 1.4-1.7 bar (12-35 PSI)

8 x 16, 6PR, R1
Turf:
2WD 25 x 8.50-14, 4PR, R3 0.6-0.8 bar (8-12 PSI)
FWD 27 x 8.50-15, 4PR, R3
Industrial (FWD only) 10 x 16.5, 6PR, R4 (16-45 PSI)
REAR TIRE INFLATION PRESSURES
Agricultural 13.6 x 24, 4PR, R1 0.8-0.97 bar (12-14 PSI)
Turf 44 x 18-20, 4PR, R3 (12-20 PSI)
Industrial (R4) 17.5 x 24, 6PR, R4 (12-26 PSI)
00-45
Op. 00 100
PRE-SEASON AND PRE-DELIVERY SERVICE
INOPERATIVE SERVICE CHECKS SAFETY ITEMS CHECKS

1. ____ Tire Pressure 1. ____ ROPS Installed
2. ____ Air Cleaner Element & Hose Connections 2. ____ Seat Belts Installed
3. ____ Radiator Coolant Level 3. ____ ROPS Bolt Torque-55 ft. lbs. (74.5 N⋅m);
Seat Belt Bolt Torque-35 ft. lbs. (47.4 N⋅m)
4. ____ Fan Belt Tension
4. ____ PTO Shield Installed
5. ____ Battery Cleanliness, Vent Openings,
Electrolyte Level, & Charge 5. ____ SMV Emblem Installed
6. ____ Engine Oil Level 6. ____ Safety Decals Installed
7. ____ Power Steering Reservoir Oil Level 7. ____ Neutral Start Switches Operation
8. ____ Transmission & Rear Axle Oil Level 8. ____ Parking Brake & Latch Operation
9. ____ Front Axle & Final Reduction Gear 9. ____ Flashing Lights/Tail Lights Operation
Case Oil Level (FWD)
10.____Operator’s Manual (present)
10.____Hydraulic Lift Control Drop Manual #86587297 - TC35, TC40, TC45
Rate Adjustment Manual #86587298 - TC35D, TC40D, TC45D
11.____ Top Link (present)

OPERATIVE SERVICE CHECKS
12.____Brake Adjustment & Pedal Equalization All operating checks are to be performed with tractor
at normal operating temperature.
13.____Clutch Pedal Free Play (TC35, 40, 45)
1. ____ Lights & Instruments for Proper Operation,
14.____Rear Wheel Bolt Torque- 125 ft. lbs. & Fuel Shut Down with Key Switch OFF
(169 N⋅m)
2. ____ Fluid & Oil Leaks
15.____Front Wheel Bolt Torque-125 ft. lbs.
(169 N⋅m) (2WD & FWD) 3. ____ Maximum No-load Speed & Idle
Speed Adjustments
16.____Front Wheel Toe-in (Max: 2855 RPM, Idle: 1025 RPM)
17.____Fuel Level 4. ____ PTO Engagement & Disengagement

____ Clutch Pedal & PTO Lever
18.____Sheet Metal & Paint Condition
5. Hydraulic System:
19.____Seat Function ____ Selector Lever for Position Control
____ Flow Control Operation
6. ____ FWD-Drive Lever Operation
7. ____ Operation of H.S.T. (TC35D, 40D, 45D)
00-46
SECTION 10 - ENGINE
Chapter 1 - Engine
CONTENTS

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Metric Bolt Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Description of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
10 101 Cylinder Head Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
10 106 Timing Gears and Camshaft Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
10 102 Oil Sump Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
10 110 Balancer Assembly-Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
10 105 Connecting Rods, Bearings, and Pistons, Rings Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
10 103 Flywheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Disassembly, Inspection, Fits, Clearances, and
Assembly of Component Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
10 101 Cylinder Head Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
10 105 Pistons, Piston Rings, and Connecting Rods Disassembly and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
10 103 Crankshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
10 106 Timing Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
10 103 Flywheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
10 102 Timing Gear Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Engine Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
10 103 Crankshaft and Bearing Holder Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
10 105 Pistons and Connecting Rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
10 110 Balancer Assembly-Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
10 106 Timing Gear Cover, TIming Gears, and Camshaft Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82
10 106 Idler Gear, Oil Pump, and Injection Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
10 101 Head Gasket Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
10 106 Valve Clearance Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87
10 218 Fuel Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
Engine Lubrication System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91
10 304 Engine Lubrication System - Description of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91
10 218 Fuel Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91
10 206 Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95
10-1
SECTION 10 - ENGINE -- CHAPTER 1
10 304 Oil Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99
10 400 Cooling System - Description of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99
10 402 Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-102
10 402 Water Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-102
10 414 Cooling Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-102
Cooling System Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-103
10 406 Radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-103
10 402 Water Pump Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-105
10 402 Thermostat Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-108
10-2
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL TC35 TC40 TC45

Engine Model N843L N844 N844L
Number of Cylinders 3 4 4
3.31 x 3.94 in. 3.31 x 3.54 in. 3.31 x 3.94 in.
Bore x Stroke
(84 x 100 mm) (84 x 90 mm) (84 x 100 mm)
101.4 cu. in. 121.7 cu. in. 135.2 cu. in.
Displacement
(1622 cc) (1995 cc) (2216 cc)
Compression Ratio 22.5:1 22.5:1 22.5:1
Rated Speed (rpm) 2600 2600 2600
Muffler Horizontal
Firing Order 1-2-3 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2
Low Idle Speed 1050 rpm 1050 rpm 1050 rpm
Maximum No-Load Speed 2840 rpm 2840 rpm 2840 rpm
Cylinder Arrangement In-Line Vertical In-Line Vertical In-Line Vertical
Valve Arrangement Overhead Overhead Overhead
Compression Pressure 427 ± 50 psi 427 ± 50 psi 427 ± 50 psi
at 200 rpm (cylinder speed) (29.4 ± 1.8 bar) (29.4 ± 1.8 bar) (29.4 ± 1.8 bar)
Variation between cylinders
CYLINDER BLOCK N843L N844 N844L
Bore
3.3071-3.3078 in. 3.3071-3.3078 in. 3.3071-3.3078 in.
Standard
(84.0 mm) (84.0 mm) (84.0 mm)
3.3543 in. 3.3543 in. 3.3543 in.
Maximum
(85.2 mm) (85.2 mm) (85.2 mm)
Head Surface Warp
.002 in. .002 in. .002 in.
Standard
(.05 mm) (.05 mm) (.05 mm)
.005 in. .005 in. .005 in.
Maximum
(.12 mm) (.12 mm) (.12 mm)
Re-Bore Size*
.020 in. oversize 3.3268-3.3275 in. 3.3268-3.3275 in. 3.3268-3.3275 in.
(.5 mm) (84.2 mm) (84.2 mm) (84.2 mm)
.040 in. oversize 3.3465-3.3472 in. 3.3465-3.3472 in. 3.3465-3.3472 in.
(1.0 mm) (84.7 mm) (84.7 mm) (84.7 mm)
* If bore size exceeds 3.3543 in. (85.2 mm) replace the block.
10-3
CYLINDER HEAD N843L N844 N844L

Head Warp
0.002 in. less than 0.002 in. 0.002 in.
Standard
(0.05 mm) (0.05 mm) (0.05 mm)
0.005 in. 0.005 in. 0.005 in.
Maximum
(0.12 mm) (0.12 mm) (0.12 mm)
Valve Seat Width
0.067-0.082 in. 0.067-0.082 in. 0.067-0.082 in.
Standard
(1.7-2.1 mm) (1.7-2.1 mm) (1.7-2.1 mm)
0.098 in. 0.098 in. 0.098 in.
Maximum
(2.5 mm) (2.5 mm) (2.5 mm)
Valve Seat Sink
0.0334-0.0453 in. 0.0334-0.0453 in. 0.0334-0.0453 in.
Standard (Recess)
(0.85-1.15 mm) (0.85-1.15 mm) (0.85-1.15 mm)
0.071 in. 0.071 in. 0.071 in.
Maximum
(1.8 mm) (1.8 mm) (1.8 mm)
Valve Angle 45° 45° 45°
PISTON N843L N844 N844L
Diameter
3.30503-3.30562 in. 3.30503-3.30562 in. 3.30503-3.30562 in.
Standard
(83.948-83.963 mm) (83.948-83.963 mm) (83.948-83.963 mm)
3.2953 in. 3.2953 in. 3.2953 in.
MInimum
(83.7 mm) (83.7 mm) (83.7 mm)
Bore Clearance
0.0014-0.0028 in. 0.0014-0.0028 in. 0.0014-0.0028 in.
Standard
(0.038-0.072 mm) (0.038-0.072 mm) (0.038-0.072 mm)
0.010 in. 0.010 in. 0.010 in.
Maximum
(0.25 mm) (0.25 mm) (0.25 mm)
Piston Pin Bore
1.102-1.1023 in. 1.102-1.1023 in. 1.102-1.1023 in.
Standard
(27.996-28.000 mm) (27.996-28.000 mm) (27.996-28.000 mm)
1.102 in. 1.102 in. 1.102 in.
Maximum
(27.98 mm) (27.98 mm) (27.98 mm)
Piston Pin Clearance
--0.000393 +0 .0002 in. --0.000393 +0 .0002 in. --0.000393 +0 .0002 in.
Standard
(--0.001 + 0.007 mm) (--0.001 + 0.007 mm) (--0.001 + 0.007 mm)
0.0008 in. 0.0008 in. 0.0008 in.
Maximum
(0.02 mm) (0.02 mm) (0.02 mm)
0.020 in. & 0.040 in. 0.020 in. & 0.040 in. 0.020 in. & 0.040 in.
Available Oversizes
(0.5 mm & 1.0 mm) (0.5 mm & 1.0 mm) (0.5 mm & 1.0 mm)
10-4
PISTON PIN N843L N844 N844L

Diameter
1.1022-1.10236 in. 1.1022-1.10236 in. 1.1022-1.10236 in.
Standard
(27.996-28.0 mm) (27.996-28.0 mm) (27.996-28.0 mm)
1.1016 in. 1.1016 in. 1.1016 in.
Minimum
(27.98 mm) (27.98 mm) (27.98 mm)
Pin-to-Bushing Clearance
0.00039-0.00098 in. 0.00039-0.00098 in. 0.00039-0.00098 in.
Standard
(0.01-0.025 mm) (0.01-0.025 mm) (0.01-0.025 mm)
0.0031 in. 0.0031 in. 0.0031 in.
Maximum
(0.08 mm) (0.08 mm) (0.08 mm)
PISTON RING N843L N844 N844L
End Gap
0.008-0.0138 in. 0.008-0.0138 in. 0.008-0.0138 in.
1st Ring
(0.2-0.35 mm) (0.2-0.35 mm) (0.2-0.35 mm)
0.039 in. 0.039 in. 0.039 in.
Maximum
(1.0 mm) (1.0 mm) (1.0 mm)
0.0079-0.0157 in. 0.0079-0.0157 in. 0.0079-0.0157 in.
2nd Ring
(0.20-0.40 mm) (0.20-0.40 mm) (0.20-0.40 mm)
0.039 in. 0.039 in. 0.039 in.
Maximum
(1.0 mm) (1.0 mm) (1.0 mm)
0.0079-0.0315 in. 0.0079-0.0315 in. 0.0079-0.0315 in.
Oil Ring
(0.20-0.80 mm) (0.20-0.80 mm) (0.20-0.80 mm)
0.047 in. 0.047 in. 0.047 in.
Maximum
(1.2 mm) (1.2 mm) (1.2 mm)
Compression Ring-to-
Groove Clearance
0.0027-0.0043 in. 0.0027-0.0043 in. 0.0027-0.0043 in.
Standard (1st Ring)
(0.7-0.11 mm) (0.7-0.11 mm) (0.7-0.11 mm)
0.0015-0.0031 in. 0.0015-0.0031 in. 0.0015-0.0031 in.
2nd Ring
(0.04-0.08 mm) (0.04-0.08 mm) (0.04-0.08 mm)
0.010 in. 0.010 in. 0.010 in.
Maximum
(0.25 mm) (0.25 mm) (0.25 mm)
Oil Ring-to-Groove Clearance
0.001-0.00512 in. 0.001-0.00512 in. 0.001-0.00512 in.
Standard
(0.03-0.13 mm) (0.03-0.13 mm) (0.03-0.13 mm)
0.010 in. 0.010 in. 0.010 in.
Maximum
(0.25 mm) (0.25 mm) (0.25 mm)
Ring Width
0.079 in. 0.079 in. 0.079 in.
1st Compression
(2.0 mm) (2.0 mm) (2.0 mm)
0.059 in. 0.059 in. 0.059 in.
2nd Compression
(1.5 mm) (1.5 mm) (1.5 mm)
0.157 in. 0.157 in. 0.157 in.
Oil Compression
(4.0 mm) (4.0 mm) (4.0 mm)
0.020 & 0.040 in. 0.020 & 0.040 in. 0.020 & 0.040 in.
Oversize
(0.5 & 1.0 mm) (0.5 & 1.0 mm) (0.5 & 1.0 mm)
10-5
CONNECTING ROD N843L N844 N844L

Rod Twist
0.003 in. 0.003 in. 0.003 in.
Standard
(0.08 mm) (0.08 mm) (0.08 mm)
0.008 in. 0.008 in. 0.008 in.
Maximum
(0.2 mm) (0.2 mm) (0.2 mm)
Rod Bend
0.002 in. 0.002 in. 0.002 in.
Standard
(0.05 mm) (0.05 mm) (0.05 mm)
0.059 in. 0.059 in. 0.059 in.
Maximum
(0.15 mm) (0.15 mm) (0.15 mm)
On Crankshaft Side Play
0.004-0.012 in. 0.004-0.012 in. 0.004-0.012 in.
Standard
(0.1-0.3 mm) (0.1-0.3 mm) (0.1-0.3 mm)
0.028 in. 0.028 in. 0.028 in.
Maximum
(0.7 mm) (0.7 mm) (0.7 mm)
Crankshaft Bearing Clearance
0.0014-0.00327 in. 0.0014-0.00327 in. 0.0014-0.00327 in.
Standard
(0.035-0.083 mm) (0.035-0.083 mm) (0.035-0.083 mm)
0.008 in. 0.008 in. 0.008 in.
Maximum
(0.2 mm) (0.2 mm) (0.2 mm)
CRANKSHAFT N843L N844 N844L
Journal Diameter
2.6754-2.676 in. 2.6754-2.676 in. 2.6754-2.676 in.
Standard
(67.957-67.97 mm) (67.957-67.97 mm) (67.957-67.97 mm)
2.673 in. 2.673 in. 2.673 in.
Maximum
(67.9 mm) (67.9 mm) (67.9 mm)
Crankpin Diameter
2.0458-2.0462 in. 2.0458-2.0462 in. 2.0458-2.0462 in.
Standard
(51.964-51.975 mm) (51.964-51.975 mm) (51.964-51.975 mm)
2.043 in. 2.043 in. 2.043 in.
Maximum
(51.9 mm) (51.9 mm) (51.9 mm)
Runout
0.0012 in. 0.0012 in. 0.0012 in.
Standard
(0.03 mm) (0.03 mm) (0.03 mm)
0.0023 in. 0.0023 in. 0.0023 in.
Maximum
(0.06 mm) (0.06 mm) (0.06 mm)
Endplay
0.0039-0.0156 in. 0.0039-0.0156 in. 0.0039-0.0156 in.
Standard
(0.1-0.4 mm) (0.1-0.4 mm) (0.1-0.4 mm)
0.0195 in. 0.0195 in. 0.0195 in.
Maximum
(0.5 mm) (0.5 mm) (0.5 mm)
10-6
CRANKSHAFT (continued) N843L N844 N844L

Thrust Washer Thickness
0.115-0.117 in. 0.115-0.117 in. 0.115-0.117 in.
Standard
(2.95-3.0 mm) (2.95-3.0 mm) (2.95-3.0 mm)
0.109 in. 0.109 in. 0.109 in.
Minimum
(2.8 mm) (2.8 mm) (2.8 mm)
Cylinder Block Bearing
Diameter
2.677 x 2.418 in. 2.677 x 2.418 in. 2.677 x 2.418 in.
Standard
(68 x 72 mm) (68 x 72 mm) (68 x 72 mm)
Journal-to-Cylinder Block
Bearing Clearance
0.0017-0.0046 in. 0.0017-0.0046 in. 0.0017-0.0046 in.
Standard
(0.044-0.116 mm) (0.044-0.116 mm) (0.044-0.116 mm)
0.079 in. 0.079 in. 0.079 in.
Maximum
(0.2 mm) (0.2 mm) (0.2 mm)
Main Journal Regrind Size
2.6656-2.6661 in. 2.6656-2.6661 in. 2.6656-2.6661 in.
0.010 (0.25 mm) undersize
(67.707-67.720 mm) (67.707-67.720 mm) (67.707-67.720 mm)
2.663 in. 2.663 in. 2.663 in.
Maximum
(67.65 mm) (67.65 mm) (67.65 mm)
2.6557-2.6563 in. 2.6557-2.6563 in. 2.6557-2.6563 in.
(67.457-67.470 mm) (67.457-67.470 mm) (67.457-67.470 mm)
*2.238 in. *2.238 in. *2.238 in.
Maximum
(67.4 mm) (67.4 mm) (67.4 mm)
Crankpin Regrind Size
2.036-2.0364 in. 2.036-2.0364 in. 2.036-2.0364 in.
(51.714-51.725 mm) (51.714-51.725 mm) (51.714-51.725 mm)
2.0335 in. 2.0335 in. 2.0335 in.
Maximum
(51.65 mm) (51.65 mm) (51.65 mm)
2.0261-2.0265 in. 2.0261-2.0265 in. 2.0261-2.0265 in.
(51.464-51.475 mm) (51.464-51.475 mm) (51.464-51.475 mm)
2.2024 in. 2.2024 in. 2.2024 in.
Maximum
(51.40 mm) (51.40 mm) (51.40 mm)
Center Bearing to Crankshaft
Clearance
0.001732-0.004016 in. 0.001732-0.004016 in. 0.001732-0.004016 in.
Standard
(0.044-0.102 mm) (0.044-0.102 mm) (0.044-0.102 mm)
0.079 in. 0.079 in. 0.079 in.
Maximum
(0.2 mm) (0.2 mm) (0.2 mm)
Dynamic Balancer
0.008-0.016 in. 0.008-0.016 in.
Counterweight gear backlash
(0.2-0.4 mm) (0.2-0.4 mm)
0.016 in. 0.016 in.
Maximum
(0.4 mm) (0.4 mm)
* Center Bearing to Crankshaft Clearance
10-7
CAMSHAFT N843L N844 N844L

Cam Height-Valve
1.3564-1.3586 in. 1.3564-1.3586 in. 1.3564-1.3586 in.
Standard
(34.433-34.508 mm) (34.433-34.508 mm) (34.433-34.508 mm)
1.3425 in. 1.3425 in. 1.3425 in.
Minimum
(34.1 mm) (34.1 mm) (34.1 mm)
Bend
0.001 in. 0.001 in. 0.001 in.
Standard
(0.03 mm) (0.03 mm) (0.03 mm)
0.004 in. 0.004 in. 0.004 in.
Maximum
(0.1 mm) (0.1 mm) (0.1 mm)
Cam Height-Fuel
1.6905-1.6953 in. 1.6905-1.6953 in. 1.6905-1.6953 in.
Standard
(42.94-43.06 mm) (42.94-43.06 mm) (42.94-43.06 mm)
1,6850 in. 1,6850 in. 1,6850 in.
Minimum
(42.8 mm) (42.8 mm) (42.8 mm)
VALVES N843L N844 N844L
Stem Diameter-Intake
0.2738-0.2744 in. 0.2738-0.2744 in. 0.2738-0.2744 in.
Standard
(6.95-6.97 mm) (6.95-6.97 mm) (6.95-6.97 mm)
0.271 in. 0.271 in. 0.271 in.
Minimum
(6.89 mm) (6.89 mm) (6.89 mm)
Stem Diameter-Exhaust
(0.273-0.274 in. (0.273-0.274 in. (0.273-0.274 in.
Standard
(6.94-6.95 mm) (6.94-6.95 mm) (6.94-6.95 mm)
0.269 in. 0.269 in. 0.269 in.
Minimum
(6.84 mm) (6.84 mm) (6.84 mm)
Guide Clearance-Intake
0.001-0.002 in. 0.001-0.002 in. 0.001-0.002 in.
Standard
(0.03-0.06 mm) (0.03-0.06 mm) (0.03-0.06 mm)
0.008 in. 0.008 in. 0.008 in.
Maximum
(0.2 mm) (0.2 mm) (0.2 mm)
Guide Clearance-Exhaust
0.0018-0.0029 in. 0.0018-0.0029 in. 0.0018-0.0029 in.
Standard
(0.0451--0.075 mm) (0.0451--0.075 mm) (0.0451--0.075 mm)
0.01 in. 0.01 in. 0.01 in.
Maximum
(0.25 mm) (0.25 mm) (0.25 mm)
Valve Margin (Thickness)
0.0305-0.0423 0.0305-0.0423 0.0305-0.0423
Standard
(0.775-1.075 mm) (0.775-1.075 mm) (0.775-1.075 mm)
0.0197 in. 0.0197 in. 0.0197 in.
Minimum
(0.5 mm) (0.5 mm) (0.5 mm)
0.008 in. 0.008 in. 0.008 in.
Valve Lash Cold Condition
(0.2 mm) (0.2 mm) (0.2 mm)
10-8
VALVES (continued) N843L N844 N844L

Valve Spring-Free Height
1.378 in. 1.378 in. 1.378 in.
Standard
(35 mm) (35 mm) (35 mm)
1.319 in. 1.319 in. 1.319 in.
Minimum
(33.5 mm) (33.5 mm) (33.5 mm)
Valve Spring-Squareness
0.0472 in. 0.0472 in. 0.0472 in.
Standard
(1.2 mm) (1.2 mm) (1.2 mm)
0.079 in. 0.079 in. 0.079 in.
Maximum
(2.0 mm) (2.0 mm) (2.0 mm)
Valve Timing-Intake
Open Before TDC 10° 10° 10°
Close After BDC 46° 46° 46°
Valve Timing-Exhaust
Open Before TDC 40° 40° 40°
Close After BDC 16° 16° 16°
Valve Spring-Compressed
Load Required to Compress
Spring to 1.2 in. (30.4 mm)
17.85 lbs. 17.85 lbs. 17.85 lbs.
Standard
(8.1 kg) (8.1 kg) (8.1 kg)
15.43 lbs. 15.43 lbs. 15.43 lbs.
Minimum
(7 kg) (7 kg) (7 kg)
PUSH RODS N843L N844 N844L
6.18 in. 7.6 in. 7.6 in.
Length
(157 mm) (196 mm) (196 mm)
0.248 in. 0.248 in. 0.248 in.
Diameter
(6.3 mm) (6.3 mm) (6.3 mm)
ROCKER ARM N843L N844 N844L
Shaft Diameter
0.4587-0.4594 in. 0.4587-0.4594 in. 0.4587-0.4594 in.
Standard
(11.65-11.67 mm) (11.65-11.67 mm) (11.65-11.67 mm)
0.456 in. 0.456 in. 0.456 in.
Minimum
(11.57 mm) (11.57 mm) (11.57 mm)
Shaft-to-Rocker Clearance
0.00126-0.00268 in. 0.00126-0.00268 in. 0.00126-0.00268 in.
Standard
(0.032-0.068 mm) (0.032-0.068 mm) (0.032-0.068 mm)
0.008 in. 0.008 in. 0.008 in.
Maximum
(0.2 mm) (0.2 mm) (0.2 mm)
10-9
LUBRICATION SYSTEM N843L N844 N844L

Pressure Relief Valve
42.66-49.7 psi 42.66-49.7 psi 42.66-49.7 psi
Opening Pressure
(2.9-3.4 bar) (2.9-3.4 bar) (2.9-3.4 bar)
71.1 psi 71.1 psi 71.1 psi
Fully Open at 3000 rpm
(4.9 bar) (4.9 bar) (4.9 bar)
Rotor-to-Vane Clearance
0.004-0.006 in. 0.004-0.006 in. 0.004-0.006 in.
Standard
(0.1-0.15 mm) (0.1-0.15 mm) (0.1-0.15 mm)
0.010 in. 0.010 in. 0.010 in.
Maximum
(0.25 mm) (0.25 mm) (0.25 mm)
Rotor-to-Cover Clearance
0.004-0.006 in. 0.004-0.006 in. 0.004-0.006 in.
Standard
(0.1-0.15 mm) (0.1-0.15 mm) (0.1-0.15 mm)
0.008 in. 0.008 in. 0.008 in.
Maximum
(0.20 mm) (0.20 mm) (0.20 mm)
Oil Pump Volume 0.8 gal. (3.2 L) 1.18 gal. (4.5 L) 1.18 gal. (4.5 L)
COOLING SYSTEM
Type of System Pressurized liquid w/recirculating by-pass
Water Pump Centrifugal
0.2-0.4 inch (5-10 mm) when 2.3 lbs. (5 kg) force is applied midway
Drive Belt Deflection (Tension)
between pulleys.
Thermostat
Starts to Open 176-183°F (80-84°C)
Fully Open 203°F (95°C)
Radiator Cap Pressure Rating 13 psi (0.9 bar)
Coolant Ethylene glycol and water in a 50/50 mixture.
N843L N844 N844L
Capacity 7.8 U.S. qts. 8.3 U.S. qts. 8.4 U.S. qts.
(7.4 liters) (7.9 liters) (8.0 liters)
10-10
TORQUE SPECIFICATION N843L N844 N844L

36-40 lbs. ft. 36-40 lbs. ft. 36-40 lbs. ft.
Connecting Rod Cap Bolts
(49--54 N⋅m) (49--54 N⋅m) (49--54 N⋅m)
Main Bearing Retaining Bolts
(49--54 N⋅m) (49--54 N⋅m) (49--54 N⋅m)
Relief Valve Assembly
(59-69 N⋅m) (59-69 N⋅m) (59-69 N⋅m)
Crankshaft Main Bearing
Holder Bolts
Rear Main
(25-29 N⋅m) (25-29 N⋅m) (25-29 N⋅m)
Center Mains
(49-54 N⋅m) (49-54 N⋅m) (49-54 N⋅m)
Engine Rear Mounting Plate
(12-17 N⋅m) (12-17 N⋅m) (12-17 N⋅m)
Flywheel Retaining Bolts
(68-78 N⋅m) (68-78 N⋅m) (68-78 N⋅m)
Engine Front Plate
(9-12 N⋅m) (9-12 N⋅m) (9-12 N⋅m)
Crankshaft Pulley Nut
(274-333 N⋅m) (274-333 N⋅m) (274-333 N⋅m)
72.3-76 lbs. ft. 72.3-76 lbs. ft. 72.3-76 lbs. ft.
Cylinder Head Bolts
(98-103 N⋅m) (98-103 N⋅m) (98-103 N⋅m)
Rocker Arm Assembly
(27-39 N⋅m) (27-39 N⋅m) (27-39 N⋅m)
Rocker Arm Locknut
(11-16 N⋅m) (11-16 N⋅m) (11-16 N⋅m)
Oil Tube Banjo Bolt
(9-13 N⋅m) (9-13 N⋅m) (9-13 N⋅m)
Oil Pressure Switch
(14-20 N⋅m) (14-20 N⋅m) (14-20 N⋅m)
Rocker Cover Bolts
(7-12 N⋅m) (7-12 N⋅m) (7-12 N⋅m)
Glow Plugs
(14-20 N⋅m) (14-20 N⋅m) (14-20 N⋅m)
6.5-9 lbs. ft. 6.5-9 lbs. ft. 6.5-9 lbs. ft.
Cooling Fan Bolts
(9-13 N⋅m) (9-13 N⋅m) (9-13 N⋅m)
Balancer
36-39 lbs. ft. 36-39 lbs. ft.
Retaining Bolts
(49-53.9 N⋅m) (49-53.9 N⋅m)
10-11
METRIC BOLT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Coarse Thread Fine Thread

Bolt Grade Pitch Foot- Newton- Pitch Foot- Newton-
Size No. (mm) Pounds Meter (mm) Pounds Meter
4T 3.6-5.1 4.9-6.9
M6 7T 1.0 6.1-8.3 8.3-11.3 --- --- ---
10T 8.7-11.6 11.8-15.7
4T 9.4-12.3 12.7-16.7 11.2-14.8 15.2-20.1
M8 7T 1.25 16.6-21.0 22.6-28.4 1.0 19.5-25.3 26.5-34.3
10T 21.0-26.8 28.4-36.3 22.4-29.7 30.4-40.2
4T 18.8-24.6 25.5-33.3 21.0-26.8 28.4-36.3
M10 7T 1.5 32.5-41.2 44.1-55.9 1.25 36.2-46.3 49.0-62.8
10T 39.8-51.4 53.9-69.6 42.7-54.2 57.9-73.5
4T 27.5-34.7 37.3-47.1 31.8-40.5 43.1-54.9
M12 7T 1.75 48.5-61.5 65.7-83.4 1.25 55.0-69.4 74.5-94.1
10T 68.0-85.4 92.2-116 73.1-93.3 99.0-127
4T 46.3-59.3 62.8-80.4 51.4-64.4 69.6-87.3
M14 7T 2.0 76.7-96.9 104-131 1.5 86.1-109 117-148
11T 102-129 139-175 108-137 147-186
4T 63.6-81.0 86.3-110 67.3-84.6 91.2-115
M16 7T 2.0 110-136 140-184 1.5 116-142 157-192
11T 152-188 206-255 163-199 221-270
4T 83.9-104 114-141 96.9-120 131-163
M18 7T 2.0 145-174 196-235 1.5 170-206 230-279
11T 203-246 275-333 221-271 299-368
4T 106-132 144-141 127-156 172-211
M20 7T 2.5 177-213 240-289 1.5 203-246 275-333
11T 268-325 363-441 293-358 397-485
10-12
SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool No. Description

FNH01721 Injector Tester
FNH00120 Adapter—Compression Tester
FNH01728 Injector Adapter Set
OEM1074 Compression Test Gauge Assembly
FNH01720 Injector Cleaning Kit
FNH00117 Port Block Installer
FNH11044 Port Block Installer Pins
FNH11097 Port Block Remover
FNH11099 Port Block Remover Sleeve (Pair)
FNH00011 Oil Pressure Test Fitting
Micrometer, Outside 0-1 inch (0-25 mm)
Small Hole Gauge 3/4-1 inch (19-25 mm)
Cylinder Bore Gauge 2-3 inch (51-76 mm)
Cylinder Bore Gauge 1-2 inch (25-51 mm)
10-13
COMPRESSION TEST AND TOOLS

Compression test is performed through the glow plug
ports. The test adapter tool, 1, is equipped with quick
coupler ends for easy installation of the hose and
gauge.
1
The procedures to perform a compression test are as
2
follows:
1. Remove the wire lead from the fuel injection

pump solenoid.
2. Remove the glow plug electrical wire and wire
connector from top of the glow plugs.
1
3. Remove all of the glow plugs.
IMPORTANT: Be sure all the glow plugs are re-
moved before starting the compression tests. 2
4. Install the adapter Tool No. NH 00120, hose and
gauge assembly OEM1074, 2, in each port and
crank the engine until pressure stabalizes. The
gauge should read 29.5 bar (427 psi) plus or mi-
nus 3.5 bar (50 psi).
NOTE: It may be necessary to remove some injector
fuel lines to install the adapter tool.
NOTE: There should not be more than 3.5 bar (50 psi)
variation between the cylinders. 2
5. When all cylinders have been tested, reinstall the

glow plugs and electrical connections.
10-14
GENERAL INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION
This chapter describes the engine overhaul and re-
pair procedures of the Models TC35, TC35D, TC40,
TC40D, TC45 and TC45D tractors. Repair proce-
dures are essentially the same for all models except
as noted in the repair procedures.
The TC35 and 35D tractors are equipped with three-
cylinder in-line engines. The TC40, TC40D, TC45 3 2
and TC45D tractors are equipped with four-cylinder
in-line engines. They are all four cycle, overhead
valve, liquid cooled, diesel engines. The engines are 1
identified by a code, 1, cast into the lower right side
of the cylinder block.
NOTE: Numeric value, 2, under the Engine Code in-

dicates displacement of the engine in liters.
20002360
Engine Engine Power

Identification Tractor Model Hp
N843L TC35, TC35D 35
N844 TC40, TC40D 40
N844L TC45, TC45D 45
10-15
TROUBLESHOOTING
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTION

Engine does not develop Clogged air cleaner Inspect and replace air cleaner if
full power necessary
Fuel line obstructed Check for crimped fuel line. Inspect
fuel filter for cleanliness
Improper injection timing Repair/ replace components as
required
Improper nozzle injection pressure Check injection timing
and angle Inspect for proper injection pressure
an angle
Low cylinder compression Check engine compression
Insufficient fuel injection Repair at authorized shop
Improper valve lash adjustment Adjust valves to correct tolerances
Burned, worn or sticking valves Inspect and replace as necessary
Blown head gasket Replace head gasket
Worn or sticking piston rings Overhaul as necessary
Faulty engine stop solenoid Replace stop solenoid
Low oil pressure Engine oil level low Fill to proper level
Wrong grade of oil Replace with correct grade oil
Clogged oil pump filter Change oil and filter
Faulty oil pressure relief valve Replace relief valve
Worn oil pump drive shaft gears
gears, or Inspect oil system and components
components.
broken oil pipe Replace defective components
Excessive main or connecting rod Replace bearings or shaft if
bearing clearances necessary
Oil pump axial clearance not properly Check pump clearance and shim as
set needed to proper tolerance
Engine will not stop Faulty engine stop solenoid Replace the stop solenoid
Faulty starter switch Replace starter switch
Low cylinder compression Burned, worn or sticking valves Replace valves
Bent valve stem Replace valves
Broken or weak valve spring Replace valve spring
Blown cylinder head gasket Replace head gasket
Worn or sticking piston rings Replace piston rings
Scored piston Replace piston
Poor engine idling Improper injection timing Correct the injection timing
Air in injection pump Purge air from the system
Improper governor adjustment Adjust the governor
10-16

Oil pressure warning light Bulb burnt out Replace the bulb
fails to operate
Oil pressure sensor is faulty Replace oil pressure sensor
Warning light circuit faulty Replace warning light circuit
Engine knocks Diluted or thin oil Change engine oil and filter
Insufficient oil supply Check engine oil level
Low oil pressure Inspect lube system for restrictions
Worn crankshaft thrust bearing Replace relief valve
Excessive flywheel runout Replace thrust bearing
Excessive connecting rod or main Replace flywheel
bearing clearance Replace bearings
Seized bearing Replace bearing and affected
component if necessary
Clogged oil passage Clean out oil passages
Bent or twisted connecting rod Replace connecting rod
Crankshaft journals out of round Rework or replace crankshaft
Excessive piston to cylinder bore Replace piston with correct oversized
clearance piston
Excessive piston ring side clearance Replace piston rings
Broken or damaged ring Replace piston ring
Excessive piston pin clearance Replace piston pin or bushing
Seized piston Replace piston and, if necessary,
engine block
Piston pin retainer loose or missing Replace retainer
Improper valve lash adjustment Adjust valve lash to specification
Worn valve lifter Replace valve lifter
Excessive timing gear backlash Replace all timing gears
Excessive oil consumption Engine oil level too high Remove excess oil
Leakage in cylinder head gasket Replace head gasket
Oil loss past the pistons and rings Replace piston rings
Worn, broken, or sticking piston rings Replace piston rings
Cl
Clogged
d return hole
h l off oilil ring
i Unclog
U l return oilil hole
h l and
d replace
l
rings
Worn valves, guides, or seals Replace valves, guides, or seals
Leakage past oil seals and gaskets Replace leaking seals and gaskets
External oil leaks from engine Locate leaks and repair
10-17

Engine overheats Insufficient amount of coolant in the Fill coolant to proper level
radiator
Hose connection leaking or collapsed Tighten hose connection or replace
hose hose
Radiator leakage Locate leak and repair or replace
radiator
Loose, worn, or broken V-belt Adjust V-belt tension or replace belt
Radiator fins bent or clogged Straighten out and clean fins
Radiator cap not sealing Replace radiator cap
Thermostat operating improperly Replace thermostat cap
Insufficient amount of oil Fill to proper level
Water pump operating improperly Replace water pump
Improper valve clearance Adjust valve clearance to specification
Restriction in exhaust system Remove restriction
Improperly installed cylinder head Reinstall head gasket in proper
gasket position
Rust and/or scale clogged water ports Backflush cooling system
Extended engine idling Shutdown engine during extended
idling periods
Temperature gauge fails to Faulty temperature sender Replace temperature switch
reach normal operating
temperature Faulty thermostat Replace thermostat
Faulty temperature gauge Replace temperature gauge
10-18

Engine does not start Faulty starter switch Replace switch
Insufficient charging or complete Check battery and charging system.
discharge of battery
Lack of fuel Fill fuel tank
Air mixed in fuel system Inspect fuel system for tightness
Clogged fuel filter Replace fuel filter
Irregular or faulty fuel supply Replace fuel supply
Glow plug not heating Replace glow plug
Improper lubricating oil viscosity Replace lube oil
Clogged air cleaner Replace air cleaner
Faulty engine stop solenoid Replace solenoid
Burned out fuse Replace fuse
Excessive exhaust smoke Air cleaner dirty or restricted Replace air cleaner
Excessive fuel delivery Adjust fuel delivery
Engine stops while Lack of fuel in fuel tank Fill fuel tank
operating
Clogged fuel filter Replace filter
Air mixed in fuel system Inspect for air leaks
Faulty engine stop solenoid Replace solenoid
Burned out fuse Replace fuse
Undesirable exhaust color Unsuitable fuel Replace fuel
(black or light grey)
Excess injection Adjust injection
Faulty engine component Replace as required
Over loading Decrease load
Clogged air filter Replace filter
Undesirable exhaust smoke Excess engine oil Drain oil to proper oil level
(white or pale)
Improper lubricating oil viscosity Replace oil with specified viscosity
Faulty injection timing Adjust injection timing
10-19
CYLINDER HEAD AND VALVE TRAIN CYLINDER BLOCK ASSEMBLY

COMPONENTS (N843L Engine - TC35, TC35D)
The cylinder head incorporates the valve assem- The cylinder block assembly contains the pistons,
blies, rocker arms, rocker shaft, push rods, and lift- connecting rods, crankshaft, timing gears, and en-
ers. A swirl chamber located between the injector as- gine oil pump. The crankshaft is supported on four
sembly and the main combustion chamber of the main bearings. The front bearing is positioned in a
cylinders provides improved starting and greater fuel bore in front of the block. The second, third, and
efficiency. Initial combustion starts in the precombus- fourth bearings are split liners located in holders
tion chamber and as the expansion occurs a strong bolted to the block. The camshaft is supported on
swirl pattern is created in the main combustion cham- three ball bearings located in the block.
ber for more complete combustion of the air-fuel mix-
ture. The air intake manifold is separate from the cast
aluminum valve cover on all these engines. The ex- CYLINDER BLOCK ASSEMBLY
haust manifold is bolted on the left-hand side of the (N844 and N844L Engine - TC40, TC40D, TC45,
cylinder head on each of the models. Cylinder heads TC45D)
have integral valve guides. Standard size valves only
are used. The cylinder block assembly contains the pistons,
connecting rods, crankshaft, timing gears, and en-
gine oil pump. The crankshaft is supported on five
main bearings. The front bearing is positioned in a
bore in front of the block. The other bearings are split
liners located in holders bolted to the block. The cam-
shaft is supported on four ball bearings located in the
block.
10-20
MODEL N843L - TC35, TC35D

4
MODEL N844 and N844L - TC40, TC40D, TC45, TC45D

5
10-21
REMOVAL
Separating at the Clutch Housing/Engine-12x12
Transmission
6. Remove the negative (-) battery cable, 1, and the
positive (+) battery cable, 2, from the battery.
7. Drain all of the hydraulic fluid from the transmis-
sion and the differential into a suitable container.
1 2
8. Disconnect the headlight wire harness plug and
remove the hood from the tractor.
9. Remove the seat, and the seat base assembly
30997558
from the tractor.
10. Remove the light bars from the fenders and the 6
ROPS.
11. If equipped, remove the remote loader control
valve, 1, and the connecting hydraulic tubes from
the right fender.
12. Remove the left and right fenders from the
tractor. 1
30997555
13. Remove the left, 1, and right, 2, rear hood side

panels.
14. Disconnect and remove the throttle cable from
the foot throttle control pedal, located on the right 2
deck. 1
15. Remove the left and the right deck from the trac-
tor.
16. Disconnect the throttle cable from the dash
mounted throttle control lever.
10000864
10-22
17. Loosen and remove the two instrument panel re-

taining screws, 1. Remove the instrument panel, 1 2
1
2, from the dash housing, 3. Disconnect the wir- 3
ing connector from the instrument panel.
10998361
8
18. Drive the roll pin, 1, from the lower shuttle shift
shaft, 2. Remove the retaining ring, 3, and the roll
pin, 4, from the lower main shift shaft, 5. Loosen
and remove the retaining bolts, 6, securing the
main shift bracket, 7, and the shuttle shift brack-
et, 8, to the steering column, 9. Remove the shift
shaft assemblies by feeding the control levers
down through the dash housing.
19. Remove the dash housing from the firewall. Dis-
connect the wiring connectors from the dash 6 9
switches. 8 7 6
20. Disconnect the main wiring harness connector.
2
4 5
1
3
10996566
9
21. Remove the firewall support bracket, 1, from the
firewall, 2, and the clutch housing, 3.
2
1
20000908
10
10-23
22. Remove the hydraulic system inlet tube, 1, from

the hydraulic pump, 2.
23. Remove the hydraulic system pressure tube, 3,
from the hydraulic pump, 2, and the diverter 1
valve.
2
3
30997557
11
24. Disconnect the wires, 1, on the starter, 2, and re-
move the starter from the tractor.
30997565 1
12
25. If equipped with FWD, remove the roll pins, 1,
from the front and rear of the FWD driveshaft, 2,
and remove the driveshaft from the tractor.
NOTE: Draining the engine oil and removal of the oil
filter is necessary on the TC35 tractor to gain access 2
to several of the buckle-up bolts.
26. Drain the engine oil into a suitable container and 1

remove the oil filter.
1
20000904
13
10-24
27. Remove the fuel supply, 1, and return, 2, lines

from the fuel filter, 3.
28. Drain the fuel tank into a suitable container. 2
10000865
14
29. Attach a chain sling, 1, to the two hoist eyes, 2
1
and 3, on the engine.
10000867
15
30. Attach a suitable hoist, 1, to the chain sling, 2.
NOTE: The hoist is used for supporting the engine
and axle assembly, not for lifting.
31. Roll a floor jack under the tractor from the rear of 1
the tractor, and place under the clutch housing.
Raise the jack enough to support the drive train. 2
10000868
16
10-25
32. Remove the buckle-up bolts, 1, that secure the

engine, 2, to the clutch housing, 3. 1
NOTE: The hoist and/or the floor jack may need to be
raised or lowered to allow the separation of the en-
gine from the clutch housing.
33. Carefully roll the drive train away from the en-
gine, using the floor jack for support.
1
3
2
20000905
17
Separating at the HST Housing/Engine-HST
Transmission
1. Remove the negative (-) battery cable, 1, and the 1
2. Drain all of the hydraulic fluid from the transmis- 2
sion, differential, and the oil cooler into a suitable
container.
4. Remove the seat, and the seat track assembly
from the tractor deck. 10998231
18
5. Remove the control lever grips, 1, from the con-
trol levers on both sides of the tractor.
6. Remove the left, 2, and the right, 3, control pods
1
from the fenders.
7. Remove the light bars from the fenders and the 3
ROPS.
8. Disconnect and remove the control levers from
the tractor deck and the connecting linkage.
1
10997819/20
19
10-26
9. If equipped, remove the remote, loader control

valve, 1, from the right fender, and the cup holder/ 1
tool box, 2, from the left fender.
tractor.
10998371/8229
20
11. Disconnect and remove the differential lock ped-
al, 1.
10998223
21
12. If equipped, disconnect and remove the fulltime
2WD lever, 1. 1
13. Disconnect and remove the parking brake han-
dle, 2.
10998312
22
10-27

panels.
15. Remove the floor mat from the tractor deck.
1 2
10000864
23
16. Drive the roll pin, 1, from the HPL speed control
shaft, 2, and remove the control shaft from the
HPL shaft, 3.
17. Remove the deck from the tractor. 3
19998697
24
taining screws, 1. Remove the instrument panel, 1 2 1
2, from the dash housing, 3. Disconnect the wir-
ing connector from the instrument panel.
19. Disconnect the throttle cable from the throttle
control lever.
20. Remove the dash housing from the firewall. Dis-
connect the wiring connectors from the dash
switches.
21. Disconnect the two main wiring harness 3
connectors.
10998233
25
10-28

firewall, 2, and the HST housing, 3.
3 2
10000863
26
24. Remove the hydraulic system pressure tube, 3,
from the hydraulic pump, 2, and the diverter
valve. 1 2
3
30997557
27
25. Remove the HST oil cooler tube, 1, and the HST
pressure tube, 2, from the tractor. 1
30996397
28
10-29

30997565 1
29
27. If equipped, disconnect the Sensitrack linkage,
1, from the control arm, 2, at the Sensitrack
clutch, 3. 3
1 2
30996381
30
28. Remove the two FWD, driveshaft, front and rear,
retaining bolts, (one roll pin on standard FWD 1
axle), and remove the driveshaft from the tractor.
30996382
31
10-30
29. Use a floor jack, 1, to raise the front of the tractor

and place wood blocks, 2, between the axle, 3,
and the frame, 4. Lower the jack.
1 4 2
10000866 3
32
30. Remove the cotter pin, 1, and the castle nut, 2,
from the support bar, 3, at the rear mounting
bracket, 4.
31. Use a brass drift and a hammer to drive the sup-
port bar, 3, stud out of the mounting bracket, 4.
filter is necessary on the TC35D tractor to gain ac-
cess to several of the buckle-up bolts.
1
32. Drain the engine oil into a suitable container and
3
remove the oil filter. 2
20000902 4
33
2
10000865
34
10-31

1
10000867
35
10000868
36
37. Roll a floor jack under the tractor from the rear of
the tractor, and place under the HST housing.
Raise the jack enough to support the drive train.
38. Remove the buckle-up bolts that secure the en-
gine to the HST housing.
raised or lowered to allow the separation of the en-
gine from the HST housing.
10000869
37
10-32
39. Carefully roll the drive train away from the en-
gine, using the floor jack for support.
Separating at the Engine/Frame

1. Use jack stands under the frame rails to support
the front frame/engine assembly.
WARNING
Make sure the front frame/engine assembly is se-
curely supported before removing the chain
sling from the engine.
10000870
2. Remove the chain sling from the two hoist eyes
38
on the engine.
3. Drain the hydraulic fluid from the power steering 4. Remove the power steering lines, 3, from the
reservoir, 1, into a suitable container. Remove power steering control motor, 4, the frame, 5, and
the reservoir, 1, from the firewall, 2. the power steering pump, 6.
2
1
4
3
5
6
20002368
39
10-33
5. Remove the air cleaner assembly, 1, from the

firewall, 2. 1
20002366
6. Remove the muffler guard, 1, from the tractor.

1
3
2
30996394
40
7. Remove the muffler, 1, and the exhaust pipe, 2,
from the tractor. 1
8. Drain the coolant from the radiator into a suitable
container.
9. Remove the top and the bottom radiator hoses.
10. Remove the radiator and the oil cooler (if
equipped) from the tractor.
20002367
41
10-34
11. Remove the firewall, 1, and the air cleaner

mounting bracket, 2, from the engine.
12. Attach a chain sling to the two hoist eyes on the
engine.
1
13. Attach a suitable hoist to the chain sling, and
raise the hoist enough to support the engine.
20002370
42
14. Loosen and remove the engine mounting bolts,
1, on both sides of the frame. 1
15. Carefully lift the engine from the frame.
16. Attach the engine to a suitable engine stand.
17. With the engine securely attached to the engine
stand, remove the chain sling from the two en-
gine hoist eyes.
20002365
43
INSTALLATION
1. Attach a chain sling to the two hoist eyes on the
engine.
2. Attach a suitable hoist to the chain sling and raise
the hoist enough to support the engine.
3. Remove the engine from the engine stand.
4. Using the hoist, position the engine in the frame,
aligning the mounting holes in the frame with the
mounting holes in the engine.
10-35
5. Install the engine mounting bolts, 1, on both sides

of the frame. Tighten the mounting bolts to 102 - 1
129 ft. lbs. (139-175 N⋅m).
6. With the engine securely installed into the frame,
remove the chain sling from the two engine hoist
eyes.
20002365
44
7. Install the firewall, 1, and the air cleaner mount-
ing bracket, 2, onto the engine.
8. Install the radiator and the oil cooler (if equipped)
onto the tractor frame.
1
9. Install the top and bottom radiator hoses.
10. Fill the radiator with new coolant to the proper
level.
2
20002370
45
11. Install the muffler, 1, onto the exhaust manifold,
and attach the exhaust pipe, 2, onto the muffler. 1
20002367
46
10-36
12. Install the muffler guard, 1, on the tractor.
30996394
47
13. Install the air cleaner assembly, 1, on the firewall,
2, and connect the air inlet hose to the air inlet 1
manifold pipe.
20002366
48
10-37
14. Connect the power steering tubes, 3, to the pow-

er steering control motor, 4, the frame, 5, the
power steering reservoir, 1, and the power steer-
ing pump, 6.
15. Install the power steering fluid reservoir, 1, to the
firewall, 2. Connect the hose from the reservoir,
1, to the power steering pump, 6. Fill the reservoir
to the proper level with NH 134 hydraulic fluid.
2
1
4
3
5
6
20002368
49
10-38
Attaching the 12x12 Transmission to the

1
Engine
WARNING
Do not use the buckle-up bolts to draw the drive
train together with the engine. Severe damage to 2
the drive train may result.
1. Attach a chain sling, 1, to the two hoist eyes, 2 3

10000867
50
3. Carefully roll the drive train into alignment with
the engine. Align the splines on the 12x12 input
shaft with the clutch and the engine flywheel. Ro-
tate the engine fan to align the input shaft and the 1
clutch/flywheel. The floor jack or the hoist may
need to be raised or lowered to make alignment 2
possible.
10000868
51
4. Connect the clutch housing, 3, to the engine, 2,
and install the buckle-up bolts, 1. Tighten the 1
buckle-up bolts in a criss-cross pattern. Torque
the M10 bolts and nuts to 32-41 ft.-lbs. Torque the
two M12 bolts to 60 ft.-lbs.
1
3
2
20000905
52
10-39
5. Remove the chain hoist, 1, and the sling, 2, from

the engine hoist eyes. Remove the floor jack from
the tractor.
10000868
53
6. Connect the fuel supply line, 1, to the fuel shutoff/
filter, 3, and connect the fuel tank vent line, 2, to
the tee fitting.
3
2
10000865
54
7. Attach the firewall support, 1, to the firewall, 2,
and the clutch housing, 3. Secure with the retain-
ing bolts.
2
1
20000908
55
10-40
8. If equipped, Install the FWD driveshaft, 2, and se-

cure with the two roll pins, 1.
1
20000904
56
9. Install the starter, 2, onto the engine, and secure
with the retaining nuts. Connect the wires, 1, to
the starter, 2.
2
30997565 1
57
10. Install the hydraulic system pressure tube, 3, on
the hydraulic pump, 2, and the diverter valve.
11. Install the hydraulic system inlet tube, 1, onto the
hydraulic pump, 2. 1
12. Connect the main wiring harness connector. 2
13. Install the left and right deck onto the tractor.
14. Connect the throttle cable to the foot throttle con-
trol lever located on the right deck.
15. Install the left and right fenders on the tractor.
16. Install the seat and the seat base on the tractor.
3
30997557
Connect the seat safety start switch.
58
17. Install the light bars onto the fenders and the
ROPS.
10-41
18. If equipped, install the remote loader control

valve, 1, on the right fender. Connect the hydrau-
lic tubes.
19. Install the dash housing onto the tractor.
1
20. Connect the wiring connectors to the dash hous-
ing switches.
21. Connect the throttle cable to the dash mounted
throttle control lever.
30997555
22. Connect the instrument panel wiring plug to the

instrument panel. Install the instrument panel, 2, 1 2
1
into the dash housing, 3, and secure with two 3
screws, 1.
10998361
59
23. Install the main shift and the shuttle shift control
levers through the dash housing, and connect
the main shift bracket, 7, and the shuttle shift
bracket, 8, to the steering column, 9, with the re-
taining bolts, 6. Connect the lower main shift
shaft, 5, and shuttle shift shaft, 2 to the transmis-
sion shafts with the roll pins, 4 and 1, and retain-
ing ring, 3.
24. Install the hood on the tractor and connect the
headlight wiring connector. 6 9
8 7 6
2
4 5
1
3
10996566
60
10-42
25. Install the left, 1, and right, 2, rear hood side

panels. 2
26. Fill the hydraulic reservoir with NH 134 Hydraulic 1
Fluid, to the proper level.
NOTE: The following step is required on the TC35
tractor.
27. If the engine oil was drained, and the oil filter was
removed during disassembly, install a new oil fil-
ter on the engine, and fill the engine with the rec-
ommended oil to the proper level.
10000864
61
28. Connect the positive (+), 2, and the negative (-),
1, battery cables to the battery.
29. Check the fluid levels and start the tractor. Check
for leaks and proper operation of all systems.
30. Make any adjustments necessary for proper op-
eration of the tractor.
1 2
30997558
62
Attaching the HST to the Engine
1
WARNING
WARNING: Do not use the buckle-up bolts to
draw the HST together with the engine. Severe
damage to the drive train may result. 2

and 3, on the engine. 3
10000867
63
10-43
10000868
64
the engine. Align the splines on the HST input
shaft with the coupler on the engine flywheel. Ro-
tate the engine fan to align the input shaft and the
coupler. The floor jack or the hoist may need to
be raised or lowered to make alignment possible.
4. Connect the HST housing to the engine and
install the buckle-up bolts and nuts. Tighten the
buckle-up bolts and nuts in a criss-cross pattern.
Torque the M10 bolts and nuts to 32-41 ft.-lbs.
Torque the two M12 bolts to 60 ft.-lbs.
10000869
65
the tractor.
10000868
66
10-44

the tee fitting.
3
2
10000865
67
7. Attach the firewall support, 1, to the HST hous-
ing, 3, and the firewall, 2. Secure with the retain-
ing bolts.
3 2
10000863
68
8. Install the FWD driveshaft, 2, and secure with the
retaining bolts, 1, (one roll pin on standard FWD 1 2
axle). Torque the retaining bolts, 1, to 15 ft. lbs.
(20 N⋅m).
30996382
69
10-45
9. If equipped, connect the Sensitrack linkage, 1, to

the control arm, 2, at the Sensitrack clutch, 3.
3
1 2
30996381
70
10. Install the support bar stud, 3, into the mount, 4,
and secure with the castle nut, 2. Torque the
castle nut to 100-125 ft.-lbs. Install a new cotter
pin, 1, through the castle nut, 2, and the support
bar stud, 3.
3 1
4 2
20000902
71
11. Place a floor jack, 1, under the front of the tractor,
and raise the tractor. Remove the wood blocks,
2, from between the front axle, 3, and the
frame, 4.
1 4 2
10000866 3
72
10-46

the starter, 2.
2
30997565 1
73
13. Install the HST oil cooler tube, 1, and the HST
pressure tube, 2, onto the tractor. 1
30996397
74
15. Install the hydraulic system inlet tube, 1, onto the
hydraulic pump, 2. 1
16. Connect the two main wiring harness connec- 2
tors.
17. Install the tractor deck onto the tractor.
3
30997557
75
10-47
18. Install and connect the differential lock pedal, 1.

NOTE: For ease of control lever assembly, raise the
tractor on a floor jack and remove the rear wheels.
This is not required but will ease assembly.
1
10998223
76
19. Install and connect the full time 2WD lever, 1
20. Install and connect the parking brake lever, 2. 1
10998312
77
21. Install the HPL speed control shaft, 2, onto the
HPL shaft, 3.
22. Install and connect the control levers on the left
and right side of the tractor deck. 3
23. Install the left and right fenders on the tractor.
19998697
78
10-48
24. Install the left, 2, and right, 3, control pods on the

fenders. Install the control lever grips, 1, on the
control levers. 1
25. Install the floor mat onto the tractor deck.
26. Install the seat and the seat track on the tractor. 3
ROPS.
1
10997819/20
79
28. Install the cup holder/tool box, 2, on the left fend-
er, if equipped. 1
29. Install the remote, loader control valve, 1, on the
right fender, if equipped. Connect the hydraulic
tubes.
31. Connect the wiring plugs to the dash housing
switches.
10998371/8229
80
10-49

instrument panel. Install the instrument panel, 2, 1 2 1
into the dash housing, 3, and secure with two
screws, 1.
33. Install the hood on the tractor.
3
10998233
81
34. Install the left, 1, and right, 2, rear hood side pan-
els. 2
35. If removed, install the left and right rear wheels. 1
36. Fill the hydraulic reservoir with NH 134 Hydraulic
NOTE: The following step is required on the TC35D
tractor.
removed during disassembly, install a new oil fil-
ter on the engine, and fill the engine with the rec-
10000864
ommended oil to the proper level.
82
38. Connect the positive (+), 2, and the negative (-),
39. Check the fluid levels and start the tractor. Check 1
40. Make any adjustments necessary for proper op- 2
eration of the tractor.
10998231
83
10-50
ENGINE DISASSEMBLY
NOTE: Some procedures discussed in this chapter
are shown with the engine in the tractor. Many of the
procedures can be done with the engine in or out of
the tractor.
FUEL INJECTOR AND GLOW PLUG

5 4 4
REMOVAL
1. Clean all dirt and oil from the injectors and sur-
rounding areas.
2. Disconnect the fuel lines, 1, from the injectors
and cap all openings. 3
3. Remove the injector fuel leak-off line, 3. 2
4. Remove the injector assemblies, 2.
5. Remove the glow plug bus connector, 5, and re- 1
move the glow plugs, 4.
84
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Remove the oil pressure switch, 1. 1
85
TEMPERATURE SENDING SWITCH AND
2 1
ALTERNATOR REMOVAL
1. Remove the temperature sending switch, 1, from
the front of the cylinder head. 4
2. Loosen the alternator mounting bolts, 2, and re-
move the V-belt, 3, from the drive pulley.
3. Disconnect the alternator wires from the back of
alternator, 4. 2
4. Remove the alternator mounting bolts, 2, and re-
move the alternator.
3
86
10-51
FAN, WATER PUMP, AND EXTERNAL OIL

TUBE REMOVAL
1. Remove the fan and water pump assembly. See 1
“Fan Removal” and “Water Pump Removal” dis-
cussed later in this section.
87
2. Remove the external oil transfer tube banjo bolt,
1, from the front of the cylinder head. Figure 1-12
illustrates the 25 and 30 Series and Figure 1-13
illustrates the TC models.
19988040
88
AIR INLET MANIFOLD REMOVAL
Remove the six retaining bolts, 1, and remove the air
inlet manifold assembly, 2. 1 2
89
10-52
VALVE COVER REMOVAL

Loosen the three bolts, 1, to remove the valve 2
cover, 2. 1
90
ROCKER ARM SHAFT AND SUPPORT
BRACKET REMOVAL
Remove the rocker arm shaft and support bracket as 1
an assembly, 1.
NOTE: Alternately loosen the rocker support bolts a

turn at a time to prevent distorting the rocker shaft.
91
Op. 10 101
1 2
CYLINDER HEAD REMOVAL
1. Remove the valve stem caps, 1, and push
rods, 2.
NOTE: Keep all valve components in separately
marked containers for reassembly in their original
location.
2. To remove the cylinder head, remove the cylinder

head bolts, 3, by alternately loosening a half turn
at a time to prevent warping the head. 3
92
10-53
VALVE TAPPET REMOVAL

Remove the valve tappets, 1, from the machined
bore in the cylinder block.
93
FUEL SHUTOFF SOLENOID REMOVAL
Remove the wire connector and unscrew the fuel
shutoff solenoid, 1.
94
ENGINE TIMING GEAR COVER, TIMING
3
GEARS, AND CAM SHAFT
Timing Gear Cover Removal 1
1. Drain the engine crankcase oil.
2. Remove the crankshaft pulley. 2
2
3. Loosen the four injection pump mounting bolts,
2, and raise the injection pump, 3, enough to re-
move the spring pin, 1, and separate the gover-
nor link from the control rack. Remove the injec-
tion pump.
95
10-54
NOTE: Insert a small dowel through the fuel shut-off

solenoid hole and slide the control rack in, to allow
enough clearance to the cylinder block, for the pump
to be removed.
20002371
96
4. Remove the power steering pump reservoir tank
dipstick-filler cap, 1. 1
5. Remove the reservoir drain plug, 2, and drain the
hydraulic fluid out of the reservoir tank, 3, into a
suitable container.
30996392 2
97
6. Loosen the hose clamp, 1, on the suction hose,
2, and remove the suction hose from the steering
pump, 3.
2
7. Remove the pressure tube, 4, from the bottom of 1

the steering pump.
3
30996355 4
98
10-55
8. Remove the through bolts and nuts, 1, and re-

move the steering pump from the front cover.
Cap the lines and pump openings.
NOTE: Two of the power steering pump retaining
bolts are not shown.
30996393
99
9. Install and tighten two nuts, 1, against each other,
onto the retaining studs, 2. Remove the studs, 2,
and the hydraulic pump, 3.
3
20002372 2
100
10-56
10. Remove the retaining nut, 1. Pull crankshaft

pulley, 2, off of crankshaft, 3. 2
1
3
20002373
101
11. Remove the retaining bolts, 1, and lift the cover,
2, off the locating dowels. 1
102
Op. 10 106
Timing Gears and Camshaft Removal

1. Remove retaining ring, 1, and remove the idler 1
gear, 3, and oil pump assembly, 2.
103
10-57
2. Remove the two bolts, 1, securing the keeper

plate, 3. One must be accessed using the access
hole, 2, in the cam gear. 2
3. Slide the camshaft and gear out of the camshaft
3
bore.
1
104
Op. 10 102
Oil Sump Removal

1. Remove the oil sump retainer bolts, 1.
2. Remove the oil sump and discard gasket.
105
Oil Suction Pipe and Strainer Removal
1. Remove the two retaining bolts, 1. 2
2. Remove the oil strainer, 2, and rotate the oil suc-
tion pipe, 3, out of its bore. Remove from the front 3
side of the block.
106
10-58
Op. 10 110
Balancer Assembly-Removal
1. Remove the banjo bolts, 1, and the oil transfer
pipe, 2.
2. Loosen and remove the balancer retaining
bolts, 3. 6
NOTE: Observe the quantity and thickness of the 4
shims, 4, (if used) for re-installation upon assembly.
3. Remove the balancer assembly, 5, from the en- 4

gine block, 6.
5
2
1
20002374
107
Op. 10 105
Connecting Rods, Bearings, and Pistons, Rings 1

Removal
2
1. Remove the two bolts, 1, retaining the connect-
ing rod caps, 2.
2. Remove the connecting rod caps and lower half
of connecting rod bearing.
3. If necessary, remove any ridge from the top of the
cylinder bores using a suitable ridge reamer.
108
4. Push the piston and connecting rod out of the cyl-
inder block.
5. Replace the connecting rod cap to the piston as-
sembly it was removed from. Keep together in
cylinder sequence.
109
10-59
Op. 10 103
Flywheel Removal
1. Loosen the flywheel retaining bolts.
2. Using a brass drift and hammer, tap the end of
the crankshaft, 1, to loosen the flywheel, 2, from
the shaft.
2
1
110
Backplate and Oil Seal
1. Remove the backplate retaining bolts and re-
move the backplate.
2. Remove the rear oil seal, 1.
111
Crankshaft and Main Bearings Removal
1. Remove the crankshaft bearing holder retaining
bolts, 1.
2. Slide the crankshaft and main bearing assembly
through the rear of the engine.
1
112
10-60
DISASSEMBLY, INSPECTION, FITS, CLEARANCES,

AND ASSEMBLY OF COMPONENT ASSEMBLIES
Op. 10 101
CYLINDER HEAD DISASSEMBLY

1. Clean the cylinder head and remove any carbon
deposits from around the valve heads.
2
2. Use a valve spring compressor and remove the 4
valve spring retainer locks, 1, spring, 2, and 3
spring retainer, 3, from each valve, 4. 1
3. Remove the valves and place the valve compo-
nents together in separately marked containers
for reassembly in their original position.
113
CYLINDER HEAD INSPECTION AND
REPAIR
1. Clean all carbon deposits from the combustion
chamber and valve ports using a wire brush and
scraper.
2. Clean all dirt and residue from the gasket surface
using care not to scratch or nick the machined
surface.
3. Clean the cylinder head in solvent and air dry.
4. Inspect the head for cracks or damage in the fol-
lowing areas: 1
2
-- Valve ports
-- Valve seats, 2
-- Prechamber, 3
-- External cracks in the water jackets, 1
5. Inspect the gasket surfaces for scratches or
nicks, which could cause leakage.
6. Examine the core hole plugs for rust or signs of
leakage. If a plug shows signs of damaging rust
or leakage, replace all plugs in the head. 3
7. Inspect the prechamber for carbon deposits and 114
looseness. Remove any carbon deposits found.
If prechamber is found to be loose, cylinder head
may be warped.
10-61
8. Use a straight edge and a feeler gauge and

check the cylinder head for warp lengthwise,
crosswise, and diagonally.
115
VALVE SEATS 1
Examine the valve seats and surface the seat if dam-
aged. Valve seat grinding requires that the seat be
ground to the correct width and properly positioned.
A valve that extends too deep into the combustion
area will result in valve burning. If the valve is re-
cessed too deep into the head it will cause a rapid 2
build-up of carbon deposits.
3
116
1. Correct Valve Seat Width and Location
2. Correct Valve Head Margin N843 0.7 - 1.0 mm
(0.027 - 0.039I)
3. 45° Valve Seat Angle
1. Check the seat for surface defects. Use a 45° 150° 3

stone if necessary to reface. Grind away only
enough material to provide a smooth even seat. 90° 1
2. Check the seat width. If necessary, use a 15°
stone to lower the seat contact point and use a 30° 2
75° stone to raise the seat contact point.
0.020 IN.
NOTE: Refacing the seat should always be coordi- (0.5 MM)
nated with refacing of the valve to ensure a compres- MIN.
sion tight fit.
117
1. Seat angle - 45° Stone
2. Lower Seat Location - 15° Stone
3. Raise Seat Location - 75° Stone
10-62
VALVES
1. Clean all deposits from the valves using a soft
wire brush. Inspect the condition of the valves
and discard any that are badly burned, cracked,
or bent.
2
6 5
4
1 3
118
2. Using a micrometer, measure the valve stem at
points “A,” “B,” and “C.” A B C
A B C
119
1. 45° Angle Seat
2. Minimum Valve Margin
3. If inspection indicates that the valve may be re-

used, the valve should be ground.
4. After grinding the valve and seat, check to ensure
the seat contacts the center of the valve face. Us-
1
ing Prussian Blue, lightly coat the valve seat,
2
place the valve in position and rotate the valve
slightly while holding a light pressure against the
valve. If the blue is transferred to the center of the
valve face, the contact is correct.
120
10-63
5. If Prussian Blue is not available, mark the valve

face or seat, 1, with a soft lead pencil. Rotate the
valve slightly in the seat. The penciled lines will
be broken at the seat contact area.
121
VALVE GUIDES 1
Thoroughly clean the valve guides before attempting
to check internal wear.
1. Using a telescoping gauge and micrometer,

measure the valve guide bore at the top and bot-
tom wear points, 1.
1
122
2. Determine the valve stem to valve guide clear-
ance, 1, by subtracting the valve stem diameter
from the valve guide diameter. Replace valves if
the clearance, 1, is more than 0.2 mm (0.008I),
intake valves, or 0.25 mm (0.010I), exhaust
valves.
3. Replace the cylinder head if excessive clearance
is determined and the valves have met all speci- 1
fied measurement requirements. See “Specifica-
tions,” discussed later in this section.
123
10-64
VALVE SPRINGS
1. Place the valve springs on a flat surface. Mea-
sure the free length of the spring and square-
ness. Replace springs that do not meet the fol-
lowing specifications (all models):
Max. Out of Square Min. Free-Length

2.0 mm (0.079I) 33.5 mm (1.319I)
2. Place the springs in a suitable spring load tester

and measure the spring load rating. Replace
springs that do not meet the following specifica-
tions (all models):
124
Standard Maximum
8.1 kg (17.86 lbs.) 7 kg (15.43 lbs.)
at 30.4 mm (1.197I) at 30.4 mm (1.197I)
1
ROCKER ARMS 5
1. Remove setscrew, 1, that secures the rocker
arm, 2, to the support.
2. Remove the plug from the rear of the rocker shaft
support.
3. Thread an 8 mm bolt into the rear end of the 2
rocker shaft and slowly withdraw the rocker shaft 3
while at the same time removing the rocker arms
and springs. 4
4. Inspect the rocker arms and shaft for wear or
damage. Check the adjusting screws for dam- 125
aged threads or excessive wear. 1. Setscrew
2. Rocker Arm
5. Check the valve stem contact area for pitting or
3. Shims
excessive wear. Slight wear patterns may be re-
4. Spring
moved using a fine grit oil stone.
5. Rocker Arm Shaft
6. Using an outside micrometer, measure the wear

points, 1, on the rocker shaft. Replace the rocker
shaft if the wear at any point exceeds 0.2mm
(0.008I).
NOTE: Lube holes, one set on bottom of rocker shaft
at 180° from set screw hole and 90° from the rocker
hole.
126
10-65

measure the inside of the rocker arm. Replace
rocker arms having a bore diameter exceeding
11.57 mm (0.456I). Replace the rocker shaft
and/or rocker arm if the rocker arm to shaft clear-
ance exceeds 0.2 mm (0.008I).
NOTE: Rocker arms have no bushings and only one
lube hole.
20002375
127
PUSH RODS
1. Check the push rods for straightness by rolling on
a flat surface. Replace rods that are bent.
2. Inspect the ends of the push rods for excessive
wear. If any push rod is worn, the corresponding
lifter and rocker arm should also be inspected for
excessive wear.
CYLINDER HEAD ASSEMBLY

1. Insert each valve in the guide from which it was
removed and lightly lap the valve to be sure of an
even seat around the valve face. Remove the
valve and remove all traces of lapping com-
pound.
2. Install new intake valve seals on the valve guides
using a suitable driver.
3. Using a spring compressor, assemble the
valves, springs, retainers, and keepers.
CYLINDER BLOCK
1. Inspect the cylinder block top face for cracks,
damage, and warping in the same way as for the
cylinder head. Replace the cylinder block if warp
is greater than 0.12 mm (0.005I).
2. Visually inspect the cylinder bore. There should
be no scoring, rust, or corrosion.
10-66
3. Using a telescoping gauge in line with the crank-

shaft, measure the inside diameter of the top of
the bore (approximately 15 mm [0.59I] below
the top of the block) on all models.
4. Repeat this measurement at right angles to the
crankshaft at the same distance.
5. In line with the crankshaft at the bottom of the
bore, measure (approximately 117 mm [4.6I]
Model N844, and 127 mm [5″] Model N843 and
N844L) from the top of the cylinder.
128
6. Repeat this measurement at right angles to the
crankshaft at the same distance.
7. If any of the measurements taken indicate worn
or damaged cylinder bores, the cylinders must be
bored and oversize pistons installed, or replace
the block. Pistons are available in 0.5 mm
(0.020I) and 1.0 mm (0.04I) oversize. Bore and
hone the cylinder to obtain a piston wall clear-
ance of 0.038 - 0.064 mm (0.0015 - 0.0025I).
NOTE: If the cylinder bore measures 85.19 mm
(3.354I) replace the block.
Op. 10 105
PISTONS, PISTON RINGS, AND

CONNECTING RODS DISASSEMBLY
AND INSPECTION
Pistons
1. Remove the piston rings using a piston ring tool.
20002376
129
2. Remove the wrist pin, 1, retaining rings and drive
the wrist pin out of the piston using pin remover
Tool No. NH 01585, 2.
1
130
10-67
3. Wash the pistons and connecting rods in a suit-

able solvent and air dry.
4. Using a groove cleaner, remove the carbon de-
posits from the ring grooves. Be careful to avoid
cutting any metal from either side or the bottom
of the grooves.
131
5. Inspect the piston ring lands for excessive wear.
Use a new ring, 1, and feeler gauge, 2, to check
the ring side clearance. Replace pistons having
a ring side clearance exceeding the following di- 1
mensions:
2
Compression Ring Oil Control Ring
0.25 mm (0.010I) 0.25 mm (0.010I)
132
6. Using a micrometer, check the piston diameter at
90 degrees from the wrist pin bore. Replace pis-
tons that are worn to less than the following di-
mensions:
Model Wear Limit

All 83.9 mm (3.3I)
133
10-68
7. Using a telescoping gauge and a micrometer,

measure the piston pin bore and the wrist pin di-
ameter. Replace piston and/or wrist pins that ex-
ceed the following limits:
Bore Diameter: 28.0 mm (1.102I)
Pin Diameter: 27.98 mm (1.101I)
Clearance: 0.02 mm (0.0008I)
NOTE: In some instances the wrist pin diameter may
be equal to or slightly larger than the wrist pin bore.
This interference fit is normal.
134
Piston Rings
1. Position the piston rings, 1, one at a time, in the
cylinder to the lowest point of travel. Use an in-
verted piston to square the ring in the bore. 2
2. With a feeler gauge, 2, measure the ring gap. 1
The ring is shown at the top of its travel for
clarity.
3. Replace worn rings with end gap clearance in ex-

cess of 1.0 mm (0.039I).
135
Connecting Rods
1
1. Check the connecting rods for damage and align- 2
ment. Place each rod in an alignment fixture to
check for bent or twisted condition.
2. Straighten or replace rods that are bent or twisted
more than the following dimensions: 3
Max. Bend: 0.15 mm (0.0059I)
per 100 mm (3.94I)
Twist: 0.2 mm (0.0078I)
per 100 mm (3.94I) 2 BENT ROD
1
TWISTED ROD
136
1. Alignment Fixture
2. Gauge
3. Connecting Rod
10-69
3. Using a telescoping gauge and a micrometer,

1
measure the inside diameter of the connecting
rod wrist pin bushing.
4. Replace bushings measuring more than the
following:
Model Max. Inside Diameter

All Models 28.021 mm (1.103I) 3
2
137
5. Remove and install the connecting rod wrist pin
bushings using a suitable driver and press a new
bushing into the rod bore.
6. Ream and hone the bushing to the following fin-
ish size. 1
Pin to Bushing Clearance 2

3
Std. Max.
0.010 - 0.025 mm 0.08 mm
(0.00039I - 0.00098I) (0.0031I)
138
1. Hole Gauge
2. Micrometer
3. Connecting Rod
7. When installing a new piston pin bushing, use the

hole in the rod and drill a lube hole in the new
bushing.
139
1. Press
2. Connecting Rod
3. Bushing Driver
10-70
8. Install the connecting rod on the crankshaft and

measure the play in shaft direction. If the play is
more than 0.7 mm (0.028I) replace the connect-
ing rod. 1
140
1. Side Clearance Check 0.7 mm (0.028″) Max.
Connecting Rod Bearing Oil Clearance Check

2
1. Remove oil or foreign matter from the bearing
and crankshaft.
1
2. Cut a piece of plastigauge, 1, to the same width
as the bearing. Place it on the crankshaft. Avoid
the oil hole.
3. Install the rod cap and torque to 49.0 - 53.9 N⋅m
(36.2 - 39.8 ft.-lbs.).
4. Remove the rod cap and measure the width of
the flattened plastigauge using the plastigauge
scale.
START FLATTENED
5. The width of the widest flattened plastigauge is 141
the minimum clearance and the width of the nar- 1. Plastigauge
rowest plastigauge is the greatest clearance. Se- 2. Bearing Clearing Check
lect the proper size bearing liners to obtain the
correct clearance. See “Specifications” later in
this section.
PISTONS, RINGS, AND CONNECTING ROD

ASSEMBLY 2
1. Assemble the pistons and connecting rods with
the matching marks, 1, on the rods on the same
side as the trade name “SHIBAURA,” 2, em-
bossed on the inside of the piston skirt. Install the
piston pin, and retaining rings.
142
10-71
2. Using a suitable ring expander tool, install the

piston rings positioning the ring gaps at approxi-
mately 120 degrees from each other. Install the
third (oil ring) first as follows:
Put the expander ring, 1, into position in its THIS STYLE 2
groove. OIL RING
Fit the upper side rail, 2, on top of the expander. 1
Insert the end of the side rail into the groove and
hold it in position with the thumb. Slide the rail into
position with the other thumb.
Fit the lower side rail, 3, in a similar manner.
3
143
Op. 10 103
CRANKSHAFT
Main Bearing and Thrust Washer Removal and
1
Inspection
1. Remove the two retaining bolts from the bearing
holders, 1.
2
2. Remove the bearing holders and bearing liners,
2.
3. Position a piece of plastigauge across the full
width of the bearing liners. 4
4. Install the bearing holder and tighten the bolts to
49.0 - 53.9 N⋅m (36.2 - 39.8 ft.-lbs.).
NOTE: Do not permit the bearing holder to rotate,
even the slightest amount. 3
5. Remove the bearing holders and measure the

width of the flattened plastigauge using the
gauge printed on the plastigauge package.
6. Replace components or grind the crankshaft to
the next undersize bearing as required to obtain
the correct clearance. See “Specifications” later
in this section.
7. Check the thrust washer for wear, poor contact, 1. Holder
burning, or other defects. Using a micrometer 2. Upper Main Liner (with oil groove)
measure the washer thickness. If washer thick- 3. Thrust Bearing
ness is not within allowable limits or found to be 4. Lower Main Liner (no oil groove)
defective, the washers must be replaced.
Standard Thickness: 2.95 mm-3.0 mm
(0.116I-0.118I)
Allowable Limit: 2.8 mm (0.11I)
10-72
Crankshaft Inspection
1. Inspect the crankshaft gear teeth for wear or 1 2
damage and replace if necessary.
1 2
A
B B
144
A. Taper Readings: 1 vs. 2
B. Out-of-Round Readings: A vs. B
2. Using a dial indicator, measure the crankshaft

journals for size, runout, and tapper.
2 2
3. The amount of tapper in a journal is the difference
in the measurements taken at points 1 and 2 on 1 1
a journal.
4. The amount of out-of-round in a journal is the dif-
ference in the measurements taken at 90° points
on the journal.
NOTE: The smallest reading taken at any one of
the readings indicates the size of the journal.
See “Specifications” for wear limits and repair
recommendations.
145
NOTE: Undersize bearings are available in 0.25 -
0.50 mm (0.010 - 0.020I) for both main and crank-
pin journals. See “Specifications” for wear limits and
bearing usage.
5. Mount the crankshaft in a set of V-blocks

and measure the amount of runout using a dial
indicator.
6. Straighten or replace crankshafts that exceed
runout specifications. See “Specifications,” dis-
10-73
CRANKSHAFT BEARING (BUSHING)

INSPECTION
1. Check the bearing (bushing) for peeling, melting,
seizure, or poor contact.
measure the oil clearance between the bearing 3
1 2 4
(bushing) and the crankshaft journal.
3. Measure the inside diameters at positions 1 and
2. At each position, measure in both directions 3
and 4. The oil clearance can be obtained by sub-
tracting this value from the maximum crankshaft
journal diameter.
4. If the oil clearance exceeds 0.2 mm (0.0078I) re- 146
place the bearing (bushing) or grind the crank-
shaft journal. In this case, use an undersized
bearing (bushing).
CRANKSHAFT BEARING (BUSHING) CYLINDER

REPLACEMENT CLINCH BLOCK
15
1. Remove the bearing from the front of the cylinder 12.5
block housing using a bushing driving tool to pre-
vent damage.
2. Inspect the bushing housing for marks,
FRONT SIDE
scratches, or damage.
3. The bushing should be smoothly pressed into the
correct depth by using a bushing driving tool,
aligning the oil hole, and direction of bushing.
• Press the bushing into the cylinder block 1
from the engine front side. ALIGN
NOTE: Do not press the bushing into the cylinder 147
block from the opposite side.
NOTE: The correct pressing side is chamfered, etc.,

to allow smooth operation.
• Lubricate the outer surface of the bushing.

• Align the oil hole, 1, of the housing and bush-
ing.
• Press the bushing into the housing until the
correct depth by using a bushing driving tool.
4. Confirm the housing and bushing oil holes are in
alignment.
10-74
CRANKSHAFT MAIN BEARING ASSEMBLY

1 1 1
1. Install the bearing holders, 1, along with their lin-
ers. The rear bearing is also assembled along
with the thrust bearing halves, one located on
each side of the bearing. Be sure the bearing
holders are correctly positioned on the shaft with
the chamfered edge facing forward.
2. Torque the bearing holder retaining bolts to 49.0
- 53.9 N⋅m (36.2 - 39.8 ft.-lbs.).
2 3
148
1. Bearing Holder
2. Thrust Bearing
3. Holder Chamfer (stepped)
PORT BLOCK REMOVAL

4
NOTE: The oil pump shaft and port block assembly
is a press fit in the block.
1. Using special Tool No. NH11097, 3, place the col-

lars in the grooves of the port block assembly.
2. Align the set screws, 2, of the puller, 3, with the
counterbores in the collars and tighten.
3. Using a sliding hammer, 1, remove the port block.
3 2
4. Remove plate, 4, from the block.
1
149
PORT BLOCK INSTALLATION
1. Using special Tool No. NH00117, 2, insert the
threaded guide pins, 1, into the cylinder block. 1
2. Assemble the oil pump shaft to the port block us-
ing nut and washer.
3. Insert the port block assembly into the installer
and place on the guide pins.
4. Using a suitable driver, install the port block as-
sembly. The installer must bottom against the en-
gine block when fully positioned.
2
NOTE: Plate, 4, must be removed from engine block
for proper installation of the port block. 150
10-75
Op. 10 106
TIMING GEAR
1. Check the timing gears for wear and damage on
the contact area. Replace if any defect is found.
2. Measure the backlash of gears with a feeler
gauge or dial indicator. If the allowable limit is ex-
ceeded, replace all timing gears.
Standard Allowable Limit

0.08 mm (0.003I) 0.25 mm (0.010I)
151
CAMSHAFT DISASSEMBLY 8
1. Remove the slider, 1, from the camshaft gear. 6
4 5
2. Using a gear puller, remove the gear assembly,
2, spacer, 3, spacers, 4, spacer gear, 5, bearing, 2
6, and key, 8, from the camshaft, 7. 3
9
7
1
152
CAMSHAFT INSPECTION
1. Place the camshaft in a set of V-blocks and check
1
the runout using a dial indicator, 1.
2. Replace or straighten the camshaft if the runout
is greater than 0.1 mm (0.004I).
3. Using a micrometer, measure the height of the
camshaft lobes.
4. Replace the camshaft if any of the cam lobes are
worn to less than the following dimensions:
Valve Lobe: 34.1 mm (1.3425I)
Injection Pump Lobe: 42.8 mm (1.685I)
153
10-76
CAMSHAFT ASSEMBLY 8
1. Install bearing, 6, two spacers, 4, spacer gear, 5, 6
and spacer, 3. 4 5
NOTE: The spacer gear, 5, serves as a spacer only. 2
There is no other purpose for this gear. 3
9
2. Insert key, 8, into key slot on shaft and press the 7
gear assembly over the shaft onto the key. 1
154
Op. 10 103
FLYWHEEL
1. Inspect the ring gear for cracked, broken,
chipped, or worn gear teeth. If found damaged,
replace the ring gear.
2. If necessary, remove the starter ring gear using
a hammer and chisel to crack the ring gear.
3. To reinstall a new ring gear, heat the new ring
gear to 120 - 150°C (245 - 300°F) from the inside
only. Be careful not to overheat the ring gear
teeth. Use a temperature sensitive crayon to
mark the inside of the ring gear. Quench the ring
155
gear quickly to obtain a good shrink fit onto the
flywheel.
10-77
Op. 10 102
TIMING GEAR HOUSING 2

The timing gear housing, 3, contains the front oil seal,
1, power steering seal, 4, and the governor linkage
assembly, 2. See “Governor Assembly”, for governor 3
linkage repair and replacement procedures.
156
Front Oil Seal and Steering Pump Seal
Replacement
1. Remove the front oil seal, 1, from the timing gear 2
cover, 3, and insert a new oil seal in its place.
2. Remove the steering pump seal, 4, located on 3
the front of the timing gear cover, and replace
with a new seal.
4
157
10-78
ENGINE REASSEMBLY
Op. 10 103
1
CRANKSHAFT AND BEARING HOLDER
REASSEMBLY
1. Install the crankshaft with bearing holder through
the rear of the cylinder block.
2. Align the threaded holes on the bearing holders
with the bolt holes in the cylinder block.
3. At the flywheel end install the two socket head
hex bolts, at each center bearing install the hex
head bolt. Torque the socket head bolts to 24 - 31
N⋅m (18 - 22 ft.-lbs.). Torque the hex head bolts
to 49 - 54 N⋅m (36 - 40 ft.-lbs.). 158
1. Bearing Holder Bolts
4. Using a dial indicator, measure the crankshaft

end float (thrust).If the thrust is not within the al-
lowable limit, remove the crankshaft and check
the thrust washers.
Standard Thrust Allowable Limit

0.1 - 0.4 mm 0.5 mm (0.020I)
(0.004 - 0.016I)
159
REAR OIL SEAL AND BACKPLATE
ASSEMBLY
1. Install the rear oil seal, 1, over the rear of the
crankshaft.
NOTE: The rear oil seal is a press fit retained by the
backplate.
2. Apply liquid gasket sealer to the backplate at- 1

taching bolts,install the back and tighten the back
plate bolts to 14 - 18 N⋅m (10 - 13 ft.-lbs.).
160
10-79
FLYWHEEL
1. Fit the flywheel, 2, to the crankshaft, 1, and align
the bolt holes.
2. Install the flywheel retaining bolts and tighten to
69 - 78 N⋅m (51 - 57 ft.-lbs.).
2 1
161
Op. 10 105
1
PISTONS AND CONNECTING RODS
1. Coat the bearing faces, pistons, and piston rings
with clean engine oil. Slide the piston rings to per-
mit a sufficient amount of oil to be applied in the
grooves.
2. Set the piston ring gaps 90 degrees apart from
each other. Do not position these gaps toward
the piston pin or the right angle of the pin.
3. Using a piston ring compressor, 1, insert the pis-
tons in the cylinders with the prechamber side of
the piston facing the injection pump side. The
162
connecting rod marks should also face the injec-
tion pump side.
NOTE: Install the pistons from the front to the rear in
order.
4. Install the connecting rod caps, 2, making sure
the rod and cap matching marks align. Tighten 1
the connecting rod cap screws, 1, to 36-40 ft. lbs. 2
(49-54 Nm).
NOTE: After installation, ensure the crankshaft
moves freely. Ensure the axial play of 0.1 - 0.3 mm
(0.004 - 0.012I) is provided.
163
10-80
Op. 10 110
No. 1 No. 4
BALANCER ASSEMBLY - INSTALLATION
No. 2 No. 3
(N844 and N844L Engines)
NOTE: The balancer assembly on the N844 (TC40,
40D) engine is different than the balancer assembly
on the N844L (TC45, 45D) engine due to the N844L
engine’s different connecting rods and longer piston
stroke.
1. Position the cylinder block with the oil pan mount-

ing surface facing down. 20002376A
2. Position the No. 1, and the No. 4 pistons at top 164
dead center.
20002457
165
3. With the balancer weights centered straight
down (weights facing away from engine block),
position the balancer assembly, 5, and the origi- 4 6
nal quantity of shims, 4 (if used) on the cylinder
block, 6, using the dowel pins for alignment.
4. Install the retaining bolts, 3, and tighten to 49 - 4
53.9 N⋅m (36.2 - 39.8 ft.-lb.).
5. Install the oil transfer pipe, 2, and secure with the
banjo bolts, 1. 3
5
NOTE: If required, inspect the backlash between the
balancer gear and the drive gear. Adjust the backlash 1
20002374
2
to 0.2 - 0.4 mm (0.008 - 0.016 in.) using shims.
166
Balancer Shims
Engine Model Shim Thickness

N844 TC40, 40D 0.1 mm (.004 in.)
N844L TC45, 45D 0.2 mm (.008 in.)
10-81
OIL SUCTION PIPE AND SUCTION

STRAINER
1. Install a new O-ring on the suction pipe and rotate
the suction pipe into its bore.
2. Install the suction strainer over the suction pipe
and align the bolt holes.
NOTE: If suction strainer bolt holes do not align, the
suction pipe is either too far into its bore or not in far
enough. Adjust as needed.
3. Install the strainer retaining bolts and tighten to

8.8 - 12.9 N⋅m (6.5 - 9.5 ft.-lbs.).
167
OIL SUMP
1. Apply a thin coat of gasket sealer to the oil sump 1
sealing area.
2. Install a new gasket, the oil sump and the retain-
ing bolts. Tighten the retaining bolts, 1, diago-
nally and evenly.
168
Op. 10 106
2
TIMING GEAR COVER, TIMING GEARS,
AND CAMSHAFT ASSEMBLY
4
3
Camshaft and Camshaft Gear
1. Install the front plate, 4, and gasket on the mount-
ing dowels and tighten the retaining bolts.
2. Carefully insert the camshaft into its bore so as
not to damage the bearings or bearing surfaces. 1
3. Align the retaining plate, 3, to the block
bolt holes, 2, and install the retaining
bolts, 1. Tighten the bolts to 8.8 - 12.9 N⋅m
(6.5 - 9.5 ft.-lbs.). 169
10-82
Op. 10 106
4
IDLER GEAR, OIL PUMP, AND INJECTION
TIMING
1
1. Install the thrust washer, on the idler gear shaft.
2. Align the timing marks, 1, on the idler gear, 3,
5
crankshaft gear, 5, and the camshaft gear, 4.
3. Complete the installation of the oil pump and ad-
just axial clearance. See “Oil Pump Installation
and Adjustment” discussed later in this section.
NOTE: Do not turn the crankshaft until the timing 3 2
gear cover is installed.
170
NOTE: Number 3 piston (cylinder next to the fly-
wheel) will be at top dead center when timing marks
align.
TIMING GEAR COVER .

1. Install new cover gasket. 1
2. Insert the governor linkage through the block.
3. Rotate the oil pump cover to position the spring
pin hole, 2, Figure 1-90, to align with spring pin
in timing cover.
4. Install cover locating pin in the oil pump cover
plate.
5. Install the cover retaining bolts, 1
171
10-83
CRANKSHAFT PULLEY
1. Align the keyway on the crankshaft pulley, 2, and
2
the crankshaft, 3. Push the pulley onto the shaft.
2. Install the retaining nut, 1, and torque to 274.4 -
333.2 N⋅m (202.5 - 245.9 ft.-lbs.).
1
20002373
172
FUEL INJECTION PUMP ASSEMBLY
1. Insert the injection pump, 2, and shim in position 2
in the block. Connect the injection pump control
rack and governor link with the snap pin, 1.
2. Push the injection pump, 2, onto its mounting
studs, 3, and install the retaining nuts and bolts. 3
3
173
10-84
HYDRAULIC OIL PUMP 2. Remove the two nuts, 1, from the retaining
studs, 2.
1. Mount the hydraulic oil pump, 3, on the timing
case cover, and install the retaining studs, 2.
3
20002372 2
174
POWER STEERING PUMP
1. Mount the power steering pump in position on the
timing gear cover with two retaiing bolts (not
shown), and two retaining nuts, 1.
30996393
175
2. Attach the pressure tube, 4, to the bottom of the
steering pump, 3. 2
3. Install the suction line, 2, on the suction tube and
install the hose clamp, 1. 1
30996355 4
176
10-85
Op. 10 101
HEAD GASKET SELECTION

During assembly, the ultimate engine compression
ratio is established by the thickness of the head gas-
ket used. For service replacement, head gaskets of
different thickness are available. The correct head
gasket must be selected based upon the amount the
piston protrudes above the face of the block when at
top dead center. The correct head gasket usage is
determined as follows:
1. Position each of the pistons at top dead center 20002377

and, using a dial indicator, determine the dis-
tance each piston projects above the face of the 177
block.
NOTE: Measure each of the pistons while holding a
slight down pressure on the piston. Use the dimen-
sion taken from the cylinder which has the greatest
projection and select a head gasket as indicated in
the following chart.
NOTE: The variation in the amount of protrusion

among all pistons must be within 0.1 mm (0.004 in.).
HEAD GASKET SELECTION CHART

Model Measurement Value Head Gasket Part No. Installed Thickness
N843L 0.0177 - 0.024 in. (0.45 - 0.6 mm) 111147490 0.0512 in. (1.3 mm)
(TC35)
0.024 - 0.028 in. (0.6 - 0.7 mm) 111147500 0.0551 in. (1.4 mm)
N844 0.0197 - 0.0236 in. (0.5 - 0.6 mm) 111147510 0.0472 in. (1.2 mm)
(TC40)
0.0236 - 0.02756 in. (0.6 - 0.7 mm) 111147520 0.0512 in. (1.3 mm)
N844L --0.0118~ - 0.0177 in. (--0.3~-0.45 mm) 111147450 0.0157 in. (0.4 mm)
(TC45)
--0.00787~ - 0.0188 in. (--0.2~-0.3 mm) 111147460 0.0197 in. (0.5 mm)
1
CYLINDER HEAD ASSEMBLY
1. Install the valve tappets, 1.
178
10-86
2. Select the proper head gasket and place it on the

block with the side marked with the last four digits 11 9 13
of the part code no. up.
5
3. Tighten the head bolts in the sequence as 3

shown. Tighten first to half torque value, then to
1
the final torque specification of 98 - 103 N⋅m 2 7
(72.3 - 76 ft.-lbs.).
4
4. Replace the push rods and valve stem caps in 12
their original location.
8 6
5. Install the rocker shaft support assembly onto the 14 10
head and tighten the bolts to 27 - 39 N⋅m (20 -
29 ft.-lbs.). Model TC35, TC35D
179
Model TC40, TC40D, TC45, TC45D

20002380
180
Op. 10 106
1
VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT
2
1. Adjust the rocker arm to valve clearance. Be sure
the tappet is in its lowest position before making
the adjustment. To be sure the tappet is in its low- 3
est position, bring the piston to top dead center
on the compression stroke (both valves closed).
2. Loosen the nut and adjust the clearance of both
the intake and exhaust valves to 0.2 mm (0.008I)
with the adjusting screw.
20002378
181
1. Adjusting Screw
2. Locknut
3. Valve Clearance 0.2 mm (0.008″)
10-87
VALVE COVER
1. Install a new gasket and position the valve cover,
1, over the rocker arms. 1 2
2. Install the three valve cover retaining bolts, 2,
and tighten to 12 - 16 N⋅m (9 - 19 ft.-lbs.).
182
WATER PUMP AND COOLING FAN
5 1 6
ASSEMBLY
Install the water pump and fan assembly. See “Water
Pump Installation” and “Cooling Fan Assembly
Installation” discussed later in this section.
AIR INTAKE MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY

1. Install the spacer gasket, 2, spacer, 3, manifold 2
gasket, 4, and intake manifold, 1, in position.
3
2. Install the retaining bolts, 5 and 6, and evenly
tighten. 4
183
EXTERNAL OIL TUBE
Connect the external oil tube to the cylinder head and
on side of engine block. Tighten the banjo bolt, 1, to
10 - 13 N⋅m (7 - 9 ft.-lbs.).
NOTE: The banjo bolt has oil port holes drilled in it.
Do not use a standard bolt in its place.
1
19988040
184
10-88
GLOW PLUG AND CONNECTOR

2
1. Install the glow plugs, 1, and torque to 15 - 20 N⋅m
(11 - 14.5 ft.-lbs.).
2. Install the glow plug connector, 2.
185
FUEL INJECTOR
2
Install the fuel injectors, 1, and torque to 60 - 69 N⋅m
(43.4 - 50 ft.-lbs.).
186
Op. 10 218
2 4 2
FUEL PIPING
1. Install the fuel return line, 4, on the injectors, 2,
and injector pump, 3.
2. Install the injection piping, 1, and torque to 15 - 3
24 N⋅m (11 - 18 ft.-lbs.).
187
10-89
ALTERNATOR AND TEMPERATURE

2 1
SENDER SWITCH
1. Install the temperature sender switch, 1, and
torque to 25 - 29 N⋅m (18 - 21.7 ft.-lbs.).
4
2. Install the alternator with its mounting bolts, 2,
snug.
3. Install the V-belt, 3, adjust to 10 - 15 mm (0.2 -
0.4I) deflection tension, and tighten the alterna- 2
tor bolts.
4. Connect the wiring to the back of the alternator 3
at location 4.
188
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
Install the exhaust manifold, 2, gasket and muffler, 1.
189
10-90
ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Op. 10 304 bearings passes through drilled passages in the

crankshaft to the three connecting rod bearings. The
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION remaining portion of the oil flow is directed through
The oil pump assembly is located within the idler gear the external tube to the rocker arm assembly. Oil
at the front of the block, below and to the left of the flows from the external tube into a passage in the
crankshaft as viewed from the front of the engine. rocker arm bracket to the rocker arm shaft. Oil leak-
The oil pump is driven by the crankshaft gear. age from clearance between the rocker arms and the
shaft overflows in the valve cover and lubricates the
Oil is picked up from the sump through the suction valve stems, push rods, and tappets. The relief valve
strainer and intake tube and drawn into the lower side is mounted on the side of the engine block and inter-
drilling in the block to the oil pump. Oil from the pump sects the main oil passage. When the oil pressure ex-
flows through passages in the block, past the relief ceeds the rated pressure, oil is bypassed through the
valve, through the oil filter and returns to the main oil relief valve directly to the sump. The cylinder walls,
gallery in the area of the drilled bolt located on the pistons, and piston pins are splash lubricated by the
side of the block. Oil flow in the main oil gallery ex- crankshaft.
tends to the four main bearings. Oil flow to the main
10-91
2 5
1
190
1. Oil Pump 4. Oil Pressure Switch
2. Relief Valve 5. Suction Strainer
3. Oil Filter
10-92
MODEL N843L -- TC35, TC35D
10-93
MODEL N844 and N844L -- TC40, TC40D, TC45, TC45D
10-94
Op. 10 206
1
OIL FILTER
Construction and Function
These engines utilize a cartridge type filter. Pressur-
ized oil flow from the pump enters from 1, and is fil-
tered by a full flow filter before discharge through 2. 2
When the full flow filter is clogged, the safety valve,
3, opens to bypass the oil.
191
Maintenance
The oil filter must be replaced every 100 hours of op-
eration. When installing a new filter, coat its face with 7
clean oil. Hand tighten only. 6
5
Op. 10 304
4
OIL PUMP 3
2 9
Removal 1
1. Drain the engine oil and remove the spin-on type
8
oil filter.
2. Drain the radiator and remove the cooling fan
and water pump assemblies. See “Cooling Fan 192
Removal” and “Water Pump Removal” dis-
3. Remove the timing gear cover. See “Timing Gear
Cover Removal” discussed earlier in this section.
4. Remove the retaining ring, 1. Remove the idler
gear, 8, and oil pump assembly, 1 through 9.
Inspection
1. Check for excessive wear on the pump cover, 5,
and the port block. If port block requires replace-
ment, see “Port Block Removal” discussed ear-
lier in this section.
2. Inspect the pump shaft and rotor, 6, for excessive
wear or scratches.
10-95
3. Measure the rotor to vane clearance. Replace

CLEARANCE
the components as required, if clearance is not
within specified tolerances.
Std. Max.
0.01 - 0.15 mm 0.25 mm
(0.004 - 0.006I) (0.010I)
193
Installation and Adjustment
1. If the port block assembly was removed, install a
new port block assembly. “See Port Block As- 7
sembly Installation” discussed earlier in this sec- 6
tion. 5
2. Install the thrust washer, 9, and align the set 4
marks on the idler gear, 8, crankshaft gear, and 3
camshaft gear, and install the idler gear on the 2 9
port shaft. 1
3. Install the rotor, 6, and spring, 7.
8
4. Install the oil pump cover, 5, shim, 4, spring, 3,

and collar, 2. Secure the assembly to the shaft
with the retaining ring, 1. 194
5. Using a dial indicator, 1, measure the axial move-
ment of the collar, 6. The standard clearance is 6
2
0.01 - 0.15 mm (0.00039 - 0.0059I) and the max- 1
imum allowable is 0.2 mm (0.0079I). Install or re- 4
move shims, 5, (PN SBA-199286340) as needed 5
to obtain the standard clearance value.
3
6. Install the water pump and cooling fan assembly.
See “Water Pump Installation” and “Cooling Fan
Installation” discussed later in this section.
7. Install the timing gear cover. See “Timing Gear
Cover Installation” discussed earlier in this
section.
8. Refill the radiator to its proper coolant level. 195
9. Replace the engine oil filter and fill the sump 1. Dial Indicator
with oil. 2. Spring
3. Idler Gear
4. Oil Pump Cover
5. Shim
6. Collar
10-96
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE CHECK

2
1. Disconnect the sending lead, 2, and remove the 1
oil pressure sending unit, 1.
196
NOTE: Main gallery access port, 1, located next to
the relief valve, 2, and external oil tube, 3. 3
2
1
20002360
197
2. Install the oil pressure test fitting No. NH00011,
1, and test gauge, 2. Start the engine and ob- 2
serve gauge indicator. Gauge should indicate
between 0.98 - 1.47 bar (14.22 - 21.33 psi) at low
idle and 2.45 - 3.43 bar (35.5 - 49.8 psi) at high
idle.
NOTE: Pressure test should be with engine at nor- 1
mal operating temperature.
3. If the gauge did not indicate the oil pressure

within specified tolerances at low and high idle,
troubleshoot the lube oil system. See “Trouble-
shooting” discussed later in this section.
198
10-97
OIL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE

Removal
Unscrew the oil pressure relief valve, 1, and remove
from the block.
NOTE: Pressure test should be with engine at nor-

mal operating temperature.
Installation
Install a new O-ring seal over the relief valve and
screw the valve into the block. Tighten to 58.8 - 68.6 20002379
N⋅m (43.4 - 50.6 ft.-lbs.).
199
OIL CONSUMPTION
Log oil consumption as follows:
1. Change the engine oil and filter. Use the oil speci-
fied in the loader operator’s manual.
2. Run the engine for 2 minutes.
3. Check the dipstick and add oil, if required, so the
level is at the full mark.
4. Fill the fuel tank with fuel.
5. Record fuel consumption in liters (gallons), oil
added in liters (gallons), and hour reading. Re-
cord fuel and oil use for 100 hours of operation,
which is the recommended oil change interval.
Check the dipstick before running the engine
each day.
The maximum allowable oil consumption is 0.8%.
The following table gives examples:
Fuel Consumption, Liters (Gallons) Oil Consumption, Liters (Quarts) Percentage

189.27 L (50 gal) 1.5 L (1.6 qts) 0.79%
378.54 L (100 gal) 3.03 L (3.2 qts) 0.80%
757.08 L (200 gal) 6.06 L (6.4 qts) 0.80%
If the oil consumption is greater than 0.8% of the fuel
consumption, oil usage is excessive. A sample cal-
culation for oil consumption follows:
Quantity of Oil in Liters (gallons)
% consumption = × 100
Quantity of Fuel in Liters (gallons)
Assume 0.25 Liters (0.07 gallons) oil is added for 50

Liters (13.2 gallons) fuel.
0.25 L 0.07 gallons
% consumption = × 100 or × 100
50 L 13.2 gallons
% consumption =0.5%
10-98
COOLING SYSTEM
Op. 10 400 is closed only a small amount of coolant is permitted

to flow through the thermostat bypass to the radiator
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION to effect a faster warm-up. When the thermostat is
The cooling system is the recirculating bypass type open, the coolant flows from the water outlet connec-
with a full length water jacket for each cylinder cast tion to the top tank of the radiator for maximum cool-
into the block. The coolant is drawn from the bottom ing.
of the radiator by the water pump and passes around
the cylinders and into the cylinder head. Cooling occurs as the coolant passes down through
the radiator cores which are exposed to the air
The thermostat is located in the front of the cylinder flow created by the fan as air is drawn through the
head and thermostatically controls the flow of coolant radiator.
from the engine to the radiator. When the thermostat
10-99
200
10-100
MAINTENANCE Drain and flush the cooling system every twelve

months and replace the coolant with fresh antifreeze
WARNING and pure water.
The cooling system operates under pressure
which is controlled by the radiator cap. It is dan- After the coolant has been drained from the radiator
gerous to remove the cap from a hot engine or and block, flush the system by placing a water hose
while the engine is running. Always shut the en- in the radiator filler neck. With the drain open and the
gine off and allow it to cool before removing the system full of water, start the engine and run it until
radiator cap. When removing the cap, use a thick the water flowing from the drain is clear. Stop the en-
cloth to cover the cap and slowly turn the cap to gine and allow the system to drain, then replace the
the first stop to allow pressure to escape before coolant with new 50/50 mixture antifreeze and pure
removing the cap completely. water.
Clean the cooling system to remove rust, sludge, and RADIATOR CAP
other foreign material by using a coolant system The radiator cap acts to pressurize the cooling sys-
cleaning solvent. In severe cases, pressure flushing tem, as a pressure relief valve and also acts as a vent
may be required. A pulsating or reverse flow flushing valve. The pressure valve permits a limited pressure
will more effectively loosen and remove foreign ma- buildup in the cooling system as the coolant heats up.
terial than a steady flushing in normal direction of This increased pressure increases the boiling point
coolant flow. If pressure flushing is to be used, always of the coolant. If excess pressure builds up in the sys-
remove the thermostat and make sure the head bolts tem, the pressure relief valve will open until the pres-
are tightened properly. sure returns to the proper level, 0.9 bar (13 psi).
COOLANT When the engine is shut off and the coolant cools, a
vacuum condition is created in the system. A vent
The coolant is a permanent type ethylene-glycol valve in the radiator cap opens to permit outside air
base antifreeze and should be used all year. pressure to enter the system when this condition
exists.
10-101
Op. 10 402
THERMOSTAT
The thermostat, 1, is located between the coolant
outlet on the engine and the radiator. In this position
the thermostat is able to sense the coolant tempera-
ture in the engine and regulate the flow of coolant to 1
the radiator. When the engine is cold, only a small
amount of coolant flows to the radiator through the
thermostat bypass. As the engine warms up, the
thermostat opens to allow sufficient coolant flow to
the radiator to maintain a constant engine
temperature.
201
Op. 10 402
WATER PUMP 1
The water pump, 1, is an impeller attached to a shaft
which is belt driven by the engine crankshaft. The im-
peller circulates water by centrifugal force. Coolant
entering the pump housing from the radiator through
the lower hose is thrown outward against the housing
with sufficient force to cause a circulating action.
202
Op. 10 414
COOLING FAN
A seven-blade cooling fan, 1, is belt driven by the en-
gine crankshaft and is mounted on the water pump
shaft. The cooling fan is positioned behind the radia-
tor to draw air over the radiator cooling fins. To in-
crease and concentrate the volume of air flowing
through the radiator, a shroud is positioned around
the fan.
203
10-102
COOLING SYSTEM OVERHAUL
Op. 10 406
RADIATOR
Removal
1. Drain the radiator and engine coolant at tap, 1, 1
in a clean container. Remove the radiator cap to
assist draining.
30996388
204
2. Remove the upper, 1, and lower, 2, radiator
hoses from the radiator, 3.
1
30996394
205
3. Loosen the clamp, 1, on the air inlet hose, 2. Re-
1 2
move the inlet hose, 2, from the air cleaner, 3.
10998354
206
10-103
4. Remove the drain petcock hose, 1, from the ra-

diator, 2.
5. Loosen and remove the radiator mounting bolt, 2
3, from the radiator, 2. Repeat for the opposite
side.
1
6. Loosen and remove the radiator support brace,
and remove the radiator from the tractor.
30996395
207
Inspection and Repair
1. Inspect the radiator fins and be sure they are free
from obstruction.
2. Check the radiator for signs of coolant leakage
and repair as required.
Installation
1. Place the radiator assembly, 2, in position on the
tractor frame. 2
2. Install and tighten the radiator mounting bolts, 3.
3. Install the radiator drain petcock hose, 1, on the 1
radiator, 2.
4. Install the radiator top support brace.
3
30996395
208
5. Install the air cleaner inlet tube, 2, onto the air
1 2
cleaner, 3, and secure with the clamp, 1.
10998354
209
10-104
6. Install the upper, 1, and the lower, 2, radiator

hoses on the radiator, 3. Secure with the spring
1
clamps.
30996394
210
7. Close the radiator drain petcock bolt, 1.
8. Replace the coolant with 50/50 mixture anti-
freeze and pure water.
9. Install the radiator cap. Start the engine and run
1
for several minutes and check the hose connec-
tions for any leakage.
30996388
211
Op. 10 402
1
WATER PUMP
Removal
1. Remove the radiator assembly. See “Radiator
Removal” discussed previously in this section.
2. Loosen the alternator mounting bolts, 1, and ad-
justing bracket and remove the drive belt, 2. 1
2
212
10-105
3. Remove the attaching bolts, 4, cooling fan, 1, fan

holder, 2, and pulley, 3.
1 4
213
4. Remove the bypass hose, 1, and lower radiator
hose, 2, from the water pump, 3. 6
7
5. Remove the water pump retaining bolts, 8, and 1
remove the water pump, 3, and gasket, 5, from
engine.
6. Remove the water pump mounting plate, 4, and 3
gasket, 6.
4
5
2
8
214
1. Bypass Hose
2. Lower Radiator Hose
3. Water Pump
4. Mounting Plate
5. Gasket
6. Gasket, Mounting Plate
7. Retaining Bolt, (Mounting Plate)
8. Water Pump Retaining Bolt
10-106

Inspect the water pump for indications of coolant
leakage from around the pump shaft. If coolant leak-
age is evident, or if the water pump is noisy when run-
ning, replace the water pump.
Installation
6 7
1. Install the water pump mounting plate, 4, and
new gasket, 5.
1
2. Install the water pump, 3, and new gasket, 6, and
tighten the retaining bolts, 7 and 8.
3. Install the bypass hose, 1, and lower radiator 3
hose, 2, on the water pump and tighten the hose
clamps. 4
5
2
8
215
4. Install the pulley, 3, fan holder, 2, and cooling fan,
1, and tighten the attaching bolts.
216
5. Install the drive pulley and adjust the alternator
drive belt tension to obtain a deflection, 1, of 5 -
10 mm (0.2 - 0.4I) when 5 kg (11 lbs.) is applied
between the pulleys and tighten the alternator
mounting bolts.
6. Install the radiator assembly. See “Radiator
Installation” discussed earlier in this section.
217
10-107
Op. 10 402
THERMOSTAT
Removal
1. Remove the radiator cap. 1
2. Open the radiator drain tap, 1, and collect the
coolant in a clean container.
30996388
218
3. Remove the radiator hose, 6, and bypass hose,
7, from the thermostat housing, 2. 5 6
4. Remove the retaining bolts, 8, and remove the 8
thermostat cover, 5, gasket, 4, thermostat, 3, and
gasket, 1. 4
3
1
2
7
219
1
1. Place the thermostat, 3, in a container filled with
a 50/50 mixture of antifreeze and water. Insulate 2
the thermostat from the bottom of the container. 3
2. Place a high temperature thermometer, 1, in the
coolant mixture and heat the container.
3. Use a 0.08 mm (0.003I) feeler gauge, 2, to deter-
mine when the thermostat begins to open.
4. Note the coolant temperature at which the ther-
mostat starts to open and when it is fully opened.
5. Replace the thermostat if it fails to open at the
specified temperature.
220
Thermostat opening temperature:
Start to open: 80-84°C (176-183°F) - All models
Fully open: 95°C (203°F)
6. Thoroughly clean the gasket mating surfaces be-
fore installing thermostat.
10-108
Installation
1. Attach gasket, 1, and thermostat housing, 2, to 5 6
the engine block.
8
2. Place the thermostat, 3, in position in the thermo-
stat housing, 2. 1 4
3. Install the gasket, 4, and thermostat cover, 5, and 3
tighten the retaining bolts, 8.
1
4. Install the radiator hose, 6, and bypass hose, 7, 2
on the thermostat housing, 2, and tighten the
hose clamps. 7
5. Close the radiator drain and refill the radiator with
50/50 mixture of antifreeze and pure water.
221
6. Install the radiator cap and start the engine and
run for a few minutes to check for any leakage.
CAB HEATER
Installation
NOTE: If a cab heater is to be installed, use the fol-
lowing steps to correctly locate the installation points
for connection to the tractor’s cooling system.
1. Loosen the radiator drain petcock, and drain the
coolant into a suitable container. 1 2
2. Remove the plug, 1, from the thermostat hous-
ing, 2, and install the heater inlet (IN) fittings into
the thermostat housing.
30997563
222
3. Remove the plug, 1, from the top of the water
pump, 2, and install the heater return (OUT)
fittings. 1
4. Follow the instructions provided with the heater
kit, for further installation instructions.
2
223
10-109
10-110
SECTION 10 -- ENGINE
Chapter 2 -- Fuel Systems
CONTENT

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-112
Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-113
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-113
10 242 Description of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-114
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-116
10 244 Fuel Variation Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-121
10 244 CTD (Compact Timing Device) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-122
10 236 Pumping Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-124
10 214 Delivery Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-126
10 242 Injection Pump Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-128
10 230 Timing and Governor Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-131
Spill-Timing Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-132
Auto Bleed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-137
Bleeding to Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-138
Fuel Scre/High Idle Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-138
10 230 Governor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-139
10 218 Injectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-145
10-111
SECTION 10 - ENGINE - CHAPTER 2
SPECIFICATIONS
Table 1
INJECTION PUMP TC35 (N843L) TC40 (N844) TC45 (N844L)

Pump Manufacturer Assembly ZEXEL ZEXEL ZEXEL
Number 104135- 3050 104134- 4030 104135- 4020
Type In-Line In-Line In-Line
Timing (Before TDC) 17 - 19° 19 - 21° 17 - 19°
Timing (Piston Height at Injection: 2.854 - 3.554 mm 3.199 - 3.895 mm 2.854 - 3.554 mm
Start BTDC) (0.1123″ - 0.1399″) (0.1259″ - 0.1533″) (0.1123″ - 0.1399″)
Injection Nozzle
• Nozzle Type Throttle Throttle Throttle
• Needle Valve Diameter 0.4 mm (0.157″) 0.4 mm (0.157″) 0.4 mm (0.157″)
• Pintle Diameter 1.0 mm (0.039″) 1.0 mm (0.039″) 1.0 mm (0.039″)
Injection Pressure 146 bar 146 bar 146 bar
(2150 PSI) (2150 PSI) (2150 PSI)
Spray Angle 4° 4° 4°
Service Adjustments
• Idle Speed 1050 rpm 1050 rpm 1050 rpm
• Max. No-Load Speed 2815 - 2855 rpm 2815 - 2855 rpm 2815 - 2855 rpm
TORQUE SPECIFICAIONS
Delivery Valve Holder 39.2 - 44.1 N⋅m 39.2 - 44.1 N⋅m 39.2 - 44.1 N⋅m
(28.9 - 32.5 ft lbs) (28.9 - 32.5 ft lbs) (28.9 - 32.5 ft lbs)
Injector Assemble 59 - 69 N⋅m 59 - 69 N⋅m 59 - 69 N⋅m
(43 - 51 ft lbs) (43 - 51 ft lbs) (43 - 51 ft lbs)
STANDARDS FOR ADJUSTING THE INJECTION PUMP
Use the following standards when checking or adjusting the fuel injection pump, or after field rebuilding of the
pump.
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clockwise, viewed from driving side
Nozzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NP-DN4PDN117
Nozzle Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105148-1170
Nozzle Valve Opening Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 bar (2150 PSI)
Injection Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 mm inside diameter x 6 mm outside diameter - 320 mm long
Oil Flowing Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2 bar (2.8 PSI)
Test Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light Oil
10-112
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Injection Pump Retaining Nuts and Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 - 6.8 N⋅m (3.3 - 5.0 ft lbs)
SPECIAL TOOLS
Injector Tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FNH01721
Injector Adapter Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FNH01728
10-113
9
1 10
5 11
7 12
13
8 14
1
1. Five-Sided Bolt 6. Plunger Barrel 11. Eye Bolt
2. Sleeve Flange 7. Control Sleeve 12. Plunger
3. Delivery Valve Spring 8. Tappet 13. Control Rack
4. Delivery Valve Seat 9. Delivery Valve Holder 14. Plunger Spring
5. Delivery Valve 10. Pump Housing
INJECTION PUMP The plunger then ascends, and when the plunger
barrel’s suction and discharge port is closed by the
Op. 10 242 plunger, the fuel oil pressure increases. The fuel oil
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION then raises the delivery valve, 5, and is delivered
through the injection pipe to the nozzle holder. When
The injection pump is mounted in the engine’s cylin- the fuel oil pressure exceeds the force of the nozzle
der block. It does not have a camshaft, but is driven spring’s set force, fuel is injected into the engine’s
by the engine’s camshaft. Plunger, 12, movement is combustion chamber in the form of a fine spray.
constant, being raised by tappet, 8, and returned by
the plunger spring, 14, as the engine rotates. The The plunger further ascends, and when the plunger
plunger barrel’s, 6, suction and discharge port opens helix meets the plunger barrel’s suction and dis-
onto the pump housing’s fuel oil chamber, which is al- charge port, fuel delivery ends (at the same time in-
ways filled with fuel. jection from the nozzle ends). The delivery valve is
then closed by the set force of the delivery valve
When the plunger descends, fuel oil is sucked into spring so that fuel oil is no longer delivered, even
the plunger barrel, and when the plunger reaches it’s though the plunger continues to ascend.
lowest point, the suction of fuel oil stops.
10-114
The effective stroke is from the moment that the

plunger barrel’s suction and discharge port is closed
by the end of the plunger (beginning-of-injection) un-
til the suction and discharge port meets the plunger
helix (end-of-injection). The effective stroke can be
altered by rotating the plunger. Accordingly, the rela-
tionship between injection quantity and effective
stroke is proportional.
20000731
2
10-115
TROUBLESHOOTING - GENERAL
CONDITION CAUSE REMEDY

Fuel not reaching injection point Fuel shutoff valve closed Open the fuel shutoff valve
Restricted fuel filter Check and flush the fuel filter clean
Faulty fuel stop solenoid Check fuel stop solenoid. See

“Fuel Stop Solenoid”, Section 55
Air in fuel system Check for air leaks on the suction

side of system. Bleed the fuel
system
Fuel leakage Check the condition of the fuel lines

and connections for tightness or
possible damage
Fuel reaching nozzles but engine Low cranking speed Check cranking
will not start
Incorrect throttle adjustment Check throttle control or travel
Incorrect pump Check pump timing
Fuel Leakage Check all fuel lines for leakage or

possible damage
Faulty injectors See “Troubleshooting - Fuel

Injectors” later in this section
Low compression Check for air leaks on the suction

system
Engine hard to start Low cranking speed Check cranking
Incorrect throttle adjustment Check throttle control or travel
Restricted fuel filter Check and flush fuel filter clean
Contaminated fuel Check for water in fuel
Low compression Check engine compression. See

“Engine Compression Test”,
Section 10
Air in fuel Check for air leaks on the suction

side of system. Bleed the fuel sys-
tem
10-116

Engine starts and stops Low cranking speed Check cranking
Restricted air intake Check for restrictions in the air in-

take

tem
Engine overheating Check cooling system
Erratic engine operation (surge, Fuel leakage Check all fuel lines for leakage or
misfiring, poor governor regula- possible damage
tion)
Fuel starvation Check and flush clean restricted
fuel lines

tem
Faulty or sticking injector nozzles See “Troubleshooting - Fuel

Incorrect engine timing Check for improper valve adjust-

ment or faulty valve
Sticky hose cone Check nose cone for proper opera-

tion. Lubricate or replace if nose
cone is binding on end of camshaft.
Engine does not develop full power Incorrect throttle adjustment Check for insufficient throttle
or speed movement
Incorrect Maximum no-load speed Check maximum no-load speed

adjustment
Fuel starvation Check and flush clean restricted

fuel lines and filter

tem
Incorrect timing Check pump timing

tem

10-117

Engine emits black smoke Restricted air intake Check for restrictions in the air in-
take
Engine overheating Check cooling system
Incorrect timing Check pump timing
Faulty injectors See “Troubleshooting - Fuel


system

Pump fails to deliver fuel to all in- Blocked fuel lines to pump Remove fuel lines and flush or re-
jectors place
Air in system Check for air leaks on the suction

system
Control rod seized in “OFF” posi- Repair or replace control rod

tion
Pump fails to deliver fuel to one in- Air in fuel line to injector Bleed fuel line
jector
Plunger spring broken Replace spring
Plunger seized Repair or replace barrel and plung-

er assembly
Delivery valve seized Repair or replace delivery valve
Badly scored plunger and barrel Replace plunger and barrel

assembly
Governor fails to maintain maxi- Control spring broken Replace control spring
mum or minimum no-load fuel de-
livery Governor weights seized Repair or replace weight assembly
and/or camshaft
Governor weight carrier broken Replace weight assembly
Nose cone seized Replace nose cone and/or camshaft
Pump link spring broken Replace spring
10-118
TROUBLESHOOTING - FUEL INJECTORS

Nozzle does not “buzz” while in- Needle valve stuck Check needle valve for carbon
jecting build-up and binding
Excessive fuel leakage Check valve and valve seat for

scores or other indications of leak-
age
Nozzle damage Inspect faces and tighten nozzle

retaining nut
Nozzle leakage Needle valve worn Replace nozzle assembly
Blocked nozzle assembly Check for carbon or foreign matter

on faces of nozzle and nozzle hold-
er. Flush, clean, or replace.
Loose nozzle retaining nut Inspect faces and tighten nozzle

retaining nut
Nozzle opening pressure incorrect Incorrectly adjusted nozzle retain- Check retaining nut for looseness
ing nut
Damaged nozzle or seized needle Replace nozzle assembly

valve
Blocked nozzle orifice Check orifice for carbon or foreign

matter. Flush clean or replace.
Nozzle seat leakage Nozzle incorrectly seated Check for carbon or foreign matter
on faces of nozzle and nozzle hold-
er. Flush, clean, or replace.
Sticking or binding needle valve Repair or replace nozzle assembly
10-119
TROUBLESHOOTING - GOVERNOR

Sluggish governor response Nose cone binding on camshaft. Replace or lubricate nose cone on
end of camshaft.
Fuel rack binding in injection pump. Lubricate rack with penetrating oil
or submerse rack mechanism in
automatic transmission fluid. Re-
pair or replace injection pump.
Governor weights binding on pivot Repair governor assembly.

pins.
Linkage arm between governor Straighten or replace linkage arm

linkage and injection pump rubbing assembly.
on cylinder block.
Binding of throttle arm pivot shaft. Lubricate or replace throttle arm

shaft.
Engine runs away (excessive Nose cone stuck at “in” position. Replace nose cone or check cam-
speed) shaft for binding.
Linkage arm between governor Repair or replace linkage arm as-

linkage and injection pump stuck. sembly.
Fuel rack stuck in full fuel position. Lubricate or repair injection pump.
Engine will not develop rated Fuel screw adjusted too far into en- Contact New Holland representa-
speed gine block. tive for adjustment.
Fuel rack stuck in low fuel position. Lubricate or repair injection pump.
Engine speed surging Broken dampener spring on link- Replace dampener spring.
age arm.
Damaged governor spring. Replace governor spring.
Worn linkage. Inspect and repair linkage as

needed.
10-120
Op. 10 244
FUEL VARIATION MECHANISM
As well as pressurizing the fuel oil, the injection pump
also functions to vary the fuel injection quantity.
A control sleeve is installed around the plunger bar-

rel, and a flange on the bottom of the plunger is in-
serted into a groove in the control sleeve. Teeth on
the control sleeve are engaged with teeth on the con-
trol rack so that movement of the control rack results
in rotation of the plunger and, consequently, variation
of the fuel injection quantity.
Non Delivery Partial Delivery Maximum Delivery
10-121
DELIVERY VALVE ASSEMBLY

The delivery valve assembly consists of the delivery
valve and the valve seat.
When the force of the high-pressure fuel oil delivered

by the plunger exceeds the force of the delivery valve
spring, the delivery valve opens and fuel oil is deliv-
ered through the injection pipe to the nozzle holder.
After injection, the injection pipe retains a degree of

residual pressure adequate for the subsequent injec-
tion. The delivery valve prevents the reverse flow of
this fuel oil in the injection pipe to the plunger side. If
the residual pressure is too high, then the flow of fuel
oil will not be properly cut after injection. 5
By allowing the fuel oil in the injection pipe to retract

an amount equal to the piston’s retraction stroke, the
delivery valve improves the ability of the nozzle to cut
injection, as well as preventing dribbling.
Op. 10 244
CTD (COMPACT TIMING DEVICE)
MECHANISM
NOTE: The CTD (Compact Timing Device) mecha-
nism is installed on the tractors to reduce noise,
smoke, and exhaust gas emission etc.
When the plunger descends, fuel oil is sucked into

the barrel, and when the plunger reaches its lowest
point, the suction is finished.
SUCTION
6
In case of the standard plunger, the plunger then as-
cends, and when the barrel’s main port is closed by
the plunger, the fuel oil pressure increases, and the
fuel delivery starts.
CTD type plunger (the barrel has sub port), whether

the fuel delivery starts or not is determined by the en-
gine’s rev speed. When the engine’s rev speed is low,
the delivery does not start, because the sub port is
still opened, and fuel oil pressure does not increase.
But, when the engine’s rev speed is high, the sub
port’s diameter is so small that it can be considered
as being closed. For this reason, fuel oil pressure in- DELIVERY START (HIGH SPEED)
creases and the delivery starts.
7
10-122
The plunger further ascends, and when the barrel’s

sub port is closed by the plunger, the fuel oil pressure
increases and the delivery starts, regardless of the
engine’s rev speed.
DELIVERY START (LOW SPEED)
8
The plunger further more ascends, and when the
plunger main lead meets the barrel’s main port, the
fuel oil pressure decreases, and the fuel delivery
ends.
DELIVERY END
9
The fuel injection pump, 1, is a constant stroke type
pump and has one pumping element for each cylin-
der. The injection pump operates at one-half engine
speed.
10
10-123
Op. 10 236
PUMPING ELEMENTS
The pumping elements are operated by cam lobes,
1, that are incorporated on the engine valve train cam 1
shaft, which is driven by the engine oil pump.
11
The pumping elements accurately meter and deliver
the fuel to the injectors. Each of the pumping ele- 1
ments consists of a barrel, 1, and plunger, 2, lapped
together to give an accurate fit. Two diametrical dril-
lings in the barrel form fuel inlets, 3, and the barrel is
splined, with a master spline, for correct location 3 3
within the pump body.
An angular groove, 4, is machined around the plung-

er into which fuel leaking between the barrel and 5
plunger may accumulate. This leakage provides lu-
brication of the barrel and plunger surfaces. The
plunger has a fuel port, 5, which terminates in a heli- 6
cal groove, 6, machined in the periphery of the plung-
er. The purpose of the groove is to control the effec-
tive pumping stroke of the plunger. 4
12
10-124
2 D
A B C
13
1. Barrel 3. Fuel Inlet 5. Fuel Port - Center Drilling
2. Plunger 4. Annular Groove 6. Helical Groove
The element operates as follows: If the plunger is rotated clockwise so the helical
groove uncovers the inlet port at a lower point on the
Position A: With the plunger, 2, at the bottom of the plunger, the pumping stroke and the amount of fuel
stroke, fuel flows into the barrel, 1, through the two injected will be increased. Conversely, if the plunger
inlet ports, 3, to fill the space above the plunger, the is rotated counterclockwise, the effective pumping
center drilling, 5, and the helical groove, 6. stroke and amount of fuel injected will be reduced.
The rotation of the plunger is effected by an arm at
Position B: As the plunger rises, the two inlet ports the base of the plunger which engages with a fork on
in the barrel are cut off by the plunger, and the fuel is the control rod. Movement of the control rod towards
trapped. This point is called “spill cut-off” or “point of the rear of the engine turns the plungers clockwise
injection”. Further upward movement of the plunger and increases the fuel flow.
tends to compress the trapped fuel until the delivery
valve, which acts as a non-return and unload valve, Position D: At this stage, the plunger has rotated to
is lifted from the seat and allows the fuel to pass a position where the helical groove has reached the
through the injector line to the injector. The pressure bottom of the inlet port before the plunger has risen
developed lifts the injector needle valve off the seat sufficiently to close both inlet ports.
and injection takes place.
During the remainder of the stroke, the helical groove
Position C: Injection ceases when the upper edge of remains in contact with the inlet ports, so no pressure
the helical groove uncovers the lower edge of the in- is produced, and no injection can take place. This is
let port. The pressurized fuel is allowed to escape the “no delivery” or “stop” position, which occurs
back through the drilling to the low pressure area of when the stop lever moves the control rod to the fully
the inlet port. This pressure drop causes the injector forward position.
needle valve to close and injection to cease. The
plunger continues to the top of the stroke and is re- NOTE: The plungers have a slot machined across
turned by a spring for the next cycle. the crown. When the access fuel device is operated
and the control rod is in the maximum fuel position,
The effective pumping stroke is the distance between the slots align with the inlet ports of the barrel to re-
the top of the plunger and the point on the helical tard inlet port closure and assist easy starting
groove, which uncovers the inlet port.
10-125
Op. 10 214
DELIVERY VALVES
Located above each pumping element is a delivery 1 2 3 4
valve assembly. The delivery valve consists of a de-
livery valve holder, 1, spring, 2, piston and stem as-
sembly, 3, operating within a cylindrical guide, 4,
which terminates in a conical seat. The lower part of
the stem has four vertical flutes which accurately lo-
cate within the guide while permitting fuel to pass.
Above the flutes is a piston which is a lapped fit in the
bore of the valve guide.
The delivery valve serves as a non-return valve and

also as a means of rapidly reducing the fuel pressure 14
in the injector line when injection ceases. Rapid pres-
sure reduction is required to be sure injector needle
valve “snaps” shut to prevent fuel “dribble”, a condi-
tion which can cause carbon formation on the injector
tip.
10-126
4
1
3 2
A. Valve Closed B. Valve Open C. Valve Closing
15
1. Piston 3. Conical Seat
2. Valve Guide 4. Spring
The delivery valve operates as follows: Position C: The helical groove has uncovered the in-
let port and released the fuel pressure. The delivery
Position A: The pump plunger is at the bottom of the valve spring, aided by the high pressure still existing
stroke and the inlet ports are uncovered, so the barrel in the pipeline, forces the delivery valve to close rap-
and delivery guides are filled with fuel. As the fuel is idly.
at low pressure, the delivery valve is retained on the
seat by spring pressure. During closing, the piston portion of the valve return-
ing into the guide increases the volume of the injector
Position B: The plunger has risen and closed both line by the volume of this part of the valve.
inlet ports, pressurized the fuel and the injection pro-
cess begins. The pressurized fuel overcomes the This sudden increase in the volume of the injector
spring tension, lifting the delivery valve off its seat un- line causes a rapid collapse of pressure and allows
til the piston is clear of the guide, permitting fuel to the injector needle valve to “snap” shut.
pass to the injector.
10-127
Op. 10 214
INJECTION PUMP REMOVAL 1
1. Turn the fuel shut-off valve, 1 to the opposition.
2. For easier access to the injector line nuts, re-
move the filter from the bracket by removing the
two nuts, 2. 2
30000725
16
NOTE: Four cylinder shown.
1
3. Remove the fuel injection lines, 1, by loosening
nuts, 2, on the injection pump and the nuts on the
injectors.
NOTE: Cap and plug all openings to prevent contam-
ination.
30000726
17
4. Disconnect the fuel tank return line by removing
bolt, 1. 1
5. Disconnect fuel inlet line, 2, by loosening clamp
screw, 3. 3
30000727
18
10-128
6. Disconnect the wire, 1, to the fuel shut-off sole-

noid, 2, and remove the fuel shut-off solenoid.
7. Remove the mounting nuts and bolts, 3. 3
1
30000728
19
8. Raise the pump and remove the snap pin, 3, and
separate the governor link, 2, from the pump con-
trol rack, 1.
9. Remove the injection pump from the engine. 3
NOTE: If there are shims between the pump mount-
ing flange and the engine block, carefully remove the
shims and retain for installation.
2
20
1
21
10-129
REPAIR
If the injection pump is suspected of being faulty, it
should be repaired by an authorized Diesel Service
Station only.
NOTE: If repair is within New Holland warranty peri-

od, replace injection pump with a new pump from the
“New Holland Parts Department”.
INSTALLATION
3 4
Installation generally follows removal procedures in 5
reverse. If the pump is being replaced or if the timing
is unknown, proceed to “Timing and Governor Ad- 2
justment”, later in this section.
1. Attach the pump rack to the governor linkage.

2. Install injection pump assembly with shims into
engine housing.
3. Install the pump mounting nuts and bolts and
tighten to 13 - 17 N⋅m (9.4 - 12.3 ft lbs). 1
30000729
4. Install fuel solenoid, 1, into rear of injector hous-
ing and connect the electrical lead, 2. 22
5. Connect the fuel inlet line, 3, by tightening clamp
screw, 4.
6. Install the fuel return line by installing bolt, 5.
7. Install injector lines, 6, by tightening nuts, 7, at
the pump and nuts at the injectors. 8 6
8. If removed, reinstall the fuel filter onto its bracket
by tightening two nuts, 8. 7
9. Turn the fuel select, 9, to the on position.
After installation bleed air from the fuel system. See
“Bleeding the Fuel System”, later in this section.
NOTE: It may be necessary to verify pump timing. 9

Spill-time the pump as outlined in “Spill-Timing Pro-
cedure”, discussed in this section.
30000729
23
10-130
Op. 10 230
TIMING AND GOVERNOR ADJUSTMENTS
INSTALLATION (New Pump or Drive Component)
NOTE: Installation of a new pump is the same as
installation of an original pump. When installing a
new pump, however, checking the timing is required.
1
1. Position the pump in the block using a new shim
gasket, 1, of 0.3 mm (0.012″) thickness, or origi-
nal shim pack from removed pump.
24
2. Connect the governor link, 2, to the pump control
rack, 1, and secure with snap pin, 3.
1
2
25
NOTE: Check the control rack, 1, for any binding con-
ditions by moving the control lever back and forth.
Lubricate control rack with clean engine oil before
installation.
3. Install the mounting bolts and tighten to 13 - 17

N⋅m (9.4 - 12.3 ft lbs).
4. Connect the fuel inlet line.
5. Connect the fuel injection lines.
6. Connect the fuel return line to the number three 1
injector (three cylinder engines) or number four
injector (four-cylinder engines).
7. Spill-time the pump. 26
10-131
SPILL-TIMING PROCEDURE
1. Remove the valve cover, 1, from the top of the en-
gine, by loosening bolts.
2. Find top dead center of the No. 1 cylinder (No. 1
cylinder is the closest to the engine fan). No. 1
cylinder must be on the compression stroke. (In-
take and exhaust rocker arms will be loose.)
27
3. Remove the rocker arm housing and rocker arm
assembly, 1, from the engine.
28
4. Remove the keepers and spring from No. 1 cylin-
der intake valve, 1. 1
29
10-132
5. To verify true top dead center of piston travel,

install a dial indicator, 2, on the valve stem (No. 2
1 cylinder), 1. Be sure the valve stem is sitting on
top of the piston. Rotate the crankshaft until the
indicator needle reverses direction. The point the 1
needle reverses direction is true top dead center.
30
6. Verify that the timing mark on the crankshaft
pulley is in line with the “TOP” mark on the timing
scale. If the mark on the crankshaft pulley is not
in line with the “TOP” mark, verify piston top dead
center by repeating step 5. If the pulley mark is
slightly off, remark the pulley and proceed.
NOTE: Color the timing mark on the crankshaft
pulley and appropriate marks on the timing scale to
increase visibility.
7. Reinstall the valve spring, keepers, rocker arm

assembly, housing and valve cover.
8. Shut off the fuel supply to the injection pump at
the fuel filter. 31
9. Remove the No. 1 injection line from the number

1 injector, 1.
10. Remove the lock screw, 2, and remove the injec- 1
tor locking plate, 3.
2
3
32
10-133
11. Remove only the delivery valve piston, 1, from

the No. 1 delivery valve.
33
12. Reinstall the holder, 1, with spring into the injec-
tion pump and tighten securely. Insert a small di-
ameter wire down through the holder, 1, and
bend a hook on the end of the wire to hold the
spring, washer, and the valve in the holder, while
re-installing in the injection pump. Remove the
wire just prior to the holder being seated in the
pump.
34
NOTE: A remote fuel supply and fuel line must be
used to check spill timing. The fuel tank on the tractor 1
and the mechanical fuel pump will not allow free grav-
ity flow of fuel to the injection pump. Fabricate fuel
tank locally.
13. Use a remote fuel tank, 1, and fuel line, 2, for the
spill timing. Disconnect the fuel supply line at the
injection pump, 3.
14. Connect the remote fuel line, 2, to the injection
pump, 3. Put fuel in the remote tank, 1, and turn 2
on the fuel shutoff on the remote tank. 3
30002460
35
10-134
15. Fabricate a spill tube, 1, from a discarded injec-

tion line and install the tube on the No. 1 port on
the injection pump.
16. The fuel shut-off solenoid has to be removed
from the injection pump, if installed. 1
36
17. Rotate the crankshaft counterclockwise (viewed
from the front of the engine) approximately 40°.
18. Turn on the fuel supply to the injection pump.
Fuel should flow out of the spill tube on the No.
1 cylinder port.
40°
37
19. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. When the tim- 19°-21°
ing mark on the crankshaft pulley is in line with 17°-19°
the below degree marks on the scale, fuel should
stop flowing from the spill tube.
Engine Model Degree

N843L/TC35, TC35D 17 - 19° BTDC
N844/TC40, TC40D 19 - 21° BTDC
N844L, TC45, TC45D 17 - 19° BTDC
* BTDC - Before Top Dead Center
38
10-135
20. If fuel does not stop flowing at the appropriate

timing mark, the injection pump timing must be
adjusted by adding or removing shims located
between the injection pump and the engine
block.
21. Adding shims will retard the pump timing and re- 3
moving shims will advance the pump timing.
NOTE: A shim thickness of 0.1 mm (0.004″) will
change the pump timing by approximately 1°.
22. Assemble all components that were removed 1

from the engine and fuel system. 2
23. Disconnect the remote fuel line and tank, and re- 39
connect the fuel supply line to the injection pump.
10-136
FUEL FLOW CHART
20000732
40
AUTO BLEED 4. Air that was in the injection pump will be returned
With a full tank of fuel, fuel from the tank will push air to the fuel tank via the injector fuel return to tank
out of the fuel filter through the return to tank line. line.
Fuel from the fuel filter will be delivered to the fuel NOTE: the injector fuel return to tank line is con-
transfer pump. nected to the fuel filter return to tank line.
The Auto Bleed occurs whenever the engine is 5. Rotate the engine until it starts.
started and the throttle is set at full throttle.
NOTE: Due to heat generation in the starter motor,
1. Set the hand throttle at full throttle position. do not engage the starter for more than 30 seconds
continuously.
2. Place ignition switch in the start position.
3. With the engine cranking, the fuel transfer pump,
which is activated by the engine camshaft rotat-
ing, will deliver fuel to the injection pump.
10-137
BLEEDING THE FUEL SYSTEM

Bleeding the fuel system is the process of removing
unwanted air trapped within the system and must be
removed as a step towards optimum performance.
The fuel system should be bled after any of the fol-
lowing conditions.
• When a new filter is installed.

• After the tractor has run out of fuel.
• When any of the fuel lines have been
disconnected.
• When the injection pump has been removed.
1. Make sure adequate fuel is in the fuel tank and

the fuel shutoff valve is open. 2
2. Open the bleed screw, 1, on the injection pump.
3. Set the throttle in the full open position and crank
the engine for a few seconds to allow the air to be
expelled from the bleed screw. Allow system to 1
bleed air at fuel screw, 1, until clear fuel, without
air bubbles is present. Tighten bleed screw.
4. If the engine does not start, loosen the injector
lines at the injectors, 2, one at a time while crank-
ing the engine. Leave injector line loose until
clear fuel, without air bubbles, is discharged from
injector line. Tighten injector nut and propceed to 41
the next injector.
5. Be sure all lines are properly tightened when
completed.
FUEL SCREW/HIGH IDLE ADJUSTMENT

The correct adjustment is required to reset to the
original production setting to ensure the engine will
be within the certified emission limits.
NOTE: EPA engine is certified to EPA emission legis-

lation.
No one is permitted to adjust the fuel flow rate more

than the max figure of submitting for power setting.
Adjustment only made by New Holland Area Service

Managers, due to EPA emission regulations. 30002882
Contact New Holland representative for adjustment 42

of fuel setting on high speed idle.
10-138
Op. 10 230
GOVERNOR OPERATION
The governor assembly is mounted on the forward
end of the camshaft.
20000730
43
1. Timing Gear Cover 7. Spring Holder
2. Lever 8. Washer
3. Arm 9. Spring
4. Lever 10. Spring
5. Arm Assembly 11. Stay
6. Shaft
As the engine speed increases, the throttle arm, 1,

contacts the fuel screw adjuster at contact point “A” 2
and the high-speed idle stop screw at “B”. During the A 1
engine speed increase, tension is placed on the gov-
ernor spring, 2.
44
As the engine speed increases the four governor
weights, 1, pivot outward and push the slider cone,
2. The weights and the slider cone are located on the
end of the camshaft. 1
1 2
45
10-139
The slider cone, 2, Figure 44, contacts the governor

linkage arm, 1, at contact pad “C”. As the cone moves
forward it pushes the linkage arm, 1, forward, which
is connected to the injection pump rack assembly. 1
When the injection pump rack moves forward the fuel
delivery is decreased and the engine speed de-
creases.
C
46
As the engine speed decreases the governor
weights, 1, pivot inward allowing the slider cone, 2,
to move rearward.
1
1 2
47
As the slider cone moves rearward, the governor
linkage arm, 1, allows the fuel injection pump rack to
move rearward to the full fuel position and the engine
speed increases. 1
Engine speed depends upon several factors. The
throttle setting determined by governor spring ten-
sion. The pressure exerted by the slider cone on the
governor linkage, and positioning of the injection
pump rack.
All governor linkage parts are located inside the tim-

ing gear cover. To inspect or replace any of the gover-
nor linkage parts, the timing gear case and the injec-
tion pump must be removed from the engine as 48
discussed earlier in this section.
10-140
12
15
11
3
6
4 14
5
7 13
9
10
16 8
49
1. Timing Gear Cover 7. Throttle Cable Stay 13. Spring Holder Arm
2. Throttle Lever 8. E Ring 14. Washer
3. Throttle Arm 9. Pivot Shaft 15. E Ring
4. E Ring 10. O Ring 16. Spring
5. Governor Spring 11. Linkage Arm Assembly
6. O Ring 12. Dampener Spring
GOVERNOR DISASSEMBLY 5. Remove E ring, 8, from the outside end of linkage

pivot shaft, 9. Pull pivot shaft, 9, out of the timing
1. Remove the injection pump and timing gear case case. Inspect O ring, 10, on shaft. Replace if
from the engine as discussed earlier in this sec- damaged.
tion.
6. Remove linkage arm assembly, 11, from the tim-
2. Remove the timing case, 1, from the front of the ing case, 1. Remove governor spring, 5, and
engine. Remove the throttle lever, 2, from the dampener spring, 12, from the linkage. Check all
outside end of throttle arm, 3. pivot points, slot, and pin locations for wear. Re-
3. Remove the E ring, 4, from throttle arm, 3. Push place the linkage assembly, 11, if wear is present.
throttle arm into the timing case until there is Check spring holder arm, 13, making sure it piv-
enough space to remove governor spring, 5. Re- ots freely. Confirm that spacer, 14, is installed be-
move governor spring, 5, from throttle arm, 3. Re- tween arm and arm base. Also make sure the E
move throttle arm from timing case. Inspect ring, 15, is installed in the groove of the spring
O ring, 6, and replace if damaged. holder arm.
4. Remove throttle cable stay, 7, from timing gear
cover, 1.
10-141
12
15
11
3
6
4 14
5
7 13
9
10
16 8
50
1. Timing Gear Cover 7. Throttle Cable Stay 13. Spring Holder Arm
2. Throttle Lever 8. E Ring 14. Washer
3. Throttle Arm 9. Pivot Shaft 15. E Ring
4. E Ring 10. O Ring 16. Spring
5. Governor Spring 11. Linkage Arm Assembly
6. O Ring 12. Dampener Spring
GOVERNOR ASSEMBLY
NOTE: Align pin, “A”, with oil pump cover when the
case is assembled onto the engine.
1. Install governor spring, 5, onto linkage arm as-

sembly, 3. A
NOTE: Spring is installed onto front spring holder
arm with spring inserted from the inside of the arm.
51
10-142
2. Place linkage arm assembly, 11, into case.

NOTE: Check that spacer washer, 14, is installed be-
tween spring holder arm and base and E ring, 15, is
installed into groove of spring holder arm, 13.
The shaft is oriented with tapered end towards

outside of case. With O ring, 10, installed and the
shaft lubricated, insert pivot shaft, 9, into case.
Install shaft through linkage arm assembly, 11,
until O ring is in the case, 1. Install E ring, 8, onto
shaft, then push shaft into case until E ring
touches case.
3. Install throttle arm, 3, with O ring, 6, from the in-
side of the case, until the O ring engages into the
case. Install other end of governor spring, 5, into
the slotted hole of the throttle arm. Once the
spring is installed, push the rest of the throttle
arm into the case. Insert E ring, 4, into the groove
of the throttle arm.
4. Install the throttle cable stay, 7, onto the timing
gear cover, 1. Install throttle lever, 2, onto throttle
arm, 3. Align the slot “A” in the throttle lever with
groove “B” of the throttle arm. Retain lever to arm
by tightening clamp bolt and nut. After the clamp
bolt is tightened, pivot throttle lever back and
forth to check if all the linkage pivots freely. Install
throttle return spring, 16, to throttle lever, 2, and 2
stay, 7.
NOTE: The aligning of the slot in the lever with the
B
groove in the arm properly indexes the lever and at-
taching cables to the internal linkage. 3
A
5. Install the dampener spring, 12, onto linkage arm 52
assembly and timing case. The long leg of the
spring is inserted into the timing case.
NOTE: When installing timing case onto engine
block, make sure dampener spring stays in retaining
hole of case. Also, have the manual shutoff lever lo-
cated on the backside of the linkage arm assembly.
6. Check that nose cone, 1, slides freely on the end
of camshaft and guide pin. Lubricate nose cone
with never seize compound.
1
53
10-143
GOVERNOR ADJUSTMENTS
The governor assembly is mounted on the forward
end of the engine block. To remove and install the
governor assembly, see “Engine Timing Gear Cover,
Timing Gears, and Cam Shaft”, discussed earlier in
this section.
If the governor linkage has been disassembled, re- 1

assemble the linkage in the timing gear cover as dis-
cussed earlier in this section.
3
1. Adjust the governor lever, 1, by aligning the slot, 2
4, in the lever with the groove, 3, in the governor 4
arm, 2.
54
10-144
Op. 10 218
INJECTORS 1
Description and Operation 2
Throttle-type injectors are used in all engine applica-
tions. The injectors have a 1.0 mm (0.040″) single ori- 3
fice and are set at 146 bar (2150 PSI). The pressure
adjustment is made by adding or deleting shims from 4
the top of the injector pressure adjusting spring. The
injectors have an injection angle of 4°. The injector
pipes are of the same length for each cylinder to help
5
keep the injection intervals in time.
6
The engine injection function is to inject fuel into a
7
pressurized cylinder in a fully atomized condition,
which provides efficient combustion with minimum 8
amount of smoke. Each injector assembly consists of
a nozzle assembly containing a needle valve, a 9
nozzle holder assembly, and injector needle valve
regulating spring.
55
1. Nut
2. Nipple Joint
3. Body
4. Shim
5. Spring
6. Push Rod
7. Distance Piece
8. Nozzle Nut
9. Nozzle Assembly
Fuel from the injection pump enters the injector inlet

and passes down through a drilling in the nozzle
holder and body to the needle valve seat. The fuel
pressurized by the injection pump, lifts the needle
valve off the seat against the action of the spring
pressure. The fuel is then forced, in the atomized
state, through the 1.0 mm (0.040″) orifice in the
nozzle tip. When pressure from the injection pump
drops, the needle valve snaps back onto its seat un-
der pressure from the spring.
To provide lubrication of the injector, a small amount

of fuel is permitted to leak up between the needle
valve and the nozzle body. The excess fuel rises to
the top of the injector and returns to the fuel tank 56
through the injection leak-offline. A. Nozzle Closed
B. Nozzle Initial Opening
C. Nozzle Fully Opened
10-145
Removal
1
1. Clean all dirt, oil, and grease from the injectors,
1, and surrounding areas.
2. Disconnect the fuel leak-off lines, 3, and injector
lines, 2, from the injectors.
57
3. Remove the injectors, 1, and sealing washers, 2,
from the cylinder head.
58
10-146
Disassembly
1
1. Loosen and remove the nozzle nut, 10, from the
injector body, 4, being careful not to drop or dam- 2
age the nozzle.
2. Remove the nozzle assembly, 9, spacer, 8, 3
spring, 6, and shim (s), 5.
4
3. Clean the nozzle body and the needle valve.
Check the nozzle for any burn or score marks. 5
Check the needle seat for evidence of fuel leak-
age or carbon deposits. 6
4. Correct fuel leakage at the seat using a polishing 7
stick and polish the seat area. 8
5. Inspect the upper and lower contact surfaces of 9
the nozzle holder for a clean contact surface
area.
10
6. Check the contact area between the push rod
and spring seat.
59
Assembly/Adjustment 1. Nut
2. Leak-Off Line
NOTE: Clean all parts in clean fuel oil and assemble
3. Washer
while still wet.
4. Injector Body
5. Shims
1. Install the shim(s), 5, spring, 6, spacer, 8, and
6. Spring
nozzle assembly, 9, in the injector body, 4.
7. Rod
2. Install the nozzle nut, 10 and tighten to 39 - 44 8. Spacer
N⋅m (29 - 33 ft lbs). 9. Nozzle Assembly
10. Nozzle Nut
3. Check and adjust the injector pressure setting
using injector tester No. FNH01721 and adapter
fitting No. 23622. Adjust the pressure setting to
146 bar (2150 PSI).
10-147
10-148
SECTION 18 - CLUTCH
Chapter 1 -- Clutch
CONTENTS

18 000 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7
18 110 Clutch Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-13
18 110 Clutch Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-14
18 110 Clutch Related Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-21
Clutch Linkage Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-24
18 100 Clutch Cross Shaft Bushings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-24
Clutch Pedal Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-27
Clutch Pedal Maximum Travel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-27
18-1
SECTION 18 - CLUTCH
SPECIFICATIONS
CLUTCH PLATES TC35/TC40 TC45
Facing:
Outside Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4 in. (240 mm) . . . . . . . . . . 10.24 in. (260 mm)
Inside Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 in. (160 mm) . . . . . . . . . . 6.69 in. (170 mm)
Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.1378 in. (3.5 mm) . . . . . . . 0.1378 in. (3.5 mm)
Clearance between driveshaft and clutch disc . . . .0078--.0137 in. . . . . . . . . . . .0078--.0137 in

(0.2--0.35 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . (0.2--0.35 mm)
Allowable Clearance Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0236 in. (0.6 mm) . . . . . . . . .0236 in. (0.6 mm)
Clearance between drive shaft And clutch

disc in the Rotation direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0019--.0039 in. . . . . . . . . . . .0019--.0039 in.
(0.050--0.1 mm) . . . . . . . . . . (0.050--0.1 mm)
Allowable Clearance Limit Clearance . . . . . . . . . . .0098 (0.25 mm) . . . . . . . . . . .0098 (0.25 mm)
between retainer and release hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0009--.0039 in. . . . . . . . . . . .0009--.0039 in.
(0.025--0.1 mm) . . . . . . . . . . (0.025--0.1 mm)
Allowable Clearance Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 in.

(0.8 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (0.8 mm)
Length of release hub Return spring . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.38 in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.38 in.

(35 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (35 mm)
Thickness of clutch disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 in.

(8.0 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (8.0 mm)
Allowable Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 in.

(6.9 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (7.2 mm)
Depth of clutch disc rivets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0512--0.0787 in. . . . . . . . . . .0512--0.0787 in.

(1.3--2.0 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . (1.3--2.0 mm)
Allowable Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .02 in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .02 in.

(0.5 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (0.5 mm)
Deflection of clutch disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Max. .0276 in. . . . . . . . . . . . . Max. .0276 in.

(0.7 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (0.7 mm)
Standard Clutch Pedal Free-Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3\4 in.--1--3\16 in. . . . . . . . . . 3\4 in.--1--3\16 in.
(19--30 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . (19--30 mm)
Max. Allowable Free-Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--3\16 in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--3\16 in.

(30 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (30 mm)
Standard Flywheel Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.64 in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.57 in.

(67 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (65.3 mm)
Max. Allowable Flywheel Surface Removal . . . . . . 0.050 in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.050 in.

(1.27 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1.27 mm)
18-2
SECTION 18 - CLUTCH
BOLT TORQUES
Flywheel Mounting Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50.6-57.8 ft. lb. (69-78 N⋅m)
Clutch Mounting Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-21 ft. lb. (22-28 N⋅m)
SPECIAL TOOLS
Clutch Alignment Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CNH299006
30002394
18-3
SECTION 18 - CLUTCH
The TC35, TC40, and TC45 tractors are equipped
with a standard single clutch with the 12x12
Synchronized Shuttle Shift transmission.
The clutch assembly consists of the clutch pressure
plate, 1, the clutch disc, 2, the flywheel, 3, the release
bearing, 4, the return spring, 5, and the hub, 6. 1
3
The clutch disc is a dry organic type assembly, which 4
is mechanically operated. The clutch disc is installed 5
between the flywheel and the pressure plate
assembly. The clutch pressure plate is attached to
the flywheel with six bolts on the TC45, and nine bolts
on the TC35 and TC40.
In the engaged position, the spring loaded pressure

plate presses the clutch disc into contact with the
engine flywheel. The power flow from the engine is
transmitted to the transmission by the friction 2
between the clutch disc linings and the surfaces of
the flywheel and the clutch pressure plate.
20002385
18-4
SECTION 18 - CLUTCH
The clutch pedal, 1, is connected by an adjustable

rod, 2, to a bellcrank, 3, and cross shaft assembly, 4,
on which a fork is mounted.
The fork engages a sliding release bearing hub 3

assembly. When the clutch pedal is applied, the
2
release bearing comes in contact with the ends of the
clutch release levers in the pressure plate.
Depressing the clutch pedal causes the cross shaft
and fork to move the release bearing forward and
depress the pressure plate diaphragm spring. This 1
action draws the pressure plate away from the clutch
disc, releasing the disc from contact with the 10998241 4
flywheel.
3
The friction drive from the engine is then
disconnected to enable gear changes to take place.
After a gear change is made, and the clutch pedal is

released, the release bearing and hub are returned
to the free position by a spring attached to a hanger.
The diaphragm spring of the pressure plate

assembly then re-asserts pressure on the plate
moving it forward to press the clutch disc into contact
with the flywheel and re-establish the drive to the
transmission.
The release bearing is pre-lubricated and never

requires greasing.
The pressure plate assembly is not repairable and

must be replaced as a complete assembly if service
is required.
18-5
SECTION 18 - CLUTCH
TROUBLESHOOTING
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION

Excessive clutch pedal free play Worn clutch disc. Replace disc. Refer to “Clutch
or loss of adjustment reserve. Overhaul.”
Clutch linkage out of adjustment.
Adjust linkage. Refer to “Adjust-
ments.”
Clutch noisy when free. Defective release bearing. Replace bearing.
Defective clutch pilot bearing. Replace bearing.

Clutch slipping. Incorrect pedal free travel. Replace bearing.
Worn disc facings. Replace bearing.
Clutch pressure springs weak from

overheating.
Clutch fails to engage smoothly. Defective clutch disc. Replace disc. Refer to “Clutch
Overhaul.”
Defective pressure plate assembly.
Replace pressure plate assembly.
Worn clutch pilot bearing. Refer to “Clutch Overhaul.”
Defective flywheel. Replace bearing.
Refer to Part 1, “Engine System” for

removal and installation
Difficulty in engaging gears. Pedal free travel out of adjustment. Refer to “Adjustments” to adjust the
pedal free travel.
Damaged or out of adjustment
release levers. Adjust assembly. Refer to “Adjust-
ments.”
Pedal will not return completely Broken clutch pedal return spring. Install a new spring.
to release position.
18-6
SECTION 18 - CLUTCH
OVERHAUL
Removal
Separating at the Clutch Housing/Engine

1. Remove the negative (--) battery cable, 1, and the
positive (+) battery cable, 2, from the battery. 1 2
2. Drain all of the hydraulic fluid from the
transmission and the differential into a suitable
container.

4. Remove the seat, and the seat base assembly 30997558

from the tractor. 4
5. Remove the light bars from the fenders and the
ROPS.

the right fender.

tractor.
30997555
5
panels.

the foot throttle control pedal, located on the right
deck.
10. Remove the left and the right deck from the 2
tractor. 1
10000864
6
18-7
SECTION 18 - CLUTCH
12. Loosen and remove the two instrument panel

retaining screws, 1. Remove the instrument 2
1 3
panel, 2, from the dash housing, 3. Disconnect 1
the wiring connector from the instrument panel.
10998361
7
main shift bracket, 7, and the shuttle shift
bracket, 8, to the steering column, 9. Remove the
shift shaft assemblies by feeding the control
levers down through the dash housing.
14. Remove the dash housing from the firewall. 9

Disconnect the wiring connectors from the dash 6
8 7
switches. 6
2
4 5
1
3
10996566
8
2
1
20000908
9
18-8
SECTION 18 - CLUTCH

the hydraulic pump, 2. 2
18. Remove the hydraulic system pressure tube, 3, 1
valve.
3
30997557
10
19. Disconnect the wires, 1, on the starter, 2, and
remove the starter from the tractor.
2
30997565
1
11


1
20000904
12
18-9
SECTION 18 - CLUTCH

23. Drain the fuel tank into a suitable container.
1
2
3
10000865
13
and 3, on the engine. 1 1
2 3
10000867
14

2
10000868
15
18-10
SECTION 18 - CLUTCH

raised or lowered to allow the separation of the
engine from the clutch housing.
28. Carefully roll the drive train away from the

engine, using the floor jack for support.
1
3
2
20000905
16
29. Remove the clutch rod, 1, from the clutch arm, 2,
located on the left side of the clutch housing.
1
2
10998241
17
30. Remove the range selector link, 1, from the
control arm, 2, on the transmission.
20000907 1
18
18-11
SECTION 18 - CLUTCH
1
5
4
20000906
19
31. Remove the right brake rod, 1, from the brake
pedals, 2.
32. Remove the left brake rod, 3, from the clutch

pedal linkage, 4.
33. Remove the brake/clutch pedal assembly, 5,

from the transmission housing.
18-12
SECTION 18 - CLUTCH
Op. 18 110
Clutch Removal
The single clutch is serviced as a complete assembly
only. Overhaul of the single clutch is limited to
resurfacing the flywheel, and replacement of the
clutch assembly.
NOTE: Loosen the pressure plate retaining bolts
gradually and evenly to prevent distorting the 3
pressure plate assembly.
1. Remove the pressure plate retaining bolts, 1, and

remove the clutch assembly from the flywheel.
2. Remove the clutch disc, 2, from the pressure
plate, 3.
1
2
20002386
20
Inspection
1. Inspect the pressure plate face for scoring,
cracks, or signs of overheating. Minor imperfec-
tions may be removed by resurfacing the
pressure plate face. Replace the pressure plate
if damaged.
2. Inspect the diaphragm spring for wear or
damage.
3. Inspect the clutch disc lining for excessive wear.
Replace the clutch disc if the lining is worn to less
than .27 in. (6.9 mm) on the TC35, and TC40, and
.28 in. (7.2 mm) on the TC45, from the top of the
rivet head.
4. Inspect the clutch disc lining for indications of
overheating, scoring, or oil impregnation in the
lining. If any damage is present on the clutch
disc, replace with a new clutch disc assembly.
5. Inspect the hub spline for excess wear.
6. Inspect the cushioning springs for signs of wear
or damage.
18-13
SECTION 18 - CLUTCH
Op. 18 110
Clutch Installation
IMPORTANT: When installing a new pressure plate
assembly, the pressure plate friction surface must be
wiped clean with a suitable solvent to remove the
protective film.
1. Lightly lubricate the hub splines of the

transmission input shaft with a high temperature
lubricant.
2. Use the special tool No. CNH 299006-- Clutch
Alignment Arbor, 1, to position the clutch disc, 2,
onto the flywheel, 3.
2
3
1
30002388
21
3. Install the pressure plate, 1, over the clutch
alignment arbor, 2, and align the mounting holes. 1
4. Install the retaining bolts to secure the pressure
plate to the flywheel.
2
30002389
22
IMPORTANT: Tighten the pressure plate retaining
bolts evenly and gradually to prevent distorting the 3
pressure plate assembly.
5. Install, tighten, and torque the retaining bolts, 1,

to 22-28 N⋅m (16-21 ft. lb.).
1
2
20002386
23
18-14
SECTION 18 - CLUTCH
1
5
4
20000906
24
Engine
WARNING
train together with the engine. Severe damage to
1. Install the brake/clutch pedal assembly, 5, onto

the transmission housing.
2. Attach the left brake rod, 3, to the clutch pedal

linkage, 4.
3. Connect the right brake rod, 1, to the brake

pedals, 2.
18-15
SECTION 18 - CLUTCH
4. Attach the range selector link, 1, to the control

arm, 2, on the transmission.
20000907 1
25
5. Attach the clutch rod to the clutch arm on the
clutch housing.

the engine. Align the splines on the 12x12 input 1
shaft with the clutch and the engine flywheel. 2
Rotate the engine fan to align the input shaft and
the clutch/flywheel. The floor jack or the hoist
may need to be raised or lowered to make
alignment possible.
10998241
26
the M10 bolts and nuts to 32 - 41 ft Ibs. Torque
the two M12 bolts to 81 N⋅m (60 ft Ibs).
1
3
2
20000905
27
18-16
SECTION 18 - CLUTCH

the tractor.
10000868
28
9. Connect the fuel supply line, 1, to the fuel
shutoff/filter, 3, and connect the fuel tank vent
line, 2, to the tee fitting.
1
2
3
10000865
29
and the clutch housing, 3. Secure with the
retaining bolts.
2
1
20000908
30
18-17
SECTION 18 - CLUTCH
11. If equipped, Install the FWD driveshaft, 2, and

secure with the two roll pins, 1.
1
20000904
31
the starter, 2. 2
30997565
1
32
the hydraulic pump, 2, and the diverter valve. 2
14. Install the hydraulic system inlet tube, 1, onto the 1
hydraulic pump, 2.
15. Connect the main wiring harness connector.
17. Connect the throttle cable to the foot throttle

control lever located on the right deck.
18. Install the left and right fenders on the tractor. 3

30997557
19. Install the seat and the seat base on the tractor. 33
ROPS.
18-18
SECTION 18 - CLUTCH

valve, 1, on the right fender. Connect the
hydraulic tubes.
23. Connect the wiring connectors to the dash

housing switches.

throttle control lever. 1
30997555
34
instrument panel. Install the instrument panel, 2, 2
1 3
screws, 1.
10998361
35
bracket, 8, to the steering column, 9, with the
retaining bolts, 6. Connect the lower main shift
shaft, 5, and shuttle shift shaft, 2, to the
transmission shafts with the roll pins, 4 and 1,
and retaining ring, 3.
27. Install the hood on the tractor and connect the 9

headlight wiring connector. 6 8 7 6
2
4 5
1
3
10996566
36
18-19
SECTION 18 - CLUTCH

panels.


tractor. 2
1
removed during disassembly, install a new oil
filter on the engine, and fill the engine with the
recommended oil to the proper level.
10000864
37
31. Connect the positive (+), 2, and the negative (--),
1 2
33. Make any adjustments necessary for proper
operation of the tractor.
30997558
38
18-20
SECTION 18 - CLUTCH
Op. 18 110
CLUTCH RELATED COMPONENTS
CLUTCH PILOT BEARING

A pre-lubricated ball bearing, 1, is installed at the rear
of the engine to support the front end of the 1
transmission input shaft. The pilot bearing, 1, is 2
located in the flywheel, 2.
Whenever the clutch has been removed, inspect the

pilot bearing by turning the inner race by hand and
observe for abnormal noise, uneven rotation or
excessive free-play.
Removal
1. If damage or wear is apparent, remove the pilot 20002386
bearing using a suitable puller.
39
Installation
1. Apply a few drops of sealer to the outer race and
install the new pilot bearing using a suitable size
driver.
2. Be sure that the driver only contacts the outer
race so as not to damage the bearing during
installation.
3. Be sure that the bearing sealed side is installed
facing toward the clutch, and bottoms against the
shoulder in the flywheel.
DAMPER DISC
The damper disc is used to dampen vibration from
the flywheel, and the clutch, and cushion engage-
ment of the PTO clutch and the transmission clutch.
The damper disc is bolted to the engine flywheel, and
has a splined center to which the PTO driveshaft is
connected. The damper disc mounted to the
flywheel, is used to transmit power from the engine,
through the PTO driveshaft, into the PTO clutch
located in the differential housing. The damper disc
has cushioning springs mounted on its face to
cushion the power delivery from the damper disc to
the PTO clutch. This allows smoother clutch
engagement, while reducing fatigue on clutch related
parts due to vibration and sudden engagement. The
TC35, TC40, and TC45 single clutch uses a damper
disc on the clutch disc as well as on the flywheel.
18-21
SECTION 18 - CLUTCH
Removal
1. Loosen and remove the eight retaining bolts, 1,
that secure the damper disc, 2, to the flywheel, 3.
2
2. Remove the damper disc, 2, from the flywheel, 3.
Inspection
1. Clean the damper disc in a suitable solvent, and
allow to air dry. 3
2. Check the cushioning springs for weakness or
damage. Replace as necessary.
1
3. Check the damper disc for cracks or other 20002437
damage. Replace as necessary. 40
Installation
1. Install the damper disc onto the flywheel, using 1
the clutch alignment arbor, tool # CNH299006, 1.
NOTE: Tighten the damper disc bolts in a criss-cross
pattern to evenly secure the disc to the flywheel.
30002394
41
2. Install and tighten the eight retaining bolts, 1,
through the damper disc, 2, and into the flywheel,
3. Torque the bolts, 1, to 13.7 N⋅m (10 ft. lbs.).
2
1
20002437
42
18-22
SECTION 18 - CLUTCH
Clutch Release Bearing

The clutch release bearing, 1, is a pre-lubricated ball 6 4 3
bearing and is mounted on the sliding hub, 2, which
is supported on the front input shaft retainer, 3. A fork,
4, mounted on the cross shaft, 5, engages the
bearing and hub assembly.
5
Pushing on the clutch pedal causes the release
bearing, 1, to come in contact with the diaphragm
spring in the pressure plate. Continued pushing
causes the diaphragm spring to pull the pressure
plate away from the clutch disc, disengaging the
2
clutch, and the drive to the transmission input shaft, 20002387 1
stopping the transmission.
43
Removal
1. Separate the tractor between the engine and the
clutch housing. See “Separating at the Engine/
Clutch”, earlier in this section.
2. Remove the cotter pin and the clevis pin, 1, from
the adjustment rod, 2, at the clutch release cross
shaft, 3.
3 2
10998241 4
44
3. Remove the hub return spring, 6, and slide the
bearing, 1, and the hub, 2, off the input shaft. 6 4 3
4. Use a suitable puller to remove the bearing, 1,
from the hub, 2.
2
20002387 1
45
18-23
SECTION 18 - CLUTCH
Inspection
1. Rotate the bearing by hand and check for
abnormal noise, uneven rotation, excessive
free-play, scoring and indications of lubricant
leakage at the oil seals.
2. If any damage or wear is detected, replace the
bearing.
Assembly
6 4 3
1. Install a new release bearing, 1, onto the hub, 2,
using a suitable driver.
2. Install the bearing and hub, 2, onto the input
shaft.
3. Connect the hub return spring, 6, to the hub, 2. 5
2
20002387 1
46
CLUTCH LINKAGE COMPONENTS

Op. 18 100
CLUTCH CROSS SHAFT BUSHINGS

Disassembly
1. Separate the tractor between the engine and the
clutch housing. See “Separating at the Engine/
Clutch”, earlier in this section.
2. Remove the clutch rod, 1, from the clutch cross
shaft bellcrank, 2.
1
2
10998241
47
18-24
SECTION 18 - CLUTCH
3. Remove the retaining ring, 1, from the cross

shaft, 2. 4
4. Remove the roll pin, 3, from the fork, 4, and the
cross shaft, 2, and remove the cross shaft from 1
the clutch housing.
5. Use a suitable driver, and remove the bushings 2
from the clutch housing.
3
20002387
48
Assembly
1. Use a suitable driver, and install new bushings in
the clutch housing.
2. Install the cross shaft, 2, through the clutch
housing, 2, and the fork, 4. Secure the fork, 4, 4
with the roll pin, 3.
3. Install the retaining ring, 1, onto the cross shaft, 1
2.
3
20002387
49
4. Attach the clutch rod, 1, to the clutch cross shaft
bellcrank, 2.
1
2
10998241
50
18-25
SECTION 18 - CLUTCH
9
6 5
1 4
2
3
8
1
20002390
51
Clutch Pedal Bushings Assembly
1. Use a suitable driver to install the bushings on the
Removal clutch pedal assembly.
1. Disconnect the brake actuating rods, 1, from the
brake cross shaft, 2, and the brake pedal,6. Installation
2. Remove the roll pins, 3, from the brake cross 1. Install the clutch pedal, 7, onto the brake cross
shaft, 2. shaft, 2, and install the brake cross shaft, 2,
through the support, 8.
3. Remove the clutch pedal return spring, 4.
2. Install the clutch adjustment rod, 5, onto the
4. Remove the clutch adjustment rod, 5, from the clutch pedal, 7.
clutch pedal, 7.
3. Install the clutch pedal return spring, 4.
5. Remove the brake cross shaft, 2, from the
support, and remove the pedal from the shaft. 4. Install the two brake pedals, 6 and 9, onto the
brake cross shaft, 2.
Disassembly 5. Install the roll pins, 3, into the brake cross shaft, 2.
1. Use a suitable driver to remove the bushings 6. Attach the brake actuating rods, 1, on the brake
from the clutch pedal assembly. cross shaft, 2, and on the outside brake pedal, 6.
18-26
SECTION 18 - CLUTCH
CLUTCH PEDAL ADJUSTMENT 3/4″-1-3/16″

NOTE: Check clutch pedal free travel after every 50 (19 mm-30 mm)
1
hours of operation.
Clutch pedal free travel should be maintained at 19

mm-30 mm (3/4″-1-3/16″).
To adjust the clutch pedal:
1. Loosen jam nuts, 1.

2. Lengthen the rod, 2, to decrease pedal free
travel or shorten to increase. 2
10998241
NOTE: Rod has right and left hand thread for ease of 52
adjustment. No need to disconnect clevis for
adjustment.
CLUTCH PEDAL MAXIMUM TRAVEL

ADJUSTMENT 1
The clutch pedal linkage has a mechanical stop, 3, to
prevent damage to the clutch components due to
over travel. Clutch pedal travel is measured between
the top surface of the pedal arm and the front up stop
plate, 1.
2
Maximum clutch pedal travel, 4, is set to: 79 to 89 mm
(3.125″ to 3.50″). To adjust, loosen jam nut, 2, and 4
increase bolt length, 3, to decrease pedal travel and
shorten bolt length, 3, to increase pedal travel. 3
19999207
NOTE: Measurement is taken at the steel surface of 53
stop and not the rubber pad.
18-27
SECTION 18 - CLUTCH
18-28
SECTION 21 -- TRANSMISSION
Chapter 1 -- 12 x 12 Synchronized Shuttle Shift

Gear Transmission
CONTENTS

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-4
Powerflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-8
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-13
21 110 10 Overhaul - Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-13
21 114 Separating at the Clutch Housing/Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-13
Clutch Housing Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-19
21 148 63 Retainer Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-23
21 148 63 Main Shift Rails and Shift Forks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-24
21 148 63 Main Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-27
21 148 63 Range Shift Rail and Shift Fork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-30
21 148 63 Input Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-32
21 148 63 Reverse Idler Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-33
21 148 63 Shuttle Shift Rail and Fork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-35
21 148 63 Main Countershaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-36
21 148 63 Synchronizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-38
21 148 63 Input Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-45
21 148 63 Main Countershaft End Float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-46
21 148 63 Range Shift Rail and Fork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-47
21 148 63 Main Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-48
21 148 63 Main Shaft End Float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-51
21 110 10 Clutch Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-56
21 130 Transmission Shift Levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-67
21-1
SECTION 21 - TRANSMISSION
SPECIFICATIONS
SYNCHRONIZED SHUTTLE SHIFT GEAR TRANSMISSION (12 x 12)
Maximum Gear Backlash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.6 mm (0.024″)
Clearance Between Synchronizer Sleeve and Shift Fork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2 - 0.4 mm (0.008 - 0.016″)
Allowable Clearance Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 mm (0.039″)
Synchronizer Ring to Gear Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum 0.8 mm (0.031″)
Main Shaft End Float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . zero end float with no bearing preload
Main Shaft Shims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.1, 0.2, 0.5 mm (0.004, 0.008, 0.020″)
Countershaft End Float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . zero end float with no bearing preload
Countershaft Shims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.1, 0.2, 0.5 mm (0.004, 0.008, 0.020″)
21-2
Bolt Grade Pitch Foot- Newton Pitch Foot- Newton-

Size No. (mm) Pounds Meters (mm) Pounds Meters
4T, 4.8 2.8 - 4.0 3.8 - 5.4
M5 7T, 8T, 8.8 0.70 4.9 - 6.9 6.9 - 9.3 ----------- ------------ ------------
10T, 10.9, 11T 6.7 - 9.4 9.0 - 12.7
4T, 4.8 3.6 - 5.1 4.9 - 6.9
M6 7T, 8T, 8.8 1.0 6.1 - 8.3 8.3 - 11.3 ----------- ------------ ------------
10T, 10.9, 11T 8.7 - 11.6 11.8 - 15.7
4T, 4.8 9.4 - 12.3 12.7 - 16.7 11.2 - 14.8 15.2 - 20.1
M8 7T, 8T, 8.8 1.25 16.6 - 21.0 22.6 - 28.4 1.0 19.5 - 25.3 26.5 - 34.3
10T, 10.9, 11T 21.0 - 26.8 28.4 - 36.2 22.4 - 29.7 30.4 - 40.2
4T, 4.8 18.8 - 24.6 25.5 - 33.3 21.0 - 26.8 28.4 - 36.3
M10 7T, 8T, 8.8 1.5 32.5 - 41.2 44.1 - 55.9 1.25 36.2 - 46.3 49.0 - 62.8
10T, 10.9, 11T 39.8 - 51.4 53.9 - 69.9 42.7 - 54.2 57.9 - 73.5
4T, 4.8 27.5 - 34.7 37.3 - 47.1 31.8 - 40.5 43.1 - 54.9
M12 7T, 8T, 8.8 1.75 48.5 - 61.5 65.7 - 83.4 1.25 55.0 - 69.4 74.5 - 94.1
10T, 10.9, 11T 68.0 - 85.4 92.9 - 116 73.1 - 93.3 99.0 - 127
4T, 4.8 46.3 - 59.3 62.8 - 80.4 51.4 - 64.4 69.6 - 87.3
M14 7T, 8T, 8.8 2.0 76.7 - 96.9 104 - 131 1.5 86.1 - 109 117 - 148
10T, 10.9, 11T 102 - 129 139 - 175 108 - 137 147 - 186
4T, 4.8 63.6 - 81.0 83.3 - 110 67.3 - 84.6 91.3 - 115
M16 7T, 8T, 8.8 2.0 110 - 136 149 - 184 1.5 116 - 142 157 - 192
10T, 10.9, 11T 152 - 188 206 - 255 163 - 199 221 - 270
4T, 4.8 106 - 132 144 - 179 127 - 156 172 - 211
M20 7T, 8T, 8.8 2.5 177 - 213 240 - 289 1.5 203 - 246 275 - 333
10T, 10.9, 11T 268 - 325 363 - 441 293 - 358 397 - 485
21-3
SPECIAL TOOLS
Detent ball retaining tool # FNH00081
21-4
The Synchronized Shuttle Shift 12 x 12 transmission
provides 12 forward and 12 reverse speeds, which
are manually controlled by three shift levers. The 2
Synchronized Shuttle Shift transmission is driven by 1
a single disc clutch.
The shuttle shift lever, 1, controls forward and

reverse, while the main transmission shift lever, 2,
controls the four gear speeds in the main
transmission.
30997549
1
The range lever, 3, controls the three transmission
range gears.
30997548
2
21-5
The transmission case consists of three

compartments. The forward compartment, 1, 3 2 1
contains the forward and reverse shuttle
transmission gears. The shuttle gears are designed
for synchronized shifting and are controlled by a
column mounted shift lever.
The center compartment, 2, contains the main

transmission gears consisting of four gear speeds.
These gears are designed for synchronized shifting
and are controlled by a column mounted shift lever.
The rear compartment, 3, contains the range gears

which provide three speed ratios for each of the main
transmission speeds for a total of 12 forward and 12 10996564
reverse speeds. The range gears are not 3
synchronized and are controlled by a lever located
on the floor, by the left side of the operator’s seat.
The shuttle gears and main transmission gears are

in constant mesh. Shifting is accomplished by
engaging and disengaging three synchronizer
assemblies located in the front and center
transmission compartments.
The range gears are not synchronized. Shifting is

accomplished by engaging sliding gears located in
the rear transmission compartment
The transmission housing serves as a common fluid

reservoir for the final drive assembly, the
transmission, and the hydraulic system. The fluid
used is NH 134.
The fluid fill plug, 1, and the fluid level dipstick, 2, are
located on the top of the hydraulic lift cover. 2
21-6
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
3 2
10996560
CROSS SECTION - 12 X 12 TRANSMISSION

1. Shuttle gear (35T) 11. Fixed shuttle gear (30T)
2. Shuttle gear (34T) 12. Fixed shuttle gear (26T)
3. Reverse idler gear (26T) 13. Third gear (38T)
4. Fixed gear (22T) 14. Fourth gear(34T)
5. Fixed gear (26T) 15. First gear (44T)
6. Fixed gear (16T) 16. Second gear (41T)
7. Fixed gear (19T) 17. Fixed range gear (39T)
8. Sliding range gear (21T) 18. Fixed range gear (25T)
9. Sliding range gear (35T) 19. Fixed range gear (15T)
10. Fixed range gear (57T)
21-7
POWERFLOW
The transmission input shaft relays power to the
main countershaft by way of the synchronizers for
the forward and reverse gears. Power from the main
countershaft is relayed to the main shaft by the
synchronizers for first, second, third, and fourth
gears. The PTO shaft runs through the center of the
main shaft to relay power to the rear PTO. From the
main shaft, power proceeds to the rear of the
transmission by way of the range gears. These
consist of three fixed gears on the main shaft and two
sliding gears and one fixed gear on the countershaft.
21-8
21-9
21-10
21-11
TROUBLESHOOTING

Oil leakage 1. Hydraulic oil is over full 1. Adjust transmission oil level
2. Loose bolts 2. Retorque bolts
3. Worn oil seals or O rings 3. Replace seal or O ring
4. Defective or torn gaskets 4. Replace gasket
5. Cracked transmission housing 5. Replace the transmission

housing
Abnormal noise 1. Worn bearing 1. Inspect and replace
2. Excessive gear backlash 2. Adjust or replace
3. Worn gears 3. Replace
4. Gears improperly engaged 4. Adjust or replace
5. Oil level low 5. Adjust oil level
Gears will not engage 1. Clutch is not disengaged 1. Refer to section 4, “Clutch”
2. Damaged shift lever 2. Replace
3. Bent or damaged shift fork or 3. Repair or replace

shift rail
4. Top main shaft adjusting collar 4. Refer to “Main Shaft End Float”
adjusted too tight earlier in this section
Gears disengage 1. Damaged detent spring 1. Replace
2. Worn detent grooves on shift 2. Replace

rail
3. Uneven gear wear 3. Replace
4. Worn detent ball 4. Replace
Gears difficult to disengage 1. Bent shift rod 1. Replace
2. Foreign material in 2. Disassemble and clean

synchronizer
3. Clutch drags 3. Adjust clutch or replace
21-12
OVERHAUL
Op. 21 110 10
Removal
Op. 21 114 1 2
Separating at the Clutch Housing/Engine

transmission and the differential into a suitable
container. 30997558
3. Disconnect the headlight wire harness plug and 9

4. Remove the seat, and the seat base assembly

from the tractor.

ROPS.

the right fender.

tractor.
30997555
10
panels.

the foot throttle control pedal, located on the right
deck.
10. Remove the left and the right deck from the 2
tractor. 1
10000864
11
21-13

retaining screws, 1. Remove the instrument 2
1 3
10998361
12
main shift bracket, 7, and the shuttle shift
bracket, 8, to the steering column, 9. Remove the
shift shaft assemblies by feeding the control
levers down through the dash housing.
14. Remove the dash housing from the firewall. 9

6
Disconnect the wiring connectors from the dash 8
switches. 7 6
2
4 5
1
3
10996566
13
2
1
20000908
14
21-14

the hydraulic pump, 2. 2
valve.
3
30997557
15
2
30997565
1
16


1
20000904
17
21-15

1
2
3
10000865
18
and 3, on the engine. 1 1
2 3
10000867
19

2
10000868
20
21-16

engine from the clutch housing.

1
3
2
20000905
21
29. Remove the clutch rod, 1, from the clutch arm, 2,
located on the left side of the clutch housing.
1
2
10998241
22
30. Remove the range selector link, 1, from the
control arm, 2, on the transmission.
20000907 1
23
21-17
1
5
4
20000906
24
31. Remove the right brake rod, 1, from the brake
pedals, 2.
32. Remove the left brake rod, 3, from the clutch ped-
al linkage, 4.
33. Remove the brake/clutch pedal assembly, 5,

21-18
DISASSEMBLY
Clutch Housing 1
2 3
1. Remove the clutch hub return spring, 1, from the
clutch hub, 2, and the retainer pin, 3.
10996562
25
2. Remove the retainer pin, 1, from the clutch hous-
ing, 2.
1
10996426
26
3. Remove the clutch hub and bearing, 1, from the
input shaft, 2. 2
10996427
27
21-19
4. Loosen and remove the three bolts, 1, securing

the main gear selector shaft, 2, to the clutch
housing.
2
1
10996428
28
5. Remove the main gear selector shaft, 1, from the
clutch housing, 2.
10996429
29
6. Loosen and remove the three bolts, 1, securing
the shuttle gear selector shaft, 2, to the clutch
housing.
2
1
10996430
30
21-20
7. Remove the shuttle gear selector shaft, 1, from

the clutch housing, 2.
1
10996431
31
8. Loosen and remove the transmission cover
bolts, 1. 3 1 2
CAUTION
Use care when removing the transmission cover
from the transmission housing. The detent ball
and spring could be expelled with force when the
cover is removed.
9. Remove the transmission cover, 2, from the

transmission housing, 3.
10996432
32
10. Remove the spring, 1, and detent ball, 2, from the
main transmission gear detent hole, 3, in the
transmission housing. 1
3
10996433
33
21-21
11. Remove the pin, 1, spring, 2, and the detent ball,

3, from the shuttle shift detent hole in the trans-
mission housing.
1
3
10996434
34
12. Loosen and remove the bolt, 1, from the diverter
valve bracket and remove the hydraulic tubes, 2, 1
from the diverter valve, 3. Remove the diverter
valve, 3, and the hydraulic tubes, 2, from the 2
transmission housing.
3
10996435
35
13. Loosen and remove the seven buckle-up bolts,
1, and the three buckle-up nuts, 2, that secure the
clutch housing to the transmission housing. 1
14. Remove the clutch housing from the transmis-
sion.
10996436
36
21-22
15. Use a hoist or other suitable lifting device to

support the transmission while loosening the
eight buckle-up bolts, 1, and two buckle-up nuts
that secure the transmission to the differential 1
housing.
16. Remove the bolts and nuts.
17. Separate the transmission housing from the dif-

ferential housing.
10996437
37
MAIN TRANSMISSION DISASSEMBLY
Op. 21 148 63
2
Retainer Cover
1. Remove the PTO shaft, 1, that is housed in the
main shaft, 2.
10996563
38
2. Loosen and remove the six bolts, 3, that secure
the retainer cover, 1, to the transmission housing. 1 2 3 4
Remove and discard the six seal washers, 4.
3. Remove the retainer cover, 1, and gasket, 2, from

the front of the transmission housing.
10996565
39
21-23
4. Remove and discard the input shaft seal, 1, from

the retainer cover, 2. 2
10996561
40
Op. 21 148 63
Main Shift Rails and Shift Forks

1. Drive the roll pin out of the upper shift rail, 1, and
shift fork, 2.
1
2
10996438
41
2. Remove the upper shift rail, 1, and shift fork, 2,
1 2
10996439
42
21-24
3. Remove and discard the shift rail oil seal, 1, from

the transmission housing. 1
10996552
43
4. Drive the roll pin out of the lower shift rail, 1, and
shift fork, 2.
1
10996440
44
5. Use a pencil magnet, 1, to remove the balk pin,
2, from the detent hole, 3, in the transmission 1
housing.
10996441
45
21-25
6. Turn the lower shift rail, 1, 90° to ease removal

from the transmission case.
90°
10996442
46
CAUTION
Use care when removing the lower shift rail. Cov-
er the detent hole, 1, with a shop rag. The detent
ball and spring could be expelled with force when
the shift rail is removed.
10996558
47
7. Pull the lower shift rail, 1, from the shift fork, 2,
and the transmission housing.
2
8. Remove the shift fork, 2, from the transmission
housing.
1
10996444
48
21-26
9. Use a pencil magnet to remove the detent ball, 1,

and spring, 2, from the detent hole in the trans- 1
mission.
10996571
49
10. Remove and discard the shift rail oil seal, 1, from
10996552
50
Op. 21 148 63
1
Main Shaft
1. Use a punch and a hammer and lightly tap the
rear bearing, 1, out of the transmission case
counterbore.
10996445
51
21-27
2. Pull the main shaft towards the back of the trans-

mission case, while sliding the front main gear
and synchronizer assembly, 1, off of the main
shaft. 1
3. Lift the front main gear and synchronizer assem-
bly, 1, from the transmission case. Keep the
gears and the synchronizer together as an as-
sembly.
10996446
52
4. Continue to pull the main shaft, 2, towards the
back of the transmission case, while sliding the
rear main gear and synchronizer assembly, 1, off 1
of the main shaft, 2.
5. Lift the rear main gear and synchronizer assem-

bly, 1, from the transmission case. Keep the
gears and the synchronizer together as an as-
sembly.
10996447
53
6. Continue to pull the main shaft, 1, to the rear
while removing the bearing, 2. 2
10996448
54
21-28
7. Remove the large range gear, 1, from the main

shaft, 2. 1
2
10996449
55
8. Remove the adjuster collar, 1, from the main
shaft, 2. 1
10996450
56
9. Remove the small range gear, 1, from the main
shaft, 2. 1
2
10. Remove the main shaft, 2, from the transmission
housing, 3.
3
10996451
57
21-29
Op. 21 148 63
Range Shift Rail and Shift Fork

1. Loosen and remove the shift rail retaining bolt
and seal washer from the side of the transmis-
sion housing.
10996528
58
2. Turn the shift rail, 1, 90° to free the shift rail, 1,
from the detent ball in the shift fork, 2.
2
1
90°
10996529
59
CAUTION
Use a shop towel over the hole in the shift fork to
keep the detent ball and spring from being ex- 2
1
pelled with force while removing the shift rail.
3. Remove the shift rail, 1, from the shift fork, 2, by

pulling the rail out the back of the transmission
housing. Remove the shift fork, 2, from the trans-
mission housing.
10996530
60
21-30
4. Remove the retaining bolt, 1, the locking plate, 2,

and the shift arm, 3, if any wear or damage is dis-
covered.
3
2
1
10996569
61
Op. 21 148 63
2
Range Gear Countershaft
1. Using a retaining ring pliers, slide the retaining 1
ring, 1, that secures the low range gear, 2, for-
ward on the countershaft, 3.
3
10996532
62
2. Work the countershaft, 1, rearward and out of the
transmission housing, while supporting the low
2
range gear, 2, and the sliding gear, 3.
3. Remove the sliding gear, 3, from the counter- 1

shaft, 1.
3
10996533
63
21-31
4. Remove and discard the retaining ring, 1, from

the countershaft, 2. 3
2 1
5. Remove the low range gear, 3, from the counter-
shaft, 2, and remove the countershaft from the
10996534
64
6. Remove the needle bearing, 1, from the end of
the main countershaft, 2. 2
10996535
65
Op. 21 148 63
Input Shaft 2
1
1. Remove the input shaft rear bearing, 1, from the
bearing holder, 2.
2. Remove the bearing holder, 2, from the counter-

bore.
10996536
66
21-32
3. Using an aluminum drift and a hammer, lightly tap

on the forward gear, 1, to loosen the input shaft,
2, from the remaining rear bearing.
10996537
67
4. With the input shaft loose from the bearing, pull
the input shaft, 1, with the reverse gear, 2, out of 3 2
the front of the transmission housing.
1
5. Remove the forward gear, 3, from the transmis-
sion housing.
6. Remove the remaining input shaft bearings from

10996538
68
Op. 21 148 63
Reverse Idler Shaft

1. Drive the roll pin, 1, out of the reverse idler shaft,
2.
2
1
10996539
69
21-33
2. Loosen and remove the idler shaft retaining bolt,

1, from the side of the transmission case.
10996540
70
3. Push the idler shaft, 1, towards the front of the
transmission case.
4. Remove the thrust washer, 2, from the idler shaft, 2

1, taking note of the orientation of the oil channels 1
in the thrust washer.
10996541
71
5. Remove the reverse idler gear, 1, and the two
needle bearings, 2, from the idler shaft. 2 2
10996542
72
21-34
6. Remove the reverse idler shaft, 1, from the trans-

mission housing.
2
7. Remove and discard the O ring, 2, on the end of 1
the idler shaft, 1.
10996543
73
Op. 21 148 63
Shuttle Shift Rail and Fork

1
1. Remove the neutral safety switch, 1, the seal
washer, 2, and the balk pin, 3, from the transmis- 2
sion housing.
3
10996544
74
2. Drive the double roll pin from the shift rail, 1, and
the shift fork, 2.
2 1
10996545
75
21-35
3. Turn the shift rail, 1, 90° and remove from the shift
fork, 2, and the inside hole of the transmission
housing.
2 3
1
4. Remove the spacer, 3, from the shift rail, 1.
90°
5. Remove the shift rail, 1, from the front of the
10996546
76
6. Remove and discard the shift rail seal, 1, from the
1
10996547
77
Op. 21 148 63
Main Countershaft 1
2
1. Straighten the peened tab, 1, on the countershaft
locknut, 2. Remove the locknut.
10996548
78
21-36
2. Using an aluminum drift and a hammer, tap the

countershaft loose towards the rear of the trans-
mission housing.
10996549
79
3. Remove the front main countershaft bearing, 1,
from the counterbore in the transmission hous-
ing.
1
10996550
80
4. Remove the collar, 1, through the bearing coun-
terbore.
10996551
81
21-37
5. Pull the countershaft, 1, to the rear of the trans-

mission housing, and carefully remove the 1
shuttle gears and synchronizer, 2, from the trans- 3
mission housing.
6. Continue to pull the countershaft, 1, to the rear of 2

the transmission housing while removing the
fixed gears, 3.
7. Remove the countershaft, 1, from the back of the

82
Op. 21 148 63
5
Synchronizers 4
The synchronizer assemblies can also be disas- 3
sembled if necessary. Be certain that the hubs and
sleeves have matching marks.
1
1. Synchronizer Hub
2. Synchronizer Sleeve
3. Retaining Ring
4. Inserts
5. Matching Marks 4
2
4
83
1. Place the synchronizer/gear assembly on the
workbench and insert the shift fork, 1, onto the
synchronizer sleeve, 2.
2. Use a feeler gauge, 3, to measure the side clear- 1

ance between the sleeve, 2, and the shift fork, 1.
See “Specifications” later in this section for maxi- 2
mum clearance.
3
84
21-38
1. Place the synchronizer rings, 1, on the synchro-

nizer gears, 2, and use a feeler gauge, 3, to mea- 3 2
sure the cone wear. See “Specifications” later in
this section for minimum clearance.
85
INSPECTION
1. Wash all components using a suitable cleaning
solvent and air dry.
2. Inspect all bearings for excess wear, score

marks, discoloration from overheating, or other
damage. Rotate the bearings by hand and check
for roughness while slowly rotating the inner and
outer races.
3. Lubricate all bearings with a clean lubricant, NH

134 or equivalent, before installation.
4. Inspect the transmission housing for pitting,

cracks, worn bearing bores, or other damage.
5. Check the detent springs for wear, chipping, or

weak spring tension.
6. Inspect the detent balls for pitting, excess wear

or other damage.
7. Inspect the shift rail detent grooves for excess

wear or other damage.
8. Inspect all gears for excess wear, chipped teeth

or other damage.
21-39
ASSEMBLY
5
4
Synchronizers
1. Place one of the retaining rings, 3, in the synchro- 3
nizer hub, 1. Position the end of the ring in the 1
hole in the hub.
2. Install the three inserts, 4, into the hub, 1. Align

the marks, 5, on the hub, 1, and sleeve, 2, and
start the sleeve on the hub, 1.
3. Push the sleeve, 2, into position and install the

second retaining ring, 3, making sure that both
rings are seated inside the lip of the inserts, 4.
4
4. Install the synchronizer rings in the hub, 1, and
assemble the gears to the synchronizers.
2 4
86
Main Countershaft
1
1. Position the synchronizer and shuttle gear as-
sembly, 2, minus the front collar, into the trans- 3
mission housing.
2. Position the fixed countershaft gears, 3, into the 2

3. Install the main countershaft, 1, into the transmis-

sion housing from the rear, through the fixed
countershaft gears, 3, and the synchronizer and
shuttle gear assembly, 2.
87
4. Install the collar, 1, through the front bearing
counterbore and into the synchronizer and
shuttle gear assembly.
1
10996551
88
21-40
5. Install the front countershaft bearing, 1, into the

counterbore in the front of the transmission hous-
ing.
1
10996550
89
6. Install the locknut, 1, onto the main countershaft.
Tighten the locknut, 1, and bend the lock tab, 2,
down. 1 2
10996548
90
Shuttle Shift Rail And Fork
1. Lightly lubricate a new seal, 1, with petroleum jel-
ly, and install in the transmission housing. 1
10996547
91
21-41
2. Position the shift fork, 2, on the synchronizer and

install the shift rail, 1, through the transmission
housing.
2 3
1
3. Install the spacer, 3, onto the shift rail, 1.
4. Install the shift rail, 1, through the shift fork, 2, and

into the hole in the transmission housing.
10996546
92
5. Align the roll pin holes in the shift rail, 1, and the
shift fork, 2, and drive a new double roll pin into
the aligned holes.
2 1
10996545
93
6. Install the balk pin, 3, a new seal washer, 2, and
the neutral safety switch, 1, into the side of the
transmission housing. Tighten the neutral safety 1
switch.
2
10996544
94
21-42
7. Install the detent ball, 3, the detent spring, 2, and

the detent pin, 1, into the shuttle shift detent hole
in the top of the transmission case.
1
3
10996434
95
Reverse Idler Shaft
1. Use petroleum jelly and lightly lubricate and
2
install a new O ring, 2, on the end of the idler 1
shaft, 1.
2. Install the reverse idler shaft, 1, through the

10996543
96
3. Install the two needle bearings, 2, and the re-
verse idler gear, 1, onto the idler shaft. 2 2
NOTE: Be certain that the oil channels in the reverse

idler gear, face the front of the transmission housing.
10996542
97
21-43
4. Install the thrust washer, 2, onto the idler shaft, 1,

with the oil channels in the spacer facing the re-
verse idler gear.
2
5. Using an alignment punch in the roll pin hole, 1
align the locking bolt hole in the idler shaft with
the locking bolt hole in the transmission housing.
10996541
98
6. Install the reverse idler shaft locking bolt, 1, with
a new seal washer and tighten the locking bolt.
10996540
99
7. Install a new roll pin, 1, in the reverse idler shaft,
2.
2
1
10996539
100
21-44
Op. 21 148 63
Input Shaft
1 2
1. Use petroleum jelly and lightly lubricate and 4 3
install a new seal, 1, in the end of the input shaft,
4.
2. Install the bearing, 2, in the end of the input shaft,

4, and secure with a new retaining ring, 3.
10996553
101
3. Insert the input shaft , 1, with the reverse gear, 2,
and front bearing, 4, into the front of the transmis- 3 2
sion housing, and through the forward gear, 3. 4
1
10996538
102
4. Install the rear input shaft bearing, 1, into the
counterbore in the transmission housing.
5. Insert the input shaft through the rear bearing, 1, 1

while positioning the front bearing in the trans-
mission housing.
NOTE: It may be necessary to lightly tap the rear in-

put shaft bearing to seat it securely on the input shaft.
10996554
103
21-45
Op. 21 148 63
Main Countershaft End Float

Before installing the retainer housing, the main coun-
tershaft end float must be measured and adjusted. To 1
determine the amount of end float, perform the fol-
lowing steps:
3
1. Push the main countershaft, 1, towards the rear
of the transmission housing
2. Make certain that the face of the transmission 4

housing is clean and free from any nicks or seal-
ant material.
3. Place a straightedge, 2, across the housing face

and the main countershaft, 1.
4. Insert a feeler gauge, 3, between the front bear-

2
ing, 4, and the straightedge, 2, to determine the
amount of end float.
104
5. Use shims between the retainer housing and the
front bearing to achieve zero end float (end play).
NOTE: Shims are available in the following thick-

ness: 0.1 mm (0.004″), 0.2 mm (0.008″), 0.5 mm
(0.020″).
Op. 21 148 63
2
Range Gear Countershaft
1. Install the needle bearing, 1, into the end of the
main countershaft, 2.
10996535
105
2. Position the sliding gears, 3, and the large count-
er gear, 2, in the transmission housing.
2
3. Slide the range gear countershaft and bearing, 1,

through the rear of the transmission housing, and 1
through the large counter gear, 2.
3
10996533
106
21-46
4. Place a new retaining ring, 1, on the range gear

countershaft, 3, temporarily. Do not install the re- 2
taining ring in the groove at this point.
1
5. Install the range gear countershaft, 3, through
the sliding gears and into the end of the main
countershaft.
6. Install the retaining ring, 1, in the groove on the

range countershaft, 3, to secure the large count-
er gear, 2.
3
10996532
107
Op. 21 148 63
8
Range Shift Rail And Fork 7
9
1. Use petroleum jelly, lubricate and install a new
seal, 1, in the transmission housing.
2
2. Install the shift arm, 2, through the transmission 1
housing, and into the collar on the shift lever, 3.
3. Install a new roll pin, 4, through the collar, 3, and 4

the shift arm, 2.
4. Install the locking plate, 5, and the retaining bolt, 3

6. Tighten the retaining bolt, 6.
5
5. Install the detent spring, 7, and ball, 8, in the shift 6
fork, 9.
10996569
108
6. Position the shift fork, 2, on the sliding gears, 3.
Install the shift rail, 1, through the rear of the
transmission housing. Rotate the shift rail, 1, into
a position that places the detent slots facing up. 2
1
10996530
109
21-47
7. Insert the detent tool FNH00081, 1, into the det-

ent hole in the shift fork, 2. Push down on the det- 1
ent ball, and hold until the shift rail, 3, is inserted
into the shift fork, 2, far enough to secure the det-
ent ball. Remove the detent tool, 1.
2
8. Insert the shift rail, 3, through the shift fork, 2, and 3
into the hole in the transmission housing. Rotate
the shift rail so the detent slots engage the detent
ball, and the locking hole in the shift rail aligns
with the locking bolt hole in the transmission
case.
10996555
110
9. Install the locking bolt with a new seal washer,
and tighten.
10996528
111
Op. 21 148 63
Main Shaft 2
1
1. Install the bearing holder, 2, and the bearing, 1,
into the bore in the transmission housing.
2. Assemble the synchronizers as described earlier

in this section. Install the main transmission
gears on the synchronizers.
10996536
112
21-48
3. Install the main shaft, 2, through the rear of the

transmission housing, 3, and position the small, 1
fixed range gear, 1, on the main shaft, 2. 2
10996451
113
4. Install the adjusting collar, 1, onto the main shaft,
2. 1
10996450
114
5. Install the large, fixed range gear, 1, onto the
main shaft, 2. 1
2
10996449
115
21-49
6. Install the main shaft center bearing, 2, onto the

main shaft, 1. 2
10996448
116
NOTE: When installing the main shaft, make sure
that the main shaft center bearing remains out of its
bore until the gear teeth on the rear of the main shaft 1
are in position.
7. Feed the main shaft, 2, through the center bore

in the transmission housing, and install the rear
synchronizer and gear assembly, 1, on the main
shaft, 2.
10996447
117
NOTE: The range gears and the main gears must be
worked onto the main shaft splines while installing
the main shaft to prevent binding and possible dam-
age to the gear teeth. 1
2
8. Install the front synchronizer and gear assembly,
1, on the main shaft. Insert the main shaft into the
end of the input shaft while positioning the center
bearing, 2, in its bore.
10996446
118
21-50
9. With the main shaft in place, install the rear main

shaft bearing, 1.
1
10996570
119
Op. 21 148 63
Main Shaft End Float

If new main shaft components were installed when
reassembling the transmission, the end float will
need to be measured and adjusted to attain zero end
float (play), on the main shaft. To do this, the trans- 2
mission must be mounted to the rear axle housing. 1
Zero end float is accomplished by using the adjusting
collar, 1, and collar nut, 2. Use a new collar assembly.
Begin with the collar adjusted all the way in. Adjust
the collar out until zero end play is achieved. When
the adjustment is correct, stake the lock tab on the
collar nut, 2, to secure the adjustment from changing.
When adjustment is correct, gears should rotate by

hand with a very slight drag.
NOTE: Do not over expand the adjustment collar. If

end float is set too tight, hard shifting and gear drag 10996568
will occur. 120
Main Shift Rails And Forks

1. Using petroleum jelly, lightly lubricate and install
new shift rail seals, 1, in the transmission hous-
ing.
1
10996552
121
21-51
2. Install the detent spring, 1, and the detent ball, 2,

in the detent hole for the main shift rails. 2
10996571
122
3. Position the lower shift fork, 1, on the front syn-
chronizer, 2. 2
10996558
123
4. Install the lower shift rail, 1, through the front of
the transmission housing, 2, with the detent
grooves, 3, positioned on the sides of the shift
rail.
2
3
10996442
124
21-52
5. Insert detent tool FNH00081, 1, into detent hole,

and push down on the detent ball and spring
while sliding the lower shift rail, 2, through the 2
transmission housing, and the shift fork, 3. Re-
1
move the detent tool from the hole when the shift 2
rail secures the detent ball. Turn the shift rail 90°
so that the detent grooves are positioned on the
bottom of the shift rail.
10996444
125
6. Align the roll pin holes in the shift rail, 1, and the
shift fork, 2. Install a new roll pin through the shift
rail, 1, and into the shift fork, 2.
1
2
10996438
126
7. Position the lower shift rail to place the front syn-
chronizer, 1, in the neutral position.
1
10996558
127
21-53
8. Insert the balk pin, 1, in the detent hole.

1
10996557
128
9. Position the upper shift fork, 1, on the rear syn-
chronizer, 2.
2
10996559
129
10. Install the upper shift rail, 1, through the front of
the transmission housing, and through the shift
fork, 2. Align the roll pin holes in the rail and fork. 1 2
Install a new roll pin through the shift fork, 2, and
into the shift rail, 1.
10996439
130
21-54
11. Install the PTO shaft, 1 through the main shaft, 2.
10996563
131
Retainer Cover
1. Using petroleum jelly, lightly lubricate and install 2
a new input shaft seal, 1, in the retainer cover, 2.
10996561
132
2. Install a new gasket, 1, between the retainer cov-
er, 2, and the transmission housing. 2 1 3 4
3. Install the retainer cover, 2, on the transmission
housing. Secure with the six mounting bolts, 3,
and six new seal washers, 4. Tighten the mount-
ing bolts. See “Bolt Torque Specifications” later
in this section for proper bolt torque.
10996565
133
21-55
Op. 21 110 10
Clutch housing
1
1. Install the clutch housing onto the transmission.
Apply Loctitet 242 to the seven buckle-up bolts,
1, and three buckle-up nuts, 2. Tighten the bolts
and nuts to 81 N⋅m (60 ft. lbs.).
10996436
134
2. Install the diverter valve, 3, and the hydraulic
tubes, 2, onto the transmission housing, using 1
the diverter valve bracket and retaining bolt, 1.
Tighten the retaining bolt, 1. 2
3
10996435
135
3. Install the detent ball, 3, spring, 2, and pin, 1, into
the shuttle shift detent hole in the transmission
housing.
1
3
10996434
136
21-56
4. Install the detent ball, 2, and spring, 1, into the

main gear detent hole, 3, in the transmission
housing. 1
3
10996433
137
5. Apply a bead of Loctitet gasket eliminator 518
to the transmission housing and install the trans- 3 1 2
mission cover, 2, on the transmission housing, 3,
and secure with the retaining bolts, 1. Tighten the
retaining bolts, 1, and torque to 22.6 - 28.4 N⋅m
(16.6 - 21 ft. lbs.).
10996432
138
6. Install the shuttle gear selector shaft, 1, into the
clutch housing, 2.
NOTE: Be sure to grease the selector shaft before 1

installing the transmission to the engine. Use the
grease fitting, 3.
3
10996431
139
21-57
7. Install and tighten the three retaining bolts, 1, se-

curing the shuttle gear selector shaft, 2, to the
clutch housing.
2
1
10996430
140
8. Install the main gear selector shaft, 1, into the
clutch housing, 2.
NOTE: Be sure to grease the selector shaft at the

grease fitting, before installing the transmission to
1
the engine.
10996429
141
9. Install and tighten the three retaining bolts, 1, se-
curing the main gear selector shaft, 2, to the
clutch housing.
2
1
10996428
142
21-58
10. Install the clutch hub and bearing, 1, onto the in-
put shaft, 2. 2
10996427
143
11. Install the retainer pin, 1, into the clutch housing,
2.
1
10996426
144
12. Install the clutch hub return spring, 1, onto the
clutch hub, 2, and the retainer pin, 3.
1
2 3
10996562
145
21-59
13. Apply a bead of Loctitet gasket eliminator 518

to the rear face of the transmission housing.
14. Use a suitable hoist or lifting device attached to 1

the transmission housing to position the trans-
mission and the differential together. Apply Loc-
titet 242 to the buckle-up bolts and nuts. Install
and tighten the the eight buckle-up bolts, 1, and
two buckle-up nuts to 81 N⋅m (60 ft. lbs.).
10996437
146
21-60
1
5
4
20000906
147
Engine
WARNING
train together with the engine. Severe damage to
1. Install the brake/clutch pedal assembly, 5, onto

2. Attach the left brake rod, 3, to the clutch pedal

linkage, 4.
3. Connect the right brake rod, 1, to the brake ped-

als, 2.
21-61
4. Attach the range selector link, 1, to the control

arm, 2, on the transmission.
20000907 1
148
5. Attach the clutch rod to the clutch arm on the
clutch housing.

the engine. Align the splines on the 12x12 input 1
shaft with the clutch and the engine flywheel. Ro- 2
tate the engine fan to align the input shaft and the
clutch/flywheel. The floor jack or the hoist may
need to be raised or lowered to make alignment
possible.
10998241
149
the M10 bolts and nuts to 32 - 41 ft Ibs. Torque
the two M12 bolts to 81 N⋅m (60 ft Ibs).
1
3
2
20000905
150
21-62

the tractor.
10000868
151
the tee fitting.
1
2
3
10000865
152
and the clutch housing, 3. Secure with the retain-
ing bolts.
2
1
20000908
153
21-63
11. If equipped, Install the FWD driveshaft, 2, and

secure with the two roll pins, 1.
1
20000904
154
the starter, 2. 2
30997565
1
155
the hydraulic pump, 2, and the diverter valve. 2
hydraulic pump, 2.
15. Connect the main wiring harness connector.
17. Connect the throttle cable to the foot throttle

control lever located on the right deck.

30997557
19. Install the seat and the seat base on the tractor. 156
ROPS.
21-64

valve, 1, on the right fender. Connect the
hydraulic tubes.
23. Connect the wiring connectors to the dash

housing switches.

throttle control lever. 1
30997555
157
instrument panel. Install the instrument panel, 2, 2
1 3
screws, 1.
10998361
158
bracket, 8, to the steering column, 9, with the
retaining bolts, 6. Connect the lower main shift
shaft, 5, and shuttle shift shaft, 2, to the
transmission shafts with the roll pins, 4 and 1,
and retaining ring, 3.
27. Install the hood on the tractor and connect the 9

6
headlight wiring connector. 8 7 6
2
4 5
1
3
10996566
159
21-65

panels.


tractor. 2
1
recommended oil to the proper level.
10000864
160
1 2
30997558
161
21-66
2
1
10996567
162
Op. 21 130
TRANSMISSION SHIFT LEVERS

1. Shuttle Shift Control Lever
2. Main Transmission Shift Control Lever
21-67
4 3
10 5
12
11
14
13 6
15
7
9
1 2
16
8 17
10996566
163
Main Shift Control Lever Installation
1. Remove the rear hood shields to gain access to 1. Install the main shift control lever assembly
the shift levers. through the dash and onto the clutch housing.
2. Remove the roll pin, 1, from the U joint, 2. 2. Install the two retaining bolts, 6, through the main
shift control bracket, 7, into the steering column,
3. Remove the lever grip, 3, and the shift boot, 4, 15. Tighten the retaining bolts, 6.
from the shift lever, 5.
3. Install the shift boot, 4, and the lever grip, 3, onto
4. Loosen and remove the two retaining bolts, 6, the shift lever, 5.
from the main shift control bracket, 7.
4. Install a roll pin, 1, through the U joint, 2, and the
5. Remove the main shift control lever assembly main shift shaft, 16.
from the clutch housing and the dash.
5. Install the rear side hoods.
6. Use conventional repair procedures to overhaul
the shift control lever assembly.
21-68
10996567
164
Adjustment - Main Shift Lever main shift control bracket, 7, to give equal motion
1. Loosen the two retaining bolts, 6, and slide the between neutral, and the up and down gear posi-
gearshift assembly up or down in the slots on the tions.
21-69
4 3
10 5
12
11
14
13 6
15
7
9
1 2
16
8 17
10996566
165
Shuttle Shift Control Lever Installation
1. Install the shuttle shift control lever assembly
Removal through the dash and onto the clutch housing.
1. Remove the rear hood shields to gain access to
2. Install the two retaining bolts, 13, through the
the shift levers.
shuttle shift control bracket, 14, into the steering
2. Remove the roll pin, 8, from the shuttle control column, 15. Tighten the retaining bolts, 13.
shaft, 9.
3. Install the shift boot, 11, and the lever grip, 10,
3. Remove the lever grip, 10, and the shift boot, 11, onto the shift lever, 12.
from the shift lever, 12.
4. Install a roll pin, 8, through the shuttle control
4. Loosen and remove the two retaining bolts, 13, shaft, 9, and the shuttle shift shaft, 17.
from the shuttle shift control bracket, 14.
5. Install the rear side hoods.
5. Remove the shuttle shift control lever assembly
from the clutch housing and the dash.
6. Use conventional repair procedures to overhaul

the shift control lever assembly.
21-70
Chapter 1 -- Driveline
CONTENTS

23 000 Bolt Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-3
Front Wheel Drive Take Off Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-4
Sensitrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-5
Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-9
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-10
Front Wheel Drive Take Off Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-10
23 260 Sensitrack Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-14
23 260 Sensitrack Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-31
23-1
BOLT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

4T, 4 3.6--5.8 4.9--7.9
M6 7T, 7 1.0 5.9--9.4 7.9--12.7 ------------ ------------ ------------
8T, 8, 11 7.2--10 9.8--13.6
4T 7.2--14 9.8--19 12--17 16.3--23
M8 7T 1.25 17--22 23--29.8 1.0 19--27 25.7--36.6
8T 20--26 27.1--35.2 22--31 29.8--42
4T 20--25 27.1--33.9 20--29 27.1--39.3
M10 7T 1.5 34--40 46.1--54.2 1.25 35--47 47.4--63.7
8T 38--46 51.5--62.3 40--52 54.2--70.5
4T 28--34 37.9--46.1 31--41 42--55.6
M12 7T 1.75 51--59 69.1--79.9 1.25 56--68 75.9--92.1
8t 57--66 77.2--89.4 62--75 84--101.6
4T 49--56 66.475.9 52--64 70.5--86.7
M14 7T 2.0 81--93 109.8--126 1.5 90--106 122--143.6
8T 96--109 130.1--147.7 107--124 145--168
4T 67--77 90.8--104.3 69--83 93.5--112.5
M16 7T 2.0 116--130 157.2--176.2 1.5 120--138 162.6--187
8T 129--145 174.8--196.5 140--158 189.7--214.1
4T 88--100 119.2--136 100--117 136--158.5
M18 7T 2.0 150--168 203.3--227.6 1.5 177--199 239.8--269.6
8T 175--194 237.1--262.9 202--231 273.7--313
4T 108--130 146.3--176.2 132--150 178.9--203.3
M20 7T 2.5 186--205 252--277.8 1.5 206--242 279.1--327.9
8T 213--249 288.6--337.4 246--289 333.3--391.6
23-2
SPECIAL TOOLS
Detent ball retaining tool # FNH00081
23-3
FRONT WHEEL DRIVE TAKE OFF GEARBOX an output shaft, 6, and a shift fork. These
The front wheel drive take off gearbox, is mounted components when engaged by the operator’s control
underneath the rear differential housing and consists lever, transfer drive power to the front axle, making
of a fixed gear, 1, on the final drive pinion shaft, 2, a both the rear and the front wheels of the tractor
fixed gear, 3, and a sliding gear, 4, in the gearbox, 5, driven.
6 3 4
20000950 2 5
2
23-4
SENSITRACK
Front wheel drive is standard equipment with the
Supersteert system. The system also utilizes a
Sensitrackt feature, 1, in the drive train which
receives the main transmission, 2, drive shaft input
and provides either full time front wheel drive or
automatic front wheel drive, 3, dependent upon
control lever position.
3 1
2
3
The front wheel drive option is operator controlled by
a lever, 1, located on the left-hand control pod. 1
Normal operation of the front wheel drive option, is in
the automatic mode, with the control lever in the rear
position. Full time front wheel drive is engaged by
moving the control lever to the forward position.
10997820
4
The front-wheel drive system can be locked out
completely, allowing the tractor to be operated in
full-time two wheel drive. The full-time 2WD lever, 1
located to the left of the seat on tractors equipped
with Supersteert front axles, controls engagement
of the FWD shaft. Pulling up on the lever engages the
FWD sliding gear with the FWD shaft in the
transmission housing. Pushing down on the lever
disengages the FWD sliding gear and the FWD shaft,
allowing the tractor to be operated in full-time 2WD.
10998312
5
23-5
Automatic Position (ENGAGED) Input shaft

Output shaft
In the automatic mode, the Sensitrackt clutch
engages (providing FWD) whenever the speed of the
input shaft is equal to or greater than the speed of the
output shaft. In such a case, the input shaft rotation
causes the drive cam, 2, to shift. As it does, it rides
up on the center cam, 3, thereby pushing it outward.
The center cam movement causes it to mesh with the
driven cam, 5, overcoming the compression spring,
4, restoring power to the output shaft. Notice that the 5
shifter fork, 1, does not engage any of the cams.
4 1
3 2
6
Automatic Position (DISENGAGED)
In the automatic position, the Sensitrackt has a Output shaft Input shaft
disconnect feature which disengages front wheel
drive when drive line wrap-up is sensed on
straight-aways, down-grades, or when making sharp
turns. This disconnect happens when the front
wheels are turning faster than the rear wheels. When
this happens, the drive cam, 2, aligns with the center 1
cam, 3, and the compression spring, 4, pushes the
center cam disengaging it from the driven cam, 5. 5
When front wheel drive disengages, it automatically
re-engages when the rear drive input is equal to or 4
greater than the front output shaft rotation. The 3 2
shifter fork, 1, is always in the same position in the
automatic mode. 7
Full time front wheel drive (LOCKED DOWN) Output shaft Input shaft
In the full time front wheel drive position the shifter
fork, 1, is continuously engaged pushing on the
thrust washer, 7, and sleeve, 6, which engages the
center cam, 3, with the driven cam, 5, and overcomes
the compression spring, 4, pressure. This permits
the drive cam, 2, rotation to be continuously
transmitted through the center cam and the driven 1
cam.
5
NOTE: When disengaging full-time FWD, it may be
necessary to move in reverse to unlock the 6 7
Sensitrackt clutch. 4 3 2
8
23-6
SUPERSTEERt FRONT AXLE 21û 21û

The Supersteert front axle is mounted to the tractor
frame with a spherical bearing and a bearing retainer,
1. A stabilizer bar, 2, is mounted at the pivot point and
at the clutch housing to keep the front axle anchored
to the tractor. The tie rods are connected to the front
of the frame. This allows the entire front axle
assembly to articulate 21º relative to the center line
of the tractor frame.
1 2
9
The axle can also oscillate 8° on the spherical
bearing, 1, maintaining the tractor chassis in a level
position ensuring stable operation while on irregular 1
ground.
The front wheel drive front axle is not adjustable and

the front wheels are not to be reversed.
8o 8o
The front wheel tie rod assembly is adjustable for
toe-in adjustments. The power steering cylinders are
located between the front axle and the steering arm.
10
23-7
Power flows from the main transmission through the

rear drive shaft to the Sensitrackt. When engaged,
the shifter fork, 1, pushes on the thrust washer, 2, and
the sleeve, 3, and causes the center cam, 4, to mate
with the driven cam, 5. This in turn causes the
Sensitrackt output shaft and connecting shaft to the
front axle differential assembly to rotate.
4 2
5 1
11
Power then flows to the front wheels from the front

axle differential side gear, 1, and axle shaft, 2, to the 1 2 3 5
reduction gearbox assembly. A pinion gear, 3, on the 4
axle shaft, drives an idler pinion, 5, and an idler shaft,
6, in the drop box, 4. final drive pinion, 7, on the idler
shaft drives the bevel gear, 8, which is splined to the
wheel hub and shaft assembly.
6
9
7 8
12
23-8
TROUBLESHOOTING
CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSE REMEDY

Driveline vibration 1. Dry U-joints or driveshaft cou- 1. Lubricate
plings
2. Worn U-joints or couplings 2. Replace U-joints/couplings
3. Bent driveshaft 3. Replace driveshaft
4WD will not stay engaged in full 1. Control lever out of adjustment 1. Adjust lever linkage
time mode
2. Sensitrack cable out of adjust- 2. Adjust Sensitrack cable
ment
3. Sensitrack cable stretched 3. Replace cable
4WD will not operate in Auto- 1. Sensitrack cable out of adjust- 1. Adjust Sensitrack cable
mode ment
2. Sensitrack cable stretched 2. Replace cable
3. Sensitrack clutch is worn 3. Rebuild or replace Sensitrack
clutch
LUBRICATION
The driveline must be lubricated every 50 hours, or Use High Viscosity Lithium Base-NLGI#2 grease,
sooner if necessary. The universal joints have grease and NH134 Hydraulic oil for lubrication of the
fittings while the Front Wheel Drive Take Off Gearbox driveline.
is lubricated by the hydraulic oil in the differential
case.
23-9
OVERHAUL
FRONT WHEEL DRIVE TAKE OFF GEARBOX
2 2
Removal 6
1. Loosen and remove the retaining bolts, 1, and
the covers, 2, from the drive shaft, 3. 3
2. Drive out the roll pin, 4, from the coupler, 5. Drive
out the roll pin, 6, from the coupler, 7. 4
3. Remove the couplers, 5 and 7, and the drive
shaft, 3, from the tractor. 1
7
5
20000944
13
4. Loosen and remove the drain bolt, 1, and the

sealing washer, 2, from the gearbox, 3, and drain
the hydraulic fluid into a suitable container.
5. Loosen and remove the seven mounting bolts, 4,
from the gearbox, 3. Remove the gearbox from
the differential housing.
13
14
12
9
6
8
20 7
18 3
19
17
16 5 22
21
17 1 4
2
23
15
10 11
20000946
14
23-10
Disassembly of the oil grooves on the thrust washers. The oil

1. Drive out the roll pin, 5, from the counter gear grooves face the counter gear.
shaft, 6.
2. Remove the counter gear shaft, 6, the two thrust
NOTE: Observe the orientation of the counter gear washers, 7, the two needle bearings, 8, and the
flanges before removing the gear. The long flange is counter gear, 9, from the gearbox, 3.
positioned toward the front of the gearbox, and the
short flange faces rearward. Observe the orientation 3. Loosen and remove the shift rail retaining bolt,
10, from the gearbox, 3.
13
14
12
9
6
8
20 7
18 3
19
17
16 5 22
21
17 1 4
2
23
15
10 11
20000946
15
23-11
WARNING 2. Install the output shaft, 20, into the gearbox, 3,

and through the sliding gear, 21.
Place a rag over the detent hole in the shift fork
when removing the shift rail. The detent ball and 3. Install the front bearing, 19, into the gearbox, 3.
spring could be expelled with considerable force
4. Lightly lubricate a new oil seal, 18, with
resulting in personal injury.
petroleum jelly, and install into the gearbox, 3.
5. Lightly lubricate new O rings, 17, with petroleum
4. Turn the shift rail, 11, 90° and remove from the
jelly, and install onto the drive shaft retainer, 16
gearbox, 3.
6. Secure the drive shaft retainer, 16, to the
5. Remove and discard the O ring, 23, from the shift
gearbox, 3, with the retaining bolt, 15.
rail, 11.
7. Install the shift fork, 12, onto the sliding gear, 21.
6. Remove the shift fork, 12, from the gearbox, 3.
Do not lose the detent ball, 13, and spring, 14. 8. Install the detent spring, 14, and the detent ball,
13, into the detent hole in the shift fork, 12.
7. Loosen and remove the bolt, 15, securing the
drive shaft retainer, 16, to the gearbox, 3. 9. Lightly lubricate and install a new O ring, 23, onto
the shift rail, 11.
8. Remove the drive shaft retainer, 16, from the
gearbox, 3. Remove and discard the O rings, 17. 10. Insert the special detent tool, # FNH00081, into
the shift fork detent hole, and push down while
9. Remove and discard the oil seal, 18.
installing the shift rail, 11, into the shift fork, 12.
10. Remove the front bearing, 19, from the
11. Install and tighten the shift rail retaining bolt, 10,
gearbox, 3.
into the gearbox case, 3.
11. Gently tap the output shaft, 20, out of the
NOTE: Observe the orientation of the counter gear
gearbox, 3.
flanges while installing the gear. The long flange is
12. Remove the sliding gear, 21, from the positioned toward the front of the gearbox, and the
gearbox, 3. short flange faces rearward. Observe the orientation
13. Remove the rear bearing, 22, from the of the oil grooves on the thrust washers. The oil
gearbox, 3. grooves face the counter gear.
12. Install the counter gear shaft, 6, the two thrust

Inspection washers, 7, the two needle bearings, 8, and the
1. Clean all parts in a suitable solvent and air dry. counter gear, 9, into the gearbox, 3.
2. Inspect the gears for excess wear or damage. 13. Install a new roll pin, 5, in the counter gear
shaft, 5.
3. Rotate the bearings by hand and check for
roughness. Replace as necessary.
Installation
4. Inspect all parts for excess wear or damage.
Replace as necessary. 1. Install the gearbox, 3, to the differential housing,
and secure with the seven retaining bolts, 4.
Assembly 2. Install the drain bolt, 1, with a new sealing

washer, 2, into the gearbox, 3, and tighten.
1. Install the rear bearing, 22, into the gearbox
housing, 3. 3. Fill the common hydraulic fluid reservoir to the
proper level with NH 134 hydraulic fluid.
23-12
4. Install the couplers, 5 and 7, to the drive shaft, 3.

Install the drive shaft to the tractor. 2 2
6
5. Install the roll pins, 4 and 6, in the couplers, 5
and 7. 3
6. Install the covers, 2, to the drive shaft , 3, and
secure with the retaining bolts, 1. Tighten the
4
retaining bolts, 1.
7 1
5
20000944
16
23-13
Op. 23 260
3
SENSITRACK REMOVAL
1. Loosen the two Sensitrackt universal joint, boot
clamps, 1 and 2, and slide the boot, 3, to the rear
of the drive shaft.
2
30996380
1
17
2. Loosen and remove the universal joint retaining
bolts, 1, from the front and rear universal joint. 1
3. Remove the drive shaft assembly from the
transmission output shaft, and from the
differential input shaft.
30996382
18
4. Remove the Sensitrackt linkage, 1, from the
shift arm, 2.
30996381
1 2
19
23-14
5. Loosen and remove the four mounting bolts, 1,

from the Sensitrackt housing, 2, and remove 1
the housing from the tractor.
2
30996384
20
14 13 12
6 28
11
16 15
17
24 20
18
27
4
25 1
23
2
21 3
22
26
9
8 5 7
30996385 10 19
21
1. Cover 15. Clutch Housing
2. Oil Seal 16. Thrust Washer
3. Bearing 17. Output Shaft
4. Input Shaft 18. Bearing
5. Shifter Fork 19. Retaining Ring
6. Shift Arm 20. Oil Seal
7. Socket Head Bolts 21. Sensitrack Case
8. Sheeve 22. Seal Washer
9. Drive Cam 23. Drain Plug
10. Keeper Pins 24. Oil Seal
11. Center Cam 25. Bushing
12. Compression Spring 26. Shifter Blocks
13. Driven Cam 27. Cover Retaining Bolts
14. Thrust Washer 28. Tension Spring
23-15
SENSITRACK DISASSEMBLY
2
1. Remove the drain plug, 1, and seal washer, 2, 1
and drain the oil into a suitable container.
30996403
22
2. Place the assembly in a vise with the input shaft,
1, facing up. Loosen and remove the cover
1
bolts, 2. 2
30996404
23
3. Remove the cover, 1, from the case, 2.
1
30996405
24
23-16
4. Remove and discard the oil seal, 1, from the

cover, 2. 2
30996406
25
5. Pull the input shaft, 1, with the bearing, 2, out of
the assembly. 1
2
30996407
26
NOTE: Apply heat to bolts, 1, if necessary, to ease
removal from the shifter fork, 2.
2
6. Loosen and remove the two socket head bolts, 1,
from the shifter fork, 2.
1
30996408
27
23-17
7. Remove the shifter arm, 1, and the spring, 2, from

4
the shifter fork, 3, and the case, 4.
1
3
30996409
28
8. Remove the shifter fork, 1, and blocks, 2, from
the case, 3. 3 2
30996410 1
29
case, 2.
2 1
30996411
30
23-18
10. Remove the one-way clutch assembly, 1, from

the case, 2. 1
2
30996412
31
11. Remove the sheeve, 1, from the drive cam, 2.
1
30996413
32
12. Remove the snap ring, 1, from the clutch
housing, 2.
1
2
30996414
33
23-19
13. Remove the drive cam, 1, , from the clutch

housing, 2.
1
30996415
34
14. Remove the two keeper pins, 1, from the clutch
housing, 2. 2 1
30996416
35
15. Remove the center cam, 1, from the clutch
housing, 2.
1
30996417
36
23-20
16. Remove the compression spring, 1, from the

clutch housing, 2.
30996418
37
17. Remove the driven cam, 1, from the clutch
housing, 2.
30996419
38
18. Remove the thrust washer, 1, from the clutch
housing, 2.
1
30996420
39
23-21
19. Remove the thrust washer, 1, from the output

shaft, 2.
1
2
30996424
40
20. Lightly tap on the end of the output shaft, 1 to
loosen the shaft bearing from the case
counterbore.
30996421
41
21. Remove the output shaft, 1, with its bearing, 2,
from the case, 3. 1
30996422
42
23-22

case, 2. 2
30996423
43
INSPECTION
1. Clean all parts in the appropriate solvent and
air dry.
2. Replace all seals with new during assembly.
3. Inspect the shifter fork blocks for nicks and
scratches. Use fine emery cloth on a flat surface
to remove minor nicks and scratches.
4. Inspect the drive cam, the center cam, and the
driven cam mating surfaces for excessive wear.
Replace as necessary.
5. Inspect all thrust washers for damage or wear.
6. Inspect the compression spring for distortion.
7. Inspect the bearings for excessive wear or
binding when rotated by hand. Replace as
necessary.
SENSITRACK ASSEMBLY
1. Place the Sensitrackt case into a vise, the same
way as in disassembly.
2 1
30996411
44
23-23
2. Lightly grease and install a new oil seal, 1, into

the case, 2. 2
30996423
45
3. Install the output shaft, 1, and the bearing, 2, into
the case, 3. 1
30996422
46
4. Install the thrust washer, 1, with the grooved side
towards the case, over the output shaft, 2.
1
NOTE: Thrust washer is 2.48 mm (0.099″) thick with
an inside diameter of 22.27 mm (0.878″) and an
outside diameter of 37.73 mm (1.485″).
2
30996424
47
23-24
5. Install the thrust washer, 1, into the clutch

housing, 2.
NOTE: Thrust washer is 2.5 mm (0.098″) thick with 1
an inside diameter of 32.25 mm (1.27″) and an
outside diameter of 44 mm (1.72″).
2
30996420
48
6. Install the driven cam, 1, into the clutch
housing, 2.
30996419
49
7. Install the compression spring, 1, into the clutch
housing, 2.
30996418
50
23-25
8. Install the center cam, 1, into the clutch

housing, 2.
NOTE: Make certain the legs on the center cam, 1, 1
enter the grooves in the plastic ring and spring
assembly on the one-way clutch housing, 2.
30996417
51
9. Install the keeper pins, 1, in their recess on both
sides of the clutch housing, 2. 2 1
30996416
52
10. Insert the drive cam, 1, into position in the clutch
housing, 2.
1
30996415
53
23-26
11. Install the snap ring, 1, into the clutch housing, 2.
1
2
30996414
54
12. Position the snap ring, 1, so that the snap ring Snap Ring
end gap is 90° from the keeper pins, 2. End Gap
1 Center
90°
Pins
Center
2 2
55
13. Install the sheeve, 1, with three legs into any
holes of the drive cam, 2. 1
30996413
56
23-27
14. Install the one way clutch assembly, 1, into the

case, 2, onto the output shaft. Turn the assembly 1
to be certain it seats in its groove.
2
30996412
57
15. Install the shifter fork, 1, with the blocks, 2, into
the case, 3. 3 2
30996410 1
58
the case, 2.
2 1
30996411
59
23-28
17. Install the spring, 1, onto the shift arm, 2.

1
30996425
60
18. Install the shift arm, 1, through the case, 2, and
4
into the shifter fork, 3.
1
3
30996409
61
NOTE: Use Loctite 242 on the socket head bolts, 3.
19. Secure the shifter fork, 2, to the shift arm with the 2
two socket head bolts, 1.
1
30996408
62
23-29
20. Install the input shaft, 1 and bearing, 2, into the

one way clutch assembly. 1
2
30996407
63
the cover, 2. 2
30996406
64
22. Install the cover, 1, onto the case, 2.
1
NOTE: If assembled properly, the cover, 1, will fit
flush on the case, 2. Do not use the bolts to draw the
cover and case together.
2
30996405
65
23-30
23. Install and tighten the cover bolts, 2, evenly.

Torque the cover bolts to 27-35 N⋅m (20-26 ft.
1
-lbs.) 2
30996404
66
24. Fill the case with new hydraulic fluid, and install
the drain plug, 1, with a new seal washer, 2. 2
1
30996403
67
Op. 23 260
1
SENSITRACK INSTALLATION
1. Position the Sensitrackt housing, 2, in the
mounting brackets and connect the output shaft
to the differential universal joint.
2. Install the four mounting bolts, 1, and tighten the
bolts to a torque of 44.1-55.9 N⋅m (32.5-42.1 ft.-
lbs.).
2
30996384
68
23-31
3. Install the Sensitrackt linkage, 1, onto the shift

arm, 2. Use a new cotter pin.
4. Install the shaft end of the drive shaft assembly
into the universal joint on the transmission output
shaft, and the other end onto the Sensitrackt
input shaft.
30996381
1 2
69
5. Install and tighten the universal joint retaining
bolts, 1, into the front and rear universal joints. 1
Torque the retaining bolt, 1, to 20 N⋅m (15 ft. -lbs.)
30996382
70
6. Slide the boot, 3, to the front of the driveshaft, and
tighten the two Sensitrackt universal joint boot 3
clamps, 1 and 2.
2
30996380
1
71
23-32
SENSITRACK CABLE ADJUSTMENT

1. Place the front wheel drive handle, 1, in the 1
automatic position, (rear slot).
NOTE: There are two adjustment locations on the
Sensitrackt cable. The first is located under the left
rear fender, and the second is located at the end of
the cable near the Sensitrackt unit.
10997820
72
2. Adjust the cable, 1, so that the spring, 2, has no
tension, but the cable is slightly taught. Use the 2
jam nuts, 3, to adjust the cable tension.
3. With cable tension adjustment complete, tighten
the jam nuts, 3.
NOTE: If there is tension on the spring, 2, when the
front wheel drive handle is in the automatic position,
the Sensitrackt clutch will not be able to disengage.
1 3
30996386
73
23-33
23-34
SECTION 25 - 4WD FRONT AXLE, SUPERSTEERt
AND SENSITRACKt
Chapter 1 - 4WD Front Axle, Supersteert and Sensitrackt
CONTENTS

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-3
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-6
4WD Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-7
Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-10
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-11
25 108 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-12
25 102 Front Axle and Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-15
Drive Pinion Diassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-16
Drive Pinion Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-17
Axle and Differential Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-19
25 100 Supersteert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-27
Supersteert Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-30
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-33
25 100 Supersteert Axle Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-35
Gear Reduction-Drop Box Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-40
25 102 Front Axle and Differential Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-42
Drive Pinion Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-43
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-44
25 102 Axle and Differential Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-46
25-1
SECTION 25 - 4WD FRONT AXLE, SUPERSTEER AND SENSITRACKt

Supersteert Axle Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-53
25-2
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Steering
g Pump
p
Flow @ 2600 rpm,
p 2wd and 4wd gpmgp (19.4
( lpm)
p ) 5.13 gpm
gp (19.4
( lpm)
p )
Flow @ 2600 rpm, Supersteer gpm (19.4 lpm) 5.13 gpm (19.4 lpm)
Power Steering Type Full Hydraulic
Relief Valve Pressure
FWD 1450 - 1520 psi
p (100-105
( bar))
Supersteer bar) 2030 - 2100 psi (140-145
Reservoir
Capacity
p y 1.5 US q
qts. ((1.4 L.))
Oil NH 134
Maximum Turning
g Angle
g
FWD 54_
Supersteer 54_
Axle Articulation 21_
Total Turn Angle 75_
Power Steering
g Hose Fittings
g
Straight
g Fitting g 285-325 in.-lb.
Swivel Fitting 220-265 in.-lb.
SUPERSTEER FRONT AXLE
Front to Rear Axle Ratio 1.6605 to 1
Drive Pinion Bearing Preload 36 to 44 lbs. (16.3 to 20 kg.)
Pinion Shims (q
(qty.
y as required)
q ) .004″ (.1
( mm))
.008″ (.2
( mm))
.020″ (.5 mm)
Differential shims (q
(qty.
y as required)
q ) .004″ (.1
( mm))
.008″ (.2
( mm))
.020″ (.5 mm)
FRONT TO REAR AXLE RATIO • Engine will lug down or stall when operating on
hard surfaces.
TC35, TC35D, TC40, TC40D, TC45 and TC45D
• The front wheel drive lever will not remain in the
IMPORTANT: On tractors equipped with FWD (Front engaged position, or is difficult to disengage.
Wheel Drive) the front to rear axle ratio (1.6605:1, • Failure of the driveline gears.
with an acceptable range of 1.63 - 1.69:1), is criti-
cal and must be maintained for safe and efficient use • Failure of the front axle , ring and pinion gears.
of the tractor. This ratio applies to all available tire op- • Premature tire wear.
tions. Following is a list of problems that may occur
if the front to rear axle ratio is not maintained:
25-3
To calculate the front to rear axle ratio, use method 3. To change the front to rear ratio, increase or de-
1 or method 2. crease the tire inflation pressure.
Method 1: NOTE: Do not exceed the tire inflation pressures rec-

ommended in the Operators Manual. Consult the
1. Obtain a measurement from the center of the Operators Manual for the available tire sizes for a
front axle to the ground (Distance A), and center specific tractor.
of the rear axle to the ground (Distance B).
2. Divide Distance B by Distance A to calculate the
front to rear axle ratio. (“B” ÷ “A” = Front to rear
ratio.)
B
A
20000955
25-4
Method 2: Rolling Test 6. Divide the distance B by the distance A to calcu-

late the front to rear ratio.
1. Make a mark on the front tire, 1, and the rear
tire, 2. 7. To change the front to rear ratio, increase or de-
crease the tire inflation pressure, or check the
2. Make a corresponding mark, 3, on the ground at
rear counterbalance weights.
each tire.
NOTE: Do not exceed the tire inflation pressures rec-
3. Slowly roll the tractor forward until the marks on
ommended in the Operators Manual. Consult the
the tires, 1 and 2, make one full revolution.
Operators Manual for the available tire sizes and
4. Make a second mark, 4, on the ground as in inflation pressures for a specific tractor.
step 2.
5. Measure the distance between the marks on the
ground for each tire.
1 2
A B
4 3 4 3 20000955
25-5

4T, 4 3.6-5.8 4.9-7.9
M6 7T, 7 1.0 5.9-9.4 7.9-12.7 ------ ------ ------
8T, 8, 11 7.2-10 9.8-13.6
4T 7.2-14 9.8-19 12-17 16.3-23
M8 7T 1.25 17-22 23-29.8 1.0 19-27 25.7-36.6
8T 20-26 27.1-35.2 22-31 29.8-42
4T 20-25 27.1-33.9 20-29 27.1-39.3
M10 7T 1.5 34-40 46.1-54.2 1.25 35-47 47.4-63.7
8T 38-46 51.5-62.3 40-52 54.2-70.5
4T 28-34 37.9-46.1 31-41 42-55.6
M12 7T 1.75 51-59 69.1-79.9 1.25 56-68 75.9-92.1
8t 57-66 77.2-89.4 62-75 84-101.6
4T 49-56 66.475.9 52-64 70.5-86.7
M14 7T 2.0 81-93 109.8-126 1.5 90-106 122-143.6
8T 96-109 130.1-147.7 107-124 145-168
4T 67-77 90.8-104.3 69-83 93.5-112.5
M16 7T 2.0 116-130 157.2-176.2 1.5 120-138 162.6-187
8T 129-145 174.8-196.5 140-158 189.7-214.1
4T 88-100 119.2-136 100-117 136-158.5
M18 7T 2.0 150-168 203.3-227.6 1.5 177-199 239.8-269.6
8T 175-194 237.1-262.9 202-231 273.7-313
4T 108-130 146.3-176.2 132-150 178.9-203.3
M20 7T 2.5 186-205 252-277.8 1.5 206-242 279.1-327.9
8T 213-249 288.6-337.4 246-289 333.3-391.6
SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool No.
Detent Tool FNH00081
Seal Driver Set NH00293
Includes: NH27488 Handle
NH27515 Drive Plate
NH27530 Drive
D i Plate
Pl t
25-6
4WD FRONT AXLE
Op. 25 100
The four-wheel drive front axle is a factory installed
option on the TC35, 35D, 40, 40D, 45, and 45D
tractors.
The four-wheel drive system uses the same support-

ing system as the two-wheel drive models. The front
wheel tie rod assembly is adjustable for toe-in
adjustments.
Power to the front axle flows from the final drive pin-
ion gear, in the rear differential, through a take off box
attached to the underside of the rear axle center
housing. The take off box transmits power to the front
axle drive pinion through a drive shaft.
Power to the front wheels flows from the front axle dif-
ferential side gear, 1, and axle shaft, 2, to the front
wheel reduction drop box, 4, assembly.
A pinion gear, 3, on the axle shaft, 2, drives an idler

pinion, 5, and an idler shaft, 6, in the drop box. A final
drive pinion, 7, on the idler shaft, 6, drives a bevel
gear, 8, which is splined to the wheel hub and shaft
assembly, 9.
The front wheel drive is controlled by a control lever

located on the left control pod on TC35D, 40D, and
45D model tractors and by a control lever located to
the left of the operators seat on the TC35, 40, and 45 S-23099
model tractors. 3
25-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
Most malfunctions in the steering system can usually 2. Jack the front end of the tractor off the ground
be traced to dirt or foreign matter in the system. Dirt and cycle the steering from stop to stop to check
can cause such things as stickiness, erratic opera- for front axle binding.
tion, or hard steering.
3. Be sure the hydraulic hoses from the pump-to-
Before considering the procedures below, follow motor and from the motor-to-cylinder are hooked
these suggested steps: up correctly.
1. Check the pump for proper relief valve action.

See “Pressure Testing,” discussed later in this
section.

Hard Steering 1. Control valve unit
Control valve unit not aligned to Reposition Control valve unit. (If loos-
steering column ening its mounting bolts lightens the
handwheel, it means that Control
valve unit was in misalignment).
Spool-and-sleeve combination is Replace.

seized because of foreign matter.
Over tightening of the end cap bolts. Re-tighten to the specified torque
limit.
2. Oil pump
The pump is stuck and will not work. Replace oil pump.
The pump is worn down. Replace oil pump.
Pumping performance inadequate. Test pump performance and, if nec-

essary, remove the pump. Disas-
semble the pump and inspect the in-
ternal seals. Refer to the pump seal
kit repair section.
3. Relief valve
The valve is damaged because of Replace control valve assembly.

internal deterioration.
Pressure setting is too low. Replace control valve assembly.

Steering wheel will not return 1. Control valve unit
to neutral or will turn by itself
Spool and sleeve combination is Replace control valve
stuck and will not rotate. assembly.
Control valve unit not aligned to Re-align.

steering column.
25-8

Cylinder will not follow steering 1. Control valve unit
wheel rotation or will respond
sluggishly. Control valve unit has been improp- Repair.
erly rebuilt, resulting in valve
mistiming.
2. Steering cylinder
Air is trapped in the cylinder. Bleed air out.
Internal oil leakage because of dam-

aged piston seal. Replace the seal.
Steering wheel will “kick back” 1. Control valve unit
Control valve unit has been improp- Repair.

erly rebuilt, resulting in valve mistim-
ing.
2. Piping
Pipes are improperly connected to Correct the pipe connections.

the four ports of Control valve unit.
Oil leakage
1. From the splined connec- 1. Leaky oil seal Replace the seal.
tion of column to spool.
Dirty hydraulic oil. Change the oil.
2. From mated face joints 2. Damaged O-ring Replace.

(valve body, spacer plate,
Control valve unit, end cap).
Front wheel Shimmy 1. Worn pivot shaft and/or bushings Replace pivot shaft and/or bushings
2. Loose tie-rod Tighten tie-rod
3. Loose spindle arm Tighten spindle arm
4. Worn king pin and/or bearing Replace king pin and/or bushing
Loose Spindle 1. Worn bushing Replace bushing
2. Worn spindle shaft Replace spindle shaft
3. Worn or damaged thrust bearing Replace thrust bearing

Hard steering 1. Faulty power steering system Inspect and repair power steering
system
25-9
LUBRICATION
LUBRICATE EVERY 50 HOURS - SUPERSTEER

1. Right tie rod outer ball joint
2. Right tie rod inner ball joint 3 7 6
2
3. Left tie rod inner ball joint
4. Left tie rod outer ball joint
5. Right steering cylinder outer bushing
6. Right steering cylinder inner bushing
7. Left steering cylinder inner bushing
8. Left steering cylinder outer bushing 8
9. Stabilizer rear ball joint
5
4 1
10. Stabilizer front ball joint
13
11. Pivot bearing
12. Rear drive shaft
10
13. Front drive shaft
11
IMPORTANT: The Supersteert front axle requires
lubrication every 50 hours at various locations.
12 9
4
LUBRICATE EVERY 50 HOURS -
STANDARD 4 WD 1 2
1. Tie rod - right side
2. Tie rod - left side
3. Steering cylinder - barrel end 4
4. Steering cylinder - rod end
5. Front bearing holder
6. Rear bearing holder 6
3
5
5
25-10
OVERHAUL
STANDARD 4 WD AXLE
2 2
Removal 6
1. Drain the power steering reservoir and remove
the power steering hoses from the steering 3
cylinder.
2. Loosen and remove the retaining bolts, 1, and 4
the covers, 2, from the drive shaft, 3.
3. Drive out the roll pin, 4, from the coupler, 5. Drive 7 1
out the roll pin, 6, from the coupler, 7.
4. Remove the couplers, 5 and 7, and the drive- 5
shaft, 3, from the tractor. 20000944
5. Raise the tractor with a floor jack and support the 6

frame with jack stands.
6. Remove the front pivot bearing holder, 1, and the

rear pivot bearing holder, 2, from the tractor 2
frame.
7. Carefully roll the front axle assembly forward, out
from under the tractor.
200000945
7
Installation
1. With the tractor supported on jack stands, care-
2
fully roll the front axle under the tractor.
2. Install the rear pivot bearing holder, 2, and the
front pivot bearing holder, 1, onto the axle and the
frame of the tractor.
1
3. Raise the tractor using a floor jack, and remove
the jack stands. Lower the tractor and remove the
floor jack.
200000945
8
25-11
4. Install the coupler, 7, onto the drive shaft, 3, using

the roll pin, 6. 2 2
6
5. Install the coupler, 5, onto the drive shaft, 3. Do
not install the roll pin, 4, at this time. 3
6. Install the drive shaft assembly onto the tractor.
7. Install the roll pin, 4, into the coupler, 5 at this 4
time.
8. Install the covers, 2, onto the drive shaft, 3, and 7 1
secure with the retaining bolts, 1.
5
20000944
9
Op. 25 108
DISASSEMBLY
Gear Reduction Drop Box
NOTE: These procedures apply to both the right and
left front axle component assemblies. Repeat the
procedure for the opposite side component to be dis-
assembled or repaired.
1. Remove the front-wheel hub bolts and remove
the front wheels. 4
2. Remove the tie rod, 1, from the steering arm, 2.
Tap the ball joint with a hammer to loosen the ball
joint.
3. Remove the drain plug, 3, from the drop box 1
case, and drain the oil into a clean suitable con-
tainer.
4. Remove the steering cylinder, 4, from the steer-
ing arm, and the front axle.
S-23765
10
25-12
23 24
35 36 21 22
3 20
1 2 18
19
16 17
14
4 15 13 37
12
11
7
42 31
38
32
29
6 30
5
9 34 33
8 10
39 25
40 26
27 28
41
30996399
43
11
7. Wheel Hub and Shaft 29. Adjuster Screw
8. Oil Seal 30. Nut Cap
9. Bolt 31. Idler Shaft
10. Case Cover 32. Final Drive Pinion Gear
11. Ball Bearing 33. Ball Bearing
12. Clip 34. Cover
13. Final Drive Bevel Gear 35. Nut
14. Ball Bearing 36. Bolt
15. L.H. Drop Box Casing Assembly 37. Plug
16. R.H. Drop Box Casing Assembly 38. Seal Washer
17. Tapered Roller Bearing 39. Drain Bolt
18. Oil Seal 40. Seal Washer
19. Idler Casing Assembly 41. Left Side Bolt
20. Idler Pinion Gear 42. Right Side Bolt
22. Snap Ring 44. Dowel Pin
23. Kingpin 45. Stud Bolt
24. O ring 46. Spring Washer
25. Ball Bearing 47. Nut
26. Spacer 48. Dowel Pin
27. L.H. Steering Arm 49. Bolt
28. R.H. Steering Arm
25-13
5. Remove the case cover bolts, 3, and remove the 9. Remove the idler case, 13, from the front axle.
wheel hub, 1, cover, 4, and final bevel gear, 7, as
10. Remove the oil seal, 12, and the tapered roller
an assembly.
bearing, 11, from the drop box, 9 or 10.
WARNING 11. Remove the wheel hub shaft inner bearing, 8,
The drop box, 9 or 10, is free to disengage and fall from the wheel hub shaft, 1, and remove the final
away from the idler gear case, 13, when the steer- drive bevel gear, 7.
ing arm, 21 or 22, bolts, 35 and 36, are removed. 12. Remove the split ring, 6, and gently drive the
Use care to avoid accidental disengagement of wheel hub shaft assembly, 1, from the cover, 4.
the components. Uncontrolled dropping of the
components may cause personal injury. 13. Remove the bearing, 5, and the oil seal, 2, from
the cover, 4.
6. Remove the four retaining bolts, 35 and 36, from 14. Remove the idler pinion gear, 14, and the bear-
the steering arms, 21 or 22. ings, 15 and 37, from inside the idler case, 13.
7. Remove the drop box case, 9 or 10, the final drive 15. Remove the axle drive pinion gear and O ring
pinion gear, 26, and the final drive shaft, 25,as an seal from the front axle housing.
assembly from the idler case, 13. 16. Remove the spacer, 20, the bearing, 19, the king-
8. Remove the four bolts, 43, from the final drive pin, 17, the O ring, 18, and the snap rings, 16,
pinion cover, 28. Remove the final drive pinion from the idler case, 13.
gear, 26, the bearing, 27, the cover, 28, and the
shaft, 25, as an assembly from the drop box, 9
or 10.
25-14
Op. 25 102
9 2
FRONT AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL
8 4
Disassembly 6
1. Remove the left axle housing retaining bolts, 1, 7
and remove the axle housing, 2, and the axle
5
shaft, 3, as an assembly.
10
2. Remove the differential assembly, 4, and differ-
ential carrier bearings, 5, from the axle housing, 5
2.
6
3. Remove the O ring, 6, the axle outer pinion gear, 3
8, and bearing, 7, from each end, and gently drive 1
the axle shaft, 3 and 9, inward to remove from the 12
housing.
NOTE: Observe the quantity and the size of the
shims, 6, between the axle shaft inner bearing and
the axle housing. Shim sizes are 0.1 mm (0.004″),
0.2 mm (0.008″), and 0.5 mm (0.020″).
4. Check the differential side gear to pinion back-

lash. Replace the gears if backlash exceeds 0.3
mm (0.012″).
25-15
5. Remove the bolts from the differential case cov- 8. Remove the four pinion gears, 8, and thrust
er, 2. washers, 9.
6. Remove the differential side gear, 4, and the 9. Remove the differential side gear, 4, and the
thrust washer, 3. thrust washer, 3.
7. Remove the pinion gear shaft retaining ring, 5, 10. Remove the support bearings, 10 and the ring
and slide the pinion shaft, 6, out of the case, 7. gear, 11, from the case, 7.
9
2
8
10 3
4
11
4
6 6
3
5
1
10
9
20000947
13
DRIVE PINION DISASSEMBLY
7 9
1. Remove the drive pinion locknut, 10.
2 1 4
2. Remove the collar, 8, the O ring, 7, the oil seal,
9, and the bearing, 6.
3. Gently drive the pinion shaft, 1, inward, and re-
move the pinion assembly with the bearing, 5 and
10
the shims, 4, from the case, 2. 6
5
8
shims used on the pinion shaft. Shim sizes are 0.1
mm (0.004″), 0.2 mm (0.008″), and 0.5 mm (0.020″).
20000948
4. Remove the bearing, 5, and the shims, 4, from
the pinion shaft, 1. 14
25-16
INSPECTION
1
Front Axle Inspection
1. Wash all parts in a suitable solvent and air dry.
2. Inspect the axle pivot bearing retainer for cracks,
excessive pitting, wear, or distortion. Replace if
found to be defective.
15
Differential Inspection
measure the pinion gear bore and the pinion
shaft to determine the bore to shaft clearance.
Replace the gear and/or shaft if the clearance ex-
ceeds 0.1 mm (0.004″).
3. Measure the differential to side gear thrust wash-
er thickness. Replace the thrust washers if the
thickness is less than 1.2 mm (0.047″).
NOTE: If the thrust washers are replaced, recheck
the side gear to pinion gear backlash during
assembly. Refer to backlash check made during
disassembly.
4. Inspect all gear teeth for excess wear or damage.

Replace gears if teeth are damaged or wear is
excessive.
Gear Reduction—Drop Box Inspection

2. Inspect the gears for excess wear or damage.
Replace gears that show excessive wear or dam-
age. See “Assembly”, for gear backlash checks.
3. Inspect the splines on the pinion gears, idler
shaft, and axle shaft for excess wear or damage.
4. Check the bearings for wear or roughness. Ro-
tate the bearings by hand and replace as re-
quired.
5. On assembly, check the bevel gear and pinion
backlash. See “Gear Reduction—Drop Box As-
sembly”, discussed later in this section.
25-17
DRIVE PINION ASSEMBLY

7 9
1. Install the shims, 4, and the front pinion bearing,
5, on the drive pinion, 1. 2 1 4
mm (0.004″), 0.2 mm (0.008″), and 0.5 mm (0.020″). 10
6
2. Insert the drive pinion, 1, in place in the differen- 5
tial housing, 2. 8
3. Install the outer bearing, 6, on the pinion shaft, 1,
in the differential housing, 2.
20000948
4. Using a suitable driver, install the oil seal, 9, the
O ring, 7, and the collar, 8, on the pinion shaft, 1. 16
5. Install the pinion locknut, 10, and tighten to obtain

the correct bearing preload as follows:
• Wrap a strong cord, 2, around the pinion
shaft, 1. Using a pull scale, 3, measure the 3
pounds pull required to rotate the pinion 1
shaft. 2
• Tighten or loosen the locknut as necessary to
obtain a preload of 16.3 - 20 kg (36 - 44 lbs.)
pull.
17
DIFFERENTIAL GEAR ASSEMBLY
1. Install the differential ring gear, 1, to the case, 2,
and align the mounting bolt holes. 2
2. Install new locking plates, 3. 4
3. Install and tighten bolts, 4, to the specified
torque. See “Bolt Torque Specifications”, dis-
1
3
18
25-18
AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY 9 2

If any of the following components are not being re-
placed, assemble the front axle using the original 8 4
6
components.
7 5
Differential assembly, 10
Differential case carrier bearings, 5
Axle housing, 1 and 2 10
Axle shaft, 3 and 4 5
6 3
1
19
1. Install the shim pack, 6, and carrier bearing, 5, in
the differential axle housing, 2.
mm (0.004″), 0.2 mm (0.008″), and 0.5 mm (0.020″).
2. Install the axle shaft, 4, in the housing from the

outer end through the shim pack, 6.
3. Install the axle shaft outer bearing, 7.
4. Position the differential assembly, 10, in the
housing, inserting the differential outer cover end
inside the bearing, 5, previously positioned in the
axle housing,2.
5. Assemble the left axle shaft and housing in the
same manner described in steps 1 through 4.
6. Apply liquid gasket to the left axle housing mating
surface and align the right and left axle housings
together.
7. Install the axle retaining bolts and tighten to the
specified torque. See “Bolt Torque Specifica-
tions”, discussed later in this section.
NOTE: The differential carrier bearing preload and
ring gear backlash must be checked and adjusted if
the differential case bearings, axle shaft inner bear-
ings, or axle shaft have been replaced.
25-19
DIFFERENTIAL CASE BEARING PRELOAD

CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT 3
1. Position the differential carrier bearing, 7, and the
shim pack, 1, in place in the right differential axle 1
housing.
2. Place the differential assembly, 5, in the housing,
being sure the differential case is fully seated in-
side the bearing, 7.
3. Position the left differential case bearing, 8, on
the differential assembly, 5, being sure it is fully 8 A
seated.
4. Measure the distance “A” and measure the dis- B
tance “B”. Add or subtract shims, 1 or 2, from the
shim pack so that the measurements “A” - “B” =
0.15 mm (0.006″). 6
4
7 2
20
RING GEAR-TO-PINION BACKLASH
CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT
Ring gear-to-pinion backlash must be checked and
adjusted whenever new components are used or if
the shim requirements are unknown.
NOTE: This is a continuation of the carrier bearing

preload adjustment.
1. Position the assembled axle housing assembly

in a vertical position, supported by the housing
and not the shaft.
NOTE: For personal safety, be sure the assembly is
properly supported to prevent falling.
2. Position the differential assembly in the housing,

being sure the differential case is fully seated in
the bearing and axle housing counterbore.
NOTE: Be sure there is clearance between the ring
gear and the pinion gear. There must not be any in-
terference.
25-20
3. Place a dial indicator, 1, on the axle housing so

that it rests upon a casing bolt, 2. Rock the ring 2
gear, 4, back and forth by turning the pinion shaft,
3, to obtain the ring gear free-play clearance on
1
the dial indicator.
4
3
21
4. If the reading is not within the range of 0.10 - 0.15
mm (0.004 -0.006″), adjust the shims, 6, be-
8
tween the left and right axles to obtain the correct 9
6 6
free-play clearance.
7 5
4
1
5
6
3
2
22
25-21
5. Apply Prussian blue to the pinion shaft gear 7. Inspect the gear tooth markings. If the markings
teeth. are incorrect, adjust the pinion gear assembly as
required to obtain the correct pattern as shown.
6. Rotate the pinion until the ring gear has rotated
one complete revolution.
Select the shims so that the Select the shims so that the ring
drive pinion is out nearer to the gear is put farther from the drive
ring gear. pinion.
Correct pinion gear to

ring gear tooth contact.
Select the shims so that the ring Select the shims so that the
gear is put nearer to the drive drive pinion is put farther from
pinion. the ring gear.
Ring Gear To Pinion Adjustment
23
25-22
Op. 25 108
GEAR REDUCTION BOX ASSEMBLY 1
IMPORTANT: The oil seal, 1, is a cassette type seal 2
and must be installed in the hub cover, 2, using the
proper tools. If the proper tools are not used the seal
may fail prematurely.
20002381
24
1. Lightly lubricate a new seal, 1, and install into the
hub cover, 2, using the special tool, 3, No.
NH00293.
NOTE: Seal driver set No. NH00293 includes differ-
ent sizes of drive plates. For this application use the
following:
1
• NH27515 Drive Plate
• NH27530 Drive Plate 3 2
• NH27488 Handle
This procedure is the same for the Supersteer as

20002382
well as the standard 4 WD axle.
25
2. Position the wheel shaft outer bearing, 4, in the
cover, 5. 7
6
8 5
3. Install the seal, 6, and the hub and shaft assem-
bly, 7, in the cover, 5.
4. Position the two-piece locking ring, 3, in the shaft 3 2
groove.
5. Install the bevel gear, 2, on the shaft, making cer-
tain that the bevel gear counterbore hub fits down
fully over the locking ring, 3
6. Install the inner bearing, 1, on the shaft.
4 1
26
25-23
7. Install the idler gear bearing, 3, and seal, 2, in the

drop box case, 4.
2
8. Install the final drive pinion gear, 5, bearing, 6,
and cover, 7, in the bottom of the drop box case, 3
4.
9. Install the final pinion shaft, 1, from the top.
27
25-24


preload adjustment.

and not the shaft.

3. Install the bearings, 1 and 2, snap rings, 3, king-
pin, 4, O ring, 5, bearing, 6, and spacer, 7, into the 7
idler case, 8.
6
4. Position the idler gear, 9, inside the idler case, 8. 5
3 4
2 9
8 1
20000949
28
25-25
5. Position the idler gear case, 2, onto the drop box 8

case, 1.
3 5 6
6. Install the steering arm assembly, 3, onto the
idler gear case, 2. 7
7. Install the retaining bolts, 8, and tighten to the 4
2
8. Install the pinion gear, 6, and bearing, 7, on the
axle shaft. Apply liquid gasket to the mating sur-
face of the axle housing, 4, and the idler gear
case, 2. 1
9. Lightly grease and position, the O ring, 5, in place
on the axle housing, 4, and install the drop box 29
assembly, 1, 2, and 3, to the axle housing, 4.
10. Install the drop box to axle housing retaining bolts
and tighten to the specified torque. See “Bolt
Torque Specifications”, discussed later in this
section.
11. Apply liquid gasket to the drop box cover mating
surface and install the cover and hub assembly
to the drop box case, 1.
12. Install the retaining bolts and tighten to the speci-
fied torque. See “Bolt Torque Specifications”, dis-
BEVEL GEAR-TO-PINION BACKLASH

CHECK 4
With the front wheels removed and the front end of
the tractor supported, use the following steps to de-
termine the bevel gear-to-pinion gear backlash.
1. Remove the oil drain plug from the drop box case
1
2. Install a long bolt, 1, into the drain plug hole, until 5
it makes contact with the pinion gear, 2, and pre-
vents it from rotating. 3
2
3. Install a bolt, 5, in the wheel hub flange, 3, and at-
tach a dial indicator, 4. 30
4. Rotate the hub back and forth and observe the
dial indicator reading. Replace the bearings and/
or gears if the backlash exceeds 0.5 mm
(0.020″).
25-26
Op. 25 100
SUPERSTEERt
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION tie rods, 2, which make the tractor chassis a link in the
The Supersteert system described in this section is system.
optional equipment for the Model TC35D, TC40D,
and TC45D tractors. The Supersteert system is a The steering action occurs when the steering cylin-
fully hydraulic system consisting of a power steering ders, 3, apply force to the outer spindle arms as the
control motor, 4, a pump, 5, a reservoir, 6, two power turn is started. The tie rods, 2, which connect the
steering cylinder assemblies, 3, and tubing. spindle arms to the tractor front frame cause the axle
to move under the frame. This action causes the en-
The important part of this design is that the spindle tire axle assembly to pivot underneath the tractor on
arms, 1, are connected to the tractor frame with the the front axle pivot point.
6
4
5
1 3
2
3
31
25-27
The pivoting front axle design also permits the axle

to rotate 8 degrees in either direction relative to the
tractor centerline, maintaining the tractor chassis in
a level position and ensuring stable operation on
irregular ground.
32
The design of the pivoting front axle mount linkage
and the steering linkage permit articulation of up to
21 degrees relative to the centerline of the tractor
frame.
Axle and wheel steering occur simultaneously. When

steering, the cylinder on the same side as the direc-
tion of the turn will shorten, causing the spindle and
the wheel to rotate into the turn. Simultaneously, the
action of the cylinder causes the tie rod to push the
chassis away from the direction of the turn.
Depending on the speed and rate of turn, the tractor

chassis could initially travel in a straight line while the
wheels turn and the axle swings out from its center 33
position.
The movement of the chassis relative to the turning

wheels gives greater tire-to-tractor clearances allow-
ing for much tighter turns.
The Supersteert FWD steering cylinder displace-

ment is approximately 31% greater than the standard
steer axles, which increases the lock-to-lock turns by
nearly one turn while providing a much shorter turn
around diameter.
SENSITRACK
Front wheel drive is standard equipment with the
Supersteert system. The system also utilizes a
Sensitrackt feature, 1, in the drive train which re-
ceives the main transmission, 2,drive shaft input and
provides either full time front wheel drive or automat-
ic front wheel drive, 3, dependent upon control lever
position.
3 1
2
34
25-28
The front wheel drive option is operator controlled by

a lever, 1, located on the left-hand control pod. Nor- 1
mal operation of the front wheel drive option, is in the
automatic mode, with the control lever in the rear
position. Full time front wheel drive is engaged by
moving the control lever to the forward position.
10997820
35
The front-wheel drive system can be locked out com-
pletely, allowing the tractor to be operated in full-time
two wheel drive. The full-time 2WD lever, located to 1
the left of the seat on tractors equipped with Supers-
teert front axles, controls engagement of the FWD
shaft. Pulling up on the lever engages the FWD slid-
ing gear with the FWD shaft in the transmission hous-
ing. Pushing down on the lever disengages the FWD
sliding gear and the FWD shaft, allowing the tractor
to be operated in full-time 2WD.
10998312
36
Automatic Position (ENGAGED) Input shaft
Output shaft
In the automatic mode, the Sensitrackt clutch en-
gages (providing FWD) whenever the speed of the
input shaft is equal to or greater than the speed of the
output shaft. In such a case, the input shaft rotation
causes the drive cam, 2, to shift. As it does, it rides
up on the center cam, 3, thereby pushing it outward.
The center cam movement causes it to mesh with the
driven cam, 5, overcoming the compression spring,
4, restoring power to the output shaft. Notice that the 5
shifter fork, 1, does not engage any of the cams.
4 1
3 2
37
25-29
Automatic Position (DISENGAGED)

Input shaft
In the automatic position, the Sensitrackt has a dis- Output shaft
connect feature which disengages front wheel drive
when drive line wrap-up is sensed on straight-aways,
down-grades, or when making sharp turns. This dis-
connect happens when the front wheels are turning
faster than the rear wheels. When this happens, the
drive cam, 2, aligns with the center cam, 3, and the 1
compression spring, 4, pushes the center cam disen-
gaging it from the driven cam, 5. When front wheel 5
drive disengages, it automatically re-engages when
the rear drive input is equal to or greater than the front 4
output shaft rotation. The shifter fork, 1, is always in 3 2
the same position in the automatic mode.
38
Full time front wheel drive (LOCKED DOWN)
Output shaft Input shaft
In the full time front wheel drive position the shifter
fork, 1, is continuously engaged pushing on the
thrust washer, 7, and sleeve, 6, which engages the
center cam, 3, with the driven cam, 5, and overcomes
the compression spring, 4, pressure. This permits
the drive cam, 2, rotation to be continuously trans-
mitted through the center cam and the driven cam. 1
5
NOTE: When disengaging full-time FWD, it may be
necessary to move in reverse to unlock the Sensi-
trackt clutch. 6 7
4 3 2
39
SUPERSTEERt FRONT AXLE 21û 21û
The Supersteert front axle is mounted to the tractor
frame with a spherical bearing and a bearing retainer,
1. A stabilizer bar, 2, is mounted at the pivot point and
at the clutch housing to keep the front axle anchored
to the tractor. The tie rods are connected to the front
of the frame. This allows the entire front axle assem-
bly to articulate 21º relative to the center line of the
tractor frame.
1 2
40
25-30
The axle can also oscillate 8º on the spherical bear-

ing, 1, maintaining the tractor chassis in a level posi-
tion ensuring stable operation while on irregular 1
ground.
The front wheel drive front axle is not adjustable and

the front wheels are not to be reversed.
8o 8o
The front wheel tie rod assembly is adjustable for toe-
in adjustments. The power steering cylinders are lo-
cated between the front axle and the steering arm.
41
Power flows from the main transmission through the
rear drive shaft to the Sensitrackt. When engaged,
the shifter fork, 1, pushes on the thrust washer, 2, and
the sleeve, 3, and causes the center cam, 4, to mate
with the driven cam, 5. This in turn causes the Sensi-
trackt output shaft and connecting shaft to the front
axle differential assembly to rotate.
4 2
5 1
42
25-31
Power then flows to the front wheels from the front

axle differential side gear, 1, and axle shaft, 2, to the 1 2 3 5
reduction gearbox assembly. A pinion gear, 3, on the 4
axle shaft, drives an idler pinion, 5, and an idler shaft,
6, in the drop box, 4. final drive pinion, 7, on the idler
shaft drives the bevel gear, 8, which is splined to the
wheel hub and shaft assembly.
6
9
7 8
43
25-32
OVERHAUL
25 26
20
27
19
17
13 14
23 15
17
11 18
21 24
10
9
16 18
12 52
36
39 44
4
35 40 3
48
1 43
46
8
45 7
2
5
36 6
50 35
54
31 53
57
49
32 41 42 50
33 55 49
44
34 57
55
56 31
37
29 37
32 33
51 30
38 38 51 49 34
44
25-33
1. Casing Assembly 30. L.H. Cylinder Assembly

2. Drive Pinion Assembly 31. Pin
3. Shims 32. Spacer
4. Tapered Roller Bearing 33. Spring Washer
5. Oil Seal 34. Nut
6. Collar 35. Spring Washer
7. Nut 36. Nut
8. Joint 37. Pin
9. Bolt 38. Bolt
10. Grease Nipple 39. Spring Washer
11. Casing 40. Plug
12. Shifter Fork 41. Seal Washer
13. Shift Arm 42. Bolt
14. Oil Seal 43. Thrust Washer
15. Block 44. O-ring
16. Bolt 45. Seal Washer
17. Oil Seal 46. Plug
18. Ball Bearing 47. L.H. Arm
19. Drive Shaft 48. R.H. Arm
20. Thrust Washer 49. Grease Nipple
21. Clutch Assembly 50. Shaft Housing
22. Tapered Roller Bearing 51. Grease Nipple
23. Spring 52. Spring Washer
24. Bushing 53. Seal Washer
25. Drive Shaft 54. Dipstick
26. Seal Cover 55. Hose
27. Bolt 56. Hose
28. Dowel Pin 57. Adapter
29. R.H. Cylinder Assembly
25-34
Op. 25 100
SUPERSTEER AXLE
REMOVAL
1. Loosen the coolant drain bolt, 1, and drain the
coolant into a clean suitable container.
30996388
45
2. Remove the upper and lower radiator hoses, 1
and 2, from the radiator, 3.
3
1
30996394
46
3. Remove the drain petcock hose, 1, from the ra-
diator, 2.
1
2
30996395
47
25-35
4. Loosen and remove the four radiator fan shroud

retaining bolts, 1.
5. Remove the radiator fan shroud, 2, from the ra- 1
diator, 3, to ease the removal of the radiator
fan, 4. 4
3
6. Loosen and remove the two radiator mounting
bolts, 5. 1
7. Carefully remove the radiator, 3, from the tractor. 2
5
30996397
48
8. Loosen and remove the four fan retaining bolts,
1, and remove the fan, 2, from the engine.
1
1
30996396
49
9. Loosen and remove the drain bolt, 1, and drain
the fluid from the power steering reservoir, 2, into 2
a suitable container.
1
30996357
50
25-36
10. Remove the power steering hoses, 1 and 2. Cap

and plug all fittings.
11. Using a floor jack, raise the tractor until the front
wheels are just off the ground, and place jack
stands under the tractor frame for support.
CAUTION
1
Make certain that the tractor frame, and the axle,
are supported properly, or damage to the tractor
could result when the following steps are
performed.
2
30996390
51
12. Place a jack under the front differential housing
to support the axle when performing steps 14
through 20.
20000951
52
25-37
NOTE: The axle may have to be raised slightly to re- 14. Remove the Sensitrack t assembly. Refer to
lease the stress on the stabilizer bar when removing “SENSITRACKt REMOVAL” as discussed ear-
the bar from the differential housing. lier in this section.
13. Remove the cotter pins, 1 and the castle nuts, 2,

from the stabilizer bar, 3, and remove the bar
from the tractor.
1 2
20000952
53
25-38
15. With the tractor frame supported by the jack

stands, loosen and remove the castle nuts, 1, on
the left side and right side tie rod ends, at the 1
frame. Use a brass drift and a hammer to remove
the tie rod ends from the frame.
30996391
54
16. Loosen and remove the clamp bolt, 1, and the
clamp, 2, to allow the transmission oil cooler 4
lines, 3, to be moved to gain access to the axle 1
pivot retaining bolts, 4.
17. Loosen and remove the axle pivot retaining bolts
and lock washers, 4.
18. Using a floor jack or a chain hoist to properly sup-
port the axle, carefully remove the axle from un-
der the tractor.
2
3
30996398
55
25-39
GEAR REDUCTION-DROP BOX

2 3
DISASSEMBLY
NOTE: These procedures apply to both the right and
left front axle component assemblies. Repeat the
procedure for the opposite side component to be dis-
assembled or repaired.
1. Remove the front-wheel hub bolts and remove

the front wheels.
2. Remove the tie rod, 2, from the steering arm, 3.
Tap the ball joint pin with a brass drift and a ham- 1
4
mer to loosen the pin.
3. Remove the drain plug, 1, from the drop box 56
case, and drain the oil into a clean suitable con-
tainer.
4. Remove the power steering cylinder, 4, from the
steering arm, and the front axle.
25-40
23 24
35 36 21 22
3 20
1 2 18
19
16 17
14
4 15 13 37
12
11
7
42 31
38
32
29
6 30
5
9 34 33
8 10
39 25
40 26
27 28
41
30996399
43
57
1. Wheel Hub and Shaft 23. Adjuster Screw
2. Oil Seal 24. Nut Cap
3. Bolt 25. Idler Shaft
4. Case Cover 26. Final Drive Pinion Gear
6. Clip 28. Cover
7. Final Drive Bevel Gear 29. Nut
8. Ball Bearing 30. Bolt
9. L.H. Drop Box Casing Assembly 31. Plug
10. R.H. Drop Box Casing Assembly 32. Seal Washer
11. Tapered Roller Bearing 33. Drain Bolt
12. Oil Seal 34. Seal Washer
13. Idler Casing Assembly 35. Left Side Bolt
14. Idler Pinion Gear 36. Right Side Bolt
16. Snap Ring 38. Dowel Pin
17. Kingpin 39. Stud Bolt
18. O ring 40. Spring Washer
19. Ball Bearing 41. Nut
20. Spacer 42. Dowel Pin
21. L.H. Steering Arm 43. Bolt
22. R.H. Steering Arm
25-41
5. Remove the case cover bolts, 3, and remove the 9. Remove the idler case, 13, from the front axle.
wheel hub, 1, cover, 4, and final bevel gear, 7, as
10. Remove the oil seal, 12, and the tapered roller
an assembly.
bearing, 11, from the drop box, 9 or 10.
WARNING 11. Remove the wheel hub shaft inner bearing, 8,
The drop box, 9 or 10, is free to disengage and fall from the wheel hub shaft, 1, and remove the final
away from the idler gear case, 13, when the steer- drive bevel gear, 7.
ing arm, 21 or 22, bolts, 35 and 36, are removed. 12. Remove the split ring, 6, and gently drive the
Use care to avoid accidental disengagement of wheel hub shaft assembly, 1, from the cover, 4.
the components. Uncontrolled dropping of the
components may cause personal injury. 13. Remove the bearing, 5, and the oil seal, 2, from
the cover, 4.
6. Remove the four retaining bolts, 35 and 36, from 14. Remove the idler pinion gear, 14, and the bear-
the steering arms, 21 or 22. ings, 15 and 37, from inside the idler case, 13.
7. Remove the drop box case, 9 or 10, the final drive 15. Remove the axle drive pinion gear and O ring
pinion gear, 26, and the final drive shaft, 25,as an seal from the front axle housing.
assembly from the idler case, 13. 16. Remove the spacer, 20, the bearing, 19, the king-
8. Remove the four bolts, 43, from the final drive pin, 17, the O ring, 18, and the snap rings, 16,
pinion cover, 28. Remove the final drive pinion from the idler case, 13.
gear, 26, the bearing, 27, the cover, 28, and the
shaft, 25, as an assembly from the drop box, 9
or 10.
Op. 25 102
9
FRONT AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL 8 2 11 6
DISASSEMBLY
7
1. Remove the left axle housing, retaining bolts,
and remove the axle housing, 1, and axle shaft, 5 5
3, as an assembly.
4
2. Remove the differential assembly, 10, and differ-
ential carrier bearings, 5, from the axle housing,
2. 10
3. Remove the O ring, 8, the axle outer pinion gear, 3
9, and bearing, 7, from each end and gently drive 6
the axle shaft, 3 and 4, inward to remove from the 1
housing.
58
shims, 6, between the axle shaft inner bearing and
the axle housing. Shim sizes are 0.1 mm (0.004″),
0.2 mm (0.008″), and 0.5 mm (0.020″).
4. Check the differential side gear to pinion back-

lash. Replace the gears if backlash exceeds 0.3
mm (0.012″).
25-42
5. Remove the bolts from the differential case cov-

er, 2. 1 2
5 6
3 4
6. Remove the differential side gear, 4, and the
thrust washer, 3.
7. Remove the pinion gear shaft retaining, 8, and 7
slide the pinion shaft, 7, out of the case, 10.
3
7
8. Remove the four pinion gears, 5, and thrust 1
washers, 6.
4
9. Remove the differential side gear, 4, and the
thrust washer, 3. 5
10. Remove the support bearings, 1 and the ring 9 8 10
gear, 9, from the case, 10. 6
59
DRIVE PINION
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove the drive pinion locknut, 10.
2. Remove the collar, 8, the O ring, 7, the oil seal,
9, and the bearing, 6.
3. Gently drive the pinion shaft, 1, inward and re-
move the pinion assembly with the bearing, 5, the
thrust washer, 3, and the shims, 4, from the case.
mm (0.004″), 0.2 mm (0.008″), and 0.5 mm (0.020″). 20000953
60
4. Remove the bearing, 5, and the shims, 4, from
the pinion shaft, 1.
25-43
INSPECTION
Front Axle Inspection 1
2. Inspect the axle pivot spherical bearing and bear-
ing retainer, 1, for cracks, excessive pitting, wear,
or distortion. Replace if found to be defective.
3. Check the axle pivot for wear or cracks. Repair
or replace as necessary.
61
Differential Inspection
measure the pinion gear bore and the pinion
shaft to determine the bore to shaft clearance.
Replace the gear and/or shaft if the clearance ex-
ceeds 0.1 mm (0.004″).
3. Measure the differential to side gear thrust wash-
er thickness. Replace the thrust washers if the
thickness is less than 1.2 mm (0.047″).
NOTE: If the thrust washers are replaced, recheck
the side gear to pinion gear backlash during
assembly. Refer to backlash check made during
disassembly.
4. Inspect all gear teeth for excess wear or damage.

Replace gears if teeth are damaged or wear is
excessive.
Gear Reduction—Drop Box Inspection

2. Inspect the gears for excess wear or damage.
Replace gears that show excessive wear or dam-
age. See “Assembly”, for gear backlash checks.
3. Inspect the splines on the pinion gears, idler
shaft, and axle shaft for excess wear or damage.
4. Check the bearings for wear or roughness. Ro-
tate the bearings by hand and replace as re-
quired.
5. On assembly, check the bevel gear and pinion
backlash. See “Gear Reduction—Drop Box As-
sembly”, discussed later in this section.
25-44
DRIVE PINION
ASSEMBLY
1. Install the shims, 4, and front pinion bearing,5, on
the drive pinion, 1.
mm (0.004″), 0.2 mm (0.008″), and 0.5 mm (0.020″).
2. Insert the drive pinion, 1, in place in the differen-

tial housing, 2.
3. Install the outer bearing, 6, on the pinion shaft, 1, 20000953
in the differential housing, 2.
62
4. Using a suitable driver, install the oil seal, 9, the
O ring, 7, and the collar, 8, on the pinion shaft, 1.
5. Install the pinion locknut, 10, and tighten to obtain
the correct bearing preload as follows:
• Wrap a strong cord, 2, around the pinion
shaft, 1. Using a pull scale, 3, measure the 1
pounds pull required to rotate the pinion
shaft.
• Tighten or loosen the locknut as necessary to
obtain a preload of 16.3 - 20 kg (36 - 44 lbs.)
3
pull.
63
DIFFERENTIAL GEAR
ASSEMBLY
1. Install the differential ring gear, 1, to the case, 2, 2
and align the mounting bolt holes. 4
2. Install new locking plates, 3.
3. Install and tighten bolts, 4, to the specified
torque. See “Bolt Torque Specifications”, dis-
1
3
64
25-45
Op. 25 102
9
AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL 8 2 11 6
ASSEMBLY
7
If any of the following components are not being re-
placed, assemble the front axle using the original 5
components.
4
Differential assembly, 10
Differential case carrier bearings, 5 5
Axle housing, 1 and 2 10
Axle shaft, 3 and 4 3
6 1
1. Install the shim pack, 6, and carrier bearing, 5, in
the differential axle housing, 2. 65
mm (0.004″), 0.2 mm (0.008″), and 0.5 mm (0.020″).
2. Install the axle shaft, 4, in the housing from the

outer end through the shim pack, 6.
3. Install the axle shaft outer bearing, 7.
4. Position the differential assembly, 10, in the
housing, inserting the differential outer cover end
inside the bearing, 5, previously positioned in the
axle housing, 2.
5. Assemble the left axle shaft and housing in the
same manner described in steps 1 through 4.
6. Apply liquid gasket to the left axle housing mating
surface and align the right and left axle housings
together.
7. Install the axle retaining bolts and tighten to the
NOTE: The differential carrier bearing preload and
ring gear backlash must be checked and adjusted if
the differential case bearings, axle shaft inner bear-
ings, or axle shaft have been replaced.
25-46
DIFFERENTIAL CASE BEARING PRELOAD

3
CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT 1
1. Position the differential carrier bearing, 7, and the
shim pack, 1, in place in the right differential axle A
housing. 8
B
2. Place the differential assembly, 5, in the housing,
being sure the differential case is fully seated in- 4
side the bearing, 7.
3. Position the left differential case bearing, 8, on 5
the differential assembly, 5, being sure it is fully 2
seated.
7
4. Measure the distance “A” and measure the dis- 6

tance “B”. Add or subtract shims, 1 or 2, from the 66
shim pack so that the measurements “A” - “B” =
0.15 mm (0.006″).


preload adjustment.
1. Assemble the differential axle housing complete

with axle shaft, bearing and drive pinion following
the disassembly procedure in reverse.
and not the shaft.

NOTE: Be sure there is clearance between the ring
gear and the pinion gear. There must not be any in-
terference.
25-47
4. Place a dial indicator, 1, on the axle housing so

that it rests upon a casing bolt, 2. Rock the ring 2 1
gear, 4, back and forth by turning the pinion shaft,
3, to obtain the ring gear free-play clearance on
the dial indicator. 4
67
5. If the reading is not within the range of 0.10 - 0.15
mm (0.004 -0.006″), adjust the shims, 6, be- 9
tween the left and right axles to obtain the correct 8 2 11 6
free-play clearance.
7
5
4
10 5
3
6 1
68
25-48
6. Apply Prussian blue to the pinion shaft gear 8. Inspect the gear tooth markings. If the markings
teeth. are incorrect, adjust the pinion gear assembly as
required to obtain the correct pattern as shown.
7. Rotate the pinion until the ring gear has rotated
one complete revolution.
Select the shims so that the Select the shims so that the ring
drive pinion is out nearer to the gear is put farther from the drive
ring gear. pinion.

Select the shims so that the ring Select the shims so that the
gear is put nearer to the drive drive pinion is put farther from
pinion. the ring gear.
Ring Gear To Pinion Adjustment
69
25-49
Op. 25 108
GEAR REDUCTION BOX ASSEMBLY 1
IMPORTANT: The oil seal, 1, is a cassette type seal 2
and must be installed in the hub cover, 2, using the
proper tools. If the proper tools are not used the seal
may fail prematurely.
20002381
70
1. Lightly lubricate a new seal, 1, and install into the
hub cover, 2, using the special tool, 3, No.
NH00293.
NOTE: Seal driver set No. NH00293 includes differ-
ent sizes of drive plates. For this application use the
following:
1
• NH27515 Drive Plate
• NH27530 Drive Plate 3 2
• NH27488 Handle
This procedure is the same for the Supersteer as

20002382
well as the standard 4 WD axle.
71
2. Position the wheel shaft outer bearing, 4, in the
cover, 5. 7
6
8 5
3. Install the seal, 6, and the hub and shaft assem-
bly, 7, in the cover, 5.
4. Position the two-piece locking ring, 3, in the shaft 3 2
groove.
5. Install the bevel gear, 2, on the shaft, making cer-
tain that the bevel gear counterbore hub fits down
fully over the locking ring, 3
6. Install the inner bearing, 1, on the shaft.
4 1
72
25-50
7. Install the idler gear bearing, 3, and seal, 2, in the

drop box case, 4.
2
8. Install the final drive pinion gear, 5, bearing, 6,
and cover, 7, in the bottom of the drop box 3
case, 4.
9. Install the final pinion shaft, 1, from the top.
73
10. Install the idler bearings, 3 and 8, the snap ring,
4, the kingpin, 7, a new O ring, 6, and the bearing,
5, into the idler case, 1.
11. Position the idler gear, 2, inside the idler case, 1.
20000954
74
25-51
12. Position the idler gear case, 2, onto the drop box
case, 1. 8
13. Install the steering arm assembly, 3, onto the 3 5 6
idler gear case, 2. 7
14. Install the retaining bolts, 8, and tighten to the 4
15. Install the pinion gear, 6, and bearing, 7, on the 2
axle shaft. Apply liquid gasket to the mating sur-
face of the axle housing, 4, and the idler gear
case, 2. 1
16. Lightly grease and position, the O ring, 5, in place
on the axle housing, 4, and install the drop box 75
assembly, 1, 2, and 3, to the axle housing, 4.
17. Install the drop box to axle housing retaining bolts
and tighten to the specified torque. See “Bolt
section.
18. Apply liquid gasket to the drop box cover mating
surface and install the cover and hub assembly
to the drop box case, 1.
19. Install the retaining bolts and tighten to the speci-
fied torque. See “Bolt Torque Specifications”, dis-
BEVEL GEAR-TO-PINION BACKLASH

CHECK
With the front wheels removed and the front end of
4
the tractor supported, use the following steps to de-
termine the bevel gear-to-pinion gear backlash.
1. Remove the oil drain plug from the drop box case
2. Install a long bolt, 1, into the drain plug hole, until 1
it makes contact with the pinion gear, 2, and pre-
vents it from rotating. 5
3. Install a bolt, 5, in the wheel hub flange, 3, and at-
3
tach a dial indicator, 4.
2
4. Rotate the hub back and forth and observe the
dial indicator reading. Replace the bearings and/ 76
or gears if the backlash exceeds 0.5 mm
(0.020″).
25-52
SUPERSTEER AXLE
INSTALLATION
1. With the axle properly supported by a floor jack
or a chain hoist, and the tractor supported by
jackstands, carefully roll the axle under the trac-
tor and into position.
2. Raise the axle slowly, aligning the axle pivot bolt
holes in the tractor frame with the bolt holes in the
axle pivot bearing collar.
NOTE: It may be necessary to raise or lower the jack/
hoist to properly align the axle pivot bolt holes
3. Install the axle pivot bolts through the frame and

into the axle pivot bearing collar.
4. Tighten the axle pivot bearing bolts, 4. See “Bolt
Torque Specifications” discussed later in this 4
section. 1
5. Install and tighten the clamp, 2, and bolt, 1, on the
transmission oil cooler lines, 3.
2
3
30996398
77
6. Install the left and right side tie rod ends into the
frame and secure with the castle nuts, 1. Tighten
the castle nuts, 1, to 95-115 N⋅m (70-85 ft.-lbs.). 1
7. Install the Sensitrackt assembly. Refer to SEN-
SITRACK INSTALLATION , discussed earlier in
this section.
30996391
78
25-53
NOTE: The axle may have to be raised or lowered sion housing. Secure with castle nuts, 1, and 2.
slightly to align the stabilizer bar with the mounting Torque the castle nuts to 135.6-169.5 N⋅m
hole in the differential housing. (100-125 ft.-lbs.).
8. Install the stabilizer bar, 3, to the differential

housing and to the bracket under the transmis-
1 2
20000952
79
9. Remove all caps and plugs from the power steer-

ing hoses and fittings. Connect the power steer-
ing hoses, 1 and 2, to the fittings.
2
30996390
80
25-54
10. Install the drain bolt, 1, and fill the power steering
reservoir, 2, with clean fluid. 2
1
30996357
81
11. Install the fan, 2, and secure with the four fan re-
taining bolts, 1.
1
1
30996396
82
12. Carefully install the radiator, 3,onto the tractor.
13. Install and tighten the two radiator mounting
bolts, 5. Tighten and torque to 34 N⋅m (25 ft.-lbs.). 1
14. Install the radiator fan shroud, 2, onto the radia- 4
tor, 3. Tighten the four shroud retaining bolts, 1. 3
1
2
5
3099
83
25-55
15. Connect the drain petcock hose, 1, to the radia-

tor, 2.
1
2
30996395
84
16. Connect the upper and lower radiator hoses, 1
and 2, to the radiator, 3.
3
1
30996394
85
17. Close the coolant drain bolt, 1, and refill the cool-
ing system with clean coolant.
30996388
86
25-56
Chapter 1 -- Differential, Rear Axle
CONTENTS

27 000 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-3
27 110 Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-5
27 110 Differential Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-5
27 126 Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-6
27 106 Differential Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-7
27 126 Rear Axle Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-16
27 126 Final Pinion Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-25
27-1
SPECIFICATIONS
Differential Pinion Gear to Shaft Clearance
Std. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .004″ (0.1 mm)
Max. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .020″ (0.5 mm)
Differential Pinion Gear Thrust Washer Thickness
Std. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .047″ (1.2 mm)
Min. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .035″ (0.9 mm)
Differential Gear Thrust Washer Thickness(Side Gears)
Std. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .079″ (2.0 mm)
Min. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .067″ (1.7 mm)
Drive Pinion Pre-load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.6-37.5 lbs. (13-17 Kg.)
Drive Pinion and Ring Gear Backlash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .00512″ -.0071″
(.13 - .18 mm)
.0157″ (0.4 mm) Max.
Differential Side Gear to Pinion Gear Backlash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .004″ -.006″
(0.1-0.15 mm)
0.12″ (0.3 mm) Max.
Rear Axle Diameter
TC35, TC35D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 mm (2.36″)
TC40, TC40D, TC45, TC45D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 mm (2.56″)
27-2
Ring Gear Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49-62.7 N⋅m (36.2-46.3 ft-lb.)
Differential Case Housing Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49-62.7 N⋅m (36.2-46.3 ft-lb.)

4T, 4 3.6--5.8 4.9--7.9
M6 7T, 7 1.0 5.9--9.4 7.9--12.7 ------------ ------------ ------------
8T, 8, 11 7.2--10 9.8--13.6
4T 7.2--14 9.8--19 12--17 16.3--23
M8 7T 1.25 17--22 23--29.8 1.0 19--27 25.7--36.6
8T 20--26 27.1--35.2 22--31 29.8--42
4T 20--25 27.1--33.9 20--29 27.1--39.3
M10 7T 1.5 34--40 46.1--54.2 1.25 35--47 47.4--63.7
8T 38--46 51.5--62.3 40--52 54.2--70.5
4T 28--34 37.9--46.1 31--41 42--55.6
M12 7T 1.75 51--59 69.1--79.9 1.25 56--68 75.9--92.1
8t 57--66 77.2--89.4 62--75 84--101.6
4T 49--56 66.475.9 52--64 70.5--86.7
M14 7T 2.0 81--93 109.8--126 1.5 90--106 122--143.6
8T 96--109 130.1--147.7 107--124 145--168
4T 67--77 90.8--104.3 69--83 93.5--112.5
M16 7T 2.0 116--130 157.2--176.2 1.5 120--138 162.6--187
8T 129--145 174.8--196.5 140--158 189.7--214.1
4T 88--100 119.2--136 100--117 136--158.5
M18 7T 2.0 150--168 203.3--227.6 1.5 177--199 239.8--269.6
8T 175--194 237.1--262.9 202--231 273.7--313
4T 108--130 146.3--176.2 132--150 178.9--203.3
M20 7T 2.5 186--205 252--277.8 1.5 206--242 279.1--327.9
8T 213--249 288.6--337.4 246--289 333.3--391.6
SPECIAL TOOLS
Seal Driver Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NH00293

Included in Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NH27488
TC35 Drive Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NH27531 (3.0″), NH27517 (2-1/8″)
TC40, 45 Drive Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NH27534 (3-3/16″), NH27520 (2-5/16″)
27-3
1 2
3
5
6 13
8
9 12
12
14 11 13
3 16
4
17
8 2
10
11
7 1
12
21
13
23 12
20
9
13
24 15
18
25
26
19
20000943
1
1. Bearing Carrier 14. Pinion Shaft Joint (TC 40, and 45,
2. Shims Economy and Deluxe only)
3. Retaining Ring 15. Differential Gear Case End Plate
4. Bearing 16. Lock Plate
5. Differential Lock Clutch 17. Bearing
6. Differential Gear Case 18. Differential Lock Shaft
7. Drive Pinion and Ring Gear 19. Differential Lock Pedal
8. Thrust Washer 20. Return Spring
9. Side Gear 21. Differential Lock Fork
10. Differential Pinion Shaft (TC 35, 40, and 45, 22. Tension Spring
Economy and Deluxe) 23. Inner Roll Pin
11. Differential Pinion Shaft (TC 40, and 45, Economy 24. O ring
and Deluxe) 25. Differential Lock Shaft Seal
12. Pinion Gear 26. Roll Pin
13. Thrust Washer
27-4
Op. 27 110
DIFFERENTIAL
The differential assembly consists of a drive pinion,
a ring gear, differential pinion gears, axle side gears,
and a differential lock, housed in the differential case.
Power is transmitted by the transmission to the
differential drive pinion and ring gear. The ring gear
is bolted to the differential case, which contains the
differential pinion gears, and the axle side gears.
As the differential case rotates, the differential pinion

gears rotate and drive the two axle side gears. The
final drive pinions are splined to the side gears and
mesh with the final drive gear. As the final drive
pinions rotate with the differential assembly, power is
transmitted to the final drive gears and rear axles.
A front wheel drive output dropbox assembly is

mounted to the bottom of the differential case on
tractors equipped with the front wheel drive option.
The front wheel drive gears and the output shaft, are
driven by a pinion gear located on the pinion shaft.
The front wheel drive is operated by a control lever
on the left control pod of the deluxe model tractors,
and by a control lever located to the left of the seat on
the economy model tractors.
Op. 27 110
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK
A differential lock is provided to lock the differential
system, so that both rear wheels are driven by the
differential gears, even when one wheel loses
traction. The differential lock control pedal is foot
operated and is located on the left side of the tractor
deck on the deluxe model tractors, 1, and on the right
side of the deck on the economy model tractors, 2.
Depressing the pedal rotates the shaft and the 1

actuating pin, causing the change fork to move
10998223
toward the differential assembly, and at the same
time, compresses the return spring. This causes the 2
coupler to move toward the differential. The lugs on
the coupler, index with the holes on the differential
gear case. Continued pressure on the foot pedal will
2
lock the side gear to the differential case. When the
foot pedal is released, the return spring moves the
change fork and the sliding coupler away from the
differential case, disengaging the differential lock.
30997547
27-5
Op. 27 126
REAR AXLE
4 6
5 2
1
1. Ring Gear and Pinion-Primary Reduction The rear axle used on the TC 35, 35D, 40, 40D, 45
2. Final Drive Pinion and Gear-Secondary Reduction and 45D, is a double reduction type, consisting of a
3. Differential Pinion conventional ring gear and pinion for primary
4. Differential Ring Gear reduction, and a final drive pinion and gear for
5. Final Drive Pinion secondary reduction.
6. Final Drive Gear
7. Rear Axle Shaft The axle housing encloses the brake discs and
stators. The rear axle and differential components
are lubricated by the common hydraulic oil reservoir.
27-6
Op. 27 106
DIFFERENTIAL OVERHAUL
Removal
To remove the differential from the housing, the
hydraulic PTO clutch, and shafts, must be removed
first. To accomplish this the differential housing must
be separated from the transmission, see Section 21
for separating the 12x12 transmission, and see
Section 29 for separating the HST transmission. For
removal of the PTO clutch and shafts, see “PTO”,
Section 31.
1. Remove the lower lift links from the rear axles.

2. Disconnect the brake control rods, 1, from the
brake control levers, 2. 2
5
3. Attach a suitable overhead lifting device, 1, to the
rear axle assembly, 2, and remove the axle 1
housing retaining bolts. 2
WARNING
The axle housing is difficult to balance. Use
caution during removal to avoid personal injury.
1. Separate the axle assembly from the differential

housing and use the lifting device to move the
axle assembly out and away from the differential
housing.
2. Repeat steps 6, 7, and 8 for the opposite side of
the tractor. 6
3. Remove the hydraulic lift cover from the
differential housing, see “Hydraulics”, Section 8.
27-7
4. Remove the differential lock pedal, 1, from the

4 3 5
differential housing, 2.
6
5. Remove the tension spring, 3, from the
8
differential lock fork, 4, and the roll pin, 5.
9
6. Remove the roll pin, 5, from the differential lock
shaft, 6. 1 9
7. Remove the retaining roll pin, 7, from the
differential lock shaft, 6.
8. Pull the differential lock shaft, 6, from the
differential lock fork, 4, and the differential
housing, 2. 20000938 2 7
9. Remove the return spring, 8, from the differential 7
lock shaft, 6.
10. Remove the differential lock fork, 4, from the
11. Remove and discard the differential lock shaft
seals, 9, from the differential housing, 2.
12. Remove the PTO clutch and shafts from the
differential housing to gain access to the
differential assembly, see “PTO”, Section 31 for
removal procedure.
1. Loosen and remove the four retaining bolts, 1,
securing the left side differential bearing carrier, 3,
to the differential housing. Note the number, and
thickness of the shims, 2, between the bearing
carriers, 3, and the differential housing, for ease
of assembly. Remove the bearing carrier, 3, from 1
the differential housing. Repeat for the right side.
2
20003041
8
1. Carefully lift the differential assembly from the
top of the differential housing.
30000411
27-8
7
7
3 2 15
13 11 9
15 14
10
6
8
9
4
5
1
6 9
12 7
7
20000937
10
1. Retaining Bolt 9. Differential Pinion Gear
2. Differential Gear Case End Plate 10. Side Gear
3. Differential Gear Case 11. Thrust Washer
4. Side Gear 12. Ring Gear
5. Thrust Washer 13. Differential Lock Clutch
6. Differential Pinion Shaft 14. Retaining Ring
7. Thrust Washer 15. Differential Carrier Bearing
8. Pinion Joint
Disassembly Inspection
1. Loosen and remove the gear case end plate 1. Clean all parts in a suitable solvent and allow to
retaining bolts, 1. air dry.
2. Separate the end plate, 2, from the differential 2. Inspect side gear teeth for excessive wear or
gear case, 3. damage.
3. Remove the differential side gear, 4, and thrust 3. Measure the thickness of the differential gear
washer, 5. thrust washers. Replace the washers that
measure less than the minimum thickness.
4. Remove the differential pinion shafts, 6, thrust
washers, 7, pinion joint, 8, and the pinion gears, 4. Inspect the differential pinion gears and shafts for
9, from the gear case, 3. excessive wear or damage.
NOTE: The TC35, and TC35D have one differential 5. Inspect the differential gear case and end plate
pinion shaft, 6, two thrust washers,7, and two for wear or damage.
differential pinion gears, 9. The TC40, TC40D, TC45,
and TC45D use four differential pinion shafts, 6, four
thrust washers,7, and four differential pinion gears, 9.
5. Remove the remaining side gear, 10, and thrust

washer, 11, from the gear case, 3.
27-9
Assembly
1. Install the thrust washer, 11, and the side gear,
10, into the differential gear case, 3.
2. Assemble the differential pinion shafts, 6, thrust
washers, 7, pinion joint, 8, and the pinion gears,
9, into the gear case, 3.
3. Install the remaining side gear, 4, and thrust
washer, 5, into the gear case, 3.
4. Install the ring gear, 12, and the differential gear
case end plate, 2, onto the gear case, 3, and
secure with the retaining bolts, 1.
5. Tighten and torque the differential gear case
retaining bolts to specified torque.
Installation
1. Carefully lower the differential assembly into the
differential housing.
2. Install the shims and the bearing carriers onto the
3. Secure with the four retaining bolts. Tighten and
torque the retaining bolts to specified torque.
4. Install the PTO clutch and any PTO shafts that
were removed to gain access to the differential.
See Section 31, “PTO” for the installation
procedure.
30000411
11
5. Lubricate new differential lock shaft seals, 9, with
petroleum jelly, and install in the differential
4 3 5
housing, 2. 6
8
6. Install the differential lock fork, 4, onto the
differential lock clutch. 9
7. Install the differential lock shaft, 6, through the 1 9
differential housing, 2, and the differential lock
fork, 4.
8. Install the differential lock return spring, 8, on the
differential lock shaft, 6.
9. Compress the differential lock return spring, 8, 20000938
2 7
TC35, TC40, TC45
and install the roll pin, 5, into the differential lock
shaft, 6. 12
27-10
10. Install the outer roll pin, 7, into the differential lock
shaft, 6.
11. Install the tension spring, 3, onto the roll pin, 5,
and the differential lock fork, 4.
4
12. Install the differential lock pedal, 1, onto the 1
differential housing, 2, and the differential lock 6
shaft, 6. 7
13. Install the hydraulic lift cover onto the differential 8
housing. See Section 8, Hydraulics.
9
3 5
2
9
TC35D, TC40D, TC45D
20002391
13
rear axle assembly, 2, and position the axle 1
housing on the differential housing. Be sure to 2
align the mounting holes and the final gear and
the final pinion with the housing.
WARNING
caution during installation to avoid personal
injury.
15. Install and tighten the axle housing retaining

bolts.
16. Install the wheels and the fenders onto the 14
tractor.
27-11
17. Connect the brake control rods, 1, to the brake

control levers, 2.
2
18. Install the lower lift links to the rear axles.
19. Fill the combined transmission, rear axle, and
hydraulic reservoir with clean NH 134 hydraulic
oil.
20. Install the ROPS onto the tractor. 1
21. Install the fuel tank onto the tractor.
15
DRIVE PINION
Removal
NOTE: See “Differential Overhaul-Removal”, for the
procedure to remove the differential, to allow access
to the drive pinion.
Disassembly
1. Loosen and remove the locking collar, 1, on the 1
drive pinion shaft, 2. 2
NOTE: Steps 2, 3, and 4 apply to tractors equipped
with the 4WD option. The 2WD does not use the fixed
gear or the retaining ring.
20000939
16
2. Slide the drive pinion shaft, 1, towards the rear of
the differential housing to gain access to the
retaining ring, 2, that secures the fixed gear, 3, on 3
the drive pinion shaft, 1.
1
3. Remove the retaining ring, 2.
20000940
17
27-12
4. Remove the fixed gear, 1, the retaining ring, 2,

the locking collar, 3, and the tapered roller
bearing, 4, from the drive pinion shaft, 5. 6 5 4 3 1 2
5. Remove the drive pinion shaft, 5, the shim, (if
used), and the remaining tapered roller bearing,
6, from the differential housing.
20000941
18
Inspection
1. Clean all parts in a suitable cleaning solvent and
allow to air dry.
2. Turn the tapered roller bearings by hand to check
for roughness. Replace as necessary.
3. Inspect the drive pinion shaft for excessive wear,
nicks, chips or other damage. Replace as
necessary.
4. Inspect the fixed gear for excessive wear, nicks,
chips or other damage. Replace as necessary.
Assembly
NOTE: Replacement ring and pinion uses the
original shim packs. There is no tolerance number 6 5 4 3 1 2
stamped on the replacement parts.
1. Assemble the shim, 1 (if used), and the rear,

tapered roller bearing, 2, on the drive pinion shaft,
3.
NOTE: The 2WD does not use the fixed gear or the
retaining ring.
2. Install the drive pinion shaft, 5, from the rear of

the differential housing while installing the front, 20000941
tapered roller bearing, 4, the locking collar, 3, and 19
the fixed gear, 1, (if equipped with 4WD). Install
a new retaining ring, 2, on the pinion shaft, 5, to
secure the fixed gear, 1, (if equipped with 4WD).
NOTE: Turn the drive pinion shaft several turns by
hand before performing the pull-scale test.
27-13
3. Adjust the pinion bearing pre-load (rolling

torque), by wrapping a strong cord, 1, around the 3
pinion shaft, 2.
4. Attach the opposite end of the cord to a pull scale,
3.
5. Tighten the locking collar, 4, while pulling on the
pull scale, until a constant pull of 28.6 - 37.5 lbs
(13-17 Kg) is required rotate the drive pinion
shaft, 2. 1
6. When the proper rolling torque is achieved, stake
the locking collar, 4, to maintain the adjustment.
7. Install the differential into the differential housing
and secure with the right and left bearing carriers.
See “Differential Overhaul-Installation”.
8. If new differential components are used, adjust
the backlash, and the ring gear contact pattern as
follows:
2
4
20000942
20
-- Place a dial indicator, 1, at a right angle to the
top of one ring gear tooth, 2. 1
-- Rock the ring gear, 2, back and forth and
observe the reading on the dial indicator, 1.
-- Adjust the shims to obtain the correct 2
backlash. See “Specifications”.
21
27-14
Select the shims so that the Select the shims so that the
drive pinion is out nearer to the ring gear is put farther from the
ring gear. drive pinion.

Select the shims so that the

Select the shims so that the
ring gear is put nearer to the
drive pinion is put farther from
drive pinion.
the ring gear.
22
-- Using Prussian Blue on the pinion gear teeth,
rotate the pinion gear, and check the gear
tooth contact pattern.
-- Adjust the pinion shims and the differential
shims to obtain the correct tooth contact
pattern.
9. See “Differential Overhaul-Installation”, for the

remainder of the differential installation.
27-15
Op. 27 126
REAR AXLE OVERHAUL

Removal
1. Drain and remove the fuel tank from the tractor.
2. Remove the ROPS from the tractor.
NOTE: On the TC 35D, 40D, and 45D tractors,
removal of the seat and the deck may be necessary.
3. Remove the wheels and the fenders from the

tractor.
4. Drain the oil from the combined transmission,
rear axle, and hydraulic reservoir into a suitable
container.
23
WARNING

housing.
24
27-16
Disassembly
1. Use a suitable puller, 1, to remove the inner axle 2
bearing, 2, from the axle, 3.
1
3
30000160
25
2. Use a suitable puller, 1, to remove the inner final
pinion bearing, 2, from the pinion shaft. 2
30000161
26
3. Remove the large final gear, 1, from the axle
shaft, 2.
2
30000162
27
27-17
4. Remove the split clip, 1, from the axle shaft, 2.
30000163
28
5. Loosen and remove the four retaining bolts, 1,
holding the axle shaft retainer, 2, to the axle case,
3. 3
1 2
30000164
29
6. Use a hammer and an aluminum or brass drift to
tap the axle shaft, 1, out of the axle case, 2. 2
NOTE: It may be necessary to use a press to remove
the axle shaft from the axle case.
30000165
1
30
27-18
7. Remove the axle shaft, 1, from the axle case, 2.

2 1
30000166
31
8. Remove the remaining axle bearing, 1, from the
axle case, 2. 2
30000167
1
32
9. Gently tap the axle shaft retainer, 1, off of the axle
shaft, 2. 1 2
30000168
33
27-19
10. Remove and discard the oil seal, 1, from the axle
shaft retainer, 2. 2
30000169
34
11. Use a hammer and an aluminum or brass drift to
tap the outer axle shaft bearing, 1, out of the axle
case, 2.
1
30000170/30000171
35
Inspection
1. Clean the axle components with a suitable
2. Rotate the bearings by hand to check for
roughness or binding. Check the bearings for
excessive wear or damage, and replace if
necessary.
3. Inspect the final reduction gear teeth for excess
wear or damage. Repair or replace as necessary.
4. Inspect the axle shaft for nicks, scratches or
other damage. Repair r replace as necessary.
5. Inspect the axle case for cracks or other damage.
27-20
Assembly
1
1. Install the outer axle shaft bearing, 1, into the axle
case, 2. 2
30000171
36
2. Install the inner axle shaft bearing, 1, into the axle
case, 2. 2
1
30000167
37
NOTE: Different drive plates, 2 and 3, are used for
the TC35, and the TC40, 45.
3. Assemble the special installation tool, from the

seal installer kit # NH00293. Use handle, 1,
#NH27488, Drive plate, 2, Drive plate, 3, and
secure with the supplied retaining screw, 4.
TOOL CHART 1
4
Model Tool No. Size 3
2
TC 35, 35D 1. Handle NH27488 20002392
2. Plate NH27531 3.0″ 38
3. Plate NH27517 2-1/8″
4. Screw
TC 40, 40D 1. Handle NH27488
TC 45, 45D 2. Plate NH27534 3-3/16″
3. Plate NH27520 2-5/16″
4. Screw
27-21
NOTE: The orientation of the axle seal, 1, in the axle

shaft retainer, 2, is such that the rubber side of the 2
seal faces inward and the metal side of the seal faces
outer side of the axle shaft retainer.
30000169
39
4. Install a new axle seal into the axle shaft retainer,
1, using the special seal driver tool, 2.
20002393
40
5. Lubricate the new seal with petroleum jelly and
slide the axle shaft retainer, 1, onto the axle, 2. 1 2
30000172
41
27-22
6. Install the axle shaft, 1, into the axle case, 2.

2 1
30000166
42
7. Install the split clip, 1, onto the axle shaft, 2.
30000163
43
8. Install the four retaining bolts, 1, and lockwash-
ers, 2, through the axle shaft retainer, 3, and into 3 2
4
the axle case, 4. Tighten the bolts, 1. 1
30000173
44
27-23
9. Install the final reduction gear, 1, onto the axle

shaft, 2. 1
10. Install the inner axle bearing, 3, onto the axle
shaft, 2.
3 2
30000174
45
11. Install the final pinion bearing, 1, onto the pinion
shaft, 2. 1
2
30000175
46
housing on the differential housing. Be sure to 2
WARNING
injury.

bolts.
14. Install the wheels and the fenders onto the 47
tractor.
27-24

control levers, 2. 2
oil.
48
Op. 27 126
FINAL PINION OVERHAUL

Removal
1. Drain and remove the fuel tank from the tractor.
2. Remove the ROPS from the tractor.
NOTE: On the TC 35D, 40D, and 45D tractors,
removal of the seat and the deck may be necessary.
3. Remove the wheels and the fenders from the

tractor.
4. Drain the oil from the combined transmission,
rear axle, and hydraulic reservoir into a suitable
container.
49
27-25

WARNING

housing.
50
Disassembly
NOTE: The brakes may be serviced with the axle
case attached to the differential housing, but if final
pinion service is required, the axle case must be
removed from the differential housing.
1. Loosen and remove the retaining nut, 1, on the
brake lever, 2. Remove the brake lever, 2, from
the brake cam.
30000177 2
51
2. Loosen and remove the brake cover retaining
bolts, 1. 1
30000178
52
27-26
3. Remove the brake cover assembly, 1, from the

axle housing, 2 2
30000179
53
4. Remove and discard the brake cam, oil seal, 1,
from the brake cover, 2. 2
1
30000182
54
5. Remove the stators, 1, and the brake discs, 2,
from the final pinion shaft, 3. 3
1
30000183
55
27-27
NOTE: If the final pinion support bearing is to be

removed, the large final gear and the inner bearing
on the axle shaft must be removed first.
3
30000185
2
56
6. Using a hammer and a brass or aluminum drift,
lightly tap the final pinion shaft, 1, from the axle 3
housing, 2.
7. Remove the final pinion support bearing, 3, from
the axle housing, 2.
1
30000184 2
57
Inspection
1. Clean all parts in a suitable solvent and allow to
air dry.
2. Inspect the bearings for roughness by turning
them by hand. Replace if necessary.
3. Inspect the final pinion shaft for marks or other
damage. Replace if necessary.
4. Inspect the brake cover for damage or cracks.
Repair or replace as necessary.
27-28
Assembly
1. If removed during disassembly, install the final
3
pinion support bearing, 3, into the axle housing,
2.
2. Install the final pinion shaft, 1, into the axle
housing, 2. 1
30000184
2
58
3. Install the stators, 1, and the brake discs, 2, onto
the final pinion shaft, 3. 3
30000183
1
59
4. Lubricate a new brake cam, oil seal, 1, with
petroleum jelly, and install into the brake cover, 2. 2
1
30000182
60
27-29
5. Install the brake cover assembly, 1, onto the axle

housing, 2. 2
30000179
61
6. Install and tighten the brake cover retaining bolts,
1. 1
30000178
62
7. Install the brake lever, 2, onto the brake cam, and
secure with the retaining nut, 1. Tighten the
retaining nut, 1.
30000177
2
63
27-30
Installation
1
housing on the differential housing. Be sure to
WARNING
injury.

bolts. 64
3. Install the wheels and the fenders onto the
tractor.
control levers, 2. 2
oil.
65
27-31
27-32
SECTION 29 -- HYDROSTATIC TRANSMISSION
Chapter 1 -- Hydrostatic Transmission
CONTENT

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-2
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-4
29 212 Variable Displacement Pump Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-11
29 212 Two Position Displacement Motor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-12
29 134 Hi/Lo Speed Control/Control Pod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-13
29 200 Foot Control Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-13
Pressure Testing and Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-19
Separating the Tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-23
TC35D, TC40D, and TC45D w/HST Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-23
29 202 Hydrostatic Transmission Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-44
29 130 Port Block Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-47
29 218 Cylinder Block Assembly for Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-50
29 218 Cylinder Block Assembly for Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-51
29 130 Port Block Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-52
29 204 Check Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-54
29 300 Hydrostatic Transmission Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-55
Gearbox Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-56
29 214 Hi/Lo Solenoid Valve Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-68
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-76
Electromagnet Air Gap Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-77
29 200 HST Foot Control Pedals Neutral Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-78
29-1
SECTION 29 - HYDROSTATIC TRANSMISSION
SPECIFICATIONS
HYDROSTATIC TRANSMISSION
Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kayaba Industry Co. Ltd., Japan

Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HVFD-28C37-M
Theoretical Displacement of the Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 - 28.1 cm3/rev.
Theoretical Displacement of the Motor
Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 - 37.2 cm3/rev.
High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 - 22.0 cm3/rev.
Theoretical Displacement of the Charge Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 cm3/rev.
Maximum Input Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2700 rpm
Maximum Working Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 bar (5000 PSI)
Output Speed
Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 - 1950 rpm (at 97 bar [1400 PSI])
High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 - 3328 rpm
Output Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 N⋅m (44 ft.-lbs. ) at 245 bar (3550 PSI)
Charge Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 12 bar (114 - 170 PSI) at 2600 rpm
Swash Plate Tilt Angle (Pump) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 ± 17.8°
Swash Plate Tilt Angle (Motor)
Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.0°
High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0°
Operating Moment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum 16 N⋅m (12 ft.-lbs.) at 3000 PSI
HYDRAULIC TESTS
NOTE: Warm the oil to 25° - 50° C (80° - 120° F) before performing any hydraulic test.
High Pressure Relief Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 bar (5000 PSI) at 16 min.

Charge Pump Relief Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.86 - 11.72 bar (114 - 170 PSI) at 2600 rpm
Check Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 bar (17.5 PSI) pressure differential
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Hydrostatic Transmission Cover Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2.5 N⋅m (1.4 - 1.9 ft.-lbs.)

Charge Pump Housing Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.6 N⋅m (13 ft.-lbs.)
HST Port Block Retaining Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70.6 N⋅m (52 ft.-lbs.)
Transmission housing with rear axle (buckle-up bolts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 N m (60 ft.-lbs.)
Check and High Pressure Relief valve Retaining Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63.7 N⋅m (47 ft.-lbs.)
High and Low speed Control Spool Retaining Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 N⋅m (37.6 ft.-lbs.)
Swash plate Cover Retaining Screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9 N⋅m (5.1 ft.-lbs.)
High Pressure Relief valve Inspection Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.4 N⋅m (21.7 ft.-lbs.)
High Pressure Relief valve Inspection plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.7 N⋅m (10.8 ft.-lbs.)
HST FOOT CONTROL PEDALS (NEUTRAL GEAR)
Forward Pedal Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 23 mm (0.866″ - 0.905″)

Reverse Pedal Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.5 - 28.5 mm (1.08″ - 1.12″)
Spring
Spade Bolt Eye to Centering Pivot Arm indent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107.5 - 111.5 mm (4.23″ - 4.39″)
Bracket WA inner to Centering Pivot Arm indent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143.7 mm (5.66″)
Cruise Control Magnet to Transmission Pivot WA Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5 - 1.5 mm (0.020″ - 0.060″)
29-2
TC35D/TC40D/TC45D TRANSMISSION SPEEDS
Forward Speeds With AG 13.6-24 With AG 14.9-24 With R4 17.5L-24 With Turf
Tire Tire Tire 44x18.0-20 Tire
I Range Low 5.61 kph (3.49 mph) 5.89 kph (3.66 mph) 5.69 kph (3.53 mph) 5.06 kph (3.14 mph)
I Range High 9.49 kph (5.9 mph) 10.0 kph (6.21 mph) 9.62 kph (6.0 mph) 8.56 kph (5.32 mph)
II Range Low 13.0 kph (8.20 mph) 13.6 kph (8.45 mph) 13.1 kph (8.14 mph) 11.7 kph (7.27 mph)
II Range High 21.9 kph (13.6 mph) 23.0 kph (14.3 mph) 22.2 kph (13.8 mph) 19.8 kph (12.3 mph)
NOTE: Reverse has same speed capability as forward and depends on stop setting. Theoretical stop
setting is at 75% of forward.
29-3

4T, 4.8 2.8 - 4.0 3.8 - 5.4
M5 7T, 8T, 8.8 0.70 4.9 - 6.9 6.9 - 9.3 ----------- ------------ ------------
10T, 10.9, 11T 6.7 - 9.4 9.0 - 12.7
4T, 4.8 3.6 - 5.1 4.9 - 6.9
M6 7T, 8T, 8.8 1.0 6.1 - 8.3 8.3 - 11.3 ----------- ------------ ------------
10T, 10.9, 11T 8.7 - 11.6 11.8 - 15.7
4T, 4.8 9.4 - 12.3 12.7 - 16.7 11.2 - 14.8 15.2 - 20.1
M8 7T, 8T, 8.8 1.25 16.6 - 21.0 22.6 - 28.4 1.0 19.5 - 25.3 26.5 - 34.3
10T, 10.9, 11T 21.0 - 26.8 28.4 - 36.2 22.4 - 29.7 30.4 - 40.2
4T, 4.8 18.8 - 24.6 25.5 - 33.3 21.0 - 26.8 28.4 - 36.3
M10 7T, 8T, 8.8 1.5 32.5 - 41.2 44.1 - 55.9 1.25 36.2 - 46.3 49.0 - 62.8
10T, 10.9, 11T 39.8 - 51.4 53.9 - 69.9 42.7 - 54.2 57.9 - 73.5
4T, 4.8 27.5 - 34.7 37.3 - 47.1 31.8 - 40.5 43.1 - 54.9
M12 7T, 8T, 8.8 1.75 48.5 - 61.5 65.7 - 83.4 1.25 55.0 - 69.4 74.5 - 94.1
10T, 10.9, 11T 68.0 - 85.4 92.9 - 116 73.1 - 93.3 99.0 - 127
4T, 4.8 46.3 - 59.3 62.8 - 80.4 51.4 - 64.4 69.6 - 87.3
M14 7T, 8T, 8.8 2.0 76.7 - 96.9 104 - 131 1.5 86.1 - 109 117 - 148
10T, 10.9, 11T 102 - 129 139 - 175 108 - 137 147 - 186
4T, 4.8 63.6 - 81.0 83.3 - 110 67.3 - 84.6 91.3 - 115
M16 7T, 8T, 8.8 2.0 110 - 136 149 - 184 1.5 116 - 142 157 - 192
10T, 10.9, 11T 152 - 188 206 - 255 163 - 199 221 - 270
4T, 4.8 106 - 132 144 - 179 127 - 156 172 - 211
M20 7T, 8T, 8.8 2.5 177 - 213 240 - 289 1.5 203 - 246 275 - 333
10T, 10.9, 11T 268 - 325 363 - 441 293 - 358 397 - 485
SPECIAL TOOLS
Gauge--(6000 PSI) OEM 1464
Gauge--(300 PSI) OEM 1457
HST High Pressure Test Fitting CNH299007
HI/LOW Pressure Test Fitting FNH00011
29-4
10
6
9
5 2
7
8
30003091
1
1. Hydrostatic transmission 6. Oil cooler
2. Rear transmission reservoir 7. Oil cooler outlet hose
3. Hydraulic suction filter 8. HST inlet oil line
4. Hydraulic pump 9. HST pedal assembly
5. Oil cooler inlet hose
Op. 29 202 oil cooler by outlet hose, 7 and is routed to the HST
filter, 8.
The hydrostatic transmission assembly, 1, consists NOTE: If the oil cooler circuit is restricts the flow from
of a gerotor type charge pump, a variable the charge pump, a by pass valve located in the HST
displacement piston type hydraulic pump and a two-- filter base will open, the oil flow will by pass the cooler
speed piston type hydraulic motor, which are located but will still be filtered by the HST filter, before
in the transmission clutch housing. The hydrostatic entering the HST assembly.
transmission is driven by an adapter plate that is
bolted to the engine flywheel. The charge pump After the oil is filtered the oil enters the hydrostatic
circuit is supplied with oil from the rear transmission pump via line, 9. The pump supplies oil to the
reservoir, 2, and is filtered by the hydraulic suction hydrostatic motor that drives the transmission
filter, 3, before entering the charge pump. The charge gearbox.
pump shares the rear transmission reservoir and
hydraulic suction filter with the hydraulic system Forward and reverse motion is controlled by pedal
pump, 4. The output from the charge pump is routed assembly, 10.
by outlet line, 5, to the oil cooler, 6, oil then exists the
29-5
1 2 9 10
11
3
4 5 8 12
6
7
20000743
2
POWER FLOW HIGH RANGE

Power flow as follows:
1. Engine adapter plate 7. Lower 20-tooth counter shaft gear

2. Input shaft 8. Mid 21-tooth counter shaft gear
3. Input shaft splined coupler 9. Upper front 26-tooth fixed gear
4. Input shaft hydrostatic transmission 10. Upper mid 31-tooth fixed gear
5. Output shaft hydrostatic transmission 11. 29-tooth high range gear and coupler
6. Output shaft splined coupler 12. Output to rear pinion and FWD drop box
29-6
1 9
2 10
3
12
4
5 8 11
6
7
20003052
POWER FLOW LOW RANGE

Power flow as follows:
1. Engine adapter plate 7. Lower 20-tooth counter shaft gear

2. Input shaft 8. Mid 21-tooth counter shaft gear
3. Input shaft splined coupler 9. Upper front 26-tooth fixed gear
4. Input shaft hydrostatic transmission 10. Upper rear 19-tooth fixed gear
5. Output shaft hydrostatic transmission 11. 41-tooth high range gear and coupler
6. Output shaft splined coupler 12. Output to rear pinion and FWD drop box
29-7
8
17 7
9
12
10 15
13
6
4
“B”
“A”
“A”
“B”
2 14 16
11
3 1
-- Charge Pressure
-- Suction
NEUTRAL POSITION
30003048
4
1. Reservoir 10. Hydrostatic pump
2. Suction screen 11. Hydrostatic motor
3. Hydraulic filter 12. Forward high pressure relief valve
4. Charge pump 13. Reverse high pressure relief valve
5. HST oil cooler 14. Hi/Low piston
6. Cooler bypass valve 15. Hi/Low solenoid valve
7. HST oil filter 16. Hi/Low shift spool
8. Check valve “A” 17. Charge pump relief valve
9. Check valve “B”
OIL FLOW -- NEUTRAL POSITION then returns to sump via the charge pump relief
Oil is drawn from the transmission reservoir, 1, valve, 17.
through the suction screen, 2, and hydraulic filter, 3,
The charge pump relief valve, 17, maintains 7.86 –
by the rotor type charge pump, 4. The pressurized oil
11.72 bar (114 – 170 psi). Pressure to the check
flows from the charge pump to the oil cooler, 5, and
valves 8 and 9 at all times. Oil flow past the check
then to the HST filter, 7. If the cooler will not allow flow
valves pressurizes the passages “A” and “B” and the
through it, the cooler by pass valve, 6, will open and
pump and motor cylinder blocks.
the oil flow will by pass the oil cooler but still flow
through the HST filter, 7. From the HST filter the oil Because of equal pressures in passages “A” and “B”
flows to both check valve, 8, and check valve, 9, and the motor does not rotate.
29-8
5
8
17 7
9
15 12
10 13
6
4
“B1”
“A1”
“A2”
“B2”
2 14 16
11
-- Charge Pressure
3 1
-- High Pressure
FORWARD POSITION -- Suction

30003049
5
OIL FLOW -- FORWARD POSITION passage “B” flows back to the hydrostatic pump, 10,
When the hydrostatic piston pump, 10, is rotating and through passage “B1” to complete the cycle. When
the forward pedal is depressed, moving the pump fluid leakage in the system causes a drop in pressure
cam--plate from neutral, oil flows from the piston on the suction passage “B1” below 6.4 – 8.3 bar
pump, through passage “A”. Pump pressure on the (92--120 PSI) check valve, 9, opens and provides
back of the check valve, 8, closes the check valve make--up fluid from the charge pump to replenish the
and pressure increases in passage “A1”. All fluid oil in the low pressure side of the loop. Excess fluid
from passage “A1” flows to the hydrostatic motor, 11, from the charge pump is returned to the sump via the
through passage “A2” causing the motor to rotate charge pump relief valve, 17.
and moves the unit forward. When the forward pedal
The high pressure relief valve, 12, protects the
is depressed further the increased oil flow rotates the
motor, 11, opening when pressure is above 345 bar
motor faster increasing wheel speed. Fluid dis-
(5000 PSI).
charged from the hydrostatic motor at B2 into
29-9
5
8
17 7
9
15 12
10 13
6
4
“B1”
“A1”
“A2”
“B2”
2 14 16
11
3 1 -- Charge Pressure
-- High Pressure
REVERSE POSITION
30003050 -- Suction
6
OIL FLOW -- REVERSE POSITION into passage into passage “A” flows back to the
When the hydrostatic piston pump, 10, is rotating and hydrostatic pump, 10, through passage “A1”, to
the reverse pedal is depressed, moving the pump complete the cycle. When fluid leakage in the system
cam--plate from neutral, oil flows from the piston causes a drop in pressure on the suction passage
pump, through passage “B”. Pump pressure on the “A1” below 6.4 – 8.3 bar (92--120 PSI) check valve,
back of the check valve, 9, closes the check valve 8, opens and provides make--up fluid from the charge
and pressure increases in passage “B1”. All fluid pump to replenish the oil in low pressure side of the
from passage “B1” flows to the hydrostatic motor, 11, loop. Excess fluid from the charge pump is returned
through passage “B2”, causing the motor to rotate to the sump via the charge pump relief valve, 17.
and moves the unit rearward. When the reverse
The high pressure relief valve, 13, protects the
pedal is depressed further the increased oil flow
motor, 11, opening when pressure is above 345 bar
rotates the motor faster increasing wheel speed.
(5000 PSI).
Fluid discharged from the hydrostatic motor at “A2”
29-10
Op. 29 212
VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP

OPERATION 4 5
The cylinder block, 3, and pistons, 4, are splined to
the input shaft, 1, and rotate with the shaft. In the 2
neutral position, the swash plate, 2, is in the vertical
position, at right angle to the pistons and the pistons A
do not stroke. When in neutral position, the
displacement in the cylinders, “A” and “B” are equal
and no fluid flows through the pump or motor valve
port plate, 5.
B
7
When the swash plate is tilted at an angle, 1, fluid in
the cylinder in position “A” is discharged out through
port, 2, in the valve plate, 3, as the cylinder is rotated
to position “B”. Maximum fluid flow is obtained when 1
the swash plate is at maximum tilt angle. A
2
29-11
Op. 29 212
1
15°
TWO POSITION DISPLACEMENT MOTOR
9°
OPERATION
The two-position displacement motor assembly has
a displacement of 15° and 9°, at 1, for low
transmission and high transmission operation
respectively. Displacements are obtained by the
raising and lowering of two pistons, 2, with the flow
of fluid pressure in line, 3.
3
20000775
9
29-12
Op. 29 134
3
HI/LO SPEED CONTROL/CONTROL POD 1
The speed control switch, 1, is located on the
right-hand control pod. It has two positions. The
“Turtle” (Lo) position operates the HST unit at below
normal speed. The “Rabbit” (Hi) position operates
the HST unit at above normal speed. The Hi/Lo
speed control can be operated with both ranges of
the transmission.
10998318
10
HL/LO SPEED CONTROL
1
Optional Hi/low speed control is located on the front
remote control valve joystick handle. Press the
“Rabbit”, 1, for high range or the “Turtle”, 2, for low
range.
NOTE: When the tractor is shut off, Hi/Lo defaults to

Low.
2
10998370
11
Op. 29 200
1
FOOT CONTROL PEDALS
The hydrostatic unit is operated by two-foot control 2
pedals; pedal, 1, for forward operation and pedal, 2,
for reverse operation. The foot pedals automatically
return to neutral (stopped) position when released.
The speed is controlled by varying the amount of
movement of the pedal from neutral position. When
a constant forward speed is desired on level terrain,
setting the speed control (cruise) switch, 3 (Figure
10), to the “SET” position will hold the foot pedal in the
fixed position and permit the operator to remove his
10997818
foot from the pedal. When the speed (cruise) control
switch is “RELEASED” the foot pedal automatically 12
returns to the neutral position and the tractor stops.
NOTE: The operator can depress the pedal further

from the set position to travel at a faster speed
momentarily. The pedal (cruise) control can also be
set in reverse.
29-13
2 3 4
6
1
5
7
9 8
A
10 11 A
7
“LOW” OR TURTLE POSITION

20000744
13
1. Hydraulic suction filter 7. Oil passage
2. HST charge pump 8. Hi/Low spool (located in HST center valve section)
3. Oil cooler 9. Piston
4. HST oil filter 10. Cylinder
5. Solenoid valve 11. Motor swash plate
6. Hi/Low switch
When the Hi/Low switch, 6, is moved to the low or piston cylinders, 10, is forced out of the cylinders by
turtle position, electrical current is not supplied to the the swash plate, 11, pushing on the pistons, 9, this oil
solenoid valve, 5. Without current supplied, the is returned to sump via the Hi/Low spool, 8. The
solenoid valve stays closed, routing the pressurized swash plate, 11, is set at 15_ for low speed
charge pump oil to sump. The oil in the swash plate transmission operation.
29-14
2 3 4
6
15 5
17 7
10 11
A
A 12
14 16
9 8
13
“HIGH” OR RABBIT POSITION

20000745
14
1. Hydraulic suction filter 10. High pressure port
2. HST charge pump 11. High pressure port
3. Oil cooler 12. Cylinder passage
4. HST oil filter 13. Cylinder passage
5. Solenoid valve 14. Piston
6. Hi/Low switch 15. Steel pivot ball
7. Charge pressure oil passage 16. Swash plate
8. Hi/Low spool 17. Motor output shaft
9. Spool port
When the Hi/Low switch, 6, is moved to the high or The pressurized charge pump oil shifts the Hi/Low
rabbit position, electrical current is supplied to the spool against the spool return spring, as the spool
solenoid valve, 5. With current supplied, the solenoid shifts, high pressure passages, 10 and 11 are
valve, 5, moves to the open position, routing the connected to the cylinder passages, 12 and 13
pressurized charge pump oil to the Hi/Low spool, 8. allowing HST high pressure oil to be routed to the
swash plate pistons, 14. The pistons exert pressure
onto the backside of the swash plate, 16, and using
the steel pivot balls, 15 as fulcrum the swash plate
changes its angle of operation from15_ to 9_ for high
speed operation of motor output shaft, 17.
29-15
TROUBLESHOOTING
PROBLEM CHECK POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTION

Transmission fails to Input shaft rotation Input shaft failure Repair or replace as re-
operate, erratic or quired
abnormal noise
when operated. Transmission fluid level Low oil supply Fill to proper level
Charge relief valve pres- Low charge pressure Check charge relief valve
sure
Clogged suction strainer Clean strainer
Oil viscosity high Replace oil
Charge pump defective Replace charge pump
Defective charge relief Replace relief valve

valve
High pressure relief valve Defective High pressure Replace valve

relief valve
Defective cylinder block Replace cylinder block
Tractor fails to stop at Pedal neutral position Linkage out of adjustment Adjust neutral position
neutral binding linkage
Neutral cannot be adjusted Replace trunnion shaft joint
Oil leakage Charge pump pressure Charge pressure too high, Replace charge pump relief
(above 12 kg/cm2 [170 valve
PSI])
Pressure loss in filter ex- Replace filter

cessive
Return oil line restricted Repair as required
Low power High pressure relief valve Valve pressure setting too Replace high pressure re-
low lief valves or replace port
block as required
Worn cylinder block Overhaul
Worn wear plates Overhaul
Oil overheating Cooler Dirty cooler fins Clean cooler fins
Incorrect oil Replace oil
Check valve in HST filter Binding valve or broken Clean or replace spring
base for proper operation spring
Binding charge pressure Clean or replace charge

relief valve pressure relief spring
29-16
TROUBLESHOOTING (continued)
PROBLEM CHECK POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTION

High range will not (F5) 7.5 amp fuse Blown fuse Replace 7.5 amp fuse
engage
Hi/Low switch Defective hi/low switch Replace hi/low switch
“Hi” range relay Defective relay Replace relay
Hi/Low solenoid Defective solenoid Replace solenoid
Solenoid valve Spool binding Clean and lubricate spool
Adapter block screen Plugged screen Clean screen
HST cylinder block spool Spool binding Clean and lubricate spool
Low charge pressure Stuck charge pressure Remove, clean or replace

relief valve charge relief valve
Defective charge pump Replace charge pump
Swash plate angling Stuck or oil blowing by Check piston fit in piston
pistons pistons bore
Low range will not Solenoid valve not de- Faulty electrical circuit Check electrical circuit to
engage energizing solenoid repair as needed
Swash plate angling Stuck piston in bore Check piston fit in bore
pistons repair as needed
29-17
CHARGE PUMP RELIEF VALVE TEST

Operate the tractor to warm the oil to 25° - 50° C (80°
- 120° F) before performing this hydraulic test.
1. Remove the oil pipe banjo bolt, 1, on the oil filter

base.
20000766
15
1. Banjo bolt
2. Install the modified banjo bolt, 1, for pressure

check. Modify banjo bolt locally. 1
3. Install a 0 - 20 bar (0 - 300 PSI) gauge into the 2
banjo bolt.
4. Set the range selector lever in neutral.
5. Set the engine throttle at 2600 rpm. Read the
pressure gauge. Pressure reading should read
between 7.8 - 11.7 bar (114 - 170 PSI).
If the charge pressure reading is low, check the

following:
20000775
• Restricted suction filter.
16
• Charge pump relief valve and spring (replace if 1. Banjo Bolt (for pressure check) SBA398480240
required). 2. Drill and tap - 1/8″ NPT
• The charge pump (repair if required).
30003060
17
29-18
PRESSURE TESTING AND ADJUSTMENTS

HIGH PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
Operate the tractor to warm the hydraulic oil to 25° -
50°C (80° -120°F) before performing this hydraulic
test.
1. Remove the rubber floor mat and cover from the

center of the operator’s platform.
2. Remove the test port plug, 1, if testing reverse;
port, 2, if testing forward.
• Right side port -- Reverse
• Left side port -- Forward
1
2
30003067
18
3. Install HST Hi-pressure test fitting, 1, Tool No.
CNH299007 into the right side test port.
1
30004745
19
29-19
4. Install a 0 - 450 bar (0 - 6500 PSI) gauge, 2, to the

right side test fitting. (Reverse testing is 2
shown).
CAUTION
NOTE ORDER OF OPERATION:
1. Securely lock the parking brake.
2. Disengage the range gear and start the
engine.
1
2. Place the range lever in the high range posi- 1
tion.
30002891
5. Set the throttle speed to 2600 rpm.
20
6. Be sure the transmission foot pedals are in the
neutral position.
7. With the parking brake engaged, slowly move the
reverse foot pedal, 1, to obtain a reading on the 1
pressure gauge. Read the maximum pressure
on the gauge. Pressure should be 345 bar
(5000 PSI).
IMPORTANT: Read pressure in the minimum of time
to prevent overheating and possible damage to the
transmission.
10997818
21
8. If necessary to replace either of the relief valves,
the operator’s platform has to be removed to gain 1
access to the relief valve ports, 1 (forward port
shown on left side of tractor -- reverse port on
right side of tractor).
30002884
22
29-20
9. To remove suspect relief valve, remove port plug,

1, with 10 mm allen wrench, O ring, 2, spring, 3, 5
and relief valve cartridge, 4. 1
NOTE: Relief valves are not adjustable, if a relief 2
valve is suspected as faulty, replace suspected valve 3
with new one. 4
10. Retest the new relief valve as previously

described. 4
3
2
1
20000774
23
1. Plug
2. O ring
3. Spring
4. High pressure relief valve
5. Port block
HI/LOW PRESSURE TEST

1. Remove pipe plug from rear of HI/LOW adapter
block.
2. Install adapter fitting FNH00011 to adapter block

port, 2. Fitting is: 1/8″ BSPT x 7/16-20 UNF.
20004742
24
3. Install a 0 - 200 bar (0 - 300 PSI) gauge, 3, to
adapter fitting. 3 2
4. Start tractor, HI/LOW system when initially
started will default to “LOW” mode.
30003055
25
29-21
5. While the tractor is running and the valve is in the

“LOW/TURTLE” mode, zero pressure should be
present at test port.
30003069
26
6. While tractor is running switch HI/LOW switch to
the “HIGH/RABBIT” mode. When switch is in
“HIGH” pressure should be 7.8 - 11.7 bar (114 -
170 PSI).
NOTE: The HI/LOW circuit is supplied oil by the HST
charge pump. The test results of the HST charge
pump pressure, that is measured at the HST filter
base and HI/LOW pressure test should have the
same readings. The HST charge pressure relief
valve regulates the pressure in both systems.
30003070
27
29-22
SEPARATING THE TRACTOR

TC35D, TC40D, AND TC45D W/HST
TRANSMISSION
Separating at the HST Housing/Engine
positive (+) battery cable, 2, from the battery. 2
1
transmission, differential, and the oil cooler into
4. Remove the seat, and the seat track assembly
from the tractor deck.
10998231
28
5. Remove the control lever grips, 1, from the
control levers on both sides of the tractor. 1
6. Remove the left, 2, and the right, 3, control pods
from the fenders.
ROPS.
8. Disconnect and remove the control levers from
the tractor deck and the connecting linkage.
3
2
10997819/7820
29
29-23
9. If equipped, remove the remote, loader control

valve, 1, from the right fender, and the cup
holder/tool box, 2, from the left fender.
10. Remove the left and right fenders from the 1
tractor.
10998371/8229
30
11. Disconnect and remove the differential lock
pedal, 1.
10998223
31
29-24
12. If equipped, disconnect and remove the fulltime

2WD lever, 1.
1
13. Disconnect and remove the parking brake
handle, 2.
10998312
32
panels.
15. Remove the floor mat from the tractor deck.
10000864
33
16. Drive the roll pin, 1, from the HPL speed control
shaft, 2, and remove the control shaft from the
HPL shaft, 3. 1
17. Remove the deck from the tractor. 3
2
20000903
34
29-25

retaining screws, 1. Remove the instrument
2
19. Disconnect the throttle cable from the throttle
control lever.
20. Remove the dash housing from the firewall.
Disconnect the wiring connectors from the dash
switches.
21. Disconnect the two main wiring harness
connectors.
10998233 3
35
firewall, 2, and the HST housing, 3.
2
3
10000863
36
valve.
3 2
30997557
37
29-26
25. Remove the HST oil cooler tube, 1, and the HST
pressure tube, 2, from the tractor.
30996397
1
38
26. Disconnect the wires, 1, on the starter, 2, and
remove the starter from the tractor. 2
30997565 1
39
27. If equipped, disconnect the Sensitrack linkage,
1, from the control arm, 2, at the Sensitrack
clutch, 3.
3
30996381
1 2
40
29-27
28. Remove the two FWD, driveshaft, front and rear,

retaining bolts, (one roll pin on standard FWD
axle), and remove the driveshaft from the tractor.
1 2
30996382
41
29. Use a floor jack, 1, to raise the front of the tractor
and place wood blocks, 2, between the axle, 3,
and the frame, 4. Lower the jack.
1
4 2
3
10000866
42
30. Remove the cotter pin, 1, and the castle nut, 2,
from the support bar, 3, at the rear mounting
bracket, 4.
31. Use a brass drift and a hammer to drive the
support bar, 3, stud out of the mounting
bracket, 4.
filter is necessary on the TC35D tractor to gain
access to several of the buckle-up bolts.
4 1
3
32. Drain the engine oil into a suitable container and
remove the oil filter. 10000902
2
43
29-28

2
10000865 1
44
and 3, on the engine. 1
10000867
45
2
1
10000868
46
29-29
37. Roll a floor jack under the tractor from the rear of
the tractor, and place under the HST housing.
38. Remove the buckle-up bolts that secure the
engine to the HST housing.
engine from the HST housing.
10000869
47
10000870
48
Separating the HST housing at the Gearbox
2
1. Place a jack stand, 1, under the gearbox, 2, to
support the drive train.
1
10000909
49
29-30
2. Remove the HST pedals and linkage, from the

right side of the gearbox, and the HST housing.
20000910
50
NOTE: Remove and discard O rings. Replace with
new O rings at assembly.
1
3. Remove the hydraulic tube, 1, the hydraulic
control valve, 2, and the valve body, 3, from the
gearbox and the HST housing.
10000911
51
29-31
4. Remove the hydraulic tube, 1, from the HST

housing, 2. Remove the retaining bolt, 3, from the
diverter valve bracket, 4.
3
4
2
10000912
52
5. Loosen and remove the buckle-up bolts and
buckle-up nuts. Separate and remove the HST 2 1
housing, 1, from the gearbox, 2.
10000913
53
Attaching the HST housing to the Gearbox
2 1
1. Position the HST housing, 1, onto the gearbox,
2, and secure with the buckle-up bolts, and
buckle-up nuts. Tighten the bolts and the nuts to
60 ft lbs (81 N⋅m).
10000913
54
29-32
NOTE: Use new O rings on hydraulic tubes during

assembly.
2. Install and connect the hydraulic tube, 1, to the

HST housing, 2. Attach the diverter valve 1
bracket, 4, to the HST housing, 2, and secure
with the retaining bolt, 3.
3
4
2
10000912
55
3. Install the valve body, 3, the hydraulic control
valve, 2, and the hydraulic tube , 1, onto the HST
housing and the gearbox.
1
10000911
56
29-33
4. Install the HST pedals and linkage, on the right

side of the gearbox, and the HST housing.
20000910
57
5. Adjust the forward HST pedal stop, 1, to 22.5 mm
(.9 in.), and the reverse HST pedal stop, 2, to 28
mm (1 in.).
2 1
20000914
58
29-34
6. Loosen the locking bolt, 1, and turn the hex

eccentric, 2, to adjust the neutral position. (143.7)
109.5 ± 2 Stretched Spring
Length in Neutral Position
Loosen Capscrew &

Turn Large Hex to
Adjust Neutral
Position
1
20000915
2
59
7. Loosen the two bolts, 1, and adjust the forward
HST pedal to be aligned with the reverse HST
pedal.
1
20000916
60
29-35
8. Loosen the two bolts, 1, and move the bracket,

2, to obtain 1 mm (0.039 in.) clearance between
the plate, 3, and the magnet, 4.
9. Remove the jack stand from under the gearbox,
and place under the HST housing to support the
drive line during attachment of the HST housing
to the engine.
2
1
Adjust Bracket
to Obtain 1 ± 0.5
Between Plate
20000917
and Magnet 3
61
29-36
Attaching the HST to the Engine

WARNING
WARNING: Do not use the buckle-up bolts to
draw the HST together with the engine. Severe
damage to the drive train may result.

the engine. Align the splines on the HST input
shaft with the coupler on the engine flywheel.
Rotate the engine fan to align the input shaft and
the coupler. The floor jack or the hoist may need
to be raised or lowered to make alignment
possible.
2. Connect the HST housing to the engine and
install the buckle-up bolts and nuts. Tighten the
buckle-up bolts and nuts in a criss-cross pattern.
Torque the M10 bolts and nuts to 32-41 ft lbs.
Torque the two M12 bolts to 60 ft lbs.
10000869
62
the tractor.
2
1
10000868
63
4. Connect the fuel supply line, 1, to the fuel
shutoff/filter, 3, and connect the fuel tank vent
line, 2, to the tee fitting.
10000865 1 3
64
29-37
5. Attach the firewall support, 1, to the HST

housing, 3, and the firewall, 2. Secure with the
retaining bolts. 2
3
10000863
65
6. Install the FWD driveshaft, 2, and secure with the
two retaining bolts, 1, (one roll pin on standard
FWD axle).
1 2
30996382
66
7. If equipped, connect the Sensitrack linkage, 1, to
the control arm, 2, at the Sensitrack clutch, 3.
3
30996381
1 2
67
29-38
8. Install the support bar stud, 3, into the mount, 4,

and secure with the castle nut, 2. Torque the
castle nut to 100-125 ft lbs. Install a new cotter
pin, 1, through the castle nut, 2, and the support
bar stud, 3.
4 1
3
10000902
2
68
9. Place a floor jack, 1, under the front of the tractor,
and raise the tractor. Remove the wood blocks,
2, from between the front axle, 3, and the
frame, 4.
1
4 2
3
10000866
69
with the retaining nuts. Connect the wires, 1, to 2
the starter, 2.
30997565 1
70
29-39
11. Install the HST oil cooler tube, 1, and the HST
pressure tube, 2, onto the tractor.
30996397
1
71
hydraulic pump, 2.
14. Connect the two main wiring harness
connectors.
15. Install the tractor deck onto the tractor.
3 2
30997557
72
16. Install and connect the differential lock pedal, 1.
NOTE: For ease of control lever assembly, raise the
tractor on a floor jack and remove the rear wheels.
This is not required but will ease assembly.
10998223
73
29-40
17. Install and connect the full time 2WD lever, 1

18. Install and connect the parking brake lever, 2. 1
10998312
74
19. Install the HPL speed control shaft, 2, onto the
HPL shaft, 3.
1
20. Install and connect the control levers on the left
and right side of the tractor deck. 3
20000903
75
29-41
22. Install the left, 2, and right, 3, control pods on the

fenders. Install the control lever grips, 1, on the 1
control levers.
23. Install the floor mat onto the tractor deck.
24. Install the seat and the seat track on the tractor.
ROPS.
3
2
10997819/7820
76
26. Install the cup holder/tool box, 2, on the left
fender, if equipped.
27. Install the remote, loader control valve, 1, on the
right fender, if equipped. Connect the hydraulic 1
tubes.
29. Connect the wiring plugs to the dash housing
switches.
10998371/8229
77
29-42

instrument panel. Install the instrument panel, 2,
into the dash housing, 3, and secure with two
screws, 1.
31. Install the hood on the tractor.
10998223
78
panels.
33. If removed, install the left and right rear wheels.
NOTE: The following step is required on the TC35D 1
tractor.
2
recommended oil to the proper level. 10000864
79
1
10998312
80
29-43
Op. 29 202
HYDROSTATIC TRANSMISSION
DISASSEMBLY
PRECAUTIONS BEFORE DISASSEMBLY

• Thoroughly clean the HST unit and plug all open-
ings to prevent dirt entry.
• Keep the work area clean at all times and use
care to not contaminate the internal parts.
• Handle the parts carefully so as not to damage
parts during repair.
1. Drain the transmission fluid into a suitable clean

container.
2. Separate the tractor between the engine and
clutch housing. See “Separating the Tractor”.
3. Remove the clutch housing
4. Remove the two hex nuts and hex head cap
screws, 1, and remove the HST from the 1 1
transmission case.
1
30996513
81
CHARGE PUMP REMOVAL
7
1. Remove the socket head bolt, 1.
2. Remove the charge pump case, 2, and O ring, 3, 6
from the housing, 4. 3
3. Remove the inner and outer rotor assembly, 5,
5
2
from the input shaft, 6.
NOTE: Identify the position of the inner and outer
rotor so as to re-assembly in their original position. 9
10 4
4. Remove the key, 7, from the input shaft, 6.
1 8
5. Remove the plate, 8, washer, 9, and O ring, 10, 20000746
from the housing.
82
29-44
PORT BLOCK REMOVAL

1. Remove the 11 socket head bolts, 1 and remove 1
the port block, 2, from the housing, 3. 3
2
20000747
83
2. Remove the charge pressure relief valve, 1, and
spring, 2. 1
NOTE: Take care not to drop the valve plates (3 2
and 4).
3
3. Remove pump valve plate, 3 and motor valve
plate, 4, from the port block, 5.
5
4
20000748
84
CYLINDER BLOCK ASSEMBLY REMOVAL
1
1. Remove the pump cylinder block assembly, 1,
from the housing.
2. Remove the motor cylinder block assembly, 2,
from the housing.
2
20000749
85
29-45
MOTOR SWASH PLATE REMOVAL

1. Remove the motor swash plate, 1, from the 4
housing.
2. Remove the pistons, 2, spring, 3 and steel
balls, 4.
1
2
3
20000750
86
INPUT AND OUTPUT SHAFT REMOVAL
1
1. Remove the thrust plate, 1, from the housing.
2. Using a soft jaw hammer, drive out the input
shaft, 2.
3. Remove the snap ring, 3, and output shaft, 4, with 2
bearing, 5, from the housing.
4
3
5
20000751
87
PUMP SWASH PLATE REMOVAL
7
1. Scribe reference marks on the swash plate 4 1
covers, 2 and 3 and remove the covers from the 5
housing. 6
2. Using a soft mallet, gently tap the axial end of the
swash plate and remove the opposite side cover.
6
3. Gently tap the exposed trunnion end and remove 5
the remaining cover. 2 7
4. Remove the variable swash plate, 1, from the
housing.
3
20000752
88
1. Pump swash plate
2. Right-hand cover
3. Left-hand cover
4. Oil seal
5. O ring
6. Bushing
7. Screw
29-46
Op. 29 130
1
2 3
PORT BLOCK REMOVAL
1. Remove the plug, 1, O rings, 2, spring, 3, and 4
high pressure relief valve and check valve, 4, as 5 2
an assembly. 6 4
2. Remove the plugs, 4 and 5, O rings, 6, spool, 7, 3
and spring, 8, for the two speed motor.
1
8
7
6 4
20000753
89
INSPECTION
Inspect the hydrostatic components for the following
conditions:
• Excessive wear or scored pistons and cylinder

bores in the pump and motor block assemblies.
• Excessive wear or scored cylinder block and
valve port plate mating surfaces.
• Excessive wear or scored charge pump rotor
faces and lobes.
• Excessive wear or scored charge pump body
and wear plate surfaces.
• Check the ball bearings for excessive wear and
looseness or uneven rotation when rotated by
hand.
• Inspect the variable swash plate bushings for ex-
cessive wear or scoring. Replace the cover and
bushing as an assembly if required.
NOTE: BEFORE ASSEMBLY, BE SURE:

• ALL COMPONENTS ARE THOROUGHLY
CLEANED AND WELL LUBRICATED WITH NH
OIL NO. 134.
• REPLACE O RINGS, OIL SEALS AND GAS-
KETS WHEN REASSEMBLING.
• APPLY PETROLEUM JELLY TO O RINGS AND
OIL SEAL LIPS.
29-47
PISTON ASSEMBLY
1 2
• Replace the piston assembly if the play at the
caulked areas, 3, of the piston, 2, and shoe, 1, ex-
ceeds the service limit.
Standard Assembly
Valve Service Limit
0.03 mm (0.001 in.) 0.1 mm (0.004 in.)
3
PLAY
20000754
90
• Replace the piston assembly if the shoe thick-
ness, 3, is below the service limit. 3
Standard Assembly
Valve Service Limit
3.0 mm (0.118 in.) 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
20000755
91
• Replace the piston assembly if the clearance, 3,
between the piston, 1, and cylinder block, 2, ex- 3 2
ceeds the service limit. 1
Standard Assembly
Valve Service Limit
0.02 mm (0.0007 in.) 0.03 mm (0.001 in.)
20000756
92
29-48
CHARGE PUMP ASSEMBLY

• Measure the side clearance, 3, of the trochoid ro- 3
tor and replace if the service limit is exceeded. 1
Standard Assembly
Valve Service Limit
0.02 - 0.03 mm 0.035 mm
(0.0007 - 0.001 in.) (0.0014 in.)
2
20000757
93
1. Trochoid rotor assembly
2. Charge pump case
3. Clearance
SWASH PLATE ASSEMBLY

7
1. Install the pump swash plate, 1, into the housing. 4 1
5
2. Align the reference marks and install the covers,
6
2 and 3, into the housing.
3. Install the screws, 7, and tighten to 6.1 - 7.3 N⋅m
(4.50 - 5.38 ft.-lbs.). 6
5
2 7
3
20000752
94
1. Pump swash plate
2. Right-hand cover
3. Left-hand cover
4. Oil seal
5. O ring
6. Bushing
7. Screw
Take care that the cover notch, 1, is toward the

port block mounting screw when installing the
covers.
20000758
95
29-49
PUMP SHAFT (INPUT SHAFT) ASSEMBLY

4
1. If removed, install the bearing, 1, and snap ring,
2 , to the pump shaft, 3.
2. Install the pump shaft into the housing, 4, from
1
the front.
3
20000759
96
CHARGE PUMP ASSEMBLY
1. Install the washer, 1, and O ring, 2, to the
housing.
7
2. Install the pin, 3, and plate, 4, to the housing. 5

9 4
3. Install the key, 5, and trochoid rotor assembly, 6, 6
onto the pump shaft, 7.
4. Install the charge pump case, 8, and O ring, 9,
8
with socket head bolts, 10, and tighten to 17.0 -
18.4 N⋅m. 3
1
10 2
20000760
97
Op. 29 218
2
CYLINDER BLOCK ASSEMBLY FOR PUMP
1. Install the thrust plate, 1, into the swash plate
while aligning pin, 2, and pin hole.
3
2. Install the cylinder block assembly, 3.
1
20000761
98
29-50
NOTE: Take care not to lose the three pins, 2, from

the pump cylinder block, 1. Ensure that they are
installed into the piston block. 1
2
99
MOTOR SHAFT ASSEMBLY
1. Install the ball bearing, 1, and snap ring, 2, onto 4
the motor shaft, 3.
2. Install the motor shaft, 3, into the housing, 4, and
secure by the snap ring, 5.
3
5
2 1
20000762
100
Op. 29 218
4
CYLINDER BLOCK ASSEMBLY FOR MOTOR 3
1. Install the spring, 1, and pistons, 2, into the
housing.
2. Install the steel balls, 3, into the housing.
3. Install the motor swash plate, 4, into the housing. 5
4. Install the cylinder block assembly, 5, into the
housing.
2
1
20000763
101
29-51
Op. 29 130
4 10
PORT BLOCK ASSEMBLY 3
1. Install the check valve and high pressure relief 1
valve, 1, as a set into the port block, 2. 7
2. Install the spring, 3, O rings, 10, and plug, 4, and
tighten to 63.1 - 64.3 N⋅m (895 - 87 ft.-lbs.). 1
3
3. Install the spool, 5, spring, 6, O rings, 9, and 10
plugs, 7, and adapter fitting, 8, and tighten to
51.0 N⋅m (69 ft.-lbs.).
9
NOTE: Use care at the position of plugs, 7 and 8, and 6
direction of the springs, 3, and spool, 5.
5
NOTE:Spool should be a sliding fit with no binding in 4

the bore. Polish if needed. Lubricate with hydraulic oil
when installing. 2
9
20000764
8
102
1. Check and high pressure
relief valve assembly
2. Port block
3. Spring
4. Plug
5. Spool
6. Spring
7. Plug
8. Adapter fitting
9. O ring
10. O ring
29-52
11
4
9 10
6
12 5 3
2
13
20000765 7
103
1. Pump valve plate 6. Pin 10. Spring
2. Motor valve plate 7. Housing 11. Socket head bolt
3. Port block 8. O ring 12. Input shaft
4. Charge pressure relief valve 9. Metal gasket 13. Output shaft
5. O ring
PORT BLOCK INSTALLATION 6. Install the metal gasket, 9, to the housing, 7.

1. Install the valve plates, 1 and 2, to the port block 7. Lubricate the contact surface of the cylinder
assembly, 3. blocks.
NOTE: Ensure feathering notches are facing 8. Install the spring, 10, for charge pressure relief
outward. valve to the housing, 7. Use petroleum jelly to
install spring in position.
2. Install the charge pressure relief valve, 4, to the
port block. 9. Install the port block assembly, 3, to the housing,
7, and tighten the socket bolts, 11, to 69.9 - 71.3
3. Install the O rings, 5, to the port block. N⋅m (51.5 - 52.5 ft.-lbs.).
4. If removed, install the pins, 6, to the housing, 7. 10. Using pliers to help grip shafts, input shaft, 12,
5. Install the O rings, 8, to the housing, 7. and output shaft, 13, should rotate. If not, inspect.
29-53
Op. 29 204
6
CHECK VALVE
A check valve in the pipe circuit protects the cooler
from excess pressure due to high oil viscosity or a
restriction in the cooler circuit.
NOTE: Check valve opens when there is 17.5 PSI

pressure differential between the inlet and outlet of
5
the filter base.
NOTE: When the check valve opens, oil bypasses

the oil cooler but still circulates through the filter.
Oil flow directional arrows shown in figure.
104
1. Banjo bolt
2. Spring
3. Ball
4. Cooler return manifold tube
5. Cooler supply tube
6. Transmission supply tube
Disassembly
1. Remove the front banjo bolt, 1 (from cooler pipe
tube).
2. Remove the spring, 2, and steel ball, 3, from the
filter holder, 4.
Inspection
1. Inspect the spring and ball for excess wear or
damage. Replace faulty components if required. 4
2. Inspect the ball seat in the filter holder. Replace 3
the filter holder if required. 2
Assembly
20000766
Assemble the check valve components as shown in
the prior figure. 105
29-54
Op. 29 300
HYDROSTATIC TRANSMISSION GEARBOX 2
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

The hydrostatic transmission unit used on the
tractors has two output shafts, 2 and 3, to the 3
transmission gearbox. One output shaft, 3, provides
power to the transmission gearbox and drives the
rear axle drive pinion. The other output shaft, 2,
provides power to the transmission gearbox for PTO
drive.
20000767
106
1. Input Shaft
2. Output Shaft for PTO
3. Output Shaft for rear axle drive pinion
29-55
GEARBOX IDENTIFICATION
The hydrostatic transmission gearbox is a two speed
non-syncromesh type gearbox, that transfers power
from the output shaft of the hydrostatic transmission
to either the rear axle pinion gear or front wheel drive
drop box gear.
4
5 6
1
2 8 9
7
3 4
2
20003063
107
1. Input shaft 6. 19-tooth fixed gear
2. 20-tooth lower counter shaft gear 7. 29-tooth high range gear
3. 21-tooth mid counter shaft gear 8. Range gear sliding coupler
4. 26-tooth upper shaft front gear 9. 41-tooth low range gear
5. 31-tooth fixed gear
29-56
GEARBOX OVERHAUL
Removal 1
1. Drain the transmission fluid into a suitable
container.
3
2. Separate the tractor between the bell housing 4
and the engine. See section 13 “Separating the
Tractor”.
3. Remove the hydrostatic transmission. See
“Hydrostatic Transmission Removal” discussed 2
earlier in this section.
4. Remove the PTO solenoid valve, 1, and 10998443
hydraulic line, 2.
108
5. Remove the hex head cap screws, 3, and
remove the transmission cover and gasket, 4.
6. Remove pin, 1, spring, 2 and ball, 3, from the
case, 4. 1
2
4 3
20000768
109
7. Remove the transmission to rear axle buckle-up
bolts, 1, and separate the transmission from the
rear axle.
NOTE: Three of the buckle-up bolts, 1, are located in 1
the transmission case under the top cover.
10998444
110
29-57
Disassembly
1. Remove and discard the PTO drive shaft seal, 1. 1
10998445
111
2. Remove the snap ring, 1, and remove the PTO
drive shaft, 2, with bearing from the front of the
casing.
1
10998446
112
3. Remove the snap ring, 1, securing the counter
shaft at the rear of the casing.
10998447
113
29-58
4. Remove the counter shaft from the rear of the

casing removing the front bearing, 1, fixed gear
(19T), 2, collar, 3, and high fixed gear (31T), 4, 4 3 2
from the shaft. The low fixed gear (26T), 5, and 1
rear bearing, 6, will remain on the shaft. 6 5
10998448
114
5. Remove and discard the counter shaft oil seal, 1,
from the front of the case.
10998445
115
6. Remove snap ring, 1.
7. Remove the counter shaft, 2, through the front of
the case with front bearing, 3.
5
8. Remove the fixed gear (21T), 4, and rear 4
bearing, 5, from the case. 2
3
1
20000769
116
29-59
9. Drive the spring pin, 1, through the shift rod, 2,

and fork, 3.
3
2 1
10998451
117
10. Remove the shift rod, 1, from the rear of the case.
11. Remove the shift fork, 2. 1
10998452
118
12. Remove the snap ring, 1, securing the main shaft
assembly.
10998447
119
29-60
13. Withdraw the main shaft, 2, with rear bearing, 3,

through the rear of the case. 5
6
14. Remove the main coupling, 1, low counter gear 9
(41T), 5, hub, 9, slide gear, 6, high counter gear 8
(29T), 4, main coupling, 8, and front bearing, 7, 2
7
from the case. 3
1
4
20000770
120
15. Remove and discard the drive shaft oil seal, 1,
10998445
121
16. Remove the snap ring, 1.
10998454
122
29-61
17. Remove the drive shaft, 1, with front bearing, 2,

18. Remove the fixed gear (20T), 3, and rear
bearing, 4, from the case. 5
4
2
3
1
20000769
123
Inspection
1. Wash all components with a suitable cleaning
2. Inspect all bearings for excess wear, score
marks, discoloration from overheating, or other
damage. Rotate the bearings by hand and check
for roughness while slowly rotating the inner and
outer races.
3. Lubricate all bearings with clean hydraulic fluid,
NH 134 or equivalent, before installation.
4. Inspect the transmission case for, pitting, cracks,
worn bearing bores, or other damage.
5. Check the detent springs for wear, chip, or weak
spring tension.
6. Inspect the detent balls for excess wear or
damage.
7. Inspect the shift rail detent grooves for, pitting,
excess wear, or other damage.
8. Inspect all gears for excess wear, chipped teeth,
or other damage. Check the gear backlash by
inserting the mating assemblies into the casing
and using a feeler gauge. Gear backlash should
be between 0.4 - 0.6 mm (0.002″ - 0.006″) with
a maximum wear limit of 0.6 mm (0.236″).
9. Inspect the shift forks for excess wear, bending,
or other damage.
29-62
Assembly
1. Install the drive shaft rear bearing, 4, in the bore
of the casing and install the fixed gear (20T), 3,
in position.
2. Insert the drive shaft, 1, with front bearing, 2,
through the front of the case through the fixed
gear until it bottoms out in the rear bearing.
4
3
1
20000769
2
124
3. Install snap ring, 1, to secure the drive shaft
assembly in position.
10998454
125
4. Install the new drive shaft oil seal, 1.
10998445
126
29-63
5. Install the main shaft front bearing, 7, in its bore

in the casing. 5
6
6. Assemble the main coupling, 8, high counter 9
gear (29T), 4, slide gear, 6, hub, 9, low counter 8
gear (41T), 5, and main coupling, 1, and place in 2
7
position in the case. 3
7. Install the main shaft with rear bearing, 1, through 1
the rear of the case through the gear assembly
until it bottoms out in the front bearing. 4
20000770
127
8. Install the shift fork, 3, in position and insert the
shift rod, 2, through the fork and case. Secure in
position with spring pin, 1. 3
2 1
10998451
128
9. Install the counter shaft rear bearing, 5, in its bore
in the case.
10. Install the fixed gear (21T), 4, in position in the
case, then install the counter shaft, 2, with front 5
4
bearing, 3, through the front of the case through 2
the fixed gear until it bottoms out in the rear 3
bearing. 1
11. Install the snap ring, 1, to secure the counter
shaft assembly.
20000769
129
29-64
12. Install the new counter shaft oil seal, 1.
10998445
130
13. Install the front bearing, 1, in its bore in the case.
14. Install the high fixed gear, (31T), 4, collar, 3, fixed
4 3 2
gear (26T), 2, in position in the case. 1
15. Install the counter shaft with low fixed gear (19T), 6 5
5, and rear bearing, 6, from the rear of the case
through the gear assembly until it bottoms out in
the front bearing.
10998448
131
16. Install the snap ring, 1, in its groove in the rear of
the case.
10998447
132
29-65
17. Install the PTO drive shaft, 2, with bearing

through the front of the counter shaft and secure
with snap ring, 1.
1
10998446
133
18. Install the new PTO drive shaft seal, 1.
1
10998445
134
Installation
1. Apply a light coat of Loctite sealer, gasket
eliminator #518, to the mating surfaces of the
rear axle and transmission housing. Align the 1
transmission housing with the rear axle and
install the buckle-up bolts. Tighten to 81 N⋅m (60
ft.-lbs.).
NOTE: Three of the buckle-up bolts, 1, are located in
the transmission case under the top cover.
10998444
135
29-66
2. Install the detent ball, 3, spring, 2, and pin, 1, into

the case, 4. 1
2
4 3
20000768
136
3. Using a new gasket, install the transmission
cover, 4. Secure the cover with hex head cap
screws, 3. 1
4. Install the PTO solenoid valve, 1, and hydraulic
line, 2. 3
4
5. Install the hydrostatic transmission. See “Hydro-
static Transmission Installation” discussed earli-
er in this section.
10998443
137
29-67
Op. 29 214
HI/LO SOLENOID VALVE ASSEMBLY

The solenoid valve controls the motor swash plate
angle by controlling the flow of charge pump
pressurized oil. When the solenoid valve is
deactivated, by the Hi/LO switch being in the “Turtle”
position, no charge pump oil is allowed to flow
through the valve to the angling pistons. In the
(LOW/TURTLE) mode the swash plate angle is at
15_.
1 2 3
Port Identification
1. Pressurized inlet
2. Pressurized outlet to pistons
3. Return to sump
20004747
138
29-68
When the solenoid is activated, by placing the HI/LO

switch in the “Rabbit” position, the spool is shifted
allowing charge pump pressurized oil to flow to the
angling pistons that are located under the motor
swash plate. When the pistons are pressurized, the
motor swash plate angle moves from 15_ to 9_ for
(HI/RABBIT) mode operation.
1 2 3
Port Identification
1. Pressurized inlet
2. Pressurized outlet to pistons
3. Return to sump
20004746
139
The solenoid valve assembly, 1, is located on the left
side of the transmission case.
30002884 1
140
29-69
Removal of Solenoid Valve Assembly

1. Disconnect wires, 1.
2. Using a 5 mm allen wrench, remove the four
socket head mounting bolts, 2.
1
2
30002884
141
3. When removing the valve assembly, be careful
not to displace the three O rings, 3, that are
located between the solenoid valve body and the
adapter block.
30002887
142
Disassembly of Solenoid Valve
1. Remove solenoid retaining nut, 1, spacer, 2,
solenoid cover, 3, and solenoid, 4, from valve
stem.
1
3
4 2
30002888
143
29-70
2. Remove valve stem, 5, O ring, 6, plunger, 7,

spool, 8, and spring, 9, from valve body.
7
8
9
5
30002889
144
Inspection of Solenoid Parts
1. Check solenoid, 1, for damaged wires.
2. Plunger, 2, should slide freely in and out of valve 2
stem, 3. 4
5
3. Spool, 4, should be a smooth sliding fit inside of
valve body bore, if spool is binding check for
contamination in bore or for rough spots on
spool. Spool can be polished with fine emery
paper if needed.
4. Check spring, 5, for any damage or distortion.
3 1
30002889
145
Solenoid Testing
1
1. Assemble nut, 1, spacer, 2 solenoid cover, 3, 2
3
solenoid, 4, valve stem, 5, and plunger, 6.
4
5
6
30003065
146
29-71
2. Apply 12 volt power source to the solenoid

leads, 1. 1
3. When 12 volts are supplied to solenoid leads,
plunger, 2, should protrude from valve stem.
Valve stem should become magnetized when
solenoid is supplied with electrical current. 2
30003061
147
4. Check ohm reading across leads of solenoid.
Reading should be 7.5 to 10.5 ohms.
5. If plunger does not protrude when voltage is
applied or resistance reading is not within
specification, replace solenoid.
1
30000740
148
Solenoid Valve Assembly
NOTE: Clean and lubricate spool before installing
into valve body. 3
2
1. Install spring, 1, spool, 2, plunger,.3, valve stem, 1
4, with o ring, 5, solenoid, 6, cover, 7, spacer, 8
and nut, 9.
5
8
7 9
30002889
4 6
149
29-72
2. Install the three o rings, 1 onto backside of valve

body.
30002887
150
3. Install valve body onto adapter block with the four
socket head bolts. Torque to 5.6 Nm 50 in.--lbs.
30002884 1
151
Adapter Block Removal
NOTE: Solenoid valve must be removed before
adapter block can be removed from transmission
case.
1. Remove metal line, 1, and hose, 2, from adapter

block.
30003066 1 2
152
29-73
2. Using a 6 mm allen wrench remove the two

socket head bolts mounting bolts, 1.
1
30002885
153
3. Pull adapter block assembly away from internal
hydrostatic transmission.
30002886
154
Adapter Block Disassembly
2 4
1. Remove adapter fitting, 1, and O rings, 2, from
block. 3
2. Remove O ring, 3, and screen, 4, from block port.
1
30002890
155
29-74
Adapter Block Inspection

1
1. Inspect all O rings, 1, for damage and replace as
needed. 2
2. Clean screen,, 2, with solvent and compressed
air.
30002890
156
Adapter Block Assembly
5 4
1. Install screen, 1, and O ring, 2 into bore of block.
NOTE: O ring, 2, is sandwiched between screen, 1,
and adapter fitting, 3.
2. Install adapter fitting, 3, with O rings, 4, and, 5

into block.
2
30002890
3 1
157
3. Install adapter block assembly into Hydrostatic
transmission port, secure with two socket head
bolts, 6, tighten bolts to 27 Nm 20 ft.--lbs.
30002885 6
158
29-75
4. Install hose, 7, and metal line, 8.
8 7
30003066
159
CRUISE CONTROL
Description and Operation
An electronic cruise control system is standard
equipment on models TC35D, TC40D and TC45D.
The cruise control system utilizes an electromagnet,
to lock the hydrostatic transmission linkage in any
position and maintain a constant selected forward or
reverse speed.
The cruise control is activated by a three--position
momentary rocker switch, 1, that is located on the 1
right--hand side pod. When cruise control system is
activated the tractor symbol on the switch will be
illuminated green, indicating the system is “ON”.
After starting the tractor and reaching the desired

operating speed, engage the cruise control by :
• Place the ignition switch in the “ACC/RUN”

position.
• Having the parking brake or both brake pedals
are in the released position. 10998318
• Depressing the top side of the cruise control
switch. 160
29-76
This activates the electromagnet, 1, which holds the

hydrostatic pedal in place. 1
The cruise control can be disengaged by:
• Depressing both brake pedals.

(Depressing both pedals activates cruise release
brake switch).
• Placing the cruise control switch in the “OFF”
position.
When either one of the above actions take place, the

electric current to the magnet is interrupted, and the 30002223
hydrostatic pedal returns to neutral.
161
NOTE: The cruise control can be overridden by
pushing on the hydrostatic pedals with enough force
to force the linkage past the electromagnet. If the
cruise is over ridden, once the force on the pedal is
removed the cruise will be set at the new speed
position.
NOTE: When the ignition key is turned to the “OFF”

position, the cruise control will default to the “OFF”
position.
ELECTROMAGNET AIR GAP ADJUSTMENT
With the tractor turned off and the cruise control 2
deactivated, loosen bolts, 1, on magnet mounting
plate. Move mounting plate inboard or outboard to
obtain an air gap, 4, of 0.5 – 1.5 mm (0.020 – 0.060
in.) between magnet, 2, and pivot plate, 3. Retighten
mounting bolts, 1.
NOTE: Troubleshooting cruise control system is

cover in section 55 electrical. 1
4
3
20003060
162
29-77
Op. 29 200
HST FOOT CONTROL PEDALS NEUTRAL

ADJUSTMENT
When The HST foot control pedals are in the neutral
position, the rear wheels should not creep. To check
and adjust neutral pedal position:
(Standard FWD Axle)
1. Disengage the FWD and jack the rear wheels off

the ground and support rear axles with jack
stands.
IMPORTANT: On SuperSteer models, the front axle
must be off the ground also!
2. With axle(s) off the ground, start the tractor, place

the transmission range selector in the “HI” range
position.
3. Set engine to full RPM.
4. DO NOT depress either foot pedal and check for
creep in the rear wheels.
5. Full stroke both the forward and reverse pedals,
allow pedals to return to neutral and check for
creep.
10997818
163
If creep exists in either direction, adjust s follows:
6. Loosen capscrew, 1,and adjust large hex head 2

eccentric, 2, until creep stops.
7. Retighten capscrew, 1. Be sure eccentric, 2,
stays in place while tightening capscrew.
NOTE: For optimum adjustment, turn eccentric, 2,
clockwise until wheels begin to creep (mark 1
position), then turn eccentric counterclockwise until
wheels begin to creep in the opposite direction,
(mark position). Eccentric adjustment should be
made at Mid position between the two marks. Pedals
10000742
Should be level.
164
8. Pull back engine speed to idle and stop engine.
9. Remove jack stands that support axle(s) and
lower tractor to the ground.
29-78
HST PEDALS RETURN SPRING ADJUSTMENT

Adjust the pedal return spring as follows: 1
1. Tractor turned off, and HST pedals in neutral 2
position.
2. Loosen jam nut, 1.
3
3. Turn nut, 2, clockwise for more spring tension

and counter clockwise for less tension.
4. Adjust nut until spring measurement, 3, (hook to
hook) is 109.5 mm ± 2.0 mm (4 5/16 in ± 5/64 in).
5. Tighten jam nut, 1. 30003068
165
29-79
29-80
SECTION 31 -- POWER TAKE-OFF (PTO) SYSTEMS
Chapter 1 -- Power Take-Off (PTO) Systems
CONTENTS

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-2
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-4
31 110 Rear PTO-Power Flow Diagram -- 12x12 Synchronized Shuttle Shift Transmission . . . 31-6
31 110 Rear PTO-Power Flow Diagram -- Hydrostatic Transmission (HST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-7
31 120 Mid PTO-Power Flow Diagram -- Tractors Equipped with a Mid PTO Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-8
31 104 Hydraulic Fluid Flow to the PTO Clutch Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-9
31 104 82 Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-15
31 104 82 PTO Clutch Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-18
31 114 62 PTO Clutch Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-23
31 114 68 PTO Clutch Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-26
31 114 62 PTO Clutch Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-34
31 114 42 PTO System Overhaul -- 12x12 Synchronized Shuttle Shift Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 31-38
31 114 46 Countershaft Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-42
31 114 00 PTO System Overhaul -- Hydrostatic Transmission (HST) -- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-47
31 114 42 PTO Input Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-47
31 114 42 PTO Countershaft and Rear PTO Shaft -- Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-53
31 114 19 PTO Countershaft and Rear PTO Shaft -- Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-57
31 120 00 Mid PTO Countershaft and Drop Box Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-60
31-1
SECTION 31 - POWER TAKE-OFF (PTO) SYSTEMS
SPECIFICATIONS
PTO Hydraulic System
Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0 LPM (0.8 GPM)
Relief Valve Pressure Setting
TC35, TC35D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 bar (200 PSI)
TC40, TC40D, TC45, TC45D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 bar (260 PSI)
PTO Clutch
Clutch Disc Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 discs
Minimum Clutch Disc Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.80 mm (0.71″)
Clutch Disc Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99.6 mm (3.925″)
Air Gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 mm - 2.5 mm (0.059″ - 0.098″)
Minimum Brake Disc Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.35 mm (0.93″)
Brake Disc Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118.7 mm (4.675″)
31-2

4T, 4.8 2.8 - 4.0 3.8 - 5.4
M5 7T, 8T, 8.8 0.70 4.9 - 6.9 6.9 - 9.3 ----------- ------------ ------------
10T, 10.9, 11T 6.7 - 9.4 9.0 - 12.7
4T, 4.8 3.6 - 5.1 4.9 - 6.9
M6 7T, 8T, 8.8 1.0 6.1 - 8.3 8.3 - 11.3 ----------- ------------ ------------
10T, 10.9, 11T 8.7 - 11.6 11.8 - 15.7
4T, 4.8 9.4 - 12.3 12.7 - 16.7 11.2 - 14.8 15.2 - 20.1
M8 7T, 8T, 8.8 1.25 16.6 - 21.0 22.6 - 28.4 1.0 19.5 - 25.3 26.5 - 34.3
10T, 10.9, 11T 21.0 - 26.8 28.4 - 36.2 22.4 - 29.7 30.4 - 40.2
4T, 4.8 18.8 - 24.6 25.5 - 33.3 21.0 - 26.8 28.4 - 36.3
M10 7T, 8T, 8.8 1.5 32.5 - 41.2 44.1 - 55.9 1.25 36.2 - 46.3 49.0 - 62.8
10T, 10.9, 11T 39.8 - 51.4 53.9 - 69.9 42.7 - 54.2 57.9 - 73.5
4T, 4.8 27.5 - 34.7 37.3 - 47.1 31.8 - 40.5 43.1 - 54.9
M12 7T, 8T, 8.8 1.75 48.5 - 61.5 65.7 - 83.4 1.25 55.0 - 69.4 74.5 - 94.1
10T, 10.9, 11T 68.0 - 85.4 92.9 - 116 73.1 - 93.3 99.0 - 127
4T, 4.8 46.3 - 59.3 62.8 - 80.4 51.4 - 64.4 69.6 - 87.3
M14 7T, 8T, 8.8 2.0 76.7 - 96.9 104 - 131 1.5 86.1 - 109 117 - 148
10T, 10.9, 11T 102 - 129 139 - 175 108 - 137 147 - 186
4T, 4.8 63.6 - 81.0 83.3 - 110 67.3 - 84.6 91.3 - 115
M16 7T, 8T, 8.8 2.0 110 - 136 149 - 184 1.5 116 - 142 157 - 192
10T, 10.9, 11T 152 - 188 206 - 255 163 - 199 221 - 270
4T, 4.8 106 - 132 144 - 179 127 - 156 172 - 211
M20 7T, 8T, 8.8 2.5 177 - 213 240 - 289 1.5 203 - 246 275 - 333
10T, 10.9, 11T 268 - 325 363 - 441 293 - 358 397 - 485
31-3
SPECIAL TOOLS
PTO Clutch Pack Pressure Testing Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CNH299008
PTO Clutch Pack Press Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CNH299009
Detent Ball Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FNH00081
31-4
Rear live power take-off is standard equipment on all
TC35, TC40, and TC45 tractors. The power take-off 1
(PTO) system is independent of the driveline and
runs directly off of the engine flywheel. The PTO is
engaged and disengaged by a hydraulically oper-
ated PTO clutch system. The operator uses a control
lever, 1, connected to a hydraulic clutch control valve
that is used to pressurize the PTO clutch with hydrau-
lic fluid.
30000422
1
The TC35D and TC40D models can be equipped
with a mid PTO system. The mid PTO operates off of 2 1
the same PTO clutch system as the rear PTO sys-
tem. Tractors equipped with a mid PTO system utilize
three PTO levers instead of just one for tractors
equipped with rear PTO only. A control lever, 1, en-
gages and disengages the PTO clutch system, while
the other two levers, 2, select which PTO (rear or
mid) power is sent to. Mid PTO is available as a deal-
er installed accessory only.
10997820
2
31-5
1
4
2 3 5 6
20000371
3
Op. 31 110 er flows through the PTO clutch, 4, to the PTO coun-
REAR PTO - POWER FLOW DIAGRAM FOR tershaft, 5. Power is then transferred from the PTO
countershaft, 5, to a fixed 49-tooth gear, 6. The gear,
THE 12X12 SYNCHRONIZED SHUTTLE
6, turns the rear PTO shaft, 7, when the PTO is en-
SHIFT TRANSMISSION gaged.
On tractors equipped with a 12x12 synchronized
shuttle shift transmission power flows from the en- NOTE: The rear PTO output shaft, 7, cannot be ro-
gine through a damper disc, 1, through the transmis- tated when the tractor is shut off and the PTO in the
sion via the PTO driveshaft, 2, to a PTO input shaft, disengaged position, because the PTO driven gear,
3. The PTO input shaft, 3, is connected to the PTO 6, being constantly engaged with the powertrain.
clutch, 4. When the operator engages the PTO, pow-
31-6
1
2 3 6
4 5 7
8 9
10
20000382
4
Op. 31 110 to a fixed 49-tooth gear, 8. When the rear PTO is en-
REAR PTO - POWER FLOW DIAGRAM FOR gaged, a shifter fork engages a sliding gear coupler,
9, that engages the fixed 49-tooth gear to the rear
THE HYDROSTATIC TRANSMISSION (HST)
PTO shaft, 10, causing the shaft to turn.
On tractors that are equipped with the hydrostatic
transmission (HST), power flows from the engine NOTE: The rear PTO output shaft, 10, cannot be ro-
through a damper disc, 1, to the HST input shaft, 2, tated when the tractor is shut off and the PTO in the
of the HST pump, 3. Power is then routed through the disengaged position, because the PTO gear coupler,
HST pump, 3, to a PTO shaft, 4, which goes through 9, being constantly engaged with the powertrain.
the transmission, to the PTO input shaft, 5. The PTO When the optimal mid PTO is installed, the rear PTO
input shaft, 5, located in the rear differential housing, coupler is disengaged, because the rear and mid
is connected to the PTO clutch, 6, and when the PTO PTOs can be disengaged or engaged separately.
is engaged, power flows through the PTO clutch, 6, When the rear PTO coupler is disengaged, the rear
to the PTO countershaft, 7. Power is then transferred PTO output shaft can be rotated.
31-7
1
2 3 6 7
5 8 9
4
10
14
11
16 13 12
15
18
17
20000383
5
Op. 31 120 PTO clutch, 6, to the PTO countershaft, 7. When the
MID PTO - POWER FLOW DIAGRAM FOR mid PTO is engaged, a shifter fork engages a sliding
gear coupler, 8, with a 21-tooth gear, 9, both of which
TRACTORS EQUIPPED WITH A MID PTO
are located on the PTO countershaft, 7. The 21-tooth
KIT gear on the PTO countershaft spins a 39-tooth gear,
The mid PTO system utilizes several components 10, which rotates independently on the rear PTO
common to the rear PTO system. Power flows from shaft, 11. This 39-tooth gear transfers power to
the engine through a damper disc, 1, to the HST input another 21-tooth gear, 12, fixed on the upper mid
shaft, 2, of the HST pump, 3. Power is then routed PTO countershaft, 13. The upper mid PTO counter-
through the HST pump, 3, to a PTO shaft, 4, which shaft, 13, rotates a 25-tooth gear, 14, that turns a
goes through the transmission to the PTO input shaft, fixed 33-tooth gear, 15, on the lower mid PTO coun-
5. The PTO input shaft, 5, located in the rear differen- tershaft, 16. This gear, 15, transfers power to a
tial housing, is connected to the PTO clutch, 6, and 31-tooth gear, 17, which is fixed to the mid PTO shaft,
when the PTO is engaged, power flows through the 18, causing the mid PTO shaft, 18, to turn.
31-8
1 2 3
6 2
20000348
6
Op. 31 104 6. The diverter valve diverts 0.8 gallons of the 9.8
HYDRAULIC FLUID FLOW TO THE PTO gallons per minute capacity of the pump to the PTO
system. The remaining flow is utilized by the tractor’s
CLUTCH ASSEMBLY
hydraulic system (Section 35). From the diverter
The PTO clutch engages and disengages by using valve, the hydraulic fluid is transferred to the clutch
hydraulic fluid from the tractor sump. Hydraulic fluid control valve, 7, through the PTO system hydraulic
is pumped from the sump, 1, through a suction tube, line, 8. The clutch control valve controls whether the
2, and filter, 3, to the hydraulic pump, 4. The hydraulic PTO system clutch is engaged or disengaged, as
pump pressurizes the fluid and then is pumped determined by the position of the PTO control lever.
through a hydraulic line, 5, to the PTO diverter valve,
31-9
2 1
8
HYDRAULIC FLUID
7
PTO DIVERTER VALVE
HYDRAULIC PUMP
SUCTION FILTER 6
5 4
HYDRAULIC FLUID
RESERVOIR
20000372
7
When the PTO control lever is set to the engage clutch assembly, to the PTO countershaft, 7. When
position, the hydraulic fluid flows into the PTO clutch hydraulic fluid pressure exceeds the relief pressure
control valve, 1, through the valve spool, 2, and the clutch control valve is set for, the relief valve, 8,
clutch piston fluid supply tube, 3. The hydraulic fluid opens and hydraulic fluid flows through the clutch
pushes against the clutch piston, 4, which in turn lubrication tube, 9, to the clutch assembly. The fluid
presses the clutch discs, 5, together. Power is then then exits the clutch and returns to the hydraulic fluid
transferred from the PTO input shaft, 6, through the reservoir.
31-10
2 1
PTO DIVERTER VALVE
HYDRAULIC PUMP
SUCTION FILTER
HYDRAULIC FLUID 4
RESERVOIR
20000373
8
When the PTO control lever is set to the disengage clutch piston, 4, any hydraulic fluid remaining in the
position, the hydraulic fluid flows into the PTO clutch clutch piston is pushed back through the clutch
control valve, 1, through the valve spool, 2, and piston supply tube, 5, to the clutch control valve
directly to the clutch lubrication tube, 3. Hydraulic spool, 2. The valve spool then diverts the hydraulic
fluid flows through the tube and into the clutch fluid back into the hydraulic fluid reservoir through a
assembly, lubricating the clutch components. Since clutch bleed back port, 6, in the valve body.
there is no hydraulic pressure being supplied to the
31-11
TROUBLESHOOTING
1. Cannot rotate the PTO shaft with PTO control lever at “ON” position
Is the PTO control lever in NO

“ON” position with mid PTO Move to “ON” position
model?
YES
Check the relief valve

pressure.
Is the relief valve pressure as

specified with the PTO NO YES 1. Is the PTO clutch piston
Could the relief valve pressure
control lever at “ON” be adjusted? sticking?
position?
2. Are the clutch discs and/or
separator plates worn?
• 14 bar (200 PSI) at the
engine speed 2600 rpm
on Model TC35 YES
• 18 bar (260 PSI) at the
engine speed 2600 rpm 1. Repair or replace the
on Model TC40 and piston.
TC45.
2. Replace the clutch discs
and separator plates as a
set.
NO
1. Suction of air in the 1. Check suction tubes and

system O rings from pump to
YES reservoir.
2. Defective hydraulic pump. 2. Replace the hydraulic

pump.
3. The hydraulic fluid filter 3. Replace the hydraulic fluid

(canister) is clogged. filter (canister).
4. The relief valve is stuck or 4. Repair or replace the relief

worn. valve and clutch control
valve assembly.
5. The relief valve spring is 5. Replace the relief valve

damaged. spring or PTO clutch
control valve assembly.
6. Defective PTO diverter 6. Repair or replace the PTO

valve. diverter valve.
7. Defective seal rings on the 7. Replace the PTO clutch

PTO clutch assembly or O seal rings or hydraulic
rings on the hydraulic fluid tube O rings.
transport tubes.
31-12
PRESSURE TESTING
The hydraulic operating pressure of the PTO clutch
is set by the relief valve adjustment, which is located
on the PTO clutch control valve. If the relief pressure
is set too low, the PTO clutch will not engage
completely causing the clutch discs to slip. This will
cause premature wear of the clutch discs and
separator plates. If the relief pressure is set to high,
the PTO clutch components may be damaged from
the excess pressure.
Test Procedure
1. Remove the seat and seat brackets from the
tractor.
2. On deluxe model tractors, drive out the roll pin,

1, which secures the flow control valve linkage,
2, to flow control valve.
2
1
19998697
9
3. Remove the 6mm hex head plug, 1, from the
PTO clutch control valve, 2. Using special tool # 2
CNH299008, install a 0 - 60 bar (0 - 600 PSI)
pressure gauge and line into this port. 1
4. Start the engine and operate the hydraulic

system to warm the hydraulic fluid to operating
temperature.
5. Set the engine rpm to full throttle (2600 rpm).
30000424
10
6. Observe the reading on the pressure gauge. The
pressure indication should be:
Model Pressure Reading

TC35, TC35D 14 ± 1 bar
(200 ± 15 PSI)
TC40, TC40D, 18 ± 1 bar
TC45, TC45D (260 ± 15 PSI)
30000425
11
31-13
7. If required, shut the tractor off and adjust the

relief pressure by removing the 24 mm acorn nut
on the clutch control relief valve and turning the
relief pressure set screw, 1. One-quarter turn
clockwise or counter-clockwise will raise or lower
the pressure by approximately 7 bar (100 PSI).
1
30000424
12
31-14
Op. 31 104 82
OVERHAUL
PTO SYSTEM DIVERTER VALVE ASSEMBLY
4 5
Removal 3 2
1. Disconnect the relief valve to sump return line, 1,
at the valve body fitting.
2. Remove the bolts securing the pump pressure

line, 2, and the control valve pressure line, 3, at
the valve assembly.
3. Remove the PTO system hydraulic line, 4, at the

PTO diverter valve body fitting, 5.
1
10998381
13
4. Remove the bolt, 1, securing the valve assembly
to the tractor. Cap and plug all openings. 1
10996435
14
Disassembly
2
1. Separate the PTO diverter valve body, 1, from 1
the relief/diverter valve assembly, 2, by removing
the three retaining bolts, 3, securing the two
valve assemblies together.
10998804
15
31-15
2. Remove the diverter valve plugs, 5 and 6, with

the O rings, 4. 5 1
3. Remove the diverter spool, 2, and spring, 3, from
the valve body, 1.
2
Inspection 4 3
6
1. Clean and inspect the diverter valve spool and
valve body bore for excess wear or score marks.
2. Inspect the spring for wear or damage.
3. Replace the PTO diverter valve as an assembly 4

20000435
if found to be damaged.
16
1. PTO Diverter Valve Body
2. Valve Spool
3. Spring
4. O ring
5. Plug
6. Plug
Assembly
5 1
1. Using a new O ring, 4, install plug, 5, in one end
of the valve body, 1.
2. Install the spool, 2, and spring, 3, into the valve

body. 2
4 3
3. Using a new O ring, 4, install plug, 6, into the
6
open end of the diverter valve.
4
20000435
17
4. Using a new O ring, 4, between the PTO diverter
valve body, 1, and the diverter/relief valve body, 2
2, secure the valves together using the three 1
bolts, 3. 4 3
3
10998805
18
31-16
Installation
1. Install new O rings on the pump pressure line and 1
the pressure line to control valve.
2. Install the bolt, 1, which secures the valve

assembly to the tractor. Do not tighten the bolt at
this time.
10996435
19
3. Install the PTO system supply line, 4, and the
sump return line, 1. Do not tighten fittings at this 4 5
time.
3 2
4. Install the bolts and nut securing the pump
pressure line, 2, and the control valve pressure
line, 3, to the valve assembly.
5. Tighten all loose bolts and fittings to torque

specifications listed in the back of this section.
1
10998381
20
31-17
Op. 31 104 82
PTO CLUTCH CONTROL VALVE
Removal
1. On deluxe and economy model tractors, remove
the seat and seat brackets.
2. On deluxe model tractors, separate the flow 2

control valve linkage, 1, from the lift cover by
using a hammer and suitable punch to remove
1
the roll pin, 2.
19998697
21
3. Disconnect the PTO system hydraulic line, 1,
from the clutch control valve, 2. 6
4. Using a hammer and suitable punch, remove the
roll pin, 3, that secures the PTO control lever
linkage, 4, to the clutch control valve, 2.
5. Remove the three bolts, 5, that secure the clutch

control valve, 2, to the tractor differential, 6. 5
1
4
2
5
3
30000350
22
NOTE: When removing the clutch control valve, the
hydraulic fluid transport tubes may be removed with 1 1
the valve. The O rings, 1, used on the tubes, 2, will
need to be replaced before installing the valve back
onto the differential housing.
2 2
6. Remove the clutch control valve from the

differential.
30000362
23
31-18
3
4
5
2 4
1 13
12
11
10
9
8
14 7
6
20000436
24
1. Valve Body 8. Jam Nut
2. E-Clip 9. Copper Gasket
3. Valve Spool 10. Relief Pressure Adjustment Screw
4. O Ring 11. Relief Spring
5. E-Clip 12. Relief Poppet
6. Acorn Nut 13. Poppet Seat
7. Dust Washer 14. Relief Valve Assembly
Spool Removal
1. Remove the E-clip, 2, securing the valve spool,
3, in the valve body, 1.
2. Using a brass drift, gently tap the valve spool, 3,

out of the valve body, 1.
3. Remove the E-clip, 5, from the valve spool, 3.
Inspection
1. Remove and discard all O rings.
2. Clean and inspect the valve spool and the spool

bore for pitting, scratches, or excess wear. If
found to be defective, replace the clutch control
valve assembly.
Assembly
1. Sparingly lubricate new O rings, 4, with
petroleum jelly and install them onto the valve
spool, 3.
31-19
3
2
1
3
4
30000364
30000370
25
NOTE: The valve spool must be installed with clutch
bleed back recess, 4, towards the bottom of the valve CAUTION
spool bore or the PTO clutch will not operate Due to minimal diameter tolerances between the
properly. valve spool bore and the valve spool, it is
necessary to chill the valve spool in a freezer or
2. Lightly scribe the valve body and valve spool with other cooling device prior to inserting the valve
aligning lines, 3. These will be used to reference spool into spool bore. Failure to do so may result
the correct position of the valve spool if the spool in damage to the valve spool, valve body, or O
is rotated after the spool has been installed into rings.
the valve body.
3. Lubricate the spool bore with clean hydraulic 4. Install the valve spool, 1, into the valve body, 2.
fluid.
5. Install the E-clips, 2 and 5, Figure 20, onto the
valve spool.
6. Check that the spool moves freely in the spool

bore. If it does not, replace the clutch control
valve assembly.
31-20
3
4
5
2 4
1 13
12
11
10
9
8
14 7
6
20000436
26
1. Valve Body 8. Jam Nut
2. E-Clip 9. Copper Gasket
3. Valve Spool 10. Relief Pressure Adjustment Screw
4. O Ring 11. Relief Spring
5. E-Clip 12. Relief Poppet
6. Acorn Nut 13. Poppet Seat
7. Dust Washer 14. Relief Valve Assembly
Clutch Control Relief Valve Disassembly 2. Inspect the spring for any distortion, replace the
1. Remove the acorn nut, 6, and the dust washer, valve if found to be defective.
7, from the relief valve assembly, 14.
3. Discard the copper gasket, 9.
2. Loosen the relief pressure adjustment jam nut, 8,
4. Inspect the dust washer, 7, for deterioration.
and remove the relief pressure adjustment
Replace as needed.
screw, 10, from the valve body, 1.
3. Remove the copper gasket, 9, from the valve

Assembly
body, 1.
1. Install the poppet seat, 13, into the valve body, 1,
4. Remove the relief spring, 11, and relief poppet, using a large screwdriver.
12, from the valve body, 1.
2. Install the relief valve poppet, 12, and spring , 11,
5. Using a large screwdriver, carefully remove the into the valve body, 1.
poppet seat, 13, from the valve body, 1.
3. Screw the relief pressure adjustment screw, 9,
into the valve body, 1.
Inspection
4. Install the new copper gasket, 9, and install the
1. Clean and inspect the relief poppet, the poppet
jam nut, 8, onto the pressure adjustment screw,
seat, and the relief valve bore for scratches,
10.
pitting, excess wear, or other damage. If any
damage is found, replace the clutch control 5. Install the dust washer, 7, and the acorn nut, 6.
valve.
31-21
Installation
1. Discard and replace all O rings, 1, which seal the
clutch control valve to the differential housing.
1
1
30000362
27
2. Install the control valve onto the differential
housing. Install the three bolts, 5, that secure the 6
control valve, 2, to the differential housing, 6. Do
not tighten at this time.
3. Connect the PTO system hydraulic line, 1, to the

clutch control valve, 2.
4. Align the scribe marks previously made on the 5

valve body and spool. Connect the PTO control
lever linkage, 4, and drive the roll pin, 3, back into
the linkage and spool.
5. Tighten the bolts, 5, which secure the valve, 2, to 1

the differential housing, 6. Torque bolts to 4
specifications listed in the rear of this section. 2
5
6. Reference the PTO pressure testing chapter in
this section and adjust the PTO clutch control 3
relief valve according to specifications.
30000350
7. Install the seat brackets and seat back onto the 28
tractor.
31-22
Op. 31 114 62
PTO CLUTCH ASSEMBLY

2
Removal
1. Separate the rear differential housing from the
1
transmission. Refer to Section 27, “Rear Axle”.
2. Remove the 12 bolts, 1, that secure the PTO

clutch cover, 2, to the rear differential housing, 3,
and lift the cover off.
3
30000365
29
3. Remove the hydraulic transport tubes, 1, from
the hydraulic fluid distribution block, 2, of the 1
clutch assembly, 3.
3
2
30000389
30
NOTE: On tractors equipped with a mid PTO, the mid
PTO detent spring, 1, is located between the lift cover
assembly and the rear differential housing. When
removing the lift cover make sure that the spring
does not fall into the rear differential or is lost.
NOTE: Rear axle and brake assemblies have been

removed for photograph.
2
4. Remove the 16 nuts and bolts securing the lift

cover, 2, to the rear differential housing, 3. Using 1
a suitable lifting device, lift the lift cover off of the
rear differential housing.
20000366
31
31-23
5. Remove the rear PTO countershaft bearing seal,

1, from the rear differential housing, 2.
1
30000385
32
6. Remove the snap ring, 1, that secures the PTO
countershaft bearing, 2, in the rear differential 2 1
housing, 3.
30000356
33
7. For tractors equipped with mid PTO, remove the
snap ring, 1, that retains the gear coupler, 2, on
the PTO countershaft, 3. 2
1
30000399
3
34
31-24
8. Insert a suitable brass or aluminum drift, 1,

through the front of the PTO clutch input shaft, 2,
and use a hammer to drive the PTO countershaft
out of the PTO clutch assembly, 3.
3
1
30000357
35
9. Slide the PTO countershaft, 1, towards the rear
of the differential housing, so that it is completely
free from the clutch assembly, 2.
2
1
30000431
36
10. Remove the two bolts, 1, securing the PTO clutch
brake stopping plate, 2, to the differential 2
housing, 3.
3
30000359
37
31-25
11. Remove the two bolts, 1, retaining each side of

the clutch assembly, 2, to the inside of the 2 3
30000360
38
12. Slide the PTO clutch, 1, rearward in the
differential housing and lift the clutch assembly 1
out of the rear differential housing, 2. 2
30000361
39
Op. 31 114 68
Disassembly
1. Prior to disassembly, use a feeler gauge to check
the air gap between the clutch backing plate and
the snap ring that retains the clutch pack in place.
Compare with specifications listed in the back of
this section.
30000390
40
31-26
WARNING
Special tool # CNH299009 must be used to
2
compress the piston spring and backing washer,
otherwise bodily injure may occur when
removing the snap ring.
2. Place the clutch assembly in a hydraulic press;

apply pressure to the spring backing washer, 1, 3
and piston spring using special tool, 2. (Tool # 1
CNH299009) While pressure is being applied to
the washer and spring, remove the snap ring, 3
from the clutch housing. Slowly relieve pressure
30000374
from the backing washer and spring.
41
3. Remove the snap ring, 1, retaining the clutch
pack and piston, 2, in the PTO clutch housing, 3.
Slide the clutch pack and piston off of the clutch
housing.
3
30000375
42
4. Remove the snap ring, 1, which secures the
1
hydraulic fluid distribution block, 2 to the PTO
clutch housing, 3, and slide the block off of the
clutch housing.
30000376
43
31-27
5. Remove the snap ring, 1, retaining the brake disc

and brake pressure plates, 2, to the clutch
housing, 3. 3
1
2
30000377
44
Inspection
1. Remove and discard all O rings, 1, on each
hydraulic fluid transport tube, 2, and replace with
new O rings. 2
1 1
20000391
45
2. Remove the seal rings, 1, from the clutch
housing, 2, and inspect them for excess wear 2
and damage. Replace as needed.
30000378
46
31-28
3. Remove the seal ring, 1, from the clutch piston,

2, and inspect the ring for excess wear and
damage. Replace as needed.
2
1
30000380
47
4. Inspect each clutch disc, 1, for thickness,
damage, or excess wear. Replace if the discs are
not within specifications listed in the back of this
section.
5. Lay each clutch disc separator plate and the

clutch backing on a plate of glass or other flat 1
surface and inspect them for any warpage,
excess wear, or damage. Replace as needed.
30000382
48
6. Inspect the clutch brake disc, 1, thickness and
replace the brake disc if damaged or not within
7. Inspect the brake pressure plates for warpage,

excess wear, or damage. Replace as needed.
8. Clean and inspect the clutch housing, piston,

spring, and distribution block for excess wear or 1
damage. Replace the clutch assembly if any of
these are found to be damaged or show excess
wear.
30000381
49
31-29
Assembly
2
NOTE: Prior to assembly of the PTO clutch, soak the
clutch discs, brake disc, and seal rings in clean
hydraulic fluid for a minimum of one hour.
1. Install the seal rings, 1, onto the clutch housing,

2.
1
30000378
50
NOTE: When installing the snap ring that secures the
PTO brake components, make sure that the gap in
the snap ring is 45° from brake pressure plate 3
recesses in the clutch housing.
2. Place a brake pressure plate, 1, and brake disc,

2, onto the clutch housing, 3. Place the remaining
brake pressure plate, 1, on top of the brake disc.
Secure the plates and disc with the snap ring, 4.
4
1 2
30000377
51
3. Slide the distribution block, 2, over the clutch
1
housing, 3, and retain the block with the snap
ring, 1.
30000376
52
31-30
4. Install the seal ring, 1, onto the clutch piston, 2.
1
30000380
53
NOTE: When installing the clutch piston, the side of
the clutch piston with the seal ring is installed into the 1
clutch housing first.
5. Slide the clutch piston, 1, onto the clutch housing,

2.
30000379
54
NOTE: When installing the clutch discs and
separator plates onto the clutch housing, install the
thick backing plate last. (On top)
2
6. Install clutch separator plates, 1, and clutch
discs, 2, on top of the clutch piston. Start with a
separator plate and alternate the clutch discs
with the separator plates until all plates and discs
are installed. Install thick backing plate, 3, last.
3
20000367
55
1. Separator Plate
2. Clutch Disc
3. Backing Plate
31-31
NOTE: The snap ring that secures the clutch pack to

the clutch housing is chamfered on one inside edge.
Install this edge to the inside of the clutch assembly.
CHAMFERED
EDGE
20000368
56
NOTE: When installing the snap ring that secures the
clutch pack to the clutch housing, place the gap in the 45°
snap ring 45° from a clutch piston relief in the clutch
housing.
20000369
57
7. Install the snap ring, 1, that retains the clutch
pack and piston, 2, in the PTO clutch housing, 3.
3
30000375
58
31-32
8. Place the piston spring, 1, and backing washer,

2, onto the clutch housing. 2
30000392
59
WARNING
Special tool # CNH299009 must be used to
2
compress the piston spring and backing washer,
otherwise bodily injure may occur when
installing the snap ring.
9. Place the clutch assembly in a hydraulic press

and using special tool # CNH299009, 2, apply 3
pressure to the spring and backing washer, 1. 1
Install the snap ring, 3, that retains the spring and
washer to the clutch housing.
30000374
60
10. Use a feeler gauge to check the air gap between
the clutch backing plate and the snap ring that
retains the clutch pack in place. Compare with
30000390
61
31-33
Op. 31 114 62
Installation 1
1. Position the PTO clutch, 1, into the differential
housing and engage the clutch teeth with the
splines on the PTO input shaft, 2. Be sure that all
three clutch discs are engaged with the input 2
shaft.
30000393
62
2. Install the two bolts, 1, that secure the clutch
assembly, 2, to the inside of the differential 2 3
housing, 3.
30000360
63
3. Align the brake disc tab, 1, with the notch in the
brake disc stopping plate, 2, and install the two 2
bolts, 3, securing the plate to the differential 1
housing.
30000386
64
31-34
4. Using a hammer and suitable drift, drive the PTO

countershaft, 1, into the clutch assembly and
1
30000407
65
5. For tractors equipped with mid PTO, install the
snap ring, 1, that retains the gear coupler, 2, on
the PTO countershaft, 3. 2
1
30000399
3
66
6. Install the snap ring, 1, that secures the PTO
housing, 3.
30000356
67
31-35
7. Install a new bearing seal, 1, into the differential

housing, 2.
1
30000385
68
8. Install the hydraulic fluid transport tubes, 1, into
the hydraulic fluid distribution block, 2, of the 1
clutch assembly.
30000389
69
9. Apply a small bead of LocTite RTV silicone
gasket maker to the clutch cover, 2, and
differential housing, 3. Secure the cover to the
differential housing with the 12 bolts, 1. Tighten 2
the bolts to torque specifications listed in the
back of this chapter.
1
3
30000365
70
31-36

installing the lift cover, be sure that this spring is
installed also.
NOTE: On tractors equipped with a mid PTO, make

sure that the mid PTO arm engages the mid PTO
2
shifter rail in the differential housing when installing
the lift cover.
1
10. Apply a small bead of LocTite RTV silicone
gasket maker to the lift cover and differential
housing. Install the hydraulic lift cover onto the
differential housing. Tighten bolts to torque
20000366
71
31-37
Op. 31 114 42
POWER TAKE OFF SYSTEM OVERHAUL FOR

12X12 SYNCHRONIZED SHUTTLE SHIFT
TRANSMISSION 2
Removal 1
1. Separate the tractor between the transmission
and the rear differential housing. Refer to Section
27, “Rear Axle”.
2. Remove the 12 bolts, 1, that secure the PTO 3

clutch cover, 2, to the rear differential housing, 3,
30000365
72

cover to the rear differential housing. Using a
suitable lifting device, lift the lift cover off of the
rear differential.
PTO Input Shaft

1
Removal
1. Remove the PTO clutch from the rear differential
housing.
2. Using a suitable drift and hammer carefully drive

the PTO input shaft, 1, rearwards in the
differential housing and lift the shaft out.
30000394
73
31-38
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
20000384
74
1. Bearing Holder 5. Internal Snap Ring
2. Front Bearing 6. Input Shaft
3. Snap Ring 7. Rear Bearing
4. Bearing
3. Once the PTO input shaft assembly has been 2. Inspect all parts for excessive wear and damage.
removed, the bearing holder, 1, can be driven out Replace as needed.
the front of the differential housing from the inside
the housing. 3. Check all bearings for uneven rotation when
turned by hand.
Disassembly 4. Lubricate bearings in clean hydraulic oil before

assembly.
1. Remove the front bearing, 2, from the shaft, 6.
2. Using snap ring pliers, remove the snap ring, 3,

Assembly
from the shaft.
1. Install rear bearing, 7, in the bore of the PTO
3. Remove the large bearing, 4, from the shaft. input shaft, 6.
4. Using snap ring pliers, remove the small internal 2. Install the small internal snap ring, 5, in the bore
snap ring, 5, from the PTO input shaft bore. of the shaft.
5. Remove the rear bearing, 7, from the bore of the 3. Drive the large bearing, 4, onto the shaft.
shaft.
4. Install the snap ring, 3, onto the shaft.
Inspection 5. Drive the front bearing, 2, onto the shaft.

1. Clean all parts in a suitable solvent and allow to 6. Drive the bearing holder, 1, into the front of the
air dry. differential housing.
31-39
Installation
1. Place the PTO input shaft, 1, into the differential
housing and use a suitable drift, 2, to drive the 1 2
shaft into place.
2. Install the PTO clutch assembly.
30000406
75
Op. 31 114 46 / 31 114 19
PTO Countershaft and Rear PTO Shaft
Rear PTO Shaft Removal

1. Remove the four bolts, 1, retaining the rear PTO 1
cover, 2, and oil seal to the rear differential
housing, 3. Pry the cover off of the differential.
2
3
30000385
76
1, from the rear differential, 2.
1
30000385
77
31-40

housing, 3.
30000356
78
3
1
30000357
79
5. Slide the PTO counter shaft, 1, out the rear of the
2
30000358
80
31-41
6. Pull on the rear PTO shaft, 1, and remove the

front bearing from the shaft.
30000388
81
7. Remove the 49-tooth gear, 1, from the rear PTO
shaft, 2. Slide the shaft out the rear of the
1
30000387
82
Op. 31 114 46
3
Countershaft Disassembly
1. Remove the front PTO countershaft bearing, 1, 2
from the inside of the differential housing, 6.
1 5
2. Remove the rear bearing, 3, from the 4
countershaft, 2.
20000395
83
1. Front Bearing
2. PTO Countershaft
3. Rear Bearing
4. Snap Ring
5. Bearing Seal
6. Differential Housing
31-42
3. Remove the rear bearing, 4, from the rear PTO

shaft, 3. 6
5
4
Inspection
3
1. Remove and discard the oil seal, 5, from the PTO
shaft seal cover, 7. 2 8
1 7
2. Remove any remaining gasket, 6, from the seal
cover, 7, and the differential housing, 9.

air dry.
9
4. Inspect all parts for excessive wear and damage.
Replace as needed.
5. Check all bearings for uneven rotation when

turned by hand.
6. Lubricate bearings in clean hydraulic fluid before 20000396

assembly. 84
1. Front Bearing
2. 49-Tooth Gear
3. Rear PTO Shaft
4. Rear Bearing
5. Oil Seal
6. Gasket
7. PTO Shaft Seal Cover
8. PTO Shaft Cover
Assembly
1. Install the rear PTO shaft front bearing, 1, and the
PTO countershaft front bearing, 2, inside the
1
30000397
85
31-43
2. Drive the rear bearing, 4, onto the PTO shaft, 3.

6
3. Install a new oil seal, 5, into the PTO shaft seal 5
cover, 7. 4
3
2 8
1 7
20000396
86
1. Front Bearing
2. 49-Tooth Gear
3. Rear PTO Shaft
4. Rear Bearing
5. Oil Seal
6. Gasket
7. PTO Shaft Seal Cover
8. PTO Shaft Cover
4. Drive the PTO countershaft bearing, 3, onto

countershaft, 2. 3
2
1 5
4
20000395
87
1. Front Bearing
2. PTO Countershaft
3. Rear Bearing
4. Snap Ring
5. Bearing Seal
31-44
Installation
NOTE: When installing the 49-tooth gear onto the
rear PTO shaft, be sure that the side of the gear with
the large collar faces the front of the differential
housing. 2
1. Lower the 49-tooth gear, 1, into the differential

housing and install the gear onto the rear PTO
shaft, 2, as the shaft is being inserted into the
1
30000387
88
2. Align the rear PTO shaft, 1, into the front bearing
and using a hammer and suitable drift, drive the
PTO shaft into the front bearing.
3. Insert the PTO countershaft into the differential

housing.
30000432
89
4. Using a hammer and suitable drift, drive the PTO
countershaft, 1, into the PTO clutch and
1
30000407
90
31-45

housing, 3.
30000356
91
6. Install a new rear PTO countershaft bearing seal,
1, into the rear differential housing, 2.
1
30000385
92
7. Place a new gasket between the rear differential
housing, 3, and the PTO shaft seal cover, 2, and
install the four bolts, 1, which secure the cover to
the differential. Torque the bolts to bolt torque
8. Install the PTO clutch cover and lift cover, 1

applying LocTite RTV on the sealing surfaces.
Tighten nuts and bolts to torque specifications 2
listed in the back of this section. 3
9. Assemble the differential and transmission and
install onto the tractor.
30000385
93
31-46
POWER TAKE OFF SYSTEM OVERHAUL FOR

HYDROSTATIC TRANSMISSION (HST)
Op. 31 114 00 2
Removal
1
1. Separate the tractor between the transmission
and the rear differential housing. Refer to Section
27, “Rear Axle”.
2. Remove the 12 bolts, 1, that secure the PTO

clutch cover, 2, to the rear differential housing, 3, 3
30000365
94
removing the lift cover make sure that the spring
does not fall into the rear differential or is lost.

2

cover, 2, to the rear differential housing, 3. Using 1
a suitable lifting device, lift the lift cover off of the
rear differential.
20000366
95
Op. 31 114 42
PTO Input Shaft 1
Removal
1. Remove the PTO clutch from the rear differential
housing.
2. Using a hammer and suitable drift, carefully drive

the PTO input shaft, 1, rearwards in the
differential housing and lift the shaft out.
30000394
96
31-47
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
20000384
97
1. Bearing Holder 5. Internal Snap Ring
2. Front Bearing 6. Input Shaft
4. Bearing
3. Once the PTO input shaft assembly has been 3. Check all gears for chipped or missing teeth.
removed, the bearing holder, 1, can be driven out Replace as needed.
the front of the differential housing from the inside
the housing. 4. Check all bearings for uneven rotation when
turned by hand.
Disassembly 5. Lubricate bearings in clean hydraulic oil before

1. Remove the front bearing, 2, from the shaft, 6. assembly.

from the shaft. Assembly
3. Remove the large bearing, 4, from the shaft. 1. Install the rear bearing, 7, in the bore of the PTO
input shaft, 6.
4. Using snap ring pliers, remove the small internal
snap ring, 5, from the PTO input shaft bore. 2. Install the small internal snap ring, 5, in the bore
of the shaft.
5. Remove the rear bearing, 7, from the bore of the
shaft. 3. Drive the large bearing, 4, onto the shaft.
4. Install the snap ring, 3, onto the shaft.

Inspection
1. Clean all parts in a suitable solvent and allow to 5. Drive the front bearing, 2, onto the shaft.
air dry. 6. Drive the bearing holder, 1, into the front of the
2. Inspect all parts for excessive wear and damage. differential housing.
Replace as needed.
31-48
Installation
1. Place the PTO input shaft, 1, into the differential
housing and use a suitable drift, 2, to drive the 1 2
shaft into place.
2. Install the PTO clutch assembly.
30000406
98
Op. 31 114 46 / 31 114 19
PTO Countershaft and Rear PTO Shaft
Removal
1. Remove the four bolts, 1, retaining the rear PTO 1
cover, 2, and oil seal to the rear differential
housing, 3. Pry the cover off of the differential.
2
3
30000385
99
1, from the rear differential, 2.
1
30000385
100
31-49

housing, 3.
30000356
101
4. Using a magnet, remove the detent ball, 1, for the
mid PTO shifter rail.
30000434
102
5. Using a hammer and suitable punch, drive the
roll pin, 1, that secures the mid PTO engagement 1 3
2
fork, 2, to the mid PTO shifter rail, 3. Remove the
fork and rail from the differential.
30000398
103
31-50
6. Remove the snap ring, 1, that retains the gear

coupler, 2, to the PTO countershaft, 3.
2
1
30000399
3
104
3
1
30000357
105
8. While holding the snap ring, 1, and the gear
coupler, 2, slide the PTO countershaft, 3, out the
back of the differential housing.
3
1
2
30000400
106
31-51
9. Use a hammer and suitable punch to drive out

the roll pin, 1, that secures the rear PTO 2 1
engagement fork, 2, to the rear PTO shifter rail,
3. Remove the fork from the rail, but do not
remove the rail from the differential housing.
30000401
107
that retains the 39-tooth gear, 2, on the rear PTO 2
shaft, 3.
1
30000402
108
11. Lift the 49-tooth gear, 1, gear coupler, 2, snap
ring, 3, and the 39-tooth gear, 4, out the top of the
differential housing as the rear PTO shaft, 5, is
being removed from the back of the differential
housing.
5
4 3 2 1
30000403
109
31-52
Op. 31 114 42
Disassembly
1. Remove the front PTO countershaft bearing, 1,
and the front PTO shaft bearing, 2, from the
inside of the differential housing.
1
2
30000397
110
2. Remove the rear bearing, 8, from the PTO
countershaft, 3. 7
6
3. Remove the thrust washer, 7, from the 5
4
countershaft, 3.
3
4. Remove the 21-tooth gear, 6, and the needle 2 10
bearings, 5, from the PTO countershaft, 3. 1 9
8
11
20000404
111
1. Front Bearing
2. Snap Ring
3. PTO Countershaft
4. Gear Coupler
5. Needle Bearing
6. 21-Tooth Gear
7. Thrust Washer
8. Rear Bearing
9. Snap Ring
10. Bearing Seal
31-53
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
12
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
20000405
13
112
1. Front Bearing 11. 39-Tooth Gear
2. Bearing 12. Differential Housing
3. Snap Ring 13. Snap Ring
4. Shaft Collar 14. Bearing
5. 49-Tooth gear 15. Rear PTO Shaft
7. Bearing 17. Oil Seal
8. Gear Coupler 18. Gasket
9. Snap Ring 19. PTO Shaft Seal Cover
10. Bearing 20. PTO Shaft Cover
31-54
5. Remove the bearings, 2 and 7, from the 49-tooth 3. Check all gears for chipped or missing teeth.
gear, 5. Replace as needed
6. Remove the snap rings, 3 and 6, from the 4. Check all bearings for uneven rotation when
49-tooth gear, 5. turned by hand.
7. Remove the shaft collar, 4, from the 49-tooth 5. Lubricate bearings in clean hydraulic oil before
gear, 5. assembly.
8. Remove bearing, 16, from the rear PTO shaft,

15. Assembly
1. Install the snap ring, 13, into the 39-tooth gear,
9. Remove the bearings, 10 and14, from the
11.
39-tooth gear, 11.
2. Install the bearings, 10 and 14, into the 39-tooth
10. Remove the snap ring, 13, from the 39-tooth
gear, 11.
gear, 11.
3. Place the shaft collar, 4, inside the 49-tooth gear,
5, and install the snap rings, 3 and 6, into the
Inspection
gear, 5.
air dry. 4. Install the bearings, 2 and 7, into the 49-tooth
gear, 5.
Replace as needed. 5. Install bearing, 16, onto the rear PTO shaft, 15.
31-55
6. Install the front PTO counter shaft bearing, 1, and

the front PTO shaft bearing, 2, into the differential
housing.
2
30000397
113
NOTE: When assembling the PTO countershaft, 3,
the 21-tooth gear, 6, is installed onto the shaft so the 7
small engaging teeth face forward when the shaft is 6
5
installed into the differential housing. 4
3
7. Install the needle bearings, 5, onto the PTO 2 10
countershaft, 3. 1 9
8
8. Install the 21-tooth gear, 6, onto the PTO
countershaft, 3.
NOTE: When installing the thrust washer, be sure

that the grooves in the washer are facing towards the
21-tooth gear.
11
9. Install the thrust washer, 7, onto the countershaft,
3.
10. Install the rear bearing, 8, onto the countershaft,

3. 20000404
114
1. Front Bearing
2. Snap Ring
3. PTO Countershaft
4. Gear Coupler
5. Needle Bearing
6. 21-Tooth Gear
7. Thrust Washer
8. Rear Bearing
9. Snap Ring
10. Bearing Seal
31-56
Op. 31 114 19
Installation
NOTE: When installing the 39-tooth gear, 4, onto the
rear PTO shaft, 5, be sure that the side of the gear
with the protruding bearing is facing the rear of the
NOTE: When installing the gear coupler, 2, and the

49-tooth gear, 1, be sure they are installed so that
they engage each other.
5
1. Lower the 39-tooth gear, 4, the snap ring, 3, that 4 3 2 1
30000403
retains it, the gear coupler, 2, and the 49-tooth
gear, 1, into the differential housing and install 115
them onto the rear PTO shaft, 5, as it is being
inserted into the rear of the differential housing.
2. Align the rear PTO shaft with the front bearing
and use a suitable drift and hammer to tap the
rear PTO shaft, 1, into the differential housing.
30000432
116
3. Use snap ring pliers to install the snap ring, 1, that
retains the 39-tooth gear, 2, onto the rear PTO 2
shaft, 3.
1
30000402
117
31-57
NOTE: When installing the fork, 1, onto the PTO

shifter rail, 2, be sure that the fork is placed in the 1 4
groove on the gear coupler, 3.
4. Place the rear PTO fork, 1, onto the PTO shifter

rail, 2, and use a hammer and a suitable punch
to drive in the roll pin, 4, that secures the fork to 2
the rail.
3
30000401
118
NOTE: When installing the gear coupler onto the
PTO countershaft, make sure that the side of the
coupler with the chamfered internal splines faces
rearward in the differential case.
3
5. Place the gear coupler, 2, and the snap ring, 1, 1
onto the PTO countershaft, 3, while installing the
PTO countershaft into the rear of the differential
housing.
2
30000400
119
6. Align the splines on the end of the PTO
countershaft with the PTO clutch splines and
using a hammer and suitable drift, drive the PTO
countershaft, 1, into the PTO clutch and
1
30000407
120
31-58
7. Install the snap ring, 1, that secures the sliding

gear coupler, 2, onto the PTO countershaft, 3.
2
1
30000399
3
121
NOTE: When installing the shifter rail, 3, be sure that
the detents in the rail face up and front in the 1 3
2
NOTE: When installing the mid PTO shifter fork, 2,

onto the mid PTO shifter rail, 3, be sure that the fork
engages the sliding gear coupler, 4.
8. Install the mid PTO shifter rail, 3, into the

differential housing and place the shifter fork, 2,
onto the rail.
4
9. Use a hammer and suitable punch to install the
30000398
roll pin, 1, that secures the shifter fork, 2, to the
shifter rail, 3. 122

housing, 3.
30000356
123
31-59
11. Install a new rear PTO countershaft bearing seal,

1, into the rear differential housing, 2.
1
30000385
124
12. Place a new gasket between the rear differential
housing, 3, and the PTO shaft seal cover, 2, and
install the four bolts, 1, which secure the cover to
the differential. Torque the bolts to bolt torque
13. Assemble the differential and transmission and 1

install onto the tractor. Refer to Section 27, “Rear
Axle”. 2
3
30000385
125
Op. 31 120 00
Mid PTO Countershaft and Drop Box Overhaul

4 3 2 5
Removal
1. Remove the left and right axle and brake
assemblies from the differential housing. Refer to
Section 27, “Rear Axle”.
2. Remove the differential lock tension spring, 1,

from the fork, 2, and roll pin, 3.
1
3. Use a hammer and punch to drive the internal roll
pin, 3, out of the differential lock rail, 5. 30000408
126
4. Use a hammer and Punch to drive the outer roll
pins, 4, out of the differential lock rail, 5.
31-60
5. Remove the differential lock rail, 1, fork, 2, and

differential lock return spring, 3, from the
differential housing. 2
3
6. Remove the PTO countershaft and rear PTO
shaft.
1
30000409
127
WARNING
When removing the rear PTO shifter rail from the
differential housing, the detent ball is under 1
pressure and could be expelled from the
differential housing with great force. Always
wear eye protection when working.
NOTE: Use a rag to catch the detent ball and spring

when removing shifter rail.
7. Remove the rear PTO shifter rail, 1, from the

differential housing. 30000428
128
8. Remove the differential and ring from the
differential housing. Refer to Section 27 “Rear
Axle”.
30000411
129
31-61
9. Remove the seal, 1, for the upper mid PTO

countershaft from the differential housing.
30000410
130
10. Remove the snap ring, 1, which retains the upper
mid PTO countershaft bearing, 2, in the
2
1
30000412
131
11. Remove the front bearing, 1, and the 25-tooth
gear, 2, from the upper mid PTO countershaft, 3.
Slide the mid PTO countershaft, 3, out the rear of
2 1
30000413
132
31-62
12. Remove the 6 bolts, 1, that secure the mid PTO

drop box, 2, to the differential housing. Remove
the drop box from the housing.
2 1
30000414
133
13. Remove the 7 bolts, 1, that secure the four-wheel
drive drop box, 2, to the differential housing.
Remove the drop box from the housing.
30000415
2
134
14. Remove the seal, 1, for the lower mid PTO
countershaft from the differential housing.
30000416
135
31-63
15. Remove the snap ring, 1, which retains the lower

mid PTO countershaft bearing, 2, in the
2
30000417
136
16. Use a hammer and drift to drive the lower mid
PTO countershaft, 1, out of the differential case.
Remove the collar, 2, 33-tooth gear, 3, and the
rear bearing from the differential housing.
2
1
30000418
137
31-64
10
9
8
6
5
2
4
3
13
12
11
20000419
138
1. Mid PTO Shaft Cover 8. Rear Bearing
2. Locating Pin 9. Snap Ring
3. Oil Seal 10. Bearing Seal
4. Front Bearing 11. Mid PTO Drop Box Housing
5. 31-Tooth Gear 12. Washer
6. Mid PTO Shaft 13. Drain Plug
7. Shaft Collar
Disassembly 4. Remove the rear bearing, 8, from the mid PTO

1. Remove the rear seal cover, 10, from the mid shaft, 6.
PTO drop box housing, 11.
5. Remove the 31-tooth gear, 5, front bearing, 4,
2. Remove the snap ring, 9, which retains the rear and PTO shaft collar, 7, from the drop box
bearing, 8, in the drop box housing. housing, 11.
3. Use a hammer and suitable drift to drive the mid

PTO shaft, 6, out the rear of the PTO drop box.
31-65
6. Remove the front bearing, 1, from the lower mid

PTO countershaft, 2.
2
1
20000420
139
7. Remove the rear bearing, 5, and the 21-tooth
gear, 4, from the upper mid PTO countershaft, 3.
7
6
5
4
3
2
20000421
1
140
1. Front Bearing 5. Rear Bearing
2. 25-Tooth Gear 6. Snap Ring
3. Upper Mid PTO 7. Bearing Cover
Countershaft 8. Differential Housing
4. 21-Tooth Gear
31-66
Inspection
1. Remove and discard oil seal, 1, from the mid
PTO drop box housing, 2. 1
2
2. Remove and discard the O ring on differential
lock rail.
20000419
141
3. Remove and discard the differential lock oil seal,
1, from the differential case.
4. Check detent spring and ball for damage.

air dry.

Replace as needed.
1
7. Check all gears for chipped or missing teeth.
Replace as needed
8. Check all bearings for uneven rotation when 30000433

turned by hand. 142
9. Lubricate bearings in clean hydraulic oil before
assembly.
31-67
10
9
8
6
5
2
4
3
13
12
11
20000419
143
1. Mid PTO Shaft Cover 8. Rear Bearing
2. Locating Pin 9. Snap Ring
3. Oil Seal 10. Bearing Seal
4. Front Bearing 11. Mid PTO Drop Box Housing
5. 31-Tooth Gear 12. Washer
6. Mid PTO Shaft 13. Drain Plug
7. Shaft Collar
Assembly 11. Slide the mid PTO shaft through the back of
1. Drive the rear bearing, 8, onto the mid PTO shaft, the drop box housing, 11, through the shaft collar,
6. 7, and through the 31-tooth gear, 5, and into the
front bearing, 4.
2. Drive a new oil seal, 3, into the mid PTO drop box
housing, 11. 4. Using a hammer and drift, drive the mid PTO
shaft, 6, into the drop box housing and front
NOTE: When installing the 31-tooth gear into the bearing.
drop box housing, be sure that the side of the gear
with the groove and lip faces front in the housing. 5. Install the snap ring, 9, into the drop box housing,
11.
3. Place the front bearing, 4, the 31-tooth gear, 5, 6. Install a new bearing seal, 10, into the drop box
and the shaft collar, 7, into the drop box housing, housing, 11.
31-68
Installation
1. Drive the front bearing, 3, onto the lower mid PTO
countershaft, 4.
2. Place the rear bearing, 7, into the differential

housing, 8.
NOTE: When placing the 33-tooth gear into the 8

differential housing, be sure the side of the gear with
the lip is facing to the front of the differential housing.
3. Lower the 33-tooth gear, 5, and the shaft collar,

6, into the differential housing, 8. Place them onto
the mid PTO countershaft, 4, as it is being 7
installed through the front of the differential 6
housing, 8 and into the rear bearing, 7. 5
4
3
2
20000420 1
144
1. Bearing Seal 5. 33-Tooth Gear
2. Snap Ring 6. Shaft Collar
4. Lower Mid PTO 8. Differential Housing
Countershaft
4. Use a hammer and drift to drive the lower mid

PTO countershaft, 1, into the differential housing.
30000429
145
5. Install the snap ring, 1, which retains the front
countershaft bearing, 2, in the differential
housing.
2
30000417
146
31-69
6. Install a new bearing seal, 1, into the differential

housing.
30000416
147
NOTE: When installing the four-wheel drive drop
box, be sure that the arm that engages the 4 wheel
drive is aligned with the engagement fork in the drop
box.
NOTE: When installing the four-wheel drive drop box

and mid PTO drop box onto the differential housing 1
use LocTite Black RTV between the differential
housing and the drop box. Use LocTite Thread
Sealant 567 on the securing bolts.
1
7. Install the four-wheel drive drop box, 2, onto the
differential housing and secure the drop box with 30000415
2
the 7 bolts, 1. Tighten bolts to torque
148
8. Install the mid PTO drop box, 2, onto the

differential housing and secure the drop box with
the six bolts, 1. Tighten the bolts to torque
specifications listed I the back of this section
2 1
30000414
149
31-70
9. Place the front bearing, 1, for the upper mid PTO

countershaft, 3, inside the differential housing, 8.
10. Place the 21-tooth gear, 4, onto the upper mid

PTO countershaft, 3, and drive the rear bearing,
5, onto the mid PTO shaft, 3.
NOTE: When installing the 25-tooth gear onto the 8

mid PTO countershaft, be sure that the side of the
gear with the lip on it is facing to the front of the
11. While installing the mid PTO countershaft, 3, 7

through the rear of the differential housing, 8, 6
place the 25-tooth gear, 2, onto the countershaft. 5
4
3
2
20000421
1
150
2. 25-Tooth Gear 6. Snap Ring
3. Upper Mid PTO 7. Bearing Cover
Countershaft 8. Differential Housing
4. 21-Tooth Gear
12. Align the upper mid PTO countershaft with the

front bearing and use a hammer and drift to drive
the upper mid PTO countershaft, 1, into the front
bearing and differential housing.
1
30000430
151
13. Install the snap ring, 1, which secures the rear
bearing, 2, for the upper mid PTO countershaft in
2
1
30000412
152
31-71
14. Install a new bearing seal, 1, for the upper mid

PTO countershaft into the rear of the differential
housing.
30000410
153
15. Install the differential and ring gear into the
differential housing. Refer to Section 27, “Rear
Axle”.
16. Install the rear PTO shaft into the differential

housing.
30000411
154
WARNING
When installing the rear PTO detent ball and
spring into the differential housing, use caution,
as the ball and spring are under significant 1
pressure and may be expelled with force. Always
wear safety glasses.
NOTE: When installing the rear PTO shifter rail in the

differential housing, be sure that the ball detents in
the rail are facing towards the bottom of the
2
differential housing and the rear PTO engagement
arm, 1, is in the recess on the shifter rail, 2.
30000426
155
31-72
17. Place the detent spring in the differential

housing. Using a detent ball tool, 1, 1
(#FNH00081) install the rear PTO detent ball and
rear PTO shifter rail, 2, into the differential 2
housing.
18. Install the PTO countershaft into the differential

housing.
30000427
156
19. Install a new differential lock oil seal, 1, in the
30000433
157
31-73
NOTE: When installing the differential lock fork, 3, be

sure the fork is placed in the groove of the differential
lock clutch, 6. 3
4
20. Install a new O ring, 1, on the differential lock rail,
2. Slide the differential lock fork, 3, onto the rail
as the rail is being inserted into the differential 2
housing. 1
21. Install the differential lock return spring, 4, onto

the differential lock rail, 2, as the rail is being
inserted into the differential housing.
30000409
158
22. Have an assistant compress the differential lock
return spring, 1, to provide access to drive the
internal roll pin, 2, into the differential lock rail, 3.
4 2 6 3
23. Have an assistant push the differential lock rail,
3, into the differential case to provide access to
drive the outer roll pins, 4, into the rail.
24. Install the differential lock tension spring, 5, onto

the roll pin, 2, and differential lock fork, 6.
25. Install the left and right axle assemblies onto the
differential housing. Refer to Section 27, “Rear 1
5
Axle”. 30000408
26. Install the PTO clutch cover and lift cover, 159
applying LocTite RTV on the sealing surfaces.
Tighten nuts and bolts to torque specifications
listed in the back of this section.
27. Install the differential to the transmission and

then install assembly onto tractor. Refer to
Section 27, “Rear Axle”.
31-74
SECTION 33 - BRAKES
Chapter 1 -- Brakes
CONTENTS

33 000 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-2
33 120 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-4
31 120 Brake Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-5
33 110 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-6
33 120 Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-7
Brake Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-12
33-1
SECTION 33 - BRAKES
SPECIFICATIONS
BRAKE DISCS
No. of Brake Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Disc ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6 in. (143 mm)
Disc OD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9 in. (175 mm)
Total Brake Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.8 sq. in.
Total Brake Disc Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 in. (4 mm)
Standard Lining Groove Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .008 in. (0.2 mm)
Allowable Limit (Minimal Groove Depth) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .002 in. (0.05 mm)
STATORS
No. of Stators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Stator Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 in. (3.2 mm)
Level Difference-Allowable Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .004 in. (0.1 mm)
Clearance of Pedal Shaft and Bushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .002-.014 in. (0.05-0.35 mm)
Allowable Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .039 in. (1.0 mm)
Brake Pedal Free-Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.38-1.77 in. (35-45 mm)
33-2
SECTION 33 - BRAKES

4T, 4 3.6--5.8 4.9--7.9
M6 7T, 7 1.0 5.9--9.4 7.9--12.7 ------------ ------------ ------------
8T, 8, 11 7.2--10 9.8--13.6
4T 7.2--14 9.8--19 12--17 16.3--23
M8 7T 1.25 17--22 23--29.8 1.0 19--27 25.7--36.6
8T 20--26 27.1--35.2 22--31 29.8--42
4T 20--25 27.1--33.9 20--29 27.1--39.3
M10 7T 1.5 34--40 46.1--54.2 1.25 35--47 47.4--63.7
8T 38--46 51.5--62.3 40--52 54.2--70.5
4T 28--34 37.9--46.1 31--41 42--55.6
M12 7T 1.75 51--59 69.1--79.9 1.25 56--68 75.9--92.1
8t 57--66 77.2--89.4 62--75 84--101.6
4T 49--56 66.475.9 52--64 70.5--86.7
M14 7T 2.0 81--93 109.8--126 1.5 90--106 122--143.6
8T 96--109 130.1--147.7 107--124 145--168
4T 67--77 90.8--104.3 69--83 93.5--112.5
M16 7T 2.0 116--130 157.2--176.2 1.5 120--138 162.6--187
8T 129--145 174.8--196.5 140--158 189.7--214.1
4T 88--100 119.2--136 100--117 136--158.5
M18 7T 2.0 150--168 203.3--227.6 1.5 177--199 239.8--269.6
8T 175--194 237.1--262.9 202--231 273.7--313
4T 108--130 146.3--176.2 132--150 178.9--203.3
M20 7T 2.5 186--205 252--277.8 1.5 206--242 279.1--327.9
8T 213--249 288.6--337.4 246--289 333.3--391.6
33-3
SECTION 33 - BRAKES
Op. 33 120
BRAKES
The rear axle used on the TC 35, 35D, 40, 40D, 45,
and 45D, is a double reduction type, consisting of a
conventional ring gear and pinion for primary
reduction, and a final drive pinion and gear for
secondary reduction.
The axle housing, 1, encloses the brake discs and
stators, 2. The rear axle and differential components
are lubricated by the common hydraulic oil reservoir.
The brakes are a mechanically actuated, wet disc 2 1

type. The brakes are located outside of the
differential housing and are enclosed in the front
portion of the axle housing. The brake housing cover
seals the brakes from contaminants and moisture.
20000933
1
The brake discs, 1, are splined to the final drive pinion
shaft, 2, and turn at the same speed as the differential 2
3
assembly. The stators, 3, are kept in position by a
locating pin, 4, in the axle housing.
4
1
20000934
33-4
SECTION 33 - BRAKES
8
5
6
4
3
7
9
2
20000935
3
Op. 31 120 actuator plate, 5, then overcomes the actuator return
Brake Operation spring, 6, tension, and forces the rotating brake
discs, 7, and stators, 8, against each other creating
NOTE: The brake pedals on the TC35, TC40, and friction to slow the rotation of the axles.
TC45 tractors are located on the right side of the
tractor. The brake pedals on the TC35D, TC40D, and Releasing the brake pedal, 1, allows the pedal return
TC45D tractors are located on the left side of the spring, 9, to pull the brake lever, 3, back to its original
tractor. Operation of the brakes is the same on both position, which allows the brakes to release.
model tractors.
When the brake lever, 3, returns to its original
Depressing the brake pedal, 1, actuates the brake position, the brake cam, 4, releases the actuator
rod, 2, which is connected to the brake lever, 3. plate, 5, and allows the actuator return springs, 6, to
release the pressure on the brake discs, 7, and
The brake lever, 3, is connected to the brake cam, 4, stators, 8, allowing the axles to rotate freely.
which rotates against the actuator plate, 5. The
33-5
SECTION 33 - BRAKES
Op. 33 110
Parking Brake
A parking brake is provided to hold the brakes in a 1
locked position when the parking brake lever, 1, is
locked. The parking brake lever, 1, holds the pawl, 2,
in a locked position on the inside brake pedal only.
The parking brake lever is located to the left of the

operators seat on the TC35D, TC40D, and TC45D.
The parking brake lever is located on the right side
platform on the TC35, TC40 and TC45 tractors. 2
20002369 TC35, 40, 45
20000936 TC35D, 40D, 45D
33-6
SECTION 33 - BRAKES
Op. 33 120
OVERHAUL
BRAKES
Removal and Disassembly
NOTE: The brakes may be serviced with the axle
case attached to the differential housing, but if final
pinion service is required, the axle case must be re-
moved from the differential housing.
1. Disconnect the brake rod clevis, 1, from the
brake arm, 2.
2 1
6
2. Loosen and remove the retaining nut, 1, on the
brake lever, 2. Remove the brake lever, 2, from
the brake cam.
30000177
7
3. Loosen and remove the brake cover retaining
bolts, 1.
1
30000178
33-7
SECTION 33 - BRAKES
4. Remove the brake cover assembly, 1, from the

differential housing, 2 2
1
30000179
9
5. Remove the three springs, 1, that secure the
brake actuator plate, 2, to the brake cover, 3. 3
2
30000180
10
6. Remove the brake actuator plate, 1, the steel
balls, 2, and the brake cam, 3, from the brake
3 4
cover, 4.
2 2
30000181
11
33-8
SECTION 33 - BRAKES
7. Remove and discard the brake cam, oil seal, 1,

from the brake cover, 2.
2
30000182
12
8. Remove the stators, 1, and the brake discs, 2,
from the final pinion shaft, 3. 3
2
1
30000183
13
Inspection
NOTE: See “SPECIFICATIONS” for wear values. If
proper measuring equipment is not available, re-
place the brake discs as a set, when the grooves in
the disc lining are no longer visible.

air dry.
2. Inspect the brake discs for excess wear or
damage. Replace the discs if the lining groove is
worn past the replacement limits.
3. Inspect the brake stators for excess wear or
damage. Replace the stators if wear exceeds
specifications.
4. Inspect the brake cam, the steel balls, and the
springs for excessive wear or damage. Replace
as necessary.
5. Inspect the brake cover for damage or cracks.
Repair or replace as necessary.
33-9
SECTION 33 - BRAKES
Assembly and Installation

1. Install the stators, 1, and the brake discs, 2, onto 3
the final pinion shaft, 3.
2
1
30000183
14
2. Lubricate a new brake cam, oil seal, 1, with
petroleum jelly, and install into the brake cover, 2.
2
30000182
15
3. Install the brake cam, 3, the steel balls, 2, and the
3 4
brake actuator plate, 1, into the brake cover, 4.
2 2
30000181
16
33-10
SECTION 33 - BRAKES
4. Install the three springs, 1, securing the brake

actuator plate, 2, to the brake cover, 3. 3
2
30000180
17
5. Install the brake cover assembly, 1, onto the
differential housing, 2. 2
30000179
18
6. Install and tighten the brake cover retaining bolts,
1.
1
30000178
19
33-11
SECTION 33 - BRAKES
7. Install the brake lever, 2, onto the brake cam, and

secure with the retaining nut, 1. Tighten the
retaining nut, 1.
30000177
20
8. Connect the brake rod clevis, 1, to the brake arm,
2.
2 1
21
BRAKE ADJUSTMENT
19 -- 30 mm
1. Measure the brake pedal free travel, 1. (3/4 -- 1-3/16 in.) 1
2. If adjustment is required, loosen the locknut, 2,
on the brake rod, 3. Turn the brake rod, 3, and
remeasure the pedal free travel, 1. When correct
3
free travel of 3/4 - 1-3/16 in. (19-30 mm) is
achieved, tighten the locknut, 2.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to test drive the tractor to
make sure the braking action on both rear wheels is
equal. If necessary, adjust the outer brake rod to
equalize the free travel. 2
22
33-12
SECTION 35 -- HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Chapter 1 -- Hydraulic System
CONTENTS

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-2
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-4
35 180 Combination System Relief - Diverter Valve Manifold Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-8
35 200 Control Valve Assembly (HPL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-9
35 210 Neutral Position - Fluid Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-10
35 210 Raising Position - Fluid Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-11
35 210 Lowering Position - Fluid Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-12
35 200 Bypass Spool - Fluid Flow - Closed Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-13
35 200 Bypass Spool - Fluid Flow - Open Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-13
35 183 Flow Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-14
35 108 Linkage Operation - Single Lever - Position Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-14
35 108 Position Control Operation - Neutral Position to Raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-15
35 112 Linkage Operation - Dual Lever Position Control (Draft Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-16
35 124 Linkage Operation - Combining Position and Draft Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-18
35 110 Hydraulic System Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-23
35 200 Hydraulic Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-34
35 180 Combination System Relief and Diverter Valve Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-38
35 182 PTO System Diverter Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-41
35 124 Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-44
35 304 Hydraulic Pump and Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-45
35 304 Hydraulic Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-46
35 300 Sump Tube and Screen Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-52
35 204 Remote Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-55
35 184 Front (Double-Spool) Remote Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-61
35 184 Fluid Flow - Bucket Control - Dumping and Lift Control - Neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-62
35 184 Fluid Flow - Bucket Control - Dumping Regen and Lift Control - Neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-63
35 184 Fluid Flow - Bucket Control - Roll Back and Lift Control - Neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-64
35 184 Fluid Flow - Bucket Control - Neutral and Lift Control - Raising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-65
35 184 Fluid Flow - Bucket Control - Neutral and Lift Control - Lowering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-66
35 184 Fluid Flow - Bucket Control - Neutral and Lift Control - Float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-67
35 204 Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-68
35 184 Front (Double Spool) Remote Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-70
35-1
SECTION 35 - HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SPECIFICATIONS
Hydraulic Pump
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gear
Pump Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37.1 LPM (9.8 GPM)
Pump Speed (rpm):
TC35, TC35D, TC40, TC40D, TC45, TC45D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2200 rpm
Engine Speed (rpm): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2600 rpm
System Relief Valve Setting

TC35, TC35D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 bar (2275 PSI)
TC40, TC40D, TC45, TC45D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 bar (2500 PSI)
Lift Cylinder Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 mm (3.155 in.)
Rear 3-Point Hitch

Maximum Lift Capacity
@ Hitch
TC35, TC35D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1273 kg (2805 lbs)
TC40, TC40D, TC45, TC45D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1486 kg (3275 lbs)
@24″
TC35, TC35D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920 kg (2025 lbs)
TC40, TC40D, TC45, TC45D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1059 kg (2330 lbs)
Safety Valve Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 ± 20 bar (3555 ± 290 PSI)
Reservoir Capacity
12x12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 L (9.2 gal.)
HST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 L (9.6 gal.)
Recommended Hydraulic Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NH134

Cold Weather Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NHF200
35-2

4T, 4.8 2.8 - 4.0 3.8 - 5.4
M5 7T, 8T, 8.8 0.70 4.9 - 6.9 6.9 - 9.3 ----------- ------------ ------------
10T, 10.9, 11T 6.7 - 9.4 9.0 - 12.7
4T, 4.8 3.6 - 5.1 4.9 - 6.9
M6 7T, 8T, 8.8 1.0 6.1 - 8.3 8.3 - 11.3 ----------- ------------ ------------
10T, 10.9, 11T 8.7 - 11.6 11.8 - 15.7
4T, 4.8 9.4 - 12.3 12.7 - 16.7 11.2 - 14.8 15.2 - 20.1
M8 7T, 8T, 8.8 1.25 16.6 - 21.0 22.6 - 28.4 1.0 19.5 - 25.3 26.5 - 34.3
10T, 10.9, 11T 21.0 - 26.8 28.4 - 36.2 22.4 - 29.7 30.4 - 40.2
4T, 4.8 18.8 - 24.6 25.5 - 33.3 21.0 - 26.8 28.4 - 36.3
M10 7T, 8T, 8.8 1.5 32.5 - 41.2 44.1 - 55.9 1.25 36.2 - 46.3 49.0 - 62.8
10T, 10.9, 11T 39.8 - 51.4 53.9 - 69.9 42.7 - 54.2 57.9 - 73.5
4T, 4.8 27.5 - 34.7 37.3 - 47.1 31.8 - 40.5 43.1 - 54.9
M12 7T, 8T, 8.8 1.75 48.5 - 61.5 65.7 - 83.4 1.25 55.0 - 69.4 74.5 - 94.1
10T, 10.9, 11T 68.0 - 85.4 92.9 - 116 73.1 - 93.3 99.0 - 127
4T, 4.8 46.3 - 59.3 62.8 - 80.4 51.4 - 64.4 69.6 - 87.3
M14 7T, 8T, 8.8 2.0 76.7 - 96.9 104 - 131 1.5 86.1 - 109 117 - 148
10T, 10.9, 11T 102 - 129 139 - 175 108 - 137 147 - 186
4T, 4.8 63.6 - 81.0 83.3 - 110 67.3 - 84.6 91.3 - 115
M16 7T, 8T, 8.8 2.0 110 - 136 149 - 184 1.5 116 - 142 157 - 192
10T, 10.9, 11T 152 - 188 206 - 255 163 - 199 221 - 270
4T, 4.8 106 - 132 144 - 179 127 - 156 172 - 211
M20 7T, 8T, 8.8 2.5 177 - 213 240 - 289 1.5 203 - 246 275 - 333
10T, 10.9, 11T 268 - 325 363 - 441 293 - 358 397 - 485
Flow Control - Cylinder Head Retainers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65.7 - 83.4 N⋅m (48.5 - 61.5 ft lbs)
Hydraulic Pump Retainers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 28 N⋅m (16 - 20 ft lbs)
35-3
SPECIAL TOOLS
Description Tool No.
Hose
7/16″ - 20 FJIC SE × Disconnect Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NH7099
7/16″ - 20 MJIC × 1/2″ M-NPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NH2028
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NH2106
Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NH1119
Lowering Valve Seat Removal Tool NH00357
1
Check Valve Seat Removal Tool - Fabricate Using 2
- 3 mm (0.080″ - 0.120″) Dia. Wire
35-4
1
3
2
3 4
20000348
1
Op. 35 000
The hydraulic position control is standard equipment
on all model tractors. The open center hydraulic
system consists essentially of a fluid reservoir,
hydraulic pump, lift cylinder and piston, control valve
and lift links.
The rear axle and transmission housing serve as a

common hydraulic fluid reservoir and supply fluid to
the hydraulic pump, 1, through the filter, 2, and
suction tubes, 3. The hydraulic pump supplies
hydraulic fluid to the system control valve through the
combination relief/diverter valve manifold, 4, and the
high pressure line, 5. The control valve, when
operated, affects raise, neutral, or lowering action of
the lift arms, 6. Hydraulic fluid is returned through
line, 7.
The hydraulic pump, 1, is mounted on the right side
of the engine and is driven by the engine oil pump
gear located on the front of the engine block.
10998221
2
35-5
7
13
12
11
10
6
9
4
5
20000439
Hydraulic Flow Diagram/Component Description
1. Hydraulic Fluid Reservoir 8. Rear Single Spool Remote Valve

2. Sump Screen Filter 9. Rear Remote Lift Cylinder
3. Hydraulic Fluid Filter 10. Rear Remote Endcap (Attached to HPL Valve)
4. Hydraulic Pump 11. HPL Valve (Control Valve)
5. Relief/Diverter Valve 12. Flow Valve
6. Front Double Spool Remote Valve 13. 3 Point Hitch Lift Piston
7. Front Boom Lift Cylinder
FLOW PRIORITY
This diagram shows hydraulic oil flow priority within
the tractor’s hydraulic system.
35-6
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
The hydraulic fluid is pressurized by the hydraulic 1
pump and flows through the PTO system diverter
valve, 1, the combination system relief-diverter
valve, 2, to the control valve. The hydraulic pump
and diverter valves are located on the right side of the
tractor. The control valve is located inside the
hydraulic lift cover assembly.
2
10998381
4
The hydraulic system is controlled by a series of
levers, 1, 2, 3, 4, and an adjustable stop, 5, for 3
returning the float control lever to a preset position. 7 4
Another lever, 6, is for draft control, if equipped.
There is an optional remote hydraulic control lever, 7,
for TC35, TC40, and TC45 series tractors.
2
1
5
6
10997819
5
HYDRAULIC FLUID FILTER
The suction filter, 1, is a canister-type filter. The filter
should be replaced after 300 hours of use.
1
6
35-7
Op. 35 080
1 3 2
COMBINATION SYSTEM RELIEF -
DIVERTER VALVE MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY 5 4
The combination system relief-diverter valve 7
manifold, 1, is located in the high-pressure line on the
right side of the tractor. The PTO system diverter
valve, 2, is attached to the relief valve. This valve, 2,
and the PTO supply line, 3, supplies 0.8 GPM to the
hydraulic PTO system. A supply line, 11, supplies the
pump with hydraulic fluid from the hydraulic fluid
reservoir. A high pressure line, 4, supplies fluid from 6
the pump to the manifold. The control valve line, 5, 8 9 10 11
supplies the hydraulic powered lift valve (control 10998381
valve). The pressure relief line, 6, provides a return 7
path back to the reservoir for hydraulic fluid. The
diverter valve spool, 9, normally provides flow directly
to the HPL when the slot is in the 2 o’clock position.
The diverter valve spool, 9, when rotated to the 10

o’clock position, supplies the auxiliary hydraulics. The
plugs, 7, 8, 10, are removed to connect to connect the
auxiliary pumping. Port, 7, (PB for power beyond)
brings flow pressure back from the front remote. This
now supplies the HPL valve or rear remote. Port, 8, (T
for tank) connects the front remote with a path to the
reservoir. Port, 10, (P for pressure) provides pressure
out of the manifold to the front remote valve.
The valve assembly contains the system relief
valve,13, which protects the hydraulic pump from 7 1
overload conditions. The valve body, 1, also serves as
a manifold, containing hose connection ports for use 5 6
2
with auxiliary hydraulic equipment, such as loaders.
The diverter valve spool, 2, permits the operator to 6
select operation of either the auxiliary hydraulic lift
system circuits or the hydraulic lift system by rotating
the diverter valve spool to the desired position. 7
4 3
8
10 13
11
12
8
1. Valve Body 8. Housing and
2. Diverter Valve Spool Poppet
3. Roll Pin 9. Spring
4. Roll Pin 10. Shim
5. Snap Ring 11. O Ring
6. O Rings 12. Cap Plug
7. Plug 13. System Relief
Valve Assembly
35-8
The PTO system diverter valve assembly uses a

diverter spool and spring to supply the PTO system 5 1
with hydraulic fluid at a rate of 0.8 GPM.
2
4 3
6
4
20000435
9
PTO Diverter Valve Parts
1. PTO Diverter Valve Body
2. Diverter Spool
3. Spring
4. O Ring
5. Plug
6. Plug
Op. 35 200
CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY (HPL)
The control valve assembly is located inside the
3 2
hydraulic lift cover and contains the control valve
spool, 1, bypass spool, 5, check valve, 3, unload
valve, 4, and lowering valve, 2.
10
35-9
7
IMPLEMENT
8
4
3
2
NEUTRAL POSITION - FLUID FLOW
11
Op. 35 210 Fluid trapped in the lift cylinder, 8, under weight
NEUTRAL POSITION - FLUID FLOW caused by the implement on the lift arms, exerts
pressure on the cylinder side of the check valve, 5.
In the neutral position, the control valve spool, 1, is This holds it in a closed position. The lowering valve
centered in the valve body. As fluid from the hydraulic spool, 6, positioned by the spring, 7, retains the fluid
pump is directed to the valve body, the fluid pressure in the lift cylinder and maintains the implement in a
moves the unload valve, 2, and compresses the fixed position.
spring, 3. This opens the passages, 4, to the sump.
Fluid then flows from the pump to these passages
and returns to the sump.
35-10
5
4
8 6
3
IMPLEMENT
1
7
RAISING POSITION - FLUID FLOW
12
Op. 35 210 check valve off its seat, allowing fluid to flow to the lift
RAISING POSITION - FLUID FLOW cylinder, 7, to raise the implement. When the fluid
pressure exceeds 150 bar (2135 PSI), the relief
When the position control lever is moved to the raise valve, 8, opens and fluid is returned to the sump.
position, the control valve spool, 1, is moved inward
(rearward). The fluid passages in the control valve A high pressure safety valve in the lift cylinder head
are opened, and fluid flows to the check valve, 5, protects against shock loads by opening at
through the check valve fluid passage, 4. pressures exceeding 250 ± 20 bar (3625 ± 290 PSI),
returning fluid to sump.
Fluid pressure against the check valve overcomes
the check valve spring, 6, and the lift cylinder fluid
static pressure on the check valve. This raises the
35-11
6
2
3
5 4
IMPLEMENT
8
7
1
LOWERING POSITION - FLUID FLOW
13
Op. 35 210 Fluid in the lift cylinder, 7, flows through the passage
LOWERING POSITION - FLUID FLOW past the check valve, 6, to the lowering valve spool
and seat and returns to the sump, permitting the
When the position control lever is moved to the implement to lower.
lowering position, the control valve spool, 1, is moved
forward (outward). The plate, 2, and adjusting bolt, 3, The HPL drop rate control valve, 8, can be adjusted
attached to the control valve spool, also move to limit flow returning from lift cylinder to HPL valve.
forward, making contact with the lowering valve
spool, 4, and pushing it off its seat, 5.
Fluid from the sump flows through the passages in

the control valve spool and plunger and returns to the
sump in the same manner as in the neutral position.
35-12
Op. 35 200
BYPASS SPOOL - FLUID FLOW - CLOSED
POSITION
B
The bypass spool and spring are located in the 2 3
control valve spool, 1. The purpose of the bypass
spool is to protect the hydraulic system from
excessive pressure. The bypass spool, 3, is held in
position (to the right-hand side of the control valve
spool) by a spring, 2, and the cylinder passage
pressure (A), which is normally higher than the oil
pump passage pressure (B).
A
14
Op. 35 200
BYPASS SPOOL - FLUID FLOW - OPEN
POSITION
B
When the control lever is moved to the raise position, 3
2
fluid flows from the pump and the cylinder passage
(A) fluid pressure becomes lower than the fluid
pressure at passage (B). The bypass spool operates
(moves to the left-hand side of the control valve
spool) and the bypass circuit is opened, allowing the
remaining fluid to flow to the sump via the bypass
spool, 3. A
When the cylinder passage pressure (A) and the fluid 1

pump passage pressure (B) become equal, the
bypass spool returns to its normal position, and the
bypass passage is closed.
15
35-13
Op. 35 183
FLOW CONTROL VALVE 1 4
2
Fluid flow from the pump enters the lift cylinder
through the check ball, 1, and the flow control valve
needle and seat, 2. When the needle valve is closed
or severely restricted, fluid pressure opens the check
valve and flows to the lift cylinder during the raising
cycle. The one-way check valve prevents fluid from
returning to the lift cylinder, and the lift arms remain
at their set height.
During the lowering cycle, the fluid being exhausted

from the lift cylinder must return to the reservoir via 3
the needle valve and seat. The needle valve control
knob, 3, must be adjusted to obtain the desired rate
of drop.
The high-pressure safety valve, 4, located in the flow

control valve body, protects the lift cylinder against
shock loads. When cylinder pressure exceeds 245 ±
16
20 bar (3555 ± 285 PSI), the safety valve opens and
allows the cylinder fluid to escape to the sump.
Op. 35 108
LINKAGE OPERATION - SINGLE LEVER - 1
7
POSITION CONTROL
6
The single-lever hydraulic system uses a
single-quadrant control lever, 1, which is connected
to the control valve spool by internal linkage, 2, to
maintain mounted implements at a constant height
relative to the tractor.
5
When the control lever, 1, is moved, the internal
linkage, 2, and control valve spool activate the
hydraulic system, and the lift arms, 7, respond to the
movement of the control lever, 1, by either raising,
lowering, or remaining in neutral condition. The rod, 2
6, which is connected to the lift arm, actuates the
feedback links, 3, 4, and 5, to move the control valve
spool to the neutral position when the desired height 3
is reached.
4
17
35-14
Op. 35 108
1 6 7
POSITION CONTROL OPERATION -
NEUTRAL POSITION TO RAISE
When the position control lever, 1, is moved to the
raise position, the cam, 2, is rotated between the 8
cam, 3, and the control valve spool, 8, forcing the 5
control valve inward into a raise position. Pump fluid
then flows to the lift cylinder, and the lift arms raise. 2
3 9
4
18
RAISE POSITION TO NEUTRAL POSITION
1 6 7
When the lift arms, 7, raise, the feedback link, 4,
moves rearward allowing the spring-loaded control
valve spool, 8, to move forward (outward) to the
neutral position. Pump fluid flow is redirected to the
sump, and the lift arms stop raising. 5
10
2
9
3
8 4
19
NEUTRAL POSITION TO LOWERING
1 7
POSITION
When the control lever, 1, is moved to the lowering
6
position, the cam, 2, is moved upward, reducing the
pressure on the control valve spool, 8. The spring, 9,
then moves the control valve spool forward (outward) 5
and pump fluid flow is directed to the sump. The
10
lowering arm and screw, 10, moves toward the valve
spool (not shown) pushing it off its seat. This allows
2
the cylinder fluid to exhaust to the sump via the flow 3 9
control valve and lowers the lift arms.
8 4
20
35-15
Op. 35 112
Linkage Operation-Dual Lever Position Control
(Draft Control)
The dual lever hydraulic system, if equipped, uses
two levers connected by internal linkage to the
control valve spool. When moved, these levers
determine a raise, lower, or neutral condition for the
hydraulic system. The 3PT position control lever, 1,
maintains the mounted implement at a selected
height relative to the tractor.
1
The draft control lever, 2, provides automatic
implement depth control to maintain a constant draft 2
10997819
on the tractor. This lever adjusts how sensitive the
21
system is to ground conditions.
The system of automatic depth control (draft control)

use the top compression link to signal for raising or
lowering the implement to maintain a constant draft.
When the position control lever is moved to the full

lowered position, the implement attached to the lift
arms will float until a raise signal is received.

Top Link Sensing Raise 1
As soil conditions vary, an increase in implement 7 8
draft will increase the force on the top link, 8. This
further compresses the draft control main spring, 7, 6
to move the feedback linkage, 3, 4, 5, 6, in the 9
direction of the arrows and push the control valve
spool, 9, inward to a raise position. This action
causes the implement to automatically rise. As the
implement is lifted, the force on the top link, 8, and 2 5
main spring, 7, decreases and reduces the force on
the feedback linkage and cam, 2, on the control valve 3 10
spool, 9. The control valve spring, 10, moves the 4
control valve spool, 9, outward into the neutral
position when the force on the top link, 8, and main 22
spring, 7, is reduced to the amount originally selected 1. Draft Control Lever
on the draft control lever, 1. 2. Control Lever Cam
3. Feedback Link Cam
4. Feedback Link (Internal)
5. Feedback Arm
6. Adjustment Rod
7. Main Spring
8. Top Link
9. Control Valve Spool
10. Valve Spring
35-16

Top Link Sensing Lower 1
As the soil conditions vary to decrease the draft load 7 8
of the implement, the force on the top link, 8, is
reduced and causes the main spring, 7, to extend. 6
This action causes the feedback linkage, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9
to move in the direction of the arrows, reducing the
force on the control valve spool, 9. The control valve
spring, 10, then moves the spool, 9, forward into the
lowering position. This action causes the implement 2 5
to automatically lower. As the implement lowers, the
force on the top link, 8, and main spring, 7, increases 3 10
the force of the linkage, 3, 4, 5, 6, on the control valve 4
spool, 9. The control valve spool, 9, then moves
inward to the neutral position when the force on the 23
top link, 8, and main spring, 7, is increased to the 1. Draft Control Lever
amount originally selected on the draft control lever, 2. Control Lever Cam
1. 3. Feedback Link Cam
4. Feedback Link (Internal)
5. Feedback Arm
6. Adjustment Rod
7. Main Spring
8. Top Link
9. Control Valve Spool
10. Valve Spring
Varying Draft Control Settings

Varying forces on the top link, 8, move the feedback 1
linkage, 3, 4, 5, 6, back and forth to apply appropriate 7 8
pressure on the control valve spool, 9 and spring, 10,
to maintain a constant draft load on the tractor. 6
9
The operator manually selects draft load by
positioning the draft control lever, 1. As the draft
lever, 1, is moved forward (down), the lever cam, 2,
is moved up causing greater top link force to move 2 5
the feedback linkage, 3, 4, 5, 6, and control valve
spool, 9, into the raise position.
3 10
4
As the draft lever, 1, is moved back (up), the lever
cam, 2, is moved down, the control valve spool, 9, is 24
moved closer to the raise position and lifting of the 1. Draft Control Lever
implement takes place with a lower increase in top 2. Control Lever Cam
link pressure and less movement of the feedback 3. Feedback Link Cam
linkage. 4. Feedback Link (Internal)
5. Feedback Arm
In summary, adjusting the draft control lever, 1, up or 6. Adjustment Rod
down repositions the lever cam, 2, to provide the 7. Main Spring
appropriate resistance on the top link, 8, to suit 8. Top Link
operating conditions. 9. Control Valve Spool
10. Valve Spring
35-17
Op. 35 124
Linkage Operation - Combining Position And
Draft Control Settings 7 9
Draft control (implement sensitivity to raising and
lowering) is adjusted with the draft control lever, 1. 8
When the ground conditions remain constant, the
implement depth will also remain constant with the 10
depth selected by the position control lever, 7. If B
B1
ground conditions become soft, the top link, 2, and 6
main spring, 6, pressure decreases causing the draft
control feed back links and the cam, 4, to move the 11
1
control valve spool, 5, to lower the implement, 11,
from position “A” to position “A1”. This is to maintain
the same draft load and top link pressure against the 4
top of the main spring, 6. A
A1
The position control lever, 7, is used to set a 5
maximum implement operating depth. With the 3
position control lever, 7, set at a maximum depth 2
setting, the lift arms, 8, will lower from position “B” to
25
position “B1” if the ground becomes soft. The lift
1. Draft Control Lever
arms will not lower below position “B1” because the
2. Top Link
oil in the lift cylinder is retained as the control valve
spool, 5, is shifted from the lowering to neutral 3. Draft Control Feedback Links
position, thus limiting the distance the implement, 11, 4. Draft Control Feedback Cam
will drop in soft ground. 5. Control Valve Spool
6. Main Spring
7. Position Control Lever
NOTE: If the position control lever fails to lower the
8. Lift Arms
implement, the flow control valve is adjusted to the
closed position or the draft control linkage is in need 9. Position Control Feedback Links
of adjustment. 10. Position Control Feedback Cam
11. Implement
35-18
TROUBLESHOOTING

Implement fails to lift when lever Linkage out of adjustment Adjust external and internal linkage
is in raised position
Relief valve setting too low Perform system relief valve pressure
test
Faulty safety valve Repair or replace safety valve
O ring failure (control valve body Repair as required

to cover, safety valve, relief
valve)
Excessive oil leakage past lift Replace seal, piston, or cylinder as

cylinder piston seal required
Restricted suction filter Replace
Restricted sump screen filter Replace or clean as required
Unload valve does not close Check unload valve operation
Poppet valve remains open Check poppet valve adjustment and

operation
Lift arms cycle up and down Faulty poppet valve and seat Repair or replace as required
when lever is in neutral position
Faulty check valve and seat Replace
Faulty O rings (poppet valve and Inspect and repair as required

seat, valve cover, unload valve
plug)
Poppet valve out of adjustment Adjust to proper clearance

Implement settles too fast when Faulty check valve seat Replace
engine is stopped
Implement rises too slowly Restricted suction filter Replace
Restricted sump screen filter Clean or replace as required
Pump capacity too low Perform flow test and replace pump as
required
Faulty relief valve Repair or replace as required
Excessive leakage past piston Inspect cylinder and piston. Repair as

seal required.
Faulty safety valve Repair or replace as required
Leaking O rings (relief valve, Repair as required

safety valve
Extreme cold weather operation Change hydraulic fluid to NHF200
35-19

Implement will not lower Poppet valve out of adjustment Adjust poppet valve clearance
Flow control valve in closed Open flow control valve

position
Implement does not raise to full Position control rod out of Adjust position control rod
height adjustment
Hydraulic fluid overheats Faulty pump Replace pump
Restricted suction filter Replace
Restricted sump screen filter Clean or replace as required

Relief valve operates when Position control rod out of Adjust position control rod
implement is in full raise position adjustment
35-20
PRESSURE TESTING
MAIN SYSTEM RELIEF VALVE
NOTE: The hydraulic system is equipped with one
system relief valve, located in the combination
relief/diverter valve assembly. This setup gives
several options for checking the system relief
pressure. If equipped, the hydraulic system relief
pressure may be checked using the rear (single
spool) remote valve kit, or a front (double spool)
remote valve kit. If the tractor is not equipped with
either of these, the system relief pressure must be
tested using the combination relief/diverter valve.
1. If equipped with a front (double spool) valve kit,
connect a 0 - 207 bar (0 - 3000 PSI) pressure 1 2
gauge, 1, to the top high pressure hydraulic line,
2, located on the right side of the tractor. Proceed
to step 4.
10998714
26
2. If equipped with a rear (single spool) valve kit,
connect a 0 - 207 bar (0 - 3000 PSI) pressure
gauge, 1, to one of the remote lines, 2, on the rear 2
1
of the tractor. Proceed to step 4.
10008713
27
35-21
3. If the tractor is not equipped with either remote

valve kit, remove the power out (P) manifold plug
from the diverter valve and install a 0 - 207 bar (0
- 3000 PSI) pressure gauge, 1, into the power out
port, 2. 1
4. Start the tractor engine and operate the hydraulic

system to warm the hydraulic fluid to normal
operating temperature.
5. Set the engine rpm to full throttle (2600 rpm). 2

6. If using the front remote valve, move the valve
control lever to the bucket raise position and 10998803
observe the pressure indication on the gauge.
28
TC35, TC35D 157 bar (2275 PSI)
TC40, TC40D, 172 bar (2500 PSI)
TC45, TC45D
7. If using the rear remote valve, move the valve

lever and observe the pressure indication on the
gauge. If the tractor is a model TC35 or TC35D,
the indicated pressure should be 157 bar (2275
PSI). If the tractor is a model TC40, TC40D,
TC45, or a TC45D, then the pressure reading
should be 172 bar (2500 PSI).
8. If using the combination relief/diverter valve, set
the diverter valve, 1, from the 10 o’clock position
to the 2 o’clock position, and observe the
pressure indication on the gauge, 2.

TC35, TC35D 157 bar (2275 PSI)
TC40, TC40D, 172 bar (2500 PSI)
TC45, TC45D
1
2
9. If required, adjust the relief pressure setting by
adding or removing shims from the relief valve. 10998803
One shim, 0.3 mm (0.012 in.) thickness, will 29
change the relief pressure setting approximately
10 bar (150 PSI).
NOTE: Shim kit SBA340293230 contains three 0.3

mm (0.012 in.) and three 0.1 mm (0.004 in.) shims.
35-22
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM OVERHAUL

Op. 35 110
6
LIFT CYLINDER
4
Removal
1. Before removing the lift cover assembly, 3 5
discharge the fluid from the lift cylinder by
lowering the lift links to their lowest position. 7
8
2. Remove position control rod sway bar, 1, by
removing the clevis pin, 2, and removing the bolt,
3, that connects the opposite end of the sway bar 1
to the ROPS. Repeat for the opposite side 2
19998700
3. Disconnect the position control rod assemblies 30
from the tractor by removing the clevis pin, 4, that
connects the control rod, 5, to the lift arm, 6.
Remove the bolt, 7, and the retaining pin, 8,
which holds the lower link of the control rod
assembly to the rear axle. Repeat for the
opposite side.
NOTE: Tractor wheels have been removed for figure.
4. Disconnect the draw bar, 1, from the lift cover by

removing the clevis pin, 2. 2
5. Remove the left and right fenders.

1
6. Remove the seat.
7. Remove the fuel tank.
8. Remove the Roll Over Protection System (ROPS).
19998700
31
9. On deluxe model tractors, disconnect the
linkage, 1, for the 3-point hitch position control
lever by removing the cotter pin that attaches the
linkage.
3
10. On deluxe model tractors, remove the two bolts,
2, connecting the 3-point position control linkage
bracket, 3, to the right axle housing.
19998695
2 2
32
35-23
11. On economy model tractors, remove the 3-point

position control lever, 1, by using a suitable 2
hammer and punch to drive the roll pin, 2,
securing the control lever to the HPL pivot shaft.
1
20000018
33
12. On models equipped with mid PTO, remove the
two bolts, 1, securing the mid PTO safety start
switch bracket, 2, to the differential case and
disconnect the switch from the wiring harness.
1
19998699
34
1, holding each PTO lever, 2, to the PTO linkage, 2
3.
2 1
14. On deluxe model tractors, remove the cotter
pins, 4, securing the PTO linkage, 3, to mid PTO 4
input shaft, 5, and rear PTO input shaft, 6.
1
4
19998696
5 6
35
35-24

1, securing the PTO linkage, 2, to the lift cover, 3. 3
2 1
19998696
36
16. On deluxe models, separate the flow control
valve linkage, 1, from the lift cover by using a
hammer and suitable punch to remove the roll
pin, 2.
2
1
19998697
37
17. Remove the high pressure line banjo bolt, 1, that
secures the high pressure hydraulic line, 2, to the 3
lift cover, 3. 2
19998701
38
35-25
18. Remove the two bolts, 1, securing the hydraulic

level dipstick tube and dipstick, 2, to the lift cover.
2
19998704
39
19. Remove the 16 nuts and bolts, 1, securing the lift
cover to the differential case.
20. Separate the lift cover from the differential case.
1
1
19998704
40
NOTE: On models equipped with mid PTO, the mid
PTO detent spring, 1, may separate with the lift cover.
Be sure it does not fall into the differential housing.
20000366
41
35-26
21. Using a suitable hoist or lift, remove the lift cover

from the differential housing.
19998702
42
Disassembly
3
1. Remove the pin, 1, and remove the position 2
control rod, 2, from the lift arm, 3. 1
2. Remove the lever grip.
3. Remove the cover bolts, 4, and remove the cover

and valve as an assembly.
4
43
4. Remove the flow control valve attaching bolts
and nuts, 1, and remove the valve and cover as 1
an assembly. 2
NOTE: Cylinder liner may come off with cover and
valve.
44
35-27
5. Remove the cylinder liner, 1, through the front of

the cover assembly.
6. Using a wood dowel, push the piston out of the

liner through the head end.
45
7. Remove the feedback link, from the cross shaft.
8. Remove the snap rings, 1, holding the lift arms,

2, on the cross shaft, 3, from each side.
9. Scribe a mark on the cross shaft, 3, and lift arm,

2, for assembly purposes, and remove the lift
arms using a suitable puller. 2
3
46
10. Scribe a mark on the ram arm, 2, and cross shaft,
1, for assembly purposes.
1
11. Slide the ram arm back on the shaft, 1, while
pulling the cross shaft out the left side of the
housing.
47
35-28

1. Check the piston and cylinder for excessive wear
or damage. Replace if necessary.
2. Check the cross shaft bushings, 1, for excessive 3 2

wear or damage. Replace the bushings if
necessary using a suitable driver, 2. 1
NOTE: Be sure to install the bushings to the correct
depth as shown. 3
2
Bushing depth, 3; TC35: 7 mm (0.276 in.)
TC40, TC45: 8 mm (0.315 in.)
48
Assembly
1. Clean all parts in a suitable solvent and air dry.
1
2. Apply clean hydraulic fluid to all parts, including
O rings and seals, during assembly.
3. Install the cross shaft, 1, in the cover while

aligning the ram arm, 2, to the scribe marks made
during disassembly.
49
4. Install the cylinder liner, 1, in the lift cover
housing. Be sure to position the piston rod inside
the liner during installation.
50
35-29
5. Install the O ring, 2, and backup ring, 3, on the

piston, 1, and carefully install the piston in the
cylinder.
1
3
2
51
6. Using a new O ring and gasket, install the flow
control valve assembly, 1, and tighten the nuts 2
and bolts, 2, to 65.7 - 83.4 N⋅m (48.5 - 61.5 ft lbs).
1
52
NOTE: Be sure to align the reference marks scribed
at time of disassembly. If no scribe marks are
present, install the lift arms positioned as shown.
48°
24°
53
35-30
7. Using a new O ring, 5, install the bushings, 4,

spring washers, 6, and lift arms, 2, on each side
of the cross shaft, 3. Secure in place with snap
rings, 1.
3 2
4 6
54
Installation
1. Be sure the gasket surfaces of the lift cover and
differential housing are free of old gasket
material.
2. If the tractor is equipped with a mid PTO, install

the detent spring in the differential housing.
3. Apply a 0.125 inch bead of LocTite Black RTV

Silicone to the surface of the differential housing
that the lift cover assembly mounts to. 1
20000366
55
NOTE: On tractors equipped with a mid PTO, make
sure that the mid PTO tang engages the mid PTO
shifter arm in the differential housing when installing
the lift cover.
4. Using a suitable hoist or lift, install the lift cover

onto the differential housing.
5. Replace the cover nuts and bolts and tighten to

torque specifications listed in the back of this
section.
6. Install the dipstick tube and dipstick to the lift

cover. 19998702
56
7. Using new O rings, install the high pressure line
and banjo bolt onto the lift cover.
35-31
8. On deluxe model tractors, align the flow control

valve linkage, 1, to the flow control valve on the
lift cover and install the roll pin, 2, to secure the
linkage.
9. On deluxe model tractors, install the mid PTO

safety start switch onto the differential case.
Connect the switch to the wiring harness.
2
10. On deluxe model tractors, bolt the PTO linkage
to the lift cover. 1
19998697
57
11. On deluxe model tractors, attach the PTO
linkage, 3, onto the PTO input shafts, 5, 6, and 2
secure the linkage with cotter pins, 4.
2 1
12. On deluxe model tractors, use bolts, 1, to secure
the PTO levers, 2, onto the PTO linkage, 3. 4
13. On economy model tractors, align the 3-point 1
position control lever onto the HPL pivot shaft
and install the roll pin to secure the lever.
3
4
19998696 5 6
58
14. On deluxe model tractors, secure the 3-point
position control lever bracket, 3, to the right axle
housing and HPL pivot shaft linkage using
retaining bolts, 2.
3
15. On deluxe model tractors, attach the 3-point
position control lever linkage, 1, to the HPL pivot
shaft linkage and secure the linkage with a cotter
pin.
16. Install the Roll Over Protection System (ROPS), 1

the fuel tank, the seat, and the left and right
fenders.
19998695
2 2
17. Install the position control rod assemblies and
position control rod sway bars. 59
35-32
FLOW CONTROL VALVE

14
Removal
1. Remove the cylinder head-retaining bolts, and 13
nut, 17. 15
16
2. Carefully remove the cylinder head assembly.
Disassembly 17 10
8
1. Remove the safety valve guide bolt, 1, and the
6
shims, 3, sealing washer, 2, spring, 4, and ball,
2
5. 12
1
NOTE: Observe the quantity of shims, 3, used 11
between the spring and guide bolt.
9
7 5
2. Remove the check valve body, 6, seal, 7, O ring,
8, spring, 9, ball, 10, guide, 11, and gasket, 12. 4 3
3. Remove the flow control valve knob, 16, and nut, 60

15, and then screw the valve stem, 13, out of the
body, 14.
Inspection
1. Wash the components in a suitable solution and
air dry.
2. Inspect the valve seat for excess wear or

damage.
3. Inspect the flow control valve stem (seat) and the

two balls for excess wear or damage.
4. Inspect the springs for excess wear or chipping.
Assembly
1. During assembly, apply clean hydraulic fluid to all
components.
2. Screw the valve stem, 13, into the body, 14.
3. Install the nut, 15, and valve knob, 16, on the

guide.
4. Using new O ring, 8, seal, 7, and gasket, 12,

install the guide, 11, ball, 10, spring, 9, and check
valve body, 6.
5. Install the ball, 5, spring, 4, sealing washer, 2,

and valve guide bolt, 1, using the same amount
of shims, 3, removed during disassembly.
35-33
Op. 35 200
HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE
Removal
See “Lift Cover Assembly”, discussed earlier in this
section.
Disassembly
1. Remove the valve to cover-retaining bolts, 1, and
remove the valve, 2, from the cover. 2
1
61
2. Remove the cotter pin, 1, washer, 2, and pin, 3,
from the control valve spool.
1 9 10
3. Loosen the bolt, 4, and remove cap, 5, and
spring, 6, from the control valve body, 7. 2 8
4. Remove the control valve spool, 8, from the valve 4
body, 7. 5
NOTE: Do not remove the adjusting screw, 9, nut, 10, 6
plate, 11, bolt, bypass spool, and spring from the 11
control valve spool, 8, unless required, as this affects
3
the valve adjustment setting.
7
62
5. Using special tool # NH00357, remove the
lowering valve seat, 5, with O rings, 4, spring
4
seat, 3, spring, 2, and lowering valve spool, 1,
from the valve body.
4
1 5
2
3
63
35-34
6. Remove the check valve plug, 1, with O ring, 2,

spring, 3, check valve, 4, and seat, 5, with O ring,
9, from the valve body.
7. Remove the plug, 6, with O ring, 7, spring, 8, and

1
unload valve, 10, from the valve body. 2
3
5 4
9
7 6
10
8
64
Inspection
1. Clean all components in a suitable solvent and
air dry.
2. Inspect the valve spool and bore for excessive

wear, scratches, or other damage.
NOTE: The control valve assembly and the body

must be replaced as a matched set only.
3. Inspect the check valve seat and bushing seat

area for uneven wear or other damage. Replace
the valve and bushing as a set if required.
4. Inspect the unload valve and valve seat area for

uneven wear or damage. Replace the valve and
valve seat as a set if required.
5. Inspect the shutoff valve and valve seat area for

uneven wear or damage. Replace the valve and
valve seat as a set if required.
6. Inspect all O ring grooves for nicks or burrs.
Assembly
1. Apply clean hydraulic fluid to all components,
including O rings and seals, during assembly.
2. Replace all O rings, gaskets, and seals using 1

new parts. 2
3
3. Install the unload valve, 10, spring, 8, and plug, 5 4
6, with O ring, 7, in the valve body. Tighten the 9
plug to 98 - 117.6 N⋅m (72.33 - 86.8 ft lbs). 7 6
4. Install seat, 5, with O ring, 9, check valve, 4,
spring, 3, and plug, 1, with O ring, 2, in the valve 10
body. Tighten the plug to 58 - 58.8 N⋅m (43.4 - 8
50.0 ft lbs). 65
35-35
5. Install the spring seat, 3, spring, 2, lowering valve

spool, 1, and lowering valve seat, 5, with O rings, 4
4, in the valve body. Tighten the lowering valve
seat to 79 N⋅m (21.7 ft lbs).
4
1 5
3 2
66
6. After torquing the lowering valve seat, stake the
seat into position using a center punch. STAKE
VALVE
SEAT
67
7. If removed, assemble the bolt, 1, plate, 2, bypass
spool, 3, spring, 4, nut, 5, and screw, 6, as 5
1
follows:
6
Remove the oil from the threads of the bolt, 1,
and valve spool, 7, and apply thread sealant to
them.
Insert the spring, 4, and bypass spool, 3, into the

valve spool, 7.
2
3
4
7
68
35-36
Install the plate, 2, in position 60_ from the pin

1.3 mm (0.051″)
center and tighten the bolts, 1, to 10 - 15 N⋅m (7.4
- 11 ft lbs). 6
Install the screw, 6, until it projects 1.3 mm
(0.05″) from the plate, 2, and tighten the nut, 5, PIN
60°
to 18 - 22 N⋅m (13 - 15 ft lbs) torque. 2 CENTER
5
3
4 1 4
PIN HOLE
69
8. Install the control valve spool, 8, into the valve
body, 7.
9 10
9. Install spring, 6, cap, 5, and secure with bolts, 4.
Tighten the bolts to 7 - 10 N⋅m (5.4 - 7.3 ft lbs). 1 8
2
10. Install pin, 3, through the control valve and 4
secure in place with washer, 2, and split pin, 1. 5
6
11
3
7
70
Installation
1. Using new O rings, install the control valve to the
cover.
2. Install the handles to the cover.
3. Position the control valve and cover assembly

with a new gasket on the lift cover assembly and
install the attaching bolts. Tighten the attaching
bolts to the specified torque. See
“Specifications”, discussed later in this section.
4. Install the guides and handle grips.
5. Install the position control link and adjust as

described later in this section.
35-37
Op. 35 180
5
COMBINATION SYSTEM RELIEF VALVE
AND DIVERTER VALVE ASSEMBLY 3
Removal 4
1. Disconnect the relief valve to sump return line, 1,

line, 2, and the pressure line, 3, to the control 2
valve at the valve assembly. 1
3. Remove the PTO system pressure line, 4, at the 10998381
PTO diverter valve body fitting, 5. 71
10996435
72
Disassembly
2
NOTE: When removing the relief valve plug, make

note of the quantity of shims, 10, if used, between the
spring, 9, and plug, 12. Retain the shims for use
during assembly.
3
NOTE: One shim, 0.3 mm (0.012 in.) thickness, will
change the pressure setting approximately 10 bar
10998804
(150 PSI).
73
35-38
2. Remove the relief valve plug, 12, with the O ring,

11. 7 1
3. Remove the snap ring, 5, from the diverter valve 5 6

spool, 2, and withdraw the spool from the valve 2
body, 1. 6
Inspection 7
1. Inspect the relief valve seat and guide for excess 4
wear or score marks. 3
8
2. Inspect the diverter valve spool and valve body
for excess wear or score marks. 9
3. Inspect the spring for wear or damage. 10 13
4. Replace the relief/diverter valve as an assembly 11
12
Assembly 74
1. Using new O rings, 6, install the diverter valve 1. Valve Body 8. Housing and
spool, 2, into the valve body, 1, and install snap 2. Diverter Valve Spool Poppet
ring, 5. 3. Roll Pin 9. Spring
4. Roll Pin 10. Shim
2. Install the relief valve assembly, 13, with a new 5. Snap Ring 11. O Ring
O ring, 11, into the valve body, 1. Be sure to use 6. O Rings 12. Cap Plug
the correct number of shims, if necessary, when 7. Plug 13. System Relief
installing the relief valve assembly. Valve Assembly
3. Using a new O ring, 4, between the PTO valve

body, 1, and the diverter valve body, 2, secure the 2
valves together using the three bolts, 1. 1 3
4
3
10998805
75
35-39
Installation
2. Install the bolt, 1, which secures the combination

system to the tractor. Do not tighten bolt at this
time.
10996435
76
sump return line, 1. Do not tighten fittings at this 5
time.
3
pressure line, 2, and the pressure line, 3, to 4
control valve to the valve assembly.
5. Tighten all loose bolts and fittings at this time.
2
1
10998381
77
35-40
Op. 35 182
5
PTO SYSTEM DIVERTER VALVE
3
Removal
1. Disconnect the relief valve to sump return line, 1, 4

line, 2, and the control valve pressure line, 3, at
the valve assembly. 2
3. Remove the PTO system hydraulic line, 4, at the 1
PTO diverter valve body fitting, 5. 10998381
78
10996435
79
Disassembly
2
10998804
80
35-41
2. Remove the diverter valve plugs, 5, 6, with the O

rings, 4. 5 1
3. Remove the diverter spool, 2, and spring, 3, from
the valve body, 1.
2
Inspection 4 3
6
1. Clean and inspect the diverter valve spool and
valve body bore for excess wear or score marks.
2. Inspect the spring for wear or damage.
3. Replace the PTO diverter valve as an assembly 4

20000435
81
PTO Diverter Valve Parts
Assembly 1. PTO Diverter Valve Body
1. Using a new O ring, 4, install plug, 5, in one end 2. Diverter Spool
of the valve body, 1. 3. Spring
4. O Ring
2. Install the spool, 2, and spring, 3, into the valve 5. Plug
body. 6. Plug
3. Using a new O ring, 4, install plug, 6, into the
open end of the diverter valve.
4. Using a new O ring, 4, between the PTO diverter

valve body, 1, and the diverter/relief valve body, 2
2, secure the valves together using the three 1 3
bolts, 3. 4
3
10998805
82
35-42
Installation
2. Install the bolt, 1, which secures the valve

assembly to the tractor. Do not tighten the bolt at
this time.
10996435
83
sump return line, 1. Do not tighten fittings at this 5
time.
3
pressure line, 2, and the control valve pressure 4
line, 3, to the valve assembly.
5. Tighten all loose bolts and fittings to torque

2
1
10998381
84
35-43
Op. 35 124
ADJUSTMENTS
HPL LINKAGE ADJUSTMENTS
The length of the position control rod is critical and
careful adjustment must be observed for proper
operation. If the control rod is adjusted too short, the
control valve spool will remain in the raised position
when the lift arms have reached their maximum
height and the system relief valve will blow. If the
control rod is too long, the control valve spool will
return to neutral before the lift arms reach their full
height. The position control rod should be adjusted
any time the link is disconnected for service to the
hydraulic system, or any time the relief valve
operation is noticed while the lift arms are at the full
raise position.
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
1. Loosen the locknut, 1, on the position control rod,
2, and remove the pin, 3, from the link. 5
2. Set the control lever, 4, to the highest position,

3 2 1
but not in the notch of the upper stop.
3. Start the engine. The lift arms, 5, should raise

and the relief valve should operate.
4. Move the control lever down until the relief valve 4

ceases operation.
5. Adjust the length of the position control rod and

clevis to align the pin holes. Then lengthen the 85
rod one additional turn and install the pin. Tighten
the locknut.
6. Check the operation. The relief valve should not

operate when the lift arms are in the fully raised
position.
CONTROL LEVER ADJUSTMENT

3
The control lever, 1, should not move from vibration. 2
If adjustment is required, remove the cotter pin, 2,
and adjust the nut, 3, to obtain 2 - 3 kg (4 - 7 lbs) of
pull at the lever knob.
86
35-44
Op. 35 304
HYDRAULIC PUMP AND FILTER
DESCRIPTION
The hydraulic pump, 1, is mounted on the right side
of the engine and is driven by the engine oil pump
gear mounted on the front of the engine block. 1
The hydraulic pump is a gear type pump and, with

exception of replacing the seals, is not user
serviceable.
10998221
87
A screen-type sump filter is housed inside the rear
differential case and is accessed by draining the
hydraulic fluid from the differential case and
removing the sump screen tube, 1, from the right side
of the differential housing.
A larger mesh screen covers the sump screen filter

and prevents larger debris from damaging the
smaller filter. This larger mesh screen is removed
only by removing the differential ring and pinion. It
may be accessed for cleaning by draining the
hydraulic fluid and removing the lift cover. 1
10998706
88
A suction type filter, 1, is located in the inlet line on the
right side of the tractor, near the rear axle differential
case. The filter is serviced by replacing the complete
canister assembly. The filter should be replaced after
the first 50 hours of use and every 300 hours of use
thereafter.
89
35-45
Op. 35 304
HYDRAULIC PUMP
The only parts serviced on the hydraulic pump are
the shaft seal and internal O rings. If troubleshooting
indicates a faulty pump, replace the pump with a new
assembly.
Pump Flow LPM (GPM)

TC35, TC35D, TC40, TC40D, 37.1 (9.8)
TC45, TC45D
Removal
1. Remove the two suction tube bolts, 1, from the
1
pump, 2.
2. Remove the four high pressure tube bolts, 3,

from the pump, 2.
3
10998221
90
3. Loosen the hose clamp, 1, on the opposite end
of the suction tube, 2. This is to allow the suction
tube to be rotated out of the way for pump
removal.
1 2
10998381
91
4. Remove the four pump mounting bolts and nuts,
3, securing the pump, 1, to the mounting flange,
2.
1
2
10000353
92
35-46
5. Remove the banjo bolt, 1 securing the oil line, 2,

to the engine block.
2
10000344
93
6. Carefully pull the suction tube, 3, out of the way
while removing the pump, 1, from the front 1
mounting flange, 2.
3
10000349
2
94
35-47
13
12
8
3 7
11
10
9
2
5
6
14
1
30000423
95
Disassembly 9. Using a brass drift and hammer, tap the rear of
1. Scribe lines in the pump body, 1, and end covers, the pump driveshaft, 11, and remove the drive
2 and 3, for ease of assembly. shaft from the pump body.
2. Remove the four bolts, 4, that secure the covers, 10. Using a brass drift and hammer, tap the rear of
2 and 3, to the body. the pump gear, 13, and remove the pump gear
from the pump body, 1.
3. Remove the rear cover, 2, from the pump body,
1. 11. Using a brass drift and hammer, remove the rear
wear blocks, 14, noting the orientation of each,
4. Remove the rubber seal ring, 5, and the back up for ease of assembly.
ring, 6.
5. Remove the front cover, 3, from the pump body, Inspection and Repair
1. 1. Wash all parts in clean solvent and air dry.
6. Remove the rubber seal ring, 7, and the back up 2. Discard all seals and back up rings.
ring, 8.
3. Inspect the gears, wear blocks, and pump bore
7. Using snap ring pliers, remove the snap ring, 9. for excess wear and scoring. If necessary,
replace the pump.
8. Remove the shaft seal, 10, from the front cover,
3.
NOTE: The front wear blocks, 12, will come out with
the drive shaft, 11. Be sure to note the location of
each wear block, as they are each different.
35-48
13
12
8
3 7
11
10
9
2
5
6
14
1
30000423
96
Assembly 7. Install the snap ring, 9, into the end of the front
1. Lubricate all parts during assembly with clean cover, 3.
hydraulic fluid.
8. Install new back up rings, 6, 8, and seal rings, 5,
2. Place the rear wear blocks, 14, into the pump 7.
body, 1. Be sure that the blocks are oriented
9. Carefully place the front cover, 3, and the rear
correctly.
cover, 2, onto the pump body, 1, aligning the
3. Install the pump gear, 13, into the pump body, 1. scribe marks made previously during
disassembly.
4. Install the driveshaft, 11, in to the pump body, 1.
10. Secure the covers, 2, 3, to the pump body, 1, with
5. Place the front wear blocks, 12, into the pump the four bolts, 4. Torque the bolts to 22 - 28 N⋅m
body, 1. Again, be sure that the blocks are (16 - 20 ft lbs).
oriented correctly.
6. Using a seal driver, install a new shaft seal, 10,

into the front cover, 3.
35-49
Installation
1. Scrape any remaining O ring sealant material
from the pump mounting flange, 1. Apply a small
amount of silicone sealer to the pump mounting
flange.
10000345
97
2. Install a new O ring, 1, on the front cover of the
hydraulic pump.
10000351
98
3. Carefully install the pump, 1, onto the pump
mounting flange, 2, and secure it with the four
nuts and bolts.
1 2
10000352
99
35-50
4. Install the banjo bolt, 1, which secures the oil line,

2, to the engine block.
2
10000344
100
5. Use a new O ring between the pump and the
hydraulic tube and install the four bolts, 3, that 1
secure the high pressure tube to the pump, 2.
6. Use a new O ring between the pump and the

hydraulic tube and install the two bolts, 1, that
secure the suction tube to the pump, 2.
2
3
10998221
101
7. Tighten the hose clamp, 1, on the opposite end
of the suction tube, 2.
8. Tighten all nuts and bolts to torque specifications

listed later in this section.
1 2
10998381
102
35-51
SUMP TUBE AND SCREEN FILTER

2
35 300 4
Removal
1
1. Drain the hydraulic fluid from the differential case
into a suitable container.
2. Remove the two clamping bolts, 1, and clamp, 2,

securing the sump hydraulic line, 3, to the filter
housing, 4. 3
10998705
103
3. Remove the two bolts, 1, securing the opposite
end of the sump hydraulic line, 2, to the
differential case. Remove the hydraulic line.
1 1
2
10998706
104
4. Remove the remaining two bolts, 1, holding the
sump in the differential case and pull the sump
tube and screen filter out of the differential case.
1
1
10998709
105
35-52
Disassembly
1. Separate the sump tube, 1, and metal filter, 2,
from each other. 1
2. Remove and discard all O rings and gaskets.

2
Inspection
1. Visually inspect the filter for damage and/or
excessive debris. Replace or clean with
appropriate solvent as necessary.
2. If the screen filter is being reused, be sure that

the filter is clean and dry before assembly. 10998710
106
Assembly
1. Install a new O ring in the O ring groove, 1, inside
the metal filter. 2
2. Install the filter, 2, onto sump tube, 3.

3
10998710
107
3. Replace the sump tube gasket, 1, which goes
between the sump tube and the differential
housing.
10000347
108
35-53
4. Place the sump tube and filter back into the

differential case and install the two short bolts, 1,
through the sump tube, 2, and into differential
housing, 3, finger tight. 1
2
3
1
10998709
109
5. Install the sump hydraulic line, 3, back into the
hydraulic filter housing, 4, and thread the two 2
bolts, 1, through the clamp, 2, into the filter 4
housing finger tight.
1
10998705
110
6. Install the sump hydraulic line, 1, back onto the
sump tube, 2, and differential housing using the
two long bolts, 3, to secure the line to the sump
tube.
1
7. Torque all bolts to specifications listed later in this
section.
3
3
2
10998706
111
35-54
Op. 35 204
REMOTE VALVES
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
Single-spool (rear) and double-spool (front) remote
control valves are available as dealer accessories.
The single-spool remote control valve is mounted on
the outside of the main control valve cover plate on
the right-hand side of the hydraulic lift cover. This
option is available with up to three valves on models
TC35D, TC40D, and TC45D and a maximum of two
valves on models TC35, TC40, and TC45, available
as Kit #1, Kit #2, and Kit #3. Installation of two valve
kits, 1, is shown.
112
The double-spool remote control valve, 1, is
mounted on the right fender.
Both the single- (rear) and double- (front) spool

remote control valves utilize the double-acting
control spool as shown in Figures 110 and 111.
113
35-55
Rear (Single-Spool) Remote Valve

The rear remote valves are equipped with
self-centering springs so that the spools 2
automatically return to neutral when the control 6
handle is released following a raise or lowering 13
operation. 12
14
9
8
5
3 3 7
1
4 7 10
11
114
1. Valve Body 8. Endcap
2. Valve Spool 9. Bolt
3. Spring Seat 10. Clevis
4. Spring 11. Bolt
5. Bolt 12. O Ring
6. O Ring 13. Seal Washer
7. Retainer 14. Washer
Front (Double-Spool) Remote Valve

(Figure 111)
The double-spool remote valve also contains a
spring-loaded detent mechanism to provide a float
position for loader operation. In float position, fluid is
free to flow between piston and rod sides of the
loader lift cylinder allowing the lift arms to float over
uneven terrain.
The double-spool remote control valve contains

check valves located in the valve spool passages.
The check valves function to hold the loader lift and
bucket cylinders in a fixed position while the valve is
being initially operated to prevent dropping the load.
In operation, the check valve is retained on its seat
by spring force plus the back side pressure of fluid
contained in the loader cylinder. During initial spool
movement, pump-pressurized fluid fills the passage
to the check valve, and the remaining pump fluid
flows to the sump through the open center passage.
With continued spool movement, the open center
passage closes. Pump pressure increases on the
force of the check valve, overcoming the backside
pressure, and causes the check valve to open. Pump
fluid flow then flows to the cylinder. This action
prevents any backflow out of the cylinder and
provides a smooth-lifting action of the loader.
NOTE: Separate installation instructions are

provided for the different remote valve kits.
35-56
34 32
33
28
27 30
31
26
29 2 1
23 25 26
24
3 6
40 5
25 7
22 8
17 9
10 14
11 15
36
12
18
13
19 35
16 6
20 8 7
37
38
9 1
10
11
12
38
16 2
35
21 4
20000437 39 13 5
115
1. Cap Screws 11. Spring 21. Plug 31. E Clip
2. End Cap 12. Stop Cup 22. Cap Screw 32. Roll Pin
3. Float Detent Sleeve 13. Spacer 23. Joystick Flange 33. Lockout Pin
4. Regen Detent Sleeve 14. Float Spool 24. Rod End 34. Knob
5. Retainer 15. Regen Spool 25. Rod End Assemblies 35. Plug
6. Poppet 16. O ring 26. Nuts 36. Plug
7. Detent Spring 17. Check Plug 27. Cap Screw 37. O ring
8. Detent Balls 18. O ring 28. Clevis 38. O ring
9. Detent Retainer 19. Spring 29. Spool Stud 39. O ring
10. Washer 20. Loads Check Poppet 30. Spring 40. One Way Flow Restrictor
(Orifice)
35-57
6 5
7
3
10
1 2
FLUID FLOW NEUTRAL POSITION
116
1. Remote Cylinder 6. HPL Control Valve
2. Implement Load 7. Relief/Diverter Block Manifold
3. Remote Valve Spool 8. Pump
4. Lift Cover End Cap 9. Filter
5. Lift Cover Assembly 10. Reservoir
FLUID FLOW - NEUTRAL POSITION - the pump fluid flow back through the three-point
REAR (SINGLE-SPOOL) REMOTE SYSTEM hydraulic system to the sump.
With the control valve in the neutral position, fluid Fluid contained in the remote cylinder, 1, is blocked
flows from the pump, 8, past the system relief valve, by the control valve spool, 3, and the implement, 2,
7, through the main control valve, 6, and lift valve is held in a fixed position.
cover, 5, and into the remote control valve. In the
neutral position, the remote valve spool, 3, directs
35-58
6 5
7
3
11
10
12
9
1 2
FLUID FLOW - REMOTE CYLINDER EXTENDING
117
1. Remote Cylinder 7. Relief/Diverter Block Manifold
2. Implement Load 8. Pump
3. Remote Valve Spool 9. Filter
4. Lift Cover End Cap 10. Return Passage
5. Lift Cover Assembly 11. Supply Passage
6. HPL Control Valve 12. Reservoir
FLUID FLOW - REMOTE CYLINDER cylinder, 1, and extends the cylinder. Fluid in the rod
EXTENDING - REAR (SINGLE-SPOOL) side of the cylinder returns to the sump through the
REMOTE SYSTEM return passage, 10.
When the remote control valve lever is pushed Fluid flow to the three-point hydraulic system is
forward, the valve spool is moved outward to extend blocked by the spool during this operation.
the cylinder.
If the fluid pressure exceeds 147 ± 5 bar (2130 ± 70
Fluid flows from the pump, 8, past the system relief PSI), the main relief valve, 7, opens, and the fluid
valve, 7, through the main control valve, 6, and lift returns to the sump.
valve cover, 5, to the remote control valve. The
control valve spool, 3, now directs the fluid flow
through passage, 11, to the piston side of the remote
35-59
6 5
7
3
11 10
12
9
1 2
FLUID FLOW - REMOTE CYLINDER RETRACTING
118
1. Remote Cylinder 7. Relief/Diverter Block Manifold
2. Implement Load 8. Pump
3. Remote Valve Spool 9. Filter
4. Lift Cover End Cap 10. Return Passage
5. Lift Cover Assembly 11. Supply Passage
6. HPL Control Valve 12. Reservoir
FLUID FLOW - REMOTE CYLINDER side of the remote cylinder, 1, and retracts the
RETRACTING - REAR (SINGLE-SPOOL) cylinder. Fluid in the piston side of the cylinder returns
REMOTE SYSTEM to the sump through passage, 11, and internal
passages in the remote and main control valve and
When the remote control valve lever is pulled permits the cylinder to retract.
rearward, the control valve spool, 3, is moved inward
to retract the remote cylinder, 1. Fluid then flows from Whenever the remote cylinder pressure exceeds
the pump, 8, past the system relief valve, 7, through 147 ± 5 bar (2130 ± 70 PSI), the main relief valve
the main control valve, 6, and lift valve cover, 5, to the opens, and the fluid returns to the sump.
remote control valve. The control valve spool, 3, now
directs the fluid flow through passage, 10, to the rod
35-60
CHECK VALVE #2
6
8
CHECK VALVE #1
1
A2 B2
2 A1 B1
P
PB
Static Pressure 4
Pump Pressure 7
3
30000440 FLUID FLOW - BUCKET CONTROL - NEUTRAL AND LIFT CONTROL - NEUTRAL
119
Op. 35 184 cylinders. Since there is no hydraulic fluid flowing
FRONT (DOUBLE-SPOOL) REMOTE through either spool, both check valves in the valve
body remain closed. Fluid contained in the bucket
CONTROL SYSTEM
control cylinders, 6, and the lift control cylinders, 8, is
trapped by the spools, and the cylinders remain in a
Fluid Flow - Bucket Control - Neutral and Lift fixed position.
Control - Neutral
When the control lever, 5, is in the neutral position, When both spools are in the neutral position, the
both control spools, 1 and 2, are centered in the valve passages to the power beyond (PB) port are open
body. Fluid is suctioned from the hydraulic reservoir, and hydraulic fluid flows through the valve body to the
7, by the hydraulic pump, 3, and is directed through diverter valve manifold, 4, and then to the main
the diverter valve manifold, 4, through port “P”, to the hydraulic control valve. If the hydraulic fluid is not
center of the two control spools. In this position, the used by the main hydraulic system, it is returned to
spool lands block the work passages to the loader the hydraulic fluid reservoir, 7.
35-61
CHECK VALVE #2
6
8 CHECK VALVE #1
5 9
1
A2 B2
A1 B1
2
T
P
PB
Static Pressure
4
Pump Pressure
Return to Sump 7
3
30000441 FLUID FLOW - BUCKET CONTROL - DUMPING AND LIFT CONTROL - NEUTRAL
120
Op. 35 184 passage “B1”, and exits the valve body through the
tank (T) port. Hydraulic fluid is then returned to the
Fluid Flow - Bucket Control - Dumping and Lift
hydraulic fluid reservoir, 7, through the diverter valve
Control - Neutral
manifold, 4.
When the control lever, 5, is moved to the dumping
position, the bucket control spool, 2, is moved Since the lift control spool, 1, remains in neutral, the
inward. Fluid flow from the hydraulic pump, 3, is lift control cylinders, 8, remain in a fixed position.
directed into the valve body, opening check valve #1,
to passage “A1”. Hydraulic fluid flows to the piston
NOTE: A one way orifice, 9, is located in the “B1” port
side of the bucket control cylinder, 6, from passage
and is used to reduce hydraulic cavitation when the
“A1”. Hydraulic fluid contained on the rod side of the
bucket is dumping. The orifice is 3.6 mm (0.140 in.)
bucket cylinder flows out of the cylinder, through
in diameter.
35-62
CHECK VALVE #2
6
8
CHECK VALVE #1
5 9
1
A2 B2
A1 B1
2 T
P
PB
Static Pressure
4
Pump Pressure
3 7
30000442 FLUID FLOW - BUCKET CONTROL - DUMPING REGEN AND LIFT CONTROL - NEUTRAL
121
Op. 35 184 bucket tipping action and prevents hydraulic fluid
cavitation caused by heavier loads.
Fluid Flow - Bucket Control - Dumping Regen
and Lift Control - Neutral Since the lift control spool, 1, remains in neutral, the
When the control lever, 5, is moved to the regen lift control cylinders, 8, remain in a fixed position.
position, the bucket control spool, 2, is moved
completely inward. Fluid flow from the hydraulic
NOTE: Regen position does not work for hydraulic
pump, 3, is directed to the bucket control spool,
motors or single acting cylinders.
through check valve #1, and to passage “A1”.
Hydraulic fluid is then directed to the piston side of
the bucket control cylinder, 6. Hydraulic fluid on the NOTE: A one way orifice, 9, is located in the “B1” port
rod side of the bucket cylinder flows through passage and is used to reduce hydraulic cavitation when the
“B1”, and to the “A1” passage where it is combined bucket is dumping. The orifice is 3.6 mm (0.140 in.)
with the hydraulic pump flow and directed to the in diameter.
piston side of the bucket cylinder. This allows faster
35-63
CHECK VALVE #2
6
8 CHECK VALVE #1
1
A2 B2
A1 B1
2 T
P
PB
Static Pressure 4
Pump Pressure
7
Return to Sump 3
30000443 FLUID FLOW - BUCKET CONTROL - ROLL BACK AND LIFT CONTROL - NEUTRAL
122
Op. 35 184 cylinder, 6. As the bucket is being rolled back, the
fluid from the piston side of the bucket control
Fluid Flow - Bucket Control - Roll Back and Lift
cylinder flows through passage “A1” and exits the
Control - Neutral
valve at port “T” back to the diverter valve manifold,
When the control lever, 5, is moved to the roll back
4. Fluid is then returned to the hydraulic fluid
position, the bucket control spool, 2, is moved
reservoir, 7.
outward. Fluid flow from the hydraulic pump, 3, is
directed to the bucket control spool, through check Since the lift control spool, 1, remains in neutral, the
valve #1, and to passage “B1”. From there hydraulic lift control cylinders, 8, remain in a fixed position.
fluid is directed to the rod side of the bucket control
35-64
CHECK VALVE #2
6
8 CHECK VALVE #1
A2 B2
A1 B1
2
T
P T
PB
Static Pressure
Pump Pressure 4
Return to Sump 3 7
30000444 FLUID FLOW - BUCKET CONTROL - NEUTRAL AND LIFT CONTROL - RAISE BOOM
123
Op. 35 184 rod side of the lift cylinder flows out of the cylinder to
the “A2” passage. The fluid then exits the valve body
Fluid Flow - Bucket Control - Neutral and Lift
through the “T” port, to the diverter valve manifold, 4,
Control - Raising
and then to the hydraulic fluid reservoir, 7. This
When the control lever, 5, is moved to the raising
allows the implement boom to raise.
position, the lift control valve spool, 1, is moved
outward. Fluid flows from the hydraulic pump, 3, Since the bucket control spool, 2, remains in the
opens check valve #2, and is directed through neutral position, the bucket control cylinder remains
passage “B2”. Fluid is then directed to the piston side in a fixed position.
of the lift control cylinder, 8. The hydraulic fluid on the
35-65
CHECK VALVE #2
6
8 CHECK VALVE #1
5 9
A2 B2
A1 B1
2
T
P
PB
Static Pressure
4
Pump Pressure
Return to Sump 3 7
30000445 FLUID FLOW - BUCKET CONTROL - NEUTRAL AND LIFT CONTROL - LOWER BOOM
124
Op. 35 184 the hydraulic fluid reservoir, 7, through the diverter
valve manifold, 4. This action allows the implement
boom to lower.
Control - Lowering
When the control lever, 5, is moved to the lowering Since the bucket control spool, 2, remains in the
position, the lift control spool, 1, is moved inward. neutral position, the bucket control cylinder remains
Fluid flow from the hydraulic pump, 3, opens check in a fixed position.
valve # 2, and fluid flows through passage “A2”, to the
rod side of the lift control cylinder, 8. The hydraulic
NOTE: A controlled lowering cycle is achieved
fluid on the piston side of the cylinder flows out of the
because of reduced hydraulic fluid flow through the
cylinder, through passage “B2”, and out of the valve
orifice, 9.
body through port “T”. The fluid is then returned to
35-66
CHECK VALVE #2
6
8
CHECK VALVE #1
A2 B2
A1 B1
2
T
P
PB
Static Pressure
4
Pump Pressure
Return to Sump 7
3
30000446 FLUID FLOW - BUCKET CONTROL - NEUTRAL AND LIFT CONTROL - FLOAT (DETENT)
125
Op. 35 184 bucket passes over uneven terrain. Hydraulic pump
fluid pressure is directed out of the valve body
through the power beyond (PB) port and to the
Control - Float
diverter valve manifold, 4, where it is then directed to
When the control lever, 5 is moved to the float
the main hydraulic system.
position (detent), the lift control spool, 1, is moved
inward beyond the normal lowering position. In this Since the bucket control spool, 2, remains in the
position, passages “A2” and “B2” are interconnected, neutral position, the bucket control cylinder remains
and fluid is free to move between the rod and piston in a fixed position.
sides of the lift control cylinder, 8. This allows the lift
arms of the loader to move up and down as the loader
35-67
Op. 35 204
OVERHAUL
REAR (SINGLE-SPOOL) REMOTE VALVE
REMOVAL
1. Thoroughly clean the area around the remote 2
control valve and disconnect the remote tubes, 1,
from the valve.
2. Disconnect the lever, 2, from the valve spool and

body.
3. Remove the mounting nuts, 3, and remove the

valve from the lift cover. 3
1
KIT #1
126
KIT #2
127
35-68

DISASSEMBLY
2
1. Remove bolts, 11, and remove the bracket, 10, 6
and plate, 7. 13
12
2. Remove bolts, 9, end cap, 8, and withdraw the 14
spool, 2, with bolt, 5, spring seats, 3, spring, 4,
plate, 7, washer, 14, seal washer, 13, and O ring,
6, from the body, 1.
6
3. Remove O ring, 6, from the spool bore on the
opposite end of the valve body. 9
4. Remove the O rings, 12. 8 5
5. Remove bolt, 5, and separate the spring, 4, and 3
spring seats, 3, if necessary. 3 7
4 7 1 10
11
INSPECTION
1. Inspect the spool and spool bore for pitting, 128
scratches, or excess wear. If inspection reveals 1. Valve Body 8. Endcap
defects, replace the control valve assembly. 2. Valve Spool 9. Bolt
3. Spring Seat 10. Clevis
2. Check that the spool moves freely in the spool
4. Spring 11. Bolt
bore. If defective, replace the control valve
5. Bolt 12. O Ring
assembly.
6. O Ring 13. Seal Washer
7. Retainer 14. Washer
ASSEMBLY
1. Assemble the spring seats, 3, and spring, 4, with
bolt, 5.
2. Install new O ring, 6, in the spool bore of the valve

body.
3. Install plate, 7, washer, 14, seal washer, 13, and

O ring, 6, over the spool, 2, and insert the
assembly into the bore in the valve housing.
4. Install the end cap, 8, and secure with bolts, 9.
5. Install plate, 7, bracket, 10, and secure with bolts,

11.
35-69
8
8
7
7
3
6
2
1
5
2 4 9
4
4
20000061
129
1. Control Valve Cover 4. Hydraulic Lines 7. Joystick Locknut
2. Bolt 5. Bolt 8. Joystick
3. Control Valve 6. Right Tractor Fender 9. Relief/Diverter Valve
Op. 35 184 2. Loosen the joystick locknut, 7, and remove the

FRONT (DOUBLE SPOOL) REMOTE joystick, 8, from the control valve, 3.
CONTROL VALVE 3. Disconnect all hydraulic lines, 4, from the control
valve, 3. Cap and plug all openings.
Removal 4. Remove the two bolts, 5, that retain the control
1. Remove the 3 bolts, 2, retaining the control valve valve, 3, to the right fender, 6
cover, 1 to the control valve, 3.
NOTE: Before disconnecting or removing hydraulic

lines from the remote control valve, be sure to label
or mark each line for ease of assembly.
35-70
34
32
33
28
27
30
31
26
29 2 1
23 25 26
24
3 6
40 5
25 7
22 8
9
17 14
10
11 15
36
12
18
13
19 35
16 6
20 37 8 7
38 9 1
10
11
12
38
16 2
35
4
21
20000437 39 13 5
130
1. Cap Screws 11. Spring 21. Plug 31. E Clip
2. End Cap 12. Stop Cup 22. Cap Screw 32. Roll Pin
3. Float Detent Sleeve 13. Spacer 23. Joystick Flange 33. Lockout Pin
4. Regen Detent Sleeve 14. Float Spool 24. Rod End 34. Knob
5. Retainer 15. Regen Spool 25. Rod End Assemblies 35. Plug
6. Poppet 16. O ring 26. Nuts 36. Plug
7. Detent Spring 17. Check Plug 27. Cap Screw 37. O ring
8. Detent Balls 18. O ring 28. Clevis 38. O ring
9. Detent Retainer 19. Spring 29. Spool Stud 39. O ring
10. Washer 20. Loads Check Poppet 30. Spring 40. One Way Flow Restrictor
(Orifice)
35-71
Disassembly defective, replace the remote control valve

1. Remove the three nuts, 26, that retain the assembly.
joystick flange assembly to the control valve. 4. Inspect all springs for distortion. Replace if found
2. Remove the E clip, 31, that retains the lockout to be defective.
pin, 33, and spring, 30, in the clevis, 28.
3. Remove the cap screws, 27, which retain the Assembly
clevis, 28, to the valve body. 1. Lightly lubricate and replace all O rings on valve
plugs and spool orifices.
4. Remove the float spool cap screws, 1, carefully
pull the float spool end cap, 2, off of the valve NOTE: When installing the one way flow restrictor, be
body. sure to install the restrictor so that the end with the
slot faces out in the valve body.
NOTE: The valve spool detent balls, 8, are under
pressure and may be expelled when the float detent 2. Install the one way flow restrictor, 40, into the
sleeve, 3, is removed. Use a rag to catch the detent “B2” port of the valve body.
balls as the sleeve is being removed to avoid losing
the detent balls. 3. Install each load check poppet, 20, spring, 19,
and check plug, 17, into the load check ports.
5. Carefully remove the float detent sleeve, 3, until Torque the check plugs to 27 - 34 N⋅m (20 - 25 ft
the detent balls, 8, snap free. lbs).
6. Remove the poppet, 6, detent spring, 7, retainer, 4. Install plugs, 21, 35, and 36, into the valve body.
5, and spacer, 13. Torque the plugs to 27 - 34 N⋅m (20 - 25 ft lbs).
NOTE: Be sure to make note of which valve spool 5. If the detent retainer, 9, washer, 10, spring, 11,
bore each valve spool is removed from, as the float and stop cup, 12, were removed from either
and regen spools are not interchangeable within the spool, reassemble parts onto spool and torque to
spool bores. 7 - 10 N⋅m (5 - 7 ft lbs).
7. Gently remove the float spool, 14, with the stop 6. Carefully install the regen spool, 15, into the
cup, 12, spring, 11, washer, 10, and detent spool’s respective bore in the valve body.
retainer, 9, from the valve body. 7. Install the spacer, 13, and retainer, 5, over the
8. Remove the regen spool, 15, in the same manner spool assembly
as described for the float spool in steps 4 through NOTE: The float detent sleeve, 3, has a groove on
7. the inside bore, the regen detent sleeve, 4, does not.
9. Remove plugs, 21, 35, and 36, from the valve
8. Using a punch or other suitable device,
body.
compress the spring, 7, and poppet, 6, into the
10. Remove each check plug, 17, spring, 19, and detent retainer, 9. Install the detent balls, 8, and
load check poppet, 20, from the check valve regen detent sleeve, 4, over the detent retainer,
ports. 9.
NOTE: The one way flow restrictor, 40, is used to 9. Install the end cap, 2, onto the regen spool
slow the descent of the boom as the boom is being assembly. Secure the cap with cap screws, 1.
lowered. Torque the cap screws to 11 - 15 N⋅m (9 - 11 ft
lbs).
11. Remove the one way flow restrictor, 40, from the
“B2” port on the valve body. 10. Install the float spool assembly into the valve
body following assembly steps 6 - 9.
Inspection 11. Install the clevis, 28, onto the valve body and
secure with cap screws, 27. Torque the cap
1. Remove and discard all O rings from the valve
screws to 11 - 15 N⋅m (9 - 11 ft lbs).
plugs and spool orifices in the valve body.
12. Install the lockout pin, 33, and spring, 30, into the
2. Inspect the valve spools and spool bores for
clevis, 28, and secure with E-clip, 31.
pitting, scratches, or excess wear. If found to be
defective, replace the remote control valve 13. Install the joystick flange assembly onto control
assembly. valve. Apply LocTite 680 to the threads of the rod
end assembly, 25, and to the spool stud, 29.
3. Check that the float spool and regen spool move
Secure with the three nuts, 26, and torque to 10
freely within their respective bores. If found to be
N⋅m (7 ft lbs).
35-72
5
5
6
6
1
2
8
7
3
8 4 9
20000061
131
1. Control Valve Cover 4. Hydraulic Lines 7. Joystick Locknut
2. Bolt 5. Bolt 8. Joystick
3. Control Valve 6. Right Tractor Fender 9. Relief/Diverter Valve
Installation 3. Tighten the nuts, 3, that secure the control valve,

1. Install the control valve, 1, onto the right fender, 1, to the right fender, 2.
2. Secure with the two nuts, 3. Do not tighten
4. Install the joystick, 5, onto the control valve, 1.
nuts at this time.
Tighten joystick locknut, 6.
2. Install the hydraulic lines, 4, onto the control
5. Install the control valve cover, 7, onto the control
valve, 1. Do not overtighten hydraulic line
valve, 1, secure with the three retaining bolts, 8.
fittings.
35-73
35-74
Chapter 1 -- Steering
CONTENTS

41 000 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-2
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-4
Description of Operation - Supersteer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-5
Description of Operation - Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-7
41 204 Power Steering Control Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-9
41 206 Power Steering Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-10
41 216 Steering Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-10
41 216 Power Steering Cylinders - 2WD and Standard 4WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-11
41 206 Power Steering Operation - Supersteer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-12
41 200 Power Steering Operation - 2WD and Standard 4WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-16
Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-24
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-25
41 204 Steering Control Motor Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-25
41 204 Steering Control Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-41
41 216 Steering Cylinder Removal - 4WD and Supersteer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-42
41 216 Steering Cylinder Removal - 2WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-43
41 216 Steering Cylinder Installation - 4WD and Supersteer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-52
41 216 Steering Cylinder Installation - 2WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-54
41 206 Power Steering Pump and Reservoir Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-56
41 206 Pump Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-58
Steering Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-59
41-1
SPECIFICATIONS
POWER STEERING SYSTEM
Power Steering Pump

Flow @ 2600 rpm, 2wd and 4wd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13 gpm (19.4 lpm)
Flow @ 2600 rpm, Supersteer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13 gpm (19.4 lpm)
Power Steering Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Full Hydraulic
Steering Cylinder
Stroke 2wd and 4wd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.86 in. (225 mm)
Bore 2wd and 4wd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.57 in. (40 mm)
Stroke Supersteer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.48 in. (190 mm)
Bore Supersteer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.38 in. (35 mm)
Relief Valve Pressure

FWD and 2WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1450-1520 PSI (100-105 bar)
Supersteer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2030-2100 PSI (140-145 bar)
Reservoir
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 US qts. (1.4 L.)
Oil NH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Maximum Turning Angle

2-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59°
FWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54°
Supersteer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54°
Axle Articulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21°
Total Turn Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75°
Front to Rear Axle Ratio 1.6605 to 1
41-2

4T, 4 3.6--5.8 4.9--7.9
M6 7T, 7 1.0 5.9--9.4 7.9--12.7 ------------ ------------ ------------
8T, 8, 11 7.2--10 9.8--13.6
4T 7.2--14 9.8--19 12--17 16.3--23
M8 7T 1.25 17--22 23--29.8 1.0 19--27 25.7--36.6
8T 20--26 27.1--35.2 22--31 29.8--42
4T 20--25 27.1--33.9 20--29 27.1--39.3
M10 7T 1.5 34--40 46.1--54.2 1.25 35--47 47.4--63.7
8T 38--46 51.5--62.3 40--52 54.2--70.5
4T 28--34 37.9--46.1 31--41 42--55.6
M12 7T 1.75 51--59 69.1--79.9 1.25 56--68 75.9--92.1
8t 57--66 77.2--89.4 62--75 84--101.6
4T 49--56 66.475.9 52--64 70.5--86.7
M14 7T 2.0 81--93 109.8--126 1.5 90--106 122--143.6
8T 96--109 130.1--147.7 107--124 145--168
4T 67--77 90.8--104.3 69--83 93.5--112.5
M16 7T 2.0 116--130 157.2--176.2 1.5 120--138 162.6--187
8T 129--145 174.8--196.5 140--158 189.7--214.1
4T 88--100 119.2--136 100--117 136--158.5
M18 7T 2.0 150--168 203.3--227.6 1.5 177--199 239.8--269.6
8T 175--194 237.1--262.9 202--231 273.7--313
4T 108--130 146.3--176.2 132--150 178.9--203.3
M20 7T 2.5 186--205 252--277.8 1.5 206--242 279.1--327.9
8T 213--249 288.6--337.4 246--289 333.3--391.6
41-3
SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool No.
Gauge 0-3000 PSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OEM 1462
Hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procure Locally
Tee Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CNH299061
Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FNH00227
Male Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Included with CNH299061
Female Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Included with CNH299061
Variseal Installation tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293955*
*Order thru New Holland Parts system.
41-4
6
4
5
1 3
2
3
1
SUPERSTEERT DESCRIPTION OF
OPERATION
The Supersteert system described in this section is
optional equipment for the Model TC35D, TC40D,
and TC45D tractors. The Supersteert system is a
fully hydraulic system consisting of a power steering
control motor, 4, a pump, 5, a reservoir, 6, two power
steering cylinder assemblies, 3, and tubing.
The important part of this design is that the spindle arms,

1, are connected to the tractor frame with the tie rods,
2, which make the tractor chassis a link in the system.
The steering action occurs when the steering

cylinders, 3, apply force to the outer spindle arms as
the turn is started. The tie rods, 2, which connect the
spindle arms to the tractor front frame cause the axle
to move under the frame. This action causes the
entire axle assembly to pivot underneath the tractor
on the front axle pivot point.
The pivoting front axle design also permits the axle
to rotate 8 degrees in either direction relative to the
tractor centerline, maintaining the tractor chassis in
a level position and ensuring stable operation on
irregular ground.
8û
41-5
The design of the pivoting front axle mount linkage

and the steering linkage permit articulation of up to
21 degrees relative to the centerline of the tractor
frame.
Axle and wheel steering occur simultaneously. When

steering, the cylinder on the same side as the
direction of the turn will shorten, causing the spindle
and the wheel to rotate into the turn. Simultaneously,
the action of the cylinder causes the tie rod to push
the chassis away from the direction of the turn.
Depending on the speed and rate of turn, the tractor

chassis could initially travel in a straight line while the
wheels turn and the axle swings out from its center 3
position.
The movement of the chassis relative to the turning

wheels gives greater tire-to-tractor clearances
allowing for much tighter turns.
The Supersteert FWD steering cylinder displace-
ment is approximately 31% greater than the standard
steer axles, which increases the lock-to-lock turns by
nearly one turn while providing a much shorter turn
around diameter.
41-6
5
3
30996401
4
4
POWER STEERING DESCRIPTION OF
OPERATION
The power steering system for tractors equipped with
Supersteert front axles, is the same hydraulic
system that is used by the standard FWD equipped
tractors, and the standard two wheel drive tractors.
The power steering system consists of a power
steering control motor, 1, a power steering pump, 2,
a fluid reservoir, 3, a steering cylinder assembly, 4,
and tubing, 5.
41-7
1 2 8
25
7
24
23 9 10
22 3 11
21
4
26
5 13
6
12
14
15
16
17
18
19 20
20000932
5
1. Dust Seal 14. O ring
2. Control valve body 15. Thrust plate
3. Rotating valve spool 16. Rotor and fixed ring
4. Rotating valve sleeve 17. O ring
5. Check valve ball 18. Cover
6. Check valve threaded plug 19. Check valve seat bolt
7. VARISEAL seal 20. Cover retaining bolts
8. Thrust washers 21. Pressure relief valve
9. Thrust bearing 22. Pressure relief valve spring
10. Neutral spring retaining ring 23. Calibration adjustment screw
11. Rotor spool/sleeve trim pin 24. Seal washer
12. Rotor drive shaft 25. Pressure relief valve plug
13. Neutral springs 26. Check valve
41-8
Op. 41 204
POWER STEERING CONTROL MOTOR
SPOOL AND SLEEVE ROTOR AND FIXED RING
1. The spool, 3, and sleeve, 4, Figure 5, constitute 1. The rotor and fixed ring assembly, 16, in the
a rotary valve for selectively changing the fluid pump, provides the Supersteert system with a
passage as well as the direction of the pressur- back-up device for steering, and operates as de-
ized fluid flow. There are three forms of fluid pas- scribed later.
sage. The first is for the NEUTRAL state, the sec-
ond is for RIGHT turning, and the third is for LEFT
CHECK VALVE
turning.
1. The check valve, 5, normally remains closed,
2. The spool, 3, is fitted to rotate within the sleeve, preventing pressurized fluid flow from its “IN”
4, which is fitted into the bore of the valve body, side to its “OUT” side. If fluid pressure is not avail-
2. The leaf springs, 13, extend through the spool, able, the check valve unseats, permitting fluid to
3, and sleeve, 4, and urge the spool to take the be drawn from the reservoir to the “IN” side.
indicated position relative to the sleeve. This
position corresponds to the NEUTRAL state, and
persists as long as the steering wheel is at its DRIVE SHAFT
center position, for straight-ahead driving. 1. The pump drive shaft, 12, is slightly tilted off the
spool axis, and is splined into the pump gear of
3. A diametrically extended pin, 11, is loosely fitted
the rotor and fixed ring pump assembly, 16, by its
to the drive shaft, 12, at the center, and to the
bottom end. As mentioned earlier, this shaft is
sleeve, 4, with some clearance between the pin
connected to the pin, 11, by its top end.
and the radial holes in the spool. When the drive
shaft, spool, and sleeve are in the indicated posi- 2. In the event of a hydraulic fluid pressure loss,
tions, the sleeve and shaft are capable of as turning the steering wheel turns the drive shaft,
much as 10º movement in either direction (CW or 12, due to the spool and pin connection, to rotate
CCW) relative to the spool. By this angular dis- the pump gear, 16. This enables the rotor and
placement, the fluid passage for RIGHT turning fixed ring, 16, to operate as a manually driven
or LEFT turning is introduced. pump to produce hydraulic fluid pressure.
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE

1. The pressure relief valve, 21, prevents excess
fluid pressure buildup within the steering pump
and the circuit. This excess pressure may be due
to the steering wheel being turned to its full travel
and against its stops, or the front wheels being
prevented from turning.
NOTE: The pressure relief valve is adjustable. Turn-
ing the calibration adjustment screw, 23, clockwise
increases pressure, and turning counterclockwise
decreases pressure.
41-9
Op. 41 206
POWER STEERING PUMP
The power steering pump, 1, is mounted on the front
right side of the engine and is driven by the engine oil
pump gear. Other than replacing the pump seals,
there is no maintenance for the pump. Should any of 1
the pump components fail, the entire pump assembly
must be replaced.
30996355
1 1
7
Op. 41 216
STEERING CYLINDERS
The Supersteert steering cylinders, 1, are mounted
transversely under the tractor with the cylinder ends
pinned to the front axle differential housing, and the
rod ends attached to the spindle arms.
41-10
Op. 41 216
POWER STEERING CYLINDERS - 2WD AND
STANDARD 4WD
The power steering cylinders, 1, are mounted
transversely under the tractor with the cylinder end,
2, pinned to the axle and the rod end, 2, pinned to the
axle and the rod attached to the spindle arm, 3.
2 1 3
2WD
8
3
1
2 FWD
9
41-11
6
T
5
P
7 2
8
9
6
10
1. Sleeve 6. Steering Cylinders
2. Spool 7. Check Valve
3. Pressure Relief Valve 8. Rotor and Fixed Ring Gear Pump
4. Reservoir 9. Check Valve
5. Power Steering Pump
Op. 41 206 In the neutral position the fluid flows through the hollow
POWER STEERING OPERATION - spool and returns to the reservoir, 4, via port “T”.
SUPERSTEER Passage to ports “L” and “R”, leading to the cylinders,
FLUID FLOW - NEUTRAL POSITION 6, are blocked by the spool and sleeve. Fluid
contained in the tubes and the cylinders is trapped
Pressurized fluid from the power steering pump and the cylinders remain in a fixed position. In this
enters the valve body at port “P”. The fluid flows position, the front wheels hold at a straight-ahead
through the check valve, 7, past the relief valve, 3, position. The system is fully hydraulic and as such
and through radial holes in the sleeve,1, to the center there is no road feel or front wheel reaction
of the valve spool, 2. transmitted to the steering wheel.
NOTE: There are 24 radial holes in the sleeve, 1, that

index with 12 grooves provided in the spool.
41-12
3 T
P
5 7 2
8
A B
9
F 6
C
E
D
11
Op. 41 200 Fluid enters the cylinder barrel end of the left steering
FLUID FLOW - LEFT TURN cylinder and the piston side of the right steering
cylinder and causes the front wheels to turn left. Fluid
Turning the steering wheel to the left rotates the valve contained in the opposite side of the cylinders returns
spool, 2 and indexes grooves in the spool with holes to the control valve through port “R” and is directed
in the sleeve, 1, allowing fluid flow to enter passages back to the reservoir through port “T”.
“F”, “E”, and “D” in the control valve gear pump, 8.
Since the gear pump is turning counterclockwise, the
fluid flows through passages “C”, “B”, and “A”, to port
“L” and to the power steering cylinders, 6.
41-13
T
3
P
5 7 2
8
A
B 9 6
F
C
E
D
12
Op. 41 200 Fluid flow from the pump, 5, enters the gear pump
FLUID FLOW - RIGHT TURN passages “A”, “B”, and ”C” and flows out Passages
“D”, “E”, and “F” to the valve port “R” to the cylinders,
Turning the steering wheel to the right (clockwise) 6. Fluid in the opposite side of the cylinders returns
rotates the spool, 2, clockwise and indexes the to the control valve through port “L” and is directed
grooves in the spool with holes in the sleeve, 1, for back to the reservoir, 4, through port “T”.
right turn.
41-14
9 1
6
T
3
5
P
7 2
8
13
Op. 41 200 according to the direction that the steering wheel is

MANUAL OPERATION being turned. Fluid from the opposite side of the
In the event of a power steering pump failure or cylinders returns to the control valve. A check valve,
engine shutdown, the steering system can be 9, located in the connecting passage between the “T”
operated manually. and “P” passages, unseats and allows the fluid and
any reservoir fluid that may be required to flow
Turning the steering wheel drives the rotor and fixed through the check valve and connecting passage to
ring gear pump, 8, in the control valve assembly to the “P” port passage, supplying the fluid required for
force fluid to the power steering cylinders, 6, the pressure side of the system.
41-15
6
T
P
5
7 8 2
14
1. Sleeve 6. 6.Cylinder
2. Spool 7. Check Valve Assembly
3. Relief Valve Assembly 8. Gerotor Gear Pump
4. Reservoir 9. Kick Back Check Valve
5. P/S Pump
Op. 41 200 In the neutral position the fluid flows through the
POWER STEERING OPERATION - 2WD hollow spool and returns to the reservoir via port “T”.
AND STANDARD 4WD Passage to ports “L” and “R,” leading to the cylinder,
FLUID FLOW - NEUTRAL POSITION 6, are blocked by the second spool and sleeve. Fluid
contained in the tubes and cylinder is trapped and the
Pressurized fluid from the power steering pump cylinder remains in a fixed position. In this position
enters the valve body at port “P”. The fluid flows the front wheels hold at a straight ahead position.
through the check valve, 7, past the relief valve, 3, Because the system is fully hydraulic, there is no
and through radial holes in the sleeve, 1, to the center road feel or front wheel reaction transmitted to the
of the valve spool, 2. steering wheel.
NOTE: There are 24 radial holes in the sleeve, 1, that

index with 12 grooves provided in the spool.
41-16
T 6
P
5 7 8
2
15
5. P/S Pump
Op. 41 200 flows through passages “C,” “B,” and “A,” to port “L”
FLUID FLOW-LEFT TURN and to the power steering cylinder.
Turning the steering wheel to the left rotates the valve Fluid enters the cylinder barrel end of the cylinder
spool and indexes grooves in the spool with holes in and causes the front wheels to turn left. Fluid
the sleeve allowing fluid flow to enter passages “F,” contained in the cylinder rod side returns to the
“E,” and “D” in the control valve gear pump. Because control valve through port “R” and is directed back to
the gear pump is turning counterclockwise, the fluid the reservoir through port “T”.
41-17
6
T
P
7 2
5
8
16
5. P/S Pump
Op. 41 200 Fluid flow from the pump enters the gear pump
FLUID FLOW-RIGHT TURN passages “A,” “B,” and “C” and flows out passages
“D,” “E,” and “F” to the valve port “R” to the cylinder.
Turning the steering wheel to the right (clockwise) Fluid in the piston side of the cylinder returns to the
rotates the spool clockwise and indexes the grooves control valve through port “L” and is directed back to
in the spool with holes in the sleeve for right turn. the reservoir through port “T”.
41-18
6
T
P
7 2
5
8
17
5. P/S Pump
Op. 41 200 to the direction that the steering wheel is being

MANUAL OPERATION turned. Fluid from the opposite side of the cylinder
returns to the control valve. A check valve, 9, located
In the event of a power steering pump failure or in the connecting passage between the “T” and “P”
engine shut-down, the steering system can be passages, unseats and allows the fluid and any
operated manually. reservoir fluid that may be required to flow through
the check valve and connecting passage to the “P”
Turning the steering wheel drives the rotor and fixed
port passage, supplying the fluid required for the
ring gear pump, 8, in the control valve assembly to
pressure side of the system.
force fluid to the power steering cylinder, 6, according
41-19
TROUBLESHOOTING
Most malfunctions in the steering system can usually 2. Use a jack to raise the front end of the tractor off
be traced to dirt or foreign matter in the system. Dirt the ground, and cycle the steering from stop to
can cause such things as stickiness, erratic stop to check for front axle binding.
operation, or hard steering.
3. Be sure the hydraulic hoses from the pump-to-
Before considering the procedures below, follow the motor, and from the motor-to-cylinder, are
these suggested steps: connected correctly.
1. Check the pump for proper, relief valve action.

See “Pressure Testing,” discussed later in this
section.

Hard Steering 1. Control valve unit
• Control valve unit not aligned Reposition Control valve unit. (If
to steering column loosening its mounting bolts lightens
the handwheel, it means that Control
valve unit was in misalignment).
• Spool-and-sleeve combina- Replace.

tion is seized because of for-
eign matter. Re-tighten to the specified torque
• Over tightening of the end limit.
cap bolts.
2. Oil pump
• The pump is stuck and will Replace oil pump.
not work.
• The pump is worn down. Replace oil pump.
• Pumping performance inad- Test pump performance, and if

equate. necessary, remove the pump. Disas-
semble the pump and inspect the
internal seals. Refer to the pump seal
kit repair section.
3. Relief valve
• The valve is damaged be- Replace control valve assembly.
cause of internal deteriora-
tion.
• Pressure setting is too low. Replace control valve assembly.
Steering wheel will not return to 1. Control valve unit

neutral or will turn by itself
• Spool and sleeve combina- Replace control valve assembly.
tion is stuck and will not ro-
tate.
• Control valve unit not aligned Re-align.

to steering column.
41-20
Cylinder will not follow steering 1. Control valve unit

wheel rotation or will respond
sluggishly.
• Control valve unit has been Repair.
improperly rebuilt, resulting
in valve mistiming.
2. Steering cylinder
• Air is trapped in the cylinder. Bleed air out.
• Internal oil leakage because Replace the seal.

of damaged piston seal.
Steering wheel will “kick back” 1. Control valve unit

• Control valve unit has been Repair.
improperly rebuilt, resulting
in valve mistiming.
2. Piping
• Pipes are improperly con- Correct the pipe connections.
nected to the four ports of
Control valve unit.
Oil leakage
• From the splined con- 1. Leaky oil seal Replace the seal.
nection of column to
• Dirty hydraulic oil. Change the oil.
spool.
• From mated face joints 2. Damaged O ring Replace.

(valve body, spacer
plate, Control valve unit,
end cap).
Front wheel Shimmy 1. Worn pivot shaft and/or bushings 1. Replace pivot shaft and/or bush-
ings
2. Loose tie-rod 2. Tighten tie-rod
3. Loose spindle arm 3. Tighten spindle arm
4. Worn king pin and/or bearing 4. Replace king pin and/or bushing
Loose Spindle 1. Worn bushing 1. Replace bushing

2. Worn spindle shaft 2. Replace spindle shaft
3. Worn or damaged thrust bearing 3. Replace thrust bearing
Hard steering 1. Faulty power steering system 1. Inspect and repair power steer-
ing system
41-21
PRESSURE TESTING
PUMP, STEERING MOTOR, AND RELIEF
VALVE 2
1. With the tractor engine stopped, disconnect one 4
of the hydraulic tubes, 1, at the frame, that run to
the steering cylinder.
1
NOTE: To adapt tee fitting CNH299061 to 7/16-20
UNF female hose, use adapter FNH00227
(7/16-20M UNF x 9/16-18F). Use (#6 JIC-9/16-18M)
plug, and (#6 JIC-9/16-18F) that is included with the
tee fitting CNH299061.
3
18
2. Connect a tee fitting, Tool No. CNH299061, 3,
and a 0-3000 psi pressure gauge, 4, to the end
of the tube, 1, from the steering motor, and cap
the line, 2, leading to the steering cylinder.
3. Install a cap, 2, into the open end of the tee.
4. Start the tractor engine, and allow it to idle. Ob- FNH 00227 -- Adapter
serve the pressure gauge, it should indicate 0 psi.
5. Turn the steering wheel so that the line that the
gauge is connected to receives steering pump
fluid pressure intended for the steering cylinder. CNH 299061 -- Tee
For example, if the gauge is connected to the left
side of the cylinder, as viewed from the opera- 20004751/20004752
tor’s seat, turn the wheel to the left. Observe the 19
gauge and the following:
Test Results
If the pressure gauge reading rises before the
steering wheel is turned, it indicates that the
steering motor will have to be disassembled and
inspected.
If the pressure gauge reading is 1450-1520 PSI
(100-105 bar) for the 2WD and standard 4WD,
when the steering wheel is turned, the steering
pump relief valve is working properly. If the pres-
sure gauge reading is 2030-2100 PSI (140-145
bar) for the Supersteer, when the steering wheel
is turned, the steering pump relief valve is work-
ing properly.
If the pressure gauge reading is below the relief
valve setting, it may indicate that the relief valve is 1
not working properly, or the pump parts are worn.
6. Stop the tractor engine. 30996358
NOTE: The steering system relief valve, 1, is located 20
on the top side of the steering motor. Rotate the relief
valve cap clockwise to increase the pressure and
counterclockwise to decrease the pressure.
41-22
STEERING CYLINDER TEST

After testing the steering motor relief valve, set up the
system as follows to test the steering cylinder:
NOTE: Use same fittings (FNH00227 adapter, and

CNH299061 tee fitting as used in Pump, Steering,
Motor, and Relief Valve test.
1. Remove the caps from the tee fitting, 2, and

steering cylinder connections.
2. Attach the tee fitting, 2, to the steering cylinder
1 2
connection, 1.
3. Start the tractor engine and turn the steering
wheel so that the line which the gauge is con-
nected to will receive the fluid pressure from the 21
pump. Observe the gauge when the steering link-
age reaches the limit of its travel.
4. Repeat the procedure for the other side of the cyl-
inder. Observe the following:
Test Results
If the pressure rises to the relief valve setting of
1450-1520 PSI (100-105 bar) for the 2WD and
standard 4WD, at both stops, it indicates that the
system is operating properly. If the pressure rises
to the relief valve setting of 2030-2100 PSI
(140-145 bar) for the Supersteer, at both stops,
it indicates that the system is operating properly.
Repeat the procedure for the opposite side of the
cylinder.
41-23
LUBRICATION
LUBRICATE EVERY 50 HOURS
1. Right tie rod outer ball joint
2. Right tie rod inner ball joint
3. Left tie rod inner ball joint 3 7 6
2
4. Left tie rod outer ball joint
5. Right steering cylinder outer bushing
6. Right steering cylinder inner bushing
7. Left steering cylinder inner bushing
8
8. Left steering cylinder outer bushing 5
4 1
9. Stabilizer rear ball joint 13
10. Stabilizer front ball joint
10
11. Pivot bearing 11
12. Rear drive shaft
13. Front drive shaft 12 9
IMPORTANT: The Supersteert front axle requires
lubrication every 50 hours at various locations.
22
41-24
OVERHAUL
Op. 41 204
STEERING CONTROL MOTOR REMOVAL
1. Remove the right and left rear hood sections, 1,
and 2, from the tractor.
2 1
30996356
23
the fluid from the power steering reservoir, 2, into
1
30996357
24
3. Disconnect the power steering tubing, 1, from the
power steering control motor, 2. Cap and plug all 4
openings.
4. Remove the four mounting bolts, 3.
1
3
5. Remove the steering column, 4, before removing
the power steering control motor, 2.
6. Remove the power steering control motor, 2.
2
1
30996358
25
41-25
DISASSEMBLY
(See attached for art references)
1. Loosen and remove the seven bolts, 1, from the
cover, 2.
24701
26
2. Remove the cover, 1, by sliding it to the side.
24702
27
NOTE: The inner rotor separates easily from the out-
er pump body rotor. Use care in handling, being care-
ful not to drop or damage these components. 1
3. Remove the rotor fixed ring, 1, and the rotor.
4. Remove and discard the two O rings from the ro-
tor fixed ring.
24703
28
41-26
5. Lift the drive shaft, 1, from the housing, 2.

1
2
24704
29
6. Remove the thrust plate, 1, by sliding it to the side
24705
30
7. Remove the threaded plug in the check valve
hole.
24706
31
41-27
8. Remove and discard the O ring from the control

valve
24707
32
9. Rotate the control valve body and remove the
check valve ball, 1.
NOTE: The check ball, 1 is located in the deepest bolt
hole. Mark the hole after removing the ball.
27856
33
10. Position the control valve body so that the sleeve
control shaft trim pin is in a horizontal position.
11. Push the rotating valve inwards, so that the
valve, the valve seat sleeve and the thrust bear-
ing can be removed from the control valve body.
24709
34
41-28
12. Remove the two thrust washers, the thrust bear-

ing, and the spring retaining ring from the valve
seat sleeve.
24710
35
13. Remove the valve sleeve trim pin, 1, from the ro-
tating valve assembly.
1
24711
36
NOTE: ON assembly, two reference marks were
made on the rotating valve and the sleeve, corre-
sponding to the neutral position maintained by the
springs. Before removing the springs, check that the
marks are clearly visible, otherwise renew them.
24712
37
41-29
14. Remove the rotating valve spool, 1, from the

valve seat sleeve, 2.
2
1
24713
38
15. Carefully remove the centering springs, 1, from
the neutral position in the rotating valve spool, 2.
1
2
24714
39
16. Remove and discard the dust seal and the VARI-
SEAL from the control valve body.
20428
40
41-30
17. Remove the threaded plug and the washer on the

pressure relief valve.
20434
41
18. Remove the pressure relief valve calibration ad-
justment screw.
27859
42
19. Turn the control valve body over and complete
disassembly by removing the spring, 1, and the
pressure relief valve piston, 2.
20436
43
41-31
20. Pressure relief valve components, (order of dis-

assembly-assembly)
1. Pressure relief valve
2. Pressure spring 1 2 3 4 5
3. Calibration adjuster screw
4. Seal washer
5. Plug
27099
44
INSPECTION
1. Thoroughly clean all parts in a suitable solution
and air dry.
2. Lightly lubricate all parts with NH 134 hydraulic
fluid before assembly.
3. Inspect the spool and sleeve for evidence of
sticking, scuffmarks, and any other damage. If
found defective, replace the spool and sleeve as
a matched marked set.
4. Check the pin to make sure it is not bent or
cracked. Check the internal teeth on the spool for
damage.
5. Inspect the inside surfaces of the housing for
wear or damage.
6. Inspect the rotor fixed ring and the rotor for wear.
7. Inspect the drive shaft for wear or damage.
8. Inspect the thrust bearing for wear or damage.
9. Inspect the centering springs for distortion. Cen-
tering springs that have lost their tension should
be replaced.
ASSEMBLY
1. Slide the spool into the sleeve. Position the spool
so that the centering spring slots, 1, and the refer- 2
ence marks, 2, on the spool and the sleeve line 1
up, so that the centering springs can be installed.
24712
45
41-32
2. With the centering springs positioned, insert the

centering springs into the slots in the spool and
sleeve.
24728
46
3. After inserting the springs in the rotating valve,
align and center the springs.
24729
47
4. Fit the neutral position spring retaining ring, 1, on
the valve sleeve, 2. The retaining ring must turn 2
freely on the rotating valve sleeve.
24730
48
41-33
5. Insert the rotating valve trim pin, 1, through the

spool and sleeve, 2. 2
24731
49
6. Install the two thrust washers and the thrust bear-
ing onto the rotating valve.
24732
50
7. Install the thrust washers and the thrust bearing
in the orientation shown. 1
1. External thrust washer
2. Thrust bearing 2
3. Internal thrust washer
4. Rotating valve 3
5. Rotating valve seat sleeve
4
8. Position the control valve body so that the hous-
ing seat on the rotating valve sleeve is positioned 5
horizontally.
24733
51
41-34
9. Lubricate the VARISEAL seal, 3, with grease and

fit on the outer edge of the guide bushing, 1, of
tool 293955, 2.
27824
52
10. Position the special tool 293955 complete with
components, 1, and 2, and the Variseal seal, 3,
on the control valve body, 4.
11. Push in while simultaneously turning the outer
bushing, 1, on the tool, in order to seat the VARI-
SEAL seal, 3, into the control valve body, 4.
12. Using the bushing, 1, press on the shaft, 2, in the
direction indicated by the arrow, in order to over-
come the pressure exerted by the inner spring.
Extract the tool from the control valve body when
the tapered part of the shaft, 2, is released from
the seal, 3. 27825
53
13. Orient the spool and sleeve so that the pin is hori-
zontal to the bench and carefully insert the as-
sembly into the bottom of the control valve body.
Rotate the assembly slightly while inserting it to
ease installation.
24739
54
41-35
NOTE: The check ball is located in the deepest bolt

hole.
14. Rotate the control valve body and insert the

check valve ball into the hole indicated.
24741
55
15. Install the check valve plug into the same hole as
the check valve ball.
NOTE: The check valve plug must be below the sur-
face of the control valve body.
24742
56
16. Lubricate a new O ring and install in the seat of
the control valve body.
24746
57
41-36
17. Fit the thrust plate, so that the holes align with the
holes in the control valve body.
24748
58
18. Make a reference mark on the teeth, 1, of the ro-
tor drive shaft that corresponds with the position 1
of the valve sleeve trim pin, 2. This is important
for correct timing of the rotor.
19. Install the rotor shaft, 1, into the control valve
body, making sure to align the rotor shaft with the 2
trim pin in the sleeve.
59
20. To re-fit the rotor, use the following:
-- Each time the steering control motor is
disassembled, turn the rotor over to limit
wear to the splined coupling area.
-- Observe the drawing for the correct timing
between the rotor, rotor drive shaft, and the
trim pin.
-- Fit the rotor onto the drive shaft, remember-
ing that correct timing is obtained by aligning 1
the teeth, 1, on the trim pin axis plane, with
the centerline of one compartment on the
rotor. 24750
60
41-37
21. Lubricate the two O rings, 1, with clean hydraulic

fluid and install one O ring in each side of the rotor
fixed ring.
24751
61
22. Install the cover, aligning the retaining holes with
those present on the rotor fixed ring.
24753
62
23. Install the special bolt into the check valve hole.
24754
63
41-38
24. Install the remaining six bolts through the cover

and into the control valve body, and tighten in a
diagonal sequence See “Bolt Torque Specifica-
24755
64
25. Install the pressure relief valve piston into the
seat as indicated.
24756
65
26. Install the pressure relief valve spring
24757
66
41-39
27. Install the pressure relief valve calibration screw.

NOTE: Calibration will be done when the unit is
installed on the tractor, to the values discussed later
in the Pressure Testing section.
24758
67
28. Install the plug, 1, and tighten to a torque of
40–60 N⋅m (30–44 ft.-lb.).
20434
68
29. Lightly lubricate and install a new dust seal, 1, in
the seat in the control valve body, 2. 1
24764
69
41-40
Op. 41 204
STEERING CONTROL MOTOR 4
1
INSTALLATION
3
1. Apply anti-seize to the splines of the steering
shaft before installing the steering column into
the steering control motor.
2. Install the power steering control motor, 2, and 2
the steering column, 4, on the tractor and secure
with the four retaining bolts, 3. Turn the steering
wheel back and forth to check for freedom of 1
movement. The spool should turn freely in the 30996358
motor. 70
3. Connect the power steering tubing, 1, to the pow-
er steering control motor, 2. Tighten and torque
the fittings to 50.9-59.7 N⋅m (37.5-44 ft.-lb.)
4. Install the drain bolt, 1, and refill the power steer-
ing fluid reservoir, 2.
5. Start the engine and turn the wheels from stop to
stop until the relief valve begins to operate to
bleed air from the system. 2
6. Check for fluid leaks.
1
30996357
71
7. Install the right and left rear hoods, 1 and 2, onto
the tractor.
2 1
30996356
72
41-41
Op. 41 216
STEERING CYLINDER REMOVAL-4WD
AND SUPERSTEERT
the fluid from the power steering reservoir, 2.
30996392
73
2. Disconnect the power steering hoses, 2, from the
steering cylinders, 1. Cap and plug all openings. 2
1 2
2 1
74
3. Loosen and remove the bolt, 2, and remove the
retaining pin, 1, from the axle housing.
2 1
30996389
75
41-42
4. Retract the steering cylinder slightly to allow the

cylinder end, 1, to be removed from the axle
housing, 2. Remove the steering cylinder end, 1,
from the axle housing, 2.
1 2
30996383
76
5. Loosen and remove the nut, 3, from the steering
arm stud. Remove the rod end of the cylinder
from the steering arm stud.
6. Remove the cylinder from the axle.
7. Repeat steps 1-5 for the cylinder on the opposite
side.
3 3
77
Op. 41 216
STEERING CYLINDER REMOVAL-2WD
30996392
78
41-43
2. Disconnect the power steering hoses, 1, from the

steering cylinder, 2. Cap and plug all openings. 1
20000919
79
retaining pin, 2, from the cylinder end, 3, and the 1
axle housing, 4.
2
20000920
80
retaining pin, 2, from the cylinder rod end, 3, and
the axle housing, 4. 1 2
5. Remove the cylinder from the axle.
20000918 4
81
41-44
17
3 1
16 11
9
8 4 15
14
13
12
10
18
19 7
6
5
2
20000921
82
1. Gland head 11. U ring
2. Cylinder barrel-2WD 12. Bushing
3. Cylinder barrel-4WD 13. Wiper ring
4. Piston rod-2WD 14. Back-up ring
5. Nut 15. Bushing
6. Piston 16. Bushing-4WD
7. Back-up ring 17. Piston rod-4WD
8. O ring-piston 18. Retaining ring-2WD
9. O ring-Gland head 19. Spherical Bearing-2WD
10. O ring
41-45
3 1
11
16 9
8 15
14
13
12
10
7
6
5
20000922
83
1. Gland head 9. O ring-Gland head
2. Cylinder barrel-LH 10. O ring
3. Cylinder barrel-RH 11. U ring
4. Piston rod 12. Bushing
5. Nut 13. Wiper ring
6. Piston 14. Back-up ring
7. Back-up ring 15. Bushing
8. O ring-piston 16. Bushing
41-46
DISASSEMBLY
1. Use a suitable chisel to straighten the cylinder
barrel crimping, from the gland head, 1.
2. Use a spanner wrench to unscrew the gland
head, 1, out of the cylinder barrel, 2 and/or 3. Re-
move the piston rod, 4 and/or 17, and the piston
assembly from the cylinder barrel.
NOTE: Use care when removing the piston assem-
bly from the cylinder barrel, not to damage the finish
on the parts. Remove and discard O rings, wipers,
and seals. Use new during assembly.
3. Remove the piston nut, 5, the piston, 6, the back-

up rings, 7, the piston O ring, 8, the O rings, 9 and
10, the U ring, 11, the bushing, 12, the gland
head, 1, the wiper ring, 13, and the back-up ring,
14, from the piston rod, 4 and/or 17.
INSPECTION
1. Clean all parts in a suitable solvent and air dry.
2. Inspect the inside of the cylinder barrel for excess
wear, scuffing or scarring.
3. Inspect the piston for scuffing, score marks, or
other damage. Replace with new components if
damaged.
4. Use micrometers to measure the inside diameter
of the cylinder barrel, 2, and the outside diameter
of the piston, 1, to determine the working clear-
ance. Replace if the clearance is in excess of 0.7
mm (0.028″).
5. Inspect the cylinder rod for excess wear, straight-
ness, and scoring. Replace if damaged.
20000923
84
6. Inspect the anchor pins, 1, and bearings, 2, for
excess wear and excessive clearance. Replace
the anchor pins and/or bearings if the clearance
is greater than 0.5 mm (0.019″).
20000925
85
41-47
7. Check the rod to gland head clearance. Replace

the bushing if the clearance is in excess of 0.3
mm (0.012″).
20000924
86
NOTE: If the spherical bearing is seized in the bore,
both the spherical bearing and the cylinder barrel
must be replaced.
8. On the two wheel drive model, measure the in-

side diameter of the cylinder spherical bearing
bore, 2, and the diameter of the spherical bear-
ing, 1. Replace the spherical bearing and the cyl-
inder barrel if the clearance, 3, is greater than 0.5
mm (0.019″).
9. On assembly, replace all O rings and seals with
new.
20000926
87
ASSEMBLY
1. If the gland head bushing, 1, needs to be re-
2
placed, use a suitable driver tool, 2, to install the 1
new bushing.
20000927
88
41-48
2. If the pin bushings need to be replaced, lubricate Seam

the bushing bore, 2, and the bushing, 1, with hy-
draulic oil. With the seam positioned as shown,
install the bushing using a suitable driver, 3.
20000929
89
3. On the two wheel drive cylinder, lubricate the
spherical bearing and the bearing bore with
grease, and press the bearing, 1, into the cylinder
bore, 2. Install a new retaining ring in the orienta-
tion shown.
20000930
90
41-49
17
3 1
16 11
9
8 4 15
14
13
12
10
18
19 7
6
5
2
20000921
91
1. Gland head 11. O ring
2. Cylinder barrel-2WD 12. U ring
3. Cylinder barrel-4WD 13. Bushing
4. Piston rod-2WD 14. Wiper ring
5. Piston rod-4WD 15. Back-up ring
6. Nut 16. Bushing
7. Piston 17. Bushing-4WD
8. Back-up ring 18. Retaining ring-2WD
9. O ring-piston 19. Spherical Bearing-2WD
10. O ring-Gland head
41-50
3 1
11
16 9
8 15
14
13
12
10
7
6
5
20000922
92
1. Gland head 9. O ring-Gland head
2. Cylinder barrel-LH 10. O ring
3. Cylinder barrel-RH 11. U ring
4. Piston rod 12. Bushing
5. Nut 13. Wiper ring
6. Piston 14. Back-up ring
7. Back-up ring 15. Bushing
8. O ring-piston 16. Bushing
4. Lubricate and install a new U ring seal, 11, in the 9. Install the piston nut, 5, on the piston rod, 4 and/
gland head, 1. or 17. Tighten the piston nut, 5, to 35 N⋅m (26 ft.-
lb.) on the Supersteert cylinders, and 56 N⋅m
5. Lubricate and install a new wiper ring seal, 13, in
(42 ft.-lb.) on the 2WD and the 4WD cylinders.
the gland head, 1, and secure with a new back-up
ring, 14. 10. Lubricate the cylinder barrel, 2 and/or 3, and the
piston assembly with clean hydraulic oil.
6. Lubricate new O rings, 9 and 10, with petroleum
jelly and install in the O ring grooves on the gland 11. Carefully install the piston assembly into the cyl-
head, 1. inder barrel, 2 and/or 3.
7. Lubricate the new O ring, 8, with petroleum jelly 12. Tighten and torque the gland head, 1, to 127 N⋅m
and install on the piston, 6. Install new back-up (94 ft.-lb.).
rings, 7, on the piston, 6.
8. Install the gland head assembly, the bushing, 12,
and the piston assembly, onto the piston rod, 4
and/or 17.
41-51
13. Stake the piston nut, 1, to prevent loosening.

2 WD and 4 WD
Supersteer
20000928
93
14. Crimp the end of the cylinder barrel, 1, at the
gland head, 2, to prevent the gland head from
loosening.
20000931
94
Op. 41 216
STEERING CYLINDER INSTALLATION-
4WD AND SUPERSTEERT
1. 1.Install the rod end of the steering cylinder onto
the steering arm stud. Install the nuts, 3. Tighten
to the specified torque. See “Bolt Torque Specifi-
cations”, discussed later in this section.
3 3
95
41-52
2. Retract the steering cylinder slightly to allow the

cylinder end, 1, to be installed in the axle hous-
ing, 2. Install the steering cylinder end, 1, into the
axle housing, 2.
1 2
30996383
96
3. Install the retaining pin, 1 and secure with the
bolt, 2. Tighten to the specified torque. See “Bolt
section.
2 1
30996389
97
4. Connect the steering hoses, 2, to the cylinders,
1. Tighten to the specified torque. See “Specifi- 2
cations”, discussed later in this section.
1 2
2 1
98
41-53
5. Install and tighten the drain bolt, 1. Refill the pow-

er steering fluid reservoir, 2.
6. Start the tractor, and operate the Supersteert
system, turning the steering wheel left and right,
to bleed the air from the system. Check for leaks.
7. Check the fluid level in the power steering fluid 2
reservoir, 1, and refill if necessary, to the proper
level.
1
30996392
99
Op. 41 216
STEERING CYLINDER INSTALLATION-2WD
1. Position the cylinder in the axle mounts, and
install the pin, 2, through the axle housing, 4, and
the cylinder rod end, 3. Secure with the retaining 1 2
bolt, 1.
20000918
4
100
2. Install the pin, 2, through the axle housing, 4, and
the cylinder end, 3, and secure with the retaining 1
bolt, 1.
2
20000920
101
41-54
3. Connect the steering hoses, 1, to the cylinder, 2.

Tighten to 25 ft.-lb. (36 N⋅m). 1
20000919
102
4. Install and tighten the drain bolt, 1. Refill the pow-
er steering fluid reservoir, 2.
5. Start the tractor, and operate the steering sys-
tem, turning the steering wheel left and right, to
bleed the air from the system. Check for leaks.
6. Check the fluid level in the power steering fluid
2
reservoir, 1, and refill if necessary, to the proper
level. 1
30996392
103
41-55
Op. 41 206
POWER STEERING PUMP AND
RESERVOIR TANK
PUMP REMOVAL
1. Loosen and remove the drain plug, 1, and drain
30996392
104
2. Loosen the bottom hose clamp, 5, on the power
steering pump suction hose, 1. 5 1
3. Remove the suction hose, 1, from the power
2
steering pump, 2.
4. Remove the pressure tube from the bottom of the
power steering pump, 2.
3
5. Loosen and remove the two retaining nuts, 3, and
the two retaining bolts (not shown), that secure
the power steering pump, 2, to the timing gear
cover, 4.
6. Remove the steering pump, 2, from the timing 30996393
4
gear cover, 4.
105
NOTE: The only service that can be done to the pow-
er steering pump is to replace the O rings and seals.
If any other part of the pump is damaged, the entire
unit must be replaced.
41-56
1
4
3
2
5
6
8
9
10 11
106
DISASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY
1. Place the pump in a soft jawed vise with the drive NOTE: Use the scribe marks made during disassem-
shaft facing downward. bly to assemble the pump in its original orientation.
2. Scribe a line on the pump body for ease of orien-
tation during assembly 1. Install a new shaft seal, 11, and a new snap ring,
10, in the pump housing, 9.
3. Remove the four bolts, 1, securing the cover to
the pump, and remove the cover, 4. 2. Install a new inner, wear plate, 8, into the pump
housing, 9.
4. Remove the seal ring, 3, the back-up ring, 2, and
the outer, wear plate, 5. 3. Install the drive gear, 6, and the driven gear, 7,
into the pump housing, 9.
5. Remove the drive gear, 6, and the driven gear, 7,
from the pump housing, 9. 4. Install a new back-up ring, 2, a new seal ring, 3,
and a new outer, wear plate, 5.
6. Remove the inner, wear plate, 8, from the pump
housing, 9. 5. Install the pump cover, 4, and secure with the four
bolts, 1. Tighten and torque the bolts, 1, to 21 –
7. Remove the snap ring, 10, and the shaft seal, 11, 27 N⋅m (16 – 20 ft.-lb.).
from the pump housing, 9.
INSPECTION AND REPAIR

1. Wash all parts in a clean solvent and air dry.
2. Discard all used O rings and seals, and use new
during assembly.
3. Inspect all parts for damage or wear. If damaged
or worn, replace the entire pump assembly.
41-57
Op. 41 206
5 1
PUMP INSTALLATION
1. Install the power steering pump, 2, onto the tim- 2
ing gear cover, 4.
2. Install and tighten the two retaining nuts, 3, and the
two retaining bolts (not shown), to secure the pow-
er steering pump, 2, to the timing gear cover, 4. 3
3. Install and tighten the pressure tube to the bot-
tom fitting on the power steering pump, 2.
4. Connect the suction hose, 1, to the power steer-
ing pump, 2. 30996393 4
5. Install the bottom hose clamp, 5, to the bottom of 107
the suction hose, 1.
6. Install the drain bolt, 1, and fill the power steering
reservoir, 2, with clean fluid.
30996392
108
41-58
STEERING TUBES
The Supersteert steering tubes should not be
switched with any other tractor. All mounting clamps
should be correctly installed and properly secured to 1
prevent loosening.
The tube fittings, 1, must be tightened to the specified

torque of 22-29 ft.-lb. (29-39 N⋅m).
1
30996358
109
41-59
41-60
Chapter 1 - 2WD Front Axle
CONTENTS

44 000 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44-2
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44-5
44 103 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44-12
44-1
Op. 44 100
SPECIFICATIONS
King Pin Inclination 8_

Toe-In 0±3/16 in. (0±5 mm)
Caster (Fixed) 0_
Camber (Fixed) 3_
Pivot Shaft to Bushing Clearance .001-.006 in. (.02-.15 mm)
Wear Limit .012 in. (0.3 mm)
Front Axle End Play .008 in. (0.2 mm)

4T, 4 3.6-5.8 4.9-7.9
M6 7T, 7 1.0 5.9-9.4 7.9-12.7 ------ ------ ------
8T, 8, 11 7.2-10 9.8-13.6
4T 7.2-14 9.8-19 12-17 16.3-23
M8 7T 1.25 17-22 23-29.8 1.0 19-27 25.7-36.6
8T 20-26 27.1-35.2 22-31 29.8-42
4T 20-25 27.1-33.9 20-29 27.1-39.3
M10 7T 1.5 34-40 46.1-54.2 1.25 35-47 47.4-63.7
8T 38-46 51.5-62.3 40-52 54.2-70.5
4T 28-34 37.9-46.1 31-41 42-55.6
M12 7T 1.75 51-59 69.1-79.9 1.25 56-68 75.9-92.1
8t 57-66 77.2-89.4 62-75 84-101.6
4T 49-56 66.475.9 52-64 70.5-86.7
M14 7T 2.0 81-93 109.8-126 1.5 90-106 122-143.6
8T 96-109 130.1-147.7 107-124 145-168
4T 67-77 90.8-104.3 69-83 93.5-112.5
M16 7T 2.0 116-130 157.2-176.2 1.5 120-138 162.6-187
8T 129-145 174.8-196.5 140-158 189.7-214.1
4T 88-100 119.2-136 100-117 136-158.5
M18 7T 2.0 150-168 203.3-227.6 1.5 177-199 239.8-269.6
8T 175-194 237.1-262.9 202-231 273.7-313
4T 108-130 146.3-176.2 132-150 178.9-203.3
M20 7T 2.5 186-205 252-277.8 1.5 206-242 279.1-327.9
8T 213-249 288.6-337.4 246-289 333.3-391.6
44-2
Op. 44 101
The standard 2WD front axle on the TC35, TC40 and
TC45 consists of a center axle member, 1, and two
outer axle sections, 4. The center member is
mounted centrally to the frame by a pivot shaft, 5.The
axle rotates on the pivot shaft, thereby maintaining
the tractor chassis in a level position, and ensuring
stable operation even on irregular ground.
Each outer axle section is attached to the center axle

section by two bolts. The front axle is adjustable from
48-72 in. (122-183 cm) in width, by removing the two 1
bolts on each side, sliding the outer axles outward, 1. Axle Center Section
and replacing the two bolts. 2. Spindle Arm
3. Tie Rod
4. Outer Axle Section
5. Pivot Shaft
6. Tractor Frame
The outer axle sections, 1, accept the front wheel

spindles, 2. The spindles, 2, are supported by bush-
ings, 3, in the outer axle sections, and a thrust bear-
ing, 4, at the lower end of the axle section, supports
the vertical load.
The spindle, 2, acts as a king pin and keeps a

constant inclination to the axle.
The top of the spindles are splined, to accept the

spindle arms, 5, which are retained by a clamp bolt,
6. The wheel hub, 7, is supported on the wheel
spindle by two opposed tapered roller bearings, 8.A
nut, 9, is used on the spindle to retain the outer cone
and roller bearing assembly, and to provide a method
of bearing pre-load adjustment.
2
1. Outer Axle Assembly
2. Spindle
3. Bushing
4. Thrust Bearing
5. Spindle Arm
6. Clamp Bolt
7. Hub
8. Tapered Roller Bearings
9. Nut
44-3
The right and left spindle arms, 4, are connected to-

gether with an adjustable tie rod, 3. The tie rod adjust- 2
ment is also used for making toe-in adjustments. The
power steering cylinder assembly, 1, is located on the
front axle, 2, and tie rod, 3.
4
1
30000956
TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLE POSSIBLE CAUSE

Front Wheel Shimmy Worn spindle shaft and/or bushings
Worn pivot shaft and/or bushings
Loose wheel hub nut
Loose spindle arm
Loose tie rod
Loose or damaged thrust bearing
Worn king pin and/or bearing
Hard Steering Spindle bushings lack lubrication
Damaged spindle shaft and/or bushings
Worn or damaged thrust bearings
Faulty power steering system
Loose Spindle Worn or damaged bushings
Worn or damaged spindle shaft
Worn or damaged thrust bearing
44-4
OVERHAUL
REMOVAL
1. Drain the hydraulic fluid from the power steering
reservoir into a suitable container.
2. Disconnect the power steering hoses from the
steering cylinder. Cap and plug all openings.
3. Place a floor jack under the transmission
housing.
4. Raise the front end of the tractor just enough to
take the weight off of the front axle.
5. Place jack stands under the engine side frame
rails.
6. Remove the axle pivot front bearing holder, 1,
from the frame.
1
30000959
4
7. Remove the axle pivot rear bearing holder, 1,
from the frame, and carefully roll the front axle out
from under the tractor. 1
30000960
44-5
Disassembly
3 6 3
9
9
7
5
5
8
7
6 4
2
10
20000957
6
1. Tractor Frame 6. Bushing
2. Front Axle Assembly 7. Thrust Washer
3. Bearing Holder 8. Shims
4. Outer Axle Assembly 9. Grease Fitting
5. Oil Seal 10. Bolt-Outer Axle Mounting
1. Loosen and remove the wheel mounting bolts, 1,

and remove the front wheels, 2, from the hub, 3.
1
3
30000961
44-6
2. Remove the retaining bolt, 1, and the steering

cylinder pin, 2, from both ends of the steering cyl-
inder. Remove the steering cylinder from the 1
axle. 2
3. Remove the cotter pin, 3, and the castle nut, 4, 3
from the tie rod, 5. Repeat for the opposite side.
5
4
30000962
8
4. Remove the ball joint pin, 3, from the spindle arm,
2. Repeat for the opposite side. Remove the tie
rod, 1, from the spindle arms, 2.
9
5. Remove the outer axle mounting bolts, 1, and re-
move the outer axle and spindle assembly, 2, 3
from the main axle housing, 3.
2
1
30000963
10
44-7
6. Loosen and remove the three wheel cap retain-

ing bolts, 11, and remove the wheel cap, 1.
10
7. Remove and discard the wheel cap gasket, 2.
8. Remove the cotter pin, 12, the castle nut, 3, and
the washer, 4, from the axle shaft. 7
9. Remove the hub, 6, and the inner and outer 6
wheel bearings, 7 and 5, as an assembly.
10. Remove and discard the seal, 9, from the hub, 6.
4
11. Remove the inner wheel bearing, 7, and the outer
1
wheel bearing, 5, from the hub, 6. 2
9
11
5
3
12
11
12. Loosen and remove the spindle arm clamp bolt,
6, lock washer, 7, and nut, 8, from the spindle
arm, 1.
13. Remove the spindle arm, 1, from the spindle, 2.
14. Remove the spindle, 2, from the axle. 8 7
15. Remove the shim, 9, the spacer, 10, the thrust
bearing, 3, the thrust washers, 4, and the O ring,
5. Discard the O ring, 5.
9 1
10
6
2 3
4
12
44-8
INSPECTION
13
1. Pivot Pin 4. Bushings
2. Bearing Holder-Front 5. Shims
3. Bearing Holder-Rear 6. Oil Seal
1. Check the end play of the front axle pivot pin, 1. (.02-.15 mm). If the clearance is .012 in. (0.3
If the end play is .008 in. (.2 mm) add shims, 5, mm), the bushings, 4, will need to be replaced.
to the front bearing holder, 2, as required.
3. Check the inner and outer wheel bearings for
2. Measure the pivot pin, bearing journal diameter, roughness , wear or uneven rotation when turned
and the bushing, 4, inside diameter, to determine by hand. Replace as necessary.
the working clearance. Normal pivot shaft to
NOTE: When replacing wheel bearings, replace the
bushing clearance should be .001-,006 in.
bearings and the bearing race as a set.
44-9
4. Check the spindle bushings, 1, for excess wear

or damage. Replace the bushings as required.
NOTE: If Bushings, 1, are replaced, install to a re-
cess depth of .315 in. (8 mm).
5. Inspect the spindle thrust bearings for excess

wear or damage. Replace as necessary.
6. Inspect the spindle shank and axle bearing
journals for excess wear or damage. Replace as
necessary.
14
ASSEMBLY
1. Lubricate a new O ring, 5, with petroleum jelly,
and install into the spindle tube.
2. Lubricate with grease, the thrust bearing, 3, the
thrust washers, 4, the shim, 9, and the 8 7
spacer, 10.
3. Install the spindle, 2, into the spindle tube with the
thrust bearing, 3, the thrust washers, 4, the shim,
9, and the spacer, 10. 9 1
4. Install the spindle arm, 1, onto the spindle, 2, and
secure with the spindle arm clamp bolt, 6, the 10
lock washer, 7, and the nut, 8. Tighten the nut, 8.
6
2 3
4
15
44-10
5. Lubricate and install a new seal, 9, in the hub, 6.

6. Pack the inner and outer wheel bearings, 7 and
5, with grease and install into the hub, 6.
10
7. Install the hub, 6, onto the axle shaft.

8. Install the washer, 4, and the castle nut, 3, on the 7
axle shaft. Tighten the castle nut, 3, slowly while 6
rotating the hub, 6, until the hub begins to drag.
Back off the castle nut to the next castellation.
4
9. Install a new cotter pin, 12. 1
10. Install a new wheel cap gasket, 2, and the wheel 2
cap, 1. 9
11. Secure the wheel cap, 1, with the three retaining 11
bolts, 11. Tighten the bolts.
5
3
12
16
12. Install the outer axle and spindle assembly, 2,
into the main axle housing, 3, and secure with the 3
retaining bolts, 1. Tighten the bolts.
2
1
30000963
17
13. Install the ball joint pins, 3, of the tie rod, 1,
through the spindle arms, 2.
18
44-11
14. Install the castle nut, 4, onto the tie rod, 5. Tighten
the nut, 4, to 203 - 246 ft.-lbs. (275 - 333 N⋅m)
and secure with the cotter pin, 3. Repeat for the 1
opposite side. 2
15. Install the steering cylinder onto the axle. Install 3
the cylinder retaining pin, 2, and secure with the
retaining bolt, 1. 5
4
30000962
19
16. Install the wheels, 2, onto the hub, 3. Secure with
the wheel mounting bolts, 1. Torque the wheel
mounting bolts to 125 ft.-lb. (169 N⋅m). 1
3
30000961
20
Op. 44 103
INSTALLATION 1
1. Install the axle pivot rear bearing holder, 1, onto
the frame.
2. Carefully roll the axle under the tractor, and posi-
tion on the rear bearing holder.
30000960
21
44-12
3. Install the axle pivot front bearing holder, 1, onto

the axle, and the frame.
4. Tighten all the axle pivot bearing holder mounting
bolts.
5. Remove the jack stands and lower the tractor to
the floor.
6. Remove the caps and plugs from the steering
hoses and the steering cylinder fittings.
7. Connect the power steering hoses to the steering
cylinder, and tighten the fittings. 1
8. Fill the power steering reservoir to the proper lev- 30000959
el with NH 134 hydraulic fluid. 22
44-13
44-14
Chapter 1 -- Electrical
CONTENTS

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-4
55 100 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-4
Component Location and Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-4
55 100 Wire Harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-6
Electrical System Components -- Description and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-7
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-7
Main Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-9
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-10
Key Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-11
Light Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-13
55 404 Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-18
55 404 Taillight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-19
Rear Work Light (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-19
Hazard Light Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-20
Hazard Light Switch Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-21
55 408 Transmission Range Safety Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-23
Transmission Range Safety Switch Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-24
55 408 Rear (Main) PTO Safety Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-25
Rear (Main) PTO Safety Switch Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-25
55 408 Mid PTO Safety Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-26
55 408 Seat Safety Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-27
55 408 Parking Brake Safety Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-29
Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-30
Headlight and Neutral Start Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-33
Diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-36
Operator Safety Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-38
Glow Plug Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-40
55 201 Engine Glow Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-41
NASO Hazard/Directional Signal Converter and Flasher Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-44
55 410 Fuel Level Sending Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-47
Fuel Shutoff Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-50
55-1
55 414 Engine Oil Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-52

Engine Coolant Temperature Switch (Economy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-53
Engine Coolant Temperature Sending Unit (Deluxe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-53
Hi/Low Transmission Range Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-55
Hi/Low Transmission Range Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-58
Electric Cruise Control Switch (Deluxe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-61
Cruise Control Magnet (Deluxe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-63
Cruise Control Brake Release Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-65
Instrument Panel -- Component Operation and Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-67
Instrument Panel (Economy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-68
Instrument Panel (Deluxe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-69
Instrument Panel Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-70
Instrument Panel Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-70
Fuel Gauge Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-70
Fuel Gauge Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-70
Temperature Gauge Removal (Deluxe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-72
Temperature Gauge Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-72
Tachometer Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-73
Tachometer Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-74
PTO Speed Indicator Adjustment (Deluxe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-74
Instrument Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-75
Circuit Diagrams and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-77
Alternator Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-170
Alternator Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-171
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-173
55 301 Description of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-173
Preliminary Alternator Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-176
Alternator Component Testing and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-182
Starter Motor Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-192
Starter Motor Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-193
55 201 Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-195
Description of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-195
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-195
Electrical Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-205
55-2

4T, 4 3.6-5.8 4.9-7.9
M6 7T, 7 1.0 5.9-9.4 7.9-12.7 ------ ------ ------
8T, 8, 11 7.2-10 9.8-13.6
4T 7.2-14 9.8-19 12-17 16.3-23
M8 7T 1.25 17-22 23-29.8 1.0 19-27 25.7-36.6
8T 20-26 27.1-35.2 22-31 29.8-42
4T 20-25 27.1-33.9 20-29 27.1-39.3
M10 7T 1.5 34-40 46.1-54.2 1.25 35-47 47.4-63.7
8T 38-46 51.5-62.3 40-52 54.2-70.5
4T 28-34 37.9-46.1 31-41 42-55.6
M12 7T 1.75 51-59 69.1-79.9 1.25 56-68 75.9-92.1
8t 57-66 77.2-89.4 62-75 84-101.6
4T 49-56 66.475.9 52-64 70.5-86.7
M14 7T 2.0 81-93 109.8-126 1.5 90-106 122-143.6
8T 96-109 130.1-147.7 107-124 145-168
4T 67-77 90.8-104.3 69-83 93.5-112.5
M16 7T 2.0 116-130 157.2-176.2 1.5 120-138 162.6-187
8T 129-145 174.8-196.5 140-158 189.7-214.1
4T 88-100 119.2-136 100-117 136-158.5
M18 7T 2.0 150-168 203.3-227.6 1.5 177-199 239.8-269.6
8T 175-194 237.1-262.9 202-231 273.7-313
4T 108-130 146.3-176.2 132-150 178.9-203.3
M20 7T 2.5 186-205 252-277.8 1.5 206-242 279.1-327.9
8T 213-249 288.6-337.4 246-289 333.3-391.6
55-3
INTRODUCTION
Op. 55 100
DESCRIPTION
The TC Series Class 3 electrical system is a 12-volt
negative (--) ground system consisting of 3 main
wiring harnesses.
COMPONENT LOCATION AND FUNCTION

2 4 3 6D
8
7
1
6B
6C
300002187
6A
1
24 21 5 18
23 9
16
22
300002188 19 17 E
2
14 15 B 10 11
D
A
300002189
13 12 F 19 20 C
55-4
1. Battery - Located under the hood, in front of the switches the flashing warning (hazard) lights on
radiator; electrical power source. Group 24F and off.
2. Main Fuse (40 Amp.) - Located on the left side 12. Starter – Located on the left side of the engine;
of the engine directly above the starter; protects rotates the engine for starting.
the entire electrical system from damage due to
13. Alternator (40 Amp.) – Located on the left side
excessive current.
of the engine; generates power to charge the
3. Fuse Block – Located underneath instrument battery.
panel; contains fuses that protect individual
14. Engine Oil Pressure Switch – Located in front
circuits from damage due to excessive current.
of the cylinder head; provides warning of low
4. Relay/Diode Panel – Located behind the left engine oil pressure.
side panel; houses relays utilized by individual
15. Engine Coolant Temperature Sending Unit –
circuits and diodes which direct current within a
Located in the thermostat housing on the front
circuit to allow the use of one wire within multiple
left side of the engine; warns the operator of high
circuits to control a relay.
operating temperatures.
5. Key Switch – Located on the right side of the
16. Fuel Level Sending Unit – Located inside the
operator’s console; used to switch battery power
fuel tank; sends a signal indicating fuel level to
on or off to the tractor’s electronic circuits, supply
the instrument panel.
power to the engine glow plugs, or to start the
tractor. 17. Fuel Shutoff Solenoid – Located on the right
side of the engine; shuts off the fuel flow to the
6. Safety Start Switches (4) – Shuttle for 12x12
injection pump to stop the engine.
transmission and range gear (A)HST transmis-
sion, rear PTO (B), mid PTO (if equipped) (C), 18. Engine Glow Plugs – Located on the right side
and the operator’s seat switch (D); will not allow of the cylinder head, adjacent to the fuel
the tractor to start with the transmission or the injectors; aid in engine startup by warming the air
PTO engaged, or without an operator in the in the combustion chamber.
operator’s seat.
19. Parking Brake Switch – Located under the right
NOTE: The parking brake switch also lights the (A) (standard), left (B)(deluxe), platform; actu-
parking brake indicator light on the instrument panel ates with the parking brake mechanism;
when the parking brake is engaged. indicates when the parking brake is engaged by
illuminating a light on the instrument panel.
NOTE: The tractor may be started without the 20. Brake HST Cruise Release Switch – (Deluxe
operator being seated when the parking brake lever Only) – Located under the left near the brake
is engaged. pedal pivot shaft; releases the HST speed control
when the brakes are applied.
7. Headlights – Located on the front grill of the
tractor; Economy models have two headlights, 21. HST Cruise Control Switch (Deluxe Only) –
Deluxe models have four headlights; headlights Located on the right fender; controls current to
illuminate the area in front of the tractor. the speed control magnet.
8. Taillights/Directional Signals/ Flasher Warn- 22. HST Control Magnet (Deluxe Only) – Located
ing (Hazard) Lights – Located at the rear of the on the right transmission side of the steering
tractor, on both sides of the ROPS; provide column; locks the HST linkage in place to set
warning during transportation and emergency. constant transmission speed.
9. Instrument Panel – Located in the center of the 23. Rear Work Light (50 Watt Halogen) (Optional)
dash panel; houses gauges and indicator lights – Located on the right side of the ROPS; power
that monitor tractor functions. leads for the light are provided on the right fender
wiring harness.
10. Light Switch – Located on the left side of the
dash panel; switches the headlight, taillight and 24. HST Hi/Lo Range Selector Switch (Deluxe
the instrument panel lights on or off. Only) – Located on the right fender; momentary
toggle switch used to select either of the two
11. Hazard (Flashing Warning Lights) Switch – different HST gear ranges. Located on optional
Located on the left side of the dash panel; front two spool valve control handle.
55-5
Op. 55 100 GROUNDS

D. Left Side behind rear tire on HPL Housing
WIRING HARNESSES E. Negative battery post to the right side of the frame.
A. Hood F. Starter Mounting Bolt
B. Front Main (includes engine and relay areas)
C. Rear Chassis
55-6
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM COMPONENTS –

DESCRIPTION AND TESTING
WARNING
Before working on any component of the
electrical system, the negative (--) battery cable
should be disconnected from the battery, as
electrical shock or damage to the system
components may occur. Some testing requires
12-volt power; use caution whenever power is
used.
BATTERY
Battery Description
The tractor is equipped with a BCI group 24F, 12-volt
battery with a minimum cold cranking ability of 600
amps at 0°F (-18°C).
Make sure the battery connections are tight and free

of corrosion. A solution of baking soda and water may
be used to wash the outside surface and terminals of
the battery when necessary. However, make sure the
solution does not get inside the battery. After
cleaning, wash the battery with clean water, then 30997558
apply a small amount of petroleum jelly to the
terminals to prevent corrosion. 4
In freezing temperatures, a good battery charge

must be maintained. If the battery becomes
discharged or run down, the electrolyte becomes
weak and may freeze, causing damage to the case.
If you must add water, use distilled water. Add the
water just before using the tractor so that the water
will mix with the electrolyte during the charging
process, thus preventing the water from freezing.
To determine the battery charge, check the specific

gravity of the electrolyte.
55-7
Checking the Electrolyte Level

NOTE: Check the battery electrolyte level after every
50 hours of operation.
WARNING
Always check the electrolyte level with the tractor
engine off, as an explosive gas is produced inside
the battery when the alternator is charging. Do not
use an exposed flame and do not smoke when
checking the battery electrolyte level.
To check the battery electrolyte level:

1. Clean the top of the battery, then remove the vent
plugs.
2. Add distilled water if the electrolyte level is low.
The level is correct when the liquid is 1/4″ (6.35
mm) above the plates.
NOTE: Keep distilled water in a non-metallic
container that is clean and well-covered.
3. Install the vent plug after making sure the vent
holes are not blocked. At below freezing
temperatures, run the engine for a period of time
after adding water, allowing the battery to charge,
which prevents the water from freezing.
Battery Removal
1
1. Release and lift the tractor engine cover.
2. Disconnect the negative (--) battery cable.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) battery cable.
4. Remove the hardware, 1, securing the battery.
5. Carefully remove the battery from the tractor.
IMPORTANT: Crossing the battery terminals may
cause damage to the electrical system.
Battery Installation
30002190
NOTE: When replacing the battery, use only a BCI
group 24F, 12volt battery. Make sure the battery fits 5
the battery tray correctly and is properly secured with
the mounting hardware. Never use a battery that
does not fit properly in the battery tray. Do not
overtighten the battery securing hardware. Do not
overtighten the battery cables.
1. Place the battery in the battery tray with the
battery posts towards the front of the tractor.
2. Use the battery hold down hardware, 1, to secure
the battery in the battery tray.
3. Connect the positive (+) cable to the positive
terminal.
4. Connect the negative (--) cable to the negative
terminal.
5. Lower and secure the tractor engine cover.
55-8
MAIN FUSE
The main fuse is a 40-amp maxifuse, 1, located on 1
the left-hand side of the engine and positioned above
the starter. This fuse protects the tractor’s entire
electrical system.
30997565
6
To replace the main fuse:
2
1. Unplug the connector to expose the fuse.
2. Remove the old fuse, 2, from the fuse holder and
replace.
IMPORTANT: Always replace this fuse with a similar
40 amp fuse; DO NOT increase amperage rating.
19998319
55-9
FUSE BLOCK
NOTE: The fuse block is configured the same for
both models except for the 5 th fuse position. The
economy model (shown) uses a 5-amp fuse, which
is used for alternator excitation. The deluxe model
uses a 7.5 amp fuse, which is used for alternator
excitation, the cruise relay, and transmission shift
control.
To gain access to the fuse panel, remove the two
instrument panel mounting screws, 1, lift the 1
instrument panel from the body panel. The fuse block
is located on the left side of the instrument panel
opening. Always replace blown fuses with the size
specified for that circuit.
10998361
8
From left to right as viewed from above the tractor,
the fuse block contains the following fuses:
Fuse Size Circuit Protected

1 7.5 amp Voltage regulator, Glow plug
auto heat control
2 8 amp Operator safety system, fuel
Circuit solenoid
Breaker
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3 10 amp Turn signal, rear work light
4 7.5 amp Instrument Panel, main light-
ing control 10998315
5 5 amp Alternator excitation 9

6 10 amp Hazard flasher lights
7 15 amp Front Headlights
55-10
KEY SWITCH
Key Switch Location and Description
The key switch is located on the right side of the
operator’s console. The key switch has three 1
key-operated positions, which are: STOP, 1,
HEAT/ACCESSORY/RUN, 2, and START, 3. Turning 2
the key clockwise from the stop position will align the 3
electrical contacts within the key switch. With the
contacts aligned, the circuit is closed and the battery
current will flow through the circuit.
In the STOP position, 1, there is no battery power

supplied to electrical circuits and the key may be
removed from the switch to prevent unauthorized 10998333
use of the tractor. The STOP position, 1, also stops
the tractor engine, when running. When the key is in 10
the HEAT/ACC/RUN position, 2, battery current
flows to the engine glow plugs to aid in starting the
engine when the engine is cold. The HEAT/ACC/
RUN position, 2, also allows current to flow from the
battery to the tractor accessories without the engine
running. The switch will also be in this position while
the tractor is running. When the key is in the START
position, 3, power is supplied to the starter motor to
crank and start the engine. The key switch is spring
loaded and will return from the START position,3, to
the HEAT/ACC/RUN position, 2.
The key switch is not serviceable and must be

replaced if troubleshooting determines the switch is
defective.
Key Switch Removal

1. Raise the tractor engine cover.
2. Disconnect the negative (--) battery cable from
the negative (--) battery terminal.
3. Remove the two retaining bolts, 1, from the inside
of the tractor firewall, to loosen the right side
cover, 2.
30002141
11
55-11
4. Remove the two retaining bolts, 1, from the left

side cover of the tractor.
5. Carefully turn the right cover to reveal the key
switch.
6. Disconnect the key switch from the wiring
harness.
7. Remove the plastic retaining nut on the key
switch to remove the switch from the right cover. 1
30002142
12
Key Switch Terminal Identification
A Start
B 12 V Input
C ACC Terminal
D 12 V Input
Key Switch Testing

Use an ohmmeter to test each position of the key
switch for electrical continuity.
Stop Position (Not Shown) 30002125

1. With the key switch in the stop position, continuity 13
should not exist between any of the terminals. If
continuity exists between any of the terminals
while the switch is in the “stop” position, the key
switch is defective and needs replaced.
Heat/ Accessory/ Run Position
When the key switch in the “Heat/ ACC/ Run”
position, continuity should exist between the “B” and
“C” terminals.
1. Make sure the switch is in the “Heat/ACC/Run”

position.
2. Using an ohmmeter, touch one of the test probes
to terminal “B”. Touch the other test probe to
terminal “C”.
3. Observe the ohmmeter. The ohmmeter should
show little or no resistance indicating that 30002126
continuity exists between terminal “B” and
terminal “C”. If continuity does not exist between 14
terminal B” and terminal “C”, the key switch is
defective and needs replaced.
NOTE: Continuity should not exist between
terminals A and D in the “Heat/ACC/Run” position.
55-12
Start Position
Make sure the key switch is in the “Start” position.

to terminal “B”. Touch the other test probe to
terminal “C”.
show little or no resistance indicating that
continuity exists between terminal “B” and
terminal “C”. If continuity does not exist between
terminal “B” and terminal “C”, the key switch is
30002126
15
3. Following the procedure outlined in the previous
2 steps, test terminals “A” and “D”. With the Key
in the “Start” position, continuity should exist
between the “A” and “D” terminals.
30002127
16
LIGHT SWITCH
Light Switch Description

The light switch, 1, is a three-position, rocker-type
switch located on the left-hand side of the tractor
dash panel.
The three positions of the light switch are:
1 OFF POSITION
(light switch pushed all the way rearward)
2 TAILLIGHT/ INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHT
(middle position)
3 HEADLIGHTS/ INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHT/ 1
TAILLIGHT
(light switch pushed all the way forward)
The light switch contains an internal indicator bulb

that will illuminate when the switch is in any position
other than the “off” position. 10998226
The tractor lighting system will not operate unless the 17

key switch is in the “ACC/RUN” position.
55-13
Light Switch Removal

the left side of the firewall of the tractor.
30003983
18
5. Disconnect the wiring harness from the light
switch.
6. Remove the light switch from the dash panel by
releasing the locking tabs on the switch and
pushing the switch through the dash panel.
1
30002142
19
Light Switch Testing
Use an ohmmeter to test each position of the light
switch for electrical continuity.
“Off” Position
1. In the “off” position, continuity should exist
between terminals 7 and 3 only.
to terminal 7. Touch the other test probe to
terminal 3.
continuity exists between terminal 7 and terminal
3. If continuity does not exist between terminal 7
and terminal 3, the light switch indicator bulb is
defective and the switch needs replaced. 30002206
20
55-14
“Taillight/ Instrument Panel” Position (middle

position)
1. Using an ohmmeter in the same manner as
described in the previous two steps, touch one of
the test probes to terminal 2. Touch the other test
probe to terminal 3.
and terminal 3, the light switch is defective and
needs replaced.
30002205
to terminal 7. Touch the other test probe to 21
terminal 2.
30002204
22
terminal 3.
30002206
23
55-15
“Headlight Position” (forward position)

1. Push the light switch in the forward position.
terminal 3.
needs replaced.
30002205
24
terminal 6.
needs replaced.
30002207
25
terminal 2.
30002204
26
55-16

terminal 3.
30002206
27
Light Switch Installation
1. Connect the wiring harness, 1, to the light switch,
2. 2
2. Insert the light switch into the dash panel until the
locking tabs click into place.
3. Install the left side panel using the four retaining 1
bolts.
4. Connect the negative (--) battery cable to the
negative (--) battery terminal.
5. Lower the tractor engine cover.
30003984
28
55-17
Op. 55 404
HEADLIGHT
Description
NOTE: The headlight assembly varies between the
1
Deluxe and Economy models. The Economy models
(not shown) are equipped with two head lamps while
the Deluxe models have four.
2000
10999204
29
Replacement
NOTE: Replacement of the light bulbs for the
economy models (not show) and the deluxe models
are the same.

3. Rotate the socket, 1, counterclockwise a quarter
turn and remove the socket from the housing, 2.
4. Remove the bulb assembly, 3, from the socket,
1.
5. Place a new bulb in the socket and reinstall the
socket into the housing. 3 2
NOTE: Both models use a size 894 halogen bulb.
1
30
55-18
Op. 55 404
TAILLIGHT
Description
The taillights are located on the left and right rear
fenders. The taillights illuminate the rear of the tractor 1
to provide warning to approaching vehicles.
NOTE: The same procedure is used for both sides.
To replace a taillight bulb:

1. Remove the two screws, 1, retaining the taillight
lens and remove the lens.
2. Pull on the bulb, 2, to remove the old bulb.
3. Insert the new bulb, 2, into the socket. 10998240
NOTE: Replace with a GE168-12-volt bulb. 31
FLASHER WARNING LIGHT

Description
The flasher warning light illuminates the tractor to 3
provide warning to approaching vehicles of a slow 2
moving vehicle. The flasher warning light should be
used when in low visibility situations or at slow
speeds on public roads.
NOTE: The same procedure is used for both sides.
To replace a flasher bulb:

1. Remove two screws, 1, from the light assembly.
2. Rotate the bulb, 3, counter clockwise to remove 10998322
from the socket.
32
3. Push down on the new bulb, 3, and rotate
clockwise to insert into the socket.
NOTE: Replace with a 1156 bulb.
REAR WORK LIGHT (Optional)
Description
The optional (50 watt) halogen work light, 1, is 1
mounted to the ROPS and is operated by a
push-button switch located on the light. To illuminate
the rear work light, the key must be in the “ACC/RUN”
position.
NOTE: To mount rear work to ROPS light bracket

#86401040 is required.
To replace a rear mounted work light sealed beam:

1. Remove the four screws in the lens cover.
10998239
2. Unplug the sealed beam from the wire leads.
33
3. Replace with a new sealed beam.
NOTE: Replace with sealed beam #SP4929405DS.
55-19
HAZARD LIGHT SWITCH

Description
The hazard light switch, 1, is a two-position, 1
rocker-type switch located on the left-hand side of
the tractor dash panel.
The two positions of the hazard light switch are:
• OFF POSITION (Safety symbol protruding out of

switch)
• ON POSITION (Safety symbol pushed into
switch)
An internal indicator bulb flashes when the hazard
light switch is in the “on” position. 10998226
The hazard lights will operate regardless of the key 34

switch position.
Hazard Light Switch Removal
20003983
35
2. Disconnect the wiring harness from the light
switch.
3. Remove the light switch from the dash panel by
releasing the locking tabs on the switch and
pushing the switch through the dash panel.
30002142
36
55-20
HAZARD LIGHT SWITCH TESTING

Use an ohmmeter to test both of the positions of the
hazard light switch for electrical continuity.
“Off” Position
terminal 2.
and terminal 2, the switch is defective and needs
replaced.
30002193
37
terminal 7.
and terminal 7, the internal indicator bulb is
defective and the switch needs replaced.
30004012
38
“On” Position
terminal 3.
replaced.
20004013
39
55-21

terminal 6.
replaced.
20004014
40
terminal 7.
and terminal 7, the internal indicator bulb is
Hazard Light Switch Installation

1. Insert the hazard light switch into the dash panel 20004012
until the locking tabs click into place.
41
2. Connect the wiring harness to the hazard light
switch.
3. Install the left side panel using the four retaining
bolts.
4. Connect the negative (--) batter cable to the
55-22
Op. 55 408
TRANSMISSION RANGE SAFETY SWITCH

Description (Deluxe & Economy)
The transmission range safety switch, 1, is a
single-pole, push-button type switch located under-
neath the left side operator’s platform. When the 1
transmission is in high or low range, the contacts in
the switch are open, not allowing the tractor to start.
When the transmission is in the neutral range
position, the contacts in the switch are closed
completing the circuit. This allows the tractor to start.
NOTE: The transmission range safety switch may be

tested for continuity without removing the switch from
the tractor, but it is recommended that the switch be 30004047 Deluxe
removed for testing. Follow the same test procedure
outline when the switch is removed from the tractor. 42
20004016 Economy
43
Removal (Deluxe & Economy)
1. Raise the tractor engine cover. 1
3. Disconnect the transmission range safety switch
leads from the wiring harness.
4. Remove the transmission range safety switch, 1,
with the rubber washer, 2, from the transmission 2
case. 3
NOTE: The HST range shift rail, (Deluxe) and the 12 x
12 shuttle shift rail, (Economy), operate the transmission 30002200
range safety switch. Grooves in the shift rails accept the
balk pin, extending the plunger in the safety switch, 44
when the range or shuttle control levers are in neutral.
This completes the circuit, allowing the tractor to start.
5. Use a pencil magnet to remove the balk pin, 3, from

the transmission range safety switch hole in the
transmission case. Inspect the balk pin, 3, for
damage.
55-23
TRANSMISSION RANGE SAFETY SWITCH

TESTING (Deluxe & Economy)
transmission range safety switch for electrical continuity.
Extended Position
EXTENDED
1. With the transmission range safety switch in the
“extended” position, touch one of the test probes
to the one switch lead. Touch the other test probe
to the other switch lead.
continuity exists between the two leads. If
continuity does not exist, the switch is defective
and needs replaced.
Retracted Position (Not Shown)
30002201
3. Using an ohmmeter, continuity should not exist
between the two leads. If continuity exists 45
between the two leads while the switch is in the
“retracted” position, the switch is defective and
needs replaced.
Installation (Deluxe & Economy)
1. Insert the balk pin, 3, into the transmission range
safety switch hole in the transmission case.
2. Install the transmission range safety switch, 1,
with the rubber washer, 2, into the transmission
case.
3. Connect the wiring harness to the transmission
range safety switch leads.
4. Connect the negative (--) batter cable to the
55-24
Op. 55 408
1
REAR (MAIN) PTO SAFETY SWITCH
Description
The rear PTO safety switch, 1, is a single-pole,
push-button type switch located underneath the left
side operator’s platform on the PTO linkage. When
the PTO is engaged, the contacts in the switch are
open, not allowing the tractor to start. When the PTO
is disengaged, the contacts in the switch are closed,
completing the circuit. This allows the tractor to start.
NOTE: Remove the left wheel assembly for easier 30002199
access to the rear PTO safety switch. Be sure to provide
adequate support to the rear axle during repairs. 46
NOTE: The PTO safety switch may be tested for
continuity without removing the switch from the
tractor, but it is recommended that the switch be
removed for testing. To test the switch in the tractor,
follow the same procedure used when the switch is
removed from the tractor.
3. Disconnect the rear PTO safety switch leads
from the wiring harness.
4. Remove the retaining nut, which secures the rear
PTO safety switch to the PTO linkage.
5. Remove the rear PTO switch by pressing in on
the locking tabs and sliding the switch upward out
of the support bracket.
REAR PTO SAFETY SWITCH TESTING
rear PTO safety switch for electrical continuity.
Extended Position
With the rear PTO safety switch in the “extended” (out)
position, continuity should not exist between the two
switch leads. If continuity exists between the switch
leads while the switch is in the “extended” position, the
rear PTO safety switch is defective and needs replaced.
30003985
47
55-25
Retracted Position
With the rear PTO safety switch in the “retracted” (in)
position, continuity should exist between the two
switch leads. If continuity does not exist between the
switch leads while the switch is in the “retracted”
position, the switch is defective and needs replaced.
30002203
48
Op. 55 408
MID PTO SAFETY SWITCH (Optional for 35D

and 40D models only)
Description
The mid PTO safety switch, 1, is a double-pole, 1
single throw-style switch located on the control lever
pivot bracket. The switch, consisting of a rubber-
booted, push-button actuator and four rubber coated
terminals, monitors the position of the mid PTO
linkage and is activated by the mid PTO lever.
Removal
2
2. Disconnect the negative (--) battery cable from 10998387
49
3. Disconnect the mid PTO safety switch from the
wiring harness.
4. Remove the two switch mounting bolts, 2, and
pull the switch away from the tractor differential
housing.
Mid PTO Safety Switch Testing

mid PTO safety switch for electrical continuity.
Extended Position
With the mid PTO safety switch in the “extended”
position, continuity should not exist between any of
the four terminals. If continuity exists between any of
the four terminals while the switch is in the “extended”
55-26
Retracted Position
Using an ohmmeter, touch one of the test probes to
terminal, A. Touch the other test probe to terminal, B.
1. Push the switch to the retracted position.

continuity exists between terminal, A, and
terminal, B. If continuity does not exist between
terminal A, and terminal, B, the switch is
30002195
50
3. Using an ohmmeter in the same matter, touch
one of the test probes to terminal, C. Touch the
other test probe to terminal, D.
continuity exists between terminal, C, and
terminal, D. If continuity does not exist between
terminal, C, and terminal, D, the switch is
30002196
51
Op. 55 408
SEAT SAFETY SWITCH

Description
The seat safety start switch, 1, is a single pole,
push-button type switch located underneath the
operator seat. When the operator is not seated, the
switch contacts are open and will not allow the tractor
to start. When the operator is seated, the switch
contacts are closed, allowing the tractor to start.
NOTE: The seat safety switch is non-adjustable.
1
10998317
52
55-27
Removal
NOTE: The seat safety start switch may be tested by
separating the switch leads, 1, under the seat,
hooking up ohmmeter test probes to the seat switch
leads and pushing down on the middle of the seat to
check for switch continuity. However, it is strongly
recommended that the switch be removed for 1
continuity testing.

2
the battery. 30997564
3. Raise the operator’s seat to reveal the seat
53
safety switch.
4. Disconnect the seat safety start switch leads, 1,
from the wiring harness. Lower the operator’s
seat.
5. Release the locking tabs to remove the switch
from the seat and remove the switch leads, 1,
from the switch, 2.
Seat Safety Start Switch Testing

seat safety start switch for electrical continuity.
Extended Position
With the seat safety start switch in the “extended” (out)
position, continuity should not exist between the two
switch leads. If continuity exists between the switch
leads while the switch is in the “extended” position, the
seat safety start switch is defective and needs
replaced.
30003985
54
Retracted Position
With the seat safety start switch in the “retracted” (in)
position, continuity should exist between the two
switch leads. If continuity does not exist between the
switch leads while the switch is in the “retracted”
30002203
55
55-28
Op. 55 408
PARKING BRAKE SAFETY SWITCH

Description
The parking safety switch, 1, is a double-pole, single
throw-style switch located on the brake control lever
pivot bracket. The parking brake switch is located
beneath the left operator’s platform on TC35D, 40D,
45D models only.
1
Parking Brake Safety Switch Testing
parking brake safety switch for electrical continuity.
Extended Position (Not Shown)

30002202
1. With the parking brake safety switch in the
“extended” (“off”) position, continuity should not 56
exist between any of the four terminals. If
continuity exists between any of the four
terminals while the switch is in the “extended”
position, the switch is defective and needs
replaced.
Retracted Position
Using an ohmmeter, touch one of the test probes to
terminal, A. Touch the other test probe to terminal, B.
1. Push the parking brake safety switch into the

“retracted” position.
terminal, B. If continuity does not exist between
terminal A, and terminal, B, the switch is
30002195
57
to terminal, C. Touch the other test probe to
terminal, D.
continuity exists between terminal, C, and
terminal, C, and terminal, D, the switch is
30002196
58
55-29
RELAYS
Relay Identification
1 2 3
4 5 6
7
10
8
10998222
59
Deluxe Models 6. Glow plug lamp relay
1. “HI” transmission range relay 7. Flasher relay
2. “LOW” transmission range relay 8. Headlight relay
3. Cruise control relay 9. Neutral start relay
4. Fuel shutoff relay 10. Glow plug power relay
5. PTO safety relay
55-30
1 2
4 5 6
10998256
60
Economy Models
1. Fuel shutoff relay
2. PTO safety relay
3. Flasher relay
4. Headlight relay
5. Neutral start relay
6. Glow plug power relay
55-31
Description and Location

Relays are used on the TC series tractors to
automatically complete (close) a circuit. The relays
are located under the left side of the dash cover,
behind the tractor’s firewall. A relay contains two
parts of a circuit. One part, the control circuit, uses
current to energize a coil. The other part, the function
circuit, is a switch. When energized, the coil of a relay
becomes an electromagnet opening or closing a
single circuit or directing current from one circuit to
another, depending on the type of relay.
TC deluxe model tractors utilize ten relays and

economy model tractors use six relays. There are
four different relays used on the TC series tractors.
The function circuits are normally open when no
current is being supplied to the coil. If a circuit with an
SPST relay is energized with current on the TC series
tractor, the switch becomes closed and the circuit is
completed. The relay is then considered to be
latched.
61
Relay Testing-Micro Relays
“HI”, “LOW”, Cruise Control, Fuel Shutoff, PTO
Safety, and Glow Plug Lamp Relays
1. Remove the relay suspected of being faulty from
the tractor to test.
2. Using an ohmmeter, touch one test probe to
terminal 3 and the other test probe to terminal 4.
3. Observe the ohmmeter. There should be little or
no resistance, indicating continuity. If there is no
continuity, the relay is defective and needs
replaced.
30004390
62
55-32
4. If the previous test showed continuity, touch one

ohmmeter probe to terminal 1 and the remaining
read approximately 79.5 ohms. If the reading is
not as specified, the relay is defective and needs
replaced.
20004391
63
6. If the results from the previous test were good,
use a jumper lead to connect the positive (+)
terminal of a 12-volt power source to terminal 1
of the relay. Use a jumper lead to connect the
negative (--) terminal of a 12-volt power source to
terminal 2 of the relay. The relay should now
energize.
7. Using an ohmmeter touch a test probe to terminal
3 of the relay. Touch the other ohmmeter test
no resistance, indicating continuity. If there is no 20004392
replaced. 64
HEADLIGHT AND NEUTRAL START

RELAYS
1. Remove the relay suspected of being faulty from
the tractor to test.
terminal 87A and the other test probe to terminal
30.
replaced.
65
55-33
4. Repeat the previous test for terminal 30 and 87.

There should be no continuity between these
terminals. If tests indicate continuity, the relay is
energize.
probe to terminal 87. 66
replaced.
8. While the 12-volt power source is still connected,
touch an ohmmeter test probe to terminal 30 and
terminal 87A. There should be high resistance
indicating no continuity between the terminals. If
there is continuity, the relay is defective and
needs replaced.
67
Glow Plug Power Relay
1. Remove the glow plug power relay from the
tractor.
terminal 87 and the other test probe to terminal
30.
3. Observe the ohmmeter. There should be high
resistance between these terminals, indicating
no continuity. If tests indicate continuity, the relay
is defective and needs replaced.
30004023
68
55-34

energize.
no resistance, indicating continuity. If there is no 30004024
replaced. 69
55-35
DIODES (DELUXE MODELS ONLY)

Description
The charging circuit and cruise control diodes, 1, and 1
the transmission hydraulic range diodes, 2, are
located under the left side of the dash cover, behind
the tractor’s firewall. Diodes are electrical devices
2
which current is allowed to pass in one direction,
directing current within a circuit. Diodes allow the use
of one wire within multiple circuits to control current
flow to electrical components such as relays. The
deluxe model TC tractors utilize four (4) diodes to
direct current. These diodes are paired together in
two casings, referred to as a diode module.
10998222
Diode Testing 70
1. Remove the diode module suspected of being
faulty from the tractor.
NOTE: For this test, an electrical multimeter with
diode test capabilities may be used in place of an
ohmmeter. If a multimeter with diode testing
capabilities is unavailable, use an ohmmeter to test
as described below.
2. Using an ohmmeter, touch the red, positive (+),
test probe to diode terminal “1”. Touch the black,
negative (−), ohmmeter test probe to diode
terminal “2”. Observe the ohmmeter.
3. The ohmmeter should show high resistance,
indicating no continuity and that current is not
flowing through the diode in that direction. If there
is continuity. Check to see that the test probes
are on the correct terminals, and if they are, the
diode module is defective and needs replaced.
30004050
71
4. If the previous test indicated the diode was
functioning properly, touch the red, positive (+),
ohmmeter test probe to terminal “2” of the diode
and the black, negative (--), test probe to terminal
“1” of the diode.
show little or no resistance, indicating continuity
in that direction. If the ohmmeter does not show
continuity, the diode module is defective and
needs replaced.
30004051
72
55-36
6. Repeat the test outlined in steps 2 through 5, to

test terminals 3 and 4 of the diode module.
Replace the diode module if test determine the
diode module to be defective. The diode should
show continuity only when red, positive (+),
positive test probe is touching terminal 4 and the
black negative (--) test probe is touching terminal
3.
20002218
73
55-37
OPERATOR SAFETY MODULE

The operator safety module, 1, is part of the tractor
safe operation circuit. When the operator safety
module is energized it allows the ground circuit for
the control portion of the fuel shutoff solenoid relay to
be completed. If current no longer flows to the
operator safety module, the ground circuit for the
relay becomes open. This causes the fuel shutoff 1
solenoid relay to become non-energized. When the
relay becomes non-energized, the current to the fuel
shutoff solenoid is discontinued, stopping the tractor
engine. Current is supplied to the operator safety
module when the operator is seated, or when the 30004049 Deluxe
PTO is disengaged and the parking brake is applied.
The operator safety module, 1, is located under the 74
left side of the dash cover, behind the tractor’s
firewall.
Removal
10998056 Economy
75
30003983
76
55-38

4. Remove the left side cover to reveal the
relay/diode panel.
5. Release the locking tabs on the operator safety
module to disconnect the module from the wire
harness.
1
30002142
77
Operator Safety Module Testing
1. Using an ohmmeter, touch the red, positive (+),
test probe to module terminal “B”. Touch the
black, negative (−), ohmmeter test probe to diode
terminal “C”. Observe the ohmmeter.
2. The ohmmeter should show high resistance,
indicating no continuity and that current is not
flowing through the operator safety module. If
there is continuity. Check to see that the test
probes are on the correct terminals, and if they
are, the operator safety module is defective and
needs replaced.
30004053
78
3. If the previous test indicated the operator safety
module was functioning properly, clamp the red,
positive (+), ohmmeter test probe to terminal “B”
of the safety module and the black, negative (−),
test probe to terminal “C” of the Safety module.
CAUTION
Only apply battery current to the operator safety
control module for 3--5 seconds or damage will
occur.
4. Connect a jumper wire from terminal “E” on the

operator safety module to the positive (+) 30004048
terminal of a 12-volt power supply. 79
5. Connect a jumper wire to terminal “B”.
6. While observing the ohmmeter, touch the jumper
wire to terminal “B’ from the negative (--) terminal
of the 12-volt power supply. There should be little
or no resistance, indicating continuity. If the
reading shows high resistance, the operator
safety module is defective and needs replaced.
55-39
GLOW PLUG TIMER

The glow plug timer, 1, is an electronic timer that is
located under the left side of the dash cover, behind
the tractor’s firewall. The timer controls how long the
glow plugs and the indicator light on the instrument
panel remain supplied with current when the key 1
switch is turned form the “OFF” position to the
“ACC/RUN” position. The glow plug timer delays the
glow plugs and indicator light on deluxe model
tractors for 4-5 seconds and for 10-11 seconds on the
economy model tractors. The glow plug timer
controls the glow plug and indicator light circuit by
supplying or cutting the ground path to the glow plug 10998222 Deluxe
power relay’s coil circuit.
80
10998356 Economy
81
55-40
Glow Plug Indicator Light Timer Testing

the battery.
2. Remove the bolt retaining the light timer to the
tractor and disconnect the timer from the main
wiring harness.
NOTE: The terminals are not number or letter coded
on the light timer. 1
2
3. Connect a jumper wire from terminal “C” on the
timer, 1, to the positive (+) terminal of a 12-volt
power supply.
4. Connect a test light, 2, from terminal “A” of the
timer, 1, to the positive (+) terminal of a 12-volt -- +
C
power supply. A
D
B
E
12 VOLTS
5. Connect a jumper wire from terminal “D” of the

timer, 1, to the negative (--) terminal of the 12-volt
power supply. Observe the test light, 2. 20000874
6. The test light should illuminate for approximately 82

4 – 5 seconds for the deluxe models and 10-11
seconds for economy models, then turn off. If the
test light fails to illuminate or does not turn off
after the specified time, the timer is defective and
needs replaced.
7. Connect the negative (−) battery cable to the
battery.
Op. 55 201
1
ENGINE GLOW PLUGS
Description
The engine glow plugs, 1, are located on the right
side of the engine cylinder head, below the fuel
injectors. The glow plugs are used to preheat the air
in the pre-combustion chamber. This aids in the
starting of the engine when cold.
10000896
83
55-41
The glow plugs utilize a heating element that is

contained in a stainless steel sheath, 1. The coiled
heating wire, 2, is sintered into magnesium oxide 1 2
powder, 3. The magnesium oxide powder is used to 4
evenly transfer heat to the stainless steel sheath,
which heats the air in the combustion chamber. The
magnesium oxide powder is also used to insulate the
heating wire from the outer sheath and glow plug
body.
The glow plug heats when electrical current is 3

passed from the glow plug electrode, 4, to one end
of the heating wire, 2. Electrical resistance warms the
heating wire when electrical current is flowing
through the wire. The opposite end of the wire is 84
connected to the sheath. The sheath and glow plug
body, 5, are grounded by the engine block.
NOTE: All deluxe TC tractors utilize a fast heating

type glow plug (marked Y-701RS). All economy
model tractors utilize a slower heating glow plug
(marked Y-107 V glow plug).
Removal
1. Disconnect the negative (−) battery cable from
the battery.
2. Remove the electrode nuts, 1, the electrical
connector, 2, and washers securing the 1
electrode bus bar, 3, to the glow plugs.
3. Remove the glow plug(s) from the engine
cylinder head.
10000896 3
85
55-42
Engine Glow Plug Testing

1. Remove carbon from the sheath end of the glow
plug
NOTE: Do not test resistance using the glow plug
sheath.
2. Using an ohmmeter, touch one test probe to the
glow plug electrode, 1. Touch the other test probe
to the glow plug body, 2.
3. Observe the ohmmeter reading, a resistance
reading of 0.8 ohms maximum is normal for the
TC deluxe model tractor glow plugs. A resistance
reading of 1.0 ohms maximum is normal for TC
economy model tractor glow plugs. If the 1 2
resistance is too high, the glow plug is defective
and needs replaced.
20000876
86
Installation
4. Thread the glow plugs into the engine cylinder 2
head. Torque each glow plug to 10 – 15 N⋅m (11.0
– 14.5 ft. lb.).
5. Install the electrode bus, 1, and the washers onto
the glow plugs. Secure with the three (3) nuts, 2.
6. Connect the electrical connector, 3, to the wire
harness.
7. Connect the negative (--) battery cable to the 3
battery.
10000896
1
87
55-43
NASO HAZARD/DIRECTIONAL SIGNAL

CONVERTER AND FLASHER RELAY
The NASO hazard/directional signal converter, 1,
and flasher relay, 2, are located under the left side of
the dash cover, behind the tractor’s firewall. The
NASO hazard/directional signal converter senses
when the directional signal switch, either left turn or
right turn, or hazard switch is actuated. The NASO
hazard/directional signal converter changes the 2
flasher relay pulsed signal output which passes 1
through the converter to cause the flasher lamps to
indicate a turning situation or a slow moving vehicle
indication (hazard). When hazard flasher switch is on
the hazard lamps blink in unison. When the 10998222
directional signal switch is on, the lamp indicating the
direction of turn blinks and the lamp on the opposite 88
side illuminates, but does not blink. The NASO
hazard/directional signal converter is not serviceable
and is replaced as a unit. The flasher relay supplies
pulsed signal current to the NASO hazard/directional
signal converter.
1
2
10998356
89
55-44
Testing
1. Remove the converter, 1, and flasher relay, 2,
from the tractor.
10998222
90
1
2
10998356
91
2. Connect the converter and relay, two #1156 light
bulbs, and a 12-volt power source to the test
setup as illustrated.
3. The bulb connected to terminal 5 will flash; the
bulb connected to terminal 10 will not illuminate.
20002080
92
55-45

5. The bulb connected to terminal 5 will not
illuminate; the bulb connected to terminal 10 will
flash.
20002081
93
7. The bulb connected to terminal 5 will flash, the
bulb connected to terminal 10 will be illuminated,
but will not flash.
20002082
94
9. The bulb connected to terminal 5 will illuminate,
but will not flash; the bulb connected to terminal
10 will flash.
10. If the NASO hazard/directional signal converter
does not perform to the tests outlined above, try
the tests with a new flasher relay. If the converter
function properly, the flasher relay is defective
and needs replaced. If the NASO hazard/direc-
tional signal converter still does not function 20002083
properly, the converter is defective and needs
replaced. 95
55-46
FUEL LEVEL SENDING UNIT

Op. 55 410 1
Description
The fuel level sending unit, 1, is mounted on top of the
fuel tank and extends into the tank. The sending unit
utilizes a float the raise and lowers with the fuel level
inside the tank. The float regulates a variable
resistance to ground, which translates into move-
ment of the fuel gauge on the instrument panel. As
the float lowers (fuel being consumed) inside the
tank, the ground resistance increases, indicating
less fuel on the fuel gauge. 30002209
96
Removal
the battery.
3. Disconnect the fuel level sending unit from the
wiring harness.
4. Remove the two screws, 1, to remove the fuel
level sending unit cover, 2.
1
2
30002210
97
5. Remove the five (5) retaining screws, 1, that
secure the sending unit, 2, to the fuel tank.
1
30002212
98
55-47
6. Carefully remove the sending unit, 1, from the

fuel tank.
1
7. Remove and discard the sealing gasket, 2, from
the sending unit, 1.
30002211
99
Fuel Level Sending Unit Testing
terminal “A” of the sending unit, touch the other
test probe to terminal “B” of the sending unit.
Observe the reading on the ohmmeter.
2. With the sending unit float in the down position
(tank empty), the ohmmeter should indicate
between 245-249 ohms. If the ohmmeter reading
is not within these specifications, the sending unit
is defective and needs replaced.
30004010
100
3. With the sender in the up position (tank full), the
ohmmeter should indicate between 32-34 ohms.
If the ohmmeter reading is not within these
specifications, the sending unit is defective and
needs replaced.
30004011
101
55-48
Installation
1. Install a new sealing gasket, 2, between the
sending unit, 1, and the fuel tank. 1
2. Carefully place the sending unit, 1, into the fuel
tank.
30002211
102
3. Secure the sending unit, 2, to the fuel tank using
the five (5) retaining screws, 1.
1
30002212
103
4. Install the fuel level sending unit cover, 2, using
the two screws, 1.
1
5. Connect the fuel level sending unit to the wiring 2
harness.
battery.
7. Lower and secure the tractor engine cover.
30002210
104
55-49
FUEL SHUTOFF SOLENOID

The fuel shutoff solenoid, 1, is located on the right
side of the engine, threaded into the rear of the fuel
injection pump, 2. The fuel shutoff solenoid contains
a spring-loaded plunger that pushes the injection 2
pump control rack to the closed (shut-off) position
when the solenoid is not energized. When the key
switch is turned to the “ACC/RUN” or “START” 1
position, the safety stop relay closes completing the
circuit that energizes the solenoid. This retracts the
plunger from the injection pump, and the injection
pump control rack moves into the position that allows
the engine to start.
105
Removal
the battery.
2. Disconnect the wiring harness lead from the fuel
3. Using a pair of pliers, carefully remove the fuel
shutoff solenoid, 1, from the fuel injection pump,
2
2.
106
4. Remove and discard the sealing washer, 1,
which seals the solenoid, 2, to the fuel injection
pump.
1
20000885
107
55-50
Fuel Shutoff Solenoid Testing

1. Using a suitable measuring device, measure the 1
actuating pin, 1, protrusion distance, “A”, on the
solenoid. The distance should measure between
25.5 - 26.4 mm (1.004 - 1.040 in.). If the distance
is not within these specifications, the solenoid is
108
NOTE: When connecting the 12-volt power supply to
the solenoid body, be sure paint is the removed from 3
the body. Otherwise, the power will not be transferred
to the solenoid.
2. Use jumper wires to connect the positive (+)

terminal of a 12-volt power supply to the solenoid
lead, 1. Connect the negative terminal of the 1
12-volt power supply to the solenoid body, 2. The
plunger should retract into the solenoid body. 2
3. Using a suitable measuring device, measure the
actuating pin, 1, protrusion distance, “B” on the
solenoid. The distance should measure between
11.5 -14.5 mm (0.453 - 0.571 in.). If the distance 109
is not within these specifications or the plunger
does not retract, the solenoid is defective and
needs replaced.
Installation
1. Install a new sealing washer, 1, on the solenoid,
2.
20000885
110
55-51
2. Thread the fuel shutoff solenoid, 1, into the fuel

injection pump, 2. Use pliers to tighten the
solenoid into the injection pump.
3. Connect the wiring harness lead, 3, into the fuel
2
battery. 1
111
Op. 55 414
1
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
The oil pressure sender, 1, is located on the top front
side of the engine. The switch opens under normal oil
pressure (above 6 PSI) and closes when oil pressure
is low (below 6 PSI) to complete the ground circuit of
the oil pressure warning light.
When the ground circuit is completed, the oil pressure

warning light illuminates on the instrument panel
when the key switch is turned to the “ON” position and
goes out when the engine is started. If the light does
not go out after the engine has started, first check the
engine oil level. If oil level is correct, check for a 112
malfunctioning sender or engine oil pump.
Engine Oil Pressure Switch Testing
1. Using an ohmmeter, touch one test lead to the
pressure switch terminal, 1, and the other test
lead to the switch body, 2. 3
2. Observe the ohmmeter. There should be little or 1
no resistance, indicating continuity in the switch.
If there is no continuity, the switch is defective
and needs replaced.
NOTE: The following test is not a calibrated test. The
purpose of the test is to see if the switch opens at
pressure. 2
20000880
1. While the test leads are connected to the switch,
pressurize the switch oil pressure port, 3, with 113
low pressure (10-30 psi) compressed air.
2. Observe the ohmmeter. While air pressure is
being supplied to the oil pressure port, the
ohmmeter should indicate high resistance, or no
continuity. If there is continuity, the switch is
CAUTION
Do not use high pressure compressed air for the
following test, otherwise damage may occur to
the oil pressure switch.
55-52
Op. 55 414
1
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
SWITCH (ECONOMY)
The coolant temperature switch, 1, is located at the
front left side of the engine inside the thermostat
housing. This switch is open under normal operating
temperatures and closes when operating tempera-
tures reach higher than normal limits, 101° - 109°C
(214° - 228°F), illuminating the indicator bulb on the
instrument panel.
114
Engine Coolant Temperature Switch Testing
NOTE: The engine coolant temperature switch can
only be tested when cold, do not attempt to heat the
coolant switch.
NOTE: Switch is tested while in engine block.
1. Using an Ohmmeter, touch one lead to the switch

terminal, 1. Touch the other test lead to the
temperature switch probe, 2.
2. Observe the ohmmeter, there should be high
resistance, indicating the switch contacts are
open. If there is low resistance, indicating 19985112
continuity (contacts closed), the switch is
115
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

1
SENDING UNIT (DELUXE)
The coolant temperature sender, 1, is located at the
left front side of the engine inside the thermostat
housing. This sender regulates a variable resistance
to ground, which translates into the movement of the
temperature gauge.
116
55-53
Engine Coolant Temperature Sending Unit

Testing (Deluxe)
WARNING
Do not perform sending unit test with tractor
engine running. Contact with moving parts will
cause bodily injury.
NOTE: Engine paint must be removed from sending

unit body or the ohmmeter will indicate a false
reading when the ohmmeter test lead is touched to
sending unit body.
1. Disconnect the main wiring harness terminal, 2,
from the coolant temperature sending unit. 2
117
2. Using an ohmmeter, touch one test lead to the
sending unit terminal, 1. Touch the other test lead 1
to the sending unit body, 2.
∞ 0
118
3. Observe the ohmmeter for resistance readings Coolant Temperature Sending Unit Temperature
at different engine operating temperatures. If
resistance is too high, the sending unit us 35° C (95° F) 670.0 ± 80 ohms
defective and needs replaced. 80° C (176° F) 118.0 ± 6 ohms
105° C (221° F) 54.5 ± 2.7 ohms
115° C (239° F) 42.0 ± 2.5 ohms
55-54
HI/LOW TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH

Deluxe Models
The transmission range control switch, 1, is a 1
two-way momentary switch located on the right
control pod on the tractor. This switch changes the
hydraulic range of the transmission hydraulic pump.
The switch contains two bulbs that illuminate,
indicating what hydraulic range the transmission
hydraulic pump is in, “HI” (rabbit) or “LOW” (turtle).
When the switch is pushed to the “HI” range, current
is supplied to the transmission range solenoid, which
changes the position of the swash plate in the
hydraulic pump, increasing hydraulic oil flow. The
solenoid is not energized in the “LOW” position and 10998318
the transmission pump operates at normal hydraulic
oil flow. The “LOW” transmission setting is the default 119
setting, meaning the tractor will reset to the “LOW”
position when the tractor engine is shut off and
restarted.
The tractors may also be equipped with an optional
joystick switch, 1, that is mounted on the optional 1
two-spool remote valve.
10998370
120
Range Switch Testing
1. Carefully pry the range switch, 1, from the right
1
control pod.
2. Disconnect the tractor wiring harness from the
switch.
10998318
121
55-55

terminal 9. Touch the other test probe to terminal
10.
4. Observe the ohmmeter. There should be
approximately 19.0 ohms of resistance between
the terminals. If resistance is high or off scale, the
“LOW” indicator light is faulty and the switch
needs replaced.
30004025
122
5. Repeat the test for terminals 7 and 8 for the “HI”
range indicator light. Replace the switch if test
results are not within the limit specified.
30004026
123
6. Hold the switch to the “LOW” (turtle) position.
Touch one ohmmeter test probe to terminal 2.
Touch the remaining ohmmeter test probe to
terminal 1.
no resistance, indicating continuity. If the reading
shows high resistance, the switch is defective
and needs replaced.
30004027
124
55-56
8. Hold the switch in the “HI” (rabbit) position. Touch

one ohmmeter test probe to terminal 2. Touch the
other ohmmeter test probe to terminal 3.
no resistance, indicating continuity. If the reading
shows high resistance, the switch is defective
and needs replaced.
10. If the switch is good, connect the wiring harness
to the switch and push the switch back into the
tractor control pod.
30004028
125
Optional Hi/Low Transmission Range Switch
Testing
1. Disconnect the range switch connector, 1, from 2
the wiring harness. Remove the two (2) screws, 2,
retaining the switch to the front remote valve 1
joystick.
20003787
126
2. Using an ohmmeter, connect one test probe to
terminal “C”. Connect the other test probe to
A B
terminal “A”.
3. Press the “HI” (rabbit) button and observe the
ohmmeter. The ohmmeter should show little or no
resistance, indicating continuity. If the ohmmeter
shows high resistance, the switch is defective and
needs replaced. C
4. Press the “LOW” (turtle) button and observe the
ohmmeter. The ohmmeter should show high
resistance, indicating no continuity. If there is
continuity, the switch is defective and needs 30004054
replaced.
127
55-57
5. Using an ohmmeter, connect one test probe to

terminal “C”. Connect the other test probe to A
terminal “B”.
6. Press the “LOW” (turtle) button and observe the B
ohmmeter. The ohmmeter should show little or no
resistance, indicating continuity. If the ohmmeter
shows high resistance, the switch is defective and
C
needs replaced.
7. Press the “HI” (rabbit) button and observe the
ohmmeter. The ohmmeter should show high
resistance, indicating no continuity. If there is
continuity, the switch is defective and needs 30004055
replaced.
128
8. To replace the switch, remove the joystick cover
retaining screw, 1, then pull the switch out.
1
10998370
129
HI/LOW TRANSMISSION RANGE SOLENOID

Deluxe Models
Deluxe model TC series tractors are all equipped
with a dual, “HI/LOW” range hydrostatic transmission
(HST). The transmission utilizes an electronic
transmission range solenoid, 1, to change the swash
plate angle within the transmission hydraulic oil
pump to “HI” range. This increases hydraulic oil flow
through the transmission. When the transmission is
in “LOW” range the solenoid is not energized and the
solenoid retracts, allowing the swash plate to return
to normal operating angle, reducing hydraulic oil flow
in the transmission. The transmission range solenoid
is located in a housing on the left side of the 30002884 1
130
55-58
Removal
the battery.
NOTE: When removing the solenoid valve body from
the transmission, be sure not to lose the three (3) o
rings, 1, that are located in the solenoid valve body
and the transmission case adapter block
1
30002887
131
2. Disconnect the solenoid leads, 3, from the tractor
wiring harness.
3. Remove the four (4) 5mm hex head mounting
bolts, 1, securing the solenoid valve body, 2, to
the transmission housing. Remove the solenoid
valve body from the transmission adapter block.
2 3
30002884 1 1
132
Testing
2
1. Remove the solenoid assembly, 1, from the
solenoid valve body, 2. Be sure not to lose any
parts.
1
30002889
133
55-59
2. Connect an ohmmeter test lead to each of the

solenoid terminals.
indicate a resistance of approximately 7.5 - 10.5
ohms.
4. If the reading is not within this specification, the
solenoid is defective and needs replaced.
30000740
134
5. Connect a positive (+) lead from a 12-volt power
source to one of the solenoid terminals, 1.
1
6. Connect the negative (--) lead from the 12-volt
power source to the remaining solenoid terminal.
7. Observe the solenoid. The solenoid plunger, 2,
should extend when voltage is applied. If the
plunger does not extend, the solenoid is
defective and need replaced. 2
8. Disconnect the 12-volt power source from the
solenoid. The plunger should retract immediate-
ly. If the plunger does not retract, the solenoid is
defective and needs replaced. 30003061
9. If the solenoid is good, install the solenoid 135

assembly back into the solenoid valve body.
Installation
1. Install the solenoid valve assembly, 1, to the
1
transmission adapter plate and secure with the
four (4) 5mm hex head bolts, 2.
2. Connect the solenoid leads, 3, to the tractor
wiring harness.
battery.
2 2 3
30002884
136
55-60
ELECTRIC CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH

1
(DELUXE)

The electric cruise control switch, 1, is located on the
right control pod . The cruise control switch controls
current to cruise control magnet. Cruise control is
used to maintain the tractor at a constant speed
forward or backward. When the cruise control switch
is pushed from the “OFF” position to the “SET”
position, the control circuit of the cruise control relay
is energized. This closes (completes) the function
10998318
circuit of the relay, which supplies power to the cruise
control magnet. When the cruise control switch is 137
released from the “ON” position, the switch rockers
to the “ON” position, which keeps the cruise control
activated until the switch is pushed to the “OFF”
position or the brake pedal or hand brake is engaged.
Current to the cruise control relay is interrupted when
either brake is engaged, which deactivates the cruise
control magnet. The cruise control switch is
equipped with an indicator light that will illuminate
when the switch is moved to the “SET” and “ON”
position, indicating the cruise control has been
activated.
Removal
the battery.
2. Carefully pry the switch from the control pod.
3. Disconnect the electric cruise control switch from
the wiring harness.
55-61
Cruise Control Switch Testing
138
Testing the Cruise Control Switch placed in any of its three positions). The reading
Remove the switch from the wiring harness. should be between 55 ohms and 60 ohms.
NOTE: The switch terminals are identified on the NOTE: The light is not serviced separately. If it does
back of the switch. Numbers 1 and 4 are blank. not illuminate, replace the switch.
Using an ohmmeter, depress the switch to the “SET” Replace the switch if the correct readings are not
position and connect the ohmmeter leads across obtained during testing.
terminals 5 and 6, then across terminals 2 and 3. If
continuity exists across these terminals, the switch is
operating properly. Installation
1. Connect the electric cruise control switch to the
Next place the switch in the “ON” (middle) position
wiring harness.
and connect the ohmmeter leads across terminals 2
and 3. If there is continuity, the switch is good. 2. Push the cruise control switch, 1, into the right
control pod.
To test the internal light bulb, connect the ohmmeter
leads across terminals 7 and 8 (the switch may be
55-62
CRUISE CONTROL MAGNET (DELUXE)

The cruise control magnet, 1, is located under the 3 4
right tractor fender and is attached to the hydrostatic
transmission (HST) linkage. The cruise control
magnet is a simple electromagnet. When the cruise
control switch is activated, current is supplied to the
cruise control magnet and the magnet locks the HST
control linkage in place. This maintains a constant
transmission speed, which translates to a constant
tractor ground speed, forward or reverse.
2 1
Removal 30003789
139
the battery.
2. Disconnect the main wiring harness connector,
2, from the cruise control magnet, 1.
3. Remove the two bolts, 3, which secure the cruise
control magnet mounting bracket, 4, to the
transmission. Remove the magnet from the
tractor.
55-63
Cruise Control Magnet Testing

Use an ohmmeter to test the cruise control magnet. ∞ 0
1. Disconnect the magnet from the tractor wiring
harness and connect the ohmmeter leads to the
two leads coming from the magnet.
• A meter reading of 11-12 ohms is normal.
140
2. Disconnect the ohmmeter from the magnet and
apply 12 volts across the magnet leads.
• The surface will become magnetized and
attract any ferrous object if the cruise control
magnet is working properly.
- +
If test results are not as outlined above, replace the
cruise control magnet.
141
Installation
3 4
1. Install the cruise control magnet, 1, and mounting
bracket, 4, to the tractor transmission and secure
the mounting bracket, 4, to the transmission
using the two bolts, 3.
2. Connect the main wiring harness connector, 2, to
the cruise control magnet.
3. Connect the negative (−) battery cable to the
battery.
2 1
20003789
142
55-64
CRUISE CONTROL BRAKE RELEASE

SWITCH
Description (HST)
The HST cruise control brake release switch, 1, is a
push-button switch located beneath the left
operator’s platform. The actuator button and the
terminals of this switch are sealed to protect the
switch from moisture. The switch is normally
retracted (in), which completes the ground circuit and
allows current to flow through the switch. When the
brake pedal is applied, the actuator button is
released and the switch is opened; which interrupts
the ground path through the switch. The cruise 1
control brake release switch is standard on the
deluxe models. 20004015
143
Removal
2. Disconnect the wiring harness, 2, from the cruise
control brake release switch, 1.
3. Remove the two screws, 3, to remove the cruise
control brake release switch, 1, from the tractor.
Cruise Control Brake Release Testing 3 2

Use an ohmmeter to test terminals of the cruise
control brake release switch for electrical continuity.
30002198
NOTE: The cruise control brake release switch 144

wiring harness only makes contact with terminals, A,
and, D. Terminals, B, and, C, are not used.
Extended Position (Not Shown)

1. With the cruise control brake release switch in
the “extended” position, continuity should not
exist between terminals, A, and, D. If continuity
exists between terminals, A, and, D, while the
switch is in the “extended” position, the switch is
55-65
Retracted Position
to terminal, A. Touch the other test probe to
terminal, D.
terminal A, and terminal, D, the switch is
30002197
145
Cruise Control Brake Release Switch
Installation 1
1. Install the cruise control brake release switch, 1,
using the two screws, 3.
2. Connect the wiring harness, 2, to the cruise
control brake release switch, 1.
3 2
30002198
146
55-66
Op. 55 418
INSTRUMENT PANEL — COMPONENT OPERATION AND SERVICING
4 5
3
6
1
2
147
The instrument panels utilized on Economy and NOTE: The hour meter is not serviced as a separate
Deluxe models are similar in design, but each component. Replace the instrument panel assembly
performs different functions. if there is a performance problem with the hour meter.
The following components of the instrument panel

are serviced separately:
1. Lens
2. Gasket
3. Fuel Gauge
4. Tachometer
5. Temperature Gauge (Deluxe Models)
6. Instrument/Indicator Light Bulbs
55-67
1
2 3 4 5 6 7
148
INSTRUMENT PANEL (ECONOMY) indicates that the charging system is not
operating normally. As the battery can become
1. Cold Starting Indicator Light—Illuminates fully discharged under these conditions, the
when the key switch is turned to the “HEAT” problem should be investigated as soon as
position. It remains lit when the key is held in possible.
position, during which time the glow plugs are
heating the precombustion chambers. 5. Temperature Light—Indicates coolant temper-
ature. This light illuminates when engine coolant
2. Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light—Illumi- temperature rises above normal operating
nates with the key switch in the “ON” or “HEAT” temperature (228° F or 109° C) with the key
positions and remains lit for a short period of time switch in the “ON” position. Stop the tractor
after the engine is started. The light indicates oil engine immediately and investigate the cause.
pressure only and goes out when sufficient oil
pressure is present at the oil sender. The bulb 6. Tachometer—Registers engine RPM (Revolu-
becomes lit during operation when the engine oil tions Per Minute). The gauge is marked in
pressure is below 0.41 bar (6 PSI). If this occurs, increments of 100 and returns to zero when the
stop the tractor engine immediately and engine is not running. The tachometer is driven
investigate the cause. electrically by the “P” lead of the alternator.
3. Proof Meter—Records the hours and portions of 7. Rear/Optional Mid PTO Speed- Determined by
hours that the tractor has been operated, the position of the needle on the tachometer. The
regardless of engine RPM. Use the proof meter tachometer is marked to indicate 540 PTO RPM
as a guide to determine hourly service and and 600 PTO RPM. If the needle registers at the
maintenance intervals. The meter is activated by 600 mark, this indicates a dangerous overspeed
electrical current provided by the alternator. condition, and engine RPM should be reduced
Hours will register when the engine is running immediately.
with the key in the “ON” position only. 8. Fuel Gauge—Indicates the amount of diesel fuel
4. Battery Charge Warning Light—Illuminates remaining in the tank. The gauge is activated
when the key switch is in the “ON” or “HEAT” when the key switch is in the “ON” or “HEAT”
positions and goes out when the engine is positions. It will register empty with the key switch
started. If this bulb lights during operation, it in the “STOP” position.
55-68
6 8
6
5 7
9
1
3 11
2 4 10
149
INSTRUMENT PANEL (DELUXE MODELS) Hours will register when the engine is running
with the key in the “ON” position only.
1. Cold Starting Indicator Light—Illuminates
when the key switch is turned to the “HEAT” 5. Fuel Gauge—Indicates the amount of diesel fuel
position. It remains lit for approximately four remaining in the tank. The gauge is activated
seconds when the key is held in position, during when the key switch is in the “ON” or “HEAT”
which time the glow plugs are heating the positions. It will register empty with the key switch
precombustion chambers. in the “STOP” position.
2. Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light—Illumi- 6. Flasher Warning Lights—Operate when the
nates with the key switch in the “ON” or “HEAT” flasher switch is turned on, regardless of the key
positions and remains lit for a short period of time switch position. Use the flasher warning lights
after the engine is started. The light indicates oil and the SMV emblem when traveling on public
pressure only and goes out when sufficient oil roads, day or night.
pressure is present at the oil sender. The bulb 7. Temperature Gauge—Indicates coolant tem-
becomes lit during operation when the engine oil perature. It is activated when the key switch is
pressure is below 6 PSI. If this occurs, stop the turned to the “ON” or “HEAT” positions. The
tractor engine immediately and investigate the gauge will register cold with the key switch in the
cause. “STOP” position. If the needle registers in the
3. Battery Charge Warning Light—Illuminates green range of the gauge, this indicates a normal
when the key switch is in the “ON” or “HEAT” operating temperature. If the needle moves to
positions and goes out when the engine is the red portion of the gauge, this indicates an
started. If this bulb becomes lit during operation, overheated condition. Stop the tractor engine
it indicates that the charging system is not immediately and investigate the cause.
operating normally. As the battery can become 8. Tachometer—Registers engine RPM (Revolu-
fully discharged under these conditions, the tions Per Minute). The gauge is marked in
problem should be investigated as soon as increments of 100 and will return to zero when
possible. the engine is not running. The tachometer is
4. Proof Meter—Records the hours and portions of driven electrically by the “P” lead of the alternator.
hours that the tractor has been operated 9. PTO On Indicator—When either the rear or mid
regardless of engine RPM. Use the proof meter PTO is engaged, the indicator will be illuminated
as a guide to determine hourly service and amber with the key in the “HEAT,” “START,” or
maintenance intervals. The meter is activated by “ON” positions.
electrical current provided by the alternator.
55-69
10. Rear/Mid PTO Speed—Indicated by illumination

of an green or red light. When the rear PTO is
turning at 540 RPM or the mid PTO is turning at
2000 RPM, the green PTO indicator will light.
When the rear PTO is turning at 600 RPM or above
or the mid PTO is turning above 2000 RPM, the red
PTO indicator will illuminate, indicating an over
speed and warning the operator of danger.
11. Parking Brake Light—Illuminates if the parking
brake is engaged when the key switch is turned
from the “OFF” position.
INSTRUMENT PANEL REMOVAL

1
Remove the two screws, 1, from each side of the
instrument panel and pull the panel assembly out of
the dash.
NOTE: Additional wire harness length is provided so

that the instrument panel can be removed from the
mounting without unplugging it from the harness.
150
INSTRUMENT PANEL DISASSEMBLY
3
Remove the six retaining screws, 1, from the rear of 1
the panel, then remove the lens, gasket, and retainer
from the panel body.
FUEL GAUGE REMOVAL

To gain access to the rear of the fuel gauge, remove 2
the retaining screw, 3, from the fuel gauge face, then
remove bulb, 2, from the rear of the panel.
Using a screwdriver, apply pressure to the back side

of the gauge pot, and push the fuel gauge out of the 1
instrument panel from the rear.
151
FUEL GAUGE TESTING
(Testing with gauge installed in instrument
panel)
1. Disconnect instrument panel connector.
∞ 0
2. Using an ohmmeter, measure the resistance
between pins 14 and 21 of the instrument panel.
The measured resistance should be 70 to 80 1 5 9 13 17 21
ohms. 2 6 10 14 18 22
3 7 11 15 19 23
4 8 12 16 20 24
152
55-70

(Economy) Measured resistance should be 302
to 352 ohms.
(Deluxe) Measured resistance should be 188 to ∞ 0
220 ohms.
If the resistance measured is outside the ranges, 1 5 9 13 17 21
or a open circuit is measured, the fuel gauge
2 6 10 14 18 22
should be replaced.
3 7 11 15 19 23
4 8 12 16 20 24
153
(Testing with gauge removed from the instru-
ment panel)
1
1. Viewing the gauge from the rear, orientate the
three mounting tabs, 1, on the gauge as follows
upper left, upper right, and lower right ∞ 0
respectively.
between the lower left and lower right pin
sockets. Do not touch the case with the leads
when making this measurement. The measured
resistance between the sockets should be 75 to
87 ohms.
154
between the upper left and lower right pin
resistance between the sockets should be 302 to ∞ 0
352 ohms.
If the resistance measured is outside the ranges,
or a open circuit is measured, the fuel gauge
should be replaced.
155
55-71
TEMPERATURE GAUGE REMOVAL

(DELUXE)
To gain access to the rear of the temperature gauge, 2
remove the retaining screw, 2, from the temperature
gauge face, then remove bulb, 1, from the rear of the
panel.
Using a screwdriver, apply pressure to the back side

of the gauge pot, and push the temperature gauge 1
out of the instrument panel from the rear.
156
TEMPERATURE GAUGE TESTING
(Testing with gauge installed in instrument
panel)
1. Disconnect instrument panel connector.
∞ 0
1 5 9 13 17 21
The measured resistance should be 92 to 108
ohms. 2 6 10 14 18 22
3 7 11 15 19 23
4 8 12 16 20 24
157
The measured resistance should be 203 to 237
ohms.
NOTE: A functional fuel gauge must be installed in
the instrument panel for the measured resistance to ∞ 0
be valid.
1 5 9 13 17 21
If the resistance measured, is outside the ranges, 2 6 10 14 18 22
or a open circuit is measured, the temperature 3 7 11 15 19 23
gauge should be replaced. 4 8 12 16 20 24
158
55-72
(Testing with gauge removed from the instru-

ment panel)
1. Viewing the gauge from the rear, orientate the
three mounting tabs, 1, on the gauge as follows, ∞ 0
upper right, lower right and lower left respectively.
between the upper left and lower left pin sockets.
Do not touch the case with the leads when
making this measurement. The measured
resistance between the sockets should be
between 106 to 124 ohms. 1
159
between the upper left and upper right pin
resistance between the sockets should be 360 to ∞ 0
420 ohms.
If the resistance measured, is outside the ranges,
or a open circuit is measured, the temperature
gauge should be replaced.
160
TACHOMETER REMOVAL
Remove the retaining screws, 1, from the tachometer
face. Using a long bladed screwdriver and working 1
through the opening provided by the removal of the
temperature or fuel gauge, pry the tachometer pot
from the connecting pins and remove the tachometer
assembly from the panel.
161
55-73
TACHOMETER TESTING
(Testing the tachometer removed from the
instrument panel) 1
1. Viewing the tachometer from the rear, orientate
∞ 0
the three mounting tabs 1, on the tachometer as
follows: left, upper center, right respectively.
between the upper center and right pin sockets.
Do not touch the case with the leads when
making this measurement. The measured
resistance between the sockets should be 252 to
292 ohms.
162
between the left and lower center pin sockets. Do
not touch the case with the leads when making
this measurement. The measured resistance
between the sockets should be 237 to 275 ohms. ∞ 0
If the resistance measured is outside the
ranges, or an open circuit is measured. the
tachometer should be replaced.
163
PTO SPEED INDICATOR ADJUSTMENT
(DELUXE) 1
The dial style adjuster, 1, that is located on the back
(rear), top area of the instrument panel, is used to set
the PTO speed indicator lights for the proper tractor
model. Set the dial adjuster to “0” for the PTO speed
setting.
30004052
164
55-74
165
Economy
166
Deluxe
INSTRUMENT LIGHTS 3. Remove the burned out bulb and replace with a
To change a burned out instrument bulb: new bulb. Reinsert the bulb assembly into the
back of the panel and turn clockwise a quarter
turn.
1. Loosen the two screws on the instrument panel
and pull the panel outward. 4. Reassemble the panel.
2. Rotate the bulb assembly counterclockwise a NOTE: Incorrect bulbs may cause overheating of the
quarter turn and remove it from the instrument instrument panel. Refer to the chart which follows for
panel. proper bulb replacement size.
55-75
2 3 4 5
1 6
8 7 9 10 13 14 15 16
17
11 12
167
NUMBER DESIGNATION INDUSTRY NUMBER CANDLE POWER
*1 ILLUM-TEMP GA 658 .31

*2 WARN-RT SIG 194 2
3 ILLUM-TACH 658 .31
4 ILLUM-TACH 658 .31
*5 WARN-LEFT SIG 194 2
6 ILLUM-FUEL GA 658 .31
*7 WARN-PARK BRAKE 194 2
*8 WARN-PTO 161 1
*9 WARN-HI BEAM 161 1
*10 WARN-FLASH 194 2
*11 WARN-600 PTO 161 1
*12 WARN-540 PTO 161 1
13 WARN-AIR RES 194 2
14 WARN-BATT 194 2
15 WARN-OIL PRESS 194 2
16 WARN-PREHEAT 194 2
17 ILLUM-HOUR METER 658 .31
NOTE: Asterisks (*) indicate bulbs found on Deluxe models only.
55-76
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
Circuit diagrams begin on the following page.
55-77
27
26 16
21 28
20 24 25 29
19
18
17
22
13 23
6 16
15
11
14
12
10
4 9 3
5
2 1
30002328
168
55-78
DELUXE MODEL SAFETY START CIRCUIT

1. Right Frame Rail Ground
2. Battery
3. Starter
4. 40-amp Main Fuse
5. Key Switch (START Position)
6. 7.5-amp Glow Plug/Voltage Regulator Circuit Fuse
7. 8-amp Operator Safety System/Cruise Control
Circuit Fuse
8. 7.5-amp Instrument Panel/Main Lighting Circuit Fuse
9. Neutral Start Relay
10. PTO Safety Start Relay
20002316
11. Glow Plug Power Relay
12. Glow Plug Timer Relay
13. Fuel Shutoff Relay
14. Engine Stop Solenoid
15. Operator Safety Module
16. Starter Bolt Ground Terminal
17. Optional Mid PTO Safety Switch (Open)
18. Range Neutral Start Switch
19. Main PTO Safety Start Switch
20. Operator Seat Switch
21. Diode
22. Parking Brake Switch (Open)
23. Glow Plugs (3 or 4)
24. Instrument Panel
25. Glow Plug Lamp
26. Parking Brake Lamp (OFF)
27. PTO Lamp (OFF)
28. Glow Plug lamp Relay
29. Left Side HPL Housing Ground Terminal
55-79
SAFETY START CIRCUIT

DELUXE MODELS
1. Current flow starts at the positive (+) terminal of relay. The other part is to a wire splice, which
the tractor battery. From the battery, current flows directs current to the neutral start switch, the
to the engine starter motor through the positive main PTO safety start switch, and the operator
(+) battery cable. seat safety switch.
2. From the starter motor, current flows through the • If the neutral start switch is closed, current
40-amp main fuse to a wire splice. The wire flows to terminal 30 of the neutral start relay,
splice sends current through two wires to the key and to the parking brake switch or to optional
switch. The other wire sends current to terminal mid-PTO switch.
30 of the glow plug power relay. • If the main PTO switch is closed, current
3. Current travels into the key switch through two flows to terminal 1 of the PTO safety start
terminals, “D” and “C”. When the key switch is in relay. This will energize the PTO safety start
the “START” position, current travels through relay, which completes the circuit to the
contacts in the switch, and out through terminals neutral start relay coil, energizing the neutral
“A” and “B”. start relay.
• If the operator safety seat switch is closed
4. From terminal “B” of the key switch, current flows
(operator seated), current flows to terminal
to the electrical system bus bar. Current flows
“E” of the operator safety module. The
through the 7.5-amp fuse, which protects the
operator safety module then completes the
automatic glow plug controller. Current also
ground circuit to the fuel shutoff relay,
flows from the bus bar through an 8-0amp circuit
energizing the relay. The fuel shutoff relay
breaker, which protects the operator safety start
then energizes the fuel shutoff solenoid,
system. Current is also directed to another
allowing fuel to be pumped into the
7.5-amp fuse, which protects the instrument
combustion chambers of the tractor engine.
panel circuit.
NOTE: The operator safety module may also be
5. Current flows from the 7.5-amp fuse to terminal energized if the parking brake safety switch and mid
86 of the glow plug power relay and terminal 4 of PTO (if equipped) switches are closed, as current
the glow plug timer relay. This will energize the flows through the parking brake switch, through a
glow plug timer relay, which will latch the function diode, to terminal “E” of the module. This allows the
circuit of the relay. When the function circuit of the tractor to be started if the operator is not seated but
relay is latched, the ground circuit is completed the parking brake set. Diagram shows both
from glow plug timer relay to terminal 85 of the circumstances.
glow plug power relay. This causes the glow plug
power relay to energize, sending current to the 7. Current that flows through the 7.5 amp fuse that
engine glow plugs. Current will also flow from the protects the instrument panel will illuminate the
glow plug power relay to the glow plug indicator parking brake indicator light and the PTO
light relay. The relay them becomes energized engaged indicator light if the ground circuits to
and completes the ground circuit for the glow the indicator lights are completed through the
plug indicator light through terminal 7 of the parking brake switch or the rear PTO or mid PTO
instrument panel. switches.
NOTE: When the key switch is in the start position, 8. From terminal “A” of the key switch, current flows
the timer portion of the glow plug timer relay is to terminal 86 of the neutral start relay. Terminal
bypassed through terminal 5 of the relay because 86 is the part of the relay’s coil circuit. When the
current is being supplied from terminal 87 of the neutral start relay coil is grounded (terminal 85),
neutral start relay. This sends current to the engine the relay becomes energized and current is
glow plugs and the glow plug indicator light on the allowed to flow from the safety start switch,
instrument panel. through terminal 30 of the safety start relay, and
out terminal 87. From terminal 87 current flows to
6. From the 8-amp circuit breaker, current is sent to terminal 5 of the glow plug timer relay and to the
two parts of the tractor wiring harness. The first “S” terminal of the starter motor, engaging the
part is to terminals 1 and 5 of the fuel shutoff motor.
55-80
TROUBLESHOOTING DELUXE MODEL

SAFETY STARTING CIRCUIT

Starter motor will not energize Insufficient battery charge Test battery. Charge, add water, or
replace as necessary
Blown 7.5-amp glow plug/voltage Inspect and replace 7.5-amp fuse

regulator fuse as necessary
Defective 8-amp operator safety Inspect and replace circuit breaker

system circuit breaker as necessary
Blown main fuse Inspect and replace main fuse as

necessary
Defective key switch Test key switch and replace as

necessary
Defective PTO safety start or Test relays and replace as neces-

neutral start relay sary
Malfunctioning safety start switch Test neutral range, main PTO, mid
PTO (if equipped) and seat safety
start switches for adjustment,
proper operation, and faulty ground
circuits
Defective start circuit diode Test start circuit diode and replace
(Only if operator is not in seat) as necessary. Operator must be out
of seat for test.
Malfunctioning starter motor Test starter motor and repair or

Starter motor energizes, but fails to Defective operator safety module Test module and replace as
start engine (lacks exhaust smoke) necessary
Defective fuel shutoff relay Test fuel shutoff relay and replace
as necessary
Malfunctioning fuel shutoff solenoid Test fuel shutoff solenoid and

55-81
22
16
23
19 15
18 20
17
16
7
12
21
15
6
14
13
10
11
5 9
4 8
3
2
1
30002329
169
55-82
ECONOMY MODEL SAFETY START CIRCUIT

2. Battery
3. Starter
4. 40-amp Main Fuse
5. Key Switch (START Position)
6. 7.5-amp Glow Plug/Voltage Regulator Circuit Fuse
7. 8-amp Operator Safety System/Cruise Control
Circuit Fuse
20002316
13. Engine Stop Solenoid
18. Operator Seat Switch
19. Diode
20. Parking Brake Switch (Open)
23. Glow Plug Lamp
55-83
SAFETY START CIRCUIT 6. From the 8-amp circuit breaker, current is sent to
two parts of the tractor wiring harness. The first
ECONOMY MODELS part is to terminals 1 and 5 of the fuel shutoff
1. Current flow starts at the positive (+) terminal of relay. The other part is to a wire splice, which
directs current to the neutral start switch, the
the tractor battery. From the battery, current flows
to the engine starter motor through the positive main PTO safety start switch, and the operator
(+) battery cable. seat safety switch.
2. From the starter motor, current flows through the • If the neutral start switch is closed, current
40-amp main fuse to a wire splice. The wire flows to terminal 30 of the neutral start relay,
splice sends current through two wires to the key and to the parking brake switch.
switch. The other wire sends current to terminal • If the main PTO switch is closed, current
30 of the glow plug power relay. flows to terminal 1 of the PTO safety start
relay. This will energize the PTO safety start
3. Current travels into the key switch through two relay, which completes the circuit to the
terminals, “D” and “C”. When the key switch is in neutral start relay coil, energizing the neutral
the “START” position, current travels through start relay.
contacts in the switch, and out through terminals
“A” and “B”. • If the operator safety seat switch is closed
(operator seated), current flows to terminal
4. From terminal “B” of the key switch, current flows “E” of the operator safety module. The
to the electrical system bus bar. Current flows operator safety module then completes the
through the 7.5-amp fuse that protects the ground circuit to the fuel shutoff relay,
automatic glow plug controller. Current also energizing the relay. The fuel shutoff relay
flows from the bus bar through an 8-amp circuit then energizes the fuel shutoff solenoid,
breaker, which protects the operator safety start allowing fuel to be pumped into the
system. combustion chambers of the tractor engine.
5. Current flows from the 7.5-amp fuse to terminal NOTE: The operator safety module may also be
86 of the glow plug power relay and terminal 4 of energized if the parking brake safety switch is closed,
the glow plug timer relay. This will energize the as current flows through the parking brake switch,
glow plug timer relay, which will latch the function through a diode, to terminal “E” of the module. This
circuit of the relay. When the function circuit of the allows the tractor to be started if the operator is not
relay is latched, the ground circuit is completed seated but the parking brake set. Diagram shows
from glow plug timer relay to terminal 85 of the both circumstances.
glow plug power relay. This causes the glow plug
power relay to energize, sending current to the 7. From terminal “A” of the key switch, current flows
engine glow plugs. Current will also flow from the to terminal 86 of the neutral start relay. Terminal
glow plug power relay to terminal 7 of the 86 is the part of the relay’s coil circuit. When the
instrument panel. This supplies current to the neutral start relay coil is grounded (terminal 85),
glow plug indicator lamp. the relay becomes energized and current is
allowed to flow from the safety start switch,
NOTE: When the key switch is in the start position,
through terminal 30 of the safety start relay, and
the timer portion of the glow plug timer relay is
out terminal 87. From terminal 87 current flows to
bypassed through terminal 5 of the relay because
terminal 5 of the glow plug timer relay and to the
current is being supplied from terminal 87 of the
“S” terminal of the starter motor, engaging the
neutral start relay. This sends current to the engine
motor.
glow plugs and the glow plug indicator light on the
instrument panel.
55-84
ECONOMY MODEL SAFETY STARTING

CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING

Starter motor will not energize Insufficient battery charge Test battery. Charge, add water, or
Blown 7.5-amp glow plug/voltage Inspect and replace 7.5-amp fuse

regulator fuse as necessary
Defective 8-amp operator safety Inspect and replace circuit breaker

system circuit breaker as necessary
Blown main fuse Inspect and replace main fuse as

necessary

necessary
Defective PTO safety start or Test relays and replace as neces-

neutral start relay sary
Malfunctioning safety start switch Test neutral range, main PTO, and
seat safety start switches for
adjustment, proper operation, and
faulty ground circuits
Defective diode (parking brake Test start circuit diode and replace
circuit) as necessary. Operator must be out
(only if operator is not in seat) of seat for test
Malfunctioning starter motor Test starter motor and repair or

Starter motor energizes, but fails to Defective operator safety module Test module and replace as neces-
start engine (lacks exhaust smoke) sary
Defective fuel shutoff relay Test fuel shutoff relay and replace
as necessary

55-85
23
7 21
17
22
20
16
15
6 18 19
14
13
12
11 10
5
13
4 8
3
2 1
30002333
170
55-86
DELUXE MODEL SAFE OPERATION

CIRCUIT
2. Battery
3. Starter
4. 40-amp Main Fuse
5. Key Switch (ACC/RUN position)
6. 8-amp Operator Safety System Circuit Breaker
7. 7.5-amp Instrument Panel/Main Lighting Fuse
10. Fuel Shutoff Solenoid
20002316
16. Operator Seat Safety Switch
17. Diode
18. Mid PTO Safety Switch
19. Parking Brake Switch
22. Parking Brake Lamp
23. PTO Indicator Lamp (Illuminated)
55-87
SAFE OPERATION CIRCUIT main PTO safety start switch, and the operator
seat safety switch.
DELUXE MODELS
• If the operator safety switch is closed
NOTE: The wiring diagram shows the engine (operator seated), current flows to terminal
running, the range lever in gear, the main PTO and “E” of the operator safety module. The
mid PTO levers “ON”, and the parking brake operator safety module then completes the
disengaged with the operator seated. ground circuit to the fuel shutoff relay,
energizing the relay. The fuel shutoff relay
1. Current flow starts at the positive (+) terminal of then energizes the fuel shutoff solenoid,
the tractor battery. From the battery, current flows allowing fuel to be pumped into the
to the engine starter motor through the positive combustion chambers of the tractor engine.
(+) battery cable. • If the operator gets off of the operator’s seat,
2. From the starter motor, current flows through the no current is flowing to terminal “E” of the
40-amp main fuse to a wire splice. Current is then operator safety module. After 1.5 – 2.0
directed to terminals “D” and “C” of the key seconds, the operator safety module will cut
switch. With the key switch in the “ACC/RUN” the ground to the fuel shutoff relay, which
position (tractor running, main PTO engaged), stops current flow to the fuel shutoff solenoid,
current does not flow through terminal “D”. shutting the tractor engine off.
Current does flow through terminal “C”, through NOTE: The operator safety module may also be
the key switch and out through terminal “B”. energized if the range neutral switch, the mid PTO
switch (if equipped), and the parking brake safety
3. From terminal “B” of the key switch, current flows
switch are closed. If the neutral range and the mid
to the electrical system bus bar. Current flows
PTO switches are closed (neutral and disengaged),
through the 8-amp circuit breaker, which protects
current flows through the switches to the parking
the operator safety start system.
brake switch and through the parking brake switch.
4. From the 8-amp circuit breaker, current is sent to From the parking brake switch, current flows through
two parts of the tractor wiring harness. The first a diode, to terminal “E” of the module. This allows the
part is to terminals 1 and 5 of the fuel shutoff tractor to run if the operator is not seated but the
relay. The other part is to a wire splice, which parking brake is set.
55-88
DELUXE MODEL SAFE OPERATION CIRCUIT

TROUBLESHOOTING

Engine does not continue to run Defective seat safety switch Test seat safety switch and replace
while operator is seated as necessary
Defective seat safety switch timer Test seat safety switch and replace
as necessary
Defective range neutral or fuel Test relays and replace as neces-

shutoff relay sary

Defective operator safety module Test module and replace as neces-

sary
Defective 8-amp operator safety Test circuit breaker and replace as

circuit breaker necessary
Open wiring in safe operation Check for loose connectors,

circuit grounds, and wiring damage
Engine continues to run after Defective seat safety switch Test seat safety switch and replace
operator has left seat for more than as necessary
two seconds and mid PTO and
parking brake is not engaged
as necessary
Defective parking brake or mid PTO Test switches and replace as

(if equipped) switch necessary
Defective range neutral or fuel Test relays and replace as neces-

shutoff relay sary

Defective operator safety module Test module and replace as neces-

sary
Short-circuit in wiring or faulty Check for loose safety switch

ground circuit connectors, grounds, and wiring
harness for damage
Engine does not continue to run Defective range neutral switch, Test components and replace as
when operator is not in seat, PTO switch, parking brake switch, necessary
transmission is in neutral, PTO is or start circuit diode
off, and parking brake is engaged
55-89
19
15
18
7
17
15 20
6 16
13 14
12
10
9
5 11
4 8
3
2 1
30002332
171
55-90
ECONOMY MODEL SAFE OPERATION

CIRCUIT
2. Battery
3. Starter
4. 40-amp Main Fuse
5. Key Switch (ACC/RUN Position)
6. 7.5-amp Voltage Regulation/Glow Plug Circuit Fuse
20002316
11. Glow Plug timer Relay
12. Fuel Shutoff Solenoid
18. Operator Seat Safety Switch
19. Diode
20. Parking Brake Switch
55-91
SAFE OPERATION CIRCUIT relay. The other part is to a wire splice, which
ECONOMY MODELS main PTO safety start switch, and the operator
1. Current flow starts at the positive (+) terminal of seat safety switch.
the tractor battery. From the battery, current flows • If the operator safety seat switch is closed
to the engine starter motor through the positive (operator seated), current flows to terminal
(+) battery cable. “E” of the operator safety module. The
2. From the starter motor, current flows through the operator safety module then completes the
40-amp main fuse to a wire splice. Current is then ground circuit to the fuel shutoff relay,
directed to terminals “D” and “C” of the key switch. energizing the relay. The fuel shutoff relay
With the key switch in the “ACC/RUN” position, then energizes the fuel shutoff solenoid,
current does not flow through terminal “D”. allowing fuel to be pumped into the
Current does flow through terminal “C”, through combustion chambers of the tractor engine.
the key switch and out through terminal “B”. • If the operator gets off of the operator’s seat,
no current is flowing to terminal “E” of the
3. From terminal “B” of the key switch, current flows operator safety module, as the operator
to the electrical system bus bar. Current flows safety seat switch is open. After 1.5 – 2.0
through the 7.5-amp fuse that protects the seconds, the operator safety module will cut
automatic glow plug controller. Current also the ground to the fuel shutoff relay, which
flows from the bus bar through an 8-amp circuit stops current flow to the fuel shutoff solenoid,
breaker, which protects the operator safety start shutting the tractor engine off.
system.
NOTE: The operator safety module may also be
4. Current flows from the 7.5-amp fuse to terminal energized if the range neutral and the parking brake
86 of the glow plug power relay and terminal 4 of safety switches are closed. If the range switch is
the glow plug timer relay. Since the key switch is closed, current flows through the switch to the
not in the “START” position, current is not utilized parking brake switch and through the parking brake
by these components. switch. From the parking brake switch, current flows
5. From the 8-amp circuit breaker, current is sent to through a diode, to terminal “E” of the module. This
two parts of the tractor wiring harness. The first allows the tractor run if the operator is not seated but
part is to terminals 1 and 5 of the fuel shutoff the tractor is out of gear and the parking brake is set.
55-92
ECONOMY MODEL SAFE OPERATION


Engine does not continue to run Defective seat safety switch Test seat safety switch and replace
while operator is seated as necessary
as necessary
Defective range neutral or fuel
shutoff relay Test relays and replace as neces-
sary
Malfunctioning fuel shutoff solenoid
Test fuel shutoff solenoid and
Defective operator safety module replace as necessary
Defective 8-amp operator safety Test module and replace as neces-

circuit breaker sary
Open wiring in safe operation Test circuit breaker and replace as

circuit necessary
Check for loose connectors,

grounds, and wiring damage
Engine continues to run after Defective seat safety switch Test seat safety switch and replace
operator has left seat for more than as necessary
two seconds and mid PTO and
parking brake is not engaged Defective seat safety switch timer Test seat safety switch and replace
as necessary
Defective parking brake switch
Test switch and replace as neces-
sary
Defective range neutral or fuel
shutoff relay Test relays and replace as neces-
sary
Malfunctioning fuel shutoff solenoid
Test fuel shutoff solenoid and
Defective operator safety module replace as necessary
Short-circuit in wiring or faulty Test module and replace as neces-

ground circuit sary
Check for loose safety switch

connectors, grounds, and wiring
harness for damage
Engine does not continue to run Defective range neutral switch, Test components and replace as
when operator is not in seat, PTO switch, parking brake switch, necessary
transmission is in neutral, PTO is or start circuit diode
off, and parking brake is engaged
55-93
9 10
11
3
5
12
4
2
1
30002315
172
55-94
DELUXE MODEL CHARGING SYSTEM

CIRCUIT
1. Frame Rail Ground
2. Battery
3. Starter Motor
4. Alternator
5. 40--amp Main Fuse
6. Key Switch
7. 7.5--amp Voltage Regulator Fuse
8. 7.5--amp Alternator Excitation Fuse
9. Excitation Diode
10. Charge Lamp
20002316
12. Starter Bolt Ground
55-95
CHARGING SYSTEM CIRCUIT circuit is used to control voltage output from

the alternator.
DELUXE MODELS • The second fuse is the 7.5-amp fuse that
1. Current flow starts at the positive (+) battery protects the alternator excitation and battery
terminal and is directed to the battery (B) terminal charge lamp circuit. Current passes through
of the starter. The wiring harness takes two paths the fuse and is directed to the alternator
from the battery terminal of the starter. The first excitation diode. Current is allowed to pass
path directs current to the 40-amp main fuse. The through this direction of the diode and is then
second path connects the battery terminal of the directed to terminal 2 of the instrument panel.
starter to the battery terminal of the alternator. Current the flows to the charge warning
lamp. Current is also directed from the “L”
• The wire from the starter to the alternator is terminal of the alternator to terminal 6 of the
the anode. instrument panel. From terminal 6, current
2. Current flows through the main fuse to a wiring flows to the charge lamp. This is a 5-volt
splice. Current flows from the wiring splice to excitation circuit from the alternator. During
terminals “C” and “D” on the key switch. Current normal operating conditions the lamp is not
that is sent to the “D” terminal of the key switch grounded and will not illuminate. This is
is not utilized when the key switch is in the because current exists on both sides of the
“ACC/RUN” position. Current then flows from the bulb. If there is a malfunction in the charging
“C” terminal through terminal “B” of the key system, current will not be present in the
switch to the tractor bus bar. From the bus bar excitation circuit and the charge lamp will
current flows to two different fuses. illuminate, alerting the operator of a
• The first fuse is the 7.5-amp fuse that malfunction in the tractor’s charging system.
protects the voltage regulator circuit. From NOTE: The charge lamp will illuminate with the key
the fuse, current is directed to the regulator switch in the “ACC/RUN” position with the tractor
“R” terminal on the alternator. This part of the engine not running, as no excitation voltage is being
provided by the alternator.
55-96
DELUXE MODEL CHARGING SYSTEM


Charge light remains illuminated Faulty alternator component Test alternator and repair a neces-
sary
Short circuit to ground between Check wiring and repair as neces-

alternator and warning lamp sary
Charge light does not illuminate Blown 7.5-amp instrument panel Inspect 7.5-amp fuse and replace
fuse as necessary
Faulty charge indicator bulb Inspect indicator bulb and replace

as necessary
Open charge light circuit Inspect connections, grounds, and

wiring for charge circuit and repair
as necessary
Insufficient or no battery charge, Battery charge less than 75% Test battery. Charge, add water, or
hard starting, or dim indicator light replace as necessary
Fan belt slipping Check fan belt tension, adjust as

necessary
Loose wiring connections Check wiring connections for

charge circuit, repair as necessary
Continuity fault in external wiring Check wiring harness and repair as

necessary
Blown 7.5-amp alternator excita- Inspect 7.5-amp fuse and replace

tion fuse as necessary
Battery failure, frequent burnout of Overcharge condition Check alternator voltage output
lamps and fuses and repair as necessary
Ground circuit for alternator short- Check alternator wiring and con-
circuited nections and repair as necessary
55-97
7
11
10
3
5
12
4
2 1
30002317
173
55-98
ECONOMY MODEL CHARGING SYSTEM

CIRCUIT
2. Battery
3. Starter Motor
4. Alternator
5. 40-amp Main Fuse
6. Key Switch
7. 7.5-amp Voltage Regulator Fuse
8. 5-amp Alternator Excitation Fuse
9. Excitation Diode
10. Charge Lamp
20002316
12. Starter Bolt Ground
55-99
CHARGING SYSTEM CIRCUIT circuit is used to control voltage output from

the alternator.
ECONOMY MODELS • The second fuse is the 5-amp fuse that
1. Current flow starts at the positive (+) battery protects the alternator excitation and battery
terminal and is directed to the battery (B) terminal charge lamp circuit. Current passes through
of the starter. The wiring harness takes two paths the fuse and is directed to the alternator
from the battery terminal of the starter. The first excitation diode. Current is allowed to pass
path directs current to the 40-amp main fuse. The through this direction of the diode and is then
second path connects the battery terminal of the directed to terminal 2 of the instrument panel.
starter to the battery terminal of the alternator. Current the flows to the charge warning
lamp. Current is also directed from the “L”
• The wire to the alternator is the anode terminal of the alternator to terminal 6 of the
between the starter and the alternator. instrument panel. From terminal 6, current
2. Current flows through the main fuse to a wiring flows to the charge warning lamp. This is a
splice. Current flows from the wiring splice to 5-volt excitation circuit from the alternator.
terminals “C” and “D” on the key switch. Current During normal operating conditions the lamp
that is sent to the “D” terminal of the key switch is not grounded and will not illuminate. This
is not utilized when the key switch is in the is because current exists on both sides of the
“ACC/RUN” position. Current then flows from the bulb. If there is a malfunction in the charging
“C” terminal through terminal “B” of the key system, current will not be present in the
switch to the tractor bus bar. From the bus bar excitation circuit and the charge lamp will
current flows to two different fuses. illuminate, alerting the operator of a
• The first fuse is the 7.5-amp fuse that malfunction in the tractor’s charging system.
protects the voltage regulator circuit. From NOTE: The charge lamp will illuminate with the key
the fuse, current is directed to the regulator switch in the “ACC/RUN” position with the tractor
“R” terminal on the alternator. This part of the engine not running, as no excitation voltage is being
provided by the alternator.
55-100
ECONOMY MODEL CHARGING SYSTEM


Charge light remains illuminated Faulty alternator component Test alternator and repair a neces-
sary
Short circuit to ground between Check wiring and repair as neces-

alternator and warning lamp sary
Charge light does not illuminate Blown 5-amp instrument panel fuse Inspect 5-amp fuse and replace as
necessary
Faulty charge indicator bulb Inspect indicator bulb and replace

as necessary
Open charge light circuit Inspect connections, grounds, and

wiring for charge circuit and repair
as necessary
Insufficient or no battery charge, Battery charge less than 75% Test battery. Charge, add water, or
hard starting, or dim indicator light replace as necessary
Fan belt slipping Check fan belt tension, adjust as

necessary
Loose wiring connections Check wiring connections for

charge circuit, repair as necessary
Continuity fault in external wiring Check wiring harness and repair as

necessary
Blown 7.5-amp alternator excita- Inspect 7.5-amp fuse and replace

tion fuse as necessary
Battery failure, frequent burnout of Overcharge condition Check alternator voltage output
lamps and fuses and repair as necessary
Ground circuit for alternator short- Check alternator wiring and con-
circuited nections and repair as necessary
55-101
14
15
7
12
11
13
10
8
5 3
2
1
30002331
174
55-102
DELUXE MODEL ENGINE GLOW PLUG

CIRCUIT
1. Frame Rail Ground Terminal
2. Battery
3. Starter
4. 40-amp Main Fuse
6. 7.5-amp Glow Plug Circuit Fuse
7. 7.5-amp Instrument Panel and Main Lighting Circuit
Fuse
20002316
12. Glow Plug Indicator Lamp
14. Glow Plug Lamp Relay
55-103
ENGINE GLOW PLUG CIRCUIT 86 of the glow plug power relay and terminal
4 of the glow plug timer relay from the glow
DELUXE MODELS plug fuse. The glow plug timer relay will then
1. When the key switch is turned from the “OFF” energize, completing the ground circuit to
energize the glow plug power relay. The glow
position to the “ACC/RUN/HEAT” position,
current flows from the positive (+) battery plug timer relay will remain energized for
terminal, through the battery cable to the starter approximately 4 seconds before cutting the
motor. Current then flows from the starter to the ground to the glow plug power relay.
40-amp main fuse. 3. When the glow plug power relay is energized,
current flows from terminal 30 through the power
2. Current is directed to a wire splice from the main relay, and out through terminal 87. Current is sent
fuse. The wire splice sends current to the “D” and to the glow plug bus bar from terminal 87, and
“C” terminals of the key switch and to terminal 30 then to the glow plugs. Current is also sent to
of the glow plug power relay. terminal 1 of the glow plug indicator light relay.
• Current will not flow through the “D” terminal When current is supplied to terminal 1, the coil
of the key switch when the switch is in the circuit of the glow plug indicator light relay is
“ACC/RUN/HEAT” position. energized and the relay latches. This causes the
• Current will flow through the “C” and “B” glow plug indicator light to illuminate, as the
terminals of the key switch to the tractor bus circuit from the 7.5 amp instrument panel fuse to
bar. Current flows through the 7.5-amp fuse the indicator lamp and then to the ground
that protects the glow plug heat control circuit terminal at the starter bolt is complete. When the
and to the 7.5 amp fuse that protects the glow plug timer relay stops supplying the ground
instrument panel. Current flows to terminal to the glow plug power relay, the lamp goes out.
55-104
DELUXE MODEL ENGINE GLOW PLUG

Engine glow plugs will not heat Insufficient battery charge Test battery. Charge, add water, or
Blown main fuse Inspect main fuse and replace as

necessary
Blown 7.5 amp glow plug circuit Inspect fuse and replace as
fuse necessary

necessary
Corroded electrode buss bar Remove buss bar, clean bar and
connection glow plug electrodes
Defective glow plug(s) Test glow plug(s) and replace as

necessary
Glow plug indicator light will not Insufficient battery charge Test battery. Charge, add water, or
illuminate while key switch is in replace as necessary
“ACC/RUN/HEAT” or “START”
position Main fuse Inspect main fuse and replace as
necessary

necessary
Defective glow plug power relay Test relay and replace as neces-
sary
Faulty glow plug indicator bulb Check glow plug indicator light and
Defective glow plug indicator light Test timer and replace as neces-
timer sary
Glow plug indicator light circuit Check circuit connections,

open grounds, and wires
Defective glow plug lamp relay Test relay and replace as neces-
sary
Blown 7.5-amp glow plug circuit or Inspect and replace fuses as

instrument panel fuse necessary
Glow plug indicator light remains Defective glow plug indicator light Test timer and replace as neces-
illuminated after 5 seconds when timer sary
keys switch is in “ACC/RUN”
position
Short circuit between the glow plug Check wiring between the instru-
indicator light and terminal “A” of ment panel and timer
the glow plug indicator light timer.
55-105
13
11 12 13
10
7
8
5 3
2 1
30002330
175
55-106
ECONOMY MODEL ENGINE GLOW PLUG

CIRCUIT
1. Frame Rail Ground Terminal
2. Battery
3. Starter
4. 40-amp Main Fuse
6. 7.5-amp Glow Plug Circuit Fuse
20002316
11. Glow Plug Indicator Lamp
55-107
ENGINE GLOW PLUG CIRCUIT bar. Current flows through the 7.5-amp fuse
that protects the glow plug heat control
ECONOMY MODELS circuit. Current flows to terminal 86 of the
1. When the key switch is turned from the “OFF” glow plug power relay and terminal 4 of the
glow plug timer relay from the fuse. The glow
position to the “ACC/RUN” position, current flows
from the positive (+) battery terminal, through the plug timer relay will then energize, complet-
battery cable to the starter motor. Current then ing the ground circuit to energize the glow
flows from the starter to the 40-amp main fuse. plug power relay. The glow plug timer relay
will remain energized for approximately 13
2. Current is directed to a wire splice from the main seconds before cutting the ground to the
fuse. The wire splice sends current to the “D” and glow plug power relay.
“C” terminals of the key switch and to terminal 30 3. When the glow plug power relay is energized,
of the glow plug power relay. current flows from terminal 30 through the power
• Current will not flow through the “D” terminal relay, and out through terminal 87. Current is sent
of the key switch when the switch is in the to the glow plug bus bar and to the glow plugs
“ACC/RUN” position. from terminal 87. Current is also sent to glow plug
• Current will flow through the “C” and “B” indicator light through terminal 7 of the
terminals of the key switch to the tractor bus instrument panel.
55-108
ECONOMY MODEL ENGINE GLOW PLUG

Engine glow plugs will not heat Insufficient battery charge Test battery. Charge, add water, or
Blown main fuse Inspect main fuse and replace as

necessary
Blown 7.5 amp glow plug circuit Inspect fuse and replace as
fuse necessary

necessary
Corroded electrode buss bar Remove buss bar, clean bar and
connection glow plug electrodes
Defective glow plug(s) Test glow plug(s) and replace as

necessary
Glow plug indicator light will not Insufficient battery charge Test battery. Charge, add water, or
illuminate while key switch is in replace as necessary
“ACC/RUN/HEAT” or “START”
position Blown main fuse Inspect main fuse and replace as
necessary

necessary
Defective glow plug power relay Test relay and replace as neces-
sary
Faulty glow plug indicator bulb Check glow plug indicator light and
Defective glow plug indicator light Test timer and replace as neces-
timer sary
Glow plug indicator light circuit Check circuit connections,

open grounds, and wires
Blown 7.5-amp glow plug circuit or Inspect and replace fuses as

5-amp instrument panel fuse necessary
Glow plug indicator light remains Defective glow plug indicator light Test timer and replace as neces-
illuminated after 11 seconds when timer sary
keys switch is in “ACC/RUN”
position
Short circuit between the glow plug Check wiring between the instru-
indicator light and terminal “A” of ment panel and timer
the glow plug indicator light timer.
55-109
7 8
5 3
2 1
30002335
176
55-110
DELUXE MODEL ENGINE COOLANT

TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT
2. Battery
3. Starter
4. 40-amp Main Fuse
5. Key Switch
6. 7.5--amp Instrument Panel Fuse
7. Coolant Temperature Gauge
8. Coolant Temperature Sending Unit
20002316
55-111
COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT 21 to the positive (+) terminal on the coolant

temperature gauge. The ground path for the
DELUXE MODELS gauge exits the instrument panel at terminal 24
1. Current leaves the positive (+) terminal of the and is then directed to the ground terminal at the
starter bolt.
battery and flows to the battery (B) terminal of the
starter. Current is directed from the battery 4. The coolant temperature gauge is controlled by
terminal of the starter to the 40-amp main fuse. variable resistance to ground. The ground path
Current flows through the main fuse to a wiring exits the gauge and then out of the instrument
splice. Current flows from the wiring splice to panel through terminal 15. The variable
terminals “C” and “D” on the key switch. Current resistance ground path then goes to the coolant
that is sent to the “D” terminal of the key switch temperature sending unit. At the sending unit, the
is not utilized when the key switch is in the resistance to ground changes as the engine
“ACC/RUN” position. heats or cools. The coolant temperature gauge
translates this resistance into movement of the
2. When the key switch is turned to the “ACC/RUN”
position, current flows through the key switch gauge needle. The warmer the engine is, the less
from terminal “C” to terminal “B”. From terminal resistance to ground there is in the temperature
“B”, current flows to the 7.5-amp fuse that sending unit. This will cause the gauge needle to
protects the instrument panel and lighting circuit. rise, as there is less resistance to ground. The
temperature sending unit, which is threaded into
3. Current is then directed to a wiring splice, which the engine block, is grounded by the engine
directs current to terminal 4 and terminal 21 on block.
the instrument panel. Current flows from terminal
55-112
DELUXE MODEL ENGINE COOLANT

TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT
TROUBLESHOOTING
Inoperative temperature gauge Blown 7.5-amp instrument panel Check 7.5-amp fuse and replace as
fuse necessary
Defective coolant temperature Test coolant temperature sending

sending unit unit and replace as necessary
Defective temperature gauge Test temperature gauge, replace

instrument panel as necessary
Faulty ground for temperature Check ground terminal at starter

gauge bolt. Repair as necessary
55-113
6
7
4
3
2
1
30002319
177
55-114
ECONOMY MODEL COOLANT

TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT
2. Battery
3. Starter Motor
4. 40-amp Main Fuse
5. Key Switch
6. 7.5-amp Instrument Panel Fuse
7. Instrument Panel
8. Coolant Temperature Lamp
9. Coolant Temperature Switch
20002316
55-115
COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT “B”, current flows to the 7.5-amp fuse that
protects the instrument panel and lighting circuit.
ECONOMY MODELS
3. Current is then directed to terminal 4 on the
1. Current leaves the positive (+) terminal of the instrument panel and then to the high tempera-
battery and flows to the battery (B) terminal of the ture indicator bulb. The ground path for the
starter. Current is directed from the battery indicator bulb exits the instrument panel at
terminal of the starter to the 40-amp main fuse. terminal 7. From terminal 7 the ground path goes
Current flows through the main fuse to a wiring to the coolant temperature switch, which is
splice. Current flows from the wiring splice to threaded into the engine block as a ground
terminals “C” and “D” on the key switch. Current source.
that is sent to the “D” terminal of the key switch
4. When engine coolant temperature exceeds 101
is not utilized when the key switch is in the
– 109°C (214 – 228°F), the coolant temperature
“ACC/RUN” position.
switch will close, completing the ground path
2. When the key switch is turned to the “ACC/RUN” from the indicator bulb, through the switch, to the
position, current flows through the key switch engine block. The indicator bulb will then
from terminal “C” to terminal “B”. From terminal illuminate, warning the operator of an engine
overheating condition.
55-116
ECONOMY MODEL ENGINE COOLANT

TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT
TROUBLESHOOTING

Inoperative temperature coolant Blown 7.5-amp instrument panel Check 7.5-amp fuse and replace as
light fuse necessary
Defective coolant temperature Test coolant temperature sending

switch unit and replace as necessary
Test temperature light and replace

Defective temperature light as necessary
55-117
17
15
16
18
14
11 12
13
10
9
3
4
5
2
1
30002321
178
55-118
DELUXE MODEL HAZARD FLASHER

CONTROL CIRCUIT
2. Battery
3. Starter
5. Key Switch (OFF)
6. Hazard Switch (ON)
7. 10--amp Hazard Lamp Fuse
8. 10--amp Directional Signal Fuse
9. Directional Signal Flasher Relay
10. Directional Signal Switch (OFF)
20002316
11. NASO Signal Converter Relay
13. Left Turn Signal Indicator Lamp
14. Right Turn Signal Indicator Lamp
16. Left Directional Signal Light
17. Right Directional Signal Light
18. Left Side HPL Cover Ground
55-119
HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL CIRCUIT • From terminal 5 of the hazard switch, the
signal current is directed through the hazard
DELUXE MODELS switch and out terminal 6. Current flows from
1. Current flows from the positive (+) battery terminal 6 to a wire splice, where the signal
current is then split and sent to terminals 1
terminal, through the battery cable to the starter
motor. Current then flows from the starter to the and 6 of the NASO hazard/directional signal
40-amp main fuse. converter relay.
• The directional signal switch is not using
2. Current is directed to a wire splice from the main current, as the switch is in the “OFF” position.
fuse. The wire splice sends current to the 10-amp However, the directional signal switch has
fuse that protects the hazard lamp fuse. Current priority over the hazard switch and will
flows through the 10-amp fuse to terminal 3 of the operate the directional signals before the
hazard switch. When the hazard switch is hazard signals, if the switch is moved from
pushed to the “ON” position, current flows the “OFF” position to one of the directional
through terminal 2 of the switch to the positive (+) positions.
terminal of the flasher relay and terminal 3 of the
NASO hazard/directional signal converter relay. 4. The NASO hazard/directional signal converter
The NASO relay is supplied with a ground relay sends conditioned signal current out of
through terminal 7. The hazard switch contains terminals 5 and 10. The signal current is then
an internal lamp to indicate when the hazard directed to the left and right rear hazard lights,
lights are activated. When the hazard switch is causing them to flash. The signal current is also
pushed to the “ON” position, current travels from directed to terminal 9 and 19 of the instrument
an internal junction at terminal 6 to the lamp. The panel. These terminals are the directional
lamp is grounded through terminal 7 of the indicator lights. The indicator lights are grounded
switch, causing the lamp to illuminate. through terminal 13, and the signal current
causes the lights to flash, indicating that the
3. The flasher relay “LOAD” terminal supplies hazard lights are on.
conditioned signal current to terminal 5 of the
hazard switch and to terminals “B” and “A” of the
directional signal switch.
55-120
DELUXE MODEL HAZARD SIGNAL


Hazard Signal Lights will not Blown 10-amp hazard signal fuse Inspect fuse and replace as neces-
illuminate or flash sary
Hazard signal bulb(s) burnt out Inspect bulb(s) and replace as

necessary
Defective hazard switch Test switch and replace as neces-

sary
Defective flasher relay Test flasher relay by using a known

functioning flasher relay and re-
place as necessary
Defective NASO hazard/directional Test NASO hazard/directional sig-

signal converter nal converter and replace as
necessary
Faulty wiring or ground connection Inspect the tractor’s wiring harness

and ground terminals for damage,
corrosion, and short circuits. Repair
or replace as needed
Instrument panel hazard indica- Indicator bulb(s) burnt out Inspect bulb and replace as neces-
tor(s) does not illuminate sary

55-121
14
13
11 15
10
9
12
4 3
2
1
30002322
179
55-122
ECONOMY MODEL HAZARD FLASHER

CONTROL CIRCUIT
2. Battery
3. Starter
4. 40-amp Main Fuse
5. Key Switch (OFF)
6. Hazard Switch (ON)
7. 10-amp Hazard Lamp Circuit Fuse
8. 10-amp Directional Signal Circuit Fuse
10. Directional Signal Switch (OFF)
20002316
13. Left Directional Signal Light
14. Right Directional Signal Light
55-123
HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL CIRCUIT 3. The flasher relay “LOAD” terminal supplies
conditioned signal current to terminal 5 of the
ECONOMY MODELS hazard switch and to terminals “B” and “A” of the
1. Current flows from the positive (+) battery directional signal switch.
terminal, through the battery cable to the starter • From terminal 5 of the hazard switch, the
motor. Current then flows from the starter to the signal current is directed through the hazard
40-amp main fuse. switch and out terminal 6. Current flows from
2. Current is directed to a wire splice from the main terminal 6 to a wire splice, where the signal
fuse. The wire splice sends current to the 10-amp current is then split and sent to terminals 1
fuse that protects the hazard lamp fuse. Current and 6 of the NASO hazard/directional signal
flows through the 10-amp fuse to terminal 3 of the converter relay.
hazard switch. When the hazard switch is • The directional signal switch is not using
pushed to the “ON” position, current flows current, as the switch is in the “OFF” position.
through terminal 2 of the switch to the positive (+) However, the directional signal switch has
terminal of the flasher relay and terminal 3 of the priority over the hazard switch and will
NASO hazard/directional signal converter relay. operate the directional signals before the
The NASO relay is supplied with a ground hazard signals, if the switch is moved from
through terminal 7. The hazard switch contains the “OFF” position to one of the directional
an internal lamp to indicate when the hazard positions.
lights are activated. When the hazard switch is 4. The NASO hazard/directional signal converter
pushed to the “ON” position, current travels from relay sends conditioned signal current out of
an internal junction at terminal 6 to the lamp. The terminals 5 and 10. The signal current is then
lamp is grounded through terminal 7 of the directed to the left and right rear hazard lights,
switch, causing the lamp to illuminate. causing the lights to flash.
55-124
ECONOMY MODEL HAZARD SIGNAL


Hazard Signal Lights will not Blown 10-amp hazard signal fuse Inspect fuse and replace as neces-
illuminate or flash sary
Hazard signal bulb(s) burnt out Inspect bulb(s) and replace as

necessary
Defective hazard switch Test switch and replace as neces-

sary

place as necessary

necessary

55-125
17
15 16
18
14 11 12
13
8
6
10
9
7
4 3
2 1
30002324
180
55-126
DELUXE MODEL DIRECTIONAL SIGNAL

CONTROL CIRCUIT
2. Battery
3. Starter
4. 40-amp Main Fuse
5. Key Switch (ACC/RUN or START)
6. Hazard Switch (OFF)
10. Directional Signal Switch (LEFT)
20002316
13. Left Turn Signal Indicator Lamp (Flashing)
14. Right Turn Signal Indicator Light (Solid)
16. Left Directional Signal Light (Flashing)
17. Right Directional Signal Light (Solid)
55-127
DIRECTIONAL SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT through the switch and out terminal “C”. Then
current is directed to terminal 4 of the NASO
DELUXE MODELS hazard/directional signal converter relay.
NOTE: The following circuit is described with the Current will not flow through the switch from
terminal “A” to terminal “D”. Current only
directional signal switch in the “left turn” position.
flows through terminals “A” and “D” when the
switch is in the “right turn” position.
1. Current flows from the positive (+) battery
terminal, through the battery cable to the starter 4. The NASO hazard/directional signal converter
motor. Current then flows from the starter to the relay receives the signal current at terminal 4 and
40-amp main fuse. passes the signal current out through terminal 5.
The NASO hazard/directional signal converter
2. Current is directed to a wire splice from the main relay also directs steady state current out
fuse. The wire splice directs current to the terminal 10. Current is split at terminals 5 and 10
10-amp fuse that protects the hazard lamp fuse when directed out of the NASO hazard/direction-
and to the “C” terminal of the key switch. Current al signal converter relay.
is also sent to the “D” terminal of the key switch,
but is not utilized when the key switch is in the • Signal current is then directed from terminal
“ACC/RUN” position. 5 of The NASO hazard/directional signal
converter relay to the left rear hazard/direc-
• With the key switch in the “ACC/RUN” tional light, causing the light to flash. The
position, current flows through the key switch NASO hazard/directional signal converter
and out through terminal “B”. Current is then relay also directs steady state current out
directed to the 10-amp fuse that protects terminal 10 to the right rear hazard/direction-
directional signal circuit. Current then flows al light. Since the current is in a steady state,
from the 10-amp fuse to terminal 1 of the the right rear light illuminates, but does not
hazard switch. With the hazard switch in the flash.
“OFF” position, current flows out of the
• Signal current is also directed to terminal 9 of
hazard switch through terminal 2 to the
the instrument panel from terminal 5 of the
positive (+) terminal of the flasher relay and
NASO hazard/directional signal converter
terminal 3 of the NASO hazard/directional
relay. The signal current then travels to the
signal converter relay. The NASO relay is
left turn indicator lamp. The lamp is grounded
supplied with a ground through terminal 7.
through terminal 13 of the instrument panel
• Current flows through the 10-amp fuse to connector, completing the circuit, and the left
terminal 3 of the hazard switch. With the turn indicator lamp then flashes. Steady state
hazard switch is pushed to the “OFF” current is directed from terminal 10 of the
position, current does not flow from terminal NASO hazard/directional signal converter
3 through the switch. relay to terminal 19 of the instrument panel.
3. The flasher relay “LOAD” terminal supplies The steady state current then flows to the
conditioned signal current to terminal 5 of the right turn indicator lamp in the instrument
hazard switch and to terminals “B” and “A” of the panel. The indicator lamp is grounded
directional signal switch. through terminal 13 of the instrument panel.
Since the current is in steady state, the
• When the hazard switch is in the “OFF”
indicator light does not flash, but does
position, current will not flow through the
illuminate.
switch.
• With the directional signal switch in the “left
turn” position, the signal current flows
55-128
DELUXE MODEL DIRECTIONAL SIGNAL

CONTROL CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING

Directional signal will not illuminate Blown 10-amp hazard or directional Inspect fuse and replace as neces-
or flash signal fuse sary
Directional signal bulb burnt out Inspect bulb and replace as neces-
sary
Defective hazard switch or direc- Test switches and replace as

tional signal switch necessary

place as necessary

necessary

Instrument panel turn indicator Indicator bulb burnt out Inspect bulb and replace as neces-
does not illuminate sary

55-129
14
13
15
11
12
8
10
9
7
4
3
30002323
181
55-130
ECONOMY MODEL DIRECTIONAL SIGNAL

CONTROL CIRCUIT
2. Battery
3. Starter
6. Hazard Switch (OFF)
10. Directional Signal Switch (LEFT)
20002316
13. Left Directional Signal Light (Flashing)
14. Right Directional Signal Light (Solid)
55-131
DIRECTIONAL SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT • Current flows through the 10-amp fuse to
terminal 3 of the hazard switch. With the
ECONOMY MODELS hazard switch is pushed to the “OFF”
NOTE: The following circuit is described with the position, current does not flow from terminal
3 through the switch.
directional signal switch in the “left turn” position.
3. The flasher relay “LOAD” terminal supplies
1. Current flows from the positive (+) battery conditioned signal current to terminal 5 of the
terminal, through the battery cable to the starter hazard switch and to terminals “B” and “A” of the
motor. Current then flows from the starter to the directional signal switch.
40-amp main fuse. • When the hazard switch is in the “OFF”
2. Current is directed to a wire splice from the main position, current will not flow through the
fuse. The wire splice sends current to the 10-amp switch.
fuse that protects the hazard lamp fuse and to the • With the directional signal switch in the “left
“C” terminal of the key switch. Current is also sent turn” position, the signal current flows
to the “D” terminal of the key switch, but is not through the switch and out terminal “C”. Then
utilized when the key switch is in the “ACC/RUN” current is directed to terminal 4 of the NASO
position. hazard/directional signal converter relay.
Current will not flow through the switch from
• With the key switch in the “ACC/RUN”
terminal “A” to terminal “D”, as the switch
position, current flows through the key switch
contacts and terminals are used when the
and out through terminal “B”. Current is then
switch is in the “right turn” position.
directed to the 10-amp fuse that protects
directional signal circuit. Current then flows 4. The NASO hazard/directional signal converter
from the 10-amp fuse to terminal 1 of the relay receives the signal current at terminal 4 and
hazard switch. With the hazard switch in the passes the current out through terminal 5. The
“OFF” position, current flows out of the signal current is then directed to the left rear
hazard switch through terminal 2 to the hazard light, causing the light to flash. The NASO
positive (+) terminal of the flasher relay and hazard/directional signal converter relay also
terminal 3 of the NASO hazard/directional directs steady state current out terminal 10 to the
signal converter relay. The NASO relay is right rear hazard light. Since the current is steady
supplied with a ground through terminal 7. state, the right rear hazard light illuminates but
does not flash.
55-132
ECONOMY MODEL DIRECTIONAL SIGNAL

CONTROL CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING

Directional signal will not illuminate Blown 10-amp hazard or directional Inspect fuse and replace as neces-
or flash signal fuse sary
Directional signal bulb burnt out Inspect bulb and replace as neces-
sary
Defective hazard switch or direc- Test switches and replace as

tional signal switch necessary

place as necessary

necessary

55-133
20
21
23
18 22
19
16
9
15
8 17 14
13
11
10
12
4 3
5
2 1
30002326
182
55-134
DELUXE MODEL LIGHTING CIRCUIT

2. Battery
3. Starter
4. 40-amp Main Fuse
7. 10-amp Directional Signal, Rear Work Lamp
(Optional) Circuit Fuse
8. 15-amp Front Work Lamp Circuit Fuse
9. 7.5-amp Main Lighting and Instrument Panel
Lighting Circuit Fuse
10. Front Work Lamp Relay 20002316
11. Main Lighting Switch (3rd Position, All Lights ON)
13. Left Work Lamp
14. Left Center Work Lamp
15. Right Center Work Lamp
16. Right Work Lamp
18. Instrument Panel Illumination Lamps
19. Left Taillight
20. Right Taillight
21. Rear Work Lamp Switch (Optional)
22. Rear Work Lamp (Optional)
23. Left Side HPL Cover Ground Terminal
55-135
TRACTOR LIGHTING CIRCUIT 6. Terminal 3 of the main lighting switch is

connected to an internal switch light and is
DELUXE MODELS grounded through terminal 7 of the switch. When
1. Current flows from the positive (+) battery the switch is pushed to the third position, the
internal light will illuminate, indicating that the
motor. Current then flows from the starter to the work lamps are illuminated.
40-amp main fuse. • Current flows from terminal 3 of the main
2. Current is directed to a wire splice from the main lighting switch to terminal 23 of the
fuse. The wire splice sends current to the key instrument panel, illuminating the five (5)
switch and to the 15-amp fuse that protects the instrument panel lights. The ground circuit for
front work lamp circuit. these lights is completed through terminal 13
of the instrument panel to the ground
• When the key switch is turned from the “OFF” terminal at the starter bolt. Current also flows
position to the “ACC/RUN” or “START” to the left and right rear taillights. The ground
position, current flows through terminal “C”, wire attached to the left side of the HPL
through the key switch and out through housing grounds the taillights, completing
terminal “B”. Current then flows to the the circuit.
electrical system bus bar to 10-amp fuse that • Current flows from terminal 6 of the main
protects the turn signal and rear work light lighting switch to terminal 86 of the front work
(Optional) circuit. Current is also directed to lamp relay. This energizes the front work
the 7.5-amp fuse that protects the instrument lamp relay. When the relay becomes
panel and main lighting control circuit. energized, current flows through the relay
• Current flows from tractor fuse bus bar from the 15-amp fuse protecting the front
through the 15-amp fuse that protects the work lamp circuit. Current flows through the
front work lamp circuit to the front work lamp relay from terminal 30 to terminal 87. Current
relay. then flows from terminal 87 to a wiring splice.
3. Current travels from the 7.5-amp instrument Current is directed from the wiring splice to
panel fuse to terminals 2 and 5 of the main the left and right front work lamps and the two
lighting switch. When the main lighting switch is center lamps. The ground circuit for the work
pushed forward to the third position, current is lamps is completed at the starter bolt ground
directed from the switch through terminals 3 and terminal.
55-136
DELUXE LIGHTING CIRCUIT

TROUBLESHOOTING

Front work lamps will not illuminate Insufficient battery charge Test battery. Charge, add water, or
or is dim replace as necessary
Work lamp bulb faulty Check and replace bulb as necessary
Blown 40-amp main fuse Inspect main fuse and replace as

necessary
Blown 15-amp fuse Replace fuse as necessary.
Defective light switch Test light switch and replace as

necessary.
Defective light relay Test relay and replace as necessary
Improper connection at work lamp Check connections and lamp sock-

terminals or headlight socket et. Repair or replace as necessary.
Improper ground connection Check ground connections and

repair as necessary.
Rear taillights will not illuminate or Insufficient battery charge Test battery. Charge, add water, or
are dim replace as necessary
Taillight bulb fault Check and replace bulb as necessary

necessary
Blown 7.5-amp fuse Replace fuse as necessary.

necessary.
Improper connection at taillight Check connections and lamp sock-

lamp terminals or lamp socket et. Repair or replace as necessary.

Instrument panel illumination light Insufficient battery charge Test battery. Charge, add water, or
not illuminated or is dim replace as necessary
Instrument panel illumination bulb Check and replace bulb as necessary

burnt out

necessary.
Improper connection at instrument Check connections and socket.

panel terminals or light socket Repair or replace as necessary.

55-137
18
20 17
16 19
21
15
9
11
12
14
13
8 7
10
12
6
4
5
2 1
30002327
183
55-138
ECONOMY MODEL LIGHTING CIRCUIT

2. Battery
3. Starter
4. 40-amp Main Fuse
7. 10-amp Directional Signal, Rear Work Lamp
(Optional) Circuit Fuse
8. 15-amp Front Work Lamp Circuit Fuse
9. 7.5-amp Main Lighting and Instrument Panel
Lighting Circuit Fuse
10. Front Work Lamp Relay 20002316
11. Main Lighting Switch (3rd Position, All Lights ON)
13. Left Work Lamp
14. Right Work Lamp
16. Instrument Panel Illumination Lamps
17. Left Taillight
18. Right Taillight
19. Rear Work Lamp Switch (Optional)
20. Rear Work Lamp (Optional)
21. Left Side HPL Cover Ground Terminal
55-139
TRACTOR LIGHTING CIRCUIT Terminal 3 of the main lighting switch is

connected to an internal switch light and is
ECONOMY MODELS grounded through terminal 7 of the switch. When
1. Current flows from the positive (+) battery the switch is pushed to the third position, the
internal light illuminates, indicating that the work
motor. Current then flows from the starter to the lamps are illuminated.
40-amp main fuse. • Current flows from terminal 3 of the main
2. Current is directed to a wire splice from the main lighting switch to terminal 23 of the
fuse. The wire splice sends current to the key instrument panel, illuminating the four (4)
switch and to the 15-amp fuse that protects the instrument panel lights. The ground circuit for
front work lamp circuit. these lights is completed through terminal 13
of the instrument panel to the starter bolt
• When the key switch is turned from the “OFF” ground terminal. Current also flows to the left
position to the “ACC/RUN” position, current and right rear taillights. The ground wire
flows through terminal “C”, through the key attached to the left side of the HPL housing
switch and out through terminal “B”. Current grounds the taillights, completing the circuit.
then flows to the electrical system bus bar to • Current flows from terminal 6 of the main
10-amp fuse that protects the turn signal and lighting switch to terminal 86 of the front work
rear lighting circuit. Current is also directed to lamp relay. This energizes the front work
the 7.5-amp fuse that protects the instrument lamp relay. When the relay becomes
panel and main lighting control circuit. energized, current flows through the relay
• Current flows from tractor bus bar through from the 15-amp fuse protecting the front
the 15-amp fuse that protects the front work work lamp circuit. Current flows through the
lamp circuit to the front work lamp relay. relay from terminal 30 to terminal 87. Current
3. Current travels from the 7.5-amp instrument then flows from terminal 87 to a wiring splice.
panel fuse to terminals 2 and 5 of the main Current is directed from the wiring splice to
lighting switch. When the main lighting switch is the left and right front work lamps. The
pushed to the third position, current is directed ground circuit for the front work lamps is
from the switch through terminals 3 and 6. completed at the starter bolt ground terminal.
55-140
ECONOMY LIGHTING CIRCUIT

TROUBLESHOOTING

Front work lamps will not illuminate Insufficient battery charge Test battery. Charge, add water, or
or is dim replace as necessary
Work lamp bulb faulty Check and replace bulb as necessary

necessary
Blown 15-amp fuse Replace fuse as necessary.

necessary.
Defective light relay Test relay and replace as necessary
Improper connection at work lamp Check connections and lamp sock-

terminals or headlight socket et. Repair or replace as necessary.

Rear taillights will not illuminate or Insufficient battery charge Test battery. Charge, add water, or
are dim replace as necessary
Taillight bulb fault Check and replace bulb as necessary

necessary

necessary.
Improper connection at taillight Check connections and lamp sock-

lamp terminals or lamp socket et. Repair or replace as necessary.

Instrument panel illumination light Insufficient battery charge Test battery. Charge, add water, or
not illuminated or is dim replace as necessary
Instrument panel illumination bulb Check and replace bulb as necessary
burnt out
necessary.
Improper connection at instrument Check connections and socket.
panel terminals or light socket Repair or replace as necessary.
55-141
7 8
10
4
3
5
2
1
30002338
184
55-142
FUEL LEVEL CIRCUIT

2. Battery
3. Starter
4. 40-amp Main Fuse
5. Key Switch
7. Fuel Gauge
8. Fuel Level Sending Unit
20002316
55-143
FUEL LEVEL CIRCUIT Current is then directed to terminal 21 on the

instrument panel and then to the positive (+)
DELUXE AND ECONOMY MODELS terminal of the fuel gauge. The ground path for
1. Current leaves the positive (+) terminal of the the gauge exits the instrument panel at terminal
24 and is then directed to the ground terminal at
battery and flows to the battery (B) terminal of the
starter. Current is directed from the battery the starter bolt.
terminal of the starter to the 40-amp main fuse. 3. The fuel level gauge is controlled by variable
Current flows through the main fuse to a wiring resistance to ground. The ground path exits the
splice. Current flows from the wiring splice to gauge and then out of the instrument panel
terminals “C” and “D” on the key switch. Current through terminal 14. The ground path then goes
that is sent to the “D” terminal of the key switch to the fuel level sending unit. At the sending unit,
is not utilized when the key switch is in the the resistance to ground changes as the engine
“ACC/RUN” position. is consuming fuel or fuel is added to the fuel tank.
The fuel gauge translates this resistance into
2. When the key switch is turned to the “ACC/RUN”
position, current flows through the key switch movement of the gauge needle. The ground path
from terminal “C” to terminal “B”. From terminal then is directed out of the fuel sending unit to the
“B”, current flows to the 7.5-amp fuse that ground terminal on the left side of the HPL
protects the instrument panel and lighting circuit. housing.
55-144
FUEL LEVEL CIRCUIT

TROUBLESHOOTING

Inoperative fuel level gauge Blown 7.5-amp instrument panel Check fuse and replace as neces-
fuse sary
Malfunctioning fuel level sending Test fuel level sending unit and
unit replace as necessary
Improper ground circuit Check fuel level sending unit

connections and circuit grounds
and repair as necessary
Malfunctioning fuel gauge Test fuel gauge and replace

instrument panel as necessary
55-145
6
7 9
8
4
3
2
1
30002318
185
55-146
OIL PRESSURE CIRCUIT

2. Battery
3. Starter Motor
4. 40-amp Main Fuse
5. Key Switch
7. Low Oil Pressure Indicator Lamp
8. Instrument Panel
9. Oil Pressure Switch
20002316
55-147
OIL PRESSURE CIRCUIT “B”, current flows to the 7.5-amp fuse that
protects the instrument panel and lighting circuit.
DELUXE AND ECONOMY MODELS
3. Current is then directed to terminal 4 on the
1. Current leaves the positive (+) terminal of the instrument panel and then to the low oil pressure
battery and flows to the battery (B) terminal of the indicator bulb. The ground path for the indicator
starter. Current is directed from the battery bulb exits the instrument panel at terminal 1.
terminal of the starter to the 40-amp main fuse. From terminal 1 the ground path goes to the oil
Current flows through the main fuse to a wiring pressure switch, which is threaded into the
splice. Current flows from the wiring splice to engine block as a ground source.
terminals “C” and “D” on the key switch. Current
4. When engine oil pressure is below 0.414 bar (6.0
psi), the oil pressure switch contacts will close,
is not utilized when the key switch is in the
completing the ground path from the low oil
“ACC/RUN” position.
pressure indicator bulb, through the oil pressure
2. When the key switch is turned to the “ACC/RUN” switch, to the engine block. The low oil pressure
position, current flows through the key switch indicator light will illuminate, alerting the operator
from terminal “C” to terminal “B”. From terminal of a low oil pressure condition within the engine.
55-148
OIL PRESSURE CIRCUIT

TROUBLESHOOTING

Oil pressure warning light remains Low engine oil pressure Test engine lubrication system and
illuminated repair as necessary
Defective oil pressure switch Test oil pressure switch and replace
as necessary
Oil pressure circuit is short- Check oil pressure switch, ground

circuited and wires for short circuit
Defective instrument panel Test instrument panel and replace

as necessary
Oil pressure warning light will not Blown 7.5-amp instrument panel Replace fuse as necessary
illuminate fuse
Inspect warning bulb and replace
Faulty oil pressure warning bulb as necessary
Check oil pressure switch connec-

Oil pressure circuit open tions and wires
55-149
10
8
6
3
5
2 4
10
30002325 1
186
55-150
TACHOMETER CIRCUIT
2. Battery
3. Starter
4. Alternator
7. 7.5--amp Instrument Panel Fuse
8. Instrument Panel
9. Tachometer
20002316
55-151
TACHOMETER CIRCUIT terminals “C” and “D” on the key switch. Current
DELUXE AND ECONOMY MODELS is not utilized when the key switch is in the
1. Current flow starts at the positive (+) battery “ACC/RUN” position. Current then flows through
the “C” and “B” terminals of the key switch to
terminal and is directed to the battery (B) terminal
of the starter. The wiring harness takes two paths tractor bus bar. From the bus bar, current passes
from the battery terminal of the starter. The first through the 7.5-amp fuse that protects the
path directs current to the 40-amp main fuse. The instrument panel circuit to terminal 21 of the
second path connects the battery terminal of the instrument panel. At terminal 21, current reaches
starter to the battery terminal of the alternator. a wire splice and is directed to terminal 20.
Terminal 20 supplies current for the tachometer.
• As the alternator is spinning (engine
running), a signal current is sent from 3. The ground path for the tachometer leaves the
terminal “P” of the alternator to terminal 20 on tachometer to a wiring splice at terminal 24 of the
instrument panel. From terminal 24 the ground
the instrument panel The tachometer uses
this signal current to determine engine path goes to the ground terminal on the starter
speed. bolt.
2. Current flows through the main fuse to a wiring
splice. Current flows from the wiring splice to
55-152
DELUXE AND ECONOMY MODEL

TACHOMETER CIRCUIT
TROUBLESHOOTING

Tachometer does not operate when Blown 7.5-amp instrument panel Inspect and replace fuse as neces-
tractor engine is running fuse sary
Defective tachometer Test tachometer and replace instru-

ment panel as necessary
Tachometer pick-up wire damaged, Inspect tachometer pick-up, repair

corroded, disconnected or short- or replace as necessary
circuited
Faulty tachometer gauge ground Inspect and repair ground wire as

necessary
Defective alternator component Test alternator and components,

repair or replace as necessary
Inaccurate tachometer reading Malfunctioning tachometer Test tachometer and replace instru-
ment panel as necessary
Loose alternator belt Adjust belt tension
55-153
10
12
11
8
30002337 2 1
187
55-154
DELUXE MODEL HYDRAULIC RANGE

SHIFT CIRCUIT
(LOW Position)
2. Battery
3. Starter
4. 40-amp Main Fuse
5. Key Switch
6. 7.5-amp Shift Control/Alternator Excitation Circuit
Fuse
7. “HI” Range Shift Relay
8. Range Shift Rocker Switch 20002316
9. “LOW” Range shift Relay
10. Joystick Range Shift Switch (Optional)
13. Range Shift Solenoid
55-155
HYDRAULIC RANGE SHIFT CIRCUIT switch and out terminal 1. From terminal 1 of
the range shift switch, current is directed to
DELUXE MODELS terminal 1 of the “LOW” range relay. This is
(LOW Position) part of the control circuit for the “LOW” range
relay. The control circuit is grounded through
1. When the key switch is in the “ACC/RUN” terminal 2 of the relay to the starter bolt
position, current leaves the positive (+) battery ground terminal. The “LOW” range relay
terminal and travels through the battery cable to becomes energized and cuts the ground
the battery “B” terminal on the starter motor. circuit to the “HI” range relay control circuit.
2. Current travels from the starter motor to the When the “HI” range relay control circuit
40-amp main fuse. From the main fuse, current becomes interrupted, the “HI” range loop is
travels to a wiring splice. Current will then flow to interrupted, and the shift solenoid is no
the “C” terminal of the key switch. Current is also longer energized. The hydrostatic system is
directed to the “D” terminal of the key switch, but then in “LOW” range.
is not utilized when the key switch is in the • When the range shift switch is released from
“ACC/RUN” position. the “LOW” range position, the “HI” range
relay (and range shift solenoid) is no longer
3. Current flows through the key switch from energized and current flows from terminal 3
terminal “C” and out through terminal “B”. through the relay and out terminal 4. From
Current then flows from the key switch to the terminal 4, current travels to terminal 10 of
7.5-amp fuse that protects the hydraulic shift the range shift switch. Current enters the
control circuit. From the 7.5-amp fuse, current switch to the “LOW” range indicator bulb.
travels to the “HI” range relay. At the relay, This bulb is grounded through terminal 9 of
current is split into two separate paths. One path the switch and will illuminate when the
supplies current to terminal 3 of the “HI” relay and hydrostatic range is shifted to “LOW” range.
the other supplies current to terminal 2 of the
range shift rocker switch. NOTE: “LOW” range is the default setting for the
tractor hydrostatic system. When the tractor engine
• When the range shift switch is pushed to the is shut down and restarted, the hydrostatic system
“LOW” position, current flows through the will default to the “LOW” range.
55-156
HYDRAULIC RANGE SHIFT “LOW”

POSITION CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING

Tractor will not switch into “LOW” Faulty range shift rocker switch Test and replace switch as neces-
range sary
Defective “HI” or “LO” range relay Test relays and replace as neces-
sary
Defective range shift solenoid Test solenoid and replace as

necessary
Fault in wiring or ground terminal Inspect wiring harness and ground

terminal for damage, corrosion,
and short circuits. Repair or replace
as necessary.
Tractor will not switch out of “LOW” Blown 7.5-amp shift control/alter- Test tachometer and replace instru-
range nator excitation fuse ment panel as necessary
Faulty range shift rocker switch Test and replace switch as neces-
sary
Defective “HI” or “LO” range relay Test relays and replace as neces-
sary

necessary

as necessary
“LOW” range bulb fails to illumi- Defective “LOW” range bulb Replace range shift switch
nate, but tractor shifts into “LOW”
range
55-157
14
15
12
10 11
13
7 9
11
2
5
30002334 1
188
55-158
DELUXE MODEL HYDRAULIC RANGE

SHIFT CIRCUIT
(HI Position)
2. Battery
3. Starter
4. 40-amp Main Fuse
5. Key Switch
6. 7.5-amp Shift Control/Alternator Excitation Circuit
Fuse
7. “HI” Range Shift Relay
8. Range Shift Solenoid 20002316
9. Range Diode
10. Range Diode
12. “LOW” Range shift Relay
13. Range Shift Rocker Switch
14. Joystick Range Shift Switch (Optional)
55-159
HYDRAULIC RANGE SHIFT CIRCUIT “HI” range relay. The control circuit’s ground
path runs from terminal #2, “HI” range relay,
DELUXE MODELS and through terminal 3 of the “LO” range
(HI Position) relay. The ground path runs through the relay
and out terminal 4, to the ground terminal on
1. When the key switch is in the “ACC/RUN” the starter bolt.
position, current leaves the positive (+) battery • When the “HI” range relay becomes
terminal and travels through the battery cable to energized, current flows from terminal 3,
the battery “B” terminal on the starter motor. through the “HI” relay, and out terminal 5.
2. Current travels from the starter motor to the 4. Current is once again split into two separate
40-amp main fuse. From the main fuse, current paths at terminal 5 of the “HI” range relay.
travels to a wiring splice. Current will then flow to
the “C” terminal of the key switch. Current is also • One path flows to the range shift solenoid,
sent to the “D” terminal of the key switch, but is which is grounded to the left side of the HPL
not utilized when the key switch is in the housing. This causes the solenoid to become
“ACC/RUN” position. energized, shifting the hydrostatic range to
“HI”.
3. Current flows through the key switch from • The other path flows to terminal 4 of the loop
terminal “C” and out through terminal “B”. diode in the diode module. Since the range
Current flows from the key switch to the 7.5-amp shift switch is only makes momentary contact
fuse that protects the hydraulic shift control when the range is shifted, the circuit requires
circuit. From the 7.5-amp fuse, current travels to use of the loop diode. Current flows through
the “HI” range relay. At the relay, current is split the diode from terminal 4 to terminal 3 and
into two separate paths. One path supplies then is directed to terminal 1 of the range shift
current to terminal 3 of the “HI” relay and the diode. The range shift diode will not allow
other supplies current to terminal 2 of the range current to travel through to terminal 2, so
shift rocker switch. The range switch is a current follows the path back to terminal 1 of
three-way momentary switch that is normally in the “HI” range relay. This creates a loop to
an “OFF” position. keep the range shift solenoid energized,
• When the range shift switch is pushed to the keeping the hydrostatic system in “HI” range.
“HI” position, current flows through the switch • Current is also directed from terminal 4 of the
and exits the switch through terminal 3. loop diode to terminal 8 of the range shift
Current then reaches the range shift diode, switch. Current enters the switch to the “HI”
located in a diode module, and then flows range indicator bulb. This bulb is grounded
through the diode through terminals 2 and 1. through terminal 7 of the switch and will
At terminal 1, current is split into two separate illuminate when the hydrostatic range is
paths. The one path reaches terminal 3 of the shifted to “HI” range.
loop diode (in the diode module), where NOTE: “LOW” range is the default setting for the
current is blocked. The other path directs tractor hydrostatic system. When the tractor engine
current to terminal 1 of the “HI” range relay. is shut down and restarted, the hydrostatic system
Terminal 1 is part of the control circuit for the will default to the “LOW” range.
55-160
HYDRAULIC RANGE SHIFT “HI” POSITION


Tractor will not switch into “HI” Blown 7.5-amp shift control/alter- Inspect and replace fuse as neces-
range nator excitation fuse sary
Faulty range shift rocker switch Test and replace switch as necessary
Defective “HI” or “LO” range relay Test relays and replace as necessary

necessary
Defective range shift diode(s) Test diode(s) and replace as

necessary

as necessary
Low charge pressure Check HST charge pressure relief

valve
Tractor will not switch out of “HI” Faulty range shift rocker switch Test and replace switch as necessary
range
Defective “HI” or “LO” range relay Test relays and replace as necessary

necessary

as necessary
“HI” range bulb fails to illuminate, Defective “HI” range bulb Replace range shift switch
but tractor shifts into “HI” range
55-161
12
10
11
4 5 3
2
1
30002320
189
55-162
DELUXE MODEL PTO INDICATOR LIGHT

CIRCUIT
2. Battery
3. Starter
4. 40-amp Main Fuse
5. Key Switch
8. Main PTO Safety Switch
9. PTO Indicator Bulb
20002316
55-163
PTO INDICATOR LIGHT CIRCUIT • The 8-amp circuit breaker protects the
operator safety system. Current flows
DELUXE MODELS through the circuit breaker to a splice in the
1. Current flow starts at the positive (+) terminal of wiring, which then directs current to the main
PTO switch. When the PTO is disengaged,
the tractor battery. From the battery, current flows
to the engine starter motor through the positive the switch contacts are closed and current
(+) battery cable. flows through the switch, to the PTO safety
start relay. This energizes the relay and turns
2. From the starter motor, current flows through the the PTO indicator bulb off by interrupting the
40-amp main fuse to a wire splice. Current flows ground path through the relay to the indicator
from the wiring splice to terminals “C” and “D” on bulb. When the PTO is engaged, the
the key switch. Current that is sent to the “D” contacts in the main PTO switch are open.
terminal of the key switch is not utilized when the This will cause the PTO indicator bulb to
key switch is in the “ACC/RUN” position. Current illuminate by completing the ground circuit
then flows through the “C” and “B” terminals of from the bulb, through terminal 12 of the
the key switch to tractor bus bar. From the bus instrument panel, to the PTO safety start
bar current flows to an 8-amp circuit breaker and relay. The ground path then goes through
a 7.5-amp fuse. terminal 4 of the relay, out terminal 3 to the
• The 7.5-amp fuse protects the instrument ground terminal at the starter bolt.
panel circuit. Current flows through the fuse NOTE: The 540/600 PTO indicator lights on the
to a wiring splice that directs current to instrument panel are illuminated by a signal from the
terminal 8 of the instrument panel. Current tractor tachometer. The PTO must be engaged for
then reaches another wiring splice, directing these lights to operate. The 540/600 indicator light
current to the PTO indicator bulb. For the circuit is part of the instrument panel printed circuit
PTO indicator bulb to illuminate the ground board and cannot be serviced, except for the
path through terminal 12 of the instrument indicator bulbs. If the 540/600 indicator lights
panel must be complete. malfunction, replace the instrument panel.
55-164
DELUXE MODEL PTO INDICATOR LIGHT


PTO light will not illuminate Blown 7.5-amp instrument panel Inspect and replace fuse as
fuse needed
Malfunctioning 8-amp operator Test circuit breaker and replace as

safety system circuit breaker necessary
PTO indicator bulb faulty Inspect bulb and replace as

necessary
Faulty wiring or ground terminal Inspect tractor wiring harness and

ground terminals for damage,
corrosion, loose connectors, or
short circuits. Repair or replace as
necessary.
Faulty main PTO switch Test switch and replace as

necessary
Faulty PTO safety start relay Test relay and replace as

necessary
Malfunctioning Instrument Panel Test instrument panel and replace

as necessary
PTO indicator light remains illumi- Main PTO switch improperly Check switch adjustment
nated adjusted
Defective PTO safety start relay Test relay and replace as neces-
sary
Faulty wiring or ground terminal Inspect tractor wiring harness and

ground terminals for damage,
corrosion, loose connectors, or
short circuits. Repair or replace as
necessary.
55-165
12
13
11
9 10
5
6
4
3
30002336
2 1
190
55-166
DELUXE MODEL ELECTRONIC CRUISE

CONTROL CIRCUIT
2. Battery
3. Starter
4. 40-amp Main Fuse
6. 8-amp Cruise Control/Operator Safety System
Circuit Breaker
7. 7.5-amp Alternator Excitation/Shift Control Fuse
8. Cruise Control Diode
9. Cruise Control Relay
20002316
10. Cruise Control Switch
11. Brake Release Switch
12. Cruise Control Magnet
55-167
ELECTRONIC CRUISE CONTROL CIRCUIT from flowing through the diode. The split at
terminal 1 of the cruise diode allows current
DELUXE MODELS to flow to terminal 1 of the cruise control relay.
NOTE: The cruise control wiring diagram is shown Terminal 1 is part of the control circuit for the
cruise control relay.
with the cruise control switch in the “SET” position
and the brakes not applied. 4. The ground path for the control circuit of the
cruise relay runs from terminal 2 of the cruise
1. When the key switch is in the “ACC/RUN” and the control relay to terminal 2 of the cruise control
cruise control switch is in the momentary “SET” switch. To complete the ground to the control
position, current leaves the positive (+) battery circuit, the brake switch must be closed (brake
terminal and travels through the battery cable to released). When the brake switch is closed the
the battery “B” terminal on the starter motor. control circuit ground for the cruise relay is
complete through the cruise control switch
2. Current travels from the starter motor to the (through terminals 2 and 3 of the switch), through
40-amp main fuse. From the main fuse, current the brake switch, to the ground terminal on the
travels to a wiring splice. Current will then flow to left side of the HPL housing.
the “C” terminal of the key switch. Current is also
sent to the “D” terminal of the key switch, but is 5. When the ground circuit to the cruise control
not utilized when the key switch is in the relay is complete, the relay becomes energized
“ACC/RUN” position. and latched. With the relay energized current
flows from terminal 3, through the cruise control
3. Current flows through the key switch from relay, and out terminal 5. At terminal 5, the
terminal “C” and out through terminal “B”. current path splits. One path directs current to
Current then flows from the key switch to the terminal “A” of the cruise control magnet; the
8-amp circuit breaker that protects part of the other path directs current to terminal 2 of the
cruise control circuit. Current is then directed cruise control diode.
from the circuit breaker, through a wire splice, to
terminal 5 of the cruise control switch. With the • The cruise control electromagnet ground
cruise control switch pushed to the “SET” or path runs from terminal “B” of the magnet to
latched position, current flows through the switch the ground terminal on the left side of the
and out terminal 6. From terminal 6, current is HPL housing. When current reaches the
split into two paths. One path directs current to electromagnet, the magnet becomes ener-
terminal 8 of the cruise control switch. The other gized, locking the hydrostatic transmission
path directs current to terminal 1 of the cruise linkage in place. The tractor will then
control diode. Current is also directed from the maintain the set speed until the cruise control
key switch to the 7.5-amp fuse that protects the switch is pushed to the “OFF” position or the
other part of the cruise control circuit. From the brake pedal is depressed.
7.5-amp fuse, current travels to terminal to • When current reaches terminal 2 of the
terminal 3 of the cruise control relay. cruise control diode, current will flow through
the diode and out terminal 1. Current will then
• When current is directed to terminal 8 of the
flow to terminal 1 of the cruise control relay.
cruise control switch, current flows into the
The use of the diode creates a current “loop”
switch to the internal indicator bulb. The
so that the cruise control relay remains
ground circuit to the bulb is completed
energized or latched when the cruise control
through terminal 7 of the switch to the ground
switch is released from the momentary “SET”
terminal on the left side of the HPL housing.
position to the “ON” position. Switching the
When the cruise switch is in the “SET” and
cruise control “OFF” or depressing the brake
“ON” position, the bulb will illuminate,
pedal interrupts the ground circuit for the
indicating that the cruise control is activated.
cruise control relay and the loop is then
• Current is directed from terminal 6 of the interrupted, releasing the hydrostatic trans-
cruise control switch to terminal 1 of the mission linkage.
cruise control diode, but current is stopped
55-168
ELECTRONIC CRUISE CONTROL CIRCUIT

TROUBLESHOOTING

Cruise will not activate Blown 7.5-amp alternator excita- Inspect and replace the 7.5-amp
tion/shift control fuse fuse as necessary
Defective 8-amp cruise control/op- Test and replace circuit breaker as

erator safety system circuit breaker necessary
Defective cruise control switch Test switch and replace as neces-

sary
Defective cruise control relay Test cruise control relay and

replace as necessary.
Defective or stuck brake release Test brake release switch. Replace

switch as necessary.
Cruise control activates, but does Defective cruise control switch Test cruise switch and replace as
not remain in “ON” position necessary.
Defective cruise control diode Test diode and replace as neces-

sary
Defective cruise control relay Test cruise control relay and

Cruise control magnet will not hold Cruise control magnet bracket is Adjust or tighten cruise control
hydrostatic transmission linkage in loose or improperly adjusted magnet as necessary.
position
Defective cruise control magnet Test cruise control magnet and
replace as necessary.
55-169
ALTERNATOR SPECIFICATIONS
Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mitsubishi
Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A007T03877
Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Negative Ground
Rotational Direction (viewed from pulley) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clockwise
Drive Belt Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 – 15 mm (0.39 – 0.59 in.) deflection

@ 9 – 11 kg. (20 – 25 lb.) of force
Adjusting Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.5 – 15.0 volts
Load Characteristics
Terminal voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5 volts
Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 amp minimum
Rpm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2500
Brush Length
Wear Limit (min. length) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 mm (0.20 in.)
Original . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.5 mm (0.728 in.)
Brush Contact Rings

Wear Limit (min. diameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1 mm (0.871 in.)
Original Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.7mm (0.894 in.)
Bearing
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ECSC8
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6303DDG
Stator Coil Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . less than 1.0 ohm
Rotor Coil Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8 ohms
55-170
ALTERNATOR TROUBLESHOOTING
NO CHARGING
FAULT LOCATION POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTION
Wiring Loose connection, short circuit Repair
Alternator Loose connection, no ground, short Repair or replace
circuit
Defective rectifier Replace
Loose connection on RF resistor Replace
Regulator Defective regulator Replace
Loose connection of alternator or Repair or replace
regulator
INSUFFICIENT CHARGING
Wiring Loose connection or short circuit Repair
Alternator Loose drive belt Repair
Short in rotor coil Replace
Short in stator coil Replace
Defective rectifier Replace
Insufficient brush contact Repair or replace
Loose connection of alternator and Repair
regulator
Battery Defective battery Replace
OVERCHARGE
Battery Internal short Replace
55-171
UNSTABLE CHARGING CIRCUIT

Wiring Loose connection or open wire Repair or replace
Alternator Loose drive belt Repair
Short in rotor coil Replace
Broken brush or spring Replace
Loose connection Repair
Loose connection at alternator and Repair or replace
regulator
ABNORMAL NOISE OF ALTERNATOR

Alternator Loose mounting hardware Repair
Defective bearings Repair or replace
Rotor core and stator in contact Replace
Defective diode Replace
55-172
CHARGING SYSTEM FOR TC35, TC40, TC45, TC35D, TC40D, TC45D TRACTORS
2 7
1
5
6
191
Op. 55 301
Alternator The IC regulator, 4, is a solid state unit and can only
The TC35, TC40, TC45 model tractors are equipped be serviced as an assembly.
with a 40-amp output alternator. The alternator is
equipped with an integrated circuit (IC) regulator, The internal components of the alternator are
meaning voltage is regulated internally and housed in a two-piece frame, which is divided into a
electronically within the alternator. drive end (front) frame, 5, and a rear frame, 6. The
frame contains open slots to allow for cooling of the
The principle components of the alternator are the alternator.
stator, 1, the rotor, 2, the rectifier assembly, 3, and the
IC regulator, 4. The alternator is rotated in the frame by using a
belt-driven pulley, 7, which is powered off of the
The rectifier assembly, 3, consist of two heat sinks, engine crankshaft pulley by a belt
one positive (+) and one negative (--), and a diode
trio. The diode trio is use as a field supply diode and
is connected to terminal “L” on the alternator.
55-173
B
P
4 6
L
3
R
L R
D6
R
R6 R5 L
F R1
Dz 7
Tr2 Tr1 R2
2
E
192
Charging Circuit Principle of IC Regulator
The charging circuit and internal connections are The basic function of the IC voltage regulator is to
shown. The charging system consists of an IC make the terminal voltage constant by detecting the
voltage regulator, 1, (enclosed with dotted lines), a generated voltage and increasing/decreasing the
battery, 7, and connecting wires. Because of the use field current.
of IC, the voltage regulator is very compact and is
built into the alternator. As indicated, the regulator consists of two basic
sections: a voltage control device and an output
The IC voltage regulator, 1, permits the field current device to handle the field current. The voltage control
to flow directly from the diode trio, 4, to the field coil, device includes the voltage divider network, R1 and
2, without passing through the external circuit. R2, a zener diode, DZ, for voltage reference, and a
Consequently, there are no voltage drops caused by single amplifying transistor, Tr1. The output device is
the key switch or the external wiring as with a darlington-type amplifier which is called power
conventional vibrating-contact regulators mounted transistor, Tr2. The power transistor, Tr2, is placed in
separately from the alternator. To aid in initial voltage series with the alternator field coil and ground.
buildup when the engine is started, the field current
is supplied through the indicator lamp, 5, from the The signal amplifying transistor, Tr1, senses the
battery, 7. generated voltage and turns the power transistor,
Tr2, on and off many times per second most of the
Since the frequency pulse output of 1/10 the time the engine is in operation.
alternator speed develops on the “P” terminal, this
terminal is used for speed detection.
55-174
The basic operating principles are explained as 5. As the speed and voltage increase, the voltage
follows, see Figure 192: at point “A” also increases until it reaches the
limiting value set at the factory. As the zener
1. When the key switch, 6, is closed, current from diode, DZ, breaks down, current flows through
the battery, 7, flows through the indicator lamp, 5, R1, DZ, and the base-emitter circuit of Tr1 to
and resistor R6, which are in parallel to the field ground. This renders Tr1 conductive, so that
coil, 2. From here it continues to flow on through much of the current flows through the collector-
the field coil, 2, to the ground, completing the emitter circuit of Tr1. This reduces the base
circuit back to the battery, 7. current of Tr2 thereby reducing the field current.
This means that Tr1 turns on and Tr2 turns off.
2. When the alternator begins to rotate, AC
voltages are generated by the stator coil, 3. The 6. When the generated voltage decreases, the
diodes in the rectifier assembly change the stator zener diode, DZ, again turns off and Tr1 also
AC voltages to DC voltage which appears turns off. This cycle repeats many times per
between ground and the “B” terminal. second, and the alternator output voltage is,
therefore, regulated within a narrow limit.
3. The stator also supplies DC field current through
the diode trio, 4, the field coil, 2, the power In other words, the action is similar to the
transistor, Tr2, and then through the diodes in the conventional vibrating-contact regulator, in that
rectifier assembly back to the stator. current to the field coil, 2, is varied to limit the
output voltage, but in place of the voltage coil and
4. When the generated voltage is low, no current spring system, there is a voltage divider network,
flows in the zener diode, DZ, since the voltage at R1 and R2, and a zener diode, DZ.
point “A” is lower than the zener voltage.
55-175
PRELIMINARY ALTERNATOR TESTS

Alternator Drive Belt
1. Check the alternator drive belt deflection by
applying 9-11 kg. (20-25lb.) of force between the
crank pulley and the alternator pulley, 1. Belt
deflection should be 10-15mm (0.39-0.59in.).
193
1. If the drive-belt deflection needs adjusted,
loosen the adjusting/mounting bolts, 1, and 1
adjust the alternator as needed to obtain proper
belt deflection.
194
Alternator Output
NOTE: Use the following methods if an alternator/ KEY
charging system analyzer is unavailable. SWITCH
VOLT 1 L
METER
1. Connect a 50-amp capacity test ammeter R
between the positive (+) battery cable and the ALTERNATOR AMMETER
key switch.
2. Connect a voltmeter to the battery terminal, 1, of
the alternator and to a ground source. BATTERY
3. Observe the voltmeter. The meter should
indicate battery voltage. If the voltmeter does not
read battery voltage, the wiring between the
alternator and the battery may be faulty and
195
should be repaired or replaced.
WARNING
Do not attempt to start the engine without first
shorting the wires between the ammeter leads.
Otherwise, injury or damage to the charging and
testing components may occur.
4. Use a jumper wire to short the test ammeter

leads and start the tractor engine.
55-176
5. After the tractor engine is started, remove the voltage that what is indicated when voltage is
jumper wire between the test leads of the taken at the battery. If the reading is not higher,
ammeter. the alternator is not generating enough voltage
and a component may be malfunctioning.
6. Increase the engine speed to approximately
2000RPMs and observe the ammeter reading. 8. If the ammeter indicated more than 5 amps,
continue to charge the battery until the ammeter
7. If the ammeter indicates 5 amps or less, observe
reading falls below 5 amps. If the reading does
the voltmeter reading. The voltmeter is indicating
not fall below 5 amps, test the battery or replace
adjusting voltage, which is the amount of
the battery with one that is fully charged.
increased voltage the alternator supplies to the
battery. The reading should indicate a higher
20000898
196
NOTE: bench testing the alternator will achieve the 3. Apply the parking brake and start the tractor
best results for the following tests. (see alternator engine. Turn on all 12-volt powered accessories
bench testing). such as headlight and indicator lights. Immedi-
ately raise engine RPMs to 2000 or more to
1. If the previous test was satisfactory, open the key record the maximum value indicated on the
switch (OFF) and connect an ammeter between ammeter.
the battery terminal “B”, of the alternator and the 4. If the amperage value is more than 70% of the
battery wire, as shown. nominal alternator output, as described in
2. Connect the positive (+) lead of a voltmeter to the alternator specifications, the alternator is consid-
“B” terminal on the alternator. Connect the ered to be working satisfactorily.
negative (--) lead to a suitable ground. Confirm
that the voltmeter indicated battery voltage.
55-177
Alternator Removal
the negative battery terminal.
6. Disconnect all wiring, 1, from the rear of the 1
alternator.
7. Loosen the alternator mounting bolts, 2, and
remove the V-belt, 3, from the alternator drive
pulley. 2
8. Remove the alternator mounting bolts, 2, and
remove the alternator from the tractor engine.
3
197
1 8 9
5 15
4
13
3
14
7
6
12 11
2
10
20000901
198
1. Alternator Assembly Alternator Disassembly
2. Pulley Nut 1. Mark the front alternator frame, 5, the rear
3. Pulley Assembly alternator frame, 11, and the stator, 10, with
4. Bolt scribe marks to insure that the alternator is
5. Front Alternator Frame Assembly assembled as taken apart.
6. Bolt
7. Front Rotor Bearing
8. Rotor Assembly
9. Rear Rotor Bearing
10. Stator
11. Rear Alternator Frame Assembly
12. Terminal Assembly
13. IC Regulator Assembly
14. Rotor Brush and Spring
15. Rectifier
55-178
2. Remove the four (4) alternator frame retaining

bolts, 1. 3
2
3. Carefully separate the front frame, 3, and the rear 4
frame and stator, 2. The rotor assembly, 5, and
the pulley, 4, will be removed with the front frame, 1
3.
199
4. To remove the pulley nut, 1, use an impact
wrench or place the rotor, 6, into a soft jaw vice
and use a wrench. Remove the washer, 2, the
pulley, 3, spacer, 4, and the front frame, 5, from
the rotor, 6.
1
6
5
2 3 4
200
NOTE: When removing the rear rotor bearing from
the rotor, be sure to apply even pressure to the rear 1
rotor bearing. 3
5. The rear rotor bearing, 2, may be removed from

the rotor, 1, by using a bearing puller, 3.
201
55-179
6. Remove the three (3) screws, 1, which secure

the regulator/ rectifier assembly, 2, to the rear 1
alternator frame.
2
10002261
202
7. Remove the battery terminal nut, 1, from the rear
of the alternator frame. 1
8. Carefully remove the stator and the regulator/
rectifier assembly from the rear alternator frame.
20002269
203
CAUTION
2 1 3
Preheat the soldering iron before attempting to
unsolder the stator leads or the regulator/rectifi-
er assembly. To avoid any damage to the rectifier
diodes, use a pair of needle-nose pliers to
remove the excess heat from the area being
soldered. Hold the pliers just below the solder
joint on the rectifier to remove excess heat. Use
a damp cloth to cool the components once they
have been separated.
9. Unsolder the three stator leads, 1, and remove 10002262

the stator, 2, from the rectifier/regulator assem-
bly, 3. 204
55-180
10. Unsolder the IC regulator assembly, 1, from the

rectifier assembly, 2, at the solder joints, 3. 1
2
10002263
205
11. Remove the four (4) screws, 1, from the front
alternator frame, 4. Remove the retaining plate, 3
2, and the front rotor bearing, 3. 4
206
55-181
ALTERNATOR COMPONENT TESTING AND

INSPECTION
Stator
1. Using an ohmmeter, touch the ohmmeter test
probes to different leads of the stator coil.
read a resistance of less than 1 ohm, for each of
the phase wires, indicating continuity.
3. If there is no continuity, inspect the lead wire
connection for breaks. The lead wire may be
repaired with solder if damage is not excessive.
If the lead wire is good, the stator coil is faulty and
needs replaced.
207
4. Using an ohmmeter, touch one of the ohmmeter
test probes to the stator coil and the other test
probe to the stator core.
5. Observe the ohmmeter. Resistance should be
high, indicating no continuity between the coil
and the core. If there is continuity, the stator is
208
55-182
Rotor
1. Inspect the rotor brush contacts, 1, for pitting,
roughness, and dirt. If necessary, use # 600 grit
fine sandpaper to clean dirt off of the contacts. If
the contacts are pitted or damaged excessively,
replace the rotor.
SM463-173
209
2. Use a suitable measuring device to determine
the outer diameter of each brush contact. The
minimum outer diameter of the brush contacts is
22.1 mm (0.871 in.).
210
3. Using an ohmmeter, touch one ohmmeter test
probe to a brush contact. Touch the other test
probe to the remaining brush contact.
4. Observe the ohmmeter. The ohmmeter resist-
ance reading should be approximately 3 ohms.
If the reading is not as specified, the rotor is
211
55-183
NOTE: When testing the resistance between the

brush contacts and rotor poles, be sure that the 1
ohmmeter test probe touching the rotor pole is not
insulated by paint.
1. Using an ohmmeter, touch one ohmmeter test

probe to one of the rotor brush contacts, 1, and
the other test probe to one of the rotor poles, 2.
2. Observe the ohmmeter. Resistance should be
high, indicating no continuity between the rotor
poles and brush contacts. If there is continuity, 2
the rotor is defective and needs replaced.
212
Rectifier Assembly
1. Using an ohmmeter, touch the positive (+) test
probe to the positive (+) portion of the diode
plate, 1, and the negative (−) test probe to the
other test probe to a stator coil lead connection
terminals, 2.
2. Observe the ohmmeter for continuity.
3. Now switch the positions of the test probes and
observe the ohmmeter for continuity. The
1 2
ohmmeter should indicate continuity in one
direction only. If there is continuity in both
directions or no continuity at all, the rectifier
assembly is defective and needs replaced.
213
4. Using the same procedure described in the three
previous steps, test the diodes between the
negative (--) portion of the diode plate, 1, and the 1
stator lead connections, 2. Again, replace the
rectifier assembly if the diodes test defective.
214
55-184
5. Test each of the three small diodes, 1, by

touching the positive (+) ohmmeter test probe to 1
one end of a diode and the negative (−) test probe
to the opposite end of the diode.
6. Observe the ohmmeter for continuity.
7. Now switch the positions of the test probes and
observe the ohmmeter for continuity. The
ohmmeter should indicate continuity in one
direction only. If there is continuity in both
directions, or no continuity at all, the rectifier
assembly is defective and needs replaced.
215
Alternator Brushes
1. Carefully clean the alternator brushes with a soft,
dry cloth and electrical component cleaner, if
available.
2. Inspect the brushes and brush springs for
corrosion, damage, stretched springs, or a 0.728″ 0.20″ (5mm)
damaged brush holder. If damaged, replace the (18.5mm)
brush assembly.
3. Use a suitable measuring device to measure WEAR LIMIT
brush wear. The minimum brush length is 5 mm NEW USED
(.020 in.). If either brush is worn beyond BRUSH BRUSH
specifications, replace the brush assemblies.
216
Alternator Bearings
1. Inspect the alternator bearings for smooth
operation by spinning the bearing. Replace 2
bearings that are rough and do not rotate 3
smoothly. 1
2. Inspect the bearings for grease leakage between
the bearing seal, 3, and races, 1, and 2.
3. Inspect the inner race, 1, and the outer race, 2,
for signs of spinning in the alternator frame or on
the rotor shaft.
4. Replace bearings that are damaged in any way.
217
55-185
Drive Pulley
1. Inspect the drive pulley for a worn, bent, cracked,
1
or otherwise damaged belt groove, 1.
2. A polished surface in the bottom of the belt
groove indicates a worn pulley.
218
Alternator Frames
2
1. Inspect the bearing housing bores, 1, for scoring,
cracks or evidence that the bearing was spinning
inside the bore.
2. Inspect the frames for cracked or broken
mounting bosses, 2, or any other distortion or
damage.
1
1
2
2
219
Assembly
NOTE: When installing the rear rotor bearing, be
sure that top sleeve used to press the bearing onto
the rotor contacts the inner race of the bearing only. 2
1
1. Install the rear rotor bearing, 1, and spacer onto
the rotor by using a press, 2, and two sleeves,
such as tubing or 15-mm deep sockets, 3. The
bottom sleeve will support the rotor as the top
sleeve presses the rear bearing spacer onto the
rotor.
220
55-186
2. Install the front rotor bearing, 3, and front bearing

retaining plate, 1, into the front alternator frame, 4, 1
and secure using the four (4) retaining screws, 2.
221
3. Install the washer, 2, pulley, 3, spacer, 4, and
front frame, 5, onto the rotor, 6.
4. To install the pulley nut, 1, use an impact wrench
or place the rotor, 6, into a soft jaw vice and use
a wrench to tighten the pulley assembly to the
rotor. 1
6
5
2 3 4
222
55-187
5. Use the following guidelines when soldering

alternator components.
• Clean all terminals to be soldered and
remove excess solder.
• Preheat the soldering iron and use rosin-core
solder to solder terminals and/or wires. To
avoid damage to the rectifier diodes, use a
pair of needle nose pliers to remove excess
heat from the area being soldered. Hold the
pliers just below the solder joint on the
rectifier to remove excess heat.
• Make good, solid, solder joints for best
alternator performance.
• After soldering, quickly cool the solder joint 223
with a damp cloth.
6. Solder the IC regulator, 1, and rectifier, 2,
together. 1 2
10002263
224
7. Solder the stator leads, 1, to the terminals on the
rectifier/regulator assembly, 2. 1 3
10002262
225
55-188
NOTE: Secure the regulator/rectifier assembly to the

rear alternator frame before pressing the stator into 1
the rear frame.
2
8. Secure the regulator/rectifier assembly, 2, to the
rear alternator frame using the three (3) retaining
screws, 1. Manually press the stator assembly
into the rear alternator frame.
10002261
226
9. Install the battery terminal nut, 1, to the rear of the
alternator frame. 1
20002269
227
10. Push the brushes, 1, and springs, 3, into the
brush holder and insert a piece of wire, 2, through
the rear of the alternator frame and into the brush
3
holder to hold the brushes out of the way while
the alternator halves are being assembled.
1
228
55-189
11. Assemble the front alternator frame, 3, and rear

alternator frame, 2, together. Be sure to align the 2 3
scribe marks made when the alternator was
disassembled to insure proper reassembly. Use
the four (4) bolts, 1, to secure the front and rear 1
frames together.
229
Alternator Bench Check
1. Connect the alternator to a testing circuit, as
shown. Set the load resistance to zero (0).
AMMETER SWITCH
NOTE: Alternator rotation direction is clockwise, as A
viewed looking at the pulley.
VOLT- B
L
METER V
2. Slowly increase the alternator rotational speed R LOAD
BATTERY
and observe the voltage reading indicated on the RESISTOR
ALTERNATOR
voltmeter.
3. If the voltage is uncontrolled when increasing
alternator speed and increases above 15.5 volts,
disassemble and check the alternator for
malfunctioning components.
230
1. If the voltage reading is below 15.5 volts, set
alternator’s rotational speed to 5000RPM and
set the load resistance to achieve maximum
output from the alternator.
2. If the amperage value is more than 70% of the
nominal alternator output as described in
alternator specifications, the alternator is consid-
ered to be working satisfactorily.
55-190
Installation
1. Align the alternator with the alternator mounting 2
holes located on the engine block and brackets.
Use the adjusting/mounting bolts, 2, to secure 1
the alternator to the mounting brackets. Be sure
to install the v-belt, 3, into the drive pulley.
2. Connect all wire terminals, 1, to rear of the
alternator.
2
231
3. Adjust the alternator drive belt deflection by
loosening the mounting bolts and moving the
alternator into or away from the engine block.
Belt deflection should be 10 – 15 mm (0.39 – 0.59
in.) when applying 9 – 11 kg. (20 – 25 lb.) of force
between the crank pulley and the alternator
pulley, 1.
232
55-191
TC TRACTOR STARTER MOTOR SPECIFICATIONS

Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Denso Corporation
Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2288000-5120
Current Draw
Under Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500A @ 7.5V
No Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . less than 110 amps
No Load RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4000 RPM
No Load Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5volts
Clutch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overrunning Pinion Clutch
Brush Length
New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15mm
Wear Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12mm
Brush Spring Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 - 3.6 kg (5.9 - 7.8 lb.)
Commutator Diameter
New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35mm
Wear Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34mm
Commutator Insulation Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2 – 0.85 mm
Armature Runout
Commutator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.02 - 0.05 mm
Armature Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.02mm
55-192
STARTER MOTOR TROUBLESHOOTING
PINION SHAFT FAILS TO ADVANCE:

Wiring Open circuit, battery, and switch Repair or replace
terminal connections
Open circuit, fuse Replace fuse
Key switch No contact Repair or replace
Starter motor Sleeve bearing burnt out Repair or replace
Lever broken Replace
Solenoid Plunger movement defective or coil Repair or replace
open or shorted
PINION MOTOR ROTATES BUT NO ROTATION TRANSMITTED TO ENGINE:

Starting motor Clutch defective Replace
Orbital gear or planetary gears Replace
damaged
MOTOR ROTATES BEFORE PINION MESHES WITH RING GEAR:

Starter motor Shift lever damaged Replace
Slip ring defective Replace
Pinion teeth worn Replace
Pinion push out position defective Adjust
Engine Ring gear worn Replace
Solenoid Solenoid defective Replace
55-193
PINION MESHES WITH RING GEAR BUT STARTING

MOTOR FAILS TO TURN:
Wiring Line connecting solenoid to battery Repair or replace
broken or defective ground
Lead wire connecting solenoid to Repair or replace
motor tightened improperly
Starting motor Ball bearing locked Replace
Brush worn Replace
Improper installation Reinstall
Brush spring defective Replace
Commutator dirty Clean
Armature of field coil defective Repair or replace
Field coil-to-brush connection Replace
defective
Solenoid Contact not touching properly Replace
Contact contacting surface Replace
roughened
Battery In discharge state Recharge or replace
MOTOR FAILS TO STOP AFTER ENGINE STARTS AND

KEY SWITCH IS TURNED OFF:
Key switch Switch defective Replace
Solenoid Solenoid defective Replace
55-194
Op. 55 201
STARTING SYSTEM
The starting system consists of a starter motor
equipped with an electromagnetic starter solenoid, a
key switch, a start relay, several safety switches, and
heavy-duty wiring.
COMPONENTS
4 5 6 7
2 3
1
15 8
14
10
13 11
20002284
12
233
1. Reduction Uni Cover Starter Motor Assembly
2. Armature Drive Gear The starter motor features a high-speed motor that
3. Motor/Field Coil Housing (Yoke) utilizes a gear reduction unit, an overrunning pinion
4. Permanent Magnet clutch, 12, and permanent magnets, 4, in a field coil,
5. Field Coil 5, for magnetic field induction. The reduction unit
6. Armature consists of a small drive gear, 2, on the motor
7. Brush Spring armature, 6, which drives an idler gear, 14, in the
8. Brush reduction unit. The idler gear is splined to the gear on
9. Plunger the pinion clutch housing, 12. When the starter
10. Solenoid solenoid, 10, is energized, the solenoid plunger, 9,
11. Return Spring pushes the pinion gear, 13, out, engaging with the
12. Pinion Clutch engine flywheel. The starter motor then is turning the
13. Pinion flywheel, which rotates the engine. The use of the
14. Idler Gear gear reduction unit allows use of the compact,
15. Idler Gear Roller Bearing high-speed motor and provides more torque and
power to turn the engine flywheel. The sliding pinion
mechanism is enclosed, resulting in a more durable
mechanism.
55-195
Starter Solenoid
The starter solenoid is an electromagnetic type 2 3
solenoid that is located on the bottom of the starter 1
motor assembly. The solenoid contains two coils, a
pull-in coil, 1, and a hold-in coil, 2. When the key
switch is turned to the “START” position and the
safety start relay is closed (safety switches closed),
current from the battery will energize the solenoid’s
two coils. With the coils energized, the solenoid
plunger, 4, pushes a spring, 5, which will then push
the pinion gear out to engage the flywheel. At the 4
same time, a set of contacts, 3, on the solenoid
become closed, allowing current to flow to the starter SM463-191 5
motor. Closing the contacts also supplies current to
both ends of the solenoid pull in coil, which makes the 234
coil become non-energized. The hold-in coil
continues to engage the pinion gear with the
flywheel.
Pinion Clutch
To prevent the engine from driving the starter motor 1 3
once the engine is running, the pinion gear is 6
equipped with an overrunning clutch. The clutch will 2
disengage the pinion gear from the rest of the starter
components once the engine has been started and
4
the key switch is in the “START” position. The clutch
consists of an outer gear/shell, 1, a cam with tapered
notches, 2, rollers, 3, roller springs, 6, a splined 5
pinion collar/tube that acts as a clutch hub, 4, and the
pinion shaft, 5. As the starter motor engages and
rotates, the rollers are locked against the pinion
collar with the tension provided by the roller springs.
While the rollers are locked, the clutch assembly is
locked, allowing the pinion gear to rotate the 235
flywheel. When the engine starts, the flywheel moves 1. Clutch Gear - Outer Shell
faster than the starter motor and this causes the 2. Cam
rollers to become unlocked. With the rollers 3. Roller
unlocked, the clutch assembly is unlocked, allowing 4. Spline Tube - Inner (Pinion Collar)
5. Pinion Shaft
the pinion gear and shaft to turn independently of the 6. Roller Spring
starter motor.
The clutch is not serviceable and is replaced as a
complete assembly. 4
2
Once the engine is started and the key switch is
released from the “START” position, the solenoid’s
pull in coil becomes energized, pulling the solenoid
plunger in, which disengages the pinion from the
flywheel.
3
1
SM463-189
236
55-196
Removal
1
the battery.
2. Disconnect the wiring harness connections, 2,
from the starter motor, 1.
3. Remove the two (2) bolts, 3, which secure the
starter assembly, 1, to the tractor engine.
2
3
10998316
237
5 6 7
4 8
3
2
1
16
15
14
10 9
11
13
12
20002285
238
1. Felt Washer 9. Solenoid Housing
2. Armature (with Front Bearing) 10. Return Spring
3. Rear Armature Bearing 11. Steel Ball
4. Motor/Field Coil Housing 12. Pinion Clutch
5. Brush Spring 13. Reduction Unit Housing
6. Brush Holder 14. Idler Gear Roller Bearing
7. Brush Cover 15. Roller
8. Through Bolt 16. Idler Gear
55-197
Disassembly
1. Remove the field coil wire, 3, the solenoid 2
terminal, 4.
2. Remove the long through bolts, 1, securing the
motor assembly, 2 to the gear reduction unit
housing.
19985161
3 1
239
3. Slide the motor assembly, 1, from the gear
reduction unit housing, 2. 1
2
4. Remove the two (2) screws, 1, which secure the
brush cover, 2, to the motor/field coil housing, 3.
240
NOTE: Before removing the brush holder, scribe

aligning marks on the brush holder and the
motor/field coil housing. 1
2
5. Use a suitable pair of pliers to remove the
insulated armature commutator brushes, 1, from
the brush holder, 2.
6. Slide the brush holder, 2, from the armature
commutator, 3.
1
3
241
55-198
7. Remove the armature, 1, from the motor/field coil

housing, 2. The rear armature bearing, 3, is a
3
light press fit and it may be necessary to pull the
armature from the housing, gripping on the front 4
bearing, 4.
1 2
242
8. Use an impact tool, 2, to remove the two (2)
screws, 1, securing the gear reduction cover, 3,
to the starter housing.
2
1
3
20002277/20002309
243
NOTE: The pinion gear, 4, and idler gear with roller
bearings, 3, will be free to fall out when the gear 4 1
reduction unit cover, 1, is removed from the starter
assembly, 2. Use care not to lose any of these pieces.
3
9. Carefully remove the reduction unit cover, 1, from
the starter assembly, 2
SM463-199
244
55-199
10. Pull the pinion clutch assembly, 1, from the

reduction unit cover or the starter motor 1
assembly.
SM463-200
245
11. Remove the steel ball, 1, from the center of the
pinion clutch.
SM463-201
246
NOTE: When removing the idler gear and bearing,
be careful not to lose the bearing rollers contained in
the bearing.
1
12. Remove the idler gear and bearing, 1, and pinion
gear from the reduction unit cover, if they were
not removed when the reduction unit cover and
the starter motor housing was separated.
SM463-202
247
55-200
13. Remove the return spring, 1, from the

electromagnetic solenoid. 1
SM463-204
248
14. Remove the three (3) screws, 1, securing the
solenoid cover, 2, to the starter housing. Pry the
cover from the housing.
2
20002306
249
15. Remove the solenoid plunger and spring
assembly, 1, from the starter housing, 2.
2
1
20002307
250
55-201
MILLED CONDITION
EXCESSIVE WEAR
ON 2 OR 3 TEETH
MILLED TOOTH—
METAL BUILDUP
NORMAL WEAR SMALL WEAR WILL NOT PERMIT
PATTERN PATTERN MILLED GEARS
ENGAGEMENT
251
Inspection 3. Inspect the motor housing, brush cover, gear
1. Inspect the gear splines on the pinion clutch, the reduction unit, and starter housing for damage
pinion, the armature, and the intermediate gear such as cracks, fatigue, wear, etc. Replace any
for damaged or missing splines. Replace any damaged parts.
damaged parts. 4. Inspect the brush terminals, battery terminals,
2. Hold the pinion clutch housing and rotate the and motor terminals for corrosion, loose
pinion. The pinion should rotate smoothly, connections or damage. Repair or replace any
although not necessarily easily, in one direction damaged parts.
only. If the pinion can spin in both directions, the
clutch is defective and needs replaced.
55-202
5. Clean and inspect the solenoid plunger contact

ring, 1, and solenoid contacts, 2. Dirty contacts
or pitting may be cleaned with fine grit sandpaper
or a fine abrasive pad. 1
6. Inspect that all bearings rotate freely when
rotated manually by hand and are not damaged
or have excessive play. Replace any damaged
bearings.
20002308 2
252
7. Inspect the armature windings, 1, for burnt,
broken, or loose connections. 1 2
8. Inspect the commutator contacts, 2, for burnt
segments, indicating an open winding.
20002279
253
9. Use a suitable measuring device to measure the
commutator diameter. The minimum commuta-
tor diameter is 34.0 mm (1.339 in.). If the
commutator is worn beyond these specifications,
replace the armature.
19985170
254
55-203
10. Inspect the mica insulating valleys, 2, between

the commutator contacts, 1, for uneven wear. 2 1
Use a suitable measuring device to check the
distance, 3, between the top of the contact to the
bottom of the insulating valley. The distance
should be 0.5 – 0.8 mm (0.020 – 0.031 in.). If the
distance is not within these specifications or 3
there is uneven wear, the insulating valleys may UNACCEPTABLE
be undercut with a suitable file.
20002267 CORRECT
255
NOTE: If not previously removed, the armature
bearings will need to be removed for this test. 3 1
11. Place the armature, 1, in a set of precision 5

V-blocks, 2, and use a dial indicator, 3, to
measure commutator, 4, runout and shaft, 5,
runout. Commutator runout should not be more
than 0.2 mm (0.008 in.). Shaft runout should not
be more than 0.05 mm (0.002 in.).
2
20002266 4 2
256
NOTE: When measuring the brush length, remove
the brush from the brush support and measure the
middle portion of the brush.
12. Use a suitable measuring device to measure the

length of the four armature brushes. Compare
the measurement of each brush with brush
length specifications. If the brush is not within
specifications or is damaged in any way, replace
the brushes.
257
55-204
13. Test the brush spring tension by connecting a

spring balance to the brush spring and pulling 5.9 lbs.
until the spring moves. Observe the reading
indicated on the spring balance. If the reading is
between 2.7 – 3.6 kg (5.9 – 7.8 lb.), the spring
tension is within specifications. Otherwise,
replace the brush springs. 7.8 lbs.
258
ELECTRICAL TESTING
Armature
2
1. Use a growler, 2, to inspect the armature coil, 1,
for short circuits. Replace if the armature is
shorted.
259
2. Use an ohmmeter to test for continuity in the
armature coil, 1.
3. Touch one ohmmeter test probe to a commutator
contact, 2. Touch the ohmmeter test probe to an 2
adjacent commutator contact.
4. Observe the ohmmeter. Repeat the test on each 1
adjacent commutator contact. Little or no
resistance indicates that there is continuity and
the armature coil is good. High resistance
indicates that the armature is defective and
needs replaced.
20002280
260
55-205
5. If the armature is tested OK, touch one ohmmeter

test probe to a commutator contact, 1. Touch the
other test probe to the armature shaft, 2.
1
2
6. Observe the ohmmeter. A high resistance
reading indicates the armature is good. Little or
no resistance indicates that the armature is
19985173
261
Brush Holder
1. Using an ohmmeter, touch one test probe to the
insulated brush holder, 1, and the other test 1
probe to the brush holder plate, 2.
2. Observe the ohmmeter. Repeat the test for the
opposite insulated brush holder.
3. A reading high resistance indicates no continuity 2
and the brush holder is good. Little or no
resistance indicates that there is continuity and
the brush holder is defective and needs replaced.
262
Field Coil
1. Use an ohmmeter to test the field coil.
2. Touch one ohmmeter test probe to one of the field
coil brushes. Touch the other test probe to the
remaining field coil brush.
3. Observe the ohmmeter. Little or no resistance
indicates continuity and that the field coil is
functioning properly. High resistance indicates
the field coil is defective and needs replaced.
263
55-206
NOTE: Paint on the field coil/motor housing will give

a false reading when testing to see if the field coil is
grounded. Be sure to remove paint from the field
coil/motor housing.
4. If the previous test indicated the field coil was not

defective, touch one ohmmeter test probe to one
of the field coil brushes, 1. Touch the other test
probe to the field coil housing, 2.
5. Observe the ohmmeter. If the reading shows high 1
resistance, indicating no continuity, the field coil 2
is not grounded and is functioning properly. If
there is little or no resistance indicating
continuity, the field coil is defective and needs 264
replaced.
Starter Solenoid
NOTE: The following test should be performed with
the starter assembly partially assembled.
NOTE: If solenoid will not be disassembled after this

test, apply white lithium grease to the armature drive
gear, pinion clutch, idler gear and roller bearings, and
the pinion clutch steel ball and return spring.
1. Install the solenoid plunger and spring assembly,
1, into the starter housing, 2.
2
1
20002307
265
2. Install the solenoid cover and gasket to the
starter housing. Install the three (3) screws, 1,
securing the solenoid cover, 2, and gasket to the
starter housing.
1
2
20002306
266
55-207
3. Install the return spring, 1, into the solenoid.

1
267
4. Install the steel ball, 1, into the center of the
pinion clutch.
268
5. Install the pinion clutch, 5, in the starter housing.
Make sure the rear clutch bearing is completely 4 1
seated in the housing.
6. Grease the idler gear bearing with petroleum jelly
3
and install the gear, 3, and bearing onto the
starter housing. Align the bearing and gear so
that it meshes with the pinion clutch and is
aligned with the hole in the housing for the pin
which the bearing rides on.
7. Install the pinion gear, 4, in the proper recess in 2
the reduction unit cover, 1, as the cover is being
installed onto starter motor housing.
269
55-208
8. Secure the gear reduction cover, 2, with the two

(2) retaining screws, 1. 1
20002277
270
CAUTION
Do not perform this test for more than 3 - 5 3 1
seconds at a time, as damage may occur to the 2
solenoid or other components.
NOTE: Be sure to use test leads that have 14 awg

wire or thicker for this test.
9. Connect a test lead from the positive (+) terminal

of a 12-volt power source to the starter switch
terminal, 1, (spade terminal) of the starter.
SM463-216
10. Use another test lead to connect the negative (−)
terminal of the 12-volt power source to the starter 271
housing, 2.
11. Connect a second negative (--) test lead from the
12-volt power source to the field coil terminal, 3.
This completes the circuit to send current to the
hold-in and pull-in coils of the solenoid.
12. Observe the starter pinion. The solenoid should
have caused the pinion to jump forward when the
third test lead was connected to the field coil
terminal. This indicates the pull-in coil is working
properly.
13. Remove the test lead to the field coil terminal, 3,
and observe the starter pinion. The solenoid 1
3 2
should keep the pinion extended when the third
test lead is removed. This indicates the hold-in
coil is working properly.
14. If the solenoid fails to perform as described,
replace the solenoid assembly.
272
55-209
5 6 7
4 8
3
2
1
16
15
14
10 9
11
13
12
20002285
273
1. Felt Washer 9. Solenoid Housing
2. Armature (with Front Bearing) 10. Return Spring
3. Rear Armature Bearing 11. Steel Ball
4. Motor/Field Coil Housing 12. Pinion Clutch
5. Brush Spring 13. Reduction Unit Housing
6. Brush Holder 14. Idler Gear Roller Bearing
7. Brush Cover 15. Roller
8. Through Bolt 16. Idler Gear
Assembly
NOTE: Use white lithium grease to lubricate parts
indicated. 2
1. Install the solenoid plunger, 1, into the starter

housing, 2.
1
20002307
274
55-210
2. Install the solenoid cover and gasket to the

starter housing. Install the three (3) screws, 1,
securing the solenoid cover, 2, and gasket to the
starter housing.
1
2
20002306
275
3. Grease and install the return spring, 1, into the
solenoid. 1
276
4. Grease and install the steel ball, 1, into the center
of the pinion clutch.
277
55-211
5. Grease and install the pinion clutch, 5, in the

starter housing. Make sure the rear clutch 4 1
bearing is completely seated in the housing.
6. Grease the idler gear bearing and gear and
3
install the gear, 3, and bearing onto the starter
housing. Align the bearing and gear so that it
meshes with the pinion clutch and is aligned with
the hole in the housing for the pin which the
bearing rides on.
7. Install the drive gear, 4, in the proper recess in the 2
reduction unit cover, 1, as the cover is being
installed onto starter motor housing.
278
8. Secure the gear reduction cover, 2, with the two
(2) retaining screws, 1. 1
20002277
279
55-212
9
5 7
10
1
8
4
20002287 2
280
1. Front Armature Bearing 6. Brush
2. Armature 7. Brush Holder
3. Rear Armature Bearing 8. Brush Cover
4. Motor/Field Coil Housing 9. Bolt
5. Brush Spring 10. Through Bolt
9. If removed, install the front and rear bearings, 1, 11. Install the field coil brushes, 6, into the brush
3, onto the armature, 2. holder, 7, by holding the brush springs, 5, away
as the brush is being inserted into the insulated
10. Install the armature, 2, into the motor/field coil
brush holder.
housing, 4. Be sure that the rear bearing, 3, is
properly seated in the motor housing. 12. Install the brush holder, 7, onto the armature
commutator.
NOTE: When installing the field coil brushes, be sure
that the aligning marks made on the brush holder and 13. Secure the brush cover, 8, to the brush holder, 7,
motor/field coil housing will line up when the brush using the two (2) retaining bolts, 9.
holder is installed onto the armature commutator.
55-213
NOTE: Be sure the aligning marks made on the

starter housing and motor/field coil housing line up 1
when installing the motor assembly to the starter 2
assembly.
14. Install the motor assembly, 1, into the starter

assembly, 2.
281
15. Secure the motor assembly, 2, to the starter
assembly using the two (2) long through bolts, 1. 2
1
19985161
282
16. Install the field coil wire, 1, the solenoid terminal,
2.
1
2
283
55-214
No Load Test
NOTE: Before installing the starter motor to the Ammeter
tractor engine, it is recommended that a no load test
be performed on the starter motor. A
Switch
B
CAUTION S
M
Do not operate the starter for than 30 seconds at Voltmeter
Battery V
a time.
1. Connect a battery and switch to the battery

terminal of the starter and the “S” terminal of the
solenoid.
2. Connect an ammeter between the positive (+) 284
battery terminal of the battery and the battery
terminal of the starter solenoid.
3. Connect a voltmeter, after the ammeter, between
the positive (+) lead from the battery and the
negative (--) lead from the battery.
4. Close the switch and record the readings
indicated on the ammeter and voltmeter.
5. Test starter components if any abnormal
operation is noted.
6. Service limits are 11.5 volts, 110 amps maximum
at 4000 RPM.
Installation
2
1. Install the starter motor, 2, to the engine and
secure using the two (2) retaining bolts, 1. Be
sure all ground terminals are connected to the
bottom starter bolt.
2. Connect the tractor wiring harness connections,
to the starter.
battery.
3
1
10998316
285
55-215
55-216
Chapter 1 - Platform
CONTENTS

90 105 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-2
90 100 Rear Hood Side Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-4
90 110 Dash Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-6
90 120 Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-11
90 114 ROPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-30
Fuel Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-34
90 116 Fenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-36
90 115 Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-40
90-1
Op. 90 105
HOOD
Removal
1. Release the hood latch, 1, and open the hood.
1
30997551
1
2. Disconnect the headlight wire harness connec-
tor, 1, from the headlight wire, 2. 2
30997560
2
3. Loosen and remove the four hood mounting
bolts, 1. 1 1
4. Remove the hood from the tractor.
30002461
90-2
Installation
1. Position the hood so that the four mounting holes
in the hood align with the holes in the hood
mounting bracket.
2. Install and tighten the four hood mounting

bolts, 1. 1 1
30002461
4
3. Connect the headlight wire harness connector, 1,
to the headlight wire, 2. 2
4. Close and latch the hood. 1
30997560
90-3
Op. 90 100
REAR HOOD SIDE PANELS
Removal
1. Loosen and remove the two retaining bolts, 1,
that secure the left and right panels together.
2. Open the hood.
10000864
6
3. Loosen the two retaining bolts, 1, on each side of
the firewall, that secure the rear hood side pan-
els, 2.
4. Remove the rear hood side panels.
30002141
90-4
Installation
1. Position the rear hood side panels on the tractor,
aligning the mounting holes with the holes in the
firewall.
2. Install the two retaining bolts, 1, through the fire-
wall and into the rear hood side panels, 2. Tighten
the bolts.
30002141
8
3. Install and tighten the two retaining bolts, 1, that
secure the left and right panels together.
10000864
90-5
Op. 90 110
1 2
DASH CONSOLE 1
Removal
taining screws, 1.
2. Remove the instrument panel, 2, from the dash
console, 3.
3. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness
connector from the instrument panel.
3 TC 35, 40, 45
TC 35D, 40D, 45D
2 1
10998361/10998233
10
4. Remove the two rear hood side panels, 1 and 2.
2
1
10000864
11
90-6
5. Disconnect the wire connector plug from the

headlight switch, 1, the hazard flasher switch, 2,
and the turn indicator switch, 3. 1
10998226
12
6. Remove the cotter pin, 1, and the rivet, 2, from
the throttle lever, 3, and disconnect the throttle
cable, 4, from the throttle lever, 3.
3
2
4
30002405
1
13
90-7
NOTE: Step 7 applies to the TC35, TC40, and TC45

tractors equipped with the 12x12 transmission only. 9
7. Remove the E-clip, 1, from the shuttle gear lever,

2. Remove the retaining ring, 3, from the knuckle, 8
4. Drive the pin, 5, from the knuckle, 4. Remove
the shuttle gear lever, 2, from the dash console,
6. Remove the E-clips, 7, from the clevis pin, 8, 6
on the main gear lever, 9. Remove the clevis pin,
2
8, and pull the main gear lever, 9, out of the dash 7
console, 6.
8. Loosen and remove the six retaining bolts secur- 1
ing the dash console to the firewall.
9. Remove the dash console.
4 5
30002404
14
Installation
1. Position the dash console on the firewall, aligning
the mounting holes.
2. Install the six retaining bolts through the firewall
and into the dash console. Install the fuse panel
and secure with two nuts.
3. Tighten the six retaining bolts.
NOTE: Step 4 applies to the TC35, TC40, and TC45
tractors equipped with the 12x12 transmission only.
4. Install the main gear lever, 9, through the dash

console, 6, and connect to the main shift shaft.
Secure the main gear lever to the main shift shaft
with the clevis pin, 8, and the E-clips, 7. Install the
shuttle gear lever, 2, through the dash console,
6, and connect to the knuckle, 4, on the shuttle
shift shaft. Drive the pin, 5, through the knuckle,
4, and the shuttle gear lever, 2.
90-8
5. Install the throttle cable, 4, on the throttle lever,

3. Secure with the rivet, 2, and the cotter pin, 1.
3
2
4
30002405
1
15
6. Connect the wire connector plugs to the head-
light switch, 1, the hazard flasher switch, 2, and
the turn indicator switch, 3. 1
10998226
16
7. Install the rear hood side panels, 1 and 2.
8. Connect the instrument panel wire harness con-
nector to the instrument panel.
2
1
10000864
17
90-9
9. Install the instrument panel, 2, into the dash con-

sole, 3, and secure with the two retaining 1 2
1
screws, 1.
3 TC 35, 40, 45
TC 35D, 40D, 45D
2 1
10998361/10998233
18
90-10
Op. 90 120
SEAT
Removal -- TC35D, TC40D, TC45D
1. Disconnect the seat safety start switch wire con-
nector, 1, from the seat start safety switch, 2.
1 2
30002404
19
90-11
2. Remove the two springs, 1, from the seat 4. Remove the spring brackets, 5.
base, 2.
5. Lift and remove the seat, 6, and the seat base, 2,
3. Loosen and remove the four nuts, 3, and the four from the platform, 7.
washers, 4.
6 3 4
3
3 5
4
2
1 4
30002406
20
90-12
Disassembly
NOTE: Use rebuild kit #86530936 to rebuild the seat
on the TC35D, TC40D, and TC45D.
1. Remove the seat from the tractor.
30002436
21
2. Place the seat assembly on a bench. Fold the
seat front, and loosen the bolt, 1, in the center of
the swivel base. 1
3. Remove the seat and the swivel base from the
seat pedestal.
30002407
22
4. Lift the fore and aft slide lever, 1, and slide the
seat pedestal, 2, off of the slide base, 3.
1 2
30002408
23
90-13
5. Remove the four nuts, 1, from the carriage bolts.

1
30002409 1
24
6. Remove the slide plate, 1, from the seat pedes-
tal, 2. 1 2 4
7. Turn the weight adjustment knob, 3, clockwise,
until it is all the way in, to reduce the spring ten-
sion on the extension springs,4.
3
30002410
25
WARNING
1
The seat pedestal is under spring tension. The
pedestal must be compressed while removing
the nuts and carriage bolts in step 8.
8. Place the seat pedestal, 1, on the bench with the

bottom side facing up. Remove the nut, 2, from
the carriage bolt, on both sides of the seat base.
30002411
26
90-14
9. Remove the slider stop brackets, 1, and the car-

riage bolts, 2, from the seat pedestal assembly. 2
1
30002412
27
WARNING 1
2
Keep hands and fingers away from the scissors 1
linkage when removing from the slide base. Seri-
ous personal injury could result if extremities are
caught in the scissors linkage.
10. Remove the four bolts, 1, securing the top slide

base, 2. Remove the slide base, 2.
30002413
28
11. Remove the four bolts, 1, from the shaft blocks.
2
12. Remove the shaft blocks, 2, from the scissors
linkage, 3. 2
1
30002414
29
90-15
13. Remove the scissors linkage, 1, from the slide

base, 2. Remove the shaft blocks, 3.
3
30002415
30
14. Remove the four rollers, 1, from the scissors link-
age, 2. 1
30002416
31
15. Drive the roll pin, 1, out of the weight adjustment
knob and shaft assembly, 2. 5 3
16. Turn the adjustment knob, 3, counter clockwise
to relieve any tension on the extension 4
springs, 4.
2
17. Disconnect the extension springs, 4, from the
weight adjust bar, 5.
4
1
30002417
32
90-16
18. Turn the weight adjustment knob and shaft as-

sembly, 1, counter clockwise and remove from 1
the weight adjust bar, 2, and the slide base, 3. 2
4
19. Remove the two thrust races, 4, and the thrust
bearing, 5, from the weight adjust shaft. 3 5
30002418
33
20. Remove the weight adjust nut, 1, and the weight
adjust spacer, 2, from the weight adjust bar, 3. 1
2
30002419
34
21. Remove the three pushnuts, 1, from the linkage
pins. 3
22. Remove the top linkage pin, 2, and roller, 3.
1
1 2
30002420
35
90-17
23. Remove the linkage pivot pin, 1, from the pivot

linkage, 2.
1 2
30002421
36
24. Remove the extension spring, 1, and the collar,
2, from the spring pin, 3. 1
30002422
3
37
25. Remove the pivot linkage, 1, from the spring
pin, 2.
1
2
30002423
38
90-18
26. Remove the remaining extension spring, 1, col-

lar, 2, and spring pin, 3. 1
3
2
30002424
39
Inspection
air dry.
2. Check all parts for damage or excess wear. Re-
pair or replace as necessary.
Assembly
1. Lightly lubricate the spring pin, 3, and the collar, 1
2, with Loctite Anti Seize 767, and install a new
extension spring, 1.
3
2
30002424
40
90-19
2. Install the pivot linkage, 1, onto the spring pin, 2,

and slide the spring pin, 2, through the holes in
the slide base, 3.
1
30002425
2
41
3. Install the remaining collar, 1, and a new exten-
sion spring, 2, onto the spring pin, 3. Install a new 2
pushnut, 4, onto the spring pin, 3.
3
1
4
30002426
42
4. Lightly lubricate the linkage pivot pin, 1, with Anti
Seize 767, and install through the slide base, 2, 3
and the linkage pivot, 3. Secure with a new push-
nut, 4.
2 4
30002427
43
90-20
5. Lightly lubricate the top linkage pin, 1, and install

through the top of the pivot linkage, 2, while
installing a new roller, 3, on the linkage pin, 1. Se-
2 3
cure with a new pushnut, 4.
1
30002428
44
6. Lightly lubricate the new thrust bearing, 1, with
Anti Seize 767, and install along with the two new
thrust races, 2, onto the new adjustment knob 2
and shaft assembly, 3. Insert the assembly
through the hole in the slide base, 4.
1
3
30002418
45
7. Install a new weight adjust nut, 1, into the new
weight adjust bar, 2, and thread the adjustment
knob and shaft assembly, 3, into the weight ad-
just nut, 1.
8. Install a new weight adjust spacer, 4,and drive a
7
3
new roll pin, 5, through the weight adjust shaft.
Connect the extension springs, 7, to the weight 4
adjust bar, 2.
1
7
5
2
30002417
46
90-21
9. Lightly lubricate the four new rollers, 1, and install

onto the scissors linkage, 2. 1
30002416
47
10. Lightly lubricate two new shaft blocks, 1,and
install on the scissors linkage, 2.
11. Install the scissors linkage, 2, onto the slide 2
base, 3.
3
12. Secure the shaft blocks to the slide base, 3, with
two screws, 4, in each side.
4
30002430 1
48
13. Lightly lubricate two new shaft blocks, 1, and
install onto the scissors linkage, 2.
1 1
30002431
49
90-22
14. Install new bumpers, 1, in the top slide base, 2.
30002433
50
15. Install the top slide base, 2, onto the scissors link-
age, and secure with two bolts, 1, on each side. 2 1
1
30002413
51
16. Install new bumpers, 1, in the slide stop brack-
ets, 2. 2
1
30002412
52
90-23
17. Compress the seat pedestal assembly, 1, and

install the slide stop brackets, 2. Secure with the 1
carriage bolts, and nuts.
30002432
53
18. Position the seat pedestal assembly, 1, on the
bench with the bottom side facing up. 3
19. Install the slide plate, 2, onto the seat pedestal
assembly, 1. Secure with four carriage bolts and
nuts, 3.
2
30002434
54
20. Push down on the fore and aft slide lever, 1, and
slide the slide base, 2, onto the slide plate, 3.
2
1
30002435
55
90-24
21. Install the seat swivel base, onto the seat pedes-
tal assembly. Install and tighten the retaining
bolt, 1. 1
22. Install the seat assembly onto the tractor.
30002407
56
90-25
Installation 3. Install the four washers, 4, and the four nuts, 3,

1. Place the seat, 6, and the seat base, 2, on the onto the mounting bolts.
platform, 7, aligning the mounting holes in the 4. Tighten and torque the nuts, 3, to 32.5-41.2 ft.-
seat base with the mounting bolts in the platform. lbs. (44.1-55.9 N⋅m).
2. Install the spring brackets, 5, onto the two rear 5. Attach the two springs, 1, to the spring brackets,
mounting bolts. 5, and the seat base, 2.
6 3 4
3
3 5
4
2
1 4
30002406
57
90-26
6. Connect the seat safety start wire connector, 1,

to the seat safety start switch, 2.
1 2
30002404
58
Removal -- TC35, TC40, TC45

1. Disconnect the seat safety start switch wire con- 1
nector, 1, from the seat start safety switch, 2.
2
30997564
59
90-27
2. Loosen and remove the four nuts, 1, from the

mounting bolts, 2.
3
3. Remove the seat, 3, and the safety belts, 4, from
the seat mounting plate, 5.
2
4
2
1
20002395
1
60
4. Loosen and remove the three mounting bolts, 1,
and the nut, 2, that secure the seat mounting
3
plate, 3, to the lift cover and the transmission 1
cover.
1
20002396
61
90-28
Installation
1. Install the seat mounting plate, 3, to the transmis- 3 1
sion cover, 5, and the lift cover, 4, with the three
mounting bolts, 1, and the nut, 2. Tighten the nut
and bolts.
1
20002396
62
NOTE: Be sure to install the two spacers, 6, on the
front two mounting bolts, between the seat, 3, and
the seat mounting plate, 5. 3
2
2. Install the seat, 3, and the safety belts, 4, onto the
seat mounting plate, 5. Secure with the mounting
bolts, 2, and nuts, 1.
3. Tighten and torque the nuts, 1, to 16.6-21 ft.-lbs.
(22.6-28.4 N⋅m).
4
6 2
1
1
20002395
63
90-29
4. Connect the seat safety start wire connector, 1,

to the seat safety start switch, 2.
1
2
30997564
64
Op. 90 114
ROPS
NOTE: The fuel tank must be removed prior to Fixed
ROPS removal.
Removal
NOTE: Removal procedure is the same for the fixed
ROPS, and the foldable ROPS.

30997556
2. Loosen and remove the retaining bolts and nuts,
1, securing the fuel tank to the ROPS. Flip the 65
seat front, and lift the fuel tank onto the seat base,
temporarily.
3. Loosen and remove the retaining bolt, 1, from the
stabilizer bar, 2. REmove the stabilizer bar, 2,
from the stabilizer bracket. Repeat for the oppo-
site side.
20004155
2
66
90-30
NOTE: Illustration shows location only of attaching

hardware, 1, 2, and 3.
4. Loosen and remove the light bar retaining bolt, 1,

and the fender mounting bolts, 2 and 3. Repeat
for the opposite side. 1
6
5. Loosen and remove the stabilizer bracket retain-
ing bolts, 4, and the stabilizer bracket, 5. Repeat
2
for the opposite side. 3
6. Attach a suitable lifting device to a hoist, and to
the ROPS for support when removing the re- 1
maining bolts.
7. Loosen and remove the retaining bolts, 6, from 2
the ROPS and the lift cover. Remove the ROPS.
3
4
20004156
5
67
Installation
NOTE: Installation procedure is the same for the
fixed ROPS, and the foldable ROPS.
1. Attach a suitable lifting device to a host, and to

the ROPS. Position the ROPS on the tractor
aligning the mounting holes, 1, with the lift cover
holes, 2. Install the mounting bolts, 3. Do not
tighten the bolts at this time.
2. Attach the stabilizer brackets, 4, to the ROPS us-
ing the mounting bolts, 5. Repeat for the opposite
side. Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
NOTE: Illustration shows location only of attaching
hardware, 6 and 7.
90-31
3. Install the fender mounting bolts, 6, and the light

bar retaining bolts, 7. Repeat for the opposite
side. Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
4. Tighten and torque the stabilizer bracket bolts, 5,
to 105 N⋅m (77 ft.-lb.). 7
3
5. Tighten and torque the ROPS to lift cover bolts,
3, to 74 N⋅m (54 ft.-lb.). 6
6. Tighten and torque the fender mounting bolts, 6, 1
and the light bar retaining bolt, 7, to 25 N⋅m (19
ft.-lb.).
7
5
2
20004157
4
68
7. Install the stabilizer, 1, on the stabilizer bracket,
2, and secure with the mounting bolt, 3, and nut.
Tighten and torque the stabilizer bolts to 105 N⋅m
(77 ft.-lb.).
3
20004158 1 2
69
90-32
8. Position the fuel tank, aligning the mounting

holes with the mounting holes on the ROPS.
Install the two mounting bolts, 1, and secure with
nuts. Tighten and torque the fuel tank mounting
bolts to 17 ft.-lb. maximum.
1
30997556
70
WARNING
Do not operate the tractor with the rollover pro-
tective structure folded as a standard operating
mode. A folded ROPS does not provide rollover
protection.
WARNING
Always wear the seat belt when the tractor is
equipped with a ROPS. However, if the ROPS has
been removed from the tractor, or if the ROPS is
in the folded position, the seat belt should not be
used.
90-33
FUEL TANK 5. Loosen and remove the two mounting nuts, 6,

and bolts, 7, from the fuel tank, 8.
Removal
6. Remove the fuel tank, 8, from the tractor.
1. Drain the fuel tank, 8, into a suitable container.
7. Loosen and remove the mounting screws, 9,
2. Remove the fuel line, 1, from the fuel tank fit- from the sending unit cover, 10. Remove the cov-
ting, 2. er, 10.
3. Remove the fuel return line from the tank fit- 8. Loosen and remove the mounting screws, 11,
ting, 3. from the fuel sending unit, 12, and remove the
4. Disconnect the wiring plug, 4, from the fuel send- unit from the fuel tank, 8. Remove and discard
ing unit wire, 5. the fuel sending unit gasket, 13.
9
10
15 5
11 4
6 2
12
8 1
6 3
13
7
20002397
71
90-34
Installation 5. Install the nuts, 6, onto the mounting bolts, 7.

1. Install a new fuel sending unit gasket, 13, and the IMPORTANT: Do not over tighten the fuel tank
fuel sending unit, 12, to the fuel tank, 8. Secure mounting bolts.
with the mounting screws, 11.
2. Install the fuel sending unit cover, 10, and secure 6. Tighten and torque the mounting nuts, 6, to 17 ft.-
with the mounting screws, 9. lbs. MAXIMUM.
3. Position the fuel tank, 8, on the tractor, aligning 7. Connect the wiring plug, 4, to the fuel sending
the mounting holes. unit wire, 5.
4. Install the two mounting bolts, 7, through the sup- 8. Connect the fuel return line to the tank fitting, 3.
port bar, 14, the fuel tank, 8, and the mounting 9. Connect the fuel supply line, 1, to the tank fit-
tabs, 15 on the ROPS. ting, 2.
90-35
Op. 90 116 4. If equipped, remove the loader control valve from

the right fender.
FENDERS
5. Loosen and remove the nuts, 7, the washers, 8,
Removal -- TC35, TC40, TC45 the spacers, 9, and the bolts, 10, from the fend-
1. Loosen and remove the light bar retaining bolts, ers, 5.
1. 6. Loosen and remove the retaining bolts, 11, from
2. Loosen and remove the nuts, 2, and the bolts, 3, the fenders, 5.
that secure the light bars, 4, to the fenders, 5. 7. Remove the fenders, 5, from the tractor.
3. Disconnect the tail light wires, 6, and remove the
light bars, 4, from the tractor.
4
5
10
6
7 3
7
4
9
8
2
8
9
3
11
10
20002398 11 5
72
90-36
Removal -- TC35D, TC40D, TC45D 5. Disconnect the tail light wires, 9, and remove the
1. Remove the control lever knobs from the left and light bars, 7.
right control levers. 6. If equipped, remove the loader control valve from
2. Loosen and remove the three bolts, 1, that se- the right fender, 8.
cure the left control pod, 2, to the left fender, 3, 7. Loosen and remove the nuts, 10, the washers,
and the right control pod, 15, to the right fend- 11, the spacers, 12, and the bolts, 13, from the
er, 8. fenders, 3 and 8.
3. Loosen and remove the light bar retaining 8. Loosen and remove the retaining bolts, 14, from
bolts, 4. the left and right fenders, 3 and 8.
4. Loosen and remove the nuts, 5, and the bolts, 6, 9. Remove the fenders, 3 and 8.
that secure the light bars, 7, to the fenders, 3
and 8.
9 2
15
13
9
7
11
12
11
14
7 6
12
1
10
5
11
3
5
6
13
1
14 8
20002399
73
90-37
Installation -- TC35, TC40, TC45 4. If equipped, install the loader control valve on the
1. Position the fenders, 5, onto the deck and the right fender.
ROPS, aligning the mounting holes. 5. Install the light bars, 4, to the fenders, 5. Secure
2. Install the mounting bolts, 11. Tighten and torque with the bolts, 3, and the nuts, 2.
the bolts to 17-21 ft.-lbs. (23-28 N⋅m) 6. Install the light bars, 4, to the ROPS with the
3. Install the bolts, 10, the spacers, 9, the washers, bolts, 1. Tighten the attaching hardware for the
8, and secure to the ROPS with the nuts, 7. Tight- light bars.
en and torque the nuts to 17-21 ft.-lbs. (23-28 7. Connect the wiring plug, 6, on the left and right
N⋅m) tail lights, to the tail light wiring harness.
4
5
10
6
7 3
7
4
9
8
2
8
9
3
11
10
20002398 11 5
74
90-38
Installation -- TC35D, TC40D, TC45D 5. Install the light bars, 7, to the fenders, 3 and 8.
1. Position the fenders, 3 and 8, onto the deck and Secure with the bolts, 6, and the nuts, 5.
the ROPS, aligning the mounting holes. 6. Install the light bars, 7, to the ROPS with the
2. Install the retaining bolts, 14, to the left and right bolts, 4. Tighten the attaching hardware for the
fenders, 3 and 8. Tighten and torque the bolts, 14 light bars.
to 17-21 ft.-lbs. (23-28 N⋅m) 7. Install the left control pod, 2, onto the left fender,
3. Install the bolts, 13, the spacers, 12, the washers, 3. Secure with the bolts, 1.
11, and secure to the ROPS with the nuts, 10. 8. Install the right control pod, 15, onto the right
Tighten and torque the bolts, 14 to 17-21 ft.-lbs. fender, 8. Secure with the bolts, 1.
(23-28 N⋅m)
9. Connect the wiring plugs, 9, on the left and right
4. If equipped, install the loader control valve on the tail lights to the tail light wiring harness.
right fender.
9 2
15
13
9
7
11
12
11
14
7 6
12
1
10
5
11
3
5
6
13
1
14 8
20002399
75
90-39
Op. 90 115 RIGHT SIDE

DECK 1. Disconnect the brake return spring from the
deck, 8.
Removal -- TC35, TC40, TC45
2. Disconnect the foot throttle return spring, 9, from
LEFT SIDE the linkage, 11.
1. Disconnect the clutch return spring from the 3. Remove the throttle cable, 10, from the link-
deck, 7. age, 11.
2. Loosen and remove the bolts, 1, and the wash- 4. Disconnect the wire harness plug from the park-
ers, 2. ing brake safety switch, 12.
3. Loosen and remove the bolts, 3, and the wash- 5. Loosen and remove the bolts, 13, and the wash-
ers, 4. ers, 14.
4. Loosen and remove the bolts, 5, and the wash- 6. Loosen and remove the bolts, 15, and the wash-
ers, 6. ers, 16.
5. Loosen and remove the bolts, and the washers, 7. Loosen and remove the bolts, and the washers,
securing the fender to the deck, 7. securing the fender to the deck, 8.
6. Remove the wire harness from the underside of 8. Remove the wire harness from the underside of
the deck, 7. the deck, 8.
7. Remove the deck, 7. 9. Remove the deck, 8.
90-40
1
8
7
15
13
10 2
9
2
14 15
16
4
1
11
3
6
5
12
30002400
76
90-41
Removal -- TC35D, TC40D, TC45D 3. Loosen and remove the retaining bolts, 1, and re-
1. Remove the seat from the tractor. move the floor mat, 2, from the deck, 3.
2. Remove the tool box from the left fender. 4. Remove the control pods, 4 and 5, from the
fenders.
1
3
1
20002399
77
90-42
5. Remove the cotter pins, 1, and the retaining pins, 7. Disconnect the wiring harness plug from the
2, from the left side control lever linkage, 3. Cruise Control switch
6. Remove the control lever shaft bolts, 4, and re-
move the levers, 5. Repeat for the right side con-
trol levers.
5
4
30002401
78
90-43
8. Remove the cotter pin, 1, and the washer, 2, from 10. Disconnect the wiring plug from the park brake
the parking brake lever, 3. Remove the parking switch, 8.
brake lever, 3, up through the deck.
11. Disconnect the two brake pedal return springs, 9,
9. Remove the cotter pin, 5, and the washer, 6, from from the deck.
the park brake rod, 7. Remove the return spring,
4, and the park brake rod, 7, from the park brake
linkage.
3
2
1
4
7
6 5
8
30002402
79
90-44
12. Remove the bolts, 1, from the access cover, 2, 15. Remove the four mounting bolts, 11, and the four
and remove the cover, 2, from the deck, 3. washers, 12, from the deck, 3.
13. Remove the hitch pin, 4, from the HPL control 16. Disconnect the wiring harness at any attachment
rod, 5. Remove the HPL control rod, 5, from the points on the underside of the deck, 3.
deck, 3.
17. Loosen and remove the bolts that secure the
14. Loosen and remove the four nuts, 6, washers, 7, fenders to the deck, on both sides if the tractor.
dampers, 8, bushings, 9, and washers, 10.
18. Remove the deck, 3, from the tractor.
2 1
11
12
11
3
11
10
10
9
9
8
10
7
5 9
8 6
7
8
8
7
4 7
6
6
6
30002403
80
90-45
Installation -- TC35, TC40, TC45 RIGHT SIDE

1. Position the deck, 8, on the tractor.
LEFT SIDE
2. Attach the wire harness holders to the underside
1. Position the deck, 7, on the tractor.
of the deck.
2. Attach the wire harness holders to the underside
3. Install the bolts and washers, through the fenders
of the deck.
and into the deck, 8.
4. Install the bolts, 13, and the washers, 14.
and into the deck, 7.
6. Connect the wire harness plug to the parking
brake safety switch, 12.
7. Connect the throttle cable, 10, to the foot throttle
7. Tighten all of the mounting bolts. linkage, 11.
8. Connect the clutch return spring to the deck, 7. 8. Connect the foot throttle return spring, 9, to the
linkage, 11.
9. Connect the brake return spring to the deck, 8.
90-46
1
8
7
15
13
10 2
9
2
14 15
16
4
1
11
3
6
5
12
30002400
81
90-47
Installation -- TC35D, TC40D, TC45D 5. Install the washers, 10, the bushings, 9, the
1. Position the deck, 3, on the tractor. dampers, 8, the washers, 7, and the nuts,
6.Tighten the mounting bolts and nuts.
and into the deck, 3. 6. Install the HPL control rod, 5, through the deck,
3, and connect to the HPL shaft. Secure the HPL
3. Attach the wire harness holders to the underside control rod, 5, to the HPL shaft with the hitch pin,
of the deck. 4.
4. Install the four bolts, 11, and the four washers, 7. Install the access cover, 2, onto the deck, 3, and
12, into the deck, 3. secure with the bolts, 1.
2 1
11
12
11
3
11
10
10
9
9
8
10
7
5 9
8 6
7
8
8
7
4 7
6
6
6
30002403
82
90-48
8. Connect the two brake pedal return springs, 9, to 5. Attach the return spring, 4, to the park brake
the deck. rod, 7.
9. Connect the wiring plug to the park brake safety 11. Install the parking brake lever, 3, down through
switch. the deck, and attach to the park brake linkage.
Secure with a washer, 2, and a cotter pin, 1.
10. Connect the park brake rod, 7, to the park brake
linkage. Secure with a washer, 6, and a cotter pin,
3
2
1
4
7
6 5
8
30002402
83
5
90-49
12. Connect the wiring harness plug to the cruise 14. Attach the linkage to the levers, 5, and secure
control switch. with the retaining pins, 2, and the cotter pins, 1.
Repeat for the opposite side.
13. Install the control levers, 5, on the deck, and se-
cure with the control lever shaft retaining bolts, 4.
Repeat for the opposite side.
5
4
30002401
84
90-50
15. Install the control pods, 4 and 5, onto the fenders. 17. Install the tool box onto the left fender.
16. Install the floor mat, 2, onto the deck, 3, and se- 18. Install the seat onto the tractor.
cure with the retaining bolts, 1.
1
3
1
20002399
85
90-51
90-52

New Holland Tractor TC40 Serv Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

New Holland Tractor TC40 Serv Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SECTION 00 - GENERAL INFORMATION

Chapter 1 - General Information

Section Description Page

Section Description Page

Chapter 2 -- Fuel Systems

Section Description Page

Section Description Page

Chapter 1 -- 12 x 12 Synchronized Shuttle Shift

Section Description Page

Section Description Page

Chapter 1 - 4WD Front Axle, Supersteert and Sensitrackt

Section Description Page

SECTION 27 - DIFFERENTIAL, REAR AXLE

Chapter 1 -- Differential, Rear Axle

Section Description Page

Chapter 1 -- Hydrostatic Transmission

Section Description Page

Chapter 1 -- Power Take-Off (PTO) Systems

Section Description Page

Section Description Page

Chapter 1 -- Hydraulic System

Section Description Page

Section Description Page

Chapter 1 - 2WD Front Axle

Section Description Page

Section Description Page

Section Description Page

Chapter 1 - General Information

Section Description Page

Certain hardware must be tightened to specific

DIESEL FUEL SAFETY FRAME (ROPS)

WHEN YOU SEE THIS SYMBOL

DECALS - TC35, TC40, TC45

WARNING: Pull Only From Drawbar

WARNING: Rotating Fan

WARNING: Start Engine

WARNING: To Jump Start

DANGER: ROPS WARNING: Before Starting

INSTRUCTION DECALS - TC35, TC40, TC45

Position Control Lever

Range Selector Lever

Hyd. Manifold Operation

Power Steering Fluid

Flow Control Valve

Air Cleaner Maintenance New Holland Leaf

Turn Signal Red Reflective Tape

Throttle ROPS Certification

DECALS - TC35D, TC40D, TC45D

WARNING: Pull Only From Drawbar

WARNING: Rotating Fan

WARNING: Before Starting

WARNING: Front-Wheel Drive Usage

WARNING: Start Engine Only

INSTRUCTION DECALS - TC35D, TC40D, TC45D

Front-Wheel Front-Wheel PTO Control PTO Control

Differential Lock Starter Switch Flow Control Valve Engine Oil

Power Steering Fluid

Air Cleaner Maintenance

Turn Signal Red Reflective Tape

Throttle ROPS Certification

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY: New Holland North America, Inc. is continually

Engine Speed Low Range Battery

Hours Recorded Neutral Power Take-off

Engine Water Diesel Fuel Power Take-off